SAM9260
Atmel | SMART ARM-based Embedded MPU
DATASHEET
Description
The Atmel ® | SMART SAM9260 eMPU is based on the integration of an
ARM926EJ-S™ processor with fast ROM and RAM memories and a wide range
of peripherals.
The SAM9260 embeds an Ethernet MAC, one USB Device Port, and a USB Host
controller. It also integrates several standard peripherals, such as the USART,
SPI, TWI, Timer Counters, Synchronous Serial Controller, ADC and MultiMedia
Card Interface.
The SAM9260 is architectured on a 6-layer matrix, allowing a maximum internal
bandwidth of six 32-bit buses. It also features an External Bus Interface capable
of interfacing with a wide range of memory devices.
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Features
2
180 MHz ARM926EJ-S™ ARM® Thumb® Processor
̶ 8 Kbytes Data Cache, 8 Kbytes Instruction Cache, MMU
Memories
̶ 32-bit External Bus Interface supporting 4-bank SDRAM/LPSDR, Static Memories, CompactFlash, SLC NAND
Flash with ECC
̶ Two 4-Kbyte internal SRAM, single-cycle access at system speed
̶ One 32-Kbyte internal ROM, embedding bootstrap routine
Peripherals
̶ ITU-R BT. 601/656 Image Sensor Interface (ISI)
̶ USB Device and USB Host with dedicated On-Chip Transceiver
̶ 10/100 Mbps Ethernet MAC Controller (EMAC)
̶ One High Speed Memory Card Host
̶ Two Master/Slave Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPI)
̶ Two 3-channel 32-bit Timer/Counters (TC)
̶ One Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC)
̶ One Two-wire Interface (TWI)
̶ Four USARTs
̶ Two UARTs
̶ 4-channel 10-bit ADC
System
̶ 90 MHz six 32-bit layer AHB Bus Matrix
̶ 22 Peripheral DMA Channels
̶ Boot from NAND Flash, DataFlash or serial DataFlash
̶ Reset Controller (RSTC) with On-Chip Power-on Reset
̶ Selectable 32.768 kHz Low-Power and 3–20 MHz Main Oscillator
̶ Internal Low-Power 32 kHz RC Oscillator
̶ One PLL for the system and one PLL optimized for USB
̶ Two Programmable External Clock Signals
̶ Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)
̶ Debug Unit (DBGU)
̶ Periodic Interval Timer (PIT)
̶ Watchdog Timer (WDT)
̶ Real-time Timer (RTT)
I/O
̶ Three 32-bit Parallel Input/Output Controllers
̶ 96 Programmable I/O Lines Multiplexed with up to Two Peripheral I/Os
Package
̶ 217-ball LFBGA – 15 x 15 x 1.4 mm, 0.8 mm pitch
̶ 208-pin PQFP – 28 x 28 x 4.1 mm, 0.5 mm pitch
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
1.
SAM9260 Block Diagram
Figure 1-1, “SAM9260 Block Diagram,” on page 4 shows all the features for the 217-LFBGA package. Some
functions are not accessible in the 208-pin PQFP package and the unavailable pins are highlighted in “Multiplexing
on PIO Controller A” on page 29, “Multiplexing on PIO Controller B” on page 30, “Multiplexing on PIO Controller C”
on page 31. The USB Host Port B is not available in the 208-pin package. Table 1-1 defines all the multiplexed and
not multiplexed pins not available in the 208-PQFP package.
Table 1-1.
Unavailable Signals in 208-lead PQFP Package
PIO
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
–
HDPB
–
–
HDMB
–
PA30
SCK2
RXD4
PA31
SCK0
TXD4
PB12
TXD5
ISI_D10
PB13
RXD5
ISI_D11
PC2
AD2
PCK1
PC3
AD3
SPI1_NPCS3
PC12
IRQ0
NCS7
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
3
I_
M
IS CK
I_
IS PC
I_ K
IS D0
I_ –I
V
IS SY SI_
I_ N D7
HS C
YN
C
HD
PA
HD
M
A
HD
P
HD B
M
B
S
BM
IS
L
SE
JT
AG
NT
TDRS
T
TDI
TMO
TC S
RTK
CK
System Controller
TST
JTAG Selection and Boundary Scan
Transceiver Transceiver
FIQ
IRQ0–IRQ2
AIC
DRXD
DTXD
PCK0–PCK1
DBGU
In-Circuit Emulator
PDC
ICache
8 Kbytes
Filter
DCache
8 Kbytes
MMU
FIFO
I
FIFO
DMA
Bus Interface
PLLA
PLLRCA
10/100 Ethernet
MAC
ARM926EJ-S Processor
PMC
Image
Sensor
Interface
USB
OHCI
DMA
DMA
D
PLLB
3–20 MHz
Main Osc.
XIN
XOUT
WDT
6-layer Matrix
PIT
Backup Section
RC Osc. 4 GPBR
OSCSEL
XIN32
XOUT32
32 kHz
XTAL Osc.
SHDN
WKUP
VDDBU
POR
VDDCORE
POR
RTT
PIOA
SHDWC
Fast SRAM
4 Kbytes
ROM
32 Kbytes
PIOB
Fast SRAM
4 Kbytes
Peripheral
Bridge
PIOC
EBI
22-channel
Peripheral
DMA
CompactFlash
NAND Flash
RSTC
NRST
APB
SDRAM
Controller
PDC
MCI
PDC
PDC
TWI
USART0
USART1
USART2
USART3
USART4
USART5
SPI0
SPI1
PDC
TC0
TC1
TC2
TC3
TC4
TC5
SSC
PDC
DPRAM
4-channel
10-bit ADC
USB
Device
SPI0_, SPI1_
DD
DDM
P
NP
NPCS
NPCS3
NPCS2
C 1
SP S0
M CK
O
TC
M SI
IS
L
O
TI K0
O –
TI A0–TCL
O T K
TC B0 IO 2
L –T A
TI K3 IO 2
O – B
TI A3 TC 2
O – LK
B3 TI 5
–T OA
IO 5
B5
TK
TF
TD
RD
RF
R
AD K
0–
AD
AD
3
TR
IG
AD
VR
EF
VD
DA
NA
G
ND
AN
A
T
CT TWWD
RTS0– CK
C
SC S0– TS
R
RX K0– TS3
S 3
TXD0– CK
D0 RX 3
–T D
X 5
DSD5
DCR0
D
R0
DT I0
R0
–M
C
M DB
A0 CC 3
–M DB
C
M DA
CC 3
D
M A
CC
K
B0
CD
M
Static
Memory
Controller
ECC
Controller
Transceiver
CD
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
SLAVE
ET
ETXC
K
ECXE -E
N R
ERRS -E XC
T
ERXE -EC XE K
R O
ET X0 –E L R
–
M X0 ER RX
D
D –
M C ET X3 V
DI
X3
F1 O
00
SAM9260 Block Diagram
MASTER
M
4
Figure 1-1.
D0–D15
A0/NBS0
A1/NBS2/NWR2
A2–A15, A18–A20
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
NCS0
NCS1/SDCS
NRD/CFOE
NWR0/NWE/CFWE
NWR1/NBS1/CFIOR
NWR3/NBS3/CFIOW
SDCK, SDCKE
RAS, CAS
SDWE, SDA10
NANDOE, NANDWE
A21/NANDALE
A22/NANDCLE
D16–D31
NWAIT
A23–A24
NCS4/CFCS0
NCS5/CFCS1
A25/CFRNW
CFCE1–CFCE2
NCS2, NCS6, NCS7
NCS3/NANDCS
2.
Signal Description
Table 2-1.
Signal Name
Signal Description List
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Power Supplies
VDDIOM
EBI I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
1.65–1.95 V or 3.0–3.6 V
VDDIOP0
Peripherals I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
3.0–3.6 V
VDDIOP1
Peripherals I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
1.65–3.6 V
VDDBU
Backup I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
1.65–1.95 V
VDDANA
Analog Power Supply
Power
3.0–3.6 V
VDDPLL
PLL Power Supply
Power
1.65–1.95 V
VDDCORE
Core Chip Power Supply
Power
1.65–1.95 V
GND
Ground
Ground
GNDPLL
PLL and Oscillator Ground
Ground
GNDANA
Analog Ground
Ground
GNDBU
Backup Ground
Ground
Clocks, Oscillators and PLLs
XIN
Main Oscillator Input
Input
XOUT
Main Oscillator Output
XIN32
Slow Clock Oscillator Input
XOUT32
Slow Clock Oscillator Output
OSCSEL
Slow Clock Oscillator Selection
Input
PLLRCA
PLL A Filter
Input
PCK0–PCK1
Programmable Clock Output
Output
Input
Output
Accepts between 0V and VDDBU
Output
Shutdown, Wakeup Logic
SHDN
Shutdown Control
WKUP
Wake-up Input
Output
Driven at 0V only. Do not tie over
VDDBU.
Input
Accepts between 0V and VDDBU
ICE and JTAG
NTRST
Test Reset Signal
Input
Low
Pull-up resistor
TCK
Test Clock
Input
No pull-up resistor
TDI
Test Data In
Input
No pull-up resistor
TDO
Test Data Out
TMS
Test Mode Select
Input
No pull-up resistor
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Input
Pull-down resistor. Accepts
between 0V and VDDBU.
RTCK
Return Test Clock
Output
Output
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
5
Table 2-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
I/O
Low
Comments
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Mode Select
Input
BMS
Boot Mode Select
Input
Pull-up resistor
Pull-down resistor. Accepts
between 0V and VDDBU.
No pull-up resistor
BMS = 0 when tied to GND
BMS = 1 when tied to VDDIOP0
Debug Unit - DBGU
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
Advanced Interrupt Controller - AIC
IRQ0–IRQ2
External Interrupt Inputs
Input
FIQ
Fast Interrupt Input
Input
PIO Controller - PIOA / PIOB / PIOC
PA0–PA31
Parallel IO Controller A
I/O
Pulled-up input at reset
PB0–PB31
Parallel IO Controller B
I/O
Pulled-up input at reset
PC0–PC31
Parallel IO Controller C
I/O
Pulled-up input at reset
External Bus Interface - EBI
D0–D31
Data Bus
I/O
A0–A25
Address Bus
NWAIT
External Wait Signal
Pulled-up input at reset
Output
Input
0 at reset
Low
Static Memory Controller - SMC
NCS0–NCS7
Chip Select Lines
Output
Low
NWR0–NWR3
Write Signal
Output
Low
NRD
Read Signal
Output
Low
NWE
Write Enable
Output
Low
NBS0–NBS3
Byte Mask Signal
Output
Low
CompactFlash Support
CFCE1–CFCE2
CompactFlash Chip Enable
Output
Low
CFOE
CompactFlash Output Enable
Output
Low
CFWE
CompactFlash Write Enable
Output
Low
CFIOR
CompactFlash IO Read
Output
Low
CFIOW
CompactFlash IO Write
Output
Low
CFRNW
CompactFlash Read Not Write
Output
CFCS0–CFCS1
CompactFlash Chip Select Lines
Output
6
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Low
Table 2-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
NAND Flash Support
NANDCS
NAND Flash Chip Select
Output
Low
NANDOE
NAND Flash Output Enable
Output
Low
NANDWE
NAND Flash Write Enable
Output
Low
NANDALE
NAND Flash Address Latch Enable
Output
Low
NANDCLE
NAND Flash Command Latch Enable
Output
Low
SDRAM Controller - SDRAMC
SDCK
SDRAM Clock
Output
SDCKE
SDRAM Clock Enable
Output
High
SDCS
SDRAM Controller Chip Select
Output
Low
BA0–BA1
Bank Select
Output
SDWE
SDRAM Write Enable
Output
Low
RAS–CAS
Row and Column Signal
Output
Low
SDA10
SDRAM Address 10 Line
Output
MultiMedia Card Interface - MCI
MCCK
MultiMedia Card Clock
Output
MCCDA
MultiMedia Card Slot A Command
I/O
MCDA0–MCDA3
MultiMedia Card Slot A Data
I/O
MCCDB
MultiMedia Card Slot B Command
I/O
MCDB0–MCDB3
MultiMedia Card Slot B Data
I/O
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter - USARTx
SCKx
USARTx Serial Clock
I/O
TXDx
USARTx Transmit Data
I/O
RXDx
USARTx Receive Data
Input
RTSx
USARTx Request To Send
CTSx
USARTx Clear To Send
DTR0
USART0 Data Terminal Ready
DSR0
USART0 Data Set Ready
Input
DCD0
USART0 Data Carrier Detect
Input
RI0
USART0 Ring Indicator
Input
Output
Input
Output
Synchronous Serial Controller - SSC
TD
SSC Transmit Data
Output
RD
SSC Receive Data
Input
TK
SSC Transmit Clock
I/O
RK
SSC Receive Clock
I/O
TF
SSC Transmit Frame Sync
I/O
RF
SSC Receive Frame Sync
I/O
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
7
Table 2-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Timer/Counter - TCx
TCLKx
TC Channel x External Clock Input
Input
TIOAx
TC Channel x I/O Line A
I/O
TIOBx
TC Channel x I/O Line B
I/O
Serial Peripheral Interface - SPIx_
SPIx_MISO
Master In Slave Out
I/O
SPIx_MOSI
Master Out Slave In
I/O
SPIx_SPCK
SPI Serial Clock
I/O
SPIx_NPCS0
SPI Peripheral Chip Select 0
I/O
Low
SPIx_NPCS1–SPIx_NPCS3
SPI Peripheral Chip Select
Output
Low
Two-wire Interface - TWI
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data
I/O
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock
I/O
USB Host Port - UHP
HDPA
USB Host Port A Data +
Analog
HDMA
USB Host Port A Data -
Analog
HDPB
USB Host Port B Data +
Analog
HDMB
USB Host Port B Data +
Analog
USB Device Port - UDP
DDM
USB Device Port Data -
Analog
DDP
USB Device Port Data +
Analog
Ethernet 10/100 - EMAC
ETXCK
Transmit Clock or Reference Clock
Input
MII only, REFCK in RMII
ERXCK
Receive Clock
Input
MII only
ETXEN
Transmit Enable
Output
ETX0–ETX3
Transmit Data
Output
ETX0–ETX1 only in RMII
ETXER
Transmit Coding Error
Output
MII only
ERXDV
Receive Data Valid
Input
RXDV in MII, CRSDV in RMII
ERX0–ERX3
Receive Data
Input
ERX0–ERX1 only in RMII
ERXER
Receive Error
Input
ECRS
Carrier Sense and Data Valid
Input
MII only
ECOL
Collision Detect
Input
MII only
EMDC
Management Data Clock
EMDIO
Management Data Input/Output
EF100
Force 100 Mbit/s
8
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Output
I/O
Output
High
Table 2-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Image Sensor Interface - ISI
ISI_D0–ISI_D11
Image Sensor Data
Input
ISI_MCK
Image Sensor Reference Clock
ISI_HSYNC
Image Sensor Horizontal Synchro
Input
ISI_VSYNC
Image Sensor Vertical Synchro
Input
ISI_PCK
Image Sensor Data clock
Input
Output
Analog-to-Digital Converter - ADC
AD0–AD3
Analog Inputs
Analog
ADVREF
Analog Positive Reference
Analog
ADTRG
ADC Trigger
Digital pulled-up inputs at reset
Input
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9
3.
Package and Pinout
The SAM9260 is available in two Green-compliant packages:
208-pin PQFP (0.5 mm pitch)
217-ball LFBGA (0.8 mm ball pitch)
A detailed mechanical description and the orientation of the packages are given in Section 40. “SAM9260
Mechanical Characteristics”.
3.1
208-pin PQFP Pinout
Table 3-1.
Pinout for 208-pin PQFP Package
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
1
PA24
53
GND
105
RAS
157
ADVREF
2
PA25
54
DDM
106
D0
158
PC0
3
PA26
55
DDP
107
D1
159
PC1
4
PA27
56
PC13
108
D2
160
VDDANA
5
VDDIOP0
57
PC11
109
D3
161
PB10
6
GND
58
PC10
110
D4
162
PB11
7
PA28
59
PC14
111
D5
163
PB20
8
PA29
60
PC9
112
D6
164
PB21
9
PB0
61
PC8
113
GND
165
PB22
10
PB1
62
PC4
114
VDDIOM
166
PB23
11
PB2
63
PC6
115
SDCK
167
PB24
12
PB3
64
PC7
116
SDWE
168
PB25
13
VDDIOP0
65
VDDIOM
117
SDCKE
169
VDDIOP1
14
GND
66
GND
118
D7
170
GND
15
PB4
67
PC5
119
D8
171
PB26
16
PB5
68
NCS0
120
D9
172
PB27
17
PB6
69
CFOE/NRD
121
D10
173
GND
18
PB7
70
CFWE/NWE/NWR0
122
D11
174
VDDCORE
19
PB8
71
NANDOE
123
D12
175
PB28
20
PB9
72
NANDWE
124
D13
176
PB29
21
PB14
73
A22
125
D14
177
PB30
22
PB15
74
A21
126
D15
178
PB31
23
PB16
75
A20
127
PC15
179
PA0
24
VDDIOP0
76
A19
128
PC16
180
PA1
25
GND
77
VDDCORE
129
PC17
181
PA2
26
PB17
78
GND
130
PC18
182
PA3
27
PB18
79
A18
131
PC19
183
PA4
28
PB19
80
BA1/A17
132
VDDIOM
184
PA5
29
TDO
81
BA0/A16
133
GND
185
PA6
10
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 3-1.
Pinout for 208-pin PQFP Package (Continued)
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
30
TDI
82
A15
134
PC20
186
PA7
31
TMS
83
A14
135
PC21
187
VDDIOP0
32
VDDIOP0
84
A13
136
PC22
188
GND
33
GND
85
A12
137
PC23
189
PA8
34
TCK
86
A11
138
PC24
190
PA9
35
NTRST
87
A10
139
PC25
191
PA10
36
NRST
88
A9
140
PC26
192
PA11
37
RTCK
89
A8
141
PC27
193
PA12
38
VDDCORE
90
VDDIOM
142
PC28
194
PA13
39
GND
91
GND
143
PC29
195
PA14
40
BMS
92
A7
144
PC30
196
PA15
41
OSCSEL
93
A6
145
PC31
197
PA16
42
TST
94
A5
146
GND
198
PA17
43
JTAGSEL
95
A4
147
VDDCORE
199
VDDIOP0
44
GNDBU
96
A3
148
VDDPLL
200
GND
45
XOUT32
97
A2
149
XIN
201
PA18
46
XIN32
98
NWR2/NBS2/A1
150
XOUT
202
PA19
47
VDDBU
99
NBS0/A0
151
GNDPLL
203
VDDCORE
48
WKUP
100
SDA10
152
NC
204
GND
49
SHDN
101
CFIOW/NBS3/NWR3
153
GNDPLL
205
PA20
50
HDMA
102
CFIOR/NBS1/NWR1
154
PLLRCA
206
PA21
51
HDPA
103
SDCS/NCS1
155
VDDPLL
207
PA22
52
VDDIOP0
104
CAS
156
GNDANA
208
PA23
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
11
3.2
217-ball LFBGA Package
A detailed mechanical description and the orientation of the 217-ball LFBGA package is given in Section 40.
“SAM9260 Mechanical Characteristics”.
3.3
217-ball LFBGA Pinout
Table 3-2.
Pinout for 217-ball LFBGA Package
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
A1
CFIOW/NBS3/NWR3
D5
A5
J14
TDO
P17
PB5
A2
NBS0/A0
D6
GND
J15
PB19
R1
NC
A3
NWR2/NBS2/A1
D7
A10
J16
TDI
R2
GNDANA
A4
A6
D8
GND
J17
PB16
R3
PC29
A5
A8
D9
VDDCORE
K1
PC24
R4
VDDANA
A6
A11
D10
GND
K2
PC20
R5
PB12
A7
A13
D11
VDDIOM
K3
D15
R6
PB23
A8
BA0/A16
D12
GND
K4
PC21
R7
GND
A9
A18
D13
DDM
K8
GND
R8
PB26
A10
A21
D14
HDPB
K9
GND
R9
PB28
A11
A22
D15
NC
K10
GND
R10
PA0
A12
CFWE/NWE/NWR0
D16
VDDBU
K14
PB4
R11
PA4
A13
CFOE/NRD
D17
XIN32
K15
PB17
R12
PA5
A14
NCS0
E1
D10
K16
GND
R13
PA10
A15
PC5
E2
D5
K17
PB15
R14
PA21
A16
PC6
E3
D3
L1
GND
R15
PA23
A17
PC4
E4
D4
L2
PC26
R16
PA24
B1
SDCK
E14
HDPA
L3
PC25
R17
PA29
B2
CFIOR/NBS1/NWR1
E15
HDMA
L4
VDDIOP0
T1
PLLRCA
B3
SDCS/NCS1
E16
GNDBU
L14
PA28
T2
GNDPLL
B4
SDA10
E17
XOUT32
L15
PB9
T3
PC0
B5
A3
F1
D13
L16
PB8
T4
PC1
B6
A7
F2
SDWE
L17
PB14
T5
PB10
B7
A12
F3
D6
M1
VDDCORE
T6
PB22
B8
A15
F4
GND
M2
PC31
T7
GND
B9
A20
F14
OSCSEL
M3
GND
T8
PB29
B10
NANDWE
F15
BMS
M4
PC22
T9
PA2
B11
PC7
F16
JTAGSEL
M14
PB1
T10
PA6
B12
PC10
F17
TST
M15
PB2
T11
PA8
B13
PC13
G1
PC15
M16
PB3
T12
PA11
B14
PC11
G2
D7
M17
PB7
T13
VDDCORE
B15
PC14
G3
SDCKE
N1
XIN
T14
PA20
12
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 3-2.
Pinout for 217-ball LFBGA Package (Continued)
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
B16
PC8
G4
VDDIOM
N2
VDDPLL
T15
GND
B17
WKUP
G14
GND
N3
PC23
T16
PA22
C1
D8
G15
NRST
N4
PC27
T17
PA27
C2
D1
G16
RTCK
N14
PA31
U1
GNDPLL
C3
CAS
G17
TMS
N15
PA30
U2
ADVREF
C4
A2
H1
PC18
N16
PB0
U3
PC2
C5
A4
H2
D14
N17
PB6
U4
PC3
C6
A9
H3
D12
P1
XOUT
U5
PB20
C7
A14
H4
D11
P2
VDDPLL
U6
PB21
C8
BA1/A17
H8
GND
P3
PC30
U7
PB25
C9
A19
H9
GND
P4
PC28
U8
PB27
C10
NANDOE
H10
GND
P5
PB11
U9
PA12
C11
PC9
H14
VDDCORE
P6
PB13
U10
PA13
C12
PC12
H15
TCK
P7
PB24
U11
PA14
C13
DDP
H16
NTRST
P8
VDDIOP1
U12
PA15
C14
HDMB
H17
PB18
P9
PB30
U13
PA19
C15
NC
J1
PC19
P10
PB31
U14
PA17
C16
VDDIOP0
J2
PC17
P11
PA1
U15
PA16
C17
SHDN
J3
VDDIOM
P12
PA3
U16
PA18
D1
D9
J4
PC16
P13
PA7
U17
VDDIOP0
D2
D2
J8
GND
P14
PA9
D3
RAS
J9
GND
P15
PA26
D4
D0
J10
GND
P16
PA25
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
13
4.
Power Considerations
4.1
Power Supplies
The SAM9260 devices have several types of power supply pins. Some supply pins share common ground (GND)
pins whereas others have separate grounds. See Table 4-1.
Table 4-1.
Pin(s)
SAM9260 Power Supply Pins
Item(s) powered
Range
Typical
1.65–1.95 V
1.8V
1.65–1.95 V(1)
1.8V
Ground
Core, including the processor
VDDCORE
Embedded memories
Peripherals
VDDIOM
VDDIOP0
VDDIOP1
VDDBU
VDDPLL
VDDANA
Note:
1.
External Bus Interface I/O lines
Peripheral I/O lines
USB transceivers
Peripherals I/O lines involving the Image Sensor Interface
Slow Clock oscillator
Part of the System Controller
Main oscillator
PLL cells
Analog-to-Digital Converter
3.0–3.6 V
(1)
3.3V
GND
3.0–3.6 V
3.3V
1.65–3.6 V
1.8V
2.5V
3.3V
1.65–1.95 V
1.8V
GNDBU
1.65–1.95 V
1.8V
GNDPLL
3.0–3.6 V
3.3V
GNDANA
Desired voltage range selectable by software
The power supplies VDDIOM, VDDIOP0 and VDDIOP1 are identified in the pinout table and the multiplexing
tables. These supplies enable the user to power the device differently for interfacing with memories and for
interfacing with peripherals.
4.2
Power Sequence Requirements
The SAM9260 board design must comply with the guidelines described in Section 4.2.1 “Power-up Sequence” and
Section 4.2.2 “Power-down Sequence” to guarantee reliable operation of the device. Any deviation from these
sequences may lead to preventing the device from booting.
14
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
4.2.1
Power-up Sequence
Figure 4-1.
VDDCORE and VVDDIO Constraints at Startup
VDD (V)
VDDIO
VDDIOtyp
VDDIO > Voh
Voh
VDDCORE
VDDCOREtyp
Vih
VT+
tRST
T1
t
T2
Core Supply POR output
SLCK
VDDCORE and VDDBU are controlled by internal POR (Power On Reset) to guarantee that these power sources
reach their target values prior to the release of POR.
4.2.1.1
VDDBU is Continuously Powered (used with a battery)
VDDIOM, VDDIOP0 and VDDIOP1 must NOT be powered until VDDCORE has reached a level superior to
VT+.
VDDIOP0 must be ≥ VIH (refer to Table 39-2 “DC Characteristics” for more details) within (tRST + T1) after
VDDCORE reached VT+.
VDDIOM must reach VOH (refer to Table 39-2 “DC Characteristics” for more details) within (tRST + T1 + T2)
after VDDCORE has reached VT+.
̶
tRST is a POR characteristic
T1 = 3 × tSLCK
̶
T2 = 16 × tSLCK
̶
The tSLCK min (22 µs) is obtained for the maximum frequency of the internal RC oscillator (44 kHz).
̶
4.2.1.2
tRST = 100 µs
̶
T1 = 66 µs
̶
T2 = 352 µs
VDDBU is not Continuously Powered (no backup features used)
If VDDBU is not used with a battery, the power sequence can be less constrained. The user can power
VDDCORE, then VDDIOM, VDDIOP0 and VDDIOP1, with VDDBU following last in the sequence, thus ensuring
that BMS is correctly sampled.
4.2.2
Power-down Sequence
Switch-off the VDDIOM, VDDIOP0 and VDDIOP1 power supply prior to or at the same time as VDDCORE.
No power-up or power-down restrictions apply to VDDBU, VDDPLL and VDDANA.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
15
4.3
Programmable I/O Lines Power Supplies
The power supplies pins VDDIOM accept two voltage ranges. This allows the device to reach its maximum speed
either out of 1.8V or 3.3V external memories.
The voltage ranges are determined by programming registers in the Chip Configuration registers located in
Section 17.6 “Bus Matrix User Interface”.
At reset, the selected voltage defaults to 3.3V nominal, and power supply pins can accept either 1.8V or 3.3V. The
device cannot reach its maximum speed if the voltage supplied to the pins is 1.8V only. The user must program the
EBI voltage range before getting the device out of its Slow Clock Mode.
16
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
5.
I/O Line Considerations
5.1
JTAG Port Pins
TMS, TDI and TCK are Schmitt trigger inputs and have no pull-up resistors.
TDO and RTCK are outputs, driven at up to VDDIOP0, and have no pull-up resistors.
The JTAGSEL pin is used to select the JTAG boundary scan when asserted at a high level (tied to VDDBU). It
integrates a permanent pull-down resistor of about 15 kΩ to GNDBU, so that it can be left unconnected for normal
operations.
The NTRST signal is described in Section 5.3.
All the JTAG signals are supplied with VDDIOP0.
5.2
Test Pin
The TST pin is used for manufacturing test purposes when asserted high. It integrates a permanent pull-down
resistor of about 15 kΩ to GNDBU, so that it can be left unconnected for normal operations. Driving this line at a
high level leads to unpredictable results.
This pin is supplied with VDDBU.
5.3
Reset Pins
NRST is a bidirectional with an open-drain output integrating a non-programmable pull-up resistor. It can be driven
with voltage at up to VDDIOP0.
NTRST is an input which allows reset of the JTAG Test Access port. It has no action on the processor.
As the product integrates power-on reset cells, which manages the processor and the JTAG reset, the NRST and
NTRST pins can be left unconnected.
The NRST and NTRST pins both integrate a permanent pull-up resistor to VDDIOP0. Its value can be found in
Table 39-2 “DC Characteristics”.
The NRST signal is inserted in the Boundary Scan.
5.4
PIO Controllers
All the I/O lines managed by the PIO Controllers integrate a programmable pull-up resistor. Refer to Section 39.2
“DC Characteristics” for more information. Programming of this pull-up resistor is performed independently for
each I/O line through the PIO Controllers.
After reset, all the I/O lines default as inputs with pull-up resistors enabled, except those which are multiplexed with
the External Bus Interface signals and that must be enabled as Peripheral at reset. This is explicitly indicated in the
column “Reset State” of the PIO Controller multiplexing tables.
5.5
I/O Line Drive Levels
The PIO lines are high-drive current capable. Each of these I/O lines can drive up to 16 mA permanently except
PC4 to PC31 that are VDDIOM powered.
5.6
Shutdown Logic Pins
The SHDN pin is a tri-state output pin, which is driven by the Shutdown Controller. There is no internal pull-up. An
external pull-up tied to VDDBU is needed and its value must be higher than 1 MΩ. The resistor value is calculated
according to the regulator enable implementation and the SHDN level.
The pin WKUP is an input-only. It can accept voltages only between 0V and VDDBU.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17
5.7
Slow Clock Selection
The SAM9260 slow clock can be generated either by an external 32.768 kHz crystal or the on-chip RC oscillator.
Table 5-1 defines the states for OSCSEL signal.
Table 5-1.
Slow Clock Selection
OSCSEL
Slow Clock
Startup Time
0
Internal RC
240 µs
1
External 32.768 kHz
1200 ms
The startup counter delay for the slow clock oscillator depends on the OSCSEL signal. The 32.768 kHz startup
delay is 1200 ms whereas it is 240 µs for the internal RC oscillator (refer to Table 5-1). The pin OSCSEL must be
tied either to GND or VDDBU for correct operation of the device.
18
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
6.
Memories
Figure 6-1.
SAM9260 Memory Mapping
Internal Memory Mapping
Address Memory Space
0x0000 0000
Notes:
1. Can be ROM, EBI_NCS0 or SRAM
depending on BMS and REMAP
0x0000 0000
Boot Memory (1)
Internal Memories
256 Mbytes
Reserved
256 Mbytes
0x20 0000
SRAM0
Reserved
EBI
Chip Select 1/
SDRAMC
0x30 0000
256 Mbytes
SRAM1
Reserved
256 Mbytes
0x50 4000
EBI
Chip Select 3/
NANDFlash
256 Mbytes
0x0FFF FFFF
EBI
Chip Select 4/
Compact Flash
Slot 0
256 Mbytes
EBI
Chip Select 5/
Compact Flash
Slot 1
256 Mbytes
0x3FFF FFFF
0x4000 0000
0x6FFF FFFF
0x7000 0000
4 Kbytes
0x30 1000
0x50 0000
EBI
Chip Select 2
0x5FFF FFFF
0x6000 0000
4 Kbytes
0x20 1000
0x1FFF FFFF
0x2000 0000
0x4FFF FFFF
0x5000 0000
32 Kbytes
0x10 8000
EBI
Chip Select 0
0x2FFF FFFF
0x3000 0000
0x10 0000
ROM
0x0FFF FFFF
0x1000 0000
UHP
16 Kbytes
Reserved
Peripheral Mapping
0xF000 0000
System Controller Mapping
Reserved
0xFFFA 0000
EBI
Chip Select 6
256 Mbytes
0x7FFF FFFF
0x8000 0000
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF C000
UDP
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF E800
MCI
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF EA00
TWI
16 Kbytes
TCO, TC1, TC2
Reserved
0xFFFA 4000
0xFFFA 8000
EBI
Chip Select 7
256 Mbytes
0xFFFA C000
0x8FFF FFFF
0x9000 0000
USART0
16 Kbytes
0xFFFB 4000
USART1
16 Kbytes
USART2
16 Kbytes
SSC
16 Kbytes
ISI
16 Kbytes
EMAC
16 Kbytes
SPI0
16 Kbytes
0xFFFC C000
512 bytes
AIC
512 bytes
DBGU
512 bytes
PIOA
512 bytes
PIOB
512 bytes
SPI1
16 Kbytes
USART3
16 Kbytes
PIOC
512 bytes
0xFFFF F800
0xFFFD 0000
0xFFFF FA00
Reserved
0xFFFD 4000
USART4
0xFFFD 8000
USART5
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF FC00
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF FD00
0xFFFF FD10
0xFFFD C000
TC3, TC4, TC5
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF FD20
0xFFFE 0000
ADC
0xFFFF FD30
16 Kbytes
0xFFFF FD40
0xFFFE 4000
0xFFFF FD50
0xFFFF FD60
Reserved
0xFFFF C000
System Controller
0xFFFF FFFF
MATRIX
0xFFFF F600
0xFFFC 8000
0xFFFF FFFF
512 bytes
0xFFFF F400
0xFFFC 4000
256 Mbytes
SMC
0xFFFF F200
0xFFFC 0000
Internal Peripherals
512 bytes
0xFFFF F000
0xFFFB C000
0xEFFF FFFF
0xF000 0000
SDRAMC
0xFFFF EE00
0xFFFB 8000
1518 Mbytes
512 bytes
0xFFFF EC00
0xFFFB 0000
Undefined
(Abort)
ECC
16 Kbytes
PMC
256 bytes
RSTC
16 bytes
SHDWC
16 bytes
RTT
16 bytes
PIT
16 bytes
WDT
16 bytes
GPBR
16 bytes
Reserved
0xFFFF FFFF
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19
A first level of address decoding is performed by the Bus Matrix, i.e., the implementation of the Advanced High
Performance Bus (AHB) for its Master and Slave interfaces with additional features.
Decoding breaks up the 4 Gbytes of address space into 16 banks of 256 Mbytes. The banks 1 to 7 are directed to
the EBI that associates these banks to the external chip selects EBI_NCS0 to EBI_NCS7. Bank 0 is reserved for
the addressing of the internal memories, and a second level of decoding provides 1 Mbyte of internal memory
area. Bank 15 is reserved for the peripherals and provides access to the Advanced Peripheral Bus (APB).
Other areas are unused and performing an access within them provides an abort to the master requesting such an
access.
Each Master has its own bus and its own decoder, thus allowing a different memory mapping per Master.
However, in order to simplify the mappings, all the masters have a similar address decoding.
Regarding Master 0 and Master 1 (ARM926™ Instruction and Data), three different Slaves are assigned to the
memory space decoded at address 0x0: one for internal boot, one for external boot, one after remap. Refer to
Table 6-1 “Internal Memory Mapping” for details.
A complete memory map is presented in Figure 6-1 on page 19.
6.1
Embedded Memories
32 KB ROM
̶
Single Cycle Access at full matrix speed
Two 4 KB Fast SRAM
̶
6.1.1
Single Cycle Access at full matrix speed
Boot Strategies
Table 6-1 summarizes the Internal Memory Mapping for each Master, depending on the Remap status and the
BMS state at reset.
Table 6-1.
Internal Memory Mapping
REMAP = 0
Address
BMS = 1
BMS = 0
REMAP = 1
0x0000 0000
ROM
EBI_NCS0
SRAM0 4K
The system always boots at address 0x0. To ensure a maximum number of possibilities for boot, the memory
layout can be configured with two parameters. After reset, the ROM is mapped at both addresses 0x0000_0000
and 0x0010_0000.
REMAP allows the user to lay out the first internal SRAM bank to 0x0 to ease development. This is done by
software once the system has booted. Refer to Section 17. “SAM9260 Bus Matrix” for more details.
When REMAP = 0, BMS allows the user to lay out to 0x0, at his convenience, the ROM or an external memory.
This is done via hardware at reset.
Note:
Memory blocks not affected by these parameters can always be seen at their specified base addresses.
See the complete memory map presented in Figure 6-1 on page 19.
The SAM9260 matrix manages a boot memory that depends on the level on the BMS pin at reset. The internal
memory area mapped between address 0x0 and 0x000F FFFF is reserved for this purpose.
If BMS is detected at 1, the boot memory is the embedded ROM.
If BMS is detected at 0, the boot memory is the memory connected on the Chip Select 0 of the External Bus
Interface.
20
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
6.1.1.1 BMS = 1, Boot on Embedded ROM
The system boots using the Boot Program.
Boot on slow clock (on-chip RC or 32.768 kHz)
Auto baudrate detection
Downloads and runs an application from external storage media into internal SRAM
Downloaded code size depends on embedded SRAM size
Automatic detection of valid application
Bootloader on a non-volatile memory
̶
SPI DataFlash connected on NPCS0 and NPCS1 of the SPI0
̶
8-bit and/or 16-bit NAND Flash
SAM-BA® Monitor in case no valid program is detected in external NVM, supporting
̶
Serial communication on a DBGU
̶
USB Device Port
6.1.1.2 BMS = 0, Boot on External Memory
Boot on slow clock (on-chip RC or 32.768 kHz)
Boot with the default configuration for the Static Memory Controller, byte select mode, 16-bit data bus,
Read/Write controlled by Chip Select, allows boot on 16-bit non-volatile memory.
The customer-programmed software must perform a complete configuration.
To speed up the boot sequence when booting at 32 kHz EBI CS0 (BMS = 0), the user must take the following
steps:
6.2
1.
Program the PMC (main oscillator enable or bypass mode).
2.
Program and start the PLL.
3.
Reprogram the SMC setup, cycle, hold, mode timings registers for CS0 to adapt them to the new clock.
4.
Switch the main clock to the new value.
External Memories
The external memories are accessed through the External Bus Interface. Each Chip Select line has a 256-Mbyte
memory area assigned. Refer to Figure 6-1, “SAM9260 Memory Mapping,” on page 19.
6.2.1
External Bus Interface
Integrates three External Memory Controllers
̶
Static Memory Controller
̶
SDRAM Controller
̶
ECC Controller
Additional logic for NAND Flash
Full 32-bit External Data Bus
Up to 26-bit Address Bus (up to 64 Mbytes linear)
Up to 8 chip selects, Configurable Assignment:
̶
̶
Static Memory Controller on NCS0
̶
SDRAM Controller or Static Memory Controller on NCS1
̶
Static Memory Controller on NCS2
̶
Static Memory Controller on NCS3, Optional NAND Flash support
̶
Static Memory Controller on NCS4–NCS5, Optional CompactFlash support
Static Memory Controller on NCS6–NCS7
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
21
6.2.2
Static Memory Controller
8-, 16- or 32-bit Data Bus
Multiple Access Modes supported
6.2.3
̶
Byte Write or Byte Select Lines
̶
Asynchronous read in Page Mode supported (4- up to 32-byte page size)
Multiple device adaptability
̶
Compliant with LCD Module
̶
Control signals programmable setup, pulse and hold time for each Memory Bank
Multiple Wait State Management
̶
Programmable Wait State Generation
̶
External Wait Request
̶
Programmable Data Float Time
Slow Clock mode supported
SDRAM Controller
Supported devices
̶
Standard and Low-power SDRAM (Mobile SDRAM)
Numerous configurations supported
̶
2K, 4K, 8K Row Address Memory Parts
̶
SDRAM with two or four Internal Banks
̶
SDRAM with 16- or 32-bit Datapath
Programming facilities
̶
Word, half-word, byte access
̶
Automatic page break when Memory Boundary has been reached
̶
Multibank Ping-pong Access
̶
Timing parameters specified by software
̶
Automatic refresh operation, refresh rate is programmable
Energy-saving capabilities
̶
Self-refresh, power down and deep power down modes supported
Error detection
̶
6.2.4
SDRAM Power-up Initialization by software
CAS Latency of 1, 2 and 3 supported
Auto Precharge Command not used
Error Correction Code Controller
Tracking the accesses to a NAND Flash device by trigging on the corresponding chip select
Single bit error correction and 2-bit Random detection
Automatic Hamming Code Calculation while writing
Automatic Hamming Code Calculation while reading
̶
22
Refresh Error Interrupt
ECC value available in a register
̶
Error Report, including error flag, correctable error flag and word address being detected erroneous
̶
Support 8- or 16-bit NAND Flash devices with 512-, 1024-, 2048- or 4096-bytes pages
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
7.
System Controller
The System Controller is a set of peripherals that allows handling of key elements of the system, such as power,
resets, clocks, time, interrupts, watchdog, etc.
The System Controller User Interface also embeds the registers that configure the Matrix and a set of registers for
the chip configuration. The chip configuration registers configure EBI chip select assignment and voltage range for
external memories
The System Controller’s peripherals are all mapped within the highest 16 Kbytes of address space, between
addresses 0xFFFF E800 and 0xFFFF FFFF.
However, all the registers of System Controller are mapped on the top of the address space. All the registers of the
System Controller can be addressed from a single pointer by using the standard ARM instruction set, as the
Load/Store instruction has an indexing mode of ±4 Kbytes.
Figure 7-1 on page 24 shows the System Controller block diagram.
Figure 6-1 on page 19 shows the mapping of the User Interfaces of the System Controller peripherals.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
23
7.1
System Controller Block Diagram
Figure 7-1.
SAM9260 System Controller Block Diagram
System Controller
VDDCORE Powered
irq0–irq2
fiq
periph_irq[2..24]
nirq
nfiq
Advanced
Interrupt
Controller
pit_irq
rtt_irq
wdt_irq
dbgu_irq
pmc_irq
rstc_irq
int
MCK
periph_nreset
dbgu_irq
Debug Unit
dbgu_txd
dbgu_rxd
Periodic
Interval Timer
pit_irq
Watchdog
Timer
wdt_irq
NRST
periph_nreset
Reset
Controller
periph_nreset
proc_nreset
backup_nreset
VDDBU
VDDBU
POR
VDDBU Powered
Bus Matrix
UHPCK
periph_clk[20]
periph_nreset
Real-time
Timer
rtt_irq
rtt_alarm
UDPCK
SLCK
SHDN
periph_clk[10]
WKUP
RC
Oscillator
USB Host
Port
periph_irq[20]
SLCK
SLCK
backup_nreset
backup_nreset
Shutdown
Controller
periph_nreset
USB
Device
Port
periph_irq[10]
rtt0_alarm
Slow Clock
Oscillator
4 General-purpose
Backup Registers
XOUT32
SLCK
PLLRCA
Boundary Scan
TAP Controller
rstc_irq
por_ntrst
jtag_nreset
VDDCORE
POR
XIN
PCK
MCK
wdt_fault
WDRPROC
XOUT
proc_nreset
jtag_nreset
SLCK
debug
idle
proc_nreset
XIN32
ARM926EJ-S
debug
MCK
debug
periph_nreset
OSCSEL
ntrst
por_ntrst
periph_clk[2..27]
pck[0–1]
int
Main
Oscillator
PLLA
PLLB
PCK
MAINCK
PLLACK
Power
Management
Controller
UDPCK
UHPCK
MCK
PLLBCK
pmc_irq
periph_nreset
periph_clk[6..24]
idle
periph_nreset
periph_nreset
periph_clk[2..4]
dbgu_rxd
PA0–PA31
PB0–PB31
PC0–PC31
24
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
PIO
Controllers
periph_irq[2..4]
irq0–irq2
fiq
dbgu_txd
Embedded
Peripherals
periph_irq[6..24]
in
out
enable
7.2
Power Management Controller
Provides:
̶
Processor Clock PCK
̶
Master Clock MCK, in particular to the Matrix and the memory interfaces
̶
USB Device Clock UDPCK
̶
independent peripheral clocks, typically at the frequency of MCK
̶
2 programmable clock outputs: PCK0, PCK1
Five flexible operating modes:
̶
Normal Mode, processor and peripherals running at a programmable frequency
̶
Idle Mode, processor stopped waiting for an interrupt
̶
Slow Clock Mode, processor and peripherals running at low frequency
̶
Standby Mode, mix of Idle and Backup Mode, peripheral running at low frequency, processor stopped
waiting for an interrupt
̶
Backup Mode, Main Power Supplies off, VDDBU powered by a battery
Figure 7-2.
SAM9260 Power Management Controller Block Diagram
Processor
Clock
Controller
int
Master Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLACK
PLLBCK
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,...,/64
PCK
Idle Mode
Divider
/1,/2,/4
MCK
Peripherals
Clock Controller
periph_clk[..]
ON/OFF
Programmable Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLACK
PLLBCK
ON/OFF
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,...,/64
pck[..]
USB Clock Controller
ON/OFF
PLLBCK
7.3
UDPCK
UHPCK
General-purpose Backup Registers
7.4
Divider
/1,/2,/4
Four 32-bit general-purpose backup registers
Chip Identification
Chip ID: 0x019803A2
JTAG ID: 0x05B1303F
ARM926 TAP ID: 0x0792603F
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25
7.5
Backup Section
The SAM9260 features a Backup Section that embeds:
RC Oscillator
Slow Clock Oscillator
RTT
Shutdown Controller
4 general-purpose backup registers (GPBR)
A part of RSTC
This section is powered by the VDDBU rail.
26
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
8.
Peripherals
8.1
User Interface
As shown in Figure 6-1 “SAM9260 Memory Mapping”, the peripherals are mapped in the upper 256 Mbytes of the
address space between the addresses 0xFFFA 0000 and 0xFFFC FFFF. Each user peripheral is allocated
16 Kbytes of address space.
8.2
Peripheral Identifiers
Table 8-1 defines the peripheral identifiers of the SAM9260. A peripheral identifier is required for the control of the
peripheral interrupt with the Advanced Interrupt Controller and for the control of the peripheral clock with the Power
Management Controller.
Table 8-1.
SAM9260 Peripheral Identifiers
Peripheral ID
Peripheral Mnemonic
Peripheral Name
External Interrupt
0
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
FIQ
1
SYSC
System Controller Interrupt
2
PIOA
Parallel I/O Controller A
3
PIOB
Parallel I/O Controller B
4
PIOC
Parallel I/O Controller C
5
ADC
Analog-to-Digital Converter
6
US0
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 0
7
US1
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 1
8
US2
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 2
9
MCI
MultiMedia Card Interface
10
UDP
USB Device Port
11
TWI
Two-wire Interface
12
SPI0
Serial Peripheral Interface 0
13
SPI1
Serial Peripheral Interface 1
14
SSC
Synchronous Serial Controller
15
–
Reserved
16
–
Reserved
17
TC0
Timer/Counter 0
18
TC1
Timer/Counter 1
19
TC2
Timer/Counter 2
20
UHP
USB Host Port
21
EMAC
Ethernet MAC
22
ISI
Image Sensor Interface
23
US3
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 3
24
US4
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 4
25
US5
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 5
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27
Table 8-1.
SAM9260 Peripheral Identifiers (Continued)
Peripheral ID
Peripheral Mnemonic
Peripheral Name
External Interrupt
26
TC3
Timer/Counter 3
27
TC4
Timer/Counter 4
28
TC5
Timer/Counter 5
29
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
IRQ0
30
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
IRQ1
31
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
IRQ2
Note: Setting AIC, SYSC, UHP and IRQ0–2 bits in the clock set/clear registers of the PMC has no effect.
8.2.1
Peripheral Interrupts and Clock Control
8.2.1.1 System Interrupt
The System Interrupt in Source 1 is the wired-OR of the interrupt signals coming from:
the SDRAM Controller
the Debug Unit
the Periodic Interval Timer
the Real-time Timer
the Watchdog Timer
the Reset Controller
the Power Management Controller
The clock of these peripherals cannot be deactivated and Peripheral ID 1 can only be used within the Advanced
Interrupt Controller.
8.2.1.2 External Interrupts
All external interrupt signals, i.e., the Fast Interrupt signal FIQ or the Interrupt signals IRQ0 to IRQ2, use a
dedicated Peripheral ID. However, there is no clock control associated with these peripheral IDs.
8.3
Peripheral Signal Multiplexing on I/O Lines
The SAM9260 features three PIO controllers (PIOA, PIOB, PIOC) that multiplex the I/O lines of the peripheral set.
Each PIO Controller controls up to 32 lines. Each line can be assigned to one of two peripheral functions, A or B.
Table 8-2 on page 29, Table 8-3 on page 30 and Table 8-4 on page 31 define how the I/O lines of the peripherals
A and B are multiplexed on the PIO Controllers. The two columns “Function” and “Comments” have been inserted
in this table for the user’s own comments; they may be used to track how pins are defined in an application.
Note that some peripheral functions which are output only might be duplicated within both tables.
The column “Reset State” indicates whether the PIO Line resets in I/O mode or in peripheral mode. If I/O appears,
the PIO Line resets in input with the pull-up enabled, so that the device is maintained in a static state as soon as
the reset is released. As a result, the bit corresponding to the PIO Line in the register PIO_PSR (Peripheral Status
Register) resets low.
If a signal name appears in the “Reset State” column, the PIO Line is assigned to this function and the
corresponding bit in PIO_PSR resets high. This is the case of pins controlling memories, in particular the address
lines, which require the pin to be driven as soon as the reset is released. Note that the pull-up resistor is also
enabled in this case.
28
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
8.3.1
PIO Controller A Multiplexing
Table 8-2.
Multiplexing on PIO Controller A
PIO Controller A
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
PA0
SPI0_MISO
PA1
SPI0_MOSI
PA2
SPI0_SPCK
PA3
SPI0_NPCS0
PA4
Reset State
Power Supply
MCDB0
I/O
VDDIOP0
MCCDB
I/O
VDDIOP0
I/O
VDDIOP0
MCDB3
I/O
VDDIOP0
RTS2
MCDB2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA5
CTS2
MCDB1
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA6
MCDA0
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA7
MCCDA
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA8
MCCK
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA9
MCDA1
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA10
MCDA2
ETX2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA11
MCDA3
ETX3
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA12
ETX0
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA13
ETX1
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA14
ERX0
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA15
ERX1
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA16
ETXEN
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA17
ERXDV
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA18
ERXER
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA19
ETXCK
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA20
EMDC
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA21
EMDIO
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA22
ADTRG
ETXER
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA23
TWD
ETX2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA24
TWCK
ETX3
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA25
TCLK0
ERX2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA26
TIOA0
ERX3
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA27
TIOA1
ERXCK
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA28
TIOA2
ECRS
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA29
SCK1
ECOL
I/O
VDDIOP0
(1)
SCK2
RXD4
I/O
VDDIOP0
(1)
SCK0
TXD4
I/O
VDDIOP0
PA30
PA31
Note:
Comments
Application Usage
Function
Comments
1. Not available in the 208-lead PQFP package.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29
8.3.2
PIO Controller B Multiplexing
Table 8-3.
Multiplexing on PIO Controller B
PIO Controller B
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
PB0
SPI1_MISO
PB1
Reset State
Power Supply
TIOA3
I/O
VDDIOP0
SPI1_MOSI
TIOB3
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB2
SPI1_SPCK
TIOA4
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB3
SPI1_NPCS0
TIOA5
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB4
TXD0
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB5
RXD0
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB6
TXD1
TCLK1
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB7
RXD1
TCLK2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB8
TXD2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB9
RXD2
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB10
TXD3
ISI_D8
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB11
Comments
Application Usage
RXD3
ISI_D9
I/O
VDDIOP1
(1)
TXD5
ISI_D10
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB13(1)
RXD5
ISI_D11
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB14
DRXD
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB15
DTXD
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB16
TK0
TCLK3
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB17
TF0
TCLK4
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB18
TD0
TIOB4
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB19
RD0
TIOB5
I/O
VDDIOP0
PB20
RK0
ISI_D0
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB21
RF0
ISI_D1
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB22
DSR0
ISI_D2
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB23
DCD0
ISI_D3
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB24
DTR0
ISI_D4
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB25
RI0
ISI_D5
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB26
RTS0
ISI_D6
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB27
CTS0
ISI_D7
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB28
RTS1
ISI_PCK
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB29
CTS1
ISI_VSYNC
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB30
PCK0
ISI_HSYNC
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB31
PCK1
I/O
VDDIOP1
PB12
Note:
30
1. Not available in the 208-lead PQFP package.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Function
Comments
8.3.3
PIO Controller C Multiplexing
Table 8-4.
Multiplexing on PIO Controller C
PIO Controller C
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Application Usage
Peripheral B
Comments
Reset State
Power Supply
PC0
SCK3
AD0
I/O
VDDANA
PC1
PCK0
AD1
I/O
VDDANA
(1)
PCK1
AD2
I/O
VDDANA
(1)
SPI1_NPCS3
AD3
I/O
VDDANA
PC2
PC3
PC4
A23
SPI1_NPCS2
A23
VDDIOM
PC5
A24
SPI1_NPCS1
A24
VDDIOM
PC6
TIOB2
CFCE1
I/O
VDDIOM
PC7
TIOB1
CFCE2
I/O
VDDIOM
PC8
NCS4/CFCS0
RTS3
I/O
VDDIOM
PC9
NCS5/CFCS1
TIOB0
I/O
VDDIOM
PC10
A25/CFRNW
CTS3
A25
VDDIOM
PC11
NCS2
SPI0_NPCS1
I/O
VDDIOM
PC12
IRQ0
NCS7
I/O
VDDIOM
PC13
FIQ
NCS6
I/O
VDDIOM
PC14
NCS3/NANDCS
IRQ2
I/O
VDDIOM
PC15
NWAIT
IRQ1
I/O
VDDIOM
PC16
D16
SPI0_NPCS2
I/O
VDDIOM
PC17
D17
SPI0_NPCS3
I/O
VDDIOM
PC18
D18
SPI1_NPCS1
I/O
VDDIOM
PC19
D19
SPI1_NPCS2
I/O
VDDIOM
PC20
D20
SPI1_NPCS3
I/O
VDDIOM
PC21
D21
EF100
I/O
VDDIOM
PC22
D22
TCLK5
I/O
VDDIOM
PC23
D23
I/O
VDDIOM
PC24
D24
I/O
VDDIOM
PC25
D25
I/O
VDDIOM
PC26
D26
I/O
VDDIOM
PC27
D27
I/O
VDDIOM
PC28
D28
I/O
VDDIOM
PC29
D29
I/O
VDDIOM
PC30
D30
I/O
VDDIOM
PC31
D31
I/O
VDDIOM
(1)
Note:
Function
Comments
1. Not available in the 208-lead PQFP package.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31
9.
ARM926EJ-S Processor Overview
9.1
Description
The ARM926EJ-S processor is a member of the ARM9™ family of general-purpose microprocessors. The
ARM926EJ-S implements ARM architecture version 5TEJ and is targeted at multi-tasking applications where full
memory management, high performance, low die size and low power are all important features.
The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the 32-bit ARM and 16-bit THUMB instruction sets, enabling the user to
trade off between high performance and high code density. It also supports 8-bit Java instruction set and includes
features for efficient execution of Java bytecode, providing a Java performance similar to a JIT (Just-In-Time
compilers), for the next generation of Java-powered wireless and embedded devices. It includes an enhanced
multiplier design for improved DSP performance.
The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic to assist in both hardware
and software debug.
The ARM926EJ-S provides a complete high performance processor subsystem, including:
32
an ARM9EJ-S™ integer core
a Memory Management Unit (MMU)
separate instruction and data AMBA™ AHB bus interfaces
separate instruction and data TCM interfaces
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.2
Embedded Characteristics
RISC Processor Based on ARM v5TEJ Architecture with Jazelle technology for Java acceleration
Two Instruction Sets
̶
ARM High-performance 32-bit Instruction Set
̶
Thumb High Code Density 16-bit Instruction Set
DSP Instruction Extensions
5-Stage Pipeline Architecture
̶
̶
Instruction Fetch (F)
Instruction Decode (D)
̶
Execute (E)
̶
Data Memory (M)
̶
Register Write (W)
8-Kbyte Data Cache, 8-Kbyte Instruction Cache
̶
Virtually-addressed 4-way Associative Cache
̶
Eight words per line
̶
Write-through and Write-back Operation
̶
Pseudo-random or Round-robin Replacement
Write Buffer
̶
Main Write Buffer with 16-word Data Buffer and 4-address Buffer
̶
DCache Write-back Buffer with 8-word Entries and a Single Address Entry
̶
Software Control Drain
Standard ARM v4 and v5 Memory Management Unit (MMU)
Access Permission for Sections
̶
Access Permission for large pages and small pages can be specified separately for each quarter of
the page
̶
̶
16 embedded domains
Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
̶
̶
Arbitrates and Schedules AHB Requests
̶
Separate Masters for both instruction and data access providing complete Matrix system flexibility
Separate Address and Data Buses for both the 32-bit instruction interface and the 32-bit data interface
On Address and Data Buses, data can be 8-bit (Bytes), 16-bit (Half-words) or 32-bit (Words)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33
9.3
Block Diagram
Figure 9-1.
ARM926EJ-S Internal Functional Block Diagram
ARM926EJ-S
TCM
Interface
Coprocessor
Interface
ETM
Interface
DEXT
Droute
Data
AHB
Interface
AHB
DCACHE
WDATA
Bus
Interface
Unit
RDATA
ARM9EJ-S
DA
MMU
EmbeddedICE
-RT
Processor
Instruction
AHB
Interface
IA
INSTR
ICE
Interface
ICACHE
Iroute
IEXT
34
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
AHB
9.4
ARM9EJ-S Processor
9.4.1
ARM9EJ-S Operating States
The ARM9EJ-S processor can operate in three different states, each with a specific instruction set:
ARM state: 32-bit, word-aligned ARM instructions.
THUMB state: 16-bit, halfword-aligned Thumb instructions.
Jazelle state: variable length, byte-aligned Jazelle instructions.
In Jazelle state, all instruction Fetches are in words.
9.4.2
Switching State
The operating state of the ARM9EJ-S core can be switched between:
ARM state and THUMB state using the BX and BLX instructions, and loads to the PC
ARM state and Jazelle state using the BXJ instruction
All exceptions are entered, handled and exited in ARM state. If an exception occurs in Thumb or Jazelle states, the
processor reverts to ARM state. The transition back to Thumb or Jazelle states occurs automatically on return from
the exception handler.
9.4.3
Instruction Pipelines
The ARM9EJ-S core uses two kinds of pipelines to increase the speed of the flow of instructions to the processor.
A five-stage (five clock cycles) pipeline is used for ARM and Thumb states. It consists of Fetch, Decode, Execute,
Memory and Writeback stages.
A six-stage (six clock cycles) pipeline is used for Jazelle state It consists of Fetch, Jazelle/Decode (two clock
cycles), Execute, Memory and Writeback stages.
9.4.4
Memory Access
The ARM9EJ-S core supports byte (8-bit), half-word (16-bit) and word (32-bit) access. Words must be aligned to
four-byte boundaries, half-words must be aligned to two-byte boundaries and bytes can be placed on any byte
boundary.
Because of the nature of the pipelines, it is possible for a value to be required for use before it has been placed in
the register bank by the actions of an earlier instruction. The ARM9EJ-S control logic automatically detects these
cases and stalls the core or forward data.
9.4.5
Jazelle Technology
The Jazelle technology enables direct and efficient execution of Java byte codes on ARM processors, providing
high performance for the next generation of Java-powered wireless and embedded devices.
The new Java feature of ARM9EJ-S can be described as a hardware emulation of a JVM (Java Virtual Machine).
Java mode appears as another state: instead of executing ARM or Thumb instructions, it executes Java byte
codes. The Java byte code decoder logic implemented in ARM9EJ-S decodes 95% of executed byte codes and
turns them into ARM instructions without any overhead, while less frequently used byte codes are broken down
into optimized sequences of ARM instructions. The hardware/software split is invisible to the programmer, invisible
to the application and invisible to the operating system. All existing ARM registers are re-used in Jazelle state and
all registers then have particular functions in this mode.
Minimum interrupt latency is maintained across both ARM state and Java state. Since byte codes execution can
be restarted, an interrupt automatically triggers the core to switch from Java state to ARM state for the execution of
the interrupt handler. This means that no special provision has to be made for handling interrupts while executing
byte codes, whether in hardware or in software.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35
9.4.6
ARM9EJ-S Operating Modes
In all states, there are seven operation modes:
User mode is the usual ARM program execution state. It is used for executing most application programs
Fast Interrupt (FIQ) mode is used for handling fast interrupts. It is suitable for high-speed data transfer or
channel process
Interrupt (IRQ) mode is used for general-purpose interrupt handling
Supervisor mode is a protected mode for the operating system
Abort mode is entered after a data or instruction prefetch abort
System mode is a privileged user mode for the operating system
Undefined mode is entered when an undefined instruction exception occurs
Mode changes may be made under software control, or may be brought about by external interrupts or exception
processing. Most application programs execute in User Mode. The non-user modes, known as privileged modes,
are entered in order to service interrupts or exceptions or to access protected resources.
36
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.4.7
ARM9EJ-S Registers
The ARM9EJ-S core has a total of 37 registers.
31 general-purpose 32-bit registers
Six 32-bit status registers
Table 9-1 shows all the registers in all modes.
Table 9-1.
ARM9EJ-S Modes and Registers Layout
User and
System Mode
Supervisor
Mode
Abort Mode
Undefined Mode
Interrupt Mode
Fast Interrupt
Mode
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R3
R3
R3
R3
R3
R3
R4
R4
R4
R4
R4
R4
R5
R5
R5
R5
R5
R5
R6
R6
R6
R6
R6
R6
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R8
R8
R8
R8
R8
R8_FIQ
R9
R9
R9
R9
R9
R9_FIQ
R10
R10
R10
R10
R10
R10_FIQ
R11
R11
R11
R11
R11
R11_FIQ
R12
R12
R12
R12
R12
R12_FIQ
R13
R13_SVC
R13_ABORT
R13_UNDEF
R13_IRQ
R13_FIQ
R14
R14_SVC
R14_ABORT
R14_UNDEF
R14_IRQ
R14_FIQ
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
SPSR_SVC
SPSR_ABORT
SPSR_UNDEF
SPSR_IRQ
SPSR_FIQ
Mode-specific banked registers
The ARM state register set contains 16 directly-accessible registers, r0 to r15, and an additional register, the
Current Program Status Register (CPSR). Registers r0 to r13 are general-purpose registers used to hold either
data or address values. Register r14 is used as a Link register that holds a value (return address) of r15 when BL
or BLX is executed. Register r15 is used as a program counter (PC), whereas the Current Program Status
Register (CPSR) contains condition code flags and the current mode bits.
In privileged modes (FIQ, Supervisor, Abort, IRQ, Undefined), mode-specific banked registers (r8 to r14 in FIQ
mode or r13 to r14 in the other modes) become available. The corresponding banked registers r14_fiq, r14_svc,
r14_abt, r14_irq, r14_und are similarly used to hold the values (return address for each mode) of r15 (PC) when
interrupts and exceptions arise, or when BL or BLX instructions are executed within interrupt or exception routines.
There is another register called Saved Program Status Register (SPSR) that becomes available in privileged
modes instead of CPSR. This register contains condition code flags and the current mode bits saved as a result of
the exception that caused entry to the current (privileged) mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37
In all modes and due to a software agreement, register r13 is used as stack pointer.
The use and the function of all the registers described above should obey ARM Procedure Call Standard (APCS)
which defines:
constraints on the use of registers
stack conventions
argument passing and result return
The Thumb state register set is a subset of the ARM state set. The programmer has direct access to:
Eight general-purpose registers r0–r7
Stack pointer, SP
Link register, LR (ARM r14)
PC
CPSR
There are banked registers SPs, LRs and SPSRs for each privileged mode (for more details see the ARM9EJ-S
Technical Reference Manual, ref. DDI0222B, revision r1p2 page 2-12).
9.4.7.1 Status Registers
The ARM9EJ-S core contains one CPSR, and five SPSRs for exception handlers to use. The program status
registers:
hold information about the most recently performed ALU operation
control the enabling and disabling of interrupts
set the processor operation mode
Figure 9-2.
Status Register Format
31 30 29 28 27
24
N Z C V Q
J
7 6 5
Reserved
Jazelle state bit
Reserved
Sticky Overflow
Overflow
Carry/Borrow/Extend
Zero
Negative/Less than
I F T
0
Mode
Mode bits
Thumb state bit
FIQ disable
IRQ disable
Figure 9-2 shows the status register format, where:
N: Negative, Z: Zero, C: Carry, and V: Overflow are the four ALU flags
The Sticky Overflow (Q) flag can be set by certain multiply and fractional arithmetic instructions like QADD,
QDADD, QSUB, QDSUB, SMLAxy, and SMLAWy needed to achieve DSP operations.
The Q flag is sticky in that, when set by an instruction, it remains set until explicitly cleared by an MSR
instruction writing to the CPSR. Instructions cannot execute conditionally on the status of the Q flag.
The J bit in the CPSR indicates when the ARM9EJ-S core is in Jazelle state, where:
38
̶
J = 0: The processor is in ARM or Thumb state, depending on the T bit
̶
J = 1: The processor is in Jazelle state.
Mode: five bits to encode the current processor mode
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.4.7.2 Exceptions
Exception Types and Priorities
The ARM9EJ-S supports five types of exceptions. Each type drives the ARM9EJ-S in a privileged mode. The types
of exceptions are:
Fast interrupt (FIQ)
Normal interrupt (IRQ)
Data and Prefetched aborts (Abort)
Undefined instruction (Undefined)
Software interrupt and Reset (Supervisor)
When an exception occurs, the banked version of R14 and the SPSR for the exception mode are used to save the
state.
More than one exception can happen at a time, therefore the ARM9EJ-S takes the arisen exceptions according to
the following priority order:
Reset (highest priority)
Data Abort
FIQ
IRQ
Prefetch Abort
BKPT, Undefined instruction, and Software Interrupt (SWI) (Lowest priority)
The BKPT, or Undefined instruction, and SWI exceptions are mutually exclusive.
There is one exception in the priority scheme though, when FIQs are enabled and a Data Abort occurs at the same
time as an FIQ, the ARM9EJ-S core enters the Data Abort handler, and proceeds immediately to FIQ vector. A
normal return from the FIQ causes the Data Abort handler to resume execution. Data Aborts must have higher
priority than FIQs to ensure that the transfer error does not escape detection.
Exception Modes and Handling
Exceptions arise whenever the normal flow of a program must be halted temporarily, for example, to service an
interrupt from a peripheral.
When handling an ARM exception, the ARM9EJ-S core performs the following operations:
1.
Preserves the address of the next instruction in the appropriate Link Register that corresponds to the new
mode that has been entered. When the exception entry is from:
̶
̶
ARM and Jazelle states, the ARM9EJ-S copies the address of the next instruction into LR (current
PC(r15) + 4 or PC + 8 depending on the exception).
THUMB state, the ARM9EJ-S writes the value of the PC into LR, offset by a value (current PC + 2, PC
+ 4 or PC + 8 depending on the exception) that causes the program to resume from the correct place
on return.
2.
Copies the CPSR into the appropriate SPSR.
3.
Forces the CPSR mode bits to a value that depends on the exception.
4.
Forces the PC to fetch the next instruction from the relevant exception vector.
The register r13 is also banked across exception modes to provide each exception handler with private stack
pointer.
The ARM9EJ-S can also set the interrupt disable flags to prevent otherwise unmanageable nesting of exceptions.
When an exception has completed, the exception handler must move both the return value in the banked LR
minus an offset to the PC and the SPSR to the CPSR. The offset value varies according to the type of exception.
This action restores both PC and the CPSR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
39
The fast interrupt mode has seven private registers r8 to r14 (banked registers) to reduce or remove the
requirement for register saving which minimizes the overhead of context switching.
The Prefetch Abort is one of the aborts that indicates that the current memory access cannot be completed. When
a Prefetch Abort occurs, the ARM9EJ-S marks the prefetched instruction as invalid, but does not take the
exception until the instruction reaches the Execute stage in the pipeline. If the instruction is not executed, for
example because a branch occurs while it is in the pipeline, the abort does not take place.
The breakpoint (BKPT) instruction is a new feature of ARM9EJ-S that is destined to solve the problem of the
Prefetch Abort. A breakpoint instruction operates as though the instruction caused a Prefetch Abort.
A breakpoint instruction does not cause the ARM9EJ-S to take the Prefetch Abort exception until the instruction
reaches the Execute stage of the pipeline. If the instruction is not executed, for example because a branch occurs
while it is in the pipeline, the breakpoint does not take place.
40
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.4.8
ARM Instruction Set Overview
The ARM instruction set is divided into:
Branch instructions
Data processing instructions
Status register transfer instructions
Load and Store instructions
Coprocessor instructions
Exception-generating instructions
ARM instructions can be executed conditionally. Every instruction contains a 4-bit condition code field (bits[31:28]).
Table 9-2 gives the ARM instruction mnemonic list.
Table 9-2.
Mnemonic
ARM Instruction Mnemonic List
Operation
Mnemonic
Operation
MOV
Move
MVN
Move Not
ADD
Add
ADC
Add with Carry
SUB
Subtract
SBC
Subtract with Carry
RSB
Reverse Subtract
RSC
Reverse Subtract with Carry
CMP
Compare
CMN
Compare Negated
TST
Test
TEQ
Test Equivalence
AND
Logical AND
BIC
Bit Clear
EOR
Logical Exclusive OR
ORR
Logical (inclusive) OR
MUL
Multiply
MLA
Multiply Accumulate
SMULL
Sign Long Multiply
UMULL
Unsigned Long Multiply
SMLAL
Signed Long Multiply Accumulate
UMLAL
Unsigned Long Multiply Accumulate
MSR
B
BX
LDR
Move to Status Register
Branch
MRS
BL
Move From Status Register
Branch and Link
Branch and Exchange
SWI
Software Interrupt
Load Word
STR
Store Word
LDRSH
Load Signed Halfword
LDRSB
Load Signed Byte
LDRH
Load Half Word
STRH
Store Half Word
LDRB
Load Byte
STRB
Store Byte
LDRBT
Load Register Byte with Translation
STRBT
Store Register Byte with Translation
LDRT
Load Register with Translation
STRT
Store Register with Translation
LDM
Load Multiple
STM
Store Multiple
SWP
Swap Word
MCR
Move To Coprocessor
MRC
Move From Coprocessor
LDC
Load To Coprocessor
STC
Store From Coprocessor
CDP
Coprocessor Data Processing
SWPB
Swap Byte
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
41
9.4.9
New ARM Instruction Set
Table 9-3.
New ARM Instruction Mnemonic List
Mnemonic
BXJ
Operation
Mnemonic
Operation
Branch and exchange to Java
MRRC
Move double from coprocessor
Branch, Link and exchange
MCR2
Alternative move of ARM reg to coprocessor
SMLAxy
Signed Multiply Accumulate 16 * 16 bit
MCRR
Move double to coprocessor
SMLAL
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long
CDP2
Alternative Coprocessor Data Processing
SMLAWy
Signed Multiply Accumulate 32 * 16 bit
BKPT
Breakpoint
SMULxy
Signed Multiply 16 * 16 bit
PLD
SMULWy
Signed Multiply 32 * 16 bit
STRD
Store Double
Saturated Add
STC2
Alternative Store from Coprocessor
Saturated Add with Double
LDRD
Load Double
Saturated subtract
LDC2
Alternative Load to Coprocessor
BLX
(1)
QADD
QDADD
QSUB
QDSUB
Note:
42
Saturated Subtract with double
CLZ
Soft Preload, Memory prepare to load from
address
Count Leading Zeroes
1. A Thumb BLX contains two consecutive Thumb instructions, and takes four cycles.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.4.10 Thumb Instruction Set Overview
The Thumb instruction set is a re-encoded subset of the ARM instruction set.
The Thumb instruction set is divided into:
Branch instructions
Data processing instructions
Load and Store instructions
Load and Store multiple instructions
Exception-generating instruction
Table 9-4 gives the Thumb instruction mnemonic list.
Table 9-4.
Thumb Instruction Mnemonic List
Mnemonic
Operation
Mnemonic
Operation
MOV
Move
MVN
Move Not
ADD
Add
ADC
Add with Carry
SUB
Subtract
SBC
Subtract with Carry
CMP
Compare
CMN
Compare Negated
TST
Test
NEG
Negate
AND
Logical AND
BIC
Bit Clear
EOR
Logical Exclusive OR
ORR
Logical (inclusive) OR
LSL
Logical Shift Left
LSR
Logical Shift Right
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right
ROR
Rotate Right
MUL
Multiply
BLX
Branch, Link, and Exchange
B
Branch
BL
Branch and Link
BX
Branch and Exchange
SWI
Software Interrupt
LDR
Load Word
STR
Store Word
LDRH
Load Half Word
STRH
Store Half Word
LDRB
Load Byte
STRB
Store Byte
LDRSH
Load Signed Halfword
LDRSB
Load Signed Byte
LDMIA
Load Multiple
STMIA
Store Multiple
PUSH
Push Register to stack
POP
Pop Register from stack
BCC
Conditional Branch
BKPT
Breakpoint
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43
9.5
CP15 Coprocessor
Coprocessor 15, or System Control Coprocessor CP15, is used to configure and control all the items in the list
below:
ARM9EJ-S
Caches (ICache, DCache and write buffer)
TCM
MMU
Other system options
To control these features, CP15 provides 16 additional registers. See Table 9-5.
Table 9-5.
CP15 Registers
Register
0
Read/Unpredictable
ID Code
0
Cache type
Read/Unpredictable
0
TCM status(1)
Read/Unpredictable
1
Control
Read/Write
2
Translation Table Base
Read/Write
3
Domain Access Control
Read/Write
4
Reserved
None
Data fault Status
(1)
Read/Write
(1)
5
Instruction fault status
Read/Write
6
Fault Address
Read/Write
7
Cache Operations
Read/Write
8
TLB operations
Unpredictable/Write
(2)
9
Cache lockdown
Read/Write
9
TCM region
Read/Write
10
TLB lockdown
Read/Write
11
Reserved
None
12
Reserved
None
13
(1)
FCSE PID
Read/Write
13
Context ID(1)
Read/Write
14
Reserved
None
15
Test configuration
Read/Write
1.
2.
44
Read/Write
(1)
(1)
5
Notes:
Name
Register locations 0, 5 and 13 each provide access to more than one register. The register accessed depends on
the value of the opcode_2 field.
Register location 9 provides access to more than one register. The register accessed depends on the value of the
CRm field.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.5.1
CP15 Registers Access
CP15 registers can only be accessed in privileged mode by:
MCR (Move to Coprocessor from ARM Register) instruction is used to write an ARM register to CP15.
MRC (Move to ARM Register from Coprocessor) instruction is used to read the value of CP15 to an ARM
register.
Other instructions like CDP, LDC, STC can cause an undefined instruction exception.
The assembler code for these instructions is:
MCR/MRC{cond} p15, opcode_1, Rd, CRn, CRm, opcode_2.
The MCR, MRC instructions bit pattern is shown below:
31
30
29
28
cond
23
22
21
opcode_1
15
20
13
12
Rd
6
26
25
24
1
1
1
0
19
18
17
16
L
14
7
27
5
opcode_2
4
CRn
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
CRm
• CRm[3:0]: Specified Coprocessor Action
Determines specific coprocessor action. Its value is dependent on the CP15 register used. For details, refer to CP15 specific register behavior.
• opcode_2[7:5]
Determines specific coprocessor operation code. By default, set to 0.
• Rd[15:12]: ARM Register
Defines the ARM register whose value is transferred to the coprocessor. If R15 is chosen, the result is unpredictable.
• CRn[19:16]: Coprocessor Register
Determines the destination coprocessor register.
• L: Instruction Bit
0 = MCR instruction
1 = MRC instruction
• opcode_1[23:20]: Coprocessor Code
Defines the coprocessor specific code. Value is c15 for CP15.
• cond [31:28]: Condition
For more details, see Chapter 2 in ARM926EJ-S TRM, ref. DDI0198B.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
45
9.6
Memory Management Unit (MMU)
The ARM926EJ-S processor implements an enhanced ARM architecture v5 MMU to provide virtual memory
features required by operating systems like Symbian OS®, Windows CE, and Linux. These virtual memory features
are memory access permission controls and virtual to physical address translations.
The Virtual Address generated by the CPU core is converted to a Modified Virtual Address (MVA) by the FCSE
(Fast Context Switch Extension) using the value in CP15 register13. The MMU translates modified virtual
addresses to physical addresses by using a single, two-level page table set stored in physical memory. Each entry
in the set contains the access permissions and the physical address that correspond to the virtual address.
The first level translation tables contain 4096 entries indexed by bits [31:20] of the MVA. These entries contain a
pointer to either a 1 MB section of physical memory along with attribute information (access permissions, domain,
etc.) or an entry in the second level translation tables; coarse table and fine table.
The second level translation tables contain two subtables, coarse table and fine table. An entry in the coarse table
contains a pointer to both large pages and small pages along with access permissions. An entry in the fine table
contains a pointer to large, small and tiny pages.
Table 9-6 shows the different attributes of each page in the physical memory.
Table 9-6.
Mapping Details
Mapping Name
Mapping Size
Access Permission By
Subpage Size
Section
1 Mbyte
Section
-
Large Page
64 Kbytes
4 separated subpages
16 Kbytes
Small Page
4 Kbytes
4 separated subpages
1 Kbyte
Tiny Page
1 Kbyte
Tiny Page
-
The MMU consists of:
9.6.1
Access control logic
Translation Look-aside Buffer (TLB)
Translation table walk hardware
Access Control Logic
The access control logic controls access information for every entry in the translation table. The access control
logic checks two pieces of access information: domain and access permissions. The domain is the primary access
control mechanism for a memory region; there are 16 of them. It defines the conditions necessary for an access to
proceed. The domain determines whether the access permissions are used to qualify the access or whether they
should be ignored.
The second access control mechanism is access permissions that are defined for sections and for large, small and
tiny pages. Sections and tiny pages have a single set of access permissions whereas large and small pages can
be associated with 4 sets of access permissions, one for each subpage (quarter of a page).
9.6.2
Translation Look-aside Buffer (TLB)
The Translation Look-aside Buffer (TLB) caches translated entries and thus avoids going through the translation
process every time. When the TLB contains an entry for the MVA (Modified Virtual Address), the access control
logic determines if the access is permitted and outputs the appropriate physical address corresponding to the
MVA. If access is not permitted, the MMU signals the CPU core to abort.
If the TLB does not contain an entry for the MVA, the translation table walk hardware is invoked to retrieve the
translation information from the translation table in physical memory.
46
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9.6.3
Translation Table Walk Hardware
The translation table walk hardware is a logic that traverses the translation tables located in physical memory, gets
the physical address and access permissions and updates the TLB.
The number of stages in the hardware table walking is one or two depending whether the address is marked as a
section-mapped access or a page-mapped access.
There are three sizes of page-mapped accesses and one size of section-mapped access. Page-mapped accesses
are for large pages, small pages and tiny pages. The translation process always begins with a level one fetch. A
section-mapped access requires only a level one fetch, but a page-mapped access requires an additional level two
fetch. For further details on the MMU, please refer to chapter 3 in ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, ref.
DDI0198B.
9.6.4
MMU Faults
The MMU generates an abort on the following types of faults:
Alignment faults (for data accesses only)
Translation faults
Domain faults
Permission faults
The access control mechanism of the MMU detects the conditions that produce these faults. If the fault is a result
of memory access, the MMU aborts the access and signals the fault to the CPU core. The MMU retains status and
address information about faults generated by the data accesses in the data fault status register and fault address
register. It also retains the status of faults generated by instruction fetches in the instruction fault status register.
The fault status register (register 5 in CP15) indicates the cause of a data or prefetch abort, and the domain
number of the aborted access when it happens. The fault address register (register 6 in CP15) holds the MVA
associated with the access that caused the Data Abort. For further details on MMU faults, please refer to chapter 3
in ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, ref. DDI0198B.
9.7
Caches and Write Buffer
The ARM926EJ-S contains an 8 KB Instruction Cache (ICache), an 8 KB Data Cache (DCache), and a write
buffer. Although the ICache and DCache share common features, each still has some specific mechanisms.
The caches (ICache and DCache) are four-way set associative, addressed, indexed and tagged using the
Modified Virtual Address (MVA), with a cache line length of eight words with two dirty bits for the DCache. The
ICache and DCache provide mechanisms for cache lockdown, cache pollution control, and line replacement.
A new feature is now supported by ARM926EJ-S caches called allocate on read-miss commonly known as
wrapping. This feature enables the caches to perform critical word first cache refilling. This means that when a
request for a word causes a read-miss, the cache performs an AHB access. Instead of loading the whole line
(eight words), the cache loads the critical word first, so the processor can reach it quickly, and then the remaining
words, no matter where the word is located in the line.
The caches and the write buffer are controlled by the CP15 register 1 (Control), CP15 register 7 (cache
operations) and CP15 register 9 (cache lockdown).
9.7.1
Instruction Cache (ICache)
The ICache caches fetched instructions to be executed by the processor. The ICache can be enabled by writing 1
to I bit of the CP15 Register 1 and disabled by writing 0 to this same bit.
When the MMU is enabled, all instruction fetches are subject to translation and permission checks. If the MMU is
disabled, all instructions fetches are cachable, no protection checks are made and the physical address is flat-
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
47
mapped to the modified virtual address. With the MVA use disabled, context switching incurs ICache cleaning
and/or invalidating.
When the ICache is disabled, all instruction fetches appear on external memory (AHB) (see Tables 4-1 and 4-2 in
page 4-4 in ARM926EJ-S TRM, ref. DDI0198B).
On reset, the ICache entries are invalidated and the ICache is disabled. For best performance, ICache should be
enabled as soon as possible after reset.
9.7.2
Data Cache (DCache) and Write Buffer
ARM926EJ-S includes a DCache and a write buffer to reduce the effect of main memory bandwidth and latency on
data access performance. The operations of DCache and write buffer are closely connected.
9.7.2.1 DCache
The DCache needs the MMU to be enabled. All data accesses are subject to MMU permission and translation
checks. Data accesses that are aborted by the MMU do not cause linefills or data accesses to appear on the
AMBA AHB interface. If the MMU is disabled, all data accesses are noncachable, nonbufferable, with no protection
checks, and appear on the AHB bus. All addresses are flat-mapped, VA = MVA = PA, which incurs DCache
cleaning and/or invalidating every time a context switch occurs.
The DCache stores the Physical Address Tag (PA Tag) from which every line was loaded and uses it when writing
modified lines back to external memory. This means that the MMU is not involved in write-back operations.
Each line (8 words) in the DCache has two dirty bits, one for the first four words and the other one for the second
four words. These bits, if set, mark the associated half-lines as dirty. If the cache line is replaced due to a linefill or
a cache clean operation, the dirty bits are used to decide whether all, half or none is written back to memory.
DCache can be enabled or disabled by writing either 1 or 0 to bit C in register 1 of CP15 (see Tables 4-3 and 4-4
on page 4-5 in ARM926EJ-S TRM, ref. DDI0222B).
The DCache supports write-through and write-back cache operations, selected by memory region using the C and
B bits in the MMU translation tables.
The DCache contains an eight data word entry, single address entry write-back buffer used to hold write-back data
for cache line eviction or cleaning of dirty cache lines.
The Write Buffer can hold up to 16 words of data and four separate addresses. DCache and Write Buffer
operations are closely connected as their configuration is set in each section by the page descriptor in the MMU
translation table.
9.7.2.2 Write Buffer
The ARM926EJ-S contains a write buffer that has a 16-word data buffer and a four- address buffer. The write
buffer is used for all writes to a bufferable region, write-through region and write-back region. It also allows to avoid
stalling the processor when writes to external memory are performed. When a store occurs, data is written to the
write buffer at core speed (high speed). The write buffer then completes the store to external memory at bus speed
(typically slower than the core speed). During this time, the ARM9EJ-S processor can preform other tasks.
DCache and Write Buffer support write-back and write-through memory regions, controlled by C and B bits in each
section and page descriptor within the MMU translation tables.
Write-though Operation
When a cache write hit occurs, the DCache line is updated. The updated data is then written to the write buffer
which transfers it to external memory.
When a cache write miss occurs, a line, chosen by round robin or another algorithm, is stored in the write buffer
which transfers it to external memory.
48
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Write-back Operation
When a cache write hit occurs, the cache line or half line is marked as dirty, meaning that its contents are not upto-date with those in the external memory.
When a cache write miss occurs, a line, chosen by round robin or another algorithm, is stored in the write buffer
which transfers it to external memory.
9.8
Bus Interface Unit
The ARM926EJ-S features a Bus Interface Unit (BIU) that arbitrates and schedules AHB requests. The BIU
implements a multi-layer AHB, based on the AHB-Lite protocol, that enables parallel access paths between
multiple AHB masters and slaves in a system. This is achieved by using a more complex interconnection matrix
and gives the benefit of increased overall bus bandwidth, and a more flexible system architecture.
The multi-master bus architecture has a number of benefits:
9.8.1
It allows the development of multi-master systems with an increased bus bandwidth and a flexible
architecture.
Each AHB layer becomes simple because it only has one master, so no arbitration or master-to-slave
muxing is required. AHB layers, implementing AHB-Lite protocol, do not have to support request and grant,
nor do they have to support retry and split transactions.
The arbitration becomes effective when more than one master wants to access the same slave
simultaneously.
Supported Transfers
The ARM926EJ-S processor performs all AHB accesses as single word, bursts of four words, or bursts of eight
words. Any ARM9EJ-S core request that is not 1, 4, 8 words in size is split into packets of these sizes. Note that
the Atmel bus is AHB-Lite protocol compliant, hence it does not support split and retry requests.
Table 9-7 gives an overview of the supported transfers and different kinds of transactions they are used for.
Table 9-7.
HBurst[2:0]
Supported Transfers
Description
Operation
Single transfer of word, half word, or byte:
Single
Single transfer
data write (NCNB, NCB, WT, or WB that has missed in DCache)
data read (NCNB or NCB)
NC instruction fetch (prefetched and non-prefetched)
page table walk read
Incr4
Four-word incrementing burst
Half-line cache write-back, Instruction prefetch, if enabled. Four-word burst NCNB,
NCB, WT, or WB write.
Incr8
Eight-word incrementing burst
Full-line cache write-back, eight-word burst NCNB, NCB, WT, or WB write
Wrap8
Eight-word wrapping burst
Cache linefill
9.8.2
Thumb Instruction Fetches
All instructions fetches, regardless of the state of ARM9EJ-S core, are made as 32-bit accesses on the AHB. If the
ARM9EJ-S is in Thumb state, then two instructions can be fetched at a time.
9.8.3
Address Alignment
The ARM926EJ-S BIU performs address alignment checking and aligns AHB addresses to the necessary
boundary. 16-bit accesses are aligned to halfword boundaries, and 32-bit accesses are aligned to word
boundaries.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
49
10.
SAM9260 Debug and Test
10.1
Description
The SAM9260 features a number of complementary debug and test capabilities. A common JTAG/ICE (In-Circuit
Emulator) port is used for standard debugging functions, such as downloading code and single-stepping through
programs. The Debug Unit provides a two-pin UART that can be used to upload an application into internal SRAM.
It manages the interrupt handling of the internal COMMTX and COMMRX signals that trace the activity of the
Debug Communication Channel.
A set of dedicated debug and test input/output pins gives direct access to these capabilities from a PC-based test
environment.
10.2
Embedded Characteristics
50
ARM926 Real-time In-circuit Emulator
̶
Two real-time Watchpoint Units
̶
Two Independent Registers: Debug Control Register and Debug Status Register
̶
Test Access Port Accessible through JTAG Protocol
̶
Debug Communications Channel
Debug Unit
̶
Two-pin UART
̶
Debug Communication Channel Interrupt Handling
̶
Chip ID Register
IEEE1149.1 JTAG Boundary-scan on All Digital Pins
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Block Diagram
Figure 10-1.
Debug and Test Block Diagram
TMS
TCK
TDI
NTRST
ICE/JTAG
TAP
Boundary
Port
JTAGSEL
TDO
RTCK
POR
Reset
and
Test
ARM9EJ-S
TST
ICE-RT
ARM926EJ-S
PDC
DBGU
PIO
10.3
DTXD
DRXD
TAP: Test Access Port
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
51
10.4
Application Examples
10.4.1 Debug Environment
Figure 10-2 shows a complete debug environment example. The ICE/JTAG interface is used for standard
debugging functions, such as downloading code and single-stepping through the program. A software debugger
running on a personal computer provides the user interface for configuring a Trace Port interface utilizing the
ICE/JTAG interface.
Figure 10-2.
Application Debug and Trace Environment Example
Host Debugger
ICE/JTAG
Interface
ICE/JTAG
Connector
SAM9260
RS232
Connector
SAM9260-based Application Board
52
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Terminal
10.4.2 Test Environment
Figure 10-3 shows a test environment example. Test vectors are sent and interpreted by the tester. In this
example, the “board in test” is designed using a number of JTAG-compliant devices. These devices can be
connected to form a single scan chain.
Figure 10-3.
Application Test Environment Example
Test Adaptor
Tester
JTAG
Interface
ICE/JTAG
Connector
SAM9260
Chip n
Chip 2
Chip 1
SAM9260-based Application Board In Test
10.5
Debug and Test Pin Description
Table 10-1.
Pin Name
Debug and Test Pin List
Function
Type
Active Level
Input/Output
Low
Input
High
Low
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Mode Select
ICE and JTAG
NTRST
Test Reset Signal
Input
TCK
Test Clock
Input
TDI
Test Data In
Input
TDO
Test Data Out
TMS
Test Mode Select
RTCK
Returned Test Clock
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Output
Input
Output
Input
Debug Unit
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
53
10.6
Functional Description
10.6.1 Test Pin
One dedicated pin, TST, is used to define the device operating mode. The user must make sure that this pin is tied
at low level to ensure normal operating conditions. Other values associated with this pin are reserved for
manufacturing test.
10.6.2 EmbeddedICE
The ARM9EJ-S EmbeddedICE-RT™ is supported via the ICE/JTAG port. It is connected to a host computer via an
ICE interface. Debug support is implemented using an ARM9EJ-S core embedded within the ARM926EJ-S. The
internal state of the ARM926EJ-S is examined through an ICE/JTAG port which allows instructions to be serially
inserted into the pipeline of the core without using the external data bus. Therefore, when in debug state, a storemultiple (STM) can be inserted into the instruction pipeline. This exports the contents of the ARM9EJ-S registers.
This data can be serially shifted out without affecting the rest of the system.
There are two scan chains inside the ARM9EJ-S processor which support testing, debugging, and programming of
the EmbeddedICE-RT. The scan chains are controlled by the ICE/JTAG port.
EmbeddedICE mode is selected when JTAGSEL is low. It is not possible to switch directly between ICE and JTAG
operations. A chip reset must be performed after JTAGSEL is changed.
For further details on the EmbeddedICE-RT, see the ARM document ARM9EJ-S Technical Reference Manual
(DDI 0222A).
10.6.3 JTAG Signal Description
TMS is the Test Mode Select input which controls the transitions of the test interface state machine.
TDI is the Test Data Input line which supplies the data to the JTAG registers (Boundary Scan Register, Instruction
Register, or other data registers).
TDO is the Test Data Output line which is used to serially output the data from the JTAG registers to the equipment
controlling the test. It carries the sampled values from the boundary scan chain (or other JTAG registers) and
propagates them to the next chip in the serial test circuit.
NTRST (optional in IEEE Standard 1149.1) is a Test-ReSeT input which is mandatory in ARM cores and used to
reset the debug logic. On Atmel ARM926EJ-S-based cores, NTRST is a Power On Reset output. It is asserted on
power on. If necessary, the user can also reset the debug logic with the NTRST pin assertion during 2.5 MCK
periods.
TCK is the Test ClocK input which enables the test interface. TCK is pulsed by the equipment controlling the test
and not by the tested device. It can be pulsed at any frequency. Note the maximum JTAG clock rate on
ARM926EJ-S cores is 1/6th the clock of the CPU. This gives 5.45 kHz maximum initial JTAG clock rate for an
ARM9E running from the 32.768 kHz slow clock.
RTCK is the Return Test Clock. Not an IEEE Standard 1149.1 signal added for a better clock handling by
emulators. From some ICE Interface probes, this return signal can be used to synchronize the TCK clock and take
not care about the given ratio between the ICE Interface clock and system clock equal to 1/6th. This signal is only
available in JTAG ICE Mode and not in boundary scan mode.
10.6.4 Debug Unit
The Debug Unit provides a two-pin (DXRD and TXRD) USART that can be used for several debug and trace
purposes and offers an ideal means for in-situ programming solutions and debug monitor communication.
Moreover, the association with two peripheral data controller channels permits packet handling of these tasks with
processor time reduced to a minimum.
54
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
The Debug Unit also manages the interrupt handling of the COMMTX and COMMRX signals that come from the
ICE and that trace the activity of the Debug Communication Channel. The Debug Unit allows blockage of access
to the system through the ICE interface.
A specific register, the Debug Unit Chip ID Register, gives information about the product version and its internal
configuration.
The SAM9260 Debug Unit Chip ID value is 0x0198 03A0 on 32-bit width.
For further details on the Debug Unit, see Section 26. “Debug Unit (DBGU)”.
10.6.5 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan allows pin-level access independent of the device packaging technology.
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan is enabled when JTAGSEL is high. The SAMPLE, EXTEST and BYPASS
functions are implemented. In ICE debug mode, the ARM processor responds with a non-JTAG chip ID that
identifies the processor to the ICE system. This is not IEEE 1149.1 JTAG-compliant.
It is not possible to switch directly between JTAG and ICE operations. A chip reset must be performed after
JTAGSEL is changed.
A Boundary-scan Descriptor Language (BSDL) file is provided to set up test.
10.6.5.1 JTAG Boundary-scan Register
The Boundary-scan Register (BSR) contains 484 bits that correspond to active pins and associated control
signals.
Each SAM9260 input/output pin corresponds to a 3-bit register in the BSR. The OUTPUT bit contains data that
can be forced on the pad. The INPUT bit facilitates the observability of data applied to the pad. The CONTROL bit
selects the direction of the pad.
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
A0
IN/OUT
307
CONTROL
306
INPUT/OUTPUT
305
CONTROL
A1
IN/OUT
304
INPUT/OUTPUT
303
CONTROL
A10
IN/OUT
302
INPUT/OUTPUT
301
CONTROL
A11
IN/OUT
300
INPUT/OUTPUT
299
CONTROL
A12
IN/OUT
298
INPUT/OUTPUT
297
CONTROL
A13
IN/OUT
296
INPUT/OUTPUT
295
CONTROL
A14
IN/OUT
294
INPUT/OUTPUT
293
CONTROL
A15
292
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
55
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
A16
IN/OUT
291
CONTROL
290
INPUT/OUTPUT
289
CONTROL
A17
IN/OUT
288
INPUT/OUTPUT
287
CONTROL
A18
IN/OUT
286
INPUT/OUTPUT
285
CONTROL
A19
IN/OUT
284
INPUT/OUTPUT
283
CONTROL
A2
IN/OUT
282
INPUT/OUTPUT
281
CONTROL
A20
IN/OUT
280
INPUT/OUTPUT
279
CONTROL
A21
IN/OUT
278
INPUT/OUTPUT
277
CONTROL
A22
IN/OUT
276
INPUT/OUTPUT
275
CONTROL
A3
IN/OUT
274
INPUT/OUTPUT
273
CONTROL
A4
IN/OUT
272
INPUT/OUTPUT
271
CONTROL
A5
IN/OUT
270
INPUT/OUTPUT
269
CONTROL
A6
IN/OUT
268
INPUT/OUTPUT
267
CONTROL
A7
IN/OUT
266
INPUT/OUTPUT
265
CONTROL
A8
IN/OUT
264
INPUT/OUTPUT
263
CONTROL
A9
IN/OUT
262
261
INPUT/OUTPUT
BMS
INPUT
CAS
IN/OUT
260
INPUT/OUTPUT
258
CONTROL
D0
IN/OUT
257
INPUT/OUTPUT
256
CONTROL
D1
56
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
INPUT
CONTROL
259
255
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
D10
IN/OUT
254
CONTROL
253
INPUT/OUTPUT
252
CONTROL
D11
IN/OUT
251
INPUT/OUTPUT
250
CONTROL
D12
IN/OUT
249
INPUT/OUTPUT
248
CONTROL
D13
IN/OUT
247
INPUT/OUTPUT
246
CONTROL
D14
IN/OUT
245
INPUT/OUTPUT
244
CONTROL
D15
IN/OUT
243
INPUT/OUTPUT
242
CONTROL
D2
IN/OUT
241
INPUT/OUTPUT
240
CONTROL
D3
IN/OUT
239
INPUT/OUTPUT
238
CONTROL
D4
IN/OUT
237
INPUT/OUTPUT
236
CONTROL
D5
IN/OUT
235
INPUT/OUTPUT
234
CONTROL
D6
IN/OUT
233
INPUT/OUTPUT
232
CONTROL
D7
IN/OUT
231
INPUT/OUTPUT
230
CONTROL
D8
IN/OUT
229
INPUT/OUTPUT
228
CONTROL
D9
IN/OUT
227
INPUT/OUTPUT
226
CONTROL
NANDOE
IN/OUT
225
INPUT/OUTPUT
224
CONTROL
NANDWE
IN/OUT
223
INPUT/OUTPUT
222
CONTROL
NCS0
IN/OUT
221
INPUT/OUTPUT
220
CONTROL
NCS1
219
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
57
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
NRD
IN/OUT
218
CONTROL
217
INPUT/OUTPUT
216
CONTROL
NRST
IN/OUT
215
INPUT/OUTPUT
214
CONTROL
NWR0
IN/OUT
213
INPUT/OUTPUT
212
CONTROL
NWR1
IN/OUT
211
INPUT/OUTPUT
210
CONTROL
NWR3
IN/OUT
209
208
INPUT/OUTPUT
OSCSEL
INPUT
PA0
IN/OUT
207
INPUT/OUTPUT
205
CONTROL
PA1
IN/OUT
204
INPUT/OUTPUT
203
CONTROL
PA10
IN/OUT
202
INPUT/OUTPUT
201
CONTROL
PA11
IN/OUT
200
INPUT/OUTPUT
199
CONTROL
PA12
IN/OUT
198
INPUT/OUTPUT
197
CONTROL
PA13
IN/OUT
196
INPUT/OUTPUT
195
CONTROL
PA14
IN/OUT
194
INPUT/OUTPUT
193
CONTROL
PA15
IN/OUT
192
INPUT/OUTPUT
191
CONTROL
PA16
IN/OUT
190
INPUT/OUTPUT
189
CONTROL
PA17
IN/OUT
188
INPUT/OUTPUT
187
CONTROL
PA18
IN/OUT
186
INPUT/OUTPUT
185
CONTROL
PA19
IN/OUT
184
INPUT/OUTPUT
183
CONTROL
PA2
182
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
INPUT
CONTROL
206
58
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
PA20
IN/OUT
181
CONTROL
180
INPUT/OUTPUT
179
CONTROL
PA21
IN/OUT
178
INPUT/OUTPUT
177
CONTROL
PA22
IN/OUT
176
INPUT/OUTPUT
175
CONTROL
PA23
IN/OUT
174
INPUT/OUTPUT
173
CONTROL
PA24
IN/OUT
172
INPUT/OUTPUT
171
CONTROL
PA25
IN/OUT
170
INPUT/OUTPUT
169
CONTROL
PA26
IN/OUT
168
INPUT/OUTPUT
167
CONTROL
PA27
IN/OUT
166
INPUT/OUTPUT
165
CONTROL
PA28
IN/OUT
164
INPUT/OUTPUT
163
CONTROL
PA29
IN/OUT
162
INPUT/OUTPUT
161
CONTROL
PA3
IN/OUT
160
INPUT/OUTPUT
159
internal
158
internal
157
internal
156
internal
155
CONTROL
PA4
IN/OUT
154
INPUT/OUTPUT
153
CONTROL
PA5
IN/OUT
152
INPUT/OUTPUT
151
CONTROL
PA6
IN/OUT
150
INPUT/OUTPUT
149
CONTROL
PA7
IN/OUT
148
INPUT/OUTPUT
147
CONTROL
PA8
146
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
59
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
PA9
IN/OUT
145
CONTROL
144
INPUT/OUTPUT
143
CONTROL
PB0
IN/OUT
142
INPUT/OUTPUT
141
CONTROL
PB1
IN/OUT
140
INPUT/OUTPUT
139
CONTROL
PB10
IN/OUT
138
INPUT/OUTPUT
137
CONTROL
PB11
IN/OUT
136
INPUT/OUTPUT
135
internal
134
internal
133
internal
132
internal
131
CONTROL
PB14
IN/OUT
130
INPUT/OUTPUT
129
CONTROL
PB15
IN/OUT
128
INPUT/OUTPUT
127
CONTROL
PB16
IN/OUT
126
INPUT/OUTPUT
125
CONTROL
PB17
IN/OUT
124
INPUT/OUTPUT
123
CONTROL
PB18
IN/OUT
122
INPUT/OUTPUT
121
CONTROL
PB19
IN/OUT
120
INPUT/OUTPUT
119
CONTROL
PB2
IN/OUT
118
INPUT/OUTPUT
117
CONTROL
PB20
IN/OUT
116
INPUT/OUTPUT
115
CONTROL
PB21
IN/OUT
114
INPUT/OUTPUT
113
CONTROL
PB22
IN/OUT
112
INPUT/OUTPUT
111
CONTROL
PB23
110
60
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
PB24
IN/OUT
109
CONTROL
108
INPUT/OUTPUT
107
CONTROL
PB25
IN/OUT
106
INPUT/OUTPUT
105
CONTROL
PB26
IN/OUT
104
INPUT/OUTPUT
103
CONTROL
PB27
IN/OUT
102
INPUT/OUTPUT
101
CONTROL
PB28
IN/OUT
100
INPUT/OUTPUT
99
CONTROL
PB29
IN/OUT
98
INPUT/OUTPUT
97
CONTROL
PB3
IN/OUT
96
INPUT/OUTPUT
95
CONTROL
PB30
IN/OUT
94
INPUT/OUTPUT
93
CONTROL
PB31
IN/OUT
92
INPUT/OUTPUT
91
CONTROL
PB4
IN/OUT
90
INPUT/OUTPUT
89
CONTROL
PB5
IN/OUT
88
INPUT/OUTPUT
87
CONTROL
PB6
IN/OUT
86
INPUT/OUTPUT
85
CONTROL
PB7
IN/OUT
84
INPUT/OUTPUT
83
CONTROL
PB8
IN/OUT
82
INPUT/OUTPUT
81
CONTROL
PB9
IN/OUT
80
INPUT/OUTPUT
79
CONTROL
PC0
IN/OUT
78
INPUT/OUTPUT
77
CONTROL
PC1
IN/OUT
76
INPUT/OUTPUT
75
CONTROL
PC10
74
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
61
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
PC11
IN/OUT
73
CONTROL
72
INPUT/OUTPUT
71
internal
70
internal
69
CONTROL
PC13
IN/OUT
68
INPUT/OUTPUT
67
CONTROL
PC14
IN/OUT
66
INPUT/OUTPUT
65
CONTROL
PC15
IN/OUT
64
INPUT/OUTPUT
63
CONTROL
PC16
IN/OUT
62
INPUT/OUTPUT
61
CONTROL
PC17
IN/OUT
60
INPUT/OUTPUT
59
CONTROL
PC18
IN/OUT
58
INPUT/OUTPUT
57
CONTROL
PC19
IN/OUT
56
INPUT/OUTPUT
55
internal
54
internal
53
CONTROL
PC20
IN/OUT
52
INPUT/OUTPUT
51
CONTROL
PC21
IN/OUT
50
INPUT/OUTPUT
49
CONTROL
PC22
IN/OUT
48
INPUT/OUTPUT
47
CONTROL
PC23
IN/OUT
46
INPUT/OUTPUT
45
CONTROL
PC24
IN/OUT
44
INPUT/OUTPUT
43
CONTROL
PC25
IN/OUT
42
INPUT/OUTPUT
41
CONTROL
PC26
IN/OUT
40
INPUT/OUTPUT
39
CONTROL
PC27
38
62
Associated BSR Cells
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
PC28
IN/OUT
37
CONTROL
36
INPUT/OUTPUT
35
CONTROL
PC29
IN/OUT
34
INPUT/OUTPUT
33
internal
32
internal
31
CONTROL
PC30
IN/OUT
30
INPUT/OUTPUT
29
CONTROL
PC31
IN/OUT
28
INPUT/OUTPUT
27
CONTROL
PC4
IN/OUT
26
INPUT/OUTPUT
25
CONTROL
PC5
IN/OUT
24
INPUT/OUTPUT
23
CONTROL
PC6
IN/OUT
22
INPUT/OUTPUT
21
CONTROL
PC7
IN/OUT
20
INPUT/OUTPUT
19
CONTROL
PC8
IN/OUT
18
INPUT/OUTPUT
17
CONTROL
PC9
IN/OUT
16
INPUT/OUTPUT
15
CONTROL
RAS
IN/OUT
14
INPUT/OUTPUT
13
CONTROL
RTCK
OUT
12
OUTPUT
11
CONTROL
SDA10
IN/OUT
10
INPUT/OUTPUT
09
CONTROL
SDCK
IN/OUT
08
INPUT/OUTPUT
07
CONTROL
SDCKE
IN/OUT
06
INPUT/OUTPUT
05
CONTROL
SDWE
04
Associated BSR Cells
IN/OUT
INPUT/OUTPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
63
Table 10-2.
SAM9260 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
SHDN
OUT
03
CONTROL
02
64
Associated BSR Cells
OUTPUT
01
TST
INPUT
INPUT
00
WKUP
INPUT
INPUT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
10.6.6 JID Code Register
Access: Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
VERSION
23
22
26
25
24
PART NUMBER
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
PART NUMBER
15
14
13
12
11
PART NUMBER
7
6
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
5
4
3
2
1
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
0
1
• VERSION[31:28]: Product Version Number
Set to 0x0.
• PART NUMBER[27:12]: Product Part Number
Product part Number is 0x5B13
• MANUFACTURER IDENTITY[11:1]
Set to 0x01F.i
Bit[0] required by IEEE Std. 1149.1.
Set to 0x1.
JTAG ID Code value is 0x05B1_303F.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
65
11.
SAM9260 Boot Program
11.1
Description
The Boot Program integrates different programs permitting download and/or upload into the different memories of
the product.
First, it initializes the Debug Unit serial port (DBGU) and the USB Device Port.
Then the DataFlash Boot program is executed. It looks for a sequence of eight valid ARM exception vectors in a
DataFlash connected to the SPI. All these vectors must be B-branch or LDR load register instructions except for
the sixth vector. This vector is used to store the size of the image to download.
If a valid sequence is found, code is downloaded into the internal SRAM. This is followed by a remap and a jump to
the first address of the SRAM.
If no valid ARM vector sequence is found, the DataFlash Boot program is executed on the second chip select.
If no valid ARM vector sequence is found, NAND Flash Boot program is then executed.
The NAND Flash Boot program looks for a sequence of eight valid ARM exception vectors. If such a sequence is
found, code is downloaded into the internal SRAM. This is followed by a remap and a jump to the first address of
the SRAM.
If no valid ARM vector sequence is found, SAM-BA Monitor is then executed. It waits for transactions either on the
USB device, or on the DBGU serial port.
66
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
11.2
Flow Diagram
The Boot Program implements the algorithm in Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1.
Boot Program Algorithm Flow Diagram
Start
Internal RC Oscillator
Yes
Main Oscillator Bypass
No
No
Large
Crystal Table
Reduced
Crystal Table
SPI DataFlash Boot
Yes
Input Frequency
Table
Yes
Download from
DataFlash (NPCS0)
Run
DataFlash Boot
Yes
Download from
DataFlash (NPCS1)
Run
DataFlash Boot
Yes
Download from
NAND Flash
Run
NandFlash Boot
No
SPI DataFlash Boot
No
NAND Flash Boot
No
No
USB Enumeration
Successful ?
Yes
Run SAM-BA Monitor
No
Character(s) received
on DBGU ?
SAM-BA Monitor
Yes
Run SAM-BA Monitor
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
67
11.3
Device Initialization
Initialization follows the steps described below:
1.
FIQ Initialization
2.
Stack setup for ARM supervisor mode
3.
External Clock Detection
4.
Switch Master Clock on Main Oscillator
5.
C variable initialization
6.
Main oscillator frequency detection if no external clock detected
7.
PLL setup: PLLB is initialized to generate a 48 MHz clock necessary to use the USB Device. A register
located in the Power Management Controller (PMC) determines the frequency of the main oscillator and
thus the correct factor for the PLLB.
a. If Internal RC Oscillator is used (OSCSEL = 0) and Main Oscillator is active, Table 11-1 defines the crystals
supported by the Boot Program when using the internal RC oscillator.
Table 11-1.
Reduced Crystal Table (MHz) OSCSEL = 0
3.0
6.0
18.432
Other
Boot on DBGU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Boot on USB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Note:
Any other crystal can be used but it prevents using the USB.
b.
If Internal RC Oscillator is used (OSCSEL = 0) and Main Oscillator is bypassed, Table 11-2 defines the frequencies supported by the Boot Program when bypassing main oscillator.
Table 11-2.
1.0
2.0
6.0
12.0
25.0
50.0
Other
Boot on DBGU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Boot on USB
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Note:
Any other input frequency can be used but it prevents using the USB.
c.
Table 11-3.
If an external 32.768 kHz Oscillator is used (OSCSEL = 1), Table 11-3 defines the crystals supported by the
Boot Program.
Large Crystal Table (MHz) OSCSEL = 1
3.0
3.2768
3.6864
3.84
4.0
4.433619
4.9152
5.0
5.24288
6.0
6.144
6.4
6.5536
7.159090
7.3728
7.864320
8.0
9.8304
10.0
11.05920
12.0
12.288
13.56
14.31818
14.7456
16.0
16.367667
17.734470
18.432
20.0
Note:
68
Input Frequencies Supported by Software Auto-detection (MHz) OSCSEL = 0
Booting either on USB or on DBGU is possible with any of these crystals.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
d.
Table 11-4.
If an external 32.768 kHz Oscillator is used (OSCSEL = 1) and Main Oscillator is bypassed, Table 11-4
defines the crystals supported by the Boot Program.
Input Frequencies Supported (OSCSEL = 1)
3.0
3.2768
3.6864
3.84
4.0
4.433619
4.9152
5.0
5.24288
6.0
6.144
6.4
6.5536
7.159090
7.3728
7.864320
8.0
9.8304
10.0
11.05920
12.0
12.288
13.56
14.31818
14.7456
16.0
16.367667
17.734470
18.432
20.0
24
25
28.224
32
33
40.0
48.0
50.0
Note:
Booting either on USB or on DBGU is possible with any of these input frequencies.
8.
Initialization of the DBGU serial port (115200 baud, 8, N, 1) only if OSCSEL = 1
9.
Jump to DataFlash Boot sequence through NPCS0. If DataFlash Boot succeeds, perform a remap and jump
to 0x0.
10. Jump to DataFlash Boot sequence through NPCS1. If DataFlash Boot succeeds, perform a remap and jump
to 0x0.
11. Jump to NAND Flash Boot sequence. If NAND Flash Boot succeeds, perform a remap and jump to 0x0.
12. Activation of the Instruction Cache
13. Jump to SAM-BA Monitor sequence
14. Disable the WatchDog
15. Initialization of the USB Device Port
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
69
Figure 11-2.
Clocks and DBGU Configurations
Start
No
Internal RC Oscillator?
(OSCSEL = 0)
Scan Large Crystal Table
or
Input Frequencies Supported (OSCEL =1
Scan Reduced Cystal Table
or
Inut Frequencies Supported by
Software Auto-detection
MCK = PLLB/2
UDPCK = PLLB/2
MCK = Mosc
UDPCK = PLLB/2
"ROMBoot>" displayed on DBGU
DBGU not configured
DataFlash Boot ?
NANDFlash Boot ?
Yes
DataFlash Boot ?
NANDFlash Boot ?
End
No
End
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Yes
End
No
No
70
Yes
(USB)
Autobaudrate ?
Yes (DBGU)
MCK = Mosc
UDPCK = PLLB/2
MCK = PLLB
UDPCK = xxxx
DBGU not configured
DBGU configured
End
End
Figure 11-3.
Remap Action after Download Completion
0x0000_0000
0x0000_0000
Internal
ROM
Internal
SRAM
REMAP
0x0030_0000
0x0010_0000
Internal
SRAM
11.4
Internal
ROM
DataFlash Boot
The DataFlash Boot program searches for a valid application in the SPI DataFlash memory. If a valid application is
found, this application is loaded into internal SRAM and executed by branching at address 0x0000_0000 after
remap. This application may be the application code or a second-level bootloader.
All the calls to functions are PC relative and do not use absolute addresses.
11.4.1 Valid Image Detection
The DataFlash Boot software looks for a valid application by analyzing the first 28 bytes corresponding to the ARM
exception vectors. These bytes must implement ARM instructions for either branch or load PC with PC relative
addressing.
The sixth vector, at offset 0x14, contains the size of the image to download. The user must replace this vector with
his own vector (see Section 11.4.2 “Structure of ARM Vector 6”).
Figure 11-4.
LDR Opcode
31
1
28 27
1
Figure 11-5.
1
0
24 23
1
I
P
U
20 19
0
W
1
16 15
Rn
12 11
Rd
0
Addressing Mode
B Opcode
31
1
0
28 27
1
1
0
1
24 23
0
1
0
0
Offset (24 bits)
Unconditional instruction: 0xE for bits 31 to 28
Load PC with PC relative addressing instruction:
̶
Rn = Rd = PC = 0xF
̶
I==1
̶
P==1
̶
U offset added (U==1) or subtracted (U==0)
̶
W==1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
71
11.4.2 Structure of ARM Vector 6
The ARM exception vector 6 is used to store information needed by the DataFlash boot program. This information
is described below.
Figure 11-6.
Structure of the ARM Vector 6
31
0
Size of the code to download in bytes
11.4.2.1 Example
An example of valid vectors follows:
Address
Value
00
ea000006
04
eafffffe
08
ea00002f
0c
eafffffe
10
eafffffe
14
00001000
18
eafffffe
Code
B 0x20
B 0x04
B _main
B 0x0c
B 0x10
Code size = 4096 bytes (less than or equal to 4096 bytes)
B 0x18
The size of the image to load into SRAM is contained in the location of the sixth ARM vector. Thus the user must
replace this vector by the correct vector for his application.
11.4.3 DataFlash Boot Sequence
The DataFlash boot program performs device initialization followed by the download procedure.
The DataFlash boot program supports the DataFlash devices listed in Table 11-5. The table summarizes the
parameters to include in the ARM vector 6 for all devices.
Table 11-5.
DataFlash Devices
Device
Density
Page Size (bytes)
Number of Pages
AT45DB011
1 Mbit
264
512
AT45DB021
2 Mbits
264
1024
AT45DB041
4 Mbits
264
2048
AT45DB081
8 Mbits
264
4096
AT45DB161
16 Mbits
528
4096
AT45DB321
32 Mbits
528
8192
AT45DB642
64 Mbits
1056
8192
The DataFlash has a Status Register that determines all the parameters required to access the device. The
DataFlash boot is configured to be compatible with the future design of the DataFlash.
72
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 11-7.
Serial DataFlash Download
Start
Send status command
Is status OK ?
No
Jump to next boot
solution
Yes
Read the first 7 instructions (28 bytes).
Decode the sixth ARM vector
7 vectors
(except vector 6) are LDR
or Branch instruction
No
Yes
Read the DataFlash into the internal SRAM.
(code size to read in vector 6)
Restore the reset value for the peripherals.
Set the PC to 0 and perform the REMAP
to jump to the downloaded application
End
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
73
11.5
NAND Flash Boot
The NAND Flash Boot program searches for a valid application in the NAND Flash memory. The first block must
be guaranteed by the manufacturer. There is no ECC.
The NAND Flash Boot program searches for a valid application in the NAND Flash memory. If a valid application is
found, this application is loaded into internal SRAM and executed by branching at address 0x0000_0000 after
remap. See “DataFlash Boot” on page 71 for more information on Valid Image Detection.
Note:
It is not necessary to indicate size to download in ARM vector 6 as 4096 bytes are downloaded in every case.
11.5.1 Supported NAND Flash Devices
Any 8 or 16-bits NAND Flash Devices from 1 Mbit to 16 Gbit density are supported.
Table 11-6.
Supported NAND Flash Manufacturers
Manufacturer
74
Identifier
TOSHIBA
0x98
SAMSUNG
0xEC
FUJITSU
0x04
NATIONAL Semiconductor
0x8F
RENESAS
0x07
ST Microelectronics
0x20
MICRON
0x2C
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
11.6
SAM-BA Monitor
If no valid DataFlash device has been found during the DataFlash boot sequence, the SAM-BA Monitor program is
performed.
The SAM-BA Monitor principle is to:
̶
Check if USB Device enumeration has occurred.
̶
Check if the AutoBaudrate sequence has succeeded (see Figure 11-8)
̶
Figure 11-8.
Check if characters have been received on the DBGU if MCK is configured to 48 MHz (OSCSEL = 1).
AutoBaudrate Flow Diagram
Device
Setup
Character '0x80'
received ?
No
1st measurement
Yes
Character '0x80'
received ?
No
2nd measurement
No
Test Communication
Yes
Character '#'
received ?
Yes
Send Character '>'
UART operational
Run SAM-BA Monitor
Once the communication interface is identified, the application runs in an infinite loop waiting for different
commands as listed in Table 11-7 on page 76.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
75
11.6.1 Command List
Table 11-7.
Command
Action
Argument(s)
Example
N
set Normal mode
No argument
N#
T
set Terminal mode
No argument
T#
O
write a byte
Address, Value#
O200001,CA#
o
read a byte
Address,#
o200001,#
H
write a half word
Address, Value#
H200002,CAFE#
h
read a half word
Address,#
h200002,#
W
write a word
Address, Value#
W200000,CAFEDECA#
w
read a word
Address,#
w200000,#
S
send a file
Address,#
S200000,#
R
receive a file
Address, NbOfBytes#
R200000,1234#
G
go
Address#
G200200#
V
display version
No argument
V#
Mode commands:
̶
Normal mode configures SAM-BA Monitor to send / receive data in binary format,
̶
̶
̶
̶
Address: Address in hexadecimal
̶
Output: The byte, halfword or word read in hexadecimal following by ‘>’
Send a file (S): Send a file to a specified address
̶
Address: Address in hexadecimal
̶
Output: ‘>’.
There is a time-out on this command which is reached when the prompt ‘>’ appears before the end of the command
execution.
Receive a file (R): Receive data into a file from a specified address
̶
̶
Value: Byte, halfword or word to write in hexadecimal.
Output: ‘>’.
̶
Address: Address in hexadecimal.
Read commands: Read a byte (o), a halfword (h) or a word (w) from the target.
Note:
Terminal mode configures SAM-BA Monitor to send / receive data in ascii format.
Write commands: Write a byte (O), a halfword (H) or a word (W) to the target.
̶
Address: Address in hexadecimal
NbOfBytes: Number of bytes in hexadecimal to receive
Output: ‘>’
Go (G): Jump to a specified address and execute the code
̶
Address: Address to jump in hexadecimal
̶
Output: ‘>’
Get Version (V): Return the SAM-BA Monitor version
̶
76
Commands Available through the SAM-BA Monitor
Output: ROM code version, date and time (example: v1.7 Jul 13 2007 14:54:32), followed by the
prompt ‘>’
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
11.6.2 DBGU Serial Port
Communication is performed through the DBGU serial port initialized to 115200 baud, 8, n, 1.
11.6.3 Xmodem Protocol
The Send and Receive File commands use the Xmodem protocol to communicate. Any terminal performing this
protocol can be used to send the application file to the target. The size of the binary file to send depends on the
SRAM size embedded in the product. In all cases, the size of the binary file must be lower than the SRAM size
because the Xmodem protocol requires some SRAM memory to work.
The Xmodem protocol supported is the 128-byte length block. This protocol uses a two-character CRC-16 to
guarantee detection of a maximum bit error.
Xmodem protocol with CRC is accurate provided both sender and receiver report successful transmission. Each
block of the transfer looks like:
<SOH><blk #><255-blk #><--128 data bytes--><checksum> in which:
̶
<SOH> = 01 hex
̶
<blk #> = binary number, starts at 01, increments by 1, and wraps 0FFH to 00H (not to 01)
̶
<255-blk #> = 1’s complement of the blk#.
̶
<checksum> = 2 bytes CRC16
Figure 11-9 shows a transmission using this protocol.
Figure 11-9.
Xmodem Transfer Example
Host
Device
C
SOH 01 FE Data[128] CRC CRC
ACK
SOH 02 FD Data[128] CRC CRC
ACK
SOH 03 FC Data[100] CRC CRC
ACK
EOT
ACK
11.6.4 USB Device Port
A 48 MHz USB clock is necessary to use the USB Device port. It has been programmed earlier in the device
initialization procedure with PLLB configuration.
The device uses the USB communication device class (CDC) drivers to take advantage of the installed PC RS-232
software to talk over the USB. The CDC class is implemented in all releases of Windows ® , beginning with
Windows 98SE. The CDC document, available at www.usb.org, describes a way to implement devices such as
ISDN modems and virtual COM ports.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
77
The Vendor ID is Atmel’s vendor ID 0x03EB. The product ID is 0x6124. These references are used by the host
operating system to mount the correct driver. On Windows systems, the INF files contain the correspondence
between vendor ID and product ID.
Atmel provides an INF example to see the device as a new serial port and also provides another custom driver
used by the SAM-BA application: atm6124.sys. Refer to the document USB Basic Application, literature number
6123, for more details.
11.6.4.1 Enumeration Process
The USB protocol is a master/slave protocol. This is the host that starts the enumeration sending requests to the
device through the control endpoint. The device handles standard requests as defined in the USB Specification.
Table 11-8.
Handled Standard Requests
Request
Definition
GET_DESCRIPTOR
Returns the current device configuration value.
SET_ADDRESS
Sets the device address for all future device access.
SET_CONFIGURATION
Sets the device configuration.
GET_CONFIGURATION
Returns the current device configuration value.
GET_STATUS
Returns status for the specified recipient.
SET_FEATURE
Used to set or enable a specific feature.
CLEAR_FEATURE
Used to clear or disable a specific feature.
The device also handles some class requests defined in the CDC class.
Table 11-9.
Handled Class Requests
Request
Definition
SET_LINE_CODING
Configures DTE rate, stop bits, parity and number of character bits.
GET_LINE_CODING
Requests current DTE rate, stop bits, parity and number of character bits.
SET_CONTROL_LINE_STATE
RS-232 signal used to tell the DCE device the DTE device is now present.
Unhandled requests are STALLed.
11.6.4.2 Communication Endpoints
There are two communication endpoints and endpoint 0 is used for the enumeration process. Endpoint 1 is a 64byte Bulk OUT endpoint and endpoint 2 is a 64-byte Bulk IN endpoint. SAM-BA Monitor commands are sent by the
host through the endpoint 1. If required, the message is split by the host into several data payloads by the host
driver.
If the command requires a response, the host can send IN transactions to pick up the response.
78
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
11.7
Hardware and Software Constraints
The SAM-BA Monitor can use two blocks of internal SRAM. The first block is available for user code. Its size
is 4 Kbytes. The second block is used for variables and stacks.
Table 11-10.
User Area Address
Start Address
End Address
Size (bytes)
0x200000
0x201000
4096
The DataFlash and NAND Flash downloaded code size must be inferior to 4096 bytes.
The code is always downloaded from the device address 0x0000_0000 to the address 0x0000_0000 of the
internal SRAM (after remap).
The downloaded code must be position-independent or linked at address 0x0000_0000.
The DataFlash must be connected to NPCS0 and/or NPCS1 of the SPI.
USB requirements:
̶
Crystal or Input Frequencies supported by Software Auto-detection. See Table 11-1, Table 11-2 and
Table 11-3 on page 68 for more information.
The SPI and NAND Flash drivers use several PIOs in alternate functions to communicate with devices. Care must
be taken when these PIOs are used by the application. The devices connected could be unintentionally driven at
boot time, and electrical conflicts between SPI output pins and the connected devices may appear.
To assure correct functionality, it is recommended to plug in critical devices to other pins.
Table 11-11 contains a list of pins that are driven during the boot program execution. These pins are driven during
the boot sequence for a period of less than 1 second if no correct boot program is found.
For the DataFlash driven by the SPCK signal at 1 MHz, the time to download 4096 bytes is reduced to 200 ms.
Before performing the jump to the application in internal SRAM, all the PIOs and peripherals used in the boot
program are set to their reset state.
Table 11-11.
11.8
Pins Driven During Boot Program Execution
Peripheral
Pin
PIO Line
SPI0
MOSI
PIOA1
SPI0
MISO
PIOA0
SPI0
SPCK
PIOA2
SPI0
NPCS0
PIOA3
SPI0
NPCS1
PIOC11
PIOC
NANDCS
PIOC14
DBGU
DRXD
PIOB14
DBGU
DTXD
PIOB15
ROM Code Change Log
Here are the evolutions between ROM Code V1.4 and V1.7:
User Reset is no longer enabled
NAND Flash Ready/Busy pin (PIOC 13) is no longer used
There are no more Timeouts in the NAND Flash Boot sequence
Note:
To know which ROM Code version is in the chip, use the SAM-BA Monitor command “V#” (see Table 11-8 on page
78).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
79
12.
Reset Controller (RSTC)
12.1
Description
The Reset Controller (RSTC), based on power-on reset cells, handles all the resets of the system without any
external components. It reports which reset occurred last.
The Reset Controller also drives independently or simultaneously the external reset and the peripheral and
processor resets.
12.2
Embedded Characteristics
Based on two Power-On Reset cells
Status of the last reset
̶
One on VDDBU and one on VDDCORE
̶
Either general reset (VDDBU rising), wake-up reset (VDDCORE rising), software reset, user reset or
watchdog reset
Controls the internal resets and the NRST pin output
̶
12.3
Allows shaping a reset signal for the external devices
Block Diagram
Figure 12-1.
Reset Controller Block Diagram
Reset Controller
Main Supply
POR
Backup Supply
POR
rstc_irq
Startup
Counter
Reset
State
Manager
proc_nreset
user_reset
NRST
nrst_out
NRST
Manager
periph_nreset
exter_nreset
backup_neset
WDRPROC
wd_fault
SLCK
80
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.4
Functional Description
12.4.1 Reset Controller Overview
The Reset Controller is made up of an NRST Manager, a Startup Counter and a Reset State Manager. It runs at
Slow Clock and generates the following reset signals:
proc_nreset: Processor reset line. It also resets the Watchdog Timer.
backup_nreset: Affects all the peripherals powered by VDDBU.
periph_nreset: Affects the whole set of embedded peripherals.
nrst_out: Drives the NRST pin.
These reset signals are asserted by the Reset Controller, either on external events or on software action. The
Reset State Manager controls the generation of reset signals and provides a signal to the NRST Manager when an
assertion of the NRST pin is required.
The NRST Manager shapes the NRST assertion during a programmable time, thus controlling external device
resets.
The startup counter waits for the complete crystal oscillator startup. The wait delay is given by the crystal oscillator
startup time maximum value that can be found in the section Crystal Oscillator Characteristics in the Electrical
Characteristics section of the product documentation.
The Reset Controller Mode Register (RSTC_MR), allowing the configuration of the Reset Controller, is powered
with VDDBU, so that its configuration is saved as long as VDDBU is on.
12.4.2 NRST Manager
The NRST Manager samples the NRST input pin and drives this pin low when required by the Reset State
Manager. Figure 12-2 shows the block diagram of the NRST Manager.
Figure 12-2.
NRST Manager
RSTC_MR
URSTIEN
RSTC_SR
URSTS
NRSTL
rstc_irq
RSTC_MR
URSTEN
Other
interrupt
sources
user_reset
NRST
RSTC_MR
ERSTL
nrst_out
External Reset Timer
exter_nreset
12.4.2.1 NRST Signal or Interrupt
The NRST Manager samples the NRST pin at Slow Clock speed. When the line is detected low, a User Reset is
reported to the Reset State Manager.
However, the NRST Manager can be programmed to not trigger a reset when an assertion of NRST occurs.
Writing the bit URSTEN at 0 in RSTC_MR disables the User Reset trigger.
The level of the pin NRST can be read at any time in the bit NRSTL (NRST level) in RSTC_SR. As soon as the pin
NRST is asserted, the bit URSTS in RSTC_SR is set. This bit clears only when RSTC_SR is read.
The Reset Controller can also be programmed to generate an interrupt instead of generating a reset. To do so, the
bit URSTIEN in RSTC_MR must be written at 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
81
12.4.2.2 NRST External Reset Control
The Reset State Manager asserts the signal ext_nreset to assert the NRST pin. When this occurs, the “nrst_out”
signal is driven low by the NRST Manager for a time programmed by the field ERSTL in RSTC_MR. This assertion
duration, named EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH, lasts 2(ERSTL+1) Slow Clock cycles. This gives the approximate
duration of an assertion between 60 µs and 2 seconds. Note that ERSTL at 0 defines a two-cycle duration for the
NRST pulse.
This feature allows the Reset Controller to shape the NRST pin level, and thus to guarantee that the NRST line is
driven low for a time compliant with potential external devices connected on the system reset.
As the field is within RSTC_MR, which is backed-up, this field can be used to shape the system power-up reset for
devices requiring a longer startup time than the Slow Clock Oscillator.
12.4.3 BMS Sampling
The product matrix manages a boot memory that depends on the level on the BMS pin at reset. The BMS signal is
sampled three slow clock cycles after the Core Power-On Reset output rising edge.
Figure 12-3.
BMS Sampling
SLCK
Core Supply
POR output
BMS Signal
XXX
H or L
BMS sampling delay
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
12.4.4 Reset States
The Reset State Manager handles the different reset sources and generates the internal reset signals. It reports
the reset status in the field RSTTYP of the Status Register (RSTC_SR). The update of the field RSTTYP is
performed when the processor reset is released.
82
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.4.4.1 General Reset
A general reset occurs when VDDBU and VDDCORE are powered on. The backup supply POR cell output rises
and is filtered with a Startup Counter, which operates at Slow Clock. The purpose of this counter is to make sure
the Slow Clock oscillator is stable before starting up the device. The length of startup time is hardcoded to comply
with the Slow Clock Oscillator startup time.
After this time, the processor clock is released at Slow Clock and all the other signals remain valid for three cycles
for proper processor and logic reset. Then, all the reset signals are released and the field RSTTYP in RSTC_SR
reports a General Reset. As the RSTC_MR is reset, the NRST line rises two cycles after the backup_nreset, as
ERSTL defaults at value 0x0.
When VDDBU is detected low by the Backup Supply POR Cell, all resets signals are immediately asserted, even if
the Main Supply POR Cell does not report a Main Supply shutdown.
VDDBU only activates the backup_nreset signal.
The backup_nreset must be released so that any other reset can be generated by VDDCORE (Main Supply POR
output).
Figure 12-4 shows how the General Reset affects the reset signals.
Figure 12-4.
General Reset State
SLCK
Any
Freq.
MCK
Backup Supply
POR output
Startup Time
Main Supply
POR output
backup_nreset
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
XXX
0x0 = General Reset
XXX
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
BMS Sampling
EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
= 2 cycles
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
83
12.4.4.2 Wake-up Reset
The Wake-up Reset occurs when the Main Supply is down. When the Main Supply POR output is active, all the
reset signals are asserted except backup_nreset. When the Main Supply powers up, the POR output is
resynchronized on Slow Clock. The processor clock is then re-enabled during three Slow Clock cycles, depending
on the requirements of the ARM processor.
At the end of this delay, the processor and other reset signals rise. The field RSTTYP in RSTC_SR is updated to
report a Wake-up Reset.
The “nrst_out” remains asserted for EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH cycles. As RSTC_MR is backed-up, the
programmed number of cycles is applicable.
When the Main Supply is detected falling, the reset signals are immediately asserted. This transition is
synchronous with the output of the Main Supply POR.
Figure 12-5.
Wake-up State
SLCK
Any
Freq.
MCK
Main Supply
POR output
backup_nreset
Resynch.
2 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
XXX
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
= 4 cycles (ERSTL = 1)
84
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
0x1 = WakeUp Reset
XXX
12.4.4.3 User Reset
The User Reset is entered when a low level is detected on the NRST pin and the bit URSTEN in RSTC_MR is at 1.
The NRST input signal is resynchronized with SLCK to insure proper behavior of the system.
The User Reset is entered as soon as a low level is detected on NRST. The Processor Reset and the Peripheral
Reset are asserted.
The User Reset is left when NRST rises, after a two-cycle resynchronization time and a three-cycle processor
startup. The processor clock is re-enabled as soon as NRST is confirmed high.
When the processor reset signal is released, the RSTTYP field of the Status Register (RSTC_SR) is loaded with
the value 0x4, indicating a User Reset.
The NRST Manager guarantees that the NRST line is asserted for EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH Slow Clock
cycles, as programmed in the field ERSTL. However, if NRST does not rise after EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
because it is driven low externally, the internal reset lines remain asserted until NRST actually rises.
Figure 12-6.
User Reset State
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
NRST
Resynch.
2 cycles
Resynch.
2 cycles
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x4 = User Reset
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
>= EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
85
12.4.4.4 Software Reset
The Reset Controller offers several commands used to assert the different reset signals. These commands are
performed by writing the Control Register (RSTC_CR) with the following bits at 1:
PROCRST: Writing PROCRST at 1 resets the processor and the watchdog timer.
PERRST: Writing PERRST at 1 resets all the embedded peripherals, including the memory system, and, in
particular, the Remap Command. The Peripheral Reset is generally used for debug purposes.
EXTRST: Writing EXTRST at 1 asserts low the NRST pin during a time defined by the field ERSTL in the
Mode Register (RSTC_MR).
The software reset is entered if at least one of these bits is set by the software. All these commands can be
performed independently or simultaneously. The software reset lasts three Slow Clock cycles.
The internal reset signals are asserted as soon as the register write is performed. This is detected on the Master
Clock (MCK). They are released when the software reset is left, i.e., synchronously to SLCK.
If EXTRST is set, the nrst_out signal is asserted depending on the programming of the field ERSTL. However, the
resulting falling edge on NRST does not lead to a User Reset.
If and only if the PROCRST bit is set, the Reset Controller reports the software status in the field RSTTYP of the
Status Register (RSTC_SR). Other Software Resets are not reported in RSTTYP.
As soon as a software operation is detected, the bit SRCMP (Software Reset Command in Progress) is set in the
Status Register (RSTC_SR). It is cleared as soon as the software reset is left. No other software reset can be
performed while the SRCMP bit is set, and writing any value in RSTC_CR has no effect.
Figure 12-7.
Software Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
Write RSTC_CR
Resynch.
1 cycle
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
if PROCRST=1
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x3 = Software Reset
periph_nreset
if PERRST=1
NRST
(nrst_out)
if EXTRST=1
EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
SRCMP in RSTC_SR
86
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.4.4.5 Watchdog Reset
The Watchdog Reset is entered when a watchdog fault occurs. This state lasts three Slow Clock cycles.
When in Watchdog Reset, assertion of the reset signals depends on the WDRPROC bit in WDT_MR:
If WDRPROC is 0, the Processor Reset and the Peripheral Reset are asserted. The NRST line is also
asserted, depending on the programming of the field ERSTL. However, the resulting low level on NRST
does not result in a User Reset state.
If WDRPROC = 1, only the processor reset is asserted.
The Watchdog Timer is reset by the proc_nreset signal. As the watchdog fault always causes a processor reset if
WDRSTEN is set, the Watchdog Timer is always reset after a Watchdog Reset, and the Watchdog is enabled by
default and with a period set to a maximum.
When the WDRSTEN in WDT_MR bit is reset, the watchdog fault has no impact on the reset controller.
Figure 12-8.
Watchdog Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
wd_fault
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x2 = Watchdog Reset
periph_nreset
Only if
WDRPROC = 0
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
87
12.4.5 Reset State Priorities
The Reset State Manager manages the following priorities between the different reset sources, given in
descending order:
Backup Reset
Wake-up Reset
Watchdog Reset
Software Reset
User Reset
Particular cases are listed below:
When in User Reset:
̶
̶
A watchdog event is impossible because the Watchdog Timer is being reset by the proc_nreset signal.
88
A software reset is impossible, since the processor reset is being activated.
When in Software Reset:
̶
A watchdog event has priority over the current state.
̶
The NRST has no effect.
When in Watchdog Reset:
̶
The processor reset is active and so a Software Reset cannot be programmed.
̶
A User Reset cannot be entered.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.4.6 Reset Controller Status Register
The Reset Controller Status Register (RSTC_SR) provides several status fields:
RSTTYP field: This field gives the type of the last reset, as explained in previous sections.
SRCMP bit: This field indicates that a Software Reset Command is in progress and that no further software
reset should be performed until the end of the current one. This bit is automatically cleared at the end of the
current software reset.
NRSTL bit: The NRSTL bit of the Status Register gives the level of the NRST pin sampled on each MCK
rising edge.
URSTS bit: A high-to-low transition of the NRST pin sets the URSTS bit of the RSTC_SR. This transition is
also detected on the Master Clock (MCK) rising edge (see Figure 12-9). If the User Reset is disabled
(URSTEN = 0) and if the interruption is enabled by the URSTIEN bit in the RSTC_MR, the URSTS bit
triggers an interrupt. Reading the RSTC_SR resets the URSTS bit and clears the interrupt.
Figure 12-9.
Reset Controller Status and Interrupt
MCK
read
RSTC_SR
Peripheral Access
2 cycle
resynchronization
2 cycle
resynchronization
NRST
NRSTL
URSTS
rstc_irq
if (URSTEN = 0) and
(URSTIEN = 1)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
89
12.5
Reset Controller (RSTC) User Interface
Table 12-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
Control Register
0x04
0x08
Note:
90
Access
Reset
Back-up Reset
RSTC_CR
Write-only
-
Status Register
RSTC_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0001
0x0000_0000
Mode Register
RSTC_MR
Read/Write
-
0x0000_0000
1. The reset value of RSTC_SR either reports a General Reset or a Wake-up Reset depending on last rising power supply.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.5.1 Reset Controller Control Register
Name:
RSTC_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
EXTRST
2
PERRST
1
–
0
PROCRST
• PROCRST: Processor Reset
0: No effect.
1: If KEY is correct, resets the processor.
• PERRST: Peripheral Reset
0: No effect.
1: If KEY is correct, resets the peripherals.
• EXTRST: External Reset
0: No effect.
1: If KEY is correct, asserts the NRST pin.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
91
12.5.2 Reset Controller Status Register
Name:
RSTC_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
SRCMP
16
NRSTL
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
RSTTYP
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
URSTS
• URSTS: User Reset Status
0: No high-to-low edge on NRST happened since the last read of RSTC_SR.
1: At least one high-to-low transition of NRST has been detected since the last read of RSTC_SR.
• RSTTYP: Reset Type
Reports the cause of the last processor reset. Reading this RSTC_SR does not reset this field.
RSTTYP
Reset Type
Comments
0
0
0
General Reset
Both VDDCORE and VDDBU rising
0
0
1
Wake Up Reset
VDDCORE rising
0
1
0
Watchdog Reset
Watchdog fault occurred
0
1
1
Software Reset
Processor reset required by the software
1
0
0
User Reset
NRST pin detected low
• NRSTL: NRST Pin Level
Registers the NRST Pin Level at Master Clock (MCK).
• SRCMP: Software Reset Command in Progress
0: No software command is being performed by the reset controller. The reset controller is ready for a software command.
1: A software reset command is being performed by the reset controller. The reset controller is busy.
92
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
12.5.3 Reset Controller Mode Register
Name:
RSTC_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
17
–
16
–
9
8
1
–
0
URSTEN
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
10
7
–
6
–
5
4
URSTIEN
3
–
ERSTL
2
–
• URSTEN: User Reset Enable
0: The detection of a low level on the pin NRST does not generate a User Reset.
1: The detection of a low level on the pin NRST triggers a User Reset.
• URSTIEN: User Reset Interrupt Enable
0: USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 has no effect on rstc_irq.
1: USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 asserts rstc_irq if URSTEN = 0.
• ERSTL: External Reset Length
This field defines the external reset length. The external reset is asserted during a time of 2(ERSTL+1) Slow Clock cycles.
This allows assertion duration to be programmed between 60 µs and 2 seconds.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
93
13.
Real-time Timer (RTT)
13.1
Description
The Real-time Timer is built around a 32-bit counter and used to count elapsed seconds. It generates a periodic
interrupt and/or triggers an alarm on a programmed value.
13.2
13.3
Embedded Characteristics
̶
Real-time Timer 32-bit free-running back-up Counter
̶
Integrates a 16-bit programmable prescaler running on slow clock
̶
Alarm Register capable of generating a wake-up of the system through the Shutdown Controller
Block Diagram
Figure 13-1.
Real-time Timer
RTT_MR
RTTRST
RTT_MR
RTPRES
RTT_MR
SLCK
RTTINCIEN
reload
16-bit
Divider
set
0
RTT_MR
RTTRST
RTT_SR
1
RTTINC
reset
0
rtt_int
32-bit
Counter
read
RTT_SR
RTT_MR
ALMIEN
RTT_VR
reset
CRTV
RTT_SR
ALMS
set
=
RTT_AR
94
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
ALMV
rtt_alarm
13.4
Functional Description
The Real-time Timer is used to count elapsed seconds. It is built around a 32-bit counter fed by Slow Clock divided
by a programmable 16-bit value. The value can be programmed in the field RTPRES of the Real-time Mode
Register (RTT_MR).
Programming RTPRES at 0x00008000 corresponds to feeding the real-time counter with a 1 Hz signal (if the Slow
Clock is 32.768 kHz). The 32-bit counter can count up to 232 seconds, corresponding to more than 136 years, then
roll over to 0.
The Real-time Timer can also be used as a free-running timer with a lower time-base. The best accuracy is
achieved by writing RTPRES to 3. Programming RTPRES to 1 or 2 is possible, but may result in losing status
events because the status register is cleared two Slow Clock cycles after read. Thus if the RTT is configured to
trigger an interrupt, the interrupt occurs during 2 Slow Clock cycles after reading RTT_SR. To prevent several
executions of the interrupt handler, the interrupt must be disabled in the interrupt handler and re-enabled when the
status register is clear.
The Real-time Timer value (CRTV) can be read at any time in the register RTT_VR (Real-time Value Register). As
this value can be updated asynchronously from the Master Clock, it is advisable to read this register twice at the
same value to improve accuracy of the returned value.
The current value of the counter is compared with the value written in the alarm register RTT_AR (Real-time Alarm
Register). If the counter value matches the alarm, the bit ALMS in RTT_SR is set. The alarm register is set to its
maximum value, corresponding to 0xFFFF_FFFF, after a reset.
The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR is set each time the Real-time Timer counter is incremented. This bit can be used to
start a periodic interrupt, the period being one second when the RTPRES is programmed with 0x8000 and Slow
Clock equal to 32.768 kHz.
Reading the RTT_SR status register resets the RTTINC and ALMS fields.
Writing the bit RTTRST in RTT_MR immediately reloads and restarts the clock divider with the new programmed
value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
Note:
Because of the asynchronism between the Slow Clock (SCLK) and the System Clock (MCK):
1) The restart of the counter and the reset of the RTT_VR current value register is effective only 2 slow clock cycles
after the write of the RTTRST bit in the RTT_MR.
2) The status register flags reset is taken into account only 2 slow clock cycles after the read of the RTT_SR (Status
Register).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
95
Figure 13-2.
RTT Counting
APB cycle
APB cycle
MCK
RTPRES - 1
Prescaler
0
RTT
0
...
ALMV-1
ALMV
ALMV+1
RTTINC (RTT_SR)
ALMS (RTT_SR)
APB Interface
read RTT_SR
96
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
ALMV+2
ALMV+3
13.5
Real-time Timer (RTT) User Interface
Table 13-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Mode Register
RTT_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_8000
0x04
Alarm Register
RTT_AR
Read/Write
0xFFFF_FFFF
0x08
Value Register
RTT_VR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0C
Status Register
RTT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
97
13.5.1 Real-time Timer Mode Register
Name:
RTT_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
RTTRST
17
RTTINCIEN
16
ALMIEN
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RTPRES
7
6
5
4
RTPRES
• RTPRES: Real-time Timer Prescaler Value
Defines the number of SLCK periods required to increment the Real-time timer. RTPRES is defined as follows:
RTPRES = 0: The prescaler period is equal to 216.
RTPRES ≠ 0: The prescaler period is equal to RTPRES.
• ALMIEN: Alarm Interrupt Enable
0: The bit ALMS in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1: The bit ALMS in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTINCIEN: Real-time Timer Increment Interrupt Enable
0: The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1: The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTRST: Real-time Timer Restart
1: Reloads and restarts the clock divider with the new programmed value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
98
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
13.5.2 Real-time Timer Alarm Register
Name:
RTT_AR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ALMV
23
22
21
20
ALMV
15
14
13
12
ALMV
7
6
5
4
ALMV
• ALMV: Alarm Value
Defines the alarm value (ALMV + 1) compared with the Real-time Timer.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
99
13.5.3 Real-time Timer Value Register
Name:
RTT_VR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CRTV
23
22
21
20
CRTV
15
14
13
12
CRTV
7
6
5
4
CRTV
• CRTV: Current Real-time Value
Returns the current value of the Real-time Timer.
100
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
13.5.4 Real-time Timer Status Register
Name:
RTT_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RTTINC
0
ALMS
• ALMS: Real-time Alarm Status
0: The Real-time Alarm has not occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
1: The Real-time Alarm occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
• RTTINC: Real-time Timer Increment
0: The Real-time Timer has not been incremented since the last read of the RTT_SR.
1: The Real-time Timer has been incremented since the last read of the RTT_SR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
101
14.
Periodic Interval Timer (PIT)
14.1
Description
The Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) provides the operating system’s scheduler interrupt. It is designed to offer
maximum accuracy and efficient management, even for systems with long response time.
14.2
14.3
Embedded Characteristics
Includes a 20-bit Periodic Counter, with less than 1 µs accuracy
Includes a 12-bit Interval Overlay Counter
Real Time OS or Linux®/Windows CE® compliant tick generator
Block Diagram
Figure 14-1.
Periodic Interval Timer
PIT_MR
PIV
=?
PIT_MR
PITIEN
set
0
PIT_SR
PITS
reset
0
MCK
Prescaler
102
0
0
1
12-bit
Adder
1
20-bit
Counter
MCK/16
CPIV
PIT_PIVR
CPIV
PIT_PIIR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
PICNT
PICNT
read PIT_PIVR
pit_irq
14.4
Functional Description
The Periodic Interval Timer aims at providing periodic interrupts for use by operating systems.
The PIT provides a programmable overflow counter and a reset-on-read feature. It is built around two counters: a
20-bit CPIV counter and a 12-bit PICNT counter. Both counters work at Master Clock /16.
The first 20-bit CPIV counter increments from 0 up to a programmable overflow value set in the field PIV of the
Mode Register (PIT_MR). When the counter CPIV reaches this value, it resets to 0 and increments the Periodic
Interval Counter, PICNT. The status bit PITS in the Status Register (PIT_SR) rises and triggers an interrupt,
provided the interrupt is enabled (PITIEN in PIT_MR).
Writing a new PIV value in PIT_MR does not reset/restart the counters.
When CPIV and PICNT values are obtained by reading the Periodic Interval Value Register (PIT_PIVR), the
overflow counter (PICNT) is reset and the PITS is cleared, thus acknowledging the interrupt. The value of PICNT
gives the number of periodic intervals elapsed since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
When CPIV and PICNT values are obtained by reading the Periodic Interval Image Register (PIT_PIIR), there is
no effect on the counters CPIV and PICNT, nor on the bit PITS. For example, a profiler can read PIT_PIIR without
clearing any pending interrupt, whereas a timer interrupt clears the interrupt by reading PIT_PIVR.
The PIT may be enabled/disabled using the PITEN bit in the PIT_MR (disabled on reset). The PITEN bit only
becomes effective when the CPIV value is 0. Figure 14-2 illustrates the PIT counting. After the PIT Enable bit is
reset (PITEN = 0), the CPIV goes on counting until the PIV value is reached, and is then reset. PIT restarts
counting, only if the PITEN is set again.
The PIT is stopped when the core enters debug state.
Figure 14-2.
Enabling/Disabling PIT with PITEN
APB cycle
APB cycle
MCK
15
restarts MCK Prescaler
MCK Prescaler 0
PITEN
CPIV
PICNT
0
1
PIV - 1
0
PIV
1
0
1
0
PITS (PIT_SR)
APB Interface
read PIT_PIVR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
103
14.5
Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) User Interface
Table 14-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Mode Register
PIT_MR
Read/Write
0x000F_FFFF
0x04
Status Register
PIT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x08
Periodic Interval Value Register
PIT_PIVR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0C
Periodic Interval Image Register
PIT_PIIR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
104
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
14.5.1 Periodic Interval Timer Mode Register
Name:
PIT_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
18
15
14
13
12
25
PITIEN
24
PITEN
17
16
PIV
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PIV
7
6
5
4
PIV
• PIV: Periodic Interval Value
Defines the value compared with the primary 20-bit counter of the Periodic Interval Timer (CPIV). The period is equal to
(PIV + 1).
• PITEN: Period Interval Timer Enabled
0: The Periodic Interval Timer is disabled when the PIV value is reached.
1: The Periodic Interval Timer is enabled.
• PITIEN: Periodic Interval Timer Interrupt Enable
0: The bit PITS in PIT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1: The bit PITS in PIT_SR asserts interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
105
14.5.2 Periodic Interval Timer Status Register
Name:
PIT_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
PITS
• PITS: Periodic Interval Timer Status
0: The Periodic Interval timer has not reached PIV since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
1: The Periodic Interval timer has reached PIV since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
106
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
14.5.3 Periodic Interval Timer Value Register
Name:
PIT_PIVR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
PICNT
23
22
21
20
PICNT
15
14
CPIV
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CPIV
7
6
5
4
CPIV
Reading this register clears PITS in PIT_SR.
• CPIV: Current Periodic Interval Value
Returns the current value of the periodic interval timer.
• PICNT: Periodic Interval Counter
Returns the number of occurrences of periodic intervals since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
107
14.5.4 Periodic Interval Timer Image Register
Name:
PIT_PIIR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
PICNT
23
22
21
20
PICNT
15
14
CPIV
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CPIV
7
6
5
4
CPIV
• CPIV: Current Periodic Interval Value
Returns the current value of the periodic interval timer.
• PICNT: Periodic Interval Counter
Returns the number of occurrences of periodic intervals since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
108
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
15.
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
15.1
Description
The Watchdog Timer can be used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in a deadlock. It
features a 12-bit down counter that allows a watchdog period of up to 16 seconds (slow clock at 32.768 kHz). It
can generate a general reset or a processor reset only. In addition, it can be stopped while the processor is in
debug mode or idle mode.
15.2
15.3
Embedded Characteristics
16-bit key-protected only-once-Programmable Counter
Windowed, prevents the processor being in a dead-lock on the watchdog access
Block Diagram
Figure 15-1.
Watchdog Timer Block Diagram
write WDT_MR
WDT_MR
WDV
WDT_CR
WDRSTT
reload
1
0
12-bit Down
Counter
WDT_MR
WDD
reload
Current
Value
1/128
SLCK
<= WDD
WDT_MR
WDRSTEN
= 0
wdt_fault
(to Reset Controller)
set
set
read WDT_SR
or
reset
WDERR
reset
WDUNF
reset
wdt_int
WDFIEN
WDT_MR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
109
15.4
Functional Description
The Watchdog Timer can be used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in a deadlock. It is
supplied with VDDCORE. It restarts with initial values on processor reset.
The Watchdog is built around a 12-bit down counter, which is loaded with the value defined in the field WDV of the
Mode Register (WDT_MR). The Watchdog Timer uses the Slow Clock divided by 128 to establish the maximum
Watchdog period to be 16 seconds (with a typical Slow Clock of 32.768 kHz).
After a Processor Reset, the value of WDV is 0xFFF, corresponding to the maximum value of the counter with the
external reset generation enabled (field WDRSTEN at 1 after a Backup Reset). This means that a default
Watchdog is running at reset, i.e., at power-up. The user must either disable it (by setting the WDDIS bit in
WDT_MR) if he does not expect to use it or must reprogram it to meet the maximum Watchdog period the
application requires.
The Watchdog Mode Register (WDT_MR) can be written only once. Only a processor reset resets it. Writing the
WDT_MR reloads the timer with the newly programmed mode parameters.
In normal operation, the user reloads the Watchdog at regular intervals before the timer underflow occurs, by
writing the Control Register (WDT_CR) with the bit WDRSTT to 1. The Watchdog counter is then immediately
reloaded from WDT_MR and restarted, and the Slow Clock 128 divider is reset and restarted. The WDT_CR is
write-protected. As a result, writing WDT_CR without the correct hard-coded key has no effect. If an underflow
does occur, the “wdt_fault” signal to the Reset Controller is asserted if the bit WDRSTEN is set in the Mode
Register (WDT_MR). Moreover, the bit WDUNF is set in the Watchdog Status Register (WDT_SR).
To prevent a software deadlock that continuously triggers the Watchdog, the reload of the Watchdog must occur
while the Watchdog counter is within a window between 0 and WDD, WDD is defined in the WatchDog Mode
Register WDT_MR.
Any attempt to restart the Watchdog while the Watchdog counter is between WDV and WDD results in a
Watchdog error, even if the Watchdog is disabled. The bit WDERR is updated in the WDT_SR and the “wdt_fault”
signal to the Reset Controller is asserted.
Note that this feature can be disabled by programming a WDD value greater than or equal to the WDV value. In
such a configuration, restarting the Watchdog Timer is permitted in the whole range [0; WDV] and does not
generate an error. This is the default configuration on reset (the WDD and WDV values are equal).
The status bits WDUNF (Watchdog Underflow) and WDERR (Watchdog Error) trigger an interrupt, provided the bit
WDFIEN is set in the mode register. The signal “wdt_fault” to the reset controller causes a Watchdog reset if the
WDRSTEN bit is set as already explained in Section 12. “Reset Controller (RSTC)”. In that case, the processor
and the Watchdog Timer are reset, and the WDERR and WDUNF flags are reset.
If a reset is generated or if WDT_SR is read, the status bits are reset, the interrupt is cleared, and the “wdt_fault”
signal to the reset controller is deasserted.
Writing the WDT_MR reloads and restarts the down counter.
While the processor is in debug state or in idle mode, the counter may be stopped depending on the value
programmed for the bits WDIDLEHLT and WDDBGHLT in the WDT_MR.
110
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 15-2.
Watchdog Behavior
Watchdog Error
Watchdog Underflow
if WDRSTEN is 1
FFF
if WDRSTEN is 0
Normal behavior
WDV
Forbidden
Window
WDD
Permitted
Window
0
Watchdog
Fault
WDT_CR = WDRSTT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
111
15.5
Watchdog Timer (WDT) User Interface
Table 15-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
Control Register
0x04
0x08
112
Access
Reset
WDT_CR
Write-only
–
Mode Register
WDT_MR
Read/Write Once
0x3FFF_2FFF
Status Register
WDT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
15.5.1 Watchdog Timer Control Register
Name:
WDT_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WDRSTT
• WDRSTT: Watchdog Restart
0: No effect.
1: Restarts the Watchdog.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
113
15.5.2 Watchdog Timer Mode Register
Name:
WDT_MR
Access:
Read/Write Once
31
30
23
29
WDIDLEHLT
28
WDDBGHLT
27
21
20
19
11
22
26
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
1
0
WDD
WDD
15
WDDIS
14
13
12
WDRPROC
WDRSTEN
WDFIEN
7
6
5
4
WDV
3
2
WDV
• WDV: Watchdog Counter Value
Defines the value loaded in the 12-bit Watchdog Counter.
• WDFIEN: Watchdog Fault Interrupt Enable
0: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on interrupt.
1: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) asserts interrupt.
• WDRSTEN: Watchdog Reset Enable
0: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on the resets.
1: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) triggers a Watchdog reset.
• WDRPROC: Watchdog Reset Processor
0: If WDRSTEN is 1, a Watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates all resets.
1: If WDRSTEN is 1, a Watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates the processor reset.
• WDD: Watchdog Delta Value
Defines the permitted range for reloading the Watchdog Timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is less than or equal to WDD, writing WDT_CR with WDRSTT = 1 restarts the timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is greater than WDD, writing WDT_CR with WDRSTT = 1 causes a Watchdog error.
• WDDBGHLT: Watchdog Debug Halt
0: The Watchdog runs when the processor is in debug state.
1: The Watchdog stops when the processor is in debug state.
• WDIDLEHLT: Watchdog Idle Halt
0: The Watchdog runs when the system is in idle mode.
1: The Watchdog stops when the system is in idle state.
• WDDIS: Watchdog Disable
0: Enables the Watchdog Timer.
1: Disables the Watchdog Timer.
114
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
15.5.3 Watchdog Timer Status Register
Name:
WDT_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
WDERR
0
WDUNF
• WDUNF: Watchdog Underflow
0: No Watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one Watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
• WDERR: Watchdog Error
0: No Watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one Watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
115
16.
Shutdown Controller (SHDWC)
16.1
Description
The Shutdown Controller controls the power supplies VDDIO and VDDCORE and the wake-up detection on
debounced input lines.
16.2
Embedded Characteristics
16.3
Shutdown and Wake-up logic
̶
Software programmable assertion of the SHDN pin
̶
Deassertion Programmable on a WKUP pin level change or on alarm
Block Diagram
Figure 16-1.
Shutdown Controller Block Diagram
SLCK
Shutdown Controller
read SHDW_SR
SHDW_MR
CPTWK0
reset
WAKEUP0
WKMODE0
SHDW_SR
set
WKUP0
read SHDW_SR
Wake-up
reset
RTTWKEN
SHDW_MR
RTT Alarm
RTTWK
SHDW_SR
set
SHDW_CR
SHDW
16.4
SHDN
Shutdown
I/O Lines Description
Table 16-1.
16.5
Shutdown
Output
Controller
I/O Lines Description
Name
Description
Type
WKUP0
Wake-up 0 input
Input
SHDN
Shutdown output
Output
Product Dependencies
16.5.1 Power Management
The Shutdown Controller is continuously clocked by Slow Clock. The Power Management Controller has no effect
on the behavior of the Shutdown Controller.
116
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
16.6
Functional Description
The Shutdown Controller manages the main power supply. To do so, it is supplied with VDDBU and manages
wake-up input pins and one output pin, SHDN.
A typical application connects the pin SHDN to the shutdown input of the DC/DC Converter providing the main
power supplies of the system, and especially VDDCORE and/or VDDIO. The wake-up inputs (WKUP0) connect to
any push-buttons or signal that wake up the system.
The software is able to control the pin SHDN by writing the Shutdown Control Register (SHDW_CR) with the bit
SHDW at 1. The shutdown is taken into account only 2 slow clock cycles after the write of SHDW_CR. This
register is password-protected and so the value written should contain the correct key for the command to be
taken into account. As a result, the system should be powered down.
A level change on WKUP0 is used as wake-up. Wake-up is configured in the Shutdown Mode Register
(SHDW_MR). The transition detector can be programmed to detect either a positive or negative transition or any
level change on WKUP0. The detection can also be disabled. Programming is performed by defining WKMODE0.
Moreover, a debouncing circuit can be programmed for WKUP0. The debouncing circuit filters pulses on WKUP0
shorter than the programmed number of 16 SLCK cycles in CPTWK0 of the SHDW_MR. If the programmed level
change is detected on a pin, a counter starts. When the counter reaches the value programmed in the
corresponding field, CPTWK0, the SHDN pin is released. If a new input change is detected before the counter
reaches the corresponding value, the counter is stopped and cleared. WAKEUP0 of the Status Register
(SHDW_SR) reports the detection of the programmed events on WKUP0 with a reset after the read of SHDW_SR.
The Shutdown Controller can be programmed so as to activate the wake-up using the RTT alarm (the detection of
the rising edge of the RTT alarm is synchronized with SLCK). This is done by writing the SHDW_MR using the
RTTWKEN fields. When enabled, the detection of the RTT alarm is reported in the RTTWK bit of the SHDW_SR
Status register. It is reset after the read of SHDW_SR. When using the RTT alarm to wake up the system, the user
must ensure that the RTT alarm status flag is cleared before shutting down the system. Otherwise, no rising edge
of the status flag may be detected and the wake-up fails.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
117
16.7
Shutdown Controller (SHDWC) User Interface
Table 16-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
Shutdown Control Register
0x04
0x08
118
Access
Reset
SHDW_CR
Write-only
–
Shutdown Mode Register
SHDW_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_0303
Shutdown Status Register
SHDW_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
16.7.1 Shutdown Control Register
Name:
SHDW_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
SHDW
• SHDW: Shutdown Command
0: No effect.
1: If KEY is correct, asserts the SHDN pin.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
119
16.7.2 Shutdown Mode Register
Name:
SHDW_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
RTTWKEN
15
14
13
12
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
5
4
3
–
2
–
1
CPTWK1
7
6
CPTWK0
0
WKMODE0
• WKMODE0: Wake-up Mode 0
Value
Wake-up Input Transition Selection
0
0
None. No detection is performed on the wake-up input
0
1
Low to high level
1
0
High to low level
1
1
Both levels change
• CPTWK0: Counter on Wake-up 0
Defines the number of 16 Slow Clock cycles, the level detection on the corresponding input pin shall last before the wakeup event occurs. Because of the internal synchronization of WKUP0, the SHDN pin is released
(CPTWK × 16 + 1) Slow Clock cycles after the event on WKUP.
• RTTWKEN: Real-time Timer Wake-up Enable
0: The RTT Alarm signal has no effect on the Shutdown Controller.
1: The RTT Alarm signal forces the de-assertion of the SHDN pin.
120
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
16.7.3 Shutdown Status Register
Name:
SHDW_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
RTTWK
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WAKEUP0
• WAKEUP0: Wake-up 0 Status
0: No wake-up event occurred on the corresponding wake-up input since the last read of SHDW_SR.
1: At least one wake-up event occurred on the corresponding wake-up input since the last read of SHDW_SR.
• RTTWK: Real-time Timer Wake-up
0: No wake-up alarm from the RTT occurred since the last read of SHDW_SR.
1: At least one wake-up alarm from the RTT occurred since the last read of SHDW_SR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
121
17.
SAM9260 Bus Matrix
17.1
Description
The Bus Matrix implements a multi-layer AHB based on the AHB-Lite protocol that enables parallel access paths
between multiple AHB masters and slaves in a system, thus increasing the overall bandwidth. The Bus Matrix
interconnects 6 AHB Masters to 5 AHB Slaves. The normal latency to connect a master to a slave is one cycle
except for the default master of the accessed slave which is connected directly (zero cycle latency).
The Bus Matrix user interface is compliant with the ARM Advanced High-performance Bus and provides a Chip
Configuration User Interface with registers that allow the Bus Matrix to support application specific features.
17.2
Embedded Characteristics
6-layer Matrix, handling requests from 6 masters
Programmable Arbitration strategy
̶
Fixed-priority Arbitration
̶
Round-Robin Arbitration, either with no default master, last accessed default master or fixed default
master
Burst Management
̶
Breaking with Slot Cycle Limit Support
̶
Undefined Burst Length Support
One Address Decoder provided per Master
̶
Three different slaves may be assigned to each decoded memory area: one for internal boot, one for
external boot, one after remap
Boot Mode Select
̶
Non-volatile Boot Memory can be internal or external
̶
Selection is made by BMS pin sampled at reset
Remap Command
̶
Allows Remapping of an Internal SRAM in Place of the Boot Non-Volatile Memory
̶
Allows Handling of Dynamic Exception Vectors
17.2.1 Matrix Masters
The Bus Matrix of the SAM9260 manages six Masters, which means that each master can perform an access
concurrently with others, according the slave it accesses is available.
Each Master has its own decoder that can be defined specifically for each master. In order to simplify the
addressing, all the masters have the same decodings.
Table 17-1.
122
List of Bus Matrix Masters
Master 0
ARM926 Instruction
Master 1
ARM926 Data
Master 2
PDC
Master 3
USB Host DMA
Master 4
ISI Controller
Master 5
Ethernet MAC
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.2.2 Matrix Slaves
Each Slave has its own arbiter, thus allowing a different arbitration per Slave to be programmed.
Table 17-2.
List of Bus Matrix Slaves
Slave 0
Internal SRAM0 4 Kbytes
Slave 1
Internal SRAM1 4 Kbytes
Internal ROM
Slave 2
USB Host User Interface
Slave 3
External Bus Interface
Slave 4
Internal Peripherals
17.2.3 Master to Slave Access
All the Masters can normally access all the Slaves. However, some paths do not make sense, such as allowing
access from the Ethernet MAC to the Internal Peripherals. Thus, these paths are forbidden or simply not wired,
and shown “-” in the following table.
Table 17-3.
SAM9260 Masters to Slaves Access
Master
Slave
0&1
2
3
4
5
ARM926
Instruction &
Data
Peripheral
DMA Controller
USB Host
Controller
ISI Controller
Ethernet MAC
0
Internal SRAM
4 Kbytes
X
X
X
X
X
1
Internal SRAM
4 Kbytes
X
X
X
X
X
Internal ROM
X
X
X
-
-
UHP User Interface
X
-
-
-
-
3
External Bus Interface
X
X
X
X
X
4
Internal Peripherals
X
X
X
-
-
2
17.3
Memory Mapping
The Bus Matrix provides one decoder for every AHB Master Interface. The decoder offers each AHB Master
several memory mappings. In fact, depending on the product, each memory area may be assigned to several
slaves. Booting at the same address while using different AHB slaves (i.e., external RAM, internal ROM or internal
Flash, etc.) becomes possible.
The Bus Matrix user interface provides Master Remap Control Register (MATRIX_MRCR) that performs remap
action for every master independently.
17.4
Special Bus Granting Techniques
The Bus Matrix provides some speculative bus granting techniques in order to anticipate access requests from
some masters. This mechanism reduces latency at first accesses of a burst or single transfer. The bus granting
mechanism sets a default master for every slave.
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave remains connected to its associated
default master. A slave can be associated with three kinds of default masters: no default master, last access
master and fixed default master.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
123
17.4.1 No Default Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave is disconnected from all masters. No
Default Master suits Low Power mode.
17.4.2 Last Access Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave remains connected to the last master that
performed an access request.
17.4.3 Fixed Default Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave connects to its fixed default master.
Unlike the last accessed master, the fixed master does not change unless the user modifies it by a software action
(field FIXED_DEFMSTR of the related MATRIX_SCFG).
To change from one kind of default master to another, the Bus Matrix user interface provides the Slave
Configuration Registers, one for each slave, that set a default master for each slave. The Slave Configuration
Register contains two fields, DEFMSTR_TYPE and FIXED_DEFMSTR. The 2-bit DEFMSTR_TYPE field is used
to select the default master type (no default, last access master, fixed default master) whereas the 4-bit
FIXED_DEFMSTR field is used to select a fixed default master provided that DEFMSTR_TYPE is set to fixed
default master. Refer to Section 17.6 “Bus Matrix User Interface” on page 127.
17.5
Arbitration
The Bus Matrix provides an arbitration mechanism that reduces latency when conflicting cases occur, in particular
when two or more masters try to access the same slave at the same time. One arbiter per AHB slave is provided,
thus arbitrating each slave differently.
The Bus Matrix provides the user the possibility to choose between two arbitration types for each slave:
1.
Round-Robin Arbitration (the default)
2.
Fixed Priority Arbitration
This choice is made through the field ARBT of the Slave Configuration Registers (MATRIX_SCFG).
Each algorithm may be complemented by selecting a default master configuration for each slave.
When a re-arbitration has to be done, it is realized only under specific conditions described in Section 17.5.1
“Arbitration Rules”.
17.5.1 Arbitration Rules
Each arbiter has the ability to arbitrate between two or more different master’s requests. In order to avoid burst
breaking and also to provide the maximum throughput for slave interfaces, arbitration may only take place during
the following cycles:
124
1.
Idle Cycles: when a slave is not connected to any master or is connected to a master which is not currently
accessing it.
2.
Single Cycles: when a slave is currently doing a single access.
3.
End of Burst Cycles: when the current cycle is the last cycle of a burst transfer. For defined length burst,
predicted end of burst matches the size of the transfer but is managed differently for undefined length burst
(see Section 17.5.1.1 “Undefined Length Burst Arbitration”).
4.
Slot Cycle Limit: when the slot cycle counter has reached the limit value indicating that the current master
access is too long and must be broken (see Section 17.5.1.2 “Slot Cycle Limit Arbitration”).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.5.1.1 Undefined Length Burst Arbitration
In order to avoid too long slave handling during undefined length bursts (INCR), the Bus Matrix provides specific
logic in order to re-arbitrate before the end of the INCR transfer.
A predicted end of burst is used as for defined length burst transfer, which is selected between the following:
1.
Infinite: no predicted end of burst is generated and therefore INCR burst transfer is never broken.
2.
Four beat bursts: predicted end of burst is generated at the end of each four beat boundary inside INCR
transfer.
3.
Eight beat bursts: predicted end of burst is generated at the end of each eight beat boundary inside INCR
transfer.
4.
Sixteen beat bursts: predicted end of burst is generated at the end of each sixteen beat boundary inside
INCR transfer.
This selection can be done through the field ULBT of the Master Configuration Registers (MATRIX_MCFG).
17.5.1.2 Slot Cycle Limit Arbitration
The Bus Matrix contains specific logic to break too long accesses such as very long bursts on a very slow slave
(e.g., an external low speed memory). At the beginning of the burst access, a counter is loaded with the value
previously written in the SLOT_CYCLE field of the related Slave Configuration Register (MATRIX_SCFG) and
decreased at each clock cycle. When the counter reaches zero, the arbiter has the ability to re-arbitrate at the end
of the current byte, half word or word transfer.
17.5.2 Round-Robin Arbitration
This algorithm allows the Bus Matrix arbiters to dispatch the requests from different masters to the same slave in a
round-robin manner. If two or more master’s requests arise at the same time, the master with the lowest number is
first serviced then the others are serviced in a round-robin manner.
There are three round-robin algorithms implemented:
Round-Robin arbitration without default master
Round-Robin arbitration with last access master
Round-Robin arbitration with fixed default master
17.5.2.1 Round-Robin Arbitration without Default Master
This is the main algorithm used by Bus Matrix arbiters. It allows the Bus Matrix to dispatch requests from different
masters to the same slave in a pure round-robin manner. At the end of the current access, if no other request is
pending, the slave is disconnected from all masters. This configuration incurs one latency cycle for the first access
of a burst. Arbitration without default master can be used for masters that perform significant bursts.
17.5.2.2 Round-Robin Arbitration with Last Access Master
This is a biased round-robin algorithm used by Bus Matrix arbiters. It allows the Bus Matrix to remove the one
latency cycle for the last master that accessed the slave. At the end of the current transfer, if no other master
request is pending, the slave remains connected to the last master that performs the access. Other non privileged
masters still get one latency cycle if they want to access the same slave. This technique can be used for masters
that mainly perform single accesses.
17.5.2.3 Round-Robin Arbitration with Fixed Default Master
This is another biased round-robin algorithm. It allows the Bus Matrix arbiters to remove the one latency cycle for
the fixed default master per slave. At the end of the current access, the slave remains connected to its fixed default
master. Requests attempted by this fixed default master do not cause any latency whereas other non privileged
masters get one latency cycle. This technique can be used for masters that mainly perform single accesses.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
125
17.5.3 Fixed Priority Arbitration
This algorithm allows the Bus Matrix arbiters to dispatch the requests from different masters to the same slave by
using the fixed priority defined by the user. If two or more master’s requests are active at the same time, the
master with the highest priority number is serviced first. If two or more master’s requests with the same priority are
active at the same time, the master with the highest number is serviced first.
For each slave, the priority of each master may be defined through the Priority Registers for Slaves
(MATRIX_PRAS and MATRIX_PRBS).
126
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.6
Bus Matrix User Interface
Table 17-4.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
Master Configuration Register 0
MATRIX_MCFG0
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x0004
Master Configuration Register 1
MATRIX_MCFG1
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x0008
Master Configuration Register 2
MATRIX_MCFG2
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x000C
Master Configuration Register 3
MATRIX_MCFG3
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x0010
Master Configuration Register 4
MATRIX_MCFG4
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x0014
Master Configuration Register 5
MATRIX_MCFG5
Read/Write
0x00000002
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
Slave Configuration Register 0
MATRIX_SCFG0
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x0044
Slave Configuration Register 1
MATRIX_SCFG1
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x0048
Slave Configuration Register 2
MATRIX_SCFG2
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x004C
Slave Configuration Register 3
MATRIX_SCFG3
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x0050
Slave Configuration Register 4
MATRIX_SCFG4
Read/Write
0x00000010
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0080
Priority Register A for Slave 0
MATRIX_PRAS0
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0084
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0088
Priority Register A for Slave 1
MATRIX_PRAS1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x008C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0090
Priority Register A for Slave 2
MATRIX_PRAS2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0094
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0098
Priority Register A for Slave 3
MATRIX_PRAS3
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x009C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00A0
Priority Register A for Slave 4
MATRIX_PRAS4
Read/Write
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
Master Remap Control Register
MATRIX_MRCR
Read/Write
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0018–0x003C
0x0054–0x007C
0x00A8–0x00FC
0x0100
0x0104–0x010C
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
127
17.6.1 Bus Matrix Master Configuration Registers
Name:
MATRIX_MCFG0...MATRIX_MCFG5
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
–
–
–
–
–
ULBT
• ULBT: Undefined Length Burst Type
0: Infinite Length Burst
No predicted end of burst is generated and therefore INCR bursts coming from this master cannot be broken.
1: Single Access
The undefined length burst is treated as a succession of single accesses allowing rearbitration at each beat of the INCR
burst.
2: Four Beat Burst
The undefined length burst is split into 4-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 4-beat burst end.
3: Eight Beat Burst
The undefined length burst is split into 8-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 8-beat burst end.
4: Sixteen Beat Burst
The undefined length burst is split into 16-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 16-beat burst end.
128
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.6.2 Bus Matrix Slave Configuration Registers
Name:
MATRIX_SCFG0...MATRIX_SCFG4
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
–
25
24
ARBT
17
FIXED_DEFMSTR
16
DEFMSTR_TYPE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SLOT_CYCLE
• SLOT_CYCLE: Maximum Number of Allowed Cycles for a Burst
When the SLOT_CYCLE limit is reached for a burst, it may be broken by another master trying to access this slave.
This limit has been placed to avoid locking very slow slaves when very long bursts are used.
This limit should not be very small though. Unreasonably small values break every burst and the Bus Matrix arbitrates without performing any data transfer. 16 cycles is a reasonable value for SLOT_CYCLE.
• DEFMSTR_TYPE: Default Master Type
0: No Default Master
At the end of current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave is disconnected from all masters.
This results in one cycle latency for the first access of a burst transfer or for a single access.
1: Last Default Master
At the end of current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave stays connected with the last master
having accessed it.
This results in not having the one cycle latency when the last master tries to access the slave again.
2: Fixed Default Master
At the end of the current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave connects to the fixed master whose
number has been written in the FIXED_DEFMSTR field.
This results in not having the one cycle latency when the fixed master tries to access the slave again.
• FIXED_DEFMSTR: Fixed Default Master
This is the number of the Default Master for this slave. Only used if DEFMASTR_TYPE is 2. Specifying the number of a
master which is not connected to the selected slave is equivalent to setting DEFMASTR_TYPE to 0.
• ARBT: Arbitration Type
0: Round-Robin Arbitration
1: Fixed Priority Arbitration
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
129
17.6.3 Bus Matrix Priority Registers For Slaves
Name:
MATRIX_PRAS0...MATRIX_PRAS4
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
–
–
–
–
15
14
11
10
–
–
–
–
7
6
–
–
M5PR
13
12
M3PR
5
4
M1PR
3
2
–
–
16
M4PR
9
8
M2PR
1
0
M0PR
• MxPR: Master x Priority
Fixed priority of Master x for access to the selected slave. The higher the number, the higher the priority.
130
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.6.4 Bus Matrix Master Remap Control Register
Name:
MATRIX_MRCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
RCB1
RCB0
• RCBx: Remap Command Bit for AHB Master x
0: Disable remapped address decoding for the selected Master
1: Enable remapped address decoding for the selected Master
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
131
17.7
Chip Configuration User Interface
Table 17-5.
Register Mapping (Chip Configuration User Interface)
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0110–0x0118
Reserved
–
–
–
EBI_CSA
Read/Write
0x00010000
–
–
–
0x011C
0x0130–0x01FC
132
EBI Chip Select Assignment Register
Reserved
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
17.7.1 EBI Chip Select Assignment Register
Name:
EBI_CSA
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
VDDIOMSEL
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
EBI_DBPUC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
EBI_CS5A
EBI_CS4A
EBI_CS3A
–
EBI_CS1A
–
• EBI_CS1A: EBI Chip Select 1 Assignment
0: EBI Chip Select 1 is assigned to the Static Memory Controller.
1: EBI Chip Select 1 is assigned to the SDRAM Controller.
• EBI_CS3A: EBI Chip Select 3 Assignment
0: EBI Chip Select 3 is only assigned to the Static Memory Controller and EBI_NCS3 behaves as defined by the SMC.
1: EBI Chip Select 3 is assigned to the Static Memory Controller and the SmartMedia Logic is activated.
• EBI_CS4A: EBI Chip Select 4 Assignment
0: EBI Chip Select 4 is only assigned to the Static Memory Controller and EBI_NCS4 behaves as defined by the SMC.
1: EBI Chip Select 4 is assigned to the Static Memory Controller and the CompactFlash Logic (first slot) is activated.
• EBI_CS5A: EBI Chip Select 5 Assignment
0: EBI Chip Select 5 is only assigned to the Static Memory Controller and EBI_NCS5 behaves as defined by the SMC.
1: EBI Chip Select 5 is assigned to the Static Memory Controller and the CompactFlash Logic (second slot) is activated.
• EBI_DBPUC: EBI Data Bus Pull-Up Configuration
0: EBI D0–D15 Data Bus bits are internally pulled-up to the VDDIOM power supply.
1: EBI D0–D15 Data Bus bits are not internally pulled-up.
• VDDIOMSEL: Memory Voltage Selection
0: Memories are 1.8V powered.
1: Memories are 3.3V powered.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
133
18.
SAM9260 External Bus Interface
18.1
Description
The External Bus Interface (EBI) is designed to ensure the successful data transfer between several external
devices and the embedded Memory Controller of an ARM-based device. The Static Memory, SDRAM and ECC
Controllers are all featured external Memory Controllers on the EBI. These external Memory Controllers are
capable of handling several types of external memory and peripheral devices, such as SRAM, PROM, EPROM,
EEPROM, Flash, and SDRAM.
The EBI also supports the CompactFlash and the NAND Flash protocols via integrated circuitry that greatly
reduces the requirements for external components. Furthermore, the EBI handles data transfers with up to six
external devices, each assigned to six address spaces defined by the embedded Memory Controller. Data
transfers are performed through a 16-bit or 32-bit data bus, an address bus of up to 26 bits, up to eight chip select
lines (NCS[7:0]) and several control pins that are generally multiplexed between the different external Memory
Controllers.
134
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.2
Block Diagram
18.2.1 External Bus Interface
Figure 18-1 shows the organization of the External Bus Interface.
Figure 18-1.
Organization of the External Bus Interface
D[15:0]
External Bus Interface
Bus Matrix
A0/NBS0
AHB
A1/NWR2/NBS2
SDRAM
Controller
A[15:2], A[20:18]
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
MUX
Logic
Static
Memory
Controller
NCS0
NCS1/SDCS
NRD/CFOE
NWR0/NWE/CFWE
NWR1/NBS1/CFIOR
NWR3/NBS3/CFIOW
SDCK
SDCKE
CompactFlash
Logic
RAS
CAS
SDWE
SDA10
NAND Flash
Logic
A21/NANDALE
A22/NANDCLE
NANDOE
NANDWE
ECC
Controller
NCS3/NANDCS
D[31:16]
PIO
Address Decoders
Chip Select
Assignor
A[25:23]
CFRNW
NCS4/CFCS0
NCS5/CFCS1
NCS2, NCS6, NCS7
User Interface
NWAIT
CFCE1
CFCE2
APB
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
135
18.3
I/O Lines Description
Table 18-1.
EBI I/O Lines Description
Name
Function
Type
Active Level
EBI
EBI_D0–EBI_D31
Data Bus
I/O
EBI_A0–EBI_A25
Address Bus
EBI_NWAIT
External Wait Signal
Output
Input
Low
SMC
EBI_NCS0–EBI_NCS7
Chip Select Lines
Output
Low
EBI_NWR0–EBI_NWR3
Write Signals
Output
Low
EBI_NRD
Read Signal
Output
Low
EBI_NWE
Write Enable
Output
Low
EBI_NBS0–EBI_NBS3
Byte Mask Signals
Output
Low
EBI for CompactFlash Support
EBI_CFCE1–EBI_CFCE2
CompactFlash Chip Enable
Output
Low
EBI_CFOE
CompactFlash Output Enable
Output
Low
EBI_CFWE
CompactFlash Write Enable
Output
Low
EBI_CFIOR
CompactFlash I/O Read Signal
Output
Low
EBI_CFIOW
CompactFlash I/O Write Signal
Output
Low
EBI_CFRNW
CompactFlash Read Not Write Signal
Output
EBI_CFCS0–EBI_CFCS1
CompactFlash Chip Select Lines
Output
Low
EBI for NAND Flash Support
EBI_NANDCS
NAND Flash Chip Select Line
Output
Low
EBI_NANDOE
NAND Flash Output Enable
Output
Low
EBI_NANDWE
NAND Flash Write Enable
Output
Low
SDRAM Controller
EBI_SDCK
SDRAM Clock
Output
EBI_SDCKE
SDRAM Clock Enable
Output
High
EBI_SDCS
SDRAM Controller Chip Select Line
Output
Low
EBI_BA0–EBI_BA1
Bank Select
Output
EBI_SDWE
SDRAM Write Enable
Output
Low
EBI_RAS - EBI_CAS
Row and Column Signal
Output
Low
EBI_NWR0–EBI_NWR3
Write Signals
Output
Low
EBI_NBS0–EBI_NBS3
Byte Mask Signals
Output
Low
EBI_SDA10
SDRAM Address 10 Line
Output
The connection of some signals through the MUX logic is not direct and depends on the Memory Controller in use
at the moment.
136
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 18-2 details the connections between the two Memory Controllers and the EBI pins.
Table 18-2.
EBI Pins and Memory Controllers I/O Lines Connections
EBIx Pins
SDRAMC I/O Lines
SMC I/O Lines
EBI_NWR1/NBS1/CFIOR
NBS1
NWR1/NUB
EBI_A0/NBS0
Not Supported
SMC_A0/NLB
EBI_A1/NBS2/NWR2
Not Supported
SMC_A1
EBI_A[11:2]
SDRAMC_A[9:0]
SMC_A[11:2]
EBI_SDA10
SDRAMC_A10
Not Supported
EBI_A12
Not Supported
SMC_A12
EBI_A[14:13]
SDRAMC_A[12:11]
SMC_A[14:13]
EBI_A[22:15]
Not Supported
SMC_A[22:15]
EBI_A[25:23]
Not Supported
SMC_A[25:23]
EBI_D[31:0]
D[31:0]
D[31:0]
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
137
18.4
Application Example
18.4.1 Hardware Interface
Table 18-3 details the connections to be applied between the EBI pins and the external devices for each memory
controller.
Table 18-3.
EBI Pins and External Static Devices Connections
Pins of the SMC Interfaced Device
8-bit Static
Device
2 x 8-bit
Static
Devices
16-bit Static
Device
4 x 8-bit
Static
Devices
2 x 16-bit
Static
Devices
32-bit Static
Device
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D8–D15
–
D8–D15
D8–D15
D8–D15
D8–15
D8–15
D16–D23
–
–
–
D16–D23
D16–D23
D16–D23
D24–D31
–
–
–
D24–D31
D24–D31
D24–D31
A0/NBS0
A0
–
NLB
–
NLB (3)
BE0 (5)
A1/NWR2/NBS2
A1
A0
A0
WE (2)
NLB (4)
BE2 (5)
A[2:25]
A[1:24]
A[1:24]
A[0:23]
A[0:23]
A[0:23]
NCS0
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS1/SDCS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS2
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS3/NANDCS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS4/CFCS0
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS5/CFCS1
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS6
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NCS7
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
NRD/CFOE
OE
OE
OE
OE
OE
OE
NWR0/NWE
WE
WE (1)
WE
WE (2)
WE
Signals: EBI_
A2–A25
NWR1/NBS1
–
WE
(1)
NUB
WE
(2)
NWR3/NBS3
–
–
–
WE (2)
Notes: 1. NWR1 enables upper byte writes. NWR0 enables lower byte writes.
2. NWRx enables corresponding byte x writes. (x = 0, 1, 2 or 3)
3. NBS0 and NBS1 enable respectively lower and upper bytes of the lower 16-bit word.
4. NBS2 and NBS3 enable respectively lower and upper bytes of the upper 16-bit word.
5. BEx: Byte x Enable (x = 0, 1, 2 or 3)
138
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
WE
(3)
BE1 (5)
NUB (4)
BE3 (5)
NUB
Table 18-4.
EBI Pins and External Device Connections
Pins of the Interfaced Device
SDRAMC
SMC
CompactFlash
True IDE Mode
(EBI only)
NAND Flash
Signals: EBI_
SDRAM
CompactFlash
(EBI only)
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
D0–D7
I/O0–I/O7
D8–D15
D8–D15
D8–15
D8–15
I/O8–I/O15
D16–D31
D16–D31
–
–
–
A0/NBS0
DQM0
A0
A0
–
A1/NWR2/NBS2
DQM2
A1
A1
–
A2–A10
A[0:8]
A[2:10]
A[2:10]
–
A11
A9
–
–
–
SDA10
A10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A[11:12]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A16/BA0
BA0
–
–
–
A17/BA1
BA1
–
–
–
A18–A20
–
–
–
–
A21/NANDALE
–
–
–
ALE
A22/NANDCLE
–
REG
REG
CLE
A23–A24
–
–
A12
A13–A14
A15
–
(1)
A25
–
NCS0
–
–
–
–
CS
–
–
–
NCS2
–
–
–
–
NCS3/NANDCS
–
–
–
CE (3)
NCS4/CFCS0
–
CFCS0 (1)
CFCS0 (1)
–
NCS5/CFCS1
–
(1)
(1)
–
NCS6
–
–
–
–
NCS7
–
–
–
–
NANDOE
–
–
–
RE
NANDWE
–
–
–
WE
NRD/CFOE
–
OE
–
–
NWR0/NWE/CFWE
–
WE
WE
–
NWR1/NBS1/CFIOR
DQM1
IOR
IOR
–
NWR3/NBS3/CFIOW
DQM3
IOW
IOW
–
–
CE1
CS0
–
NCS1/SDCS
CFCE1
CFRNW
–
(1)
CFCS1
CFRNW
CFCS1
–
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
139
Table 18-4.
EBI Pins and External Device Connections (Continued)
Pins of the Interfaced Device
SDRAMC
SDRAM
CompactFlash
(EBI only)
CompactFlash
True IDE Mode
(EBI only)
NAND Flash
CFCE2
–
CE2
CS1
–
SDCK
CLK
–
–
–
SDCKE
CKE
–
–
–
RAS
RAS
–
–
–
CAS
CAS
–
–
–
SDWE
WE
–
–
–
NWAIT
Signals: EBI_
–
WAIT
WAIT
–
Pxx
(2)
–
CD1 or CD2
CD1 or CD2
–
Pxx
(2)
–
–
–
CE (3)
Pxx (2)
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
140
SMC
–
–
–
RDY
Not directly connected to the CompactFlash slot. Permits the control of the bidirectional buffer between the EBI
data bus and the CompactFlash slot.
Any PIO line.
CE connection depends on the NAND Flash. For standard NAND Flash devices, it must be connected to any free
PIO line. For “CE don't care” NAND Flash devices, it can be either connected to NCS3/NANDCS or to any free
PIO line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.4.2 Connection Examples
Figure 18-2 shows an example of connections between the EBI and external devices.
Figure 18-2.
EBI Connections to Memory Devices
EBI
D0-D31
RAS
CAS
SDCK
SDCKE
SDWE
A0/NBS0
NWR1/NBS1
A1/NWR2/NBS2
NWR3/NBS3
NRD/NOE
NWR0/NWE
D0-D7
2M x 8
SDRAM
D8-D15
D0-D7
CS
CLK
CKE
SDWE WE
RAS
CAS
DQM
NBS0
A0-A9, A11
A10
BA0
BA1
2M x 8
SDRAM
D0-D7
CS
CLK
CKE
SDWE
WE
RAS
CAS
DQM
NBS1
A2-A11, A13
SDA10
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
A0-A9, A11
A10
BA0
BA1
A2-A11, A13
SDA10
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
SDA10
A2-A15
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
A18-A25
D16-D23 D0-D7
NCS0
NCS1/SDCS
NCS2
NCS3
NCS4
NCS5
CS
CLK
CKE
SDWE WE
RAS
CAS
DQM
2M x 8
SDRAM
A0-A9, A11
A10
BA0
BA1
D24-D31
2M x 8
SDRAM
D0-D7
CS
CLK
CKE
SDWE
WE
RAS
CAS
DQM
NBS3
A2-A11, A13
SDA10
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
A0-A9, A11
A10
BA0
BA1
A2-A11, A13
SDA10
A16/BA0
A17/BA1
NBS2
128K x 8
SRAM
D0-D7
NRD/NOE
A0/NWR0/NBS0
18.5
D0-D7
A0-A16
128K x 8
SRAM
A1-A17
D8-D15
D0-D7
CS
CS
OE
WE
OE
WE
NRD/NOE
NWR1/NBS1
A0-A16
A1-A17
Product Dependencies
18.5.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the External Bus Interface may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer
must first program the PIO controller to assign the External Bus Interface pins to their peripheral function. If I/O
lines of the External Bus Interface are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the PIO
Controller.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
141
18.6
Functional Description
The EBI transfers data between the internal AHB Bus (handled by the Bus Matrix) and the external memories or
peripheral devices. It controls the waveforms and the parameters of the external address, data and control buses
and is composed of the following elements:
the Static Memory Controller (SMC)
the SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC)
the ECC Controller (ECC)
a chip select assignment feature that assigns an AHB address space to the external devices
a multiplex controller circuit that shares the pins between the different Memory Controllers
programmable CompactFlash support logic
programmable NAND Flash support logic
18.6.1 Bus Multiplexing
The EBI offers a complete set of control signals that share the 32-bit data lines, the address lines of up to 26 bits
and the control signals through a multiplex logic operating in function of the memory area requests.
Multiplexing is specifically organized in order to guarantee the maintenance of the address and output control lines
at a stable state while no external access is being performed. Multiplexing is also designed to respect the data float
times defined in the Memory Controllers. Furthermore, refresh cycles of the SDRAM are executed independently
by the SDRAM Controller without delaying the other external Memory Controller accesses.
18.6.2 Pull-up Control
The EBI Chip Select Assignment Register (EBI_CSA) permits enabling of on-chip pull-up resistors on the data bus
lines not multiplexed with the PIO Controller lines. The pull-up resistors are enabled after reset. Setting the
EBI_CSA.EBI_DBPUC bit disables the pull-up resistors on the lines D0–D15. Enabling the pull-up resistor on the
D16-D31 lines can be performed by programming the appropriate PIO controller.
18.6.3 Static Memory Controller
For information on the Static Memory Controller, refer to Section 19. “Static Memory Controller (SMC)”.
18.6.4 SDRAM Controller
For information on the SDRAM Controller, refer to Section 20. “SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC)”.
18.6.5 ECC Controller
For information on the ECC Controller, refer to Section 21. “Error Correction Code Controller (ECC)”.
18.6.6 CompactFlash Support
The External Bus Interface integrates circuitry that interfaces to CompactFlash devices.
The CompactFlash logic is driven by the Static Memory Controller (SMC) on the NCS4 and/or NCS5 address
space. Programming the EBI_CS4A and/or EBI_CS5A bit of the EBI_CSA register in the Chip Configuration User
Interface to the appropriate value enables this logic. For details on this register, refer to Section 17.7.1 “EBI Chip
Select Assignment Register”. Access to an external CompactFlash device is then made by accessing the address
space reserved to NCS4 and/or NCS5 (i.e., between 0x5000 0000 and 0x5FFF FFFF for NCS4 and between
0x6000 0000 and 0x6FFF FFFF for NCS5).
All CompactFlash modes (Attribute Memory, Common Memory, I/O and True IDE) are supported but the signals
_IOIS16 (I/O and True IDE modes) and _ATA SEL (True IDE mode) are not handled.
142
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.6.6.1 I/O Mode, Common Memory Mode, Attribute Memory Mode and True IDE Mode
Within the NCS4 and/or NCS5 address space, the current transfer address is used to distinguish I/O mode,
common memory mode, attribute memory mode and True IDE mode.
The different modes are accessed through a specific memory mapping as illustrated on Figure 18-3. A[23:21] bits
of the transfer address are used to select the desired mode as described in Table 18-5.
Figure 18-3.
CompactFlash Memory Mapping
True IDE Alternate Mode Space
Offset 0x00E0 0000
True IDE Mode Space
Offset 0x00C0 0000
CF Address Space
I/O Mode Space
Offset 0x0080 0000
Common Memory Mode Space
Offset 0x0040 0000
Attribute Memory Mode Space
Offset 0x0000 0000
Note:
The A22 pin is used to drive the REG signal of the CompactFlash Device (except in True IDE mode).
Table 18-5.
CompactFlash Mode Selection
A[23:21]
Mode Base Address
000
Attribute Memory
010
Common Memory
100
I/O Mode
110
True IDE Mode
111
Alternate True IDE Mode
18.6.6.2 CFCE1 and CFCE2 Signals
To cover all types of access, the SMC must be alternatively set to drive 8-bit data bus or 16-bit data bus. The odd
byte access on the D[7:0] bus is only possible when the SMC is configured to drive 8-bit memory devices on the
corresponding NCS pin (NCS4 or NCS5). The DBW field in the SMC Mode Register corresponding to the NCS4
and/or NCS5 address space must be set as shown in Table 18-6 to enable the required access type.
NBS1 and NBS0 are the byte selection signals from SMC and are available when the SMC is set in Byte Select
mode on the corresponding Chip Select.
The CFCE1 and CFCE2 waveforms are identical to the corresponding NCSx waveform. For details on these
waveforms and timings, refer to Section 19. “Static Memory Controller (SMC)”.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
143
Table 18-6.
CFCE1 and CFCE2 Truth Table
Mode
CFCE2
CFCE1
DBW
Comment
SMC Access Mode
NBS1
NBS0
16 bits
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Byte Select
NBS1
NBS0
16bits
1
0
8 bits
NBS1
NBS0
16 bits
1
0
8 bits
Task File
1
0
8 bits
Data Register
1
0
16 bits
0
1
Don’t Care
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Drive Address
0
1
8 bits
Access to Odd Byte on D[7:0]
Standby Mode or Address Space is
not assigned to CF
1
1
–
Attribute Memory
Common Memory
I/O Mode
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Odd Byte on D[15:8]
Byte Select
Access to Odd Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Odd Byte on D[15:8]
Byte Select
Access to Odd Byte on D[7:0]
True IDE Mode
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Odd Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Even Byte on D[7:0]
Access to Odd Byte on D[15:8]
Byte Select
Alternate True IDE Mode
Control Register
Alternate Status Read
–
Don’t Care
–
18.6.6.3 Read/Write Signals
In I/O mode and True IDE mode, the CompactFlash logic drives the read and write command signals of the SMC
on CFIOR and CFIOW signals, while the CFOE and CFWE signals are deactivated. Likewise, in common memory
mode and attribute memory mode, the SMC signals are driven on the CFOE and CFWE signals, while the CFIOR
and CFIOW are deactivated. Figure 18-4 demonstrates a schematic representation of this logic.
Attribute memory mode, common memory mode and I/O mode are supported by setting the address setup and
hold time on the NCS4 (and/or NCS5) chip select to the appropriate values.
Figure 18-4.
CompactFlash Read/Write Control Signals
External Bus Interface
SMC
CompactFlash Logic
A23
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
CFOE
CFWE
A22
NRD_NOE
NWR0_NWE
0
1
1
144
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
1
CFIOR
CFIOW
Table 18-7.
CompactFlash Mode Selection
Mode Base Address
CFOE
CFWE
CFIOR
CFIOW
NRD
NWR0_NWE
1
1
I/O Mode
1
1
NRD
NWR0_NWE
True IDE Mode
0
1
NRD
NWR0_NWE
Attribute Memory
Common Memory
18.6.6.4 Multiplexing of CompactFlash Signals on EBI Pins
Table 18-8 and Table 18-9 illustrate the multiplexing of the CompactFlash logic signals with other EBI signals on
the EBI pins. The EBI pins in Table 18-8 are strictly dedicated to the CompactFlash interface as soon as the
EBI_CS4A and/or EBI_CS5A bit(s) of the EBI Chip Select Assignment Register in the Chip Configuration User
Interface is set. These pins must not be used to drive any other memory devices.
The EBI pins in Table 18-9 remain shared between all memory areas when the corresponding CompactFlash
interface is enabled (EBI_CS4A = 1 and/or EBI_CS5A = 1).
Table 18-8.
Dedicated CompactFlash Interface Multiplexing
CompactFlash Signals
Pins
CS4A = 1
NCS4/CFCS0
CFCS0
NCS5/CFCS1
Table 18-9.
CS5A = 1
EBI Signals
CS4A = 0
CS5A = 0
NCS4
CFCS1
NCS5
Shared CompactFlash Interface Multiplexing
Access to CompactFlash Device
Access to Other EBI Devices
CompactFlash Signals
EBI Signals
NRD/CFOE
CFOE
NRD
NWR0/NWE/CFWE
CFWE
NWR0/NWE
NWR1/NBS1/CFIOR
CFIOR
NWR1/NBS1
NWR3/NBS3/CFIOW
CFIOW
NWR3/NBS3
A25/CFRNW
CFRNW
A25
Pins
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
145
18.6.6.5 Application Example
Figure 18-5 illustrates an example of a CompactFlash application. CFCS0 and CFRNW signals are not directly
connected to the CompactFlash slot 0, but do control the direction and the output enable of the buffers between
the EBI and the CompactFlash Device. The timing of the CFCS0 signal is identical to the NCS4 signal. Moreover,
the CFRNW signal remains valid throughout the transfer, as does the address bus. The CompactFlash _WAIT
signal is connected to the NWAIT input of the Static Memory Controller. For details on these waveforms and
timings, refer to Section 19. “Static Memory Controller (SMC)”.
Figure 18-5.
CompactFlash Application Example
EBI
CompactFlash Connector
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
DIR /OE
A25/CFRNW
NCS4/CFCS0
_CD1
CD (PIO)
_CD2
/OE
146
A[10:0]
A[10:0]
A22/REG
_REG
NOE/CFOE
_OE
NWE/CFWE
_WE
NWR1/CFIOR
_IORD
NWR3/CFIOW
_IOWR
CFCE1
_CE1
CFCE2
_CE2
NWAIT
_WAIT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.6.7 NAND Flash Support
The External Bus Interface integrates circuitry that interfaces to NAND Flash devices.
18.6.7.1 External Bus Interface
The NAND Flash logic is driven by the Static Memory Controller on the NCS3 address space. Programming the
EBI_CS3A field in the EBI Chip Select Assignment Register to the appropriate value enables the NAND Flash
logic. For details on this register, refer to Section 17. “SAM9260 Bus Matrix”. Access to an external NAND Flash
device is then made by accessing the address space reserved to NCS3 (i.e., between 0x4000 0000 and 0x4FFF
FFFF).
The NAND Flash Logic drives the read and write command signals of the SMC on the NANDOE and NANDWE
signals when the NCS3 signal is active. NANDOE and NANDWE are invalidated as soon as the transfer address
fails to lie in the NCS3 address space. See Figure 18-6 for more information. For details on the waveforms, refer to
Section 19. “Static Memory Controller (SMC)”.
Figure 18-6.
NAND Flash Signal Multiplexing on EBI Pins
SMC
NAND Flash Logic
NCSx
NRD_NOE
NANDOE
NANDWE
NANDOE
NANDWE
NWR0_NWE
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
147
18.6.7.2 NAND Flash Signals
The address latch enable and command latch enable signals on the NAND Flash device are driven by address bits
A22 and A21 of the EBI address bus. The command, address or data words on the data bus of the NAND Flash
device are distinguished by using their address within the NCSx address space. The chip enable (CE) signal of the
device and the ready/busy (R/B) signals are connected to PIO lines. The CE signal then remains asserted even
when NCSx is not selected, preventing the device from returning to standby mode.
Figure 18-7.
NAND Flash Application Example
D[7:0]
AD[7:0]
A[22:21]
ALE
CLE
NCSx/NANDCS
Not Connected
EBI
NAND Flash
NANDOE
NANDWE
Note:
148
NOE
NWE
PIO
CE
PIO
R/B
The External Bus Interface is also able to support 16-bit devices.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.7
Implementation Examples
The following hardware configurations are given for illustration only. The user should refer to the memory
manufacturer website to check current device availability.
18.7.1 16-bit SDRAM
18.7.1.1 Hardware Configuration - 16-bit SDRAM
D[0..15]
A[0..14]
U1
(Not used A12)
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A13
SDA10
SDA10
BA0
BA1
BA0
BA1
A14
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
20
21
36
40
SDCKE
CFIOR_NBS1_NWR1
37
SDCK
38
1%6
1%6
15
39
CAS
RAS
17
18
SDWE
16
19
SDCK
A0
SDCKE
CAS
RAS
SDWE
SDCS_NCS1
A0 MT48LC16M16A2 DQ0
A1
DQ1
A2
DQ2
A3
DQ3
A4
DQ4
A5
DQ5
A6
DQ6
A7
DQ7
A8
DQ8
A9
DQ9
A10
DQ10
A11
DQ11
DQ12
BA0
DQ13
BA1
DQ14
DQ15
A12
N.C
VDD
VDD
CKE
VDD
VDDQ
CLK
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQML
VDDQ
DQMH
VSS
CAS
VSS
RAS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
WE
VSSQ
CS
VSSQ
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
3V3
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
28
41
54
6
12
46
52
256 Mbits
TSOP54 PACKAGE
18.7.1.2 Software Configuration - 16-bit SDRAM
The following configuration has to be performed:
Assign the EBI CS1 to the SDRAM controller by setting the bit EBI_CS1A in the EBI Chip Select Assignment
Register located in the bus matrix memory space.
Initialize the SDRAM Controller depending on the SDRAM device and system bus frequency.
The Data Bus Width is to be programmed to 16 bits.
The SDRAM initialization sequence is described in the “SDRAM device initialization” part of the SDRAM controller.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
149
18.7.2 32-bit SDRAM
18.7.2.1 Hardware Configuration - 32-bit SDRAM
D[0..31]
A[0..14]
(Not used A12)
U1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A13
SDA10
BA0
BA1
SDA10
BA0
BA1
A14
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
20
21
36
40
SDCKE
SDCK
A0
CFIOR_NBS1_NWR1
CAS
RAS
SDWE
SDCKE
37
SDCK
38
1%6
1%6
15
39
CAS
RAS
17
18
SDWE
16
19
SDCS_NCS1
U2
A0 MT48LC16M16A2 DQ0
A1
DQ1
A2
DQ2
A3
DQ3
A4
DQ4
A5
DQ5
A6
DQ6
A7
DQ7
A8
DQ8
A9
DQ9
A10
DQ10
A11
DQ11
DQ12
BA0
DQ13
BA1
DQ14
DQ15
A12
N.C
VDD
VDD
CKE
VDD
VDDQ
CLK
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQML
VDDQ
DQMH
VSS
CAS
VSS
RAS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
WE
VSSQ
CS
VSSQ
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
3V3
28
41
54
6
12
46
52
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
SDA10
A13
BA0
BA1
A14
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
A1
CFIOW_NBS3_NWR3
256 Mbits
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
20
21
36
40
SDCKE
37
SDCK
38
1%6
1%6
15
39
CAS
RAS
17
18
SDWE
16
19
A0 MT48LC16M16A2 DQ0
A1
DQ1
A2
DQ2
A3
DQ3
A4
DQ4
A5
DQ5
A6
DQ6
A7
DQ7
A8
DQ8
A9
DQ9
A10
DQ10
A11
DQ11
DQ12
BA0
DQ13
BA1
DQ14
DQ15
A12
N.C
VDD
VDD
CKE
VDD
VDDQ
CLK
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQML
VDDQ
DQMH
VSS
CAS
VSS
RAS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
WE
VSSQ
CS
VSSQ
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
3V3
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
100NF
28
41
54
6
12
46
52
256 Mbits
TSOP54 PACKAGE
18.7.2.2 Software Configuration - 32-bit SDRAM
The following configuration has to be performed:
Assign the EBI CS1 to the SDRAM controller by setting the bit EBI_CS1A in the EBI Chip Select Assignment
Register located in the bus matrix memory space.
Initialize the SDRAM Controller depending on the SDRAM device and system bus frequency.
The Data Bus Width is to be programmed to 32 bits. The data lines D[16..31] are multiplexed with PIO lines and
thus the dedicated PIOs must be programmed in peripheral mode in the PIO controller.
The SDRAM initialization sequence is described in Section 20.4.1 “SDRAM Device Initialization”.
150
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.7.3 8-bit NAND Flash
18.7.3.1 Hardware Configuration - 8-bit NAND Flash
D[0..7]
U1
CLE
ALE
NANDOE
NANDWE
(ANY PIO)
(ANY PIO)
R1
3V3
R2
10K
16
17
8
18
9
CLE
ALE
RE
WE
CE
7
R/B
19
WP
10K
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
K9F2G08U0M
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
29
30
31
32
41
42
43
44
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
PRE
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
48
47
46
45
40
39
38
35
34
33
28
27
VCC
VCC
37
12
VSS
VSS
36
13
2 Gb
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
3V3
C2
100NF
C1
100NF
TSOP48 PACKAGE
18.7.3.2 Software Configuration - 8-bit NAND Flash
The following configuration has to be performed:
Assign the EBI CS3 to the NAND Flash by setting the bit EBI_CS3A in the EBI Chip Select Assignment
Register located in the bus matrix memory space
Reserve A21 / A22 for ALE / CLE functions. Address and Command Latches are controlled respectively by
setting to 1 the address bit A21 and A22 during accesses.
Configure a PIO line as an input to manage the Ready/Busy signal.
Configure Static Memory Controller CS3 Setup, Pulse, Cycle and Mode accordingly to NAND Flash timings,
the data bus width and the system bus frequency.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
151
18.7.4 16-bit NAND Flash
18.7.4.1 Hardware Configuration - 16-bit NAND Flash
D[0..15]
U1
CLE
ALE
NANDOE
NANDWE
(ANY PIO)
(ANY PIO)
R1
3V3
R2
10K
16
17
8
18
9
CLE
ALE
RE
WE
CE
7
R/B
19
WP
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
34
35
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
10K
MT29F2G16AABWP-ET
I/O0 26
I/O1 28
I/O2 30
I/O3 32
I/O4 40
I/O5 42
I/O6 44
I/O7 46
I/O8 27
I/O9 29
I/O10 31
I/O11 33
I/O12 41
I/O13 43
I/O14 45
I/O15 47
N.C
PRE
N.C
39
38
36
VCC
VCC
37
12
VSS
VSS
VSS
48
25
13
2 Gb
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
3V3
C2
100NF
C1
100NF
TSOP48 PACKAGE
18.7.4.2 Software Configuration - 16-bit NAND Flash
The software configuration is the same as for an 8-bit NAND Flash except the data bus width programmed in the
mode register of the Static Memory Controller.
152
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
18.7.5 NOR Flash on NCS0
18.7.5.1 Hardware Configuration - NOR Flash on NCS0
D[0..15]
A[1..22]
U1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
NRST
NWE
3V3
NCS0
NRD
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
16
15
10
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
12
11
14
13
26
28
RESET
WE
WP
VPP
CE
OE
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
AT49BV6416
3V3
VCCQ
47
VCC
37
VSS
VSS
46
27
C2
100NF
C1
100NF
TSOP48 PACKAGE
18.7.5.2 Software Configuration - NOR Flash on NCS0
The default configuration for the Static Memory Controller, byte select mode, 16-bit data bus, Read/Write
controlled by Chip Select, allows boot on 16-bit non-volatile memory at slow clock.
For another configuration, configure the Static Memory Controller CS0 Setup, Pulse, Cycle and Mode depending
on Flash timings and system bus frequency.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
153
18.7.6 Compact Flash
18.7.6.1 Hardware Configuration - Compact Flash
MEMORY & I/O MODE
D[0..15]
MN1A
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
A2
A1
B2
B1
C2
C1
D2
D1
A3
A4
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
E5
E6
F5
F6
G5
G6
H5
H6
CF_D7
CF_D6
CF_D5
CF_D4
CF_D3
CF_D2
CF_D1
CF_D0
1DIR
1OE
74ALVCH32245
MN1B
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A25/CFRNW
4
CFCSx
(CFCS0 or CFCS1)
6
5
E2
E1
F2
F1
G2
G1
H2
H1
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
H3
H4
2DIR
2OE
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
3V3
R1
MN2A
47K
SN74ALVC32
74ALVCH32245
MN2B
SN74ALVC32
R2
47K
CD2
1
3
(ANY PIO)
CD1
2
&$5''(7(&7
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
J5
J6
K5
K6
L5
L6
M5
M6
3A1
3A2
3A3
3A4
3A5
3A6
3A7
3A8
J3
J4
3DIR
3OE
3V3
3B1
3B2
3B3
3B4
3B5
3B6
3B7
3B8
J2
J1
K2
K1
L2
L1
M2
M1
CF_A10
CF_A9
CF_A8
CF_A7
CF_A6
CF_A5
CF_A4
CF_A3
31
30
29
28
27
49
48
47
6
5
4
3
2
23
22
21
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
CD2
CD1
25
26
CD2#
CD1#
CF_A10
CF_A9
CF_A8
CF_A7
CF_A6
CF_A5
CF_A4
CF_A3
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
8
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
REG
44
REG#
WE
OE
IOWR
IORD
36
9
35
34
WE#
OE#
IOWR#
IORD#
CE2
CE1
74ALVCH32245
MN1D
A2
A1
A0
N5
N6
P5
P6
R5
R6
T6
T5
A22/REG
CFWE
CFOE
CFIOW
CFIOR
T3
T4
4A1
4A2
4A3
4A4
4A5
4A6
4A7
4A8
4B1
4B2
4B3
4B4
4B5
4B6
4B7
4B8
N2
N1
P2
P1
R2
R1
T1
T2
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
REG
WE
OE
IOWR
IORD
4DIR
4OE
1
2
4
CFCE2
5
10
CFCE1
CFRST
(ANY PIO)
CFIRQ
9
13
(ANY PIO)
11
MN3A
SN74ALVC125
3
CE2
MN3B
SN74ALVC125
6
CE1
MN3C
SN74ALVC125
RESET
8
MN3D
R3
SN74ALVC125
10K
RDY/BSY
12
3V3
MN4
3V3
NWAIT
5 VCC
1
4
2
GND
3
SN74LVC1G125-Q1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
R4
10K
WAIT#
32
7
CE2#
CE1#
3V3
VCC
38
VCC
13
GND
GND
50
1
CSEL#
39
INPACK#
43
BVD2
BVD1
45
46
24
WP
WAIT#
42
WAIT#
VS2#
VS1#
40
33
RESET
41
RESET
RDY/BSY
37
N7E50-7516VY-20
74ALVCH32245
154
CF_D15
CF_D14
CF_D13
CF_D12
CF_D11
CF_D10
CF_D9
CF_D8
CF_D7
CF_D6
CF_D5
CF_D4
CF_D3
CF_D2
CF_D1
CF_D0
MN1C
A[0..10]
3V3
J1
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
CF_D15
CF_D14
CF_D13
CF_D12
CF_D11
CF_D10
CF_D9
CF_D8
C1
100NF
C2
100NF
RDY/BSY
18.7.6.2 Software Configuration - Compact Flash
The following configuration has to be performed:
Assign the EBI CS4 and/or EBI_CS5 to the CompactFlash Slot 0 or/and Slot 1 by setting the bit EBI_CS4A
or/and EBI_CS5A in the EBI Chip Select Assignment Register located in the bus matrix memory space.
The address line A23 is to select I/O (A23 = 1) or Memory mode (A23 = 0) and the address line A22 for REG
function.
A23, CFRNW, CFS0, CFCS1, CFCE1 and CFCE2 signals are multiplexed with PIO lines and thus the
dedicated PIOs must be programmed in peripheral mode in the PIO controller.
Configure a PIO line as an output for CFRST and two others as an input for CFIRQ and CARD DETECT
functions respectively.
Configure SMC CS4 and/or SMC_CS5 (for Slot 0 or 1) Setup, Pulse, Cycle and Mode accordingly to
Compact Flash timings and system bus frequency.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
155
18.7.7 Compact Flash True IDE
18.7.7.1 Hardware Configuration - Compact Flash True IDE
TRUE IDE MODE
D[0..15]
MN1A
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
A2
A1
B2
B1
C2
C1
D2
D1
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
A3
A4
1DIR
1OE
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
CF_D15
CF_D14
CF_D13
CF_D12
CF_D11
CF_D10
CF_D9
CF_D8
E5
E6
F5
F6
G5
G6
H5
H6
CF_D7
CF_D6
CF_D5
CF_D4
CF_D3
CF_D2
CF_D1
CF_D0
74ALVCH32245
MN1B
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A25/CFRNW
CFCSx
(CFCS0 or CFCS1)
4
E2
E1
F2
F1
G2
G1
H2
H1
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
H3
H4
2DIR
2OE
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
3V3
R1
MN2A
47K
SN74ALVC32
74ALVCH32245
6 MN2B
SN74ALVC32
5
CD2
1
CD1
2
&$5''(7(&7
J5
J6
K5
K6
L5
L6
M5
M6
3A1
3A2
3A3
3A4
3A5
3A6
3A7
3A8
J3
J4
3DIR
3OE
3V3
3B1
3B2
3B3
3B4
3B5
3B6
3B7
3B8
J2
J1
K2
K1
L2
L1
M2
M1
CF_A10
CF_A9
CF_A8
CF_A7
CF_A6
CF_A5
CF_A4
CF_A3
N5
N6
P5
P6
R5
R6
T6
T5
A22/REG
CFWE
CFOE
CFIOW
CFIOR
T3
T4
4A1
4A2
4A3
4A4
4A5
4A6
4A7
4A8
4B1
4B2
4B3
4B4
4B5
4B6
4B7
4B8
N2
N1
P2
P1
R2
R1
T1
T2
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
REG
WE
OE
IOWR
IORD
1
CFCE1
5
10
CFRST
9
(ANY PIO)
CFIRQ
11
13
(ANY PIO)
MN3A
SN74ALVC125
3
CE2
MN3B
SN74ALVC125
6
CE1
MN3C
SN74ALVC125
RESET#
8
MN3D
SN74ALVC125
INTRQ
12
R3
10K
3V3
MN4
3V3
NWAIT
5 VCC
1
4
2
GND
3
SN74LVC1G125-Q1
156
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25
26
CD2#
CD1#
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
8
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
44
REG#
36
9
35
34
WE#
ATA SEL#
IOWR#
IORD#
R4
10K
IORDY
32
7
CS1#
CS0#
24
IOIS16#
IORDY
42
IORDY
RESET#
41
3V3
VCC
38
VCC
13
GND
GND
50
1
CSEL#
39
INPACK#
43
DASP#
PDIAG#
45
46
VS2#
VS1#
40
33
INTRQ
37
RESET#
N7E50-7516VY-20
4DIR
4OE
4
2
CD2
CD1
CE2
CE1
74ALVCH32245
CFCE2
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IOWR
IORD
74ALVCH32245
MN1D
A2
A1
A0
31
30
29
28
27
49
48
47
6
5
4
3
2
23
22
21
3V3
MN1C
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
CF_D15
CF_D14
CF_D13
CF_D12
CF_D11
CF_D10
CF_D9
CF_D8
CF_D7
CF_D6
CF_D5
CF_D4
CF_D3
CF_D2
CF_D1
CF_D0
R2
47K
3
(ANY PIO)
A[0..10]
3V3
J1
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
C1
100NF
C2
100NF
INTRQ
18.7.7.2 Software Configuration - Compact Flash True IDE
The following configuration has to be performed:
Assign the EBI CS4 and/or EBI_CS5 to the CompactFlash Slot 0 or/and Slot 1 by setting the bit EBI_CS4A
or/and EBI_CS5A in the EBI Chip Select Assignment Register located in the bus matrix memory space.
The address line A21 is to select Alternate True IDE (A21 = 1) or True IDE (A21 = 0) modes.
CFRNW, CFS0, CFCS1, CFCE1 and CFCE2 signals are multiplexed with PIO lines and thus the dedicated
PIOs must be programmed in peripheral mode in the PIO controller.
Configure a PIO line as an output for CFRST and two others as an input for CFIRQ and CARD DETECT
functions respectively.
Configure SMC CS4 and/or SMC_CS5 (for Slot 0 or 1) Setup, Pulse, Cycle and Mode accordingly to
Compact Flash timings and system bus frequency.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
157
19.
Static Memory Controller (SMC)
19.1
Description
The Static Memory Controller (SMC) generates the signals that control the access to the external memory devices
or peripheral devices. It has 8 Chip Selects and a 26-bit address bus. The 32-bit data bus can be configured to
interface with 8-, 16-, or 32-bit external devices. Separate read and write control signals allow for direct memory
and peripheral interfacing. Read and write signal waveforms are fully parametrizable.
The SMC can manage wait requests from external devices to extend the current access. The SMC is provided with
an automatic slow clock mode. In slow clock mode, it switches from user-programmed waveforms to slow-rate
specific waveforms on read and write signals. The SMC supports asynchronous burst read in page mode access
for page size up to 32 bytes.
19.2
I/O Lines Description
Table 19-1.
19.3
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
Type
Active Level
NCS[7:0]
Static Memory Controller Chip Select Lines
Output
Low
NRD
Read Signal
Output
Low
NWR0/NWE
Write 0/Write Enable Signal
Output
Low
A0/NBS0
Address Bit 0/Byte 0 Select Signal
Output
Low
NWR1/NBS1
Write 1/Byte 1 Select Signal
Output
Low
A1/NWR2/NBS2
Address Bit 1/Write 2/Byte 2 Select Signal
Output
Low
NWR3/NBS3
Write 3/Byte 3 Select Signal
Output
Low
A[25:2]
Address Bus
Output
D[31:0]
Data Bus
NWAIT
External Wait Signal
Input
Low
Multiplexed Signals
Table 19-2.
Static Memory Controller (SMC) Multiplexed Signals
Multiplexed Signals
158
I/O
Related Function
NWR0
NWE
Byte-write or byte-select access, see “Byte Write or Byte Select Access” on page 160
A0
NBS0
8-bit or 16-/32-bit data bus, see “Data Bus Width” on page 160
NWR1
NBS1
Byte-write or byte-select access, see “Byte Write or Byte Select Access” on page 160
A1
NWR2
NWR3
NBS3
NBS2
8-/16-bit or 32-bit data bus, see “Data Bus Width” on page 160.
Byte-write or byte-select access, see “Byte Write or Byte Select Access” on page 160
Byte-write or byte-select access, see “Byte Write or Byte Select Access” on page 160
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.4
Application Example
19.4.1 Hardware Interface
Figure 19-1.
SMC Connections to Static Memory Devices
D0-D31
A0/NBS0
NWR0/NWE
NWR1/NBS1
A1/NWR2/NBS2
NWR3/NBS3
D0 - D7
128K x 8
SRAM
D8-D15
D0 - D7
CS
NRD
NWR0/NWE
A2 - A25
A2 - A18
A0 - A16
NRD
OE
NWR1/NBS1
WE
128K x 8
SRAM
D16 - D23
D24-D31
D0 - D7
A0 - A16
NRD
Static Memory
Controller
19.5
A2 - A18
OE
WE
128K x 8
SRAM
D0-D7
CS
CS
A1/NWR2/NBS2
D0-D7
CS
A0 - A16
NCS0
NCS1
NCS2
NCS3
NCS4
NCS5
NCS6
NCS7
128K x 8
SRAM
A2 - A18
A2 - A18
A0 - A16
NRD
OE
WE
OE
NWR3/NBS3
WE
Product Dependencies
19.5.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the Static Memory Controller may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer
must first program the PIO controller to assign the Static Memory Controller pins to their peripheral function. If I/O
Lines of the SMC are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the PIO Controller.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
159
19.6
External Memory Mapping
The SMC provides up to 26 address lines, A[25:0]. This allows each chip select line to address up to 64 Mbytes of
memory.
If the physical memory device connected on one chip select is smaller than 64 Mbytes, it wraps around and
appears to be repeated within this space. The SMC correctly handles any valid access to the memory device
within the page (see Figure 19-2).
A[25:0] is only significant for 8-bit memory, A[25:1] is used for 16-bit memory, A[25:2] is used for 32-bit memory.
Figure 19-2.
Memory Connections for Eight External Devices
NCS[0] - NCS[7]
NCS7
NRD
SMC
NCS6
NWE
NCS5
A[25:0]
NCS4
D[31:0]
NCS3
NCS2
NCS1
NCS0
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Output Enable
Write Enable
A[25:0]
8 or 16 or 32
19.7
D[31:0] or D[15:0] or
D[7:0]
Connection to External Devices
19.7.1 Data Bus Width
A data bus width of 8, 16, or 32 bits can be selected for each chip select. This option is controlled by the field DBW
in SMC_MODE (Mode Register) for the corresponding chip select.
Figure 19-3 shows how to connect a 512K x 8-bit memory on NCS2. Figure 19-4 shows how to connect a 512K x
16-bit memory on NCS2. Figure 19-5 shows two 16-bit memories connected as a single 32-bit memory
19.7.2 Byte Write or Byte Select Access
Each chip select with a 16-bit or 32-bit data bus can operate with one of two different types of write access: byte
write or byte select access. This is controlled by the BAT field of the SMC_MODE register for the corresponding
chip select.
160
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 19-3.
Memory Connection for an 8-bit Data Bus
D[7:0]
D[7:0]
A[18:2]
A[18:2]
SMC
A0
A0
A1
A1
NWE
Write Enable
NRD
Output Enable
NCS[2]
Figure 19-4.
Memory Connection for a 16-bit Data Bus
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
A[19:2]
A[18:1]
A1
SMC
A[0]
NBS0
Low Byte Enable
NBS1
High Byte Enable
NWE
Write Enable
NRD
Output Enable
NCS[2]
Figure 19-5.
Memory Enable
Memory Enable
Memory Connection for a 32-bit Data Bus
D[31:16]
SMC
D[31:16]
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
A[20:2]
A[18:0]
NBS0
Byte 0 Enable
NBS1
Byte 1 Enable
NBS2
Byte 2 Enable
NBS3
Byte 3 Enable
NWE
Write Enable
NRD
Output Enable
NCS[2]
Memory Enable
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
161
19.7.2.1 Byte Write Access
Byte write access supports one byte write signal per byte of the data bus and a single read signal.
Note that the SMC does not allow boot in Byte Write Access mode.
For 16-bit devices: the SMC provides NWR0 and NWR1 write signals for respectively byte0 (lower byte) and
byte1 (upper byte) of a 16-bit bus. One single read signal (NRD) is provided.
Byte Write Access is used to connect 2 x 8-bit devices as a 16-bit memory.
For 32-bit devices: NWR0, NWR1, NWR2 and NWR3, are the write signals of byte0 (lower byte), byte1,
byte2 and byte 3 (upper byte) respectively. One single read signal (NRD) is provided.
Byte Write Access is used to connect 4 x 8-bit devices as a 32-bit memory.
Byte Write option is illustrated on Figure 19-6.
19.7.2.2 Byte Select Access
In this mode, read/write operations can be enabled/disabled at a byte level. One byte-select line per byte of the
data bus is provided. One NRD and one NWE signal control read and write.
For 16-bit devices: the SMC provides NBS0 and NBS1 selection signals for respectively byte0 (lower byte)
and byte1 (upper byte) of a 16-bit bus.
Byte Select Access is used to connect one 16-bit device.
For 32-bit devices: NBS0, NBS1, NBS2 and NBS3, are the selection signals of byte0 (lower byte), byte1,
byte2 and byte 3 (upper byte) respectively. Byte Select Access is used to connect two 16-bit devices.
Figure 19-7 shows how to connect two 16-bit devices on a 32-bit data bus in Byte Select Access mode, on NCS3
(BAT = Byte Select Access).
Figure 19-6.
Connection of 2 x 8-bit Devices on a 16-bit Bus: Byte Write Option
D[7:0]
D[7:0]
D[15:8]
A[24:2]
SMC
A1
NWR0
A[23:1]
A[0]
Write Enable
NWR1
NRD
NCS[3]
Read Enable
Memory Enable
D[15:8]
A[23:1]
A[0]
Write Enable
Read Enable
Memory Enable
162
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.7.2.3 Signal Multiplexing
Depending on the BAT, only the write signals or the byte select signals are used. To save IOs at the external bus
interface, control signals at the SMC interface are multiplexed. Table 19-3 shows signal multiplexing depending on
the data bus width and the byte access type.
For 32-bit devices, bits A0 and A1 are unused. For 16-bit devices, bit A0 of address is unused. When Byte Select
Option is selected, NWR1 to NWR3 are unused. When Byte Write option is selected, NBS0 to NBS3 are unused.
Figure 19-7.
Connection of 2x16-bit Data Bus on a 32-bit Data Bus (Byte Select Option)
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
D[31:16]
A[25:2]
SMC
A[23:0]
NWE
Write Enable
NBS0
Low Byte Enable
NBS1
High Byte Enable
NBS2
NBS3
Read Enable
NRD
Memory Enable
NCS[3]
D[31:16]
A[23:0]
Write Enable
Low Byte Enable
High Byte Enable
Read Enable
Memory Enable
Table 19-3.
SMC Multiplexed Signal Translation
32-bit Bus
Signal Name
16-bit Bus
8-bit Bus
1 x 32-bit
2 x 16-bit
4 x 8-bit
1 x 16-bit
2 x 8-bit
1 x 8-bit
Byte Select
Byte Select
Byte Write
Byte Select
Byte Write
–
NBS0_A0
NBS0
NBS0
–
NBS0
–
A0
NWE_NWR0
NWE
NWE
NWR0
NWE
NWR0
NWE
NBS1_NWR1
NBS1
NBS1
NWR1
NBS1
NWR1
NBS2_NWR2_A1
NBS2
NBS2
NWR2
A1
A1
A1
NBS3_NWR3
NBS3
NBS3
NWR3
–
–
–
Byte Access Type (BAT)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
163
19.8
Standard Read and Write Protocols
In the following sections, the byte access type is not considered. Byte select lines (NBS0 to NBS3) always have
the same timing as the A address bus. NWE represents either the NWE signal in byte select access type or one of
the byte write lines (NWR0 to NWR3) in byte write access type. NWR0 to NWR3 have the same timings and
protocol as NWE. In the same way, NCS represents one of the NCS[0..7] chip select lines.
19.8.1 Read Waveforms
The read cycle is shown on Figure 19-8.
The read cycle starts with the address setting on the memory address bus, i.e.:
{A[25:2], A1, A0} for 8-bit devices
{A[25:2], A1} for 16-bit devices
A[25:2] for 32-bit devices.
Figure 19-8.
Standard Read Cycle
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0,NBS1,
NBS2,NBS3,
A0, A1
NRD
NCS
D[31:0]
NRD_SETUP
NCS_RD_SETUP
NRD_PULSE
NCS_RD_PULSE
NRD_HOLD
NCS_RD_HOLD
NRD_CYCLE
19.8.1.1 NRD Waveform
The NRD signal is characterized by a setup timing, a pulse width and a hold timing:
1.
NRD_SETUP: the NRD setup time is defined as the setup of address before the NRD falling edge.
2.
NRD_PULSE: the NRD pulse length is the time between NRD falling edge and NRD rising edge.
3.
NRD_HOLD: the NRD hold time is defined as the hold time of address after the NRD rising edge.
19.8.1.2 NCS Waveform
Similarly, the NCS signal can be divided into a setup time, pulse length and hold time:
164
1.
NCS_RD_SETUP: the NCS setup time is defined as the setup time of address before the NCS falling edge.
2.
NCS_RD_PULSE: the NCS pulse length is the time between NCS falling edge and NCS rising edge.
3.
NCS_RD_HOLD: the NCS hold time is defined as the hold time of address after the NCS rising edge.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.8.1.3 Read Cycle
The NRD_CYCLE time is defined as the total duration of the read cycle, i.e., from the time where address is set on
the address bus to the point where address may change. The total read cycle time is equal to:
NRD_CYCLE = NRD_SETUP + NRD_PULSE + NRD_HOLD,
as well as
NRD_CYCLE = NCS_RD_SETUP + NCS_RD_PULSE + NCS_RD_HOLD
All NRD and NCS timings are defined separately for each chip select as an integer number of Master Clock cycles.
The NRD_CYCLE field is common to both the NRD and NCS signals, thus the timing period is of the same
duration.
NRD_CYCLE, NRD_SETUP, and NRD_PULSE implicitly define the NRD_HOLD value as:
NRD_HOLD = NRD_CYCLE - NRD SETUP - NRD PULSE
NRD_CYCLE, NCS_RD_SETUP, and NCS_RD_PULSE implicitly define the NCS_RD_HOLD value as:
NCS_RD_HOLD = NRD_CYCLE - NCS_RD_SETUP - NCS_RD_PULSE
19.8.1.4 Null Delay Setup and Hold
If null setup and hold parameters are programmed for NRD and/or NCS, NRD and NCS remain active continuously
in case of consecutive read cycles in the same memory (see Figure 19-9).
Figure 19-9.
No Setup, No Hold On NRD and NCS Read Signals
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0,NBS1,
NBS2,NBS3,
A0, A1
NRD
NCS
D[31:0]
NRD_PULSE
NCS_RD_PULSE
NRD_CYCLE
NRD_PULSE
NCS_RD_PULSE
NRD_CYCLE
NRD_PULSE
NCS_RD_PULSE
NRD_CYCLE
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
165
19.8.1.5 Null Pulse
Programming null pulse is not permitted. Pulse must be at least set to 1. A null value leads to unpredictable
behavior.
19.8.2 Read Mode
As NCS and NRD waveforms are defined independently of one other, the SMC needs to know when the read data
is available on the data bus. The SMC does not compare NCS and NRD timings to know which signal rises first.
The READ_MODE parameter in the SMC_MODE register of the corresponding chip select indicates which signal
of NRD and NCS controls the read operation.
19.8.2.1 Read is Controlled by NRD (READ_MODE = 1):
Figure 19-10 shows the waveforms of a read operation of a typical asynchronous RAM. The read data is available
tPACC after the falling edge of NRD, and turns to ‘Z’ after the rising edge of NRD. In this case, the READ_MODE
must be set to 1 (read is controlled by NRD), to indicate that data is available with the rising edge of NRD. The
SMC samples the read data internally on the rising edge of Master Clock that generates the rising edge of NRD,
whatever the programmed waveform of NCS may be.
Figure 19-10. READ_MODE = 1: Data is sampled by SMC before the rising edge of NRD
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0,NBS1,
NBS2,NBS3,
A0, A1
NRD
NCS
tPACC
D[31:0]
Data Sampling
166
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.8.2.2 Read is Controlled by NCS (READ_MODE = 0)
Figure 19-11 shows the typical read cycle of an LCD module. The read data is valid tPACC after the falling edge of
the NCS signal and remains valid until the rising edge of NCS. Data must be sampled when NCS is raised. In that
case, the READ_MODE must be set to 0 (read is controlled by NCS): the SMC internally samples the data on the
rising edge of Master Clock that generates the rising edge of NCS, whatever the programmed waveform of NRD
may be.
Figure 19-11. READ_MODE = 0: Data is sampled by SMC before the rising edge of NCS
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0,NBS1,
NBS2,NBS3,
A0, A1
NRD
NCS
tPACC
D[31:0]
Data Sampling
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
167
19.8.3 Write Waveforms
The write protocol is similar to the read protocol. It is depicted in Figure 19-12. The write cycle starts with the
address setting on the memory address bus.
19.8.3.1 NWE Waveforms
The NWE signal is characterized by a setup timing, a pulse width and a hold timing.
NWE_SETUP: The NWE setup time is defined as the setup of address and data before the NWE falling
edge;
NWE_PULSE: The NWE pulse length is the time between NWE falling edge and NWE rising edge;
NWE_HOLD: The NWE hold time is defined as the hold time of address and data after the NWE rising edge.
The NWE waveforms apply to all byte-write lines in Byte Write access mode: NWR0 to NWR3.
19.8.3.2 NCS Waveforms
The NCS signal waveforms in write operation are not the same that those applied in read operations, but are
separately defined:
NCS_WR_SETUP: The NCS setup time is defined as the setup time of address before the NCS falling edge.
NCS_WR_PULSE: The NCS pulse length is the time between NCS falling edge and NCS rising edge;
NCS_WR_HOLD: The NCS hold time is defined as the hold time of address after the NCS rising edge.
Figure 19-12. Write Cycle
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NWE
NCS
NWE_SETUP
NCS_WR_SETUP
NWE_PULSE
NCS_WR_PULSE
NWE_HOLD
NCS_WR_HOLD
NWE_CYCLE
19.8.3.3 Write Cycle
The write cycle time is defined as the total duration of the write cycle, that is, from the time where address is set on
the address bus to the point where address may change. The total write cycle time is equal to:
NWE_CYCLE = NWE_SETUP + NWE_PULSE + NWE_HOLD,
as well as
NWE_CYCLE = NCS_WR_SETUP + NCS_WR_PULSE + NCS_WR_HOLD
168
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
All NWE and NCS (write) timings are defined separately for each chip select as an integer number of Master Clock
cycles. The NWE_CYCLE field is common to both the NWE and NCS signals, thus the timing period is of the same
duration.
NWE_CYCLE, NWE_SETUP, and NWE_PULSE implicitly define the NWE_HOLD value as:
NWE_HOLD = NWE_CYCLE - NWE_SETUP - NWE_PULSE
NWE_CYCLE, NCS_WR_SETUP, and NCS_WR_PULSE implicitly define the NCS_WR_HOLD value as:
NCS_WR_HOLD = NWE_CYCLE - NCS_WR_SETUP - NCS_WR_PULSE
19.8.3.4 Null Delay Setup and Hold
If null setup parameters are programmed for NWE and/or NCS, NWE and/or NCS remain active continuously in
case of consecutive write cycles in the same memory (see Figure 19-13). However, for devices that perform write
operations on the rising edge of NWE or NCS, such as SRAM, either a setup or a hold must be programmed.
Figure 19-13. Null Setup and Hold Values of NCS and NWE in Write Cycle
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NWE,
NWR0, NWR1,
NWR2, NWR3
NCS
D[31:0]
NWE_PULSE
NWE_PULSE
NWE_PULSE
NCS_WR_PULSE
NCS_WR_PULSE
NCS_WR_PULSE
NWE_CYCLE
NWE_CYCLE
NWE_CYCLE
19.8.3.5 Null Pulse
Programming null pulse is not permitted. Pulse must be at least set to 1. A null value leads to unpredictable
behavior.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
169
19.8.4 Write Mode
The WRITE_MODE parameter in the SMC_MODE register of the corresponding chip select indicates which signal
controls the write operation.
19.8.4.1 Write is Controlled by NWE (WRITE_MODE = 1):
Figure 19-14 shows the waveforms of a write operation with WRITE_MODE set to 1. The data is put on the bus
during the pulse and hold steps of the NWE signal. The internal data buffers are turned out after the NWE_SETUP
time, and until the end of the write cycle, regardless of the programmed waveform on NCS.
Figure 19-14. WRITE_MODE = 1. The write operation is controlled by NWE
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NWE,
NWR0, NWR1,
NWR2, NWR3
NCS
D[31:0]
19.8.4.2 Write is Controlled by NCS (WRITE_MODE = 0)
Figure 19-15 shows the waveforms of a write operation with WRITE_MODE set to 0. The data is put on the bus
during the pulse and hold steps of the NCS signal. The internal data buffers are turned out after the
NCS_WR_SETUP time, and until the end of the write cycle, regardless of the programmed waveform on NWE.
Figure 19-15. WRITE_MODE = 0. The write operation is controlled by NCS
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NWE,
NWR0, NWR1,
NWR2, NWR3
NCS
D[31:0]
170
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.8.5 Coding Timing Parameters
All timing parameters are defined for one chip select and are grouped together in one register according to their
type.
The SMC_SETUP register groups the definition of all setup parameters: NRD_SETUP, NCS_RD_SETUP,
NWE_SETUP, NCS_WR_SETUP
The SMC_PULSE register groups the definition of all pulse parameters: NRD_PULSE, NCS_RD_PULSE,
NWE_PULSE, NCS_WR_PULSE
The SMC_CYCLE register groups the definition of all cycle parameters: NRD_CYCLE, NWE_CYCLE
Table 19-4 shows how the timing parameters are coded and their permitted range.
Table 19-4.
Coding and Range of Timing Parameters
Permitted Range
Coded Value
Number of Bits
Effective Value
Coded Value
Effective Value
setup [5:0]
6
128 × setup[5] + setup[4:0]
0 ≤ 31
128 ≤ 128 + 31
pulse [6:0]
7
256 × pulse[6] + pulse[5:0]
0 ≤ 63
256 ≤ 256 + 63
cycle [8:0]
9
256 × cycle[8:7] + cycle[6:0]
0 ≤ 127
512 ≤ 512 + 127
256 ≤ 256 + 127
768 ≤ 768 + 127
19.8.6 Reset Values of Timing Parameters
Table 19-8 "Register Mapping" gives the default value of timing parameters at reset.
19.8.7 Usage Restriction
The SMC does not check the validity of the user-programmed parameters. If the sum of SETUP and PULSE
parameters is larger than the corresponding CYCLE parameter, this leads to unpredictable behavior of the SMC.
For read operations:
Null but positive setup and hold of address and NRD and/or NCS can not be guaranteed at the memory
interface because of the propagation delay of theses signals through external logic and pads. If positive
setup and hold values must be verified, then it is strictly recommended to program non-null values so as to
cover possible skews between address, NCS and NRD signals.
For write operations:
If a null hold value is programmed on NWE, the SMC can guarantee a positive hold of address, byte select
lines, and NCS signal after the rising edge of NWE. This is true for WRITE_MODE = 1 only. See “Early Read
Wait State” on page 172.
For read and write operations: a null value for pulse parameters is forbidden and may lead to unpredictable
behavior.
In read and write cycles, the setup and hold time parameters are defined in reference to the address bus. For
external devices that require setup and hold time between NCS and NRD signals (read), or between NCS and
NWE signals (write), these setup and hold times must be converted into setup and hold times in reference to the
address bus.
19.9
Automatic Wait States
Under certain circumstances, the SMC automatically inserts idle cycles between accesses to avoid bus contention
or operation conflict.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
171
19.9.1 Chip Select Wait States
The SMC always inserts an idle cycle between two transfers on separate chip selects. This idle cycle ensures that
there is no bus contention between the de-activation of one device and the activation of the next one.
During chip select wait state, all control lines are turned inactive: NBS0 to NBS3, NWR0 to NWR3, NCS[0..7], NRD
lines are all set to 1.
Figure 19-16 illustrates a chip select wait state between access on Chip Select 0 and Chip Select 2.
Figure 19-16. Chip Select Wait State between a Read Access on NCS0 and a Write Access on NCS2
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NRD
NWE
NCS0
NCS2
NRD_CYCLE
NWE_CYCLE
D[31:0]
Read to Write Chip Select
Wait State
Wait State
19.9.2 Early Read Wait State
In some cases, the SMC inserts a wait state cycle between a write access and a read access to allow time for the
write cycle to end before the subsequent read cycle begins. This wait state is not generated in addition to a chip
select wait state. The early read cycle thus only occurs between a write and read access to the same memory
device (same chip select).
An early read wait state is automatically inserted if at least one of the following conditions is valid:
172
if the write controlling signal has no hold time and the read controlling signal has no setup time (Figure 1917).
in NCS write controlled mode (WRITE_MODE = 0), if there is no hold timing on the NCS signal and the
NCS_RD_SETUP parameter is set to 0, regardless of the read mode (Figure 19-18). The write operation
must end with a NCS rising edge. Without an Early Read Wait State, the write operation could not complete
properly.
in NWE controlled mode (WRITE_MODE = 1) and if there is no hold timing (NWE_HOLD = 0), the feedback
of the write control signal is used to control address, data, chip select and byte select lines. If the external
write control signal is not inactivated as expected due to load capacitances, an Early Read Wait State is
inserted and address, data and control signals are maintained one more cycle. See Figure 19-19.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 19-17. Early Read Wait State: Write with No Hold Followed by Read with No Setup
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NWE
NRD
no hold
no setup
D[31:0]
write cycle
Early Read
wait state
read cycle
Figure 19-18. Early Read Wait State: NCS Controlled Write with No Hold Followed by a Read with No NCS Setup
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NCS
NRD
no hold
no setup
D[31:0]
write cycle
(WRITE_MODE = 0)
Early Read
wait state
read cycle
(READ_MODE = 0 or READ_MODE = 1)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
173
Figure 19-19. Early Read Wait State: NWE-controlled Write with No Hold Followed by a Read with one Set-up Cycle
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
internal write controlling signal
external write controlling signal
(NWE)
no hold
read setup = 1
NRD
D[31:0]
write cycle
(WRITE_MODE = 1)
Early Read
wait state
read cycle
(READ_MODE = 0 or READ_MODE = 1)
19.9.3 Reload User Configuration Wait State
The user may change any of the configuration parameters by writing the SMC user interface.
When detecting that a new user configuration has been written in the user interface, the SMC inserts a wait state
before starting the next access. The so called “Reload User Configuration Wait State” is used by the SMC to load
the new set of parameters to apply to next accesses.
The Reload Configuration Wait State is not applied in addition to the Chip Select Wait State. If accesses before
and after re-programming the user interface are made to different devices (Chip Selects), then one single Chip
Select Wait State is applied.
On the other hand, if accesses before and after writing the user interface are made to the same device, a Reload
Configuration Wait State is inserted, even if the change does not concern the current Chip Select.
19.9.3.1 User Procedure
To insert a Reload Configuration Wait State, the SMC detects a write access to any SMC_MODE register of the
user interface. If the user only modifies timing registers (SMC_SETUP, SMC_PULSE, SMC_CYCLE registers) in
the user interface, he must validate the modification by writing the SMC_MODE, even if no change was made on
the mode parameters.
19.9.3.2 Slow Clock Mode Transition
A Reload Configuration Wait State is also inserted when the Slow Clock Mode is entered or exited, after the end of
the current transfer (see “Slow Clock Mode” on page 185).
174
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.9.4 Read to Write Wait State
Due to an internal mechanism, a wait cycle is always inserted between consecutive read and write SMC accesses.
This wait cycle is referred to as a read to write wait state in this document.
This wait cycle is applied in addition to chip select and reload user configuration wait states when they are to be
inserted. See Figure 19-16 on page 172.
19.10 Data Float Wait States
Some memory devices are slow to release the external bus. For such devices, it is necessary to add wait states
(data float wait states) after a read access:
before starting a read access to a different external memory
before starting a write access to the same device or to a different external one.
The Data Float Output Time (tDF) for each external memory device is programmed in the TDF_CYCLES field of the
SMC_MODE register for the corresponding chip select. The value of TDF_CYCLES indicates the number of data
float wait cycles (between 0 and 15) before the external device releases the bus, and represents the time allowed
for the data output to go to high impedance after the memory is disabled.
Data float wait states do not delay internal memory accesses. Hence, a single access to an external memory with
long tDF will not slow down the execution of a program from internal memory.
The data float wait states management depends on the READ_MODE and the TDF_MODE fields of the
SMC_MODE register for the corresponding chip select.
19.10.1 READ_MODE
Setting the READ_MODE to 1 indicates to the SMC that the NRD signal is responsible for turning off the tri-state
buffers of the external memory device. The Data Float Period then begins after the rising edge of the NRD signal
and lasts TDF_CYCLES MCK cycles.
When the read operation is controlled by the NCS signal (READ_MODE = 0), the TDF field gives the number of
MCK cycles during which the data bus remains busy after the rising edge of NCS.
Figure 19-20 illustrates the Data Float Period in NRD-controlled mode (READ_MODE = 1), assuming a data float
period of 2 cycles (TDF_CYCLES = 2). Figure 19-21 shows the read operation when controlled by NCS
(READ_MODE = 0) and the TDF_CYCLES parameter equals 3.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
175
Figure 19-20. TDF Period in NRD Controlled Read Access (TDF = 2)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
NRD
NCS
tpacc
D[31:0]
TDF = 2 clock cycles
NRD controlled read operation
Figure 19-21. TDF Period in NCS Controlled Read Operation (TDF = 3)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NRD
NCS
tpacc
D[31:0]
TDF = 3 clock cycles
NCS controlled read operation
176
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.10.2 TDF Optimization Enabled (TDF_MODE = 1)
When the TDF_MODE of the SMC_MODE register is set to 1 (TDF optimization is enabled), the SMC takes
advantage of the setup period of the next access to optimize the number of wait states cycle to insert.
Figure 19-22 shows a read access controlled by NRD, followed by a write access controlled by NWE, on Chip
Select 0. Chip Select 0 has been programmed with:
NRD_HOLD = 4; READ_MODE = 1 (NRD controlled)
NWE_SETUP = 3; WRITE_MODE = 1 (NWE controlled)
TDF_CYCLES = 6; TDF_MODE = 1 (optimization enabled).
Figure 19-22. TDF Optimization: No TDF wait states are inserted if the TDF period is over when the next access begins
MCK
A[25:2]
NRD
NRD_HOLD= 4
NWE
NWE_SETUP= 3
NCS0
TDF_CYCLES = 6
D[31:0]
read access on NCS0 (NRD controlled)
Read to Write
Wait State
write access on NCS0 (NWE controlled)
19.10.3 TDF Optimization Disabled (TDF_MODE = 0)
When optimization is disabled, tdf wait states are inserted at the end of the read transfer, so that the data float
period is ended when the second access begins. If the hold period of the read1 controlling signal overlaps the data
float period, no additional tdf wait states will be inserted.
Figure 19-23, Figure 19-24 and Figure 19-25 illustrate the cases:
read access followed by a read access on another chip select,
read access followed by a write access on another chip select,
read access followed by a write access on the same chip select,
with no TDF optimization.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
177
Figure 19-23. TDF Optimization Disabled (TDF Mode = 0). TDF wait states between 2 read accesses on different chip selects
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
read1 controlling signal
(NRD)
read1 hold = 1
read2 controlling signal
(NRD)
read2 setup = 1
TDF_CYCLES = 6
D[31:0]
5 TDF WAIT STATES
read 2 cycle
TDF_MODE = 0
(optimization disabled)
read1 cycle
TDF_CYCLES = 6
Chip Select Wait State
Figure 19-24.
TDF Mode = 0: TDF wait states between a read and a write access on different chip selects
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
read1 controlling signal
(NRD)
read1 hold = 1
write2 controlling signal
(NWE)
write2 setup = 1
TDF_CYCLES = 4
D[31:0]
2 TDF WAIT STATES
read1 cycle
TDF_CYCLES = 4
Read to Write Chip Select
Wait State Wait State
178
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
write2 cycle
TDF_MODE = 0
(optimization disabled)
Figure 19-25. TDF Mode = 0: TDF wait states between read and write accesses on the same chip select
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0, A1
read1 controlling signal
(NRD)
write2 setup = 1
read1 hold = 1
write2 controlling signal
(NWE)
TDF_CYCLES = 5
D[31:0]
4 TDF WAIT STATES
read1 cycle
TDF_CYCLES = 5
Read to Write
Wait State
write2 cycle
TDF_MODE = 0
(optimization disabled)
19.11 External Wait
Any access can be extended by an external device using the NWAIT input signal of the SMC. The EXNW_MODE
field of the SMC_MODE register on the corresponding chip select must be set to either to “10” (frozen mode) or
“11” (ready mode). When the EXNW_MODE is set to “00” (disabled), the NWAIT signal is simply ignored on the
corresponding chip select. The NWAIT signal delays the read or write operation in regards to the read or write
controlling signal, depending on the read and write modes of the corresponding chip select.
19.11.1 Restriction
When one of the EXNW_MODE is enabled, it is mandatory to program at least one hold cycle for the read/write
controlling signal. For that reason, the NWAIT signal cannot be used in Page Mode (“Asynchronous Page Mode”
on page 187), or in Slow Clock Mode (“Slow Clock Mode” on page 185).
The NWAIT signal is assumed to be a response of the external device to the read/write request of the SMC. Then
NWAIT is examined by the SMC only in the pulse state of the read or write controlling signal. The assertion of the
NWAIT signal outside the expected period has no impact on SMC behavior.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
179
19.11.2 Frozen Mode
When the external device asserts the NWAIT signal (active low), and after internal synchronization of this signal,
the SMC state is frozen, i.e., SMC internal counters are frozen, and all control signals remain unchanged. When
the resynchronized NWAIT signal is deasserted, the SMC completes the access, resuming the access from the
point where it was stopped. See Figure 19-26. This mode must be selected when the external device uses the
NWAIT signal to delay the access and to freeze the SMC.
The assertion of the NWAIT signal outside the expected period is ignored as illustrated in Figure 19-27.
Figure 19-26. Write Access with NWAIT Assertion in Frozen Mode (EXNW_MODE = 10)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
FROZEN STATE
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
0
3
2
2
2
2
1
NWE
6
5
4
NCS
D[31:0]
NWAIT
internally synchronized
NWAIT signal
Write cycle
EXNW_MODE = 10 (Frozen)
WRITE_MODE = 1 (NWE_controlled)
NWE_PULSE = 5
NCS_WR_PULSE = 7
180
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
0
Figure 19-27. Read Access with NWAIT Assertion in Frozen Mode (EXNW_MODE = 10)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NCS
FROZEN STATE
4
1
NRD
3
2
2
2
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
0
5
5
5
4
3
NWAIT
internally synchronized
NWAIT signal
Read cycle
EXNW_MODE = 10 (Frozen)
READ_MODE = 0 (NCS_controlled)
NRD_PULSE = 2, NRD_HOLD = 6
NCS_RD_PULSE =5, NCS_RD_HOLD =3
Assertion is ignored
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
181
19.11.3 Ready Mode
In Ready mode (EXNW_MODE = 11), the SMC behaves differently. Normally, the SMC begins the access by
down counting the setup and pulse counters of the read/write controlling signal. In the last cycle of the pulse
phase, the resynchronized NWAIT signal is examined.
If asserted, the SMC suspends the access as shown in Figure 19-28 and Figure 19-29. After deassertion, the
access is completed: the hold step of the access is performed.
This mode must be selected when the external device uses deassertion of the NWAIT signal to indicate its ability
to complete the read or write operation.
If the NWAIT signal is deasserted before the end of the pulse, or asserted after the end of the pulse of the
controlling read/write signal, it has no impact on the access length as shown in Figure 19-29.
Figure 19-28. NWAIT Assertion in Write Access: Ready Mode (EXNW_MODE = 11)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
Wait STATE
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
3
2
1
1
1
NWE
6
5
4
NCS
D[31:0]
NWAIT
internally synchronized
NWAIT signal
Write cycle
EXNW_MODE = 11 (Ready mode)
WRITE_MODE = 1 (NWE_controlled)
NWE_PULSE = 5
NCS_WR_PULSE = 7
182
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
0
Figure 19-29. NWAIT Assertion in Read Access: Ready Mode (EXNW_MODE = 11)
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
Wait STATE
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
NCS
NRD
0
NWAIT
internally synchronized
NWAIT signal
Read cycle
EXNW_MODE = 11(Ready mode)
READ_MODE = 0 (NCS_controlled)
Assertion is ignored
Assertion is ignored
NRD_PULSE = 7
NCS_RD_PULSE =7
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
183
19.11.4 NWAIT Latency and Read/Write Timings
There may be a latency between the assertion of the read/write controlling signal and the assertion of the NWAIT
signal by the device. The programmed pulse length of the read/write controlling signal must be at least equal to
this latency plus the 2 cycles of resynchronization + 1 cycle. Otherwise, the SMC may enter the hold state of the
access without detecting the NWAIT signal assertion. This is true in frozen mode as well as in ready mode. This is
illustrated on Figure 19-30.
When EXNW_MODE is enabled (ready or frozen), the user must program a pulse length of the read and write
controlling signal of at least:
minimal pulse length = NWAIT latency + 2 resynchronization cycles + 1 cycle
Figure 19-30. NWAIT Latency
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
WAIT STATE
4
3
2
1
0
0
NRD
minimal pulse length
NWAIT
intenally synchronized
NWAIT signal
NWAIT latency 2 cycle resynchronization
Read cycle
EXNW_MODE = 10 or 11
READ_MODE = 1 (NRD_controlled)
NRD_PULSE = 5
184
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
0
19.12 Slow Clock Mode
The SMC is able to automatically apply a set of “slow clock mode” read/write waveforms when an internal signal
driven by the Power Management Controller is asserted because MCK has been turned to a very slow clock rate
(typically 32kHz clock rate). In this mode, the user-programmed waveforms are ignored and the slow clock mode
waveforms are applied. This mode is provided so as to avoid reprogramming the User Interface with appropriate
waveforms at very slow clock rate. When activated, the slow mode is active on all chip selects.
19.12.1 Slow Clock Mode Waveforms
Figure 19-31 illustrates the read and write operations in slow clock mode. They are valid on all chip selects. Table
19-5 indicates the value of read and write parameters in slow clock mode.
Figure 19-31.
Read/Write Cycles in Slow Clock Mode
MCK
MCK
A[25:2]
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
1
NWE
NRD
1
1
1
1
NCS
NCS
NRD_CYCLE = 2
NWE_CYCLE = 3
SLOW CLOCK MODE WRITE
Table 19-5.
SLOW CLOCK MODE READ
Read and Write Timing Parameters in Slow Clock Mode
Read Parameters
Duration (cycles)
Write Parameters
Duration (cycles)
NRD_SETUP
1
NWE_SETUP
1
NRD_PULSE
1
NWE_PULSE
1
NCS_RD_SETUP
0
NCS_WR_SETUP
0
NCS_RD_PULSE
2
NCS_WR_PULSE
3
NRD_CYCLE
2
NWE_CYCLE
3
19.12.2 Switching from (to) Slow Clock Mode to (from) Normal Mode
When switching from slow clock mode to the normal mode, the current slow clock mode transfer is completed at
high clock rate, with the set of slow clock mode parameters.See Figure 19-32 on page 186. The external device
may not be fast enough to support such timings.
Figure 19-33 on page 186 illustrates the recommended procedure to properly switch from one mode to the other.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
185
Figure 19-32. Clock Rate Transition Occurs While the SMC is Performing a Write Operation
Slow Clock Mode
internal signal from PMC
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NWE
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
NCS
NWE_CYCLE = 3
NWE_CYCLE = 7
SLOW CLOCK MODE WRITE SLOW CLOCK MODE WRITE
This write cycle finishes with the slow clock mode set
of parameters after the clock rate transition
NORMAL MODE WRITE
Slow clock mode transition is detected:
Reload Configuration Wait State
Figure 19-33. Recommended Procedure to Switch from Slow Clock Mode to Normal Mode or from Normal Mode to Slow Clock
Mode
Slow Clock Mode
internal signal from PMC
MCK
A[25:2]
NBS0, NBS1,
NBS2, NBS3,
A0,A1
NWE
1
1
1
2
3
2
NCS
SLOW CLOCK MODE WRITE
IDLE STATE
NORMAL MODE WRITE
Reload Configuration
Wait State
186
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.13 Asynchronous Page Mode
The SMC supports asynchronous burst reads in page mode, providing that the page mode is enabled in the
SMC_MODE register (PMEN field). The page size must be configured in the SMC_MODE register (PS field) to 4,
8, 16 or 32 bytes.
The page defines a set of consecutive bytes into memory. A 4-byte page (resp. 8-, 16-, 32-byte page) is always
aligned to 4-byte boundaries (resp. 8-, 16-, 32-byte boundaries) of memory. The MSB of data address defines the
address of the page in memory, the LSB of address define the address of the data in the page as detailed in Table
19-6.
With page mode memory devices, the first access to one page (tpa) takes longer than the subsequent accesses to
the page (tsa) as shown in Figure 19-34. When in page mode, the SMC enables the user to define different read
timings for the first access within one page, and next accesses within the page.
Table 19-6.
Page Address and Data Address within a Page
Page Size
Page Address(1)
Data Address in the Page(2)
4 bytes
A[25:2]
A[1:0]
8 bytes
A[25:3]
A[2:0]
16 bytes
A[25:4]
A[3:0]
32 bytes
A[25:5]
A[4:0]
Notes:
1.
2.
A denotes the address bus of the memory device
For 16-bit devices, the bit 0 of address is ignored. For 32-bit devices, bits [1:0] are ignored.
19.13.1 Protocol and Timings in Page Mode
Figure 19-34 shows the NRD and NCS timings in page mode access.
Figure 19-34. Page Mode Read Protocol (Address MSB and LSB are defined in Table 19-6)
MCK
A[MSB]
A[LSB]
NRD
NCS
tpa
tsa
tsa
D[31:0]
NCS_RD_PULSE
NRD_PULSE
NRD_PULSE
The NRD and NCS signals are held low during all read transfers, whatever the programmed values of the setup
and hold timings in the User Interface may be. Moreover, the NRD and NCS timings are identical. The pulse length
of the first access to the page is defined with the NCS_RD_PULSE field of the SMC_PULSE register. The pulse
length of subsequent accesses within the page are defined using the NRD_PULSE parameter.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
187
The programming of the read timings in page mode is described in Table 19-7.
Table 19-7.
Programming of Read Timings in Page Mode
Parameter
Value
Definition
READ_MODE
‘x’
No impact
NCS_RD_SETUP
‘x’
No impact
NCS_RD_PULSE
tpa
Access time of first access to the page
NRD_SETUP
‘x’
No impact
NRD_PULSE
tsa
Access time of subsequent accesses in the page
NRD_CYCLE
‘x’
No impact
The SMC does not check the coherency of timings. It will always apply the NCS_RD_PULSE timings as page
access timing (tpa) and the NRD_PULSE for accesses to the page (tsa), even if the programmed value for tpa is
shorter than the programmed value for tsa.
19.13.2 Byte Access Type in Page Mode
The Byte Access Type configuration remains active in page mode. For 16-bit or 32-bit page mode devices that
require byte selection signals, configure the BAT field of the SMC Mode Register to 0 (byte select access type).
19.13.3 Page Mode Restriction
The page mode is not compatible with the use of the NWAIT signal. Using the page mode and the NWAIT signal
may lead to unpredictable behavior.
19.13.4 Sequential and Non-sequential Accesses
If the chip select and the MSB of addresses as defined in Table 19-6 are identical, then the current access lies in
the same page as the previous one, and no page break occurs.
Using this information, all data within the same page, sequential or not sequential, are accessed with a minimum
access time (tsa). Figure 19-35 illustrates access to an 8-bit memory device in page mode, with 8-byte pages.
Access to D1 causes a page access with a long access time (tpa). Accesses to D3 and D7, though they are not
sequential accesses, only require a short access time (tsa).
If the MSB of addresses are different, the SMC performs the access of a new page. In the same way, if the chip
select is different from the previous access, a page break occurs. If two sequential accesses are made to the page
mode memory, but separated by an other internal or external peripheral access, a page break occurs on the
second access because the chip select of the device was deasserted between both accesses.
188
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 19-35.
Access to Non-sequential Data within the Same Page
MCK
Page address
A[25:3]
A[2], A1, A0
A1
A3
A7
NRD
NCS
D[7:0]
D1
NCS_RD_PULSE
D3
NRD_PULSE
D7
NRD_PULSE
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
189
19.14 Static Memory Controller (SMC) User Interface
The SMC is programmed using the registers listed in Table 19-8. For each chip select, a set of four registers is used to program the parameters of the external device connected on it. In Table 19-8, “CS_number” denotes the chip select number.
16 bytes (0x10) are required per chip select.
The user must complete writing the configuration by writing any one of the SMC_MODE registers.
Table 19-8.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x10 × CS_number + 0x00
SMC Setup Register
SMC_SETUP
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x10 × CS_number + 0x04
SMC Pulse Register
SMC_PULSE
Read/Write
0x01010101
0x10 × CS_number + 0x08
SMC Cycle Register
SMC_CYCLE
Read/Write
0x00030003
0x10 × CS_number + 0x0C
SMC Mode Register
SMC_MODE
Read/Write
0x10001000
190
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.14.1 SMC Setup Register
Name:
SMC_SETUP[0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
–
–
23
22
–
–
15
14
–
–
7
6
–
–
29
28
27
26
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
1
0
NCS_RD_SETUP
21
20
19
NRD_SETUP
13
12
11
NCS_WR_SETUP
5
4
3
2
NWE_SETUP
• NWE_SETUP: NWE Setup Length
The NWE signal setup length is defined as:
NWE setup length = (128* NWE_SETUP[5] + NWE_SETUP[4:0]) clock cycles
• NCS_WR_SETUP: NCS Setup Length in WRITE Access
In write access, the NCS signal setup length is defined as:
NCS setup length = (128* NCS_WR_SETUP[5] + NCS_WR_SETUP[4:0]) clock cycles
• NRD_SETUP: NRD Setup Length
The NRD signal setup length is defined in clock cycles as:
NRD setup length = (128* NRD_SETUP[5] + NRD_SETUP[4:0]) clock cycles
• NCS_RD_SETUP: NCS Setup Length in READ Access
In read access, the NCS signal setup length is defined as:
NCS setup length = (128* NCS_RD_SETUP[5] + NCS_RD_SETUP[4:0]) clock cycles
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
191
19.14.2 SMC Pulse Register
Name:
SMC_PULSE[0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
–
23
27
22
21
20
19
–
15
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
NRD_PULSE
14
13
12
–
7
26
NCS_RD_PULSE
11
NCS_WR_PULSE
6
5
4
–
3
NWE_PULSE
• NWE_PULSE: NWE Pulse Length
The NWE signal pulse length is defined as:
NWE pulse length = (256* NWE_PULSE[6] + NWE_PULSE[5:0]) clock cycles
The NWE pulse length must be at least 1 clock cycle.
• NCS_WR_PULSE: NCS Pulse Length in WRITE Access
In write access, the NCS signal pulse length is defined as:
NCS pulse length = (256* NCS_WR_PULSE[6] + NCS_WR_PULSE[5:0]) clock cycles
The NCS pulse length must be at least 1 clock cycle.
• NRD_PULSE: NRD Pulse Length
In standard read access, the NRD signal pulse length is defined in clock cycles as:
NRD pulse length = (256* NRD_PULSE[6] + NRD_PULSE[5:0]) clock cycles
The NRD pulse length must be at least 1 clock cycle.
In page mode read access, the NRD_PULSE parameter defines the duration of the subsequent accesses in the page.
• NCS_RD_PULSE: NCS Pulse Length in READ Access
In standard read access, the NCS signal pulse length is defined as:
NCS pulse length = (256* NCS_RD_PULSE[6] + NCS_RD_PULSE[5:0]) clock cycles
The NCS pulse length must be at least 1 clock cycle.
In page mode read access, the NCS_RD_PULSE parameter defines the duration of the first access to one page.
192
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
19.14.3 SMC Cycle Register
Name:
SMC_CYCLE[0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
NRD_CYCLE
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
NRD_CYCLE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
NWE_CYCLE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NWE_CYCLE
• NWE_CYCLE: Total Write Cycle Length
The total write cycle length is the total duration in clock cycles of the write cycle. It is equal to the sum of the setup, pulse
and hold steps of the NWE and NCS signals. It is defined as:
Write cycle length = (NWE_CYCLE[8:7]*256 + NWE_CYCLE[6:0]) clock cycles
• NRD_CYCLE: Total Read Cycle Length
The total read cycle length is the total duration in clock cycles of the read cycle. It is equal to the sum of the setup, pulse
and hold steps of the NRD and NCS signals. It is defined as:
Read cycle length = (NRD_CYCLE[8:7]*256 + NRD_CYCLE[6:0]) clock cycles
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
193
19.14.4 SMC Mode Register
Name:
SMC_MODE[0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
–
–
23
22
21
20
–
–
–
TDF_MODE
15
14
13
–
–
7
6
–
–
29
28
PS
12
DBW
5
4
EXNW_MODE
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
PMEN
19
18
17
16
TDF_CYCLES
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
BAT
1
0
3
2
–
–
WRITE_MODE READ_MODE
• READ_MODE:
1: The read operation is controlled by the NRD signal.
– If TDF cycles are programmed, the external bus is marked busy after the rising edge of NRD.
– If TDF optimization is enabled (TDF_MODE = 1), TDF wait states are inserted after the setup of NRD.
0: The read operation is controlled by the NCS signal.
– If TDF cycles are programmed, the external bus is marked busy after the rising edge of NCS.
– If TDF optimization is enabled (TDF_MODE = 1), TDF wait states are inserted after the setup of NCS.
• WRITE_MODE
1: The write operation is controlled by the NWE signal.
– If TDF optimization is enabled (TDF_MODE = 1), TDF wait states will be inserted after the setup of NWE.
0: The write operation is controlled by the NCS signal.
– If TDF optimization is enabled (TDF_MODE = 1), TDF wait states will be inserted after the setup of NCS.
• EXNW_MODE: NWAIT Mode
The NWAIT signal is used to extend the current read or write signal. It is only taken into account during the pulse phase of
the read and write controlling signal. When the use of NWAIT is enabled, at least one cycle hold duration must be programmed for the read and write controlling signal.
Value
NWAIT Mode
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Reserved
1
0
Frozen Mode
1
1
Ready Mode
• Disabled Mode: The NWAIT input signal is ignored on the corresponding Chip Select.
• Frozen Mode: If asserted, the NWAIT signal freezes the current read or write cycle. After deassertion, the read/write
cycle is resumed from the point where it was stopped.
• Ready Mode: The NWAIT signal indicates the availability of the external device at the end of the pulse of the controlling
read or write signal, to complete the access. If high, the access normally completes. If low, the access is extended until
NWAIT returns high.
194
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
•
BAT: Byte Access Type
This field is used only if DBW defines a 16- or 32-bit data bus.
• 1: Byte write access type:
– Write operation is controlled using NCS, NWR0, NWR1, NWR2, NWR3.
– Read operation is controlled using NCS and NRD.
• 0: Byte select access type:
– Write operation is controlled using NCS, NWE, NBS0, NBS1, NBS2 and NBS3
– Read operation is controlled using NCS, NRD, NBS0, NBS1, NBS2 and NBS3
• DBW: Data Bus Width
Value
Data Bus Width
0
0
8-bit bus
0
1
16-bit bus
1
0
32-bit bus
1
1
Reserved
• TDF_CYCLES: Data Float Time
This field gives the integer number of clock cycles required by the external device to release the data after the rising edge
of the read controlling signal. The SMC always provide one full cycle of bus turnaround after the TDF_CYCLES period. The
external bus cannot be used by another chip select during TDF_CYCLES + 1 cycles. From 0 up to 15 TDF_CYCLES can
be set.
• TDF_MODE: TDF Optimization
1: TDF optimization is enabled.
– The number of TDF wait states is optimized using the setup period of the next read/write access.
0: TDF optimization is disabled.
– The number of TDF wait states is inserted before the next access begins.
•
PMEN: Page Mode Enabled
1: Asynchronous burst read in page mode is applied on the corresponding chip select.
0: Standard read is applied.
• PS: Page Size
If page mode is enabled, this field indicates the size of the page in bytes.
Value
Page Size
0
0
4-byte page
0
1
8-byte page
1
0
16-byte page
1
1
32-byte page
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
195
20.
SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC)
20.1
Description
The SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC) extends the memory capabilities of a chip by providing the interface to an
external 16-bit or 32-bit SDRAM device. The page size supports ranges from 2048 to 8192 and the number of
columns from 256 to 2048. It supports byte (8-bit), half-word (16-bit) and word (32-bit) accesses.
The SDRAM Controller supports a read or write burst length of one location. It keeps track of the active row in each
bank, thus maximizing SDRAM performance, e.g., the application may be placed in one bank and data in the other
banks. So as to optimize performance, it is advisable to avoid accessing different rows in the same bank.
The SDRAM controller supports a CAS latency of 1, 2 or 3 and optimizes the read access depending on the
frequency.
The different modes available - self-refresh, power-down and deep power-down modes - minimize power
consumption on the SDRAM device.
20.2
I/O Lines Description
Table 20-1.
196
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
SDCK
SDRAM Clock
Output
SDCKE
SDRAM Clock Enable
Output
High
SDCS
SDRAM Controller Chip Select
Output
Low
BA[1:0]
Bank Select Signals
Output
RAS
Row Signal
Output
Low
CAS
Column Signal
Output
Low
SDWE
SDRAM Write Enable
Output
Low
NBS[3:0]
Data Mask Enable Signals
Output
Low
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
Address Bus
Output
D[31:0]
Data Bus
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Type
I/O
Active Level
20.3
Application Example
20.3.1 Software Interface
The SDRAM address space is organized into banks, rows, and columns. The SDRAM controller allows mapping
different memory types according to the values set in the SDRAMC configuration register.
The SDRAM Controller’s function is to make the SDRAM device access protocol transparent to the user. Table 202 to Table 20-7 illustrate the SDRAM device memory mapping seen by the user in correlation with the device
structure. Various configurations are illustrated.
20.3.1.1 32-bit Memory Data Bus Width
Table 20-2.
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 2K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bk[1:0]
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
5
4
3
2
0
M[1:0]
Column[9:0]
Row[10:0]
1
M[1:0]
Column[8:0]
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
6
Column[7:0]
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
Table 20-3.
15
M[1:0]
Column[10:0]
M[1:0]
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 4K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
Bk[1:0]
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
5
4
3
2
0
M[1:0]
Column[9:0]
Row[11:0]
1
M[1:0]
Column[8:0]
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
6
Column[7:0]
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
Table 20-4.
16
M[1:0]
Column[10:0]
M[1:0]
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 8K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
Bk[1:0]
Bk[1:0]
Bk[1:0]
Bk[1:0]
Notes:
17
16
15
Row[12:0]
Row[12:0]
Row[12:0]
Row[12:0]
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Column[7:0]
Column[8:0]
Column[9:0]
Column[10:0]
1
0
M[1:0]
M[1:0]
M[1:0]
M[1:0]
1. M[1:0] is the byte address inside a 32-bit word.
2. Bk[1] = BA1, Bk[0] = BA0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
197
20.3.1.2 16-bit Memory Data Bus Width
Table 20-5.
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 2K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
Bk[1:0]
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
4
3
2
1
M0
Column[9:0]
Row[10:0]
0
M0
Column[8:0]
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
5
Column[7:0]
Row[10:0]
Bk[1:0]
Table 20-6.
14
M0
Column[10:0]
M0
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 4K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bk[1:0]
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
4
3
2
1
M0
Column[9:0]
Row[11:0]
0
M0
Column[8:0]
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
5
Column[7:0]
Row[11:0]
Bk[1:0]
Table 20-7.
15
M0
Column[10:0]
M0
SDRAM Configuration Mapping: 8K Rows, 256/512/1024/2048 Columns
CPU Address Line
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
Bk[1:0]
Bk[1:0]
Notes:
198
15
14
Row[12:0]
Bk[1:0]
Bk[1:0]
16
Row[12:0]
Row[12:0]
Row[12:0]
1. M0 is the byte address inside a 16-bit half-word.
2. Bk[1] = BA1, Bk[0] = BA0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Column[7:0]
Column[8:0]
Column[9:0]
Column[10:0]
3
2
1
0
M0
M0
M0
M0
20.4
Product Dependencies
20.4.1 SDRAM Device Initialization
The initialization sequence is generated by software. The SDRAM devices are initialized by the following
sequence:
1.
SDRAM features must be set in the configuration register: asynchronous timings (TRC, TRAS, etc.), number
of columns, rows, CAS latency, and the data bus width.
2.
For mobile SDRAM, temperature-compensated self refresh (TCSR), drive strength (DS) and partial array
self refresh (PASR) must be set in the Low Power Register.
3.
The SDRAM memory type must be set in the Memory Device Register.
4.
A minimum pause of 200 µs is provided to precede any signal toggle.
5.
(1)
A NOP command is issued to the SDRAM devices. The application must set Mode to 1 in the Mode
Register and perform a write access to any SDRAM address.
6.
An All Banks Precharge command is issued to the SDRAM devices. The application must set Mode to 2 in
the Mode Register and perform a write access to any SDRAM address.
7.
Eight auto-refresh (CBR) cycles are provided. The application must set the Mode to 4 in the Mode Register
and perform a write access to any SDRAM location eight times.
8.
A Mode Register set (MRS) cycle is issued to program the parameters of the SDRAM devices, in particular
CAS latency and burst length. The application must set Mode to 3 in the Mode Register and perform a write
access to the SDRAM. The write address must be chosen so that BA[1:0] are set to 0. For example, with a
16-bit 128 MB SDRAM (12 rows, 9 columns, 4 banks) bank address, the SDRAM write access should be
done at the address 0x20000000.
9.
For mobile SDRAM initialization, an Extended Mode Register set (EMRS) cycle is issued to program the
SDRAM parameters (TCSR, PASR, DS). The application must set Mode to 5 in the Mode Register and
perform a write access to the SDRAM. The write address must be chosen so that BA[1] or BA[0] are set to 1.
For example, with a 16-bit 128 MB SDRAM, (12 rows, 9 columns, 4 banks) bank address the SDRAM write
access should be done at the address 0x20800000 or 0x20400000.
10. The application must go into Normal Mode, setting Mode to 0 in the Mode Register and performing a write
access at any location in the SDRAM.
11. Write the refresh rate into the count field in the SDRAMC Refresh Timer register. (Refresh rate = delay
between refresh cycles). The SDRAM device requires a refresh every 15.625 µs or 7.81 µs. With a 100 MHz
frequency, the Refresh Timer Counter Register must be set with the value 1562(15.652 µs × 100 MHz) or
781(7.81 µs × 100 MHz).
After initialization, the SDRAM devices are fully functional.
Note:
1.
It is strongly recommended to respect the instructions stated in Step 5 of the initialization process in order to be
certain that the subsequent commands issued by the SDRAMC will be taken into account.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
199
Figure 20-1.
SDRAM Device Initialization Sequence
SDCKE
tRP
tRC
tMRD
SDCK
SDRAMC_A[9:0]
A10
SDRAMC_A[12:11]
SDCS
RAS
CAS
SDWE
NBS
Inputs Stable for
200 μsec
Precharge All Banks
1st Auto-refresh
8th Auto-refresh
MRS Command
Valid Command
20.4.2 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the SDRAM Controller may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer must
first program the PIO controller to assign the SDRAM Controller pins to their peripheral function. If I/O lines of the
SDRAM Controller are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the PIO Controller.
20.4.3 Interrupt
The SDRAM Controller interrupt (Refresh Error notification) is connected to the Memory Controller. This interrupt
may be ORed with other System Peripheral interrupt lines and is finally provided as the System Interrupt Source
(Source 1) to the AIC (Advanced Interrupt Controller).
Using the SDRAM Controller interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first.
200
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.5
Functional Description
20.5.1 SDRAM Controller Write Cycle
The SDRAM Controller allows burst access or single access. In both cases, the SDRAM controller keeps track of
the active row in each bank, thus maximizing performance. To initiate a burst access, the SDRAM Controller uses
the transfer type signal provided by the master requesting the access. If the next access is a sequential write
access, writing to the SDRAM device is carried out. If the next access is a write-sequential access, but the current
access is to a boundary page, or if the next access is in another row, then the SDRAM Controller generates a
precharge command, activates the new row and initiates a write command. To comply with SDRAM timing
parameters, additional clock cycles are inserted between precharge/active (tRP) commands and active/write (tRCD)
commands. For definition of these timing parameters, refer to the “SDRAMC Configuration Register” on page 211.
This is described in Figure 20-2 below.
Figure 20-2.
Write Burst, 32-bit SDRAM Access
tRCD = 3
SDCS
SDCK
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
Row n
col a
col b
col c
col d
col e
col f
col g
col h
col i
col j
col k
col l
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
Dne
Dnf
Dng
Dnh
Dni
Dnj
Dnk
Dnl
RAS
CAS
SDWE
D[31:0]
Dna
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
201
20.5.2 SDRAM Controller Read Cycle
The SDRAM Controller allows burst access, incremental burst of unspecified length or single access. In all cases,
the SDRAM Controller keeps track of the active row in each bank, thus maximizing performance of the SDRAM. If
row and bank addresses do not match the previous row/bank address, then the SDRAM controller automatically
generates a precharge command, activates the new row and starts the read command. To comply with the
SDRAM timing parameters, additional clock cycles on SDCK are inserted between precharge and active
commands (tRP) and between active and read command (tRCD). These two parameters are set in the configuration
register of the SDRAM Controller. After a read command, additional wait states are generated to comply with the
CAS latency (1, 2 or 3 clock delays specified in the configuration register).
For a single access or an incremented burst of unspecified length, the SDRAM Controller anticipates the next
access. While the last value of the column is returned by the SDRAM Controller on the bus, the SDRAM Controller
anticipates the read to the next column and thus anticipates the CAS latency. This reduces the effect of the CAS
latency on the internal bus.
For burst access of specified length (4, 8, 16 words), access is not anticipated. This case leads to the best
performance. If the burst is broken (border, busy mode, etc.), the next access is handled as an incrementing burst
of unspecified length.
Figure 20-3.
Read Burst, 32-bit SDRAM Access
tRCD = 3
CAS = 2
SDCS
SDCK
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
Row n
col a
col b
col c
col d
col e
col f
RAS
CAS
SDWE
D[31:0]
(Input)
202
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Dna
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
Dne
Dnf
20.5.3 Border Management
When the memory row boundary has been reached, an automatic page break is inserted. In this case, the SDRAM
controller generates a precharge command, activates the new row and initiates a read or write command. To
comply with SDRAM timing parameters, an additional clock cycle is inserted between the precharge/active (tRP)
command and the active/read (tRCD) command. This is described in Figure 20-4 below.
Figure 20-4.
Read Burst with Boundary Row Access
TRP = 3
TRCD = 3
CAS = 2
SDCS
SDCK
Row n
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
col a
col b
col c
col d
Row m
col a
col b
col c
col d
col e
RAS
CAS
SDWE
D[31:0]
Dna
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
Dma
Dmb
Dmc
Dmd
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Dme
203
20.5.4 SDRAM Controller Refresh Cycles
An auto-refresh command is used to refresh the SDRAM device. Refresh addresses are generated internally by
the SDRAM device and incremented after each auto-refresh automatically. The SDRAM Controller generates
these auto-refresh commands periodically. An internal timer is loaded with the value in the register SDRAMC_TR
that indicates the number of clock cycles between refresh cycles.
A refresh error interrupt is generated when the previous auto-refresh command did not perform. It is acknowledged
by reading the Interrupt Status Register (SDRAMC_ISR).
When the SDRAM Controller initiates a refresh of the SDRAM device, internal memory accesses are not delayed.
However, if the CPU tries to access the SDRAM, the slave indicates that the device is busy and the master is held
by a wait signal. See Figure 20-5.
Figure 20-5.
Refresh Cycle Followed by a Read Access
tRP = 3
tRC = 8
tRCD = 3
CAS = 2
SDCS
SDCK
Row n
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
Row m
col c col d
col a
RAS
CAS
SDWE
D[31:0]
(input)
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
Dma
20.5.5 Power Management
Three low-power modes are available:
Self-refresh Mode: The SDRAM executes its own Auto-refresh cycle without control of the SDRAM
Controller. Current drained by the SDRAM is very low.
Power-down Mode: Auto-refresh cycles are controlled by the SDRAM Controller. Between auto-refresh
cycles, the SDRAM is in power-down. Current drained in Power-down mode is higher than in Self-refresh
Mode.
Deep Power-down Mode: (Only available with Mobile SDRAM) The SDRAM contents are lost, but the
SDRAM does not drain any current.
The SDRAM Controller activates one low-power mode as soon as the SDRAM device is not selected. It is possible
to delay the entry in self-refresh and power-down mode after the last access by programming a timeout value in
the Low Power Register.
204
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.5.5.1 Self-refresh Mode
This mode is selected by programming the LPCB field to 1 in the SDRAMC Low Power Register. In self-refresh
mode, the SDRAM device retains data without external clocking and provides its own internal clocking, thus
performing its own auto-refresh cycles. All the inputs to the SDRAM device become “don’t care” except SDCKE,
which remains low. As soon as the SDRAM device is selected, the SDRAM Controller provides a sequence of
commands and exits self-refresh mode.
Some low-power SDRAMs (e.g., mobile SDRAM) can refresh only one quarter or a half quarter or all banks of the
SDRAM array. This feature reduces the self-refresh current. To configure this feature, Temperature Compensated
Self Refresh (TCSR), Partial Array Self Refresh (PASR) and Drive Strength (DS) parameters must be set in the
Low Power Register and transmitted to the low-power SDRAM during initialization.
The SDRAM device must remain in self-refresh mode for a minimum period of tRAS and may remain in self-refresh
mode for an indefinite period. This is described in Figure 20-6.
Figure 20-6.
Self-refresh Mode Behavior
Self Refresh Mode
TXSR = 3
SRCB = 1
Write
SDRAMC_SRR
Row
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
SDCK
SDCKE
SDCS
RAS
CAS
SDWE
Access Request
to the SDRAM Controller
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
205
20.5.5.2 Low-power Mode
This mode is selected by programming the LPCB field to 2 in the SDRAMC Low Power Register. Power
consumption is greater than in self-refresh mode. All the input and output buffers of the SDRAM device are
deactivated except SDCKE, which remains low. In contrast to self-refresh mode, the SDRAM device cannot
remain in low-power mode longer than the refresh period (64 ms for a whole device refresh operation). As no autorefresh operations are performed by the SDRAM itself, the SDRAM Controller carries out the refresh operation.
The exit procedure is faster than in self-refresh mode.
This is described in Figure 20-7.
Figure 20-7.
Low-power Mode Behavior
TRCD = 3
CAS = 2
Low Power Mode
SDCS
SDCK
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
Row n
col a
col b
col c
col d
col e
col f
RAS
CAS
SDCKE
D[31:0]
(input)
206
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Dna
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
Dne
Dnf
20.5.5.3 Deep Power-down Mode
This mode is selected by programming the LPCB field to 3 in the SDRAMC Low Power Register. When this mode
is activated, all internal voltage generators inside the SDRAM are stopped and all data is lost.
When this mode is enabled, the application must not access to the SDRAM until a new initialization sequence is
done (See “SDRAM Device Initialization” on page 199).
This is described in Figure 20-8.
Figure 20-8.
Deep Power-down Mode Behavior
tRP = 3
SDCS
SDCK
Row n
SDRAMC_A[12:0]
col c
col d
RAS
CAS
SDWE
CKE
D[31:0]
(input)
Dnb
Dnc
Dnd
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
207
20.6
SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC) User Interface
Table 20-8.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
SDRAMC Mode Register
SDRAMC_MR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x04
SDRAMC Refresh Timer Register
SDRAMC_TR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
SDRAMC Configuration Register
SDRAMC_CR
Read/Write
0x852372C0
0x10
SDRAMC Low Power Register
SDRAMC_LPR
Read/Write
0x0
0x14
SDRAMC Interrupt Enable Register
SDRAMC_IER
Write-only
–
0x18
SDRAMC Interrupt Disable Register
SDRAMC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x1C
SDRAMC Interrupt Mask Register
SDRAMC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x20
SDRAMC Interrupt Status Register
SDRAMC_ISR
Read-only
0x0
0x24
SDRAMC Memory Device Register
SDRAMC_MDR
Read/Write
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x28–0xFC
208
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.6.1 SDRAMC Mode Register
Name:
SDRAMC_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
1
0
MODE
• MODE: SDRAMC Command Mode
This field defines the command issued by the SDRAM Controller when the SDRAM device is accessed.
Value
Description
0
0
0
Normal mode. Any access to the SDRAM is decoded normally. To activate this mode, command must be followed by a
write to the SDRAM.
0
0
1
The SDRAM Controller issues a NOP command when the SDRAM device is accessed regardless of the cycle. To
activate this mode, command must be followed by a write to the SDRAM.
0
1
0
The SDRAM Controller issues an “All Banks Precharge” command when the SDRAM device is accessed regardless of
the cycle. To activate this mode, command must be followed by a write to the SDRAM.
0
1
1
The SDRAM Controller issues a “Load Mode Register” command when the SDRAM device is accessed regardless of the
cycle. To activate this mode, command must be followed by a write to the SDRAM.
1
0
0
The SDRAM Controller issues an “Auto-Refresh” Command when the SDRAM device is accessed regardless of the
cycle. Previously, an “All Banks Precharge” command must be issued. To activate this mode, command must be followed
by a write to the SDRAM.
1
0
1
The SDRAM Controller issues an “Extended Load Mode Register” command when the SDRAM device is accessed
regardless of the cycle. To activate this mode, the “Extended Load Mode Register” command must be followed by a write
to the SDRAM. The write in the SDRAM must be done in the appropriate bank; most low-power SDRAM devices use the
bank 1.
1
1
0
Deep power-down mode. Enters deep power-down mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
209
20.6.2 SDRAMC Refresh Timer Register
Name:
SDRAMC_TR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
0
COUNT
2
COUNT
• COUNT: SDRAMC Refresh Timer Count
This 12-bit field is loaded into a timer that generates the refresh pulse. Each time the refresh pulse is generated, a refresh
burst is initiated. The value to be loaded depends on the SDRAMC clock frequency (MCK: Master Clock), the refresh rate
of the SDRAM device and the refresh burst length where 15.6 µs per row is a typical value for a burst of length one.
To refresh the SDRAM device, this 12-bit field must be written. If this condition is not satisfied, no refresh command is
issued and no refresh of the SDRAM device is carried out.
210
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.6.3 SDRAMC Configuration Register
Name:
SDRAMC_CR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
TXSR
23
22
21
14
20
19
18
13
6
16
12
11
10
9
8
1
0
TWR
5
CAS
17
TRP
TRC
7
DBW
24
TRAS
TRCD
15
25
4
NB
3
2
NR
NC
• NC: Number of Column Bits
Reset value is 8 column bits.
Value
Column Bits
0
0
8
0
1
9
1
0
10
1
1
11
• NR: Number of Row Bits
Reset value is 11 row bits.
Value
Row Bits
0
0
11
0
1
12
1
0
13
1
1
Reserved
• NB: Number of Banks
Reset value is two banks.
Value
Number of Banks
0
2
1
4
• CAS: CAS Latency
Reset value is two cycles.
In the SDRAMC, only a CAS latency of one, two and three cycles are managed.
Value
CAS Latency (Cycles)
0
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
0
2
1
1
3
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
211
• DBW: Data Bus Width
Reset value is 16 bits
0: Data bus width is 32 bits.
1: Data bus width is 16 bits.
• TWR: Write Recovery Delay
Reset value is two cycles.
This field defines the Write Recovery Time in number of cycles. Number of cycles is between 0 and 15.
• TRC: Row Cycle Delay
Reset value is seven cycles.
This field defines the delay between a Refresh and an Activate Command in number of cycles. Number of cycles is
between 0 and 15.
• TRP: Row Precharge Delay
Reset value is three cycles.
This field defines the delay between a Precharge Command and another Command in number of cycles. Number of cycles
is between 0 and 15.
• TRCD: Row to Column Delay
Reset value is two cycles.
This field defines the delay between an Activate Command and a Read/Write Command in number of cycles. Number of
cycles is between 0 and 15.
• TRAS: Active to Precharge Delay
Reset value is five cycles.
This field defines the delay between an Activate Command and a Precharge Command in number of cycles. Number of
cycles is between 0 and 15.
• TXSR: Exit Self Refresh to Active Delay
Reset value is eight cycles.
This field defines the delay between SCKE set high and an Activate Command in number of cycles. Number of cycles is
between 0 and 15.
212
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.6.4 SDRAMC Low Power Register
Name:
SDRAMC_LPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
–
6
5
PASR
TIMEOUT
DS
4
3
–
TCSR
2
–
1
0
LPCB
• LPCB: Low-power Configuration Bits
Value
Description
00
Low Power Feature is inhibited: no Power-down, Self-refresh or Deep Power-down command is issued to the SDRAM
device.
01
The SDRAM Controller issues a Self-refresh command to the SDRAM device, the SDCLK clock is deactivated and the
SDCKE signal is set low. The SDRAM device leaves the Self Refresh Mode when accessed and enters it after the access.
10
The SDRAM Controller issues a Power-down Command to the SDRAM device after each access, the SDCKE signal is set to
low. The SDRAM device leaves the Power-down Mode when accessed and enters it after the access.
11
The SDRAM Controller issues a Deep Power-down command to the SDRAM device. This mode is unique to low-power
SDRAM.
• PASR: Partial Array Self-refresh (only for low-power SDRAM)
PASR parameter is transmitted to the SDRAM during initialization to specify whether only one quarter, one half or all banks
of the SDRAM array are enabled. Disabled banks are not refreshed in self-refresh mode. This parameter must be set
according to the SDRAM device specification.
• TCSR: Temperature Compensated Self-Refresh (only for low-power SDRAM)
TCSR parameter is transmitted to the SDRAM during initialization to set the refresh interval during self-refresh mode
depending on the temperature of the low-power SDRAM. This parameter must be set according to the SDRAM device
specification.
• DS: Drive Strength (only for low-power SDRAM)
DS parameter is transmitted to the SDRAM during initialization to select the SDRAM strength of data output. This parameter must be set according to the SDRAM device specification.
• TIMEOUT: Time to define when low-power mode is enabled
Value
Description
00
The SDRAM controller activates the SDRAM low-power mode immediately after the end of the last transfer.
01
The SDRAM controller activates the SDRAM low-power mode 64 clock cycles after the end of the last transfer.
10
The SDRAM controller activates the SDRAM low-power mode 128 clock cycles after the end of the last transfer.
11
Reserved.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
213
20.6.5 SDRAMC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
SDRAMC_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RES
• RES: Refresh Error Status
0: No effect.
1: Enables the refresh error interrupt.
214
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.6.6 SDRAMC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
SDRAMC_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RES
• RES: Refresh Error Status
0: No effect.
1: Disables the refresh error interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
215
20.6.7 SDRAMC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
SDRAMC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RES
• RES: Refresh Error Status
0: The refresh error interrupt is disabled.
1: The refresh error interrupt is enabled.
216
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
20.6.8 SDRAMC Interrupt Status Register
Name:
SDRAMC_ISR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RES
• RES: Refresh Error Status
0: No refresh error has been detected since the register was last read.
1: A refresh error has been detected since the register was last read.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
217
20.6.9 SDRAMC Memory Device Register
Name:
SDRAMC_MDR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
• MD: Memory Device Type
Value
Description
00
SDRAM
01
Low-power SDRAM
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
218
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
MD
21.
Error Correction Code Controller (ECC)
21.1
Description
NAND Flash/SmartMedia devices contain by default invalid blocks which have one or more invalid bits. Over the
NAND Flash/SmartMedia lifetime, additional invalid blocks may occur which can be detected/corrected by ECC
code.
The ECC Controller is a mechanism that encodes data in a manner that makes possible the identification and
correction of certain errors in data. The ECC controller is capable of single bit error correction and 2-bit random
detection. When NAND Flash/SmartMedia have more than 2 bits of errors, the data cannot be corrected.
The ECC user interface is compliant with the ARM Advanced Peripheral Bus (APB rev2).
21.2
Block Diagram
Figure 21-1.
Block Diagram
NAND Flash
Static
Memory
Controller
SmartMedia
Logic
ECC
Controller
Ctrl/ECC Algorithm
User Interface
APB
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
219
21.3
Functional Description
A page in NAND Flash and SmartMedia memories contains an area for main data and an additional area used for
redundancy (ECC). The page is organized in 8-bit or 16-bit words. The page size corresponds to the number of
words in the main area plus the number of words in the extra area used for redundancy.
The only configuration required for ECC is the NAND Flash or the SmartMedia page size (528/1056/2112/4224).
Page size is configured setting the PAGESIZE field in the ECC Mode Register (ECC_MR).
ECC is automatically computed as soon as a read (00h)/write (80h) command to the NAND Flash or the
SmartMedia is detected. Read and write access must start at a page boundary.
ECC results are available as soon as the counter reaches the end of the main area. Values in the ECC Parity
Register (ECC_PR) and ECC NParity Register (ECC_NPR) are then valid and locked until a new start condition
occurs (read/write command followed by address cycles).
21.3.1 Write Access
Once the flash memory page is written, the computed ECC code is available in the ECC Parity Error (ECC_PR)
and ECC_NParity Error (ECC_NPR) registers. The ECC code value must be written by the software application in
the extra area used for redundancy.
21.3.2 Read Access
After reading the whole data in the main area, the application must perform read accesses to the extra area where
ECC code has been previously stored. Error detection is automatically performed by the ECC controller. Please
note that it is mandatory to read consecutively the entire main area and the locations where Parity and NParity
values have been previously stored to let the ECC controller perform error detection.
The application can check the ECC Status Register (ECC_SR) for any detected errors.
It is up to the application to correct any detected error. ECC computation can detect four different circumstances:
No error: XOR between the ECC computation and the ECC code stored at the end of the NAND Flash or
SmartMedia page is equal to 0. No error flags in the ECC Status Register (ECC_SR).
Recoverable error: Only the RECERR flag in the ECC Status register (ECC_SR) is set. The corrupted word
offset in the read page is defined by the WORDADDR field in the ECC Parity Register (ECC_PR). The
corrupted bit position in the concerned word is defined in the BITADDR field in the ECC Parity Register
(ECC_PR).
ECC error: The ECCERR flag in the ECC Status Register is set. An error has been detected in the ECC
code stored in the Flash memory. The position of the corrupted bit can be found by the application
performing an XOR between the Parity and the NParity contained in the ECC code stored in the flash
memory.
Non correctable error: The MULERR flag in the ECC Status Register is set. Several unrecoverable errors
have been detected in the flash memory page.
ECC Status Register, ECC Parity Register and ECC NParity Register are cleared when a read/write command is
detected or a software reset is performed.
For Single-bit Error Correction and Double-bit Error Detection (SEC-DED) hsiao code is used. 32-bit ECC is
generated in order to perform one bit correction per 512/1024/2048/4096 8- or 16-bit words. Of the 32 ECC bits, 26
bits are for line parity and 6 bits are for column parity. They are generated according to the schemes shown in
Figure 21-2 and Figure 21-3.
220
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 21-2.
Parity Generation for 512/1024/2048/4096 8-bit Words1
1st byte
2nd byte
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
P8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
P8'
3rd byte
Bit7
Bit7
Bit6
Bit6
Bit5
Bit5
Bit4
Bit4
Bit3
Bit3
Bit2
Bit2
Bit1
Bit1
Bit0
Bit0
P8
Bit7
Bit7
Bit6
Bit6
Bit5
Bit5
Bit4
Bit4
Bit3
Bit3
Bit2
Bit2
Bit1
Bit1
Bit0
Bit0
P8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
P8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
P8'
P1
P1'
P1
P1
P1'
P1
P1'
4 th byte
(page size -3 )th byte
(page size -2 )th byte
(page size -1 )th byte
Page size th byte
P2
P2'
P4
Page size
Page size
Page size
Page size
= 512
= 1024
= 2048
= 4096
P1'
Px = 2048
Px = 4096
Px = 8192
Px = 16384
P2
P8'
P8'
P16
P32
PX
P32
PX'
P16'
P16
P16'
P2'
P4'
P1=bit7(+)bit5(+)bit3(+)bit1(+)P1
P2=bit7(+)bit6(+)bit3(+)bit2(+)P2
P4=bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)P4
P1'=bit6(+)bit4(+)bit2(+)bit0(+)P1'
P2'=bit5(+)bit4(+)bit1(+)bit0(+)P2'
P4'=bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)P4'
To calculate P8’ to PX’ and P8 to PX, apply the algorithm that follows.
Page size = 2n
for i =0 to n
begin
for (j = 0 to page_size_byte)
begin
if(j[i] ==1)
P[2i+3]=bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)bit3(+)
bit2(+)bit1(+)bit0(+)P[2i+3]
else
P[2i+3]’=bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)bit3(+)
bit2(+)bit1(+)bit0(+)P[2i+3]'
end
end
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
221
Parity Generation for 512/1024/2048/4096 16-bit Words
222
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
(Page size -3 )th word
(Page size -2 )th word
(Page size -1 )th word
Page size th word
4th word
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
(+)
Figure 21-3.
To calculate P8’ to PX’ and P8 to PX, apply the algorithm that follows.
Page size = 2n
for i =0 to n
begin
for (j = 0 to page_size_word)
begin
if(j[i] ==1)
P[2i+3]= bit15(+)bit14(+)bit13(+)bit12(+)
bit11(+)bit10(+)bit9(+)bit8(+)
bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)bit3(+)
bit2(+)bit1(+)bit0(+)P[2n+3]
else
P[2i+3]’=bit15(+)bit14(+)bit13(+)bit12(+)
bit11(+)bit10(+)bit9(+)bit8(+)
bit7(+)bit6(+)bit5(+)bit4(+)bit3(+)
bit2(+)bit1(+)bit0(+)P[2i+3]'
end
end
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
223
21.4
Error Correction Code Controller (ECC) User Interface
Table 21-1.
Offset
Register
Register Name
Access
Reset
0x00
ECC Control Register
ECC_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
ECC Mode Register
ECC_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x08
ECC Status Register
ECC_SR
Read-only
0x0
0x0C
ECC Parity Register
ECC_PR
Read-only
0x0
0x10
ECC NParity Register
ECC_NPR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x14–0xFC
224
Register Mapping
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
21.4.1 ECC Control Register
Name:
ECC_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
–
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
–
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
–
27
–
19
–
11
–
3
–
26
–
18
–
10
–
2
–
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
–
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
RST
• RST: RESET Parity
Provides reset to current ECC by software.
1: Resets ECC Parity and ECC NParity register.
0: No effect.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
225
21.4.2 ECC Mode Register
Name:
ECC_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
–
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
–
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
–
27
–
19
–
11
–
3
–
26
–
18
–
10
–
2
–
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
PAGESIZE
• PAGESIZE: Page Size
This field defines the page size of the NAND Flash device.
Value
Description
00
528 words
01
1056 words
10
2112 words
11
4224 words
A word has a value of 8 bits or 16 bits, depending on the NAND Flash or SmartMedia memory organization.
226
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
21.4.3 ECC Status Register
Name:
ECC_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
–
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
–
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
–
27
–
19
–
11
–
3
–
26
–
18
–
10
–
2
MULERR
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
ECCERR
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
RECERR
• RECERR: Recoverable Error
0: No Errors Detected.
1: Errors Detected. If MUL_ERROR is 0, a single correctable error was detected. Otherwise multiple uncorrected errors
were detected.
• ECCERR: ECC Error
0: No Errors Detected.
1: A single bit error occurred in the ECC bytes.
Read both ECC Parity and ECC NParity register, the error occurred at the location which contains a 1 in the least significant 16 bits.
• MULERR: Multiple Error
0: No Multiple Errors Detected.
1: Multiple Errors Detected.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
227
21.4.4 ECC Parity Register
Name:
ECC_PR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
23
–
15
30
–
22
–
14
29
–
21
–
13
28
–
20
–
12
7
6
5
4
27
–
19
–
11
26
–
18
–
10
3
2
25
–
17
–
9
24
–
16
–
8
1
0
WORDADDR
WORDADDR
BITADDR
Once the entire main area of a page is written with data, the register content must be stored at any free location of the
spare area.
• BITADDR
During a page read, this value contains the corrupted bit offset where an error occurred, if a single error was detected. If
multiple errors were detected, this value is meaningless.
• WORDADDR
During a page read, this value contains the word address (8-bit or 16-bit word depending on the memory plane organization) where an error occurred, if a single error was detected. If multiple errors were detected, this value is meaningless.
228
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
21.4.5 ECC NParity Register
Name:
ECC_NPR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
23
–
15
30
–
22
–
14
29
–
21
–
13
28
–
20
–
12
7
6
5
4
27
–
19
–
11
26
–
18
–
10
25
–
17
–
9
24
–
16
–
8
3
2
1
0
NPARITY
NPARITY
• NPARITY:
Once the entire main area of a page is written with data, the register content must be stored at any free location of the
spare area.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
229
22.
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
22.1
Description
The Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) transfers data between on-chip serial peripherals and the on- and/or off-chip
memories. The link between the PDC and a serial peripheral is operated by the AHB to ABP bridge.
The PDC contains 22 channels. The full-duplex peripherals feature 21 mono directional channels used in pairs
(transmit only or receive only). The half-duplex peripherals feature 1 bi-directional channels.
The user interface of each PDC channel is integrated into the user interface of the peripheral it serves. The user
interface of mono directional channels (receive only or transmit only), contains two 32-bit memory pointers and two
16-bit counters, one set (pointer, counter) for current transfer and one set (pointer, counter) for next transfer. The
bi-directional channel user interface contains four 32-bit memory pointers and four 16-bit counters. Each set
(pointer, counter) is used by current transmit, next transmit, current receive and next receive.
Using the PDC removes processor overhead by reducing its intervention during the transfer. This significantly
reduces the number of clock cycles required for a data transfer, which improves microcontroller performance.
To launch a transfer, the peripheral triggers its associated PDC channels by using transmit and receive signals.
When the programmed data is transferred, an end of transfer interrupt is generated by the peripheral itself.
230
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.2
Embedded Characteristics
Acting as one Matrix Master
Allows data transfers from/to peripheral to/from any memory space without any intervention of the processor.
Next Pointer Support, forbids strong real-time constraints on buffer management.
Twenty-two channels
̶
Two for each USART
̶
Two for the Debug Unit
̶
Two for each Serial Synchronous Controller
̶
Two for each Serial Peripheral Interface
̶
One for MultiMedia Card Interface
̶
One for Analog-to-Digital Converter
The Peripheral DMA Controller handles transfer requests from the channel according to the following priorities
(Low to High priorities):
̶
DBGU Transmit Channel
̶
USART5 Transmit Channel
̶
USART4 Transmit Channel
̶
USART3 Transmit Channel
̶
USART2 Transmit Channel
̶
USART1 Transmit Channel
̶
USART0 Transmit Channel
̶
SPI1 Transmit Channel
̶
SPI0 Transmit Channel
̶
SSC Transmit Channel
̶
DBGU Receive Channel
̶
USART5 Receive Channel
̶
USART4 Receive Channel
̶
USART3 Receive Channel
̶
USART2 Receive Channel
̶
USART1 Receive Channel
̶
USART0 Receive Channel
̶
ADC Receive Channel
̶
SPI1 Receive Channel
̶
SPI0 Receive Channel
̶
SSC Receive Channel
̶
MCI Transmit/Receive Channel
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
231
22.3
Block Diagram
Figure 22-1.
Block Diagram
FULL DUPLEX
PERIPHERAL
PDC
THR
PDC Channel A
RHR
PDC Channel B
Control
Status & Control
HALF DUPLEX
PERIPHERAL
Control
THR
PDC Channel C
RHR
Control
Status & Control
RECEIVE or TRANSMIT
PERIPHERAL
RHR or THR
Control
232
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
PDC Channel D
Status & Control
22.4
Functional Description
22.4.1 Configuration
The PDC channel user interface enables the user to configure and control data transfers for each channel. The
user interface of each PDC channel is integrated into the associated peripheral user interface.
The user interface of a serial peripheral, whether it is full or half duplex, contains four 32-bit pointers (RPR, RNPR,
TPR, TNPR) and four 16-bit counter registers (RCR, RNCR, TCR, TNCR). However, the transmit and receive
parts of each type are programmed differently: the transmit and receive parts of a full duplex peripheral can be
programmed at the same time, whereas only one part (transmit or receive) of a half duplex peripheral can be
programmed at a time.
32-bit pointers define the access location in memory for current and next transfer, whether it is for read (transmit)
or write (receive). 16-bit counters define the size of current and next transfers. It is possible, at any moment, to
read the number of transfers left for each channel.
The PDC has dedicated status registers which indicate if the transfer is enabled or disabled for each channel. The
status for each channel is located in the associated peripheral status register. Transfers can be enabled and/or
disabled by setting TXTEN/TXTDIS and RXTEN/RXTDIS in the peripheral’s Transfer Control Register.
At the end of a transfer, the PDC channel sends status flags to its associated peripheral. These flags are visible in
the peripheral status register (ENDRX, ENDTX, RXBUFF, and TXBUFE). Refer to Section 22.4.3 and to the
associated peripheral user interface.
22.4.2 Memory Pointers
Each full duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC by a receive channel and a transmit channel. Both channels
have 32-bit memory pointers that point respectively to a receive area and to a transmit area in on- and/or off-chip
memory.
Each half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC by a bidirectional channel. This channel has two 32-bit
memory pointers, one for current transfer and the other for next transfer. These pointers point to transmit or
receive data depending on the operating mode of the peripheral.
Depending on the type of transfer (byte, half-word or word), the memory pointer is incremented respectively by 1,
2 or 4 bytes.
If a memory pointer address changes in the middle of a transfer, the PDC channel continues operating using the
new address.
22.4.3 Transfer Counters
Each channel has two 16-bit counters, one for current transfer and the other one for next transfer. These counters
define the size of data to be transferred by the channel. The current transfer counter is decremented first as the
data addressed by current memory pointer starts to be transferred. When the current transfer counter reaches
zero, the channel checks its next transfer counter. If the value of next counter is zero, the channel stops
transferring data and sets the appropriate flag. But if the next counter value is greater then zero, the values of the
next pointer/next counter are copied into the current pointer/current counter and the channel resumes the transfer
whereas next pointer/next counter get zero/zero as values. At the end of this transfer the PDC channel sets the
appropriate flags in the Peripheral Status Register.
The following list gives an overview of how status register flags behave depending on the counters’ values:
ENDRX flag is set when the PERIPH_RCR reaches zero.
RXBUFF flag is set when both PERIPH_RCR and PERIPH_RNCR reach zero.
ENDTX flag is set when the PERIPH_TCR reaches zero.
TXBUFE flag is set when both PERIPH_TCR and PERIPH_TNCR reach zero.
These status flags are described in the Peripheral Status Register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
233
22.4.4 Data Transfers
The serial peripheral triggers its associated PDC channels’ transfers using transmit enable (TXEN) and receive
enable (RXEN) flags in the transfer control register integrated in the peripheral’s user interface.
When the peripheral receives an external data, it sends a Receive Ready signal to its PDC receive channel which
then requests access to the Matrix. When access is granted, the PDC receive channel starts reading the
peripheral Receive Holding Register (RHR). The read data are stored in an internal buffer and then written to
memory.
When the peripheral is about to send data, it sends a Transmit Ready to its PDC transmit channel which then
requests access to the Matrix. When access is granted, the PDC transmit channel reads data from memory and
puts them to Transmit Holding Register (THR) of its associated peripheral. The same peripheral sends data
according to its mechanism.
22.4.5 PDC Flags and Peripheral Status Register
Each peripheral connected to the PDC sends out receive ready and transmit ready flags and the PDC sends back
flags to the peripheral. All these flags are only visible in the Peripheral Status Register.
Depending on the type of peripheral, half or full duplex, the flags belong to either one single channel or two
different channels.
22.4.5.1 Receive Transfer End
This flag is set when PERIPH_RCR reaches zero and the last data has been transferred to memory.
It is reset by writing a non zero value in PERIPH_RCR or PERIPH_RNCR.
22.4.5.2 Transmit Transfer End
This flag is set when PERIPH_TCR reaches zero and the last data has been written into peripheral THR.
It is reset by writing a non zero value in PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
22.4.5.3 Receive Buffer Full
This flag is set when PERIPH_RCR reaches zero with PERIPH_RNCR also set to zero and the last data has been
transferred to memory.
It is reset by writing a non zero value in PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
22.4.5.4 Transmit Buffer Empty
This flag is set when PERIPH_TCR reaches zero with PERIPH_TNCR also set to zero and the last data has been
written into peripheral THR.
It is reset by writing a non zero value in PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
234
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) User Interface
Table 22-1.
Note:
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name(1)
0x100
Receive Pointer Register
0x104
Access
Reset
PERIPH_RPR
Read/Write
0
Receive Counter Register
PERIPH_RCR
Read/Write
0
0x108
Transmit Pointer Register
PERIPH_TPR
Read/Write
0
0x10C
Transmit Counter Register
PERIPH_TCR
Read/Write
0
0x110
Receive Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_RNPR
Read/Write
0
0x114
Receive Next Counter Register
PERIPH_RNCR
Read/Write
0
0x118
Transmit Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_TNPR
Read/Write
0
0x11C
Transmit Next Counter Register
PERIPH_TNCR
Read/Write
0
0x120
Transfer Control Register
PERIPH_PTCR
Write-only
–
0x124
Transfer Status Register
PERIPH_PTSR
Read-only
0
1. PERIPH: Ten registers are mapped in the peripheral memory space at the same offset. These can be defined by the user
according to the function and the peripheral desired (DBGU, USART, SSC, SPI, MCI, etc.)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
235
22.5.1 Receive Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_RPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXPTR
23
22
21
20
RXPTR
15
14
13
12
RXPTR
7
6
5
4
RXPTR
• RXPTR: Receive Pointer Register
RXPTR must be set to receive buffer address.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXPTR = TXPTR.
236
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5.2 Receive Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_RCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXCTR
7
6
5
4
RXCTR
• RXCTR: Receive Counter Register
RXCTR must be set to receive buffer size.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXCTR = TXCTR.
0: Stops peripheral data transfer to the receiver
1–65535: Starts peripheral data transfer if corresponding channel is active
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
237
22.5.3 Transmit Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_TPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXPTR
23
22
21
20
TXPTR
15
14
13
12
TXPTR
7
6
5
4
TXPTR
• TXPTR: Transmit Counter Register
TXPTR must be set to transmit buffer address.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXPTR = TXPTR.
238
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5.4 Transmit Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_TCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXCTR
7
6
5
4
TXCTR
• TXCTR: Transmit Counter Register
TXCTR must be set to transmit buffer size.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXCTR = TXCTR.
0: Stops peripheral data transfer to the transmitter
1–65535: Starts peripheral data transfer if corresponding channel is active
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
239
22.5.5 Receive Next Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_RNPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXNPTR
23
22
21
20
RXNPTR
15
14
13
12
RXNPTR
7
6
5
4
RXNPTR
• RXNPTR: Receive Next Pointer
RXNPTR contains next receive buffer address.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNPTR = TXNPTR.
240
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5.6 Receive Next Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_RNCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXNCTR
7
6
5
4
RXNCTR
• RXNCTR: Receive Next Counter
RXNCTR contains next receive buffer size.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNCTR = TXNCTR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
241
22.5.7 Transmit Next Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_TNPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXNPTR
23
22
21
20
TXNPTR
15
14
13
12
TXNPTR
7
6
5
4
TXNPTR
• TXNPTR: Transmit Next Pointer
TXNPTR contains next transmit buffer address.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNPTR = TXNPTR.
242
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5.8 Transmit Next Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_TNCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXNCTR
7
6
5
4
TXNCTR
• TXNCTR: Transmit Counter Next
TXNCTR contains next transmit buffer size.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNCTR = TXNCTR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
243
22.5.9 Transfer Control Register
Name:
PERIPH_PTCR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
TXTDIS
8
TXTEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXTDIS
0
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables PDC receiver channel requests if RXTDIS is not set.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, enabling the receiver channel requests automatically disables the
transmitter channel requests. It is forbidden to set both TXTEN and RXTEN for a half duplex peripheral.
• RXTDIS: Receiver Transfer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PDC receiver channel requests.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, disabling the receiver channel requests also disables the transmitter channel requests.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PDC transmitter channel requests.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, it enables the transmitter channel requests only if RXTEN is not
set. It is forbidden to set both TXTEN and RXTEN for a half duplex peripheral.
• TXTDIS: Transmitter Transfer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PDC transmitter channel requests.
When a half duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, disabling the transmitter channel requests disables the receiver
channel requests.
244
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
22.5.10 Transfer Status Register
Name:
PERIPH_PTSR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
TXTEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0: PDC Receiver channel requests are disabled.
1: PDC Receiver channel requests are enabled.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0: PDC Transmitter channel requests are disabled.
1: PDC Transmitter channel requests are enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
245
23.
Clock Generator
23.1
Description
The Clock Generator is made up of two PLLs, a Main Oscillator, as well as an RC oscillator and a 32.768 kHz lowpower oscillator.
It provides the following clocks:
SLCK, the Slow Clock, which is the only permanent clock within the system
MAINCK is the output of the Main Oscillator
The Clock Generator User Interface is embedded within the Power Management Controller one and is described
in Section 24.9. However, the Clock Generator registers are named CKGR_.
23.2
PLLACK is the output of the Divider and PLL A block
PLLBCK is the output of the Divider and PLL B block
Embedded Characteristics
Embeds a Low-power 32.768 kHz Slow Clock Oscillator and a Low-power RC oscillator selectable with
OSCSEL signal
̶
246
Provides the permanent Slow Clock SLCK to the system
Embeds the Main Oscillator
̶
Oscillator bypass feature
̶
Supports 3 to 20 MHz crystals
Embeds two PLLs
̶
PLLA outputs 80 to 240 MHz clock
̶
PLLB outputs 70 to 130 MHz clock
̶
Both integrate an input divider to increase output accuracy
̶
PLLB embeds its own filter
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 23-1.
Clock Generator Block Diagram
Clock Generator
OSCSEL
On Chip
RC OSC
XIN32
Slow Clock
SLCK
Slow Clock
Oscillator
XOUT32
XIN
Main
Oscillator
Main Clock
MAINCK
PLL and
Divider A
PLLA Clock
PLLACK
PLL and
Divider B
PLLB Clock
PLLBCK
XOUT
PLLRCA
Status
Control
Power
Management
Controller
23.3
Slow Clock Crystal Oscillator
The Clock Generator integrates a 32.768 kHz low-power oscillator. The XIN32 and XOUT32 pins must be
connected to a 32.768 kHz crystal. Two external capacitors must be wired as shown in Figure 23-2.
Figure 23-2.
Typical Slow Clock Crystal Oscillator Connection
XIN32
XOUT32
GNDBU
32768 Hz
Crystal
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
247
23.4
Slow Clock RC Oscillator
The user has to take into account the possible drifts of the RC Oscillator. More details are given in Section 39.2
“DC Characteristics”.
23.5
Main Oscillator
Figure 23-3 shows the Main Oscillator block diagram.
Figure 23-3.
Main Oscillator Block Diagram
MOSCEN
XIN
Main
Oscillator
MAINCK
Main Clock
XOUT
OSCOUNT
Main
Oscillator
Counter
SLCK
Slow Clock
MOSCS
MAINF
Main Clock
Frequency
Counter
MAINRDY
23.5.1 Main Oscillator Connections
The Clock Generator integrates a Main Oscillator that is designed for a 3 to 20 MHz fundamental crystal. The
typical crystal connection is illustrated in Figure 23-4. The 1 k Ω resistor is only required for crystals with
frequencies lower than 8 MHz. For further details on the electrical characteristics of the Main Oscillator, see
Section 39.2 “DC Characteristics”.
Figure 23-4.
Typical Crystal Connection
AT91SAM Microcontroller
XIN
XOUT
GND
1K
23.5.2 Main Oscillator Startup Time
The startup time of the Main Oscillator is given in Section 39.2 “DC Characteristics”. The startup time depends on
the crystal frequency and decreases when the frequency rises.
248
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
23.5.3 Main Oscillator Control
To minimize the power required to start up the system, the main oscillator is disabled after reset and slow clock is
selected.
The software enables or disables the main oscillator so as to reduce power consumption by clearing the MOSCEN
bit in the Main Oscillator Register (CKGR_MOR).
When disabling the main oscillator by clearing the MOSCEN bit in CKGR_MOR, the MOSCS bit in PMC_SR is
automatically cleared, indicating the main clock is off.
When enabling the main oscillator, the user must initiate the main oscillator counter with a value corresponding to
the startup time of the oscillator. This startup time depends on the crystal frequency connected to the main
oscillator.
When the MOSCEN bit and the OSCOUNT are written in CKGR_MOR to enable the main oscillator, the MOSCS
bit in PMC_SR (Status Register) is cleared and the counter starts counting down on the slow clock divided by 8
from the OSCOUNT value. Since the OSCOUNT value is coded with 8 bits, the maximum startup time is about
62 ms.
When the counter reaches 0, the MOSCS bit is set, indicating that the main clock is valid. Setting the MOSCS bit in
PMC_IMR can trigger an interrupt to the processor.
23.5.4 Main Clock Frequency Counter
The Main Oscillator features a Main Clock frequency counter that provides the quartz frequency connected to the
Main Oscillator. Generally, this value is known by the system designer; however, it is useful for the boot program to
configure the device with the correct clock speed, independently of the application.
The Main Clock frequency counter starts incrementing at the Main Clock speed after the next rising edge of the
Slow Clock as soon as the Main Oscillator is stable, i.e., as soon as the MOSCS bit is set. Then, at the 16th falling
edge of Slow Clock, the MAINRDY bit in CKGR_MCFR (Main Clock Frequency Register) is set and the counter
stops counting. Its value can be read in the MAINF field of CKGR_MCFR and gives the number of Main Clock
cycles during 16 periods of Slow Clock, so that the frequency of the crystal connected on the Main Oscillator can
be determined.
23.5.5 Main Oscillator Bypass
The user can input a clock on the device instead of connecting a crystal. In this case, the user has to provide the
external clock signal on the XIN pin. The input characteristics of the XIN pin under these conditions are given in the
product electrical characteristics section. The programmer has to be sure to set the OSCBYPASS bit to 1 and the
MOSCEN bit to 0 in the Main OSC register (CKGR_MOR) for the external clock to operate properly.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
249
23.6
Divider and PLL Block
The PLL embeds an input divider to increase the accuracy of the resulting clock signals. However, the user must
respect the PLL minimum input frequency when programming the divider.
Figure 23-5 shows the block diagram of the divider and PLL blocks.
Figure 23-5.
Divider and PLL Block Diagram
DIVB
MULB
Divider B
MAINCK
OUTB
PLL B
DIVA
MULA
Divider A
PLLBCK
OUTA
PLL A
PLLACK
PLLRCA
PLLBCOUNT
PLL B
Counter
LOCKB
PLLACOUNT
PLL A
Counter
SLCK
LOCKA
23.6.1 PLL Filter
The PLL requires connection to an external second-order filter through the PLLRCA and/or PLLRCB pin. Figure
23-6 shows a schematic of these filters.
Figure 23-6.
PLL Capacitors and Resistors
PLLRC
PLL
R
C2
C1
GND
Values of R, C1 and C2 to be connected to the PLLRC pin must be calculated as a function of the PLL input
frequency, the PLL output frequency and the phase margin. A trade-off has to be found between output signal
overshoot and startup time.
250
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
23.6.2 Divider and Phase Lock Loop Programming
The divider can be set between 1 and 255 in steps of 1. When a divider field (DIV) is set to 0, the output of the
corresponding divider and the PLL output is a continuous signal at level 0. On reset, each DIV field is set to 0, thus
the corresponding PLL input clock is set to 0.
The PLL allows multiplication of the divider’s outputs. The PLL clock signal has a frequency that depends on the
respective source signal frequency and on the parameters DIV and MUL. The factor applied to the source signal
frequency is (MUL + 1)/DIV. When MUL is written to 0, the corresponding PLL is disabled and its power
consumption is saved. Re-enabling the PLL can be performed by writing a value higher than 0 in the MUL field.
Whenever the PLL is re-enabled or one of its parameters is changed, the LOCK bit (LOCKA or LOCKB) in
PMC_SR is automatically cleared. The values written in the PLLCOUNT field (PLLACOUNT or PLLBCOUNT) in
CKGR_PLLR (CKGR_PLLAR or CKGR_PLLBR), are loaded in the PLL counter. The PLL counter then
decrements at the speed of the Slow Clock until it reaches 0. At this time, the LOCK bit is set in PMC_SR and can
trigger an interrupt to the processor. The user has to load the number of Slow Clock cycles required to cover the
PLL transient time into the PLLCOUNT field. The transient time depends on the PLL filter. The initial state of the
PLL and its target frequency can be calculated using a specific tool provided by Atmel.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
251
24.
Power Management Controller (PMC)
24.1
Description
The Power Management Controller (PMC) optimizes power consumption by controlling all system and user
peripheral clocks. The PMC enables/disables the clock inputs to many of the peripherals and the ARM Processor.
The Power Management Controller provides the following clocks:
24.2
MCK, the Master Clock, programmable from a few hundred Hz to the maximum operating frequency of the
device. It is available to the modules running permanently, such as the AIC and the Memory Controller.
Processor Clock (PCK), must be switched off when entering processor in Idle Mode.
Peripheral Clocks, typically MCK, provided to the embedded peripherals (USART, SSC, SPI, TWI, TC, MCI,
etc.) and independently controllable. In order to reduce the number of clock names in a product, the
Peripheral Clocks are named MCK in the product datasheet.
UHP Clock (UHPCK), required by USB Host Port operations.
Programmable Clock Outputs can be selected from the clocks provided by the clock generator and driven on
the PCKx pins.
Master Clock Controller
The Master Clock Controller provides selection and division of the Master Clock (MCK). MCK is the clock provided
to all the peripherals and the memory controller.
The Master Clock is selected from one of the clocks provided by the Clock Generator. Selecting the Slow Clock
provides a Slow Clock signal to the whole device. Selecting the Main Clock saves power consumption of the PLLs.
The Master Clock Controller is made up of a clock selector and a prescaler. It also contains a Master Clock divider
which allows the processor clock to be faster than the Master Clock.
The Master Clock selection is made by writing the CSS field (Clock Source Selection) in PMC_MCKR (Master
Clock Register). The prescaler supports the division by a power of 2 of the selected clock between 1 and 64. The
PRES field in PMC_MCKR programs the prescaler. The Master Clock divider can be programmed through the
MDIV field in PMC_MCKR.
Each time PMC_MCKR is written to define a new Master Clock, the MCKRDY bit is cleared in PMC_SR. It reads 0
until the Master Clock is established. Then, the MCKRDY bit is set and can trigger an interrupt to the processor.
This feature is useful when switching from a high-speed clock to a lower one to inform the software when the
change is actually done.
Figure 24-1.
Master Clock Controller
PMC_MCKR
CSS
PMC_MCKR
PRES
PMC_MCKR
MDIV
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLACK
Master Clock
Prescaler
Master
Clock
Divider
MCK
PLLBCK
To the Processor
Clock Controller (PCK)
252
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.3
Processor Clock Controller
The PMC features a Processor Clock Controller (PCK) that implements the Processor Idle Mode. The Processor
Clock can be disabled by writing the System Clock Disable Register (PMC_SCDR). The status of this clock (at
least for debug purposes) can be read in the System Clock Status Register (PMC_SCSR).
The Processor Clock PCK is enabled after a reset and is automatically re-enabled by any enabled interrupt. The
Processor Idle Mode is achieved by disabling the Processor Clock and entering Wait for Interrupt Mode. The
Processor Clock is automatically re-enabled by any enabled fast or normal interrupt, or by the reset of the product.
Note:
The ARM Wait for Interrupt mode is entered with CP15 coprocessor operation. Refer to the Atmel
application note Optimizing Power Consumption of AT91SAM9261-based Systems, literature number
6217.
When the Processor Clock is disabled, the current instruction is finished before the clock is stopped, but this does
not prevent data transfers from other masters of the system bus.
24.4
USB Clock Controller
The USB Source Clock is always generated from the PLL B output. If using the USB, the user must program the
PLL to generate a 48 MHz, a 96 MHz or a 192 MHz signal with an accuracy of ±0.25% depending on the USBDIV
bit in CKGR_PLLBR (see Figure 24-2).
When the PLL B output is stable, i.e., the LOCKB is set:
The USB host clock can be enabled by setting the UHP bit in PMC_SCER. To save power on this peripheral
when it is not used, the user can set the UHP bit in PMC_SCDR. The UHP bit in PMC_SCSR gives the
activity of this clock. The USB host port require both the 12/48 MHz signal and the Master Clock. The Master
Clock may be controlled via the Master Clock Controller.
Figure 24-2.
USB Clock Controller
USBDIV
USB
Source
Clock
UDP Clock (UDPCK)
Divider
/1,/2,/4
UDP
UHP Clock (UHPCK)
UHP
24.5
Peripheral Clock Controller
The Power Management Controller controls the clocks of each embedded peripheral by the way of the Peripheral
Clock Controller. The user can individually enable and disable the Master Clock on the peripherals by writing into
the Peripheral Clock Enable (PMC_PCER) and Peripheral Clock Disable (PMC_PCDR) registers. The status of
the peripheral clock activity can be read in the Peripheral Clock Status Register (PMC_PCSR).
When a peripheral clock is disabled, the clock is immediately stopped. The peripheral clocks are automatically
disabled after a reset.
In order to stop a peripheral, it is recommended that the system software wait until the peripheral has executed its
last programmed operation before disabling the clock. This is to avoid data corruption or erroneous behavior of the
system.
The bit number within the Peripheral Clock Control registers (PMC_PCER, PMC_PCDR, and PMC_PCSR) is the
Peripheral Identifier defined at the product level. Generally, the bit number corresponds to the interrupt source
number assigned to the peripheral.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
253
24.6
Programmable Clock Output Controller
The PMC controls two signals to be output on external pins PCKx. Each signal can be independently programmed
via the PMC_PCKx registers.
PCKx can be independently selected between the Slow clock, the PLL A output, the PLL B output and the main
clock by writing the CSS field in PMC_PCKx. Each output signal can also be divided by a power of 2 between 1
and 64 by writing the PRES (Prescaler) field in PMC_PCKx.
Each output signal can be enabled and disabled by writing 1 in the corresponding bit, PCKx of PMC_SCER and
PMC_SCDR, respectively. Status of the active programmable output clocks are given in the PCKx bits of
PMC_SCSR (System Clock Status Register).
Moreover, like the PCK, a status bit in PMC_SR indicates that the Programmable Clock is actually what has been
programmed in the Programmable Clock registers.
As the Programmable Clock Controller does not manage with glitch prevention when switching clocks, it is strongly
recommended to disable the Programmable Clock before any configuration change and to re-enable it after the
change is actually performed.
24.7
Programming Sequence
1.
Enabling the Main Oscillator:
The main oscillator is enabled by setting the MOSCEN field in the CKGR_MOR. In some cases it may be
advantageous to define a start-up time. This can be achieved by writing a value in the OSCOUNT field in the
CKGR_MOR.
Once this register has been correctly configured, the user must wait for MOSCS field in the PMC_SR to be
set. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting the interrupt line to be raised if the
associated interrupt to MOSCS has been enabled in the PMC_IER.
Code Example:
write_register(CKGR_MOR,0x00000701)
Start Up Time = 8 * OSCOUNT / SLCK = 56 Slow Clock Cycles.
So, the main oscillator will be enabled (MOSCS bit set) after 56 Slow Clock Cycles.
2.
Checking the Main Oscillator Frequency (Optional):
In some situations the user may need an accurate measure of the main oscillator frequency. This measure
can be accomplished via the CKGR_MCFR.
Once the MAINRDY field is set in CKGR_MCFR, the user may read the MAINF field in CKGR_MCFR. This
provides the number of main clock cycles within sixteen slow clock cycles.
3.
Setting PLL A and divider A:
All parameters necessary to configure PLL A and divider A are located in the CKGR_PLLAR.
It is important to note that Bit 29 must always be set to 1 when programming the CKGR_PLLAR.
The DIVA field is used to control the divider A itself. The user can program a value between 0 and 255.
Divider A output is divider A input divided by DIVA. By default, DIVA parameter is set to 0 which means that
divider A is turned off.
The OUTA field is used to select the PLL A output frequency range.
The MULA field is the PLL A multiplier factor. This parameter can be programmed between 0 and 2047. If
MULA is set to 0, PLL A will be turned off. Otherwise PLL A output frequency is PLL A input frequency
multiplied by (MULA + 1).
254
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
The PLLACOUNT field specifies the number of slow clock cycles before LOCKA bit is set in the PMC_SR
after CKGR_PLLAR has been written.
Once CKGR_PLLAR has been written, the user is obliged to wait for the LOCKA bit to be set in the
PMC_SR. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting the interrupt line to be raised if
the associated interrupt to LOCKA has been enabled in the PMC_IER.
All parameters in CKGR_PLLAR can be programmed in a single write operation. If at some stage one of the
following parameters, SRCA, MULA, DIVA is modified, LOCKA bit will go low to indicate that PLL A is not
ready yet. When PLL A is locked, LOCKA will be set again. User has to wait for LOCKA bit to be set before
using the PLL A output clock.
Code Example:
write_register(CKGR_PLLAR,0x20030605)
PLL A and divider A are enabled. PLL A input clock is main clock divided by 5. PLL An output clock is PLL A
input clock multiplied by 4. Once CKGR_PLLAR has been written, LOCKA bit will be set after six slow clock
cycles.
4.
Setting PLL B and divider B:
All parameters needed to configure PLL B and divider B are located in the CKGR_PLLBR.
The DIVB field is used to control divider B itself. A value between 0 and 255 can be programmed. Divider B
output is divider B input divided by DIVB parameter. By default DIVB parameter is set to 0 which means that
divider B is turned off.
The OUTB field is used to select the PLL B output frequency range.
The MULB field is the PLL B multiplier factor. This parameter can be programmed between 0 and 2047. If
MULB is set to 0, PLL B will be turned off, otherwise the PLL B output frequency is PLL B input frequency
multiplied by (MULB + 1).
The PLLBCOUNT field specifies the number of slow clock cycles before LOCKB bit is set in the PMC_SR
after CKGR_PLLBR has been written.
Once the PMC_PLLB register has been written, the user must wait for the LOCKB bit to be set in the
PMC_SR. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting the interrupt line to be raised if
the associated interrupt to LOCKB has been enabled in the PMC_IER. All parameters in CKGR_PLLBR can
be programmed in a single write operation. If at some stage one of the following parameters, MULB, DIVB is
modified, LOCKB bit will go low to indicate that PLL B is not ready yet. When PLL B is locked, LOCKB will be
set again. The user is constrained to wait for LOCKB bit to be set before using the PLL A output clock.
The USBDIV field is used to control the additional divider by 1, 2 or 4, which generates the USB clock(s).
Code Example:
write_register(CKGR_PLLBR,0x00040805)
If PLL B and divider B are enabled, the PLL B input clock is the main clock. PLL B output clock is PLL B input
clock multiplied by 5. Once CKGR_PLLBR has been written, LOCKB bit will be set after eight slow clock
cycles.
5.
Selection of Master Clock and Processor Clock
The Master Clock and the Processor Clock are configurable via the PMC_MCKR.
The CSS field is used to select the Master Clock divider source. By default, the selected clock source is slow
clock.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
255
The PRES field is used to control the Master Clock prescaler. The user can choose between different values
(1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Master Clock output is prescaler input divided by PRES parameter. By default, PRES
parameter is set to 1 which means that master clock is equal to slow clock.
The MDIV field is used to control the Master Clock prescaler. It is possible to choose between different
values (0, 1, 2). The Master Clock output is Processor Clock divided by 1, 2 or 4, depending on the value
programmed in MDIV. By default, MDIV is set to 0, which indicates that the Processor Clock is equal to the
Master Clock.
Once the PMC_MCKR has been written, the user must wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if the
associated interrupt to MCKRDY has been enabled in the PMC_IER.
The PMC_MCKR must not be programmed in a single write operation. The preferred programming
sequence for the PMC_MCKR is as follows:
If a new value for CSS field corresponds to PLL Clock,
̶
Program the PRES field in the PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
̶
Program the CSS field in the PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
If a new value for CSS field corresponds to Main Clock or Slow Clock,
̶
̶
Program the CSS field in the PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
̶
Program the PRES field in the PMC_MCKR.
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
If at some stage one of the following parameters, CSS or PRES, is modified, the MCKRDY bit will go low to
indicate that the Master Clock and the Processor Clock are not ready yet. The user must wait for MCKRDY
bit to be set again before using the Master and Processor Clocks.
Note:
IF PLLx clock was selected as the Master Clock and the user decides to modify it by writing in CKGR_PLLR
(CKGR_PLLAR or CKGR_PLLBR), the MCKRDY flag will go low while PLL is unlocked. Once PLL is locked again,
LOCK (LOCKA or LOCKB) goes high and MCKRDY is set.
While PLLA is unlocked, the Master Clock selection is automatically changed to Slow Clock. While PLLB is unlocked,
the Master Clock selection is automatically changed to Main Clock. For further information, see Section 24.8.2. “Clock
Switching Waveforms” on page 259.
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_MCKR,0x00000001)
wait (MCKRDY=1)
write_register(PMC_MCKR,0x00000011)
wait (MCKRDY=1)
The Master Clock is main clock divided by 16.
The Processor Clock is the Master Clock.
6.
Selection of Programmable clocks
Programmable clocks are controlled via registers; PMC_SCER, PMC_SCDR and PMC_SCSR.
Programmable clocks can be enabled and/or disabled via the PMC_SCER and PMC_SCDR registers.
Depending on the system used, two Programmable clocks can be enabled or disabled. The PMC_SCSR
256
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
provides a clear indication as to which Programmable clock is enabled. By default all Programmable clocks
are disabled.
PMC_PCKx registers are used to configure Programmable clocks.
The CSS field is used to select the Programmable clock divider source. Four clock options are available:
main clock, slow clock, PLLACK, PLLBCK. By default, the clock source selected is slow clock.
The PRES field is used to control the Programmable clock prescaler. It is possible to choose between
different values (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Programmable clock output is prescaler input divided by PRES
parameter. By default, the PRES parameter is set to 1 which means that master clock is equal to slow clock.
Once the PMC_PCKx register has been programmed, The corresponding Programmable clock must be
enabled and the user is constrained to wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set in the PMC_SR. This can be done
either by polling the status register or by waiting the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to
PCKRDYx has been enabled in the PMC_IER. All parameters in PMC_PCKx can be programmed in a single
write operation.
If the CSS and PRES parameters are to be modified, the corresponding Programmable clock must be
disabled first. The parameters can then be modified. Once this has been done, the user must re-enable the
Programmable clock and wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set.
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_PCK0,0x00000015)
Programmable clock 0 is main clock divided by 32.
7.
Enabling Peripheral Clocks
Once all of the previous steps have been completed, the peripheral clocks can be enabled and/or disabled
via registers PMC_PCER and PMC_PCDR.
Depending on the system used, 17 peripheral clocks can be enabled or disabled. The PMC_PCSR provides
a clear view as to which peripheral clock is enabled.
Note:
Each enabled peripheral clock corresponds to Master Clock.
Code Examples:
write_register(PMC_PCER,0x00000110)
Peripheral clocks 4 and 8 are enabled.
write_register(PMC_PCDR,0x00000010)
Peripheral clock 4 is disabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
257
24.8
Clock Switching Details
24.8.1 Master Clock Switching Timings
Table 24-1 and Table 24-2 give the worst case timings required for the Master Clock to switch from one selected
clock to another one. This is in the event that the prescaler is deactivated. When the prescaler is activated, an
additional time of 64 clock cycles of the new selected clock has to be added.
Table 24-1.
Clock Switching Timings (Worst Case)
From
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
–
4 x SLCK +
2.5 x Main Clock
0.5 x Main Clock +
4.5 x SLCK
–
3 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK
0.5 x Main Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK +
2.5 x PLLx Clock
2.5 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
2.5 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
To
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
Notes:
1.
2.
3 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
1 x Main Clock
PLL designates either the PLL A or the PLL B Clock.
PLLCOUNT designates either PLLACOUNT or PLLBCOUNT.
Table 24-2.
Clock Switching Timings Between Two PLLs (Worst Case)
From
PLLA Clock
PLLB Clock
PLLA Clock
2.5 x PLLA Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLACOUNT x SLCK
3 x PLLA Clock +
4 x SLCK +
1.5 x PLLA Clock
PLLB Clock
3 x PLLB Clock +
4 x SLCK +
1.5 x PLLB Clock
2.5 x PLLB Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLBCOUNT x SLCK
To
258
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.8.2 Clock Switching Waveforms
Figure 24-3.
Switch Master Clock from Slow Clock to PLL Clock
Slow Clock
PLL Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
Figure 24-4.
Switch Master Clock from Main Clock to Slow Clock
Slow Clock
Main Clock
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
259
Figure 24-5.
Change PLLA Programming
Slow Clock
PLLA Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Slow Clock
Write CKGR_PLLAR
Figure 24-6.
Change PLLB Programming
Main Clock
PLLB Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Main Clock
Write CKGR_PLLBR
260
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 24-7.
Programmable Clock Output Programming
PLL Clock
PCKRDY
PCKx Output
Write PMC_PCKx
Write PMC_SCER
Write PMC_SCDR
PLL Clock is selected
PCKx is enabled
PCKx is disabled
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
261
24.9
Power Management Controller (PMC) User Interface
Table 24-3.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0000
System Clock Enable Register
PMC_SCER
Write-only
–
0x0004
System Clock Disable Register
PMC_SCDR
Write-only
–
0x0008
System Clock Status Register
PMC _SCSR
Read-only
0x03
0x000C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0010
Peripheral Clock Enable Register
PMC _PCER
Write-only
–
0x0014
Peripheral Clock Disable Register
PMC_PCDR
Write-only
–
0x0018
Peripheral Clock Status Register
PMC_PCSR
Read-only
0x0
0x001C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0020
Main Oscillator Register
CKGR_MOR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0024
Main Clock Frequency Register
CKGR_MCFR
Read-only
0x0
0x0028
PLL A Register
CKGR_PLLAR
ReadWrite
0x3F00
0x002C
PLL B Register
CKGR_PLLBR
ReadWrite
0x3F00
0x0030
Master Clock Register
PMC_MCKR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0038
Reserved
–
–
–
0x003C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
Programmable Clock 0 Register
PMC_PCK0
Read/Write
0x0
0x0044
Programmable Clock 1 Register
PMC_PCK1
Read/Write
0x0
...
...
0x0060
Interrupt Enable Register
PMC_IER
Write-only
–
0x0064
Interrupt Disable Register
PMC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0068
Status Register
PMC_SR
Read-only
0x08
0x006C
Interrupt Mask Register
PMC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
PLL Charge Pump Current Register
PMC_PLLICPR
Read/Write
–
Reserved
–
–
–
...
0x0070–0x007C
0x0080
0x0084–0x00FC
262
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
...
...
24.9.1 PMC System Clock Enable Register
Name:
PMC_SCER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
UHP
–
–
–
–
–
–
• UHP: USB Host Port Clock Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the 12 and 48 MHz clock of the USB Host Port.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the 48 MHz clock of the USB Device Port.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
263
24.9.2 PMC System Clock Disable Register
Name:
PMC_SCDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
UHP
–
–
–
–
–
PCK
• PCK: Processor Clock Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Processor clock. This is used to enter the processor in Idle Mode.
• UHP: USB Host Port Clock Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the 12 and 48 MHz clock of the USB Host Port.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the 48 MHz clock of the USB Device Port.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
264
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.3 PMC System Clock Status Register
Name:
PMC_SCSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
UHP
–
–
–
–
–
PCK
• PCK: Processor Clock Status
0: The Processor clock is disabled.
1: The Processor clock is enabled.
• UHP: USB Host Port Clock Status
0: The 12 and 48 MHz clock (UHPCK) of the USB Host Port is disabled.
1: The 12 and 48 MHz clock (UHPCK) of the USB Host Port is enabled.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Status
0: The 48 MHz clock (UDPCK) of the USB Device Port is disabled.
1: The 48 MHz clock (UDPCK) of the USB Device Port is enabled.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Status
0: The corresponding Programmable Clock output is disabled.
1: The corresponding Programmable Clock output is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
265
24.9.4 PMC Peripheral Clock Enable Register
Name:
PMC_PCER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
-
-
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding peripheral clock.
Note: PID2 to PID31 refer to identifiers as defined in Section 8.2 “Peripheral Identifiers”.
Note: Programming the control bits of the Peripheral ID that are not implemented has no effect on the behavior of the PMC.
266
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.5 PMC Peripheral Clock Disable Register
Name:
PMC_PCDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
-
-
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding peripheral clock.
Note: PID2 to PID31 refer to identifiers as defined in Section 8.2 “Peripheral Identifiers”.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
267
24.9.6 PMC Peripheral Clock Status Register
Name:
PMC_PCSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
–
–
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Status
0: The corresponding peripheral clock is disabled.
1: The corresponding peripheral clock is enabled.
Note: PID2 to PID31 refer to identifiers as defined in Section 8.2 “Peripheral Identifiers”.
268
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.7 PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register
Name:
CKGR_MOR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
OSCBYPASS
0
MOSCEN
OSCOUNT
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• MOSCEN: Main Oscillator Enable
A crystal must be connected between XIN and XOUT.
0: The Main Oscillator is disabled.
1: The Main Oscillator is enabled. OSCBYPASS must be set to 0.
When MOSCEN is set, the MOSCS flag is set once the Main Oscillator startup time is achieved.
• OSCBYPASS: Oscillator Bypass
0: No effect.
1: The Main Oscillator is bypassed. MOSCEN must be set to 0. An external clock must be connected on XIN.
When OSCBYPASS is set, the MOSCS flag in PMC_SR is automatically set.
Clearing MOSCEN and OSCBYPASS bits allows resetting the MOSCS flag.
• OSCOUNT: Main Oscillator Start-up Time
Specifies the number of Slow Clock cycles multiplied by 8 for the Main Oscillator start-up time.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
269
24.9.8 PMC Clock Generator Main Clock Frequency Register
Name:
CKGR_MCFR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
MAINRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
MAINF
7
6
5
4
MAINF
• MAINF: Main Clock Frequency
Gives the number of Main Clock cycles within 16 Slow Clock periods.
• MAINRDY: Main Clock Ready
0: MAINF value is not valid or the Main Oscillator is disabled.
1: The Main Oscillator has been enabled previously and MAINF value is available.
270
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.9 PMC Clock Generator PLL A Register
Name:
CKGR_PLLAR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
1
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
25
MULA
24
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
MULA
15
14
13
12
11
OUTA
7
PLLACOUNT
6
5
4
3
DIVA
Possible limitations on PLL A input frequencies and multiplier factors should be checked before using the PMC.
Warning: Bit 29 must always be set to 1 when programming the CKGR_PLLAR.
• DIVA: Divider A
Value
Divider Selected
0
Divider output is 0
1
Divider is bypassed
2–255
Divider output is the Main Clock divided by DIVA.
• PLLACOUNT: PLL A Counter
Specifies the number of Slow Clock cycles before the LOCKA bit is set in PMC_SR after CKGR_PLLAR is written.
• OUTA: PLL A Clock Frequency Range
To optimize clock performance, this field must be programmed as specified in Section 39.6.7 “PLL Characteristics”.
• MULA: PLL A Multiplier
0: The PLL A is deactivated.
1 up to 2047 = The PLL A Clock frequency is the PLL A input frequency multiplied by MULA + 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
271
24.9.10 PMC Clock Generator PLL B Register
Name:
CKGR_PLLBR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
23
22
21
28
USBDIV
20
27
–
26
25
MULB
24
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
MULB
15
14
13
12
11
OUTB
7
PLLBCOUNT
6
5
4
3
DIVB
Possible limitations on PLL B input frequencies and multiplier factors should be checked before using the PMC.
• DIVB: Divider B
Value
Divider Selected
0
Divider output is 0
1
Divider is bypassed
2–255
Divider output is the selected clock divided by DIVB.
• PLLBCOUNT: PLL B Counter
Specifies the number of slow clock cycles before the LOCKB bit is set in PMC_SR after CKGR_PLLBR is written.
• OUTB: PLLB Clock Frequency Range
To optimize clock performance, this field must be programmed as specified in Section 39.6.7 “PLL Characteristics”.
• MULB: PLL Multiplier
0: The PLL B is deactivated.
1 up to 2047 = The PLL B Clock frequency is the PLL B input frequency multiplied by MULB + 1.
• USBDIV: Divider for USB Clock
Value
Divider for USB Clock(s)
0
0
Divider output is PLL B clock output.
0
1
Divider output is PLL B clock output divided by 2.
1
0
Divider output is PLL B clock output divided by 4.
1
1
Reserved.
272
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.11 PMC Master Clock Register
Name:
PMC_MCKR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
7
6
5
–
–
–
PRES
8
MDIV
1
0
CSS
• CSS: Master Clock Selection
Value
Clock Source Selection
0
0
Slow Clock is selected
0
1
Main Clock is selected
1
0
PLL A Clock is selected
1
1
PLL B Clock is selected
• PRES: Processor Clock Prescaler
Value
Processor Clock
0
0
0
Selected clock
0
0
1
Selected clock divided by 2
0
1
0
Selected clock divided by 4
0
1
1
Selected clock divided by 8
1
0
0
Selected clock divided by 16
1
0
1
Selected clock divided by 32
1
1
0
Selected clock divided by 64
1
1
1
Reserved
• MDIV: Master Clock Division
Value
Master Clock Division
0
0
Master Clock is Processor Clock.
0
1
Master Clock is Processor Clock divided by 2.
1
0
Master Clock is Processor Clock divided by 4.
1
1
Reserved.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
273
24.9.12 PMC Programmable Clock Register
Name:
PMC_PCKx
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
–
–
–
• CSS: Master Clock Selection
Value
Clock Source Selection
0
0
Slow Clock is selected
0
1
Main Clock is selected
1
0
PLL A Clock is selected
1
1
PLL B Clock is selected
• PRES: Programmable Clock Prescaler
Value
Programmable Clock
0
0
0
Selected clock
0
0
1
Selected clock divided by 2
0
1
0
Selected clock divided by 4
0
1
1
Selected clock divided by 8
1
0
0
Selected clock divided by 16
1
0
1
Selected clock divided by 32
1
1
0
Selected clock divided by 64
1
1
1
Reserved
274
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
PRES
0
CSS
24.9.13 PMC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PMC_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCKB
LOCKA
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Enable
• LOCKA: PLL A Lock Interrupt Enable
• LOCKB: PLL B Lock Interrupt Enable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Enable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
275
24.9.14 PMC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PMC_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCKB
LOCKA
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Disable
• LOCKA: PLL A Lock Interrupt Disable
• LOCKB: PLL B Lock Interrupt Disable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Disable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
276
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.15 PMC Status Register
Name:
PMC_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OSC_SEL
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCKB
LOCKA
MOSCS
• MOSCS: MOSCS Flag Status
0: Main oscillator is not stabilized.
1: Main oscillator is stabilized.
• LOCKA: PLL A Lock Status
0: PLL A is not locked
1: PLL A is locked.
• LOCKB: PLL B Lock Status
0: PLL B is not locked.
1: PLL B is locked.
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Status
0: Master Clock is not ready.
1: Master Clock is ready.
• OSC_SEL: Slow Clock Oscillator Selection
0: Internal slow clock RC oscillator.
1: External slow clock 32 kHz oscillator.
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready Status
0: Programmable Clock x is not ready.
1: Programmable Clock x is ready.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
277
24.9.16 PMC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PMC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCKB
LOCKA
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Mask
• LOCKA: PLL A Lock Interrupt Mask
• LOCKB: PLL B Lock Interrupt Mask
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Mask
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
278
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24.9.17 PLL Charge Pump Current Register
Name:
PMC_PLLICPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ICPPLLB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ICPPLLA
• ICPPLLA: Charge Pump Current
Must be set to 1.
• ICPPLLB: Charge Pump Current
Must be set to 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
279
25.
Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)
25.1
Description
The Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) is an 8-level priority, individually maskable, vectored interrupt controller,
providing handling of up to thirty-two interrupt sources. It is designed to substantially reduce the software and realtime overhead in handling internal and external interrupts.
The AIC drives the nFIQ (fast interrupt request) and the nIRQ (standard interrupt request) inputs of an ARM
processor. Inputs of the AIC are either internal peripheral interrupts or external interrupts coming from the
product's pins.
The 8-level Priority Controller allows the user to define the priority for each interrupt source, thus permitting higher
priority interrupts to be serviced even if a lower priority interrupt is being treated.
Internal interrupt sources can be programmed to be level sensitive or edge triggered. External interrupt sources
can be programmed to be positive-edge or negative-edge triggered or high-level or low-level sensitive.
The fast forcing feature redirects any internal or external interrupt source to provide a fast interrupt rather than a
normal interrupt.
25.2
Embedded Characteristics
Controls the interrupt lines (nIRQ and nFIQ) of the ARM Processor
Thirty-two individually maskable and vectored interrupt sources
̶
Source 0 is reserved for the Fast Interrupt Input (FIQ)
̶
Source 1 is reserved for system peripherals (PIT, RTT, PMC, DBGU, etc.)
̶
Programmable Edge-triggered or Level-sensitive Internal Sources
̶
Programmable Positive/Negative Edge-triggered or High/Low Level-sensitive
Three External Sources plus the Fast Interrupt signal
8-level Priority Controller
̶
Drives the Normal Interrupt of the processor
̶
Handles priority of the interrupt sources 1 to 31
̶
Higher priority interrupts can be served during service of lower priority interrupt
Vectoring
̶
Optimizes Interrupt Service Routine Branch and Execution
̶
One 32-bit Vector Register per interrupt source
̶
Interrupt Vector Register reads the corresponding current Interrupt Vector
Protect Mode
̶
Easy debugging by preventing automatic operations when protect models are enabled
Fast Forcing
̶
280
Permits redirecting any normal interrupt source on the Fast Interrupt of the processor
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.3
Block Diagram
Figure 25-1.
Block Diagram
FIQ
AIC
ARM
Processor
IRQ0-IRQn
Up to
Thirty-two
Sources
Embedded
PeripheralEE
Embedded
nFIQ
nIRQ
Peripheral
Embedded
Peripheral
APB
25.4
Application Block Diagram
Figure 25-2.
Description of the Application Block
OS-based Applications
Standalone
Applications
OS Drivers
RTOS Drivers
Hard Real Time Tasks
General OS Interrupt Handler
Advanced Interrupt Controller
External Peripherals
(External Interrupts)
Embedded Peripherals
25.5
AIC Detailed Block Diagram
Figure 25-3.
AIC Detailed Block Diagram
Advanced Interrupt Controller
ARM
Processor
FIQ
PIO
Controller
Fast
Interrupt
Controller
External
Source
Input
Stage
nFIQ
nIRQ
IRQ0-IRQn
Embedded
Peripherals
Interrupt
Priority
Controller
Fast
Forcing
PIOIRQ
Internal
Source
Input
Stage
Processor
Clock
Power
Management
Controller
User Interface
Wake Up
APB
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
281
25.6
I/O Line Description
Table 25-1.
25.7
I/O Line Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
Type
FIQ
Fast Interrupt
Input
IRQ0–IRQn
Interrupt 0–Interrupt n
Input
Product Dependencies
25.7.1 I/O Lines
The interrupt signals FIQ and IRQ0 to IRQn are normally multiplexed through the PIO controllers. Depending on
the features of the PIO controller used in the product, the pins must be programmed in accordance with their
assigned interrupt function. This is not applicable when the PIO controller used in the product is transparent on the
input path.
25.7.2 Power Management
The Advanced Interrupt Controller is continuously clocked. The Power Management Controller has no effect on
the Advanced Interrupt Controller behavior.
The assertion of the Advanced Interrupt Controller outputs, either nIRQ or nFIQ, wakes up the ARM processor
while it is in Idle Mode. The General Interrupt Mask feature enables the AIC to wake up the processor without
asserting the interrupt line of the processor, thus providing synchronization of the processor on an event.
25.7.3 Interrupt Sources
The Interrupt Source 0 is always located at FIQ. If the product does not feature an FIQ pin, the Interrupt Source 0
cannot be used.
The Interrupt Source 1 is always located at System Interrupt. This is the result of the OR-wiring of the system
peripheral interrupt lines, such as the System Timer, the Real Time Clock, the Power Management Controller and
the Memory Controller. When a system interrupt occurs, the service routine must first distinguish the cause of the
interrupt. This is performed by reading successively the status registers of the above mentioned system
peripherals.
The interrupt sources 2 to 31 can either be connected to the interrupt outputs of an embedded user peripheral or to
external interrupt lines. The external interrupt lines can be connected directly, or through the PIO Controller.
The PIO Controllers are considered as user peripherals in the scope of interrupt handling. Accordingly, the PIO
Controller interrupt lines are connected to the Interrupt Sources 2 to 31.
The peripheral identification defined at the product level corresponds to the interrupt source number (as well as the
bit number controlling the clock of the peripheral). Consequently, to simplify the description of the functional
operations and the user interface, the interrupt sources are named FIQ, SYS, and PID2 to PID31.
282
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.8
Functional Description
25.8.1 Interrupt Source Control
25.8.1.1 Interrupt Source Mode
The Advanced Interrupt Controller independently programs each interrupt source. The SRCTYPE field of the
corresponding AIC_SMR (Source Mode Register) selects the interrupt condition of each source.
The internal interrupt sources wired on the interrupt outputs of the embedded peripherals can be programmed
either in level-sensitive mode or in edge-triggered mode. The active level of the internal interrupts is not important
for the user.
The external interrupt sources can be programmed either in high level-sensitive or low level-sensitive modes, or in
positive edge-triggered or negative edge-triggered modes.
25.8.1.2 Interrupt Source Enabling
Each interrupt source, including the FIQ in source 0, can be enabled or disabled by using the command registers;
AIC_IECR (Interrupt Enable Command Register) and AIC_IDCR (Interrupt Disable Command Register). This set
of registers conducts enabling or disabling in one instruction. The interrupt mask can be read in the AIC_IMR. A
disabled interrupt does not affect servicing of other interrupts.
25.8.1.3 Interrupt Clearing and Setting
All interrupt sources programmed to be edge-triggered (including the FIQ in source 0) can be individually set or
cleared by writing respectively the AIC_ISCR and AIC_ICCR registers. Clearing or setting interrupt sources
programmed in level-sensitive mode has no effect.
The clear operation is perfunctory, as the software must perform an action to reinitialize the “memorization”
circuitry activated when the source is programmed in edge-triggered mode. However, the set operation is available
for auto-test or software debug purposes. It can also be used to execute an AIC-implementation of a software
interrupt.
The AIC features an automatic clear of the current interrupt when the AIC_IVR (Interrupt Vector Register) is read.
Only the interrupt source being detected by the AIC as the current interrupt is affected by this operation. (See
“Priority Controller” on page 286.) The automatic clear reduces the operations required by the interrupt service
routine entry code to reading the AIC_IVR. Note that the automatic interrupt clear is disabled if the interrupt source
has the Fast Forcing feature enabled as it is considered uniquely as a FIQ source. (For further details, See “Fast
Forcing” on page 290.)
The automatic clear of the interrupt source 0 is performed when AIC_FVR is read.
25.8.1.4 Interrupt Status
For each interrupt, the AIC operation originates in AIC_IPR (Interrupt Pending Register) and its mask in AIC_IMR
(Interrupt Mask Register). AIC_IPR enables the actual activity of the sources, whether masked or not.
The AIC_ISR reads the number of the current interrupt (see “Priority Controller” on page 286) and the register
AIC_CISR gives an image of the signals nIRQ and nFIQ driven on the processor.
Each status referred to above can be used to optimize the interrupt handling of the systems.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
283
25.8.1.5 Internal Interrupt Source Input Stage
Figure 25-4.
Internal Interrupt Source Input Stage
AIC_SMRI
(SRCTYPE)
Level/
Edge
Source i
AIC_IPR
AIC_IMR
Fast Interrupt Controller
or
Priority Controller
Edge
AIC_IECR
Detector
Set Clear
FF
AIC_ISCR
AIC_ICCR
AIC_IDCR
25.8.1.6 External Interrupt Source Input Stage
Figure 25-5.
External Interrupt Source Input Stage
High/Low
AIC_SMRi
SRCTYPE
Level/
Edge
AIC_IPR
AIC_IMR
Source i
Fast Interrupt Controller
or
Priority Controller
AIC_IECR
Pos./Neg.
Edge
Detector
Set
Clear
AIC_ISCR
AIC_ICCR
284
FF
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
AIC_IDCR
25.8.2 Interrupt Latencies
Global interrupt latencies depend on several parameters, including:
The time the software masks the interrupts.
Occurrence, either at the processor level or at the AIC level.
The execution time of the instruction in progress when the interrupt occurs.
The treatment of higher priority interrupts and the resynchronization of the hardware signals.
This section addresses only the hardware resynchronizations. It gives details of the latency times between the
event on an external interrupt leading in a valid interrupt (edge or level) or the assertion of an internal interrupt
source and the assertion of the nIRQ or nFIQ line on the processor. The resynchronization time depends on the
programming of the interrupt source and on its type (internal or external). For the standard interrupt,
resynchronization times are given assuming there is no higher priority in progress.
The PIO Controller multiplexing has no effect on the interrupt latencies of the external interrupt sources.
25.8.2.1 External Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
Figure 25-6.
External Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
MCK
IRQ or FIQ
(Positive Edge)
IRQ or FIQ
(Negative Edge)
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 4 Cycles
nFIQ
Maximum FIQ Latency = 4 Cycles
25.8.2.2 External Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
Figure 25-7.
External Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
MCK
IRQ or FIQ
(High Level)
IRQ or FIQ
(Low Level)
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ
Latency = 3 Cycles
nFIQ
Maximum FIQ
Latency = 3 cycles
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
285
25.8.2.3 Internal Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
Figure 25-8.
Internal Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
MCK
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 4.5 Cycles
Peripheral Interrupt
Becomes Active
25.8.2.4 Internal Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
Figure 25-9.
Internal Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
MCK
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 3.5 Cycles
Peripheral Interrupt
Becomes Active
25.8.3 Normal Interrupt
25.8.3.1 Priority Controller
An 8-level priority controller drives the nIRQ line of the processor, depending on the interrupt conditions occurring
on the interrupt sources 1 to 31 (except for those programmed in Fast Forcing).
Each interrupt source has a programmable priority level of 7 to 0, which is user-definable by writing the PRIOR
field of the corresponding AIC_SMR (Source Mode Register). Level 7 is the highest priority and level 0 the lowest.
As soon as an interrupt condition occurs, as defined by the SRCTYPE field of the AIC_SMR (Source Mode
Register), the nIRQ line is asserted. As a new interrupt condition might have happened on other interrupt sources
since the nIRQ has been asserted, the priority controller determines the current interrupt at the time the AIC_IVR
(Interrupt Vector Register) is read. The read of AIC_IVR is the entry point of the interrupt handling which
allows the AIC to consider that the interrupt has been taken into account by the software.
The current priority level is defined as the priority level of the current interrupt.
If several interrupt sources of equal priority are pending and enabled when the AIC_IVR is read, the interrupt with
the lowest interrupt source number is serviced first.
The nIRQ line can be asserted only if an interrupt condition occurs on an interrupt source with a higher priority. If
an interrupt condition happens (or is pending) during the interrupt treatment in progress, it is delayed until the
software indicates to the AIC the end of the current service by writing the AIC_EOICR (End of Interrupt Command
Register). The write of AIC_EOICR is the exit point of the interrupt handling.
286
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.8.3.2 Interrupt Nesting
The priority controller utilizes interrupt nesting in order for the high priority interrupt to be handled during the
service of lower priority interrupts. This requires the interrupt service routines of the lower interrupts to re-enable
the interrupt at the processor level.
When an interrupt of a higher priority happens during an already occurring interrupt service routine, the nIRQ line
is re-asserted. If the interrupt is enabled at the core level, the current execution is interrupted and the new interrupt
service routine should read the AIC_IVR. At this time, the current interrupt number and its priority level are pushed
into an embedded hardware stack, so that they are saved and restored when the higher priority interrupt servicing
is finished and the AIC_EOICR is written.
The AIC is equipped with an 8-level wide hardware stack in order to support up to eight interrupt nestings pursuant
to having eight priority levels.
25.8.3.3 Interrupt Vectoring
The interrupt handler addresses corresponding to each interrupt source can be stored in the registers AIC_SVR1
to AIC_SVR31 (Source Vector Register 1 to 31). When the processor reads AIC_IVR (Interrupt Vector Register),
the value written into AIC_SVR corresponding to the current interrupt is returned.
This feature offers a way to branch in one single instruction to the handler corresponding to the current interrupt,
as AIC_IVR is mapped at the absolute address 0xFFFF F100 and thus accessible from the ARM interrupt vector at
address 0x0000 0018 through the following instruction:
LDR
PC,[PC,# -&F20]
When the processor executes this instruction, it loads the read value in AIC_IVR in its program counter, thus
branching the execution on the correct interrupt handler.
This feature is often not used when the application is based on an operating system (either real time or not).
Operating systems often have a single entry point for all the interrupts and the first task performed is to discern the
source of the interrupt.
However, it is strongly recommended to port the operating system on AT91SAM products by supporting the
interrupt vectoring. This can be performed by defining all the AIC_SVR of the interrupt source to be handled by the
operating system at the address of its interrupt handler. When doing so, the interrupt vectoring permits a critical
interrupt to transfer the execution on a specific very fast handler and not onto the operating system’s general
interrupt handler. This facilitates the support of hard real-time tasks (input/outputs of voice/audio buffers and
software peripheral handling) to be handled efficiently and independently of the application running under an
operating system.
25.8.3.4 Interrupt Handlers
This section gives an overview of the fast interrupt handling sequence when using the AIC. It is assumed that the
programmer understands the architecture of the ARM processor, and especially the processor interrupt modes
and the associated status bits.
It is assumed that:
1.
The Advanced Interrupt Controller has been programmed, AIC_SVR registers are loaded with
corresponding interrupt service routine addresses and interrupts are enabled.
2.
The instruction at the ARM interrupt exception vector address is required to work with the vectoring
LDR PC, [PC, # -&F20]
When nIRQ is asserted, if the bit “I” of CPSR is 0, the sequence is as follows:
1.
The CPSR is stored in SPSR_irq, the current value of the Program Counter is loaded in the Interrupt link
register (R14_irq) and the Program Counter (R15) is loaded with 0x18. In the following cycle during fetch at
address 0x1C, the ARM core adjusts R14_irq, decrementing it by four.
2.
The ARM core enters Interrupt mode, if it has not already done so.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
287
3.
When the instruction loaded at address 0x18 is executed, the program counter is loaded with the value read
in AIC_IVR. Reading the AIC_IVR has the following effects:
̶
Sets the current interrupt to be the pending and enabled interrupt with the highest priority. The current
level is the priority level of the current interrupt.
̶
De-asserts the nIRQ line on the processor. Even if vectoring is not used, AIC_IVR must be read in
order to de-assert nIRQ.
̶
Automatically clears the interrupt, if it has been programmed to be edge-triggered.
̶
Pushes the current level and the current interrupt number on to the stack.
̶
Returns the value written in the AIC_SVR corresponding to the current interrupt.
4.
The previous step has the effect of branching to the corresponding interrupt service routine. This should start
by saving the link register (R14_irq) and SPSR_IRQ. The link register must be decremented by four when it
is saved if it is to be restored directly into the program counter at the end of the interrupt. For example, the
instruction SUB PC, LR, #4 may be used.
5.
Further interrupts can then be unmasked by clearing the “I” bit in CPSR, allowing re-assertion of the nIRQ to
be taken into account by the core. This can happen if an interrupt with a higher priority than the current
interrupt occurs.
6.
The interrupt handler can then proceed as required, saving the registers that will be used and restoring them
at the end. During this phase, an interrupt of higher priority than the current level will restart the sequence
from step 1.
Note:
If the interrupt is programmed to be level sensitive, the source of the interrupt must be cleared during this phase.
7.
The “I” bit in CPSR must be set in order to mask interrupts before exiting to ensure that the interrupt is
completed in an orderly manner.
8.
The End of Interrupt Command Register (AIC_EOICR) must be written in order to indicate to the AIC that the
current interrupt is finished. This causes the current level to be popped from the stack, restoring the previous
current level if one exists on the stack. If another interrupt is pending, with lower or equal priority than the old
current level but with higher priority than the new current level, the nIRQ line is re-asserted, but the interrupt
sequence does not immediately start because the “I” bit is set in the core. SPSR_irq is restored. Finally, the
saved value of the link register is restored directly into the PC. This has the effect of returning from the
interrupt to whatever was being executed before, and of loading the CPSR with the stored SPSR, masking
or unmasking the interrupts depending on the state saved in SPSR_irq.
Note:
The “I” bit in SPSR is significant. If it is set, it indicates that the ARM core was on the verge of masking an interrupt
when the mask instruction was interrupted. Hence, when SPSR is restored, the mask instruction is completed
(interrupt is masked).
25.8.4 Fast Interrupt
25.8.4.1 Fast Interrupt Source
The interrupt source 0 is the only source which can raise a fast interrupt request to the processor except if fast
forcing is used. The interrupt source 0 is generally connected to a FIQ pin of the product, either directly or through
a PIO Controller.
25.8.4.2 Fast Interrupt Control
The fast interrupt logic of the AIC has no priority controller. The mode of interrupt source 0 is programmed with the
AIC_SMR0 and the field PRIOR of this register is not used even if it reads what has been written. The field
SRCTYPE of AIC_SMR0 enables programming the fast interrupt source to be positive-edge triggered or negativeedge triggered or high-level sensitive or low-level sensitive
Writing 0x1 in the AIC_IECR (Interrupt Enable Command Register) and AIC_IDCR (Interrupt Disable Command
Register) respectively enables and disables the fast interrupt. The bit 0 of AIC_IMR (Interrupt Mask Register)
indicates whether the fast interrupt is enabled or disabled.
288
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.8.4.3 Fast Interrupt Vectoring
The fast interrupt handler address can be stored in AIC_SVR0 (Source Vector Register 0). The value written into
this register is returned when the processor reads AIC_FVR (Fast Vector Register). This offers a way to branch in
one single instruction to the interrupt handler, as AIC_FVR is mapped at the absolute address 0xFFFF F104 and
thus accessible from the ARM fast interrupt vector at address 0x0000 001C through the following instruction:
LDR
PC,[PC,# -&F20]
When the processor executes this instruction it loads the value read in AIC_FVR in its program counter, thus
branching the execution on the fast interrupt handler. It also automatically performs the clear of the fast interrupt
source if it is programmed in edge-triggered mode.
25.8.4.4 Fast Interrupt Handlers
This section gives an overview of the fast interrupt handling sequence when using the AIC. It is assumed that the
programmer understands the architecture of the ARM processor, and especially the processor interrupt modes
and associated status bits.
Assuming that:
1.
The Advanced Interrupt Controller has been programmed, AIC_SVR0 is loaded with the fast interrupt
service routine address, and the interrupt source 0 is enabled.
2.
The Instruction at address 0x1C (FIQ exception vector address) is required to vector the fast interrupt:
LDR PC, [PC, # -&F20]
The user does not need nested fast interrupts.
3.
When nFIQ is asserted, if the bit “F” of CPSR is 0, the sequence is:
1.
The CPSR is stored in SPSR_fiq, the current value of the program counter is loaded in the FIQ link register
(R14_FIQ) and the program counter (R15) is loaded with 0x1C. In the following cycle, during fetch at
address 0x20, the ARM core adjusts R14_fiq, decrementing it by four.
2.
The ARM core enters FIQ mode.
3.
When the instruction loaded at address 0x1C is executed, the program counter is loaded with the value read
in AIC_FVR. Reading the AIC_FVR has effect of automatically clearing the fast interrupt, if it has been
programmed to be edge triggered. In this case only, it de-asserts the nFIQ line on the processor.
4.
The previous step enables branching to the corresponding interrupt service routine. It is not necessary to
save the link register R14_fiq and SPSR_fiq if nested fast interrupts are not needed.
5.
The Interrupt Handler can then proceed as required. It is not necessary to save registers R8 to R13 because
FIQ mode has its own dedicated registers and the user R8 to R13 are banked. The other registers, R0 to R7,
must be saved before being used, and restored at the end (before the next step). Note that if the fast
interrupt is programmed to be level sensitive, the source of the interrupt must be cleared during this phase in
order to de-assert the interrupt source 0.
6.
Finally, the Link Register R14_fiq is restored into the PC after decrementing it by four (with instruction SUB
PC, LR, #4 for example). This has the effect of returning from the interrupt to whatever was being
executed before, loading the CPSR with the SPSR and masking or unmasking the fast interrupt depending
on the state saved in the SPSR.
Note:
The “F” bit in SPSR is significant. If it is set, it indicates that the ARM core was just about to mask FIQ interrupts when
the mask instruction was interrupted. Hence when the SPSR is restored, the interrupted instruction is completed (FIQ
is masked).
Another way to handle the fast interrupt is to map the interrupt service routine at the address of the ARM vector
0x1C. This method does not use the vectoring, so that reading AIC_FVR must be performed at the very beginning
of the handler operation. However, this method saves the execution of a branch instruction.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
289
25.8.4.5 Fast Forcing
The Fast Forcing feature of the advanced interrupt controller provides redirection of any normal Interrupt source on
the fast interrupt controller.
Fast Forcing is enabled or disabled by writing to the Fast Forcing Enable Register (AIC_FFER) and the Fast
Forcing Disable Register (AIC_FFDR). Writing to these registers results in an update of the Fast Forcing Status
Register (AIC_FFSR) that controls the feature for each internal or external interrupt source.
When Fast Forcing is disabled, the interrupt sources are handled as described in the previous pages.
When Fast Forcing is enabled, the edge/level programming and, in certain cases, edge detection of the interrupt
source is still active but the source cannot trigger a normal interrupt to the processor and is not seen by the priority
handler.
If the interrupt source is programmed in level-sensitive mode and an active level is sampled, Fast Forcing results
in the assertion of the nFIQ line to the core.
If the interrupt source is programmed in edge-triggered mode and an active edge is detected, Fast Forcing results
in the assertion of the nFIQ line to the core.
The Fast Forcing feature does not affect the Source 0 pending bit in the Interrupt Pending Register (AIC_IPR).
The FIQ Vector Register (AIC_FVR) reads the contents of the Source Vector Register 0 (AIC_SVR0), whatever
the source of the fast interrupt may be. The read of the FVR does not clear the Source 0 when the fast forcing
feature is used and the interrupt source should be cleared by writing to the Interrupt Clear Command Register
(AIC_ICCR).
All enabled and pending interrupt sources that have the fast forcing feature enabled and that are programmed in
edge-triggered mode must be cleared by writing to the Interrupt Clear Command Register. In doing so, they are
cleared independently and thus lost interrupts are prevented.
The read of AIC_IVR does not clear the source that has the fast forcing feature enabled.
The source 0, reserved to the fast interrupt, continues operating normally and becomes one of the Fast Interrupt
sources.
Figure 25-10. Fast Forcing
Source 0 _ FIQ
AIC_IPR
Input Stage
Automatic Clear
AIC_IMR
nFIQ
Read FVR if Fast Forcing is
disabled on Sources 1 to 31.
AIC_FFSR
Source n
AIC_IPR
Input Stage
Priority
Manager
Automatic Clear
AIC_IMR
Read IVR if Source n is the current interrupt
and if Fast Forcing is disabled on Source n.
290
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
nIRQ
25.8.5 Protect Mode
The Protect Mode permits reading the Interrupt Vector Register without performing the associated automatic
operations. This is necessary when working with a debug system. When a debugger, working either with a Debug
Monitor or the ARM processor's ICE, stops the applications and updates the opened windows, it might read the
AIC User Interface and thus the IVR. This has undesirable consequences:
If an enabled interrupt with a higher priority than the current one is pending, it is stacked.
If there is no enabled pending interrupt, the spurious vector is returned.
In either case, an End of Interrupt command is necessary to acknowledge and to restore the context of the AIC.
This operation is generally not performed by the debug system as the debug system would become strongly
intrusive and cause the application to enter an undesired state.
This is avoided by using the Protect Mode. Writing DBGM in AIC_DCR (Debug Control Register) at 0x1 enables
the Protect Mode.
When the Protect Mode is enabled, the AIC performs interrupt stacking only when a write access is performed on
the AIC_IVR. Therefore, the Interrupt Service Routines must write (arbitrary data) to the AIC_IVR just after reading
it. The new context of the AIC, including the value of the Interrupt Status Register (AIC_ISR), is updated with the
current interrupt only when AIC_IVR is written.
An AIC_IVR read on its own (e.g., by a debugger) modifies neither the AIC context nor the AIC_ISR. Extra
AIC_IVR reads perform the same operations. However, it is recommended to not stop the processor between the
read and the write of AIC_IVR of the interrupt service routine to make sure the debugger does not modify the AIC
context.
To summarize, in normal operating mode, the read of AIC_IVR performs the following operations within the AIC:
1. Calculates active interrupt (higher than current or spurious)
2. Determines and returns the vector of the active interrupt
3.
Memorizes the interrupt
4.
Pushes the current priority level onto the internal stack
5.
Acknowledges the interrupt
However, while the Protect Mode is activated, only operations 1 to 3 are performed when AIC_IVR is read.
Operations 4 and 5 are only performed by the AIC when AIC_IVR is written.
Software that has been written and debugged using the Protect Mode runs correctly in Normal Mode without
modification. However, in Normal Mode the AIC_IVR write has no effect and can be removed to optimize the code.
25.8.6 Spurious Interrupt
The Advanced Interrupt Controller features protection against spurious interrupts. A spurious interrupt is defined
as being the assertion of an interrupt source long enough for the AIC to assert the nIRQ, but no longer present
when AIC_IVR is read. This is most prone to occur when:
An external interrupt source is programmed in level-sensitive mode and an active level occurs for only a
short time.
An internal interrupt source is programmed in level sensitive and the output signal of the corresponding
embedded peripheral is activated for a short time. (As in the case for the Watchdog.)
An interrupt occurs just a few cycles before the software begins to mask it, thus resulting in a pulse on the
interrupt source.
The AIC detects a spurious interrupt at the time the AIC_IVR is read while no enabled interrupt source is pending.
When this happens, the AIC returns the value stored by the programmer in AIC_SPU (Spurious Vector Register).
The programmer must store the address of a spurious interrupt handler in AIC_SPU as part of the application, to
enable an as fast as possible return to the normal execution flow. This handler writes in AIC_EOICR and performs
a return from interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
291
25.8.7 General Interrupt Mask
The AIC features a General Interrupt Mask bit to prevent interrupts from reaching the processor. Both the nIRQ
and the nFIQ lines are driven to their inactive state if the bit GMSK in AIC_DCR (Debug Control Register) is set.
However, this mask does not prevent waking up the processor if it has entered Idle Mode. This function facilitates
synchronizing the processor on a next event and, as soon as the event occurs, performs subsequent operations
without having to handle an interrupt. It is strongly recommended to use this mask with caution.
292
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9
Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) User Interface
25.9.1 Base Address
The AIC is mapped at the address 0xFFFF F000. It has a total 4-Kbyte addressing space. This permits the
vectoring feature, as the PC-relative load/store instructions of the ARM processor support only a ± 4-Kbyte offset.
25.9.2 Register Mapping
Table 25-2.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0000
Source Mode Register 0
AIC_SMR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x04
Source Mode Register 1
AIC_SMR1
Read/Write
0x0
...
...
...
...
0x7C
Source Mode Register 31
AIC_SMR31
Read/Write
0x0
0x80
Source Vector Register 0
AIC_SVR0
Read/Write
0x0
Read/Write
0x0
...
...
...
0x84
Source Vector Register 1
AIC_SVR1
...
...
0xFC
Source Vector Register 31
AIC_SVR31
Read/Write
0x0
0x100
Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_IVR
Read-only
0x0
0x104
FIQ Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_FVR
Read-only
0x0
0x108
Interrupt Status Register
AIC_ISR
Read-only
0x0
AIC_IPR
Read-only
0x0(1)
AIC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
...
0x10C
Interrupt Pending Register
0x110
Interrupt Mask Register(2)
(2)
0x114
Core Interrupt Status Register
AIC_CISR
Read-only
0x0
0x118
Reserved
–
–
–
0x11C
Reserved
–
–
–
AIC_IECR
Write-only
–
AIC_IDCR
Write-only
–
AIC_ICCR
Write-only
–
0x120
Interrupt Enable Command Register
(2)
0x124
Interrupt Disable Command Register
0x128
Interrupt Clear Command Register(2)
(2)
(2)
0x12C
Interrupt Set Command Register
AIC_ISCR
Write-only
–
0x130
End of Interrupt Command Register
AIC_EOICR
Write-only
–
0x134
Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_SPU
Read/Write
0x0
0x138
Debug Control Register
AIC_DCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x13C
Reserved
–
–
Write-only
–
0x140
Fast Forcing Enable Register
–
(2)
(2)
0x144
Fast Forcing Disable Register
0x148
Fast Forcing Status Register(2)
Notes:
AIC_FFER
AIC_FFDR
Write-only
–
AIC_FFSR
Read-only
0x0
1. The reset value of this register depends on the level of the external interrupt source. All other sources are cleared at reset,
thus not pending.
2. PID2...PID31 bit fields refer to the identifiers as defined in Section 8.2 “Peripheral Identifiers”.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
293
25.9.3 AIC Source Mode Register
Name:
AIC_SMR0..AIC_SMR31
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
5
–
SRCTYPE
PRIOR
• PRIOR: Priority Level
Programs the priority level for all sources except FIQ source (source 0).
The priority level can be between 0 (lowest) and 7 (highest).
The priority level is not used for the FIQ in the related SMR register AIC_SMRx.
• SRCTYPE: Interrupt Source Type
The active level or edge is not programmable for the internal interrupt sources.
Value
Internal Interrupt Sources
External Interrupt Sources
0
0
High level Sensitive
Low level Sensitive
0
1
Positive edge triggered
Negative edge triggered
1
0
High level Sensitive
High level Sensitive
1
1
Positive edge triggered
Positive edge triggered
294
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.4 AIC Source Vector Register
Name:
AIC_SVR0..AIC_SVR31
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
VECTOR
23
22
21
20
VECTOR
15
14
13
12
VECTOR
7
6
5
4
VECTOR
• VECTOR: Source Vector
The user may store in these registers the addresses of the corresponding handler for each interrupt source.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
295
25.9.5 AIC Interrupt Vector Register
Name:
AIC_IVR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IRQV
23
22
21
20
IRQV
15
14
13
12
IRQV
7
6
5
4
IRQV
• IRQV: Interrupt Vector Register
The Interrupt Vector Register contains the vector programmed by the user in the Source Vector Register corresponding to
the current interrupt.
The Source Vector Register is indexed using the current interrupt number when the Interrupt Vector Register is read.
When there is no current interrupt, the Interrupt Vector Register reads the value stored in AIC_SPU.
296
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.6 AIC FIQ Vector Register
Name:
AIC_FVR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FIQV
23
22
21
20
FIQV
15
14
13
12
FIQV
7
6
5
4
FIQV
• FIQV: FIQ Vector Register
The FIQ Vector Register contains the vector programmed by the user in the Source Vector Register 0. When there is no
fast interrupt, the FIQ Vector Register reads the value stored in AIC_SPU.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
297
25.9.7 AIC Interrupt Status Register
Name:
AIC_ISR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
–
–
–
• IRQID: Current Interrupt Identifier
The Interrupt Status Register returns the current interrupt source number.
298
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
IRQID
25.9.8 AIC Interrupt Pending Register
Name:
AIC_IPR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Pending
0: Corresponding interrupt is not pending.
1: Corresponding interrupt is pending.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
299
25.9.9 AIC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
AIC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Mask
0: Corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: Corresponding interrupt is enabled.
300
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.10 AIC Core Interrupt Status Register
Name:
AIC_CISR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
NIRQ
NIFQ
• NFIQ: NFIQ Status
0: nFIQ line is deactivated.
1: nFIQ line is active.
• NIRQ: NIRQ Status
0: nIRQ line is deactivated.
1: nIRQ line is active.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
301
25.9.11 AIC Interrupt Enable Command Register
Name:
AIC_IECR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables corresponding interrupt.
302
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.12 AIC Interrupt Disable Command Register
Name:
AIC_IDCR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
303
25.9.13 AIC Interrupt Clear Command Register
Name:
AIC_ICCR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding interrupt.
304
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.14 AIC Interrupt Set Command Register
Name:
AIC_ISCR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2–PID31: Interrupt Set
0: No effect.
1: Sets corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
305
25.9.15 AIC End of Interrupt Command Register
Name:
AIC_EOICR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
The End of Interrupt Command Register is used by the interrupt routine to indicate that the interrupt treatment is complete.
Any value can be written because it is only necessary to make a write to this register location to signal the end of interrupt
treatment.
306
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.16 AIC Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
Name:
AIC_SPU
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
SIQV
23
22
21
20
SIQV
15
14
13
12
SIQV
7
6
5
4
SIQV
• SIQV: Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
The user may store the address of a spurious interrupt handler in this register. The written value is returned in AIC_IVR in
case of a spurious interrupt and in AIC_FVR in case of a spurious fast interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
307
25.9.17 AIC Debug Control Register
Name:
AIC_DCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
GMSK
PROT
• PROT: Protection Mode
0: The Protection Mode is disabled.
1: The Protection Mode is enabled.
• GMSK: General Mask
0: The nIRQ and nFIQ lines are normally controlled by the AIC.
1: The nIRQ and nFIQ lines are tied to their inactive state.
308
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.18 AIC Fast Forcing Enable Register
Name:
AIC_FFER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2–PID31: Fast Forcing Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the fast forcing feature on the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
309
25.9.19 AIC Fast Forcing Disable Register
Name:
AIC_FFDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2–PID31: Fast Forcing Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Fast Forcing feature on the corresponding interrupt.
310
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
25.9.20 AIC Fast Forcing Status Register
Name:
AIC_FFSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2–PID31: Fast Forcing Status
0: The Fast Forcing feature is disabled on the corresponding interrupt.
1: The Fast Forcing feature is enabled on the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
311
26.
Debug Unit (DBGU)
26.1
Description
The Debug Unit provides a single entry point from the processor for access to all the debug capabilities of Atmel’s
ARM-based systems.
The Debug Unit features a two-pin UART that can be used for several debug and trace purposes and offers an
ideal medium for in-situ programming solutions and debug monitor communications. The Debug Unit two-pin
UART can be used standalone for general purpose serial communication.
Moreover, the association with two peripheral data controller channels permits packet handling for these tasks with
processor time reduced to a minimum.
The Debug Unit also makes the Debug Communication Channel (DCC) signals provided by the In-circuit Emulator
of the ARM processor visible to the software. These signals indicate the status of the DCC read and write registers
and generate an interrupt to the ARM processor, making possible the handling of the DCC under interrupt control.
Chip Identifier registers permit recognition of the device and its revision. These registers inform as to the sizes and
types of the on-chip memories, as well as the set of embedded peripherals.
Finally, the Debug Unit features a Force NTRST capability that enables the software to decide whether to prevent
access to the system via the In-circuit Emulator. This permits protection of the code, stored in ROM.
26.2
Embedded Characteristics
Composed of two functions:
̶
Two-pin UART
̶
Debug Communication Channel (DCC) support
Two-pin UART
̶
Implemented features are 100% compatible with the standard Atmel USART
̶
Independent receiver and transmitter with a common programmable Baud Rate Generator
̶
Even, Odd, Mark or Space Parity Generation
̶
Parity, Framing and Overrun Error Detection
̶
Automatic Echo, Local Loopback and Remote Loopback Channel Modes
̶
Support for two PDC channels with connection to receiver and transmitter
Debug Communication Channel Support
̶
312
Offers visibility of and interrupt trigger from COMMRX and COMMTX signals from the ARM
Processor’s ICE Interface
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.3
Block Diagram
Figure 26-1.
Debug Unit Functional Block Diagram
Peripheral
Bridge
Peripheral DMA Controller
APB
Debug Unit
DTXD
Transmit
Power
Management
Controller
Parallel
Input/
Output
Baud Rate
Generator
MCK
Receive
DRXD
COMMRX
ARM
Processor
DCC
Handler
COMMTX
Chip ID
nTRST
ICE
Access
Handler
Interrupt
Control
dbgu_irq
Power-on
Reset
force_ntrst
Table 26-1.
Debug Unit Pin Description
Pin Name
Description
Type
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
Figure 26-2.
Debug Unit Application Example
Boot Program
Debug Monitor
Trace Manager
Debug Unit
RS232 Drivers
Programming Tool
Debug Console
Trace Console
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
313
26.4
Product Dependencies
26.4.1 I/O Lines
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. In this case, the
programmer must first configure the corresponding PIO Controller to enable I/O lines operations of the Debug Unit.
26.4.2 Power Management
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit clock may be controllable through the Power Management
Controller. In this case, the programmer must first configure the PMC to enable the Debug Unit clock. Usually, the
peripheral identifier used for this purpose is 1.
26.4.3 Interrupt Source
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit interrupt line is connected to one of the interrupt sources of the
Advanced Interrupt Controller. Interrupt handling requires programming of the AIC before configuring the Debug
Unit. Usually, the Debug Unit interrupt line connects to the interrupt source 1 of the AIC, which may be shared with
the real-time clock, the system timer interrupt lines and other system peripheral interrupts, as shown in Figure 261. This sharing requires the programmer to determine the source of the interrupt when the source 1 is triggered.
26.5
UART Operations
The Debug Unit operates as a UART, (asynchronous mode only) and supports only 8-bit character handling (with
parity). It has no clock pin.
The Debug Unit's UART is made up of a receiver and a transmitter that operate independently, and a common
baud rate generator. Receiver timeout and transmitter time guard are not implemented. However, all the
implemented features are compatible with those of a standard USART.
26.5.1 Baud Rate Generator
The baud rate generator provides the bit period clock named baud rate clock to both the receiver and the
transmitter.
The baud rate clock is the master clock divided by 16 times the value (CD) written in DBGU_BRGR (Baud Rate
Generator Register). If DBGU_BRGR is set to 0, the baud rate clock is disabled and the Debug Unit's UART
remains inactive. The maximum allowable baud rate is Master Clock divided by 16. The minimum allowable baud
rate is Master Clock divided by (16 × 65536).
MCK
Baud Rate = -------------------16 × CD
Figure 26-3.
Baud Rate Generator
CD
CD
MCK
16-bit Counter
OUT
>1
1
0
Divide
by 16
Baud Rate
Clock
0
Receiver
Sampling Clock
314
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.5.2 Receiver
26.5.2.1 Receiver Reset, Enable and Disable
After device reset, the Debug Unit receiver is disabled and must be enabled before being used. The receiver can
be enabled by writing the control register DBGU_CR with the bit RXEN at 1. At this command, the receiver starts
looking for a start bit.
The programmer can disable the receiver by writing DBGU_CR with the bit RXDIS at 1. If the receiver is waiting for
a start bit, it is immediately stopped. However, if the receiver has already detected a start bit and is receiving the
data, it waits for the stop bit before actually stopping its operation.
The programmer can also put the receiver in its reset state by writing DBGU_CR with the bit RSTRX at 1. In doing
so, the receiver immediately stops its current operations and is disabled, whatever its current state. If RSTRX is
applied when data is being processed, this data is lost.
26.5.2.2 Start Detection and Data Sampling
The Debug Unit only supports asynchronous operations, and this affects only its receiver. The Debug Unit receiver
detects the start of a received character by sampling the DRXD signal until it detects a valid start bit. A low level
(space) on DRXD is interpreted as a valid start bit if it is detected for more than 7 cycles of the sampling clock,
which is 16 times the baud rate. Hence, a space that is longer than 7/16 of the bit period is detected as a valid start
bit. A space which is 7/16 of a bit period or shorter is ignored and the receiver continues to wait for a valid start bit.
When a valid start bit has been detected, the receiver samples the DRXD at the theoretical midpoint of each bit. It
is assumed that each bit lasts 16 cycles of the sampling clock (1-bit period) so the bit sampling point is eight cycles
(0.5-bit period) after the start of the bit. The first sampling point is therefore 24 cycles (1.5-bit periods) after the
falling edge of the start bit was detected.
Each subsequent bit is sampled 16 cycles (1-bit period) after the previous one.
Figure 26-4.
Start Bit Detection
Sampling Clock
DRXD
True Start
Detection
D0
Baud Rate
Clock
Figure 26-5.
Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, parity enabled 1 stop
0.5 bit
period
1 bit
period
DRXD
Sampling
D0
D1
True Start Detection
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Stop Bit
D7
Parity Bit
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
315
26.5.2.3 Receiver Ready
When a complete character is received, it is transferred to the DBGU_RHR and the RXRDY status bit in
DBGU_SR (Status Register) is set. The bit RXRDY is automatically cleared when the receive holding register
DBGU_RHR is read.
Figure 26-6.
Receiver Ready
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
S
P
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
RXRDY
Read DBGU_RHR
26.5.2.4 Receiver Overrun
If DBGU_RHR has not been read by the software (or the Peripheral Data Controller) since the last transfer, the
RXRDY bit is still set and a new character is received, the OVRE status bit in DBGU_SR is set. OVRE is cleared
when the software writes the control register DBGU_CR with the bit RSTSTA (Reset Status) at 1.
Figure 26-7.
Receiver Overrun
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
OVRE
RSTSTA
26.5.2.5 Parity Error
Each time a character is received, the receiver calculates the parity of the received data bits, in accordance with
the field PAR in DBGU_MR. It then compares the result with the received parity bit. If different, the parity error bit
PARE in DBGU_SR is set at the same time the RXRDY is set. The parity bit is cleared when the control register
DBGU_CR is written with the bit RSTSTA (Reset Status) at 1. If a new character is received before the reset status
command is written, the PARE bit remains at 1.
Figure 26-8.
Parity Error
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
PARE
Wrong Parity Bit
316
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
RSTSTA
26.5.2.6 Receiver Framing Error
When a start bit is detected, it generates a character reception when all the data bits have been sampled. The stop
bit is also sampled and when it is detected at 0, the FRAME (Framing Error) bit in DBGU_SR is set at the same
time the RXRDY bit is set. The bit FRAME remains high until the control register DBGU_CR is written with the bit
RSTSTA at 1.
Figure 26-9.
Receiver Framing Error
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
FRAME
Stop Bit
Detected at 0
RSTSTA
26.5.3 Transmitter
26.5.3.1 Transmitter Reset, Enable and Disable
After device reset, the Debug Unit transmitter is disabled and it must be enabled before being used. The
transmitter is enabled by writing the control register DBGU_CR with the bit TXEN at 1. From this command, the
transmitter waits for a character to be written in the Transmit Holding Register DBGU_THR before actually starting
the transmission.
The programmer can disable the transmitter by writing DBGU_CR with the bit TXDIS at 1. If the transmitter is not
operating, it is immediately stopped. However, if a character is being processed into the Shift Register and/or a
character has been written in the Transmit Holding Register, the characters are completed before the transmitter is
actually stopped.
The programmer can also put the transmitter in its reset state by writing the DBGU_CR with the bit RSTTX at 1.
This immediately stops the transmitter, whether or not it is processing characters.
26.5.3.2 Transmit Format
The Debug Unit transmitter drives the pin DTXD at the baud rate clock speed. The line is driven depending on the
format defined in the Mode Register and the data stored in the Shift Register. One start bit at level 0, then the 8
data bits, from the lowest to the highest bit, one optional parity bit and one stop bit at 1 are consecutively shifted
out as shown on the following figure. The field PARE in the mode register DBGU_MR defines whether or not a
parity bit is shifted out. When a parity bit is enabled, it can be selected between an odd parity, an even parity, or a
fixed space or mark bit.
Figure 26-10. Character Transmission
Example: Parity enabled
Baud Rate
Clock
DTXD
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
317
26.5.3.3 Transmitter Control
When the transmitter is enabled, the bit TXRDY (Transmitter Ready) is set in the status register DBGU_SR. The
transmission starts when the programmer writes in the Transmit Holding Register DBGU_THR, and after the
written character is transferred from DBGU_THR to the Shift Register. The bit TXRDY remains high until a second
character is written in DBGU_THR. As soon as the first character is completed, the last character written in
DBGU_THR is transferred into the shift register and TXRDY rises again, showing that the holding register is
empty.
When both the Shift Register and the DBGU_THR are empty, i.e., all the characters written in DBGU_THR have
been processed, the bit TXEMPTY rises after the last stop bit has been completed.
Figure 26-11. Transmitter Control
DBGU_THR
Data 0
Data 1
Shift Register
DTXD
Data 0
Data 0
S
Data 1
P
stop
S
Data 1
P
stop
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
Write Data 0
in DBGU_THR
Write Data 1
in DBGU_THR
26.5.4 Peripheral Data Controller
Both the receiver and the transmitter of the Debug Unit's UART are generally connected to a Peripheral Data
Controller (PDC) channel.
The peripheral data controller channels are programmed via registers that are mapped within the Debug Unit user
interface from the offset 0x100. The status bits are reported in the Debug Unit status register DBGU_SR and can
generate an interrupt.
The RXRDY bit triggers the PDC channel data transfer of the receiver. This results in a read of the data in
DBGU_RHR. The TXRDY bit triggers the PDC channel data transfer of the transmitter. This results in a write of a
data in DBGU_THR.
318
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.5.5 Test Modes
The Debug Unit supports three tests modes. These modes of operation are programmed by using the field
CHMODE (Channel Mode) in the mode register DBGU_MR.
The Automatic Echo mode allows bit-by-bit retransmission. When a bit is received on the DRXD line, it is sent to
the DTXD line. The transmitter operates normally, but has no effect on the DTXD line.
The Local Loopback mode allows the transmitted characters to be received. DTXD and DRXD pins are not used
and the output of the transmitter is internally connected to the input of the receiver. The DRXD pin level has no
effect and the DTXD line is held high, as in idle state.
The Remote Loopback mode directly connects the DRXD pin to the DTXD line. The transmitter and the receiver
are disabled and have no effect. This mode allows a bit-by-bit retransmission.
Figure 26-12. Test Modes
Automatic Echo
RXD
Receiver
Transmitter
Disabled
TXD
Local Loopback
Disabled
Receiver
RXD
VDD
Disabled
Transmitter
Remote Loopback
Receiver
Transmitter
TXD
VDD
Disabled
Disabled
RXD
TXD
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
319
26.5.6 Debug Communication Channel Support
The Debug Unit handles the signals COMMRX and COMMTX that come from the Debug Communication Channel
of the ARM Processor and are driven by the In-circuit Emulator.
The Debug Communication Channel contains two registers that are accessible through the ICE Breaker on the
JTAG side and through the coprocessor 0 on the ARM Processor side.
As a reminder, the following instructions are used to read and write the Debug Communication Channel:
MRC
p14, 0, Rd, c1, c0, 0
Returns the debug communication data read register into Rd
MCR
p14, 0, Rd, c1, c0, 0
Writes the value in Rd to the debug communication data write register.
The bits COMMRX and COMMTX, which indicate, respectively, that the read register has been written by the
debugger but not yet read by the processor, and that the write register has been written by the processor and not
yet read by the debugger, are wired on the two highest bits of the status register DBGU_SR. These bits can
generate an interrupt. This feature permits handling under interrupt a debug link between a debug monitor running
on the target system and a debugger.
26.5.7 Chip Identifier
The Debug Unit features two chip identifier registers, DBGU_CIDR (Chip ID Register) and DBGU_EXID
(Extension ID). Both registers contain a hard-wired value that is read-only. The first register contains the following
fields:
EXT - shows the use of the extension identifier register
NVPTYP and NVPSIZ - identifies the type of embedded non-volatile memory and its size
ARCH - identifies the set of embedded peripherals
SRAMSIZ - indicates the size of the embedded SRAM
EPROC - indicates the embedded ARM processor
VERSION - gives the revision of the silicon
The second register is device-dependent and reads 0 if the bit EXT is 0.
26.5.8 ICE Access Prevention
The Debug Unit allows blockage of access to the system through the ARM processor's ICE interface. This feature
is implemented via the register Force NTRST (DBGU_FNR), that allows assertion of the NTRST signal of the ICE
Interface. Writing the bit FNTRST (Force NTRST) to 1 in this register prevents any activity on the TAP controller.
On standard devices, the bit FNTRST resets to 0 and thus does not prevent ICE access.
This feature is especially useful on custom ROM devices for customers who do not want their on-chip code to be
visible.
320
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6
Debug Unit (DBGU) User Interface
Table 26-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
Control Register
DBGU_CR
Write-only
–
0x0004
Mode Register
DBGU_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0008
Interrupt Enable Register
DBGU_IER
Write-only
–
0x000C
Interrupt Disable Register
DBGU_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0010
Interrupt Mask Register
DBGU_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x0014
Status Register
DBGU_SR
Read-only
–
0x0018
Receive Holding Register
DBGU_RHR
Read-only
0x0
0x001C
Transmit Holding Register
DBGU_THR
Write-only
–
0x0020
Baud Rate Generator Register
DBGU_BRGR
Read/Write
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
Chip ID Register
DBGU_CIDR
Read-only
–
0x0044
Chip ID Extension Register
DBGU_EXID
Read-only
–
0x0048
Force NTRST Register
DBGU_FNR
Read/Write
0x0
0x004C–0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0100–0x0124
PDC Area
–
–
–
0x0024–0x003C
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
321
26.6.1 Debug Unit Control Register
Name:
DBGU_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RSTSTA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDIS
TXEN
RXDIS
RXEN
RSTTX
RSTRX
–
–
• RSTRX: Reset Receiver
0: No effect.
1: The receiver logic is reset and disabled. If a character is being received, the reception is aborted.
• RSTTX: Reset Transmitter
0: No effect.
1: The transmitter logic is reset and disabled. If a character is being transmitted, the transmission is aborted.
• RXEN: Receiver Enable
0: No effect.
1: The receiver is enabled if RXDIS is 0.
• RXDIS: Receiver Disable
0: No effect.
1: The receiver is disabled. If a character is being processed and RSTRX is not set, the character is completed before the
receiver is stopped.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enable
0: No effect.
1: The transmitter is enabled if TXDIS is 0.
• TXDIS: Transmitter Disable
0: No effect.
1: The transmitter is disabled. If a character is being processed and a character has been written the DBGU_THR and
RSTTX is not set, both characters are completed before the transmitter is stopped.
• RSTSTA: Reset Status Bits
0: No effect.
1: Resets the status bits PARE, FRAME and OVRE in the DBGU_SR.
322
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.2 Debug Unit Mode Register
Name:
DBGU_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
15
CHMODE
PAR
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
• PAR: Parity Type
Value
Parity Type
0
0
0
Even parity
0
0
1
Odd parity
0
1
0
Space: parity forced to 0
0
1
1
Mark: parity forced to 1
1
x
x
No parity
• CHMODE: Channel Mode
Value
Mode Description
0
0
Normal Mode
0
1
Automatic Echo
1
0
Local Loopback
1
1
Remote Loopback
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
323
26.6.3 Debug Unit Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
DBGU_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Enable RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Enable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Enable End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Enable End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Enable Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Enable Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Enable Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Enable TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Enable Buffer Empty Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Enable Buffer Full Interrupt
• COMMTX: Enable COMMTX (from ARM) Interrupt
• COMMRX: Enable COMMRX (from ARM) Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
324
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.4 Debug Unit Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
DBGU_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Disable RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Disable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Disable End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Disable End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Disable Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Disable Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Disable Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Disable TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Disable Buffer Empty Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Disable Buffer Full Interrupt
• COMMTX: Disable COMMTX (from ARM) Interrupt
• COMMRX: Disable COMMRX (from ARM) Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
325
26.6.5 Debug Unit Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
DBGU_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Mask RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Disable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Mask End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Mask End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Mask Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Mask Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Mask Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Mask TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Mask TXBUFE Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Mask RXBUFF Interrupt
• COMMTX: Mask COMMTX Interrupt
• COMMRX: Mask COMMRX Interrupt
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
326
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.6 Debug Unit Status Register
Name:
DBGU_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready
0: No character has been received since the last read of the DBGU_RHR or the receiver is disabled.
1: At least one complete character has been received, transferred to DBGU_RHR and not yet read.
• TXRDY: Transmitter Ready
0: A character has been written to DBGU_THR and not yet transferred to the Shift Register, or the transmitter is disabled.
1: There is no character written to DBGU_THR not yet transferred to the Shift Register.
• ENDRX: End of Receiver Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the receiver Peripheral Data Controller channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the receiver Peripheral Data Controller channel is active.
• ENDTX: End of Transmitter Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the transmitter Peripheral Data Controller channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the transmitter Peripheral Data Controller channel is active.
• OVRE: Overrun Error
0: No overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• FRAME: Framing Error
0: No framing error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one framing error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• PARE: Parity Error
0: No parity error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one parity error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• TXEMPTY: Transmitter Empty
0: There are characters in DBGU_THR, or characters being processed by the transmitter, or the transmitter is disabled.
1: There are no characters in DBGU_THR and there are no characters being processed by the transmitter.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
327
• TXBUFE: Transmission Buffer Empty
0: The buffer empty signal from the transmitter PDC channel is inactive.
1: The buffer empty signal from the transmitter PDC channel is active.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
0: The buffer full signal from the receiver PDC channel is inactive.
1: The buffer full signal from the receiver PDC channel is active.
• COMMTX: Debug Communication Channel Write Status
0: COMMTX from the ARM processor is inactive.
1: COMMTX from the ARM processor is active.
• COMMRX: Debug Communication Channel Read Status
0: COMMRX from the ARM processor is inactive.
1: COMMRX from the ARM processor is active.
328
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.7 Debug Unit Receiver Holding Register
Name:
DBGU_RHR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXCHR
• RXCHR: Received Character
Last received character if RXRDY is set.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
329
26.6.8 Debug Unit Transmit Holding Register
Name:
DBGU_THR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXCHR
• TXCHR: Character to be Transmitted
Next character to be transmitted after the current character if TXRDY is not set.
330
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.9 Debug Unit Baud Rate Generator Register
Name:
DBGU_BRGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CD
7
6
5
4
CD
• CD: Clock Divisor
Value
Baud Rate Clock
0
Disabled
1
MCK
2–65535
MCK / (CD × 16)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
331
26.6.10 Debug Unit Chip ID Register
Name:
DBGU_CIDR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
EXT
28
27
26
NVPTYP
23
22
21
20
19
18
ARCH
15
14
13
6
5
• VERSION: Version of the Device
Current version of the device.
• EPROC: Embedded Processor
Processor
0
0
1
ARM946ES
0
1
0
ARM7TDMI
1
0
0
ARM920T
1
0
1
ARM926EJS
• NVPSIZ: Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
Value
Size
0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
8 Kbytes
0
0
1
0
16 Kbytes
0
0
1
1
32 Kbytes
0
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
0
1
64 Kbytes
0
1
1
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
128 Kbytes
1
0
0
0
Reserved
1
0
0
1
256 Kbytes
1
0
1
0
512 Kbytes
1
0
1
1
Reserved
1
1
0
0
1024 Kbytes
1
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
1
0
2048 Kbytes
1
1
1
1
Reserved
332
17
16
12
11
10
9
8
1
0
NVPSIZ
EPROC
Value
24
SRAMSIZ
NVPSIZ2
7
25
ARCH
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
4
3
2
VERSION
• NVPSIZ2 Second Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
Value
Size
0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
8 Kbytes
0
0
1
0
16 Kbytes
0
0
1
1
32 Kbytes
0
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
0
1
64 Kbytes
0
1
1
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
128 Kbytes
1
0
0
0
Reserved
1
0
0
1
256 Kbytes
1
0
1
0
512 Kbytes
1
0
1
1
Reserved
1
1
0
0
1024 Kbytes
1
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
1
0
2048 Kbytes
1
1
1
1
Reserved
• SRAMSIZ: Internal SRAM Size
Value
Size
0
0
0
0
Reserved
0
0
0
1
1 Kbytes
0
0
1
0
2 Kbytes
0
0
1
1
6 Kbytes
0
1
0
0
112 Kbytes
0
1
0
1
4 Kbytes
0
1
1
0
80 Kbytes
0
1
1
1
160 Kbytes
1
0
0
0
8 Kbytes
1
0
0
1
16 Kbytes
1
0
1
0
32 Kbytes
1
0
1
1
64 Kbytes
1
1
0
0
128 Kbytes
1
1
0
1
256 Kbytes
1
1
1
0
96 Kbytes
1
1
1
1
512 Kbytes
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
333
• ARCH: Architecture Identifier
Value
Hex
Bin
Architecture
0x19
0001 1001
AT91SAM9xx Series
0x29
0010 1001
AT91SAM9XExx Series
0x34
0011 0100
AT91x34 Series
0x37
0011 0111
CAP7 Series
0x39
0011 1001
CAP9 Series
0x3B
0011 1011
CAP11 Series
0x40
0100 0000
AT91x40 Series
0x42
0100 0010
AT91x42 Series
0x55
0101 0101
AT91x55 Series
0x60
0110 0000
AT91SAM7Axx Series
0x61
0110 0001
AT91SAM7AQxx Series
0x63
0110 0011
AT91x63 Series
0x70
0111 0000
AT91SAM7Sxx Series
0x71
0111 0001
AT91SAM7XCxx Series
0x72
0111 0010
AT91SAM7SExx Series
0x73
0111 0011
AT91SAM7Lxx Series
0x75
0111 0101
AT91SAM7Xxx Series
0x92
1001 0010
AT91x92 Series
0xF0
1111 0000
AT75Cxx Series
• NVPTYP: Nonvolatile Program Memory Type
Value
Memory
0
0
0
ROM
0
0
1
ROMless or on-chip Flash
1
0
0
SRAM emulating ROM
0
1
0
Embedded Flash Memory
0
1
1
ROM and Embedded Flash Memory
NVPSIZ is ROM size
NVPSIZ2 is Flash size
• EXT: Extension Flag
0: Chip ID has a single register definition without extension
1: An extended Chip ID exists.
334
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
26.6.11 Debug Unit Chip ID Extension Register
Name:
DBGU_EXID
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EXID
23
22
21
20
EXID
15
14
13
12
EXID
7
6
5
4
EXID
• EXID: Chip ID Extension
Reads 0 if the bit EXT in DBGU_CIDR is 0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
335
26.6.12 Debug Unit Force NTRST Register
Name:
DBGU_FNR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FNTRST
• FNTRST: Force NTRST
0: NTRST of the ARM processor’s TAP controller is driven by the power_on_reset signal.
1: NTRST of the ARM processor’s TAP controller is held low.
336
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO)
27.1
Description
The Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) manages up to 32 fully programmable input/output lines. Each I/O line
may be dedicated as a general-purpose I/O or be assigned to a function of an embedded peripheral. This assures
effective optimization of the pins of a product.
Each I/O line is associated with a bit number in all of the 32-bit registers of the 32-bit wide User Interface.
Each I/O line of the PIO Controller features:
An input change interrupt enabling level change detection on any I/O line.
A glitch filter providing rejection of pulses lower than one-half of clock cycle.
Multi-drive capability similar to an open drain I/O line.
Control of the pull-up of the I/O line.
Input visibility and output control.
The PIO Controller also features a synchronous output providing up to 32 bits of data output in a single write
operation.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
337
27.2
Block Diagram
Figure 27-1.
Block Diagram
PIO Controller
AIC
PIO Interrupt
PIO Clock
PMC
Data, Enable
Up to 32
peripheral IOs
Embedded
Peripheral
PIN 0
Data, Enable
PIN 1
Up to 32 pins
Up to 32
peripheral IOs
Embedded
Peripheral
PIN 31
APB
Figure 27-2.
Application Block Diagram
On-Chip Peripheral Drivers
Keyboard Driver
Control & Command
Driver
On-Chip Peripherals
PIO Controller
Keyboard Driver
338
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
General Purpose I/Os
External Devices
27.3
Product Dependencies
27.3.1 Pin Multiplexing
Each pin is configurable, according to product definition as either a general-purpose I/O line only, or as an I/O line
multiplexed with one or two peripheral I/Os. As the multiplexing is hardware-defined and thus product-dependent,
the hardware designer and programmer must carefully determine the configuration of the PIO controllers required
by their application. When an I/O line is general-purpose only, i.e. not multiplexed with any peripheral I/O,
programming of the PIO Controller regarding the assignment to a peripheral has no effect and only the PIO
Controller can control how the pin is driven by the product.
27.3.2 External Interrupt Lines
The interrupt signals FIQ and IRQ0 to IRQn are most generally multiplexed through the PIO Controllers. However,
it is not necessary to assign the I/O line to the interrupt function as the PIO Controller has no effect on inputs and
the interrupt lines (FIQ or IRQs) are used only as inputs.
27.3.3 Power Management
The Power Management Controller controls the PIO Controller clock in order to save power. Writing any of the
registers of the user interface does not require the PIO Controller clock to be enabled. This means that the
configuration of the I/O lines does not require the PIO Controller clock to be enabled.
However, when the clock is disabled, not all of the features of the PIO Controller are available. Note that the Input
Change Interrupt and the read of the pin level require the clock to be validated.
After a hardware reset, the PIO clock is disabled by default.
The user must configure the Power Management Controller before any access to the input line information.
27.3.4 Interrupt Generation
For interrupt handling, the PIO Controllers are considered as user peripherals. This means that the PIO Controller
interrupt lines are connected among the interrupt sources 2 to 31. Refer to the PIO Controller peripheral identifier
in the product description to identify the interrupt sources dedicated to the PIO Controllers.
The PIO Controller interrupt can be generated only if the PIO Controller clock is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
339
27.4
Functional Description
The PIO Controller features up to 32 fully-programmable I/O lines. Most of the control logic associated to each I/O
is represented in Figure 27-3. In this description each signal shown represents but one of up to 32 possible
indexes.
Figure 27-3.
I/O Line Control Logic
PIO_OER[0]
PIO_OSR[0]
PIO_PUER[0]
PIO_ODR[0]
PIO_PUSR[0]
PIO_PUDR[0]
1
Peripheral A
Output Enable
0
0
Peripheral B
Output Enable
0
1
PIO_PER[0]
PIO_ASR[0]
1
PIO_PSR[0]
PIO_ABSR[0]
PIO_PDR[0]
PIO_BSR[0]
Peripheral A
Output
0
Peripheral B
Output
1
PIO_MDER[0]
PIO_MDSR[0]
PIO_MDDR[0]
0
0
PIO_SODR[0]
PIO_ODSR[0]
1
Pad
PIO_CODR[0]
1
Peripheral A
Input
PIO_PDSR[0]
PIO_ISR[0]
0
Edge
Detector
Glitch
Filter
PIO_IFSR[0]
PIO_IER[0]
PIO_IMR[0]
PIO_IDR[0]
PIO_ISR[31]
PIO_IER[31]
PIO_IMR[31]
PIO_IDR[31]
340
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
(Up to 32 possible inputs)
PIO Interrupt
1
PIO_IFER[0]
PIO_IFDR[0]
Peripheral B
Input
27.4.1 Pull-up Resistor Control
Each I/O line is designed with an embedded pull-up resistor. The pull-up resistor can be enabled or disabled by
writing respectively PIO_PUER (Pull-up Enable Register) and PIO_PUDR (Pull-up Disable Resistor). Writing in
these registers results in setting or clearing the corresponding bit in PIO_PUSR (Pull-up Status Register). Reading
a 1 in PIO_PUSR means the pull-up is disabled and reading a 0 means the pull-up is enabled.
Control of the pull-up resistor is possible regardless of the configuration of the I/O line.
After reset, all of the pull-ups are enabled, i.e. PIO_PUSR resets at the value 0x0.
27.4.2 I/O Line or Peripheral Function Selection
When a pin is multiplexed with one or two peripheral functions, the selection is controlled with the registers
PIO_PER (PIO Enable Register) and PIO_PDR (PIO Disable Register). The register PIO_PSR (PIO Status
Register) is the result of the set and clear registers and indicates whether the pin is controlled by the
corresponding peripheral or by the PIO Controller. A value of 0 indicates that the pin is controlled by the
corresponding on-chip peripheral selected in the PIO_ABSR (AB Select Status Register). A value of 1 indicates
the pin is controlled by the PIO controller.
If a pin is used as a general purpose I/O line (not multiplexed with an on-chip peripheral), PIO_PER and PIO_PDR
have no effect and PIO_PSR returns 1 for the corresponding bit.
After reset, most generally, the I/O lines are controlled by the PIO controller, i.e. PIO_PSR resets at 1. However, in
some events, it is important that PIO lines are controlled by the peripheral (as in the case of memory chip select
lines that must be driven inactive after reset or for address lines that must be driven low for booting out of an
external memory). Thus, the reset value of PIO_PSR is defined at the product level, depending on the multiplexing
of the device.
27.4.3 Peripheral A or B Selection
The PIO Controller provides multiplexing of up to two peripheral functions on a single pin. The selection is
performed by writing PIO_ASR (A Select Register) and PIO_BSR (Select B Register). PIO_ABSR (AB Select
Status Register) indicates which peripheral line is currently selected. For each pin, the corresponding bit at level 0
means peripheral A is selected whereas the corresponding bit at level 1 indicates that peripheral B is selected.
Note that multiplexing of peripheral lines A and B only affects the output line. The peripheral input lines are always
connected to the pin input.
After reset, PIO_ABSR is 0, thus indicating that all the PIO lines are configured on peripheral A. However,
peripheral A generally does not drive the pin as the PIO Controller resets in I/O line mode.
Writing in PIO_ASR and PIO_BSR manages PIO_ABSR regardless of the configuration of the pin. However,
assignment of a pin to a peripheral function requires a write in the corresponding peripheral selection register
(PIO_ASR or PIO_BSR) in addition to a write in PIO_PDR.
27.4.4 Output Control
When the I/0 line is assigned to a peripheral function, i.e. the corresponding bit in PIO_PSR is at 0, the drive of the
I/O line is controlled by the peripheral. Peripheral A or B, depending on the value in PIO_ABSR, determines
whether the pin is driven or not.
When the I/O line is controlled by the PIO controller, the pin can be configured to be driven. This is done by writing
PIO_OER (Output Enable Register) and PIO_ODR (Output Disable Register). The results of these write
operations are detected in PIO_OSR (Output Status Register). When a bit in this register is at 0, the corresponding
I/O line is used as an input only. When the bit is at 1, the corresponding I/O line is driven by the PIO controller.
The level driven on an I/O line can be determined by writing in PIO_SODR (Set Output Data Register) and
PIO_CODR (Clear Output Data Register). These write operations respectively set and clear PIO_ODSR (Output
Data Status Register), which represents the data driven on the I/O lines. Writing in PIO_OER and PIO_ODR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
341
manages PIO_OSR whether the pin is configured to be controlled by the PIO controller or assigned to a peripheral
function. This enables configuration of the I/O line prior to setting it to be managed by the PIO Controller.
Similarly, writing in PIO_SODR and PIO_CODR effects PIO_ODSR. This is important as it defines the first level
driven on the I/O line.
27.4.5 Synchronous Data Output
Controlling all parallel busses using several PIOs requires two successive write operations in the PIO_SODR and
PIO_CODR registers. This may lead to unexpected transient values. The PIO controller offers a direct control of
PIO outputs by single write access to PIO_ODSR (Output Data Status Register). Only bits unmasked by
PIO_OWSR (Output Write Status Register) are written. The mask bits in the PIO_OWSR are set by writing to
PIO_OWER (Output Write Enable Register) and cleared by writing to PIO_OWDR (Output Write Disable Register).
After reset, the synchronous data output is disabled on all the I/O lines as PIO_OWSR resets at 0x0.
27.4.6 Multi Drive Control (Open Drain)
Each I/O can be independently programmed in Open Drain by using the Multi Drive feature. This feature permits
several drivers to be connected on the I/O line which is driven low only by each device. An external pull-up resistor
(or enabling of the internal one) is generally required to guarantee a high level on the line.
The Multi Drive feature is controlled by PIO_MDER (Multi-driver Enable Register) and PIO_MDDR (Multi-driver
Disable Register). The Multi Drive can be selected whether the I/O line is controlled by the PIO controller or
assigned to a peripheral function. PIO_MDSR (Multi-driver Status Register) indicates the pins that are configured
to support external drivers.
After reset, the Multi Drive feature is disabled on all pins, i.e. PIO_MDSR resets at value 0x0.
27.4.7 Output Line Timings
Figure 27-4 shows how the outputs are driven either by writing PIO_SODR or PIO_CODR, or by directly writing
PIO_ODSR. This last case is valid only if the corresponding bit in PIO_OWSR is set. Figure 27-4 also shows when
the feedback in PIO_PDSR is available.
Figure 27-4.
Output Line Timings
MCK
Write PIO_SODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 1
APB Access
Write PIO_CODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 0
APB Access
PIO_ODSR
2 cycles
PIO_PDSR
342
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
2 cycles
27.4.8 Inputs
The level on each I/O line can be read through PIO_PDSR (Pin Data Status Register). This register indicates the
level of the I/O lines regardless of their configuration, whether uniquely as an input or driven by the PIO controller
or driven by a peripheral.
Reading the I/O line levels requires the clock of the PIO controller to be enabled, otherwise PIO_PDSR reads the
levels present on the I/O line at the time the clock was disabled.
27.4.9 Input Glitch Filtering
Optional input glitch filters are independently programmable on each I/O line. When the glitch filter is enabled, a
glitch with a duration of less than 1/2 Master Clock (MCK) cycle is automatically rejected, while a pulse with a
duration of 1 Master Clock cycle or more is accepted. For pulse durations between 1/2 Master Clock cycle and 1
Master Clock cycle the pulse may or may not be taken into account, depending on the precise timing of its
occurrence. Thus for a pulse to be visible it must exceed 1 Master Clock cycle, whereas for a glitch to be reliably
filtered out, its duration must not exceed 1/2 Master Clock cycle. The filter introduces one Master Clock cycle
latency if the pin level change occurs before a rising edge. However, this latency does not appear if the pin level
change occurs before a falling edge. This is illustrated in Figure 27-5.
The glitch filters are controlled by the register set; PIO_IFER (Input Filter Enable Register), PIO_IFDR (Input Filter
Disable Register) and PIO_IFSR (Input Filter Status Register). Writing PIO_IFER and PIO_IFDR respectively sets
and clears bits in PIO_IFSR. This last register enables the glitch filter on the I/O lines.
When the glitch filter is enabled, it does not modify the behavior of the inputs on the peripherals. It acts only on the
value read in PIO_PDSR and on the input change interrupt detection. The glitch filters require that the PIO
Controller clock is enabled.
Figure 27-5.
Input Glitch Filter Timing
MCK
up to 1.5 cycles
Pin Level
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 0
2 cycles
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 1
up to 2.5 cycles
1 cycle
up to 2 cycles
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
343
27.4.10 Input Change Interrupt
The PIO Controller can be programmed to generate an interrupt when it detects an input change on an I/O line.
The Input Change Interrupt is controlled by writing PIO_IER (Interrupt Enable Register) and PIO_IDR (Interrupt
Disable Register), which respectively enable and disable the input change interrupt by setting and clearing the
corresponding bit in PIO_IMR (Interrupt Mask Register). As Input change detection is possible only by comparing
two successive samplings of the input of the I/O line, the PIO Controller clock must be enabled. The Input Change
Interrupt is available, regardless of the configuration of the I/O line, i.e. configured as an input only, controlled by
the PIO Controller or assigned to a peripheral function.
When an input change is detected on an I/O line, the corresponding bit in PIO_ISR (Interrupt Status Register) is
set. If the corresponding bit in PIO_IMR is set, the PIO Controller interrupt line is asserted. The interrupt signals of
the thirty-two channels are ORed-wired together to generate a single interrupt signal to the Advanced Interrupt
Controller.
When the software reads PIO_ISR, all the interrupts are automatically cleared. This signifies that all the interrupts
that are pending when PIO_ISR is read must be handled.
Figure 27-6.
Input Change Interrupt Timings
MCK
Pin Level
PIO_ISR
Read PIO_ISR
344
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
APB Access
APB Access
27.5
I/O Lines Programming Example
The programing example as shown in Table 27-1 below is used to define the following configuration.
4-bit output port on I/O lines 0 to 3, (should be written in a single write operation), open-drain, with pull-up
resistor
Four output signals on I/O lines 4 to 7 (to drive LEDs for example), driven high and low, no pull-up resistor
Four input signals on I/O lines 8 to 11 (to read push-button states for example), with pull-up resistors, glitch
filters and input change interrupts
Four input signals on I/O line 12 to 15 to read an external device status (polled, thus no input change
interrupt), no pull-up resistor, no glitch filter
I/O lines 16 to 19 assigned to peripheral A functions with pull-up resistor
I/O lines 20 to 23 assigned to peripheral B functions, no pull-up resistor
I/O line 24 to 27 assigned to peripheral A with Input Change Interrupt and pull-up resistor
Table 27-1.
Programming Example
Register
Value to be Written
PIO_PER
0x0000 FFFF
PIO_PDR
0x0FFF 0000
PIO_OER
0x0000 00FF
PIO_ODR
0x0FFF FF00
PIO_IFER
0x0000 0F00
PIO_IFDR
0x0FFF F0FF
PIO_SODR
0x0000 0000
PIO_CODR
0x0FFF FFFF
PIO_IER
0x0F00 0F00
PIO_IDR
0x00FF F0FF
PIO_MDER
0x0000 000F
PIO_MDDR
0x0FFF FFF0
PIO_PUDR
0x00F0 00F0
PIO_PUER
0x0F0F FF0F
PIO_ASR
0x0F0F 0000
PIO_BSR
0x00F0 0000
PIO_OWER
0x0000 000F
PIO_OWDR
0x0FFF FFF0
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
345
27.6
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) User Interface
Each I/O line controlled by the PIO Controller is associated with a bit in each of the PIO Controller User Interface
registers. Each register is 32 bits wide. If a parallel I/O line is not defined, writing to the corresponding bits has no
effect. Undefined bits read zero. If the I/O line is not multiplexed with any peripheral, the I/O line is controlled by the
PIO Controller and PIO_PSR returns 1 systematically.
Table 27-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
PIO Enable Register
PIO_PER
Write-only
–
0x0004
PIO Disable Register
PIO_PDR
Write-only
–
PIO_PSR
Read-only
(1)
0x0008
PIO Status Register
0x000C
Reserved
0x0010
Output Enable Register
PIO_OER
Write-only
–
0x0014
Output Disable Register
PIO_ODR
Write-only
–
0x0018
Output Status Register
PIO_OSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
0x001C
Reserved
0x0020
Glitch Input Filter Enable Register
PIO_IFER
Write-only
–
0x0024
Glitch Input Filter Disable Register
PIO_IFDR
Write-only
–
0x0028
Glitch Input Filter Status Register
PIO_IFSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
0x002C
Reserved
0x0030
Set Output Data Register
PIO_SODR
Write-only
–
0x0034
Clear Output Data Register
PIO_CODR
Write-only
0x0038
Output Data Status Register
PIO_ODSR
Read-only
or(2)
Read/Write
–
0x003C
Pin Data Status Register
PIO_PDSR
Read-only
(3)
0x0040
Interrupt Enable Register
PIO_IER
Write-only
–
0x0044
Interrupt Disable Register
PIO_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0048
Interrupt Mask Register
PIO_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
PIO_ISR
Read-only
0x00000000
(4)
0x004C
Interrupt Status Register
0x0050
Multi-driver Enable Register
PIO_MDER
Write-only
–
0x0054
Multi-driver Disable Register
PIO_MDDR
Write-only
–
0x0058
Multi-driver Status Register
PIO_MDSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x005C
Reserved
0x0060
Pull-up Disable Register
PIO_PUDR
Write-only
–
0x0064
Pull-up Enable Register
PIO_PUER
Write-only
–
0x0068
Pad Pull-up Status Register
PIO_PUSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x006C
Reserved
0x0070
Peripheral A Select Register(5)
PIO_ASR
Write-only
–
0x0074
(5)
Peripheral B Select Register
PIO_BSR
Write-only
–
0x0078
AB Status Register(5)
PIO_ABSR
Read-only
0x00000000
346
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 27-2.
Register Mapping (Continued)
Offset
Register
0x007C–0x009C
Reserved
0x00A0
Output Write Enable
0x00A4
0x00A8
Name
Access
Reset
PIO_OWER
Write-only
–
Output Write Disable
PIO_OWDR
Write-only
–
Output Write Status Register
PIO_OWSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00AC
Reserved
Notes: 1. Reset value of PIO_PSR depends on the product implementation.
2. PIO_ODSR is Read-only or Read/Write depending on PIO_OWSR I/O lines.
3. Reset value of PIO_PDSR depends on the level of the I/O lines. Reading the I/O line levels requires the clock of the PIO
Controller to be enabled, otherwise PIO_PDSR reads the levels present on the I/O line at the time the clock was disabled.
4. PIO_ISR is reset at 0x0. However, the first read of the register may read a different value as input changes may have
occurred.
5. Only this set of registers clears the status by writing 1 in the first register and sets the status by writing 1 in the second
register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
347
27.6.1 PIO Controller PIO Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: PIO Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PIO to control the corresponding pin (disables peripheral control of the pin).
348
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.2 PIO Controller PIO Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: PIO Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PIO from controlling the corresponding pin (enables peripheral control of the pin).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
349
27.6.3 PIO Controller PIO Status Register
Name:
PIO_PSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: PIO Status
0: PIO is inactive on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is active).
1: PIO is active on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is inactive).
350
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.4 PIO Controller Output Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the output on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
351
27.6.5 PIO Controller Output Disable Register
Name:
PIO_ODR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the output on the I/O line.
352
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.6 PIO Controller Output Status Register
Name:
PIO_OSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Status
0: The I/O line is a pure input.
1: The I/O line is enabled in output.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
353
27.6.7 PIO Controller Input Filter Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IFER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Filter Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
354
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.8 PIO Controller Input Filter Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IFDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Filter Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
355
27.6.9 PIO Controller Input Filter Status Register
Name:
PIO_IFSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Filer Status
0: The input glitch filter is disabled on the I/O line.
1: The input glitch filter is enabled on the I/O line.
356
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.10 PIO Controller Set Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_SODR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Set Output Data
0: No effect.
1: Sets the data to be driven on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
357
27.6.11 PIO Controller Clear Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_CODR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Set Output Data
0: No effect.
1: Clears the data to be driven on the I/O line.
358
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.12 PIO Controller Output Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_ODSR
Access:
Read-only or Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Data Status
0: The data to be driven on the I/O line is 0.
1: The data to be driven on the I/O line is 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
359
27.6.13 PIO Controller Pin Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_PDSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Data Status
0: The I/O line is at level 0.
1: The I/O line is at level 1.
360
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.14 PIO Controller Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Input Change Interrupt on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
361
27.6.15 PIO Controller Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Input Change Interrupt on the I/O line.
362
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.16 PIO Controller Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PIO_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Mask
0: Input Change Interrupt is disabled on the I/O line.
1: Input Change Interrupt is enabled on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
363
27.6.17 PIO Controller Interrupt Status Register
Name:
PIO_ISR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Status
0: No Input Change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
1: At least one Input Change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
364
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.18 PIO Multi-driver Enable Register
Name:
PIO_MDER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Multi Drive Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables Multi Drive on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
365
27.6.19 PIO Multi-driver Disable Register
Name:
PIO_MDDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Multi Drive Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables Multi Drive on the I/O line.
366
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.20 PIO Multi-driver Status Register
Name:
PIO_MDSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Multi Drive Status
0: The Multi Drive is disabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at high and low level.
1: The Multi Drive is enabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at low level only.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
367
27.6.21 PIO Pull Up Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PUDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Pull Up Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the pull up resistor on the I/O line.
368
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.22 PIO Pull Up Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PUER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Pull Up Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the pull up resistor on the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
369
27.6.23 PIO Pull Up Status Register
Name:
PIO_PUSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Pull Up Status
0: Pull Up resistor is enabled on the I/O line.
1: Pull Up resistor is disabled on the I/O line.
370
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.24 PIO Peripheral A Select Register
Name:
PIO_ASR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Peripheral A Select
0: No effect.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral A function.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
371
27.6.25 PIO Peripheral B Select Register
Name:
PIO_BSR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Peripheral B Select
0: No effect.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the peripheral B function.
372
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.26 PIO Peripheral A B Status Register
Name:
PIO_ABSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Peripheral A B Status
0: The I/O line is assigned to the Peripheral A.
1: The I/O line is assigned to the Peripheral B.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
373
27.6.27 PIO Output Write Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OWER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Write Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
374
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
27.6.28 PIO Output Write Disable Register
Name:
PIO_OWDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Write Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
375
27.6.29 PIO Output Write Status Register
Name:
PIO_OWSR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Write Status
0: Writing PIO_ODSR does not affect the I/O line.
1: Writing PIO_ODSR affects the I/O line.
376
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
28.1
Description
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) circuit is a synchronous serial data link that provides communication with
external devices in Master or Slave Mode. It also enables communication between processors if an external
processor is connected to the system.
The Serial Peripheral Interface is essentially a shift register that serially transmits data bits to other SPIs. During a
data transfer, one SPI system acts as the “master”' which controls the data flow, while the other devices act as
“slaves'' which have data shifted into and out by the master. Different CPUs can take turn being masters (Multiple
Master Protocol opposite to Single Master Protocol where one CPU is always the master while all of the others are
always slaves) and one master may simultaneously shift data into multiple slaves. However, only one slave may
drive its output to write data back to the master at any given time.
A slave device is selected when the master asserts its NSS signal. If multiple slave devices exist, the master
generates a separate slave select signal for each slave (NPCS).
The SPI system consists of two data lines and two control lines:
28.2
Master Out Slave In (MOSI): This data line supplies the output data from the master shifted into the input(s)
of the slave(s).
Master In Slave Out (MISO): This data line supplies the output data from a slave to the input of the master.
There may be no more than one slave transmitting data during any particular transfer.
Serial Clock (SPCK): This control line is driven by the master and regulates the flow of the data bits. The
master may transmit data at a variety of baud rates; the SPCK line cycles once for each bit that is
transmitted.
Slave Select (NSS): This control line allows slaves to be turned on and off by hardware.
Embedded Characteristics
Supports communication with serial external devices
̶
Four chip selects with external decoder support allow communication with up to 15 peripherals
̶
Serial memories, such as DataFlash and 3-wire EEPROMs
̶
Serial peripherals, such as ADCs, DACs, LCD Controllers, CAN Controllers and Sensors
̶
External co-processors
Master or slave serial peripheral bus interface
̶
8- to 16-bit programmable data length per chip select
̶
Programmable phase and polarity per chip select
̶
Programmable transfer delays between consecutive transfers and between clock and data per chip
select
̶
Programmable delay between consecutive transfers
̶
Selectable mode fault detection
Very fast transfers supported
̶
Transfers with baud rates up to MCK
̶
The chip select line may be left active to speed up transfers on the same device
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
377
28.3
Block Diagram
Figure 28-1.
Block Diagram
PDC
APB
SPCK
MISO
PMC
MOSI
MCK
SPI Interface
PIO
NPCS0/NSS
NPCS1
NPCS2
Interrupt Control
NPCS3
SPI Interrupt
28.4
Application Block Diagram
Figure 28-2.
Application Block Diagram: Single Master/Multiple Slave Implementation
SPI Master
SPCK
SPCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
NPCS0
NSS
Slave 0
SPCK
NPCS1
NPCS2
NPCS3
NC
MISO
Slave 1
MOSI
NSS
SPCK
MISO
Slave 2
MOSI
NSS
378
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.5
Signal Description
Table 28-1.
Signal Description
Type
28.6
Pin Name
Pin Description
Master
Slave
MISO
Master In Slave Out
Input
Output
MOSI
Master Out Slave In
Output
Input
SPCK
Serial Clock
Output
Input
NPCS1–NPCS3
Peripheral Chip Selects
Output
Unused
NPCS0/NSS
Peripheral Chip Select/Slave Select
Output
Input
Product Dependencies
28.6.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines. The programmer
must first program the PIO controllers to assign the SPI pins to their peripheral functions.
28.6.2 Power Management
The SPI may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must first
configure the PMC to enable the SPI clock.
28.6.3 Interrupt
The SPI interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). Handling the SPI
interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the SPI.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
379
28.7
Functional Description
28.7.1 Modes of Operation
The SPI operates in Master Mode or in Slave Mode.
Operation in Master Mode is programmed by writing at 1 the MSTR bit in the Mode Register. The pins NPCS0 to
NPCS3 are all configured as outputs, the SPCK pin is driven, the MISO line is wired on the receiver input and the
MOSI line driven as an output by the transmitter.
If the MSTR bit is written at 0, the SPI operates in Slave Mode. The MISO line is driven by the transmitter output,
the MOSI line is wired on the receiver input, the SPCK pin is driven by the transmitter to synchronize the receiver.
The NPCS0 pin becomes an input, and is used as a Slave Select signal (NSS). The pins NPCS1 to NPCS3 are not
driven and can be used for other purposes.
The data transfers are identically programmable for both modes of operations. The baud rate generator is
activated only in Master Mode.
28.7.2 Data Transfer
Four combinations of polarity and phase are available for data transfers. The clock polarity is programmed with the
CPOL bit in the Chip Select Register. The clock phase is programmed with the NCPHA bit. These two parameters
determine the edges of the clock signal on which data is driven and sampled. Each of the two parameters has two
possible states, resulting in four possible combinations that are incompatible with one another. Thus, a
master/slave pair must use the same parameter pair values to communicate. If multiple slaves are used and fixed
in different configurations, the master must reconfigure itself each time it needs to communicate with a different
slave.
Table 28-2 shows the four modes and corresponding parameter settings.
Table 28-2.
SPI Bus Protocol Mode
SPI Mode
CPOL
NCPHA
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
1
1
3
1
0
Figure 28-3 and Figure 28-4 show examples of data transfers.
380
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 28-3.
SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 1, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MSB
MISO
(from slave)
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
*
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined, but normally MSB of previous character received.
Figure 28-4.
SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 0, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MISO
(from slave)
*
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
LSB
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined but normally LSB of previous character transmitted.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
381
28.7.3 Master Mode Operations
When configured in Master Mode, the SPI operates on the clock generated by the internal programmable baud
rate generator. It fully controls the data transfers to and from the slave(s) connected to the SPI bus. The SPI drives
the chip select line to the slave and the serial clock signal (SPCK).
The SPI features two holding registers, the Transmit Data Register and the Receive Data Register, and a single
Shift Register. The holding registers maintain the data flow at a constant rate.
After enabling the SPI, a data transfer begins when the processor writes to the SPI_TDR (Transmit Data Register).
The written data is immediately transferred in the Shift Register and transfer on the SPI bus starts. While the data
in the Shift Register is shifted on the MOSI line, the MISO line is sampled and shifted in the Shift Register.
Transmission cannot occur without reception.
Before writing the TDR, the PCS field must be set in order to select a slave.
If new data is written in SPI_TDR during the transfer, it stays in it until the current transfer is completed. Then, the
received data is transferred from the Shift Register to SPI_RDR, the data in SPI_TDR is loaded in the Shift
Register and a new transfer starts.
The transfer of a data written in SPI_TDR in the Shift Register is indicated by the TDRE bit (Transmit Data
Register Empty) in the Status Register (SPI_SR). When new data is written in SPI_TDR, this bit is cleared. The
TDRE bit is used to trigger the Transmit PDC channel.
The end of transfer is indicated by the TXEMPTY flag in the SPI_SR. If a transfer delay (DLYBCT) is greater than
0 for the last transfer, TXEMPTY is set after the completion of said delay. The master clock (MCK) can be switched
off at this time.
The transfer of received data from the Shift Register in SPI_RDR is indicated by the RDRF bit (Receive Data
Register Full) in the Status Register (SPI_SR). When the received data is read, the RDRF bit is cleared.
If the SPI_RDR (Receive Data Register) has not been read before new data is received, the Overrun Error bit
(OVRES) in SPI_SR is set. As long as this flag is set, data is loaded in SPI_RDR. The user has to read the status
register to clear the OVRES bit.
Figure 28-5 on page 383 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Master Mode. Figure 28-6 on page
384 shows a flow chart describing how transfers are handled.
382
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.7.3.1 Master Mode Block Diagram
Figure 28-5.
Master Mode Block Diagram
SPI_CSR0..3
SCBR
Baud Rate Generator
MCK
SPCK
SPI
Clock
SPI_CSR0..3
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
LSB
MISO
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MOSI
SPI_TDR
TDRE
TD
SPI_CSR0..3
CSAAT
SPI_RDR
PCS
PS
NPCS3
PCSDEC
SPI_MR
PCS
0
NPCS2
Current
Peripheral
NPCS1
SPI_TDR
NPCS0
PCS
1
MSTR
MODF
NPCS0
MODFDIS
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
383
28.7.3.2 Master Mode Flow Diagram
Figure 28-6.
Master Mode Flow Diagram S
SPI Enable
- NPCS defines the current Chip Select
- CSAAT, DLYBS, DLYBCT refer to the fields of the
Chip Select Register corresponding to the Current Chip Select
- When NPCS is 0xF, CSAAT is 0.
1
TDRE ?
0
CSAAT ?
PS ?
1
0
0
Fixed
peripheral
PS ?
1
Variable
peripheral
NPCS = SPI_MR(PCS)
Delay DLYBS
Serializer = SPI_TDR(TD)
TDRE = 1
Data Transfer
SPI_RDR(RD) = Serializer
RDRF = 1
Delay DLYBCT
0
TDRE ?
1
1
CSAAT ?
0
NPCS = 0xF
Delay DLYBCS
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Variable
peripheral
SPI_TDR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
no
NPCS = SPI_TDR(PCS)
384
Fixed
peripheral
0
1
yes
SPI_MR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
no
NPCS = 0xF
NPCS = 0xF
Delay DLYBCS
Delay DLYBCS
NPCS = SPI_TDR(PCS)
NPCS = SPI_MR(PCS),
SPI_TDR(PCS)
28.7.3.3 Clock Generation
The SPI Baud rate clock is generated by dividing the Master Clock (MCK), by a value between 1 and 255.
This allows a maximum operating baud rate at up to Master Clock and a minimum operating baud rate of MCK
divided by 255.
Programming the SCBR field at 0 is forbidden. Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can lead to unpredictable
results.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it at a valid value before performing the first transfer.
The divisor can be defined independently for each chip select, as it has to be programmed in the SCBR field of the
Chip Select Registers. This allows the SPI to automatically adapt the baud rate for each interfaced peripheral
without reprogramming.
28.7.3.4 Transfer Delays
Figure 28-7 shows a chip select transfer change and consecutive transfers on the same chip select. Three delays
can be programmed to modify the transfer waveforms:
The delay between chip selects, programmable only once for all the chip selects by writing the DLYBCS field
in the Mode Register. Allows insertion of a delay between release of one chip select and before assertion of
a new one.
The delay before SPCK, independently programmable for each chip select by writing the field DLYBS.
Allows the start of SPCK to be delayed after the chip select has been asserted.
The delay between consecutive transfers, independently programmable for each chip select by writing the
DLYBCT field. Allows insertion of a delay between two transfers occurring on the same chip select
These delays allow the SPI to be adapted to the interfaced peripherals and their speed and bus release time.
Figure 28-7.
Programmable Delays
Chip Select 1
Chip Select 2
SPCK
DLYBCS
DLYBS
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
28.7.3.5 Peripheral Selection
The serial peripherals are selected through the assertion of the NPCS0 to NPCS3 signals. By default, all the
NPCS signals are high before and after each transfer.
The peripheral selection can be performed in two different ways:
Fixed Peripheral Select: SPI exchanges data with only one peripheral
Variable Peripheral Select: Data can be exchanged with more than one peripheral
Fixed Peripheral Select is activated by writing the PS bit to zero in SPI_MR (Mode Register). In this case, the
current peripheral is defined by the PCS field in SPI_MR and the PCS field in the SPI_TDR has no effect.
Variable Peripheral Select is activated by setting PS bit to one. The PCS field in SPI_TDR is used to select the
current peripheral. This means that the peripheral selection can be defined for each new data.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
385
The Fixed Peripheral Selection allows buffer transfers with a single peripheral. Using the PDC is an optimal
means, as the size of the data transfer between the memory and the SPI is either 8 bits or 16 bits. However,
changing the peripheral selection requires the Mode Register to be reprogrammed.
The Variable Peripheral Selection allows buffer transfers with multiple peripherals without reprogramming the
Mode Register. Data written in SPI_TDR is 32 bits wide and defines the real data to be transmitted and the
peripheral it is destined to. Using the PDC in this mode requires 32-bit wide buffers, with the data in the LSBs and
the PCS and LASTXFER fields in the MSBs, however the SPI still controls the number of bits (8 to16) to be
transferred through MISO and MOSI lines with the chip select configuration registers. This is not the optimal
means in term of memory size for the buffers, but it provides a very effective means to exchange data with several
peripherals without any intervention of the processor.
28.7.3.6 Peripheral Chip Select Decoding
The user can program the SPI to operate with up to 15 peripherals by decoding the four Chip Select lines, NPCS0
to NPCS3 with an external logic. This can be enabled by writing the PCSDEC bit at 1 in the Mode Register
(SPI_MR).
When operating without decoding, the SPI makes sure that in any case only one chip select line is activated, i.e.
driven low at a time. If two bits are defined low in a PCS field, only the lowest numbered chip select is driven low.
When operating with decoding, the SPI directly outputs the value defined by the PCS field of either the Mode
Register or the Transmit Data Register (depending on PS).
As the SPI sets a default value of 0xF on the chip select lines (i.e. all chip select lines at 1) when not processing
any transfer, only 15 peripherals can be decoded.
The SPI has only four Chip Select Registers, not 15. As a result, when decoding is activated, each chip select
defines the characteristics of up to four peripherals. As an example, SPI_CRS0 defines the characteristics of the
externally decoded peripherals 0 to 3, corresponding to the PCS values 0x0 to 0x3. Thus, the user has to make
sure to connect compatible peripherals on the decoded chip select lines 0 to 3, 4 to 7, 8 to 11 and 12 to 14.
28.7.3.7 Peripheral Deselection
When operating normally, as soon as the transfer of the last data written in SPI_TDR is completed, the NPCS lines
all rise. This might lead to runtime error if the processor is too long in responding to an interrupt, and thus might
lead to difficulties for interfacing with some serial peripherals requiring the chip select line to remain active during a
full set of transfers.
To facilitate interfacing with such devices, the Chip Select Register can be programmed with the CSAAT bit (Chip
Select Active After Transfer) at 1. This allows the chip select lines to remain in their current state (low = active) until
transfer to another peripheral is required.
Figure 28-8 shows different peripheral deselection cases and the effect of the CSAAT bit.
386
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 28-8.
Peripheral Deselection
CSAAT = 0
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
CSAAT = 1
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS = A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS=A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
B
A
B
DLYBCS
PCS = B
DLYBCS
PCS = B
Write SPI_TDR
28.7.3.8 Mode Fault Detection
A mode fault is detected when the SPI is programmed in Master Mode and a low level is driven by an external
master on the NPCS0/NSS signal. NPCS0, MOSI, MISO and SPCK must be configured in open drain through the
PIO controller, so that external pull up resistors are needed to guarantee high level.
When a mode fault is detected, the MODF bit in the SPI_SR is set until the SPI_SR is read and the SPI is
automatically disabled until re-enabled by writing the SPIEN bit in the SPI_CR (Control Register) at 1.
By default, the Mode Fault detection circuitry is enabled. The user can disable Mode Fault detection by setting the
MODFDIS bit in the SPI Mode Register (SPI_MR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
387
28.7.4 SPI Slave Mode
When operating in Slave Mode, the SPI processes data bits on the clock provided on the SPI clock pin (SPCK).
The SPI waits for NSS to go active before receiving the serial clock from an external master. When NSS falls, the
clock is validated on the serializer, which processes the number of bits defined by the BITS field of the Chip Select
Register 0 (SPI_CSR0). These bits are processed following a phase and a polarity defined respectively by the
NCPHA and CPOL bits of the SPI_CSR0. Note that BITS, CPOL and NCPHA of the other Chip Select Registers
have no effect when the SPI is programmed in Slave Mode.
The bits are shifted out on the MISO line and sampled on the MOSI line.
When all the bits are processed, the received data is transferred in the Receive Data Register and the RDRF bit
rises. If the SPI_RDR (Receive Data Register) has not been read before new data is received, the Overrun Error
bit (OVRES) in SPI_SR is set. As long as this flag is set, data is loaded in SPI_RDR. The user has to read the
status register to clear the OVRES bit.
When a transfer starts, the data shifted out is the data present in the Shift Register. If no data has been written in
the Transmit Data Register (SPI_TDR), the last data received is transferred. If no data has been received since the
last reset, all bits are transmitted low, as the Shift Register resets at 0.
When a first data is written in SPI_TDR, it is transferred immediately in the Shift Register and the TDRE bit rises. If
new data is written, it remains in SPI_TDR until a transfer occurs, i.e. NSS falls and there is a valid clock on the
SPCK pin. When the transfer occurs, the last data written in SPI_TDR is transferred in the Shift Register and the
TDRE bit rises. This enables frequent updates of critical variables with single transfers.
Then, a new data is loaded in the Shift Register from the Transmit Data Register. In case no character is ready to
be transmitted, i.e. no character has been written in SPI_TDR since the last load from SPI_TDR to the Shift
Register, the Shift Register is not modified and the last received character is retransmitted.
Figure 28-9 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Slave Mode.
Figure 28-9.
Slave Mode Functional Block Diagram
SPCK
NSS
SPI
Clock
SPIEN
SPIENS
SPIDIS
SPI_CSR0
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
MOSI
LSB
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MISO
SPI_TDR
TD
388
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
TDRE
28.8
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) User Interface
Table 28-3.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
SPI_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
SPI_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x08
Receive Data Register
SPI_RDR
Read-only
0x0
0x0C
Transmit Data Register
SPI_TDR
Write-only
–
0x10
Status Register
SPI_SR
Read-only
0x000000F0
0x14
Interrupt Enable Register
SPI_IER
Write-only
–
0x18
Interrupt Disable Register
SPI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x1C
Interrupt Mask Register
SPI_IMR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x30
Chip Select Register 0
SPI_CSR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x34
Chip Select Register 1
SPI_CSR1
Read/Write
0x0
0x38
Chip Select Register 2
SPI_CSR2
Read/Write
0x0
0x3C
Chip Select Register 3
SPI_CSR3
Read/Write
0x0
0x004C–0x00F8
Reserved
–
–
–
0x004C–0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for the PDC
–
–
–
0x20–0x2C
0x100–0x124
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
389
28.8.1 SPI Control Register
Name:
SPI_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
–
–
–
–
–
SPIDIS
SPIEN
• SPIEN: SPI Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the SPI to transfer and receive data.
• SPIDIS: SPI Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the SPI.
As soon as SPIDIS is set, SPI finishes its transfer.
All pins are set in input mode and no data is received or transmitted.
If a transfer is in progress, the transfer is finished before the SPI is disabled.
If both SPIEN and SPIDIS are equal to one when the control register is written, the SPI is disabled.
• SWRST: SPI Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Reset the SPI. A software-triggered hardware reset of the SPI interface is performed.
The SPI is in slave mode after software reset.
PDC channels are not affected by software reset.
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0: No effect.
1: The current NPCS will be deasserted after the character written in TD has been transferred. When CSAAT is set, this
allows to close the communication with the current serial peripheral by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer has completed.
390
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.8.2 SPI Mode Register
Name:
SPI_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
DLYBCS
23
22
21
20
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3
7
6
5
4
LLB
–
–
MODFDIS
PCS
2
1
0
PCSDEC
PS
MSTR
• MSTR: Master/Slave Mode
0: SPI is in Slave mode.
1: SPI is in Master mode.
• PS: Peripheral Select
0: Fixed Peripheral Select.
1: Variable Peripheral Select.
• PCSDEC: Chip Select Decode
0: The chip selects are directly connected to a peripheral device.
1: The four chip select lines are connected to a 4- to 16-bit decoder.
When PCSDEC equals one, up to 15 Chip Select signals can be generated with the four lines using an external 4- to 16-bit
decoder. The Chip Select Registers define the characteristics of the 15 chip selects according to the following rules:
SPI_CSR0 defines peripheral chip select signals 0 to 3.
SPI_CSR1 defines peripheral chip select signals 4 to 7.
SPI_CSR2 defines peripheral chip select signals 8 to 11.
SPI_CSR3 defines peripheral chip select signals 12 to 14.
• MODFDIS: Mode Fault Detection
0: Mode fault detection is enabled.
1: Mode fault detection is disabled.
• LLB: Local Loopback Enable
0: Local loopback path disabled.
1: Local loopback path enabled.
LLB controls the local loopback on the data serializer for testing in Master Mode only. (MISO is internally connected on
MOSI.)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
391
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if Fixed Peripheral Select is active (PS = 0).
If PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = xxx0
NPCS[3:0] = 1110
PCS = xx01
NPCS[3:0] = 1101
PCS = x011
NPCS[3:0] = 1011
PCS = 0111
NPCS[3:0] = 0111
PCS = 1111
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[3:0] output signals = PCS.
• DLYBCS: Delay Between Chip Selects
This field defines the delay from NPCS inactive to the activation of another NPCS. The DLYBCS time guarantees nonoverlapping chip selects and solves bus contentions in case of peripherals having long data float times.
If DLYBCS is less than or equal to six, six MCK periods will be inserted by default.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
DLYBCS
Delay Between Chip Selects = ----------------------MCK
392
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.8.3 SPI Receive Data Register
Name:
SPI_RDR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RD
7
6
5
4
RD
• RD: Receive Data
Data received by the SPI Interface is stored in this register right-justified. Unused bits read zero.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
In Master Mode only, these bits indicate the value on the NPCS pins at the end of a transfer. Otherwise, these bits read
zero.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
393
28.8.4 SPI Transmit Data Register
Name:
SPI_TDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TD
7
6
5
4
TD
• TD: Transmit Data
Data to be transmitted by the SPI Interface is stored in this register. Information to be transmitted must be written to the
transmit data register in a right-justified format.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if Variable Peripheral Select is active (PS = 1).
If PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = xxx0
NPCS[3:0] = 1110
PCS = xx01
NPCS[3:0] = 1101
PCS = x011
NPCS[3:0] = 1011
PCS = 0111
NPCS[3:0] = 0111
PCS = 1111
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[3:0] output signals = PCS
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0: No effect.
1: The current NPCS will be deasserted after the character written in TD has been transferred. When CSAAT is set, this
allows to close the communication with the current serial peripheral by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer has completed.
This field is only used if Variable Peripheral Select is active (PS = 1).
394
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.8.5 SPI Status Register
Name:
SPI_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SPIENS
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full
0: No data has been received since the last read of SPI_RDR
1: Data has been received and the received data has been transferred from the serializer to SPI_RDR since the last read
of SPI_RDR.
• TDRE: Transmit Data Register Empty
0: Data has been written to SPI_TDR and not yet transferred to the serializer.
1: The last data written in the Transmit Data Register has been transferred to the serializer.
TDRE equals zero when the SPI is disabled or at reset. The SPI enable command sets this bit to one.
• MODF: Mode Fault Error
0: No Mode Fault has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: A Mode Fault occurred since the last read of the SPI_SR.
• OVRES: Overrun Error Status
0: No overrun has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: An overrun has occurred since the last read of SPI_SR.
An overrun occurs when SPI_RDR is loaded at least twice from the serializer since the last read of the SPI_RDR.
• ENDRX: End of RX buffer
0: The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1).
1: The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1).
• ENDTX: End of TX buffer
0: The Transmit Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1).
1: The Transmit Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1).
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0: SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1) has a value other than 0.
1: Both SPI_RCR(1) and SPI_RNCR(1) have a value of 0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
395
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty
0: SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1) has a value other than 0.
1: Both SPI_TCR(1) and SPI_TNCR(1) have a value of 0.
• NSSR: NSS Rising
0: No rising edge detected on NSS pin since last read.
1: A rising edge occurred on NSS pin since last read.
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty
0: As soon as data is written in SPI_TDR.
1: SPI_TDR and internal shifter are empty. If a transfer delay has been defined, TXEMPTY is set after the completion of
such delay.
• SPIENS: SPI Enable Status
0: SPI is disabled.
1: SPI is enabled.
Note:
396
1. SPI_RCR, SPI_RNCR, SPI_TCR, SPI_TNCR are physically located in the PDC.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.8.6 SPI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
SPI_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Enable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Enable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Enable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
397
28.8.7 SPI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
SPI_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Disable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Disable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Disable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Disable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
398
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
28.8.8 SPI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
SPI_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Mask
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Mask
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Mask
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Mask
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
399
28.8.9 SPI Chip Select Register
Name:
SPI_CSR0... SPI_CSR3
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
DLYBCT
23
22
21
20
DLYBS
15
14
13
12
SCBR
7
6
5
4
BITS
3
2
1
0
CSAAT
–
NCPHA
CPOL
• CPOL: Clock Polarity
0: The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level zero.
1: The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level one.
CPOL is used to determine the inactive state value of the serial clock (SPCK). It is used with NCPHA to produce the
required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• NCPHA: Clock Phase
0: Data is changed on the leading edge of SPCK and captured on the following edge of SPCK.
1: Data is captured on the leading edge of SPCK and changed on the following edge of SPCK.
NCPHA determines which edge of SPCK causes data to change and which edge causes data to be captured. NCPHA is
used with CPOL to produce the required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• CSAAT: Chip Select Active After Transfer
0: The Peripheral Chip Select Line rises as soon as the last transfer is achieved.
1: The Peripheral Chip Select does not rise after the last transfer is achieved. It remains active until a new transfer is
requested on a different chip select.
400
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• BITS: Bits Per Transfer
The BITS field determines the number of data bits transferred. Reserved values should not be used.
Value
Bits Per Transfer
0000
8
0001
9
0010
10
0011
11
0100
12
0101
13
0110
14
0111
15
1000
16
1001
Reserved
1010
Reserved
1011
Reserved
1100
Reserved
1101
Reserved
1110
Reserved
1111
Reserved
• SCBR: Serial Clock Baud Rate
In Master Mode, the SPI Interface uses a modulus counter to derive the SPCK baud rate from the Master Clock MCK. The
Baud rate is selected by writing a value from 1 to 255 in the SCBR field. The following equations determine the SPCK baud
rate:
MCK
SPCK Baudrate = --------------SCBR
Programming the SCBR field at 0 is forbidden. Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can lead to unpredictable results.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it at a valid value before performing the first transfer.
• DLYBS: Delay Before SPCK
This field defines the delay from NPCS valid to the first valid SPCK transition.
When DLYBS equals zero, the NPCS valid to SPCK transition is 1/2 the SPCK clock period.
Otherwise, the following equations determine the delay:
DLYBS
Delay Before SPCK = ------------------MCK
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
401
• DLYBCT: Delay Between Consecutive Transfers
This field defines the delay between two consecutive transfers with the same peripheral without removing the chip select.
The delay is always inserted after each transfer and before removing the chip select if needed.
When DLYBCT equals zero, no delay between consecutive transfers is inserted and the clock keeps its duty cycle over the
character transfers.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
32 × DLYBCT
Delay Between Consecutive Transfers = -----------------------------------MCK
402
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.
Two-wire Interface (TWI)
29.1
Description
The Atmel Two-wire Interface (TWI) interconnects components on a unique two-wire bus, made up of one clock
line and one data line with speeds of up to 400 kbits per second, based on a byte-oriented transfer format. It can
be used with any Atmel Two-wire Interface bus Serial EEPROM and I²C compatible device such as Real Time
Clock (RTC), Dot Matrix/Graphic LCD Controllers and Temperature Sensor, to name but a few. The TWI is
programmable as a master or a slave with sequential or single-byte access. Multiple master capability is
supported. Arbitration of the bus is performed internally and puts the TWI in slave mode automatically if the bus
arbitration is lost.
A configurable baud rate generator permits the output data rate to be adapted to a wide range of core clock
frequencies.
Table 29-1 lists the compatibility level of the Atmel Two-wire Interface in Master Mode and a full I2C compatible
device.
Table 29-1.
Atmel TWI compatibility with i2C Standard
I2C Standard
Atmel TWI
Standard Mode Speed (100 kHz)
Supported
Fast Mode Speed (400 kHz)
Supported
7 or 10 bits Slave Addressing
Supported
(1)
START BYTE
Not Supported
Repeated Start (Sr) Condition
Supported
ACK and NACK Management
Supported
Slope control and input filtering (Fast mode)
Not Supported
Clock stretching
Supported
Note:
29.2
29.3
1.
START + b000000001 + Ack + Sr
Embedded Characteristics
Master, MultiMaster and Slave modes supported
General Call supported in Slave mode
List of Abbreviations
Table 29-2.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
TWI
Two-wire Interface
A
Acknowledge
NA
Non Acknowledge
P
Stop
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
SADR
Slave Address
ADR
Any address except SADR
R
Read
W
Write
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
403
29.4
Block Diagram
Figure 29-1.
Block Diagram
APB Bridge
TWCK
PIO
PMC
MCK
TWD
Two-wire
Interface
TWI
Interrupt
29.5
AIC
Application Block Diagram
Figure 29-2.
Application Block Diagram
VDD
Rp
Host with
TWI
Interface
Rp
TWD
TWCK
Atmel TWI
Serial EEPROM
Slave 1
I²C RTC
I²C LCD
Controller
I²C Temp.
Sensor
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
Rp: Pull up value as given by the I²C Standard
29.5.1 I/O Lines Description
Table 29-3.
404
I/O Lines Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data
Input/Output
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock
Input/Output
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Type
29.6
Product Dependencies
29.6.1 I/O Lines
Both TWD and TWCK are bidirectional lines, connected to a positive supply voltage via a current source or pull-up
resistor (see Figure 29-2 on page 404). When the bus is free, both lines are high. The output stages of devices
connected to the bus must have an open-drain or open-collector to perform the wired-AND function.
TWD and TWCK pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. To enable the TWI, the programmer must perform the
following steps:
Program the PIO controller to:
̶
Dedicate TWD and TWCK as peripheral lines.
̶
Define TWD and TWCK as open-drain.
29.6.2 Power Management
Enable the peripheral clock.
The TWI interface may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must
first configure the PMC to enable the TWI clock.
29.6.3 Interrupt
The TWI interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). In order to handle
interrupts, the AIC must be programmed before configuring the TWI.
29.7
Functional Description
29.7.1 Transfer Format
The data put on the TWD line must be 8 bits long. Data is transferred MSB first; each byte must be followed by an
acknowledgement. The number of bytes per transfer is unlimited (see Figure 29-4).
Each transfer begins with a START condition and terminates with a STOP condition (see Figure 29-3).
A high-to-low transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the START condition.
A low-to-high transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines a STOP condition.
Figure 29-3.
START and STOP Conditions
TWD
TWCK
Start
Figure 29-4.
Stop
Transfer Format
TWD
TWCK
Start
Address
R/W
Ack
Data
Ack
Data
Ack
Stop
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
405
29.7.2 Modes of Operation
The TWI has six modes of operations:
Master transmitter mode
Master receiver mode
Multi-master transmitter mode
Multi-master receiver mode
Slave transmitter mode
Slave receiver mode
These modes are described in the following chapters.
29.7.3 Master Mode
29.7.3.1 Definition
The Master is the device which starts a transfer, generates a clock and stops it.
29.7.3.2 Application Block Diagram
Figure 29-5.
Master Mode Typical Application Block Diagram
VDD
Rp
Host with
TWI
Interface
Rp
TWD
TWCK
Atmel TWI
Serial EEPROM
Slave 1
I²C RTC
I²C LCD
Controller
I²C Temp.
Sensor
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
Rp: Pull up value as given by the I²C Standard
29.7.3.3 Programming Master Mode
The following registers have to be programmed before entering Master mode:
1.
DADR (+ IADRSZ + IADR if a 10 bit device is addressed): The device address is used to access slave
devices in read or write mode.
2.
CKDIV + CHDIV + CLDIV: Clock Waveform.
3.
SVDIS: Disable the slave mode.
4.
MSEN: Enable the master mode.
29.7.3.4 Master Transmitter Mode
After the master initiates a Start condition when writing into the Transmit Holding Register, TWI_THR, it sends a 7bit slave address, configured in the Master Mode register (DADR in TWI_MMR), to notify the slave device. The bit
following the slave address indicates the transfer direction, 0 in this case (MREAD = 0 in TWI_MMR).
The TWI transfers require the slave to acknowledge each received byte. During the acknowledge clock pulse (9th
pulse), the master releases the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the
acknowledge. The master polls the data line during this clock pulse and sets the Not Acknowledge bit (NACK) in
the status register if the slave does not acknowledge the byte. As with the other status bits, an interrupt can be
406
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
generated if enabled in the interrupt enable register (TWI_IER). If the slave acknowledges the byte, the data
written in the TWI_THR, is then shifted in the internal shifter and transferred. When an acknowledge is detected,
the TXRDY bit is set until a new write in the TWI_THR. When no more data is written into the TWI_THR, the
master generates a stop condition to end the transfer. The end of the complete transfer is marked by the
TWI_TXCOMP bit set to one. See Figure 29-6, Figure 29-7, and Figure 29-8.
Figure 29-6.
Master Write with One Data Byte
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
DATA
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
STOP sent automaticaly
(ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
Write THR (DATA)
Figure 29-7.
Master Write with Multiple Data Byte
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+5
A
DATA n+x
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
Figure 29-8.
TWD S
Write THR (Data n+1)
Write THR (Data n+x)
Last data sent
STOP sent automaticaly
(ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
Master Write with One Byte Internal Address and Multiple Data Bytes
DADR
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+5
A
DATA n+x
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
Write THR (Data n+1)
Write THR (Data n+x) STOP sent automaticaly
Last data sent (ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
407
29.7.3.5 Master Receiver Mode
The read sequence begins by setting the START bit. After the start condition has been sent, the master sends a 7bit slave address to notify the slave device. The bit following the slave address indicates the transfer direction, 1 in
this case (MREAD = 1 in TWI_MMR). During the acknowledge clock pulse (9th pulse), the master releases the
data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the acknowledge. The master polls the
data line during this clock pulse and sets the NACK bit in the status register if the slave does not acknowledge the
byte.
If an acknowledge is received, the master is then ready to receive data from the slave. After data has been
received, the master sends an acknowledge condition to notify the slave that the data has been received except
for the last data, after the stop condition. See Figure 29-9. When the RXRDY bit is set in the status register, a
character has been received in the receive-holding register (TWI_RHR). The RXRDY bit is reset when reading the
TWI_RHR.
When a single data byte read is performed, with or without internal address (IADR), the START and STOP bits
must be set at the same time. See Figure 29-9. When a multiple data byte read is performed, with or without
internal address (IADR), the STOP bit must be set after the next-to-last data received. See Figure 29-10. For
Internal Address usage see Section 29.7.3.6.
Figure 29-9.
Master Read with One Data Byte
TWD
S
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
TXCOMP
Write START &
STOP Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
Figure 29-10. Master Read with Multiple Data Bytes
TWD
S
DADR
R
A
DATA n
A
DATA (n+1)
A
DATA (n+m)-1
A
DATA (n+m)
N
P
TXCOMP
Write START Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
DATA n
Read RHR
DATA (n+1)
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)-1
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)
Write STOP Bit
after next-to-last data read
408
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.7.3.6 Internal Address
The TWI interface can perform various transfer formats: Transfers with 7-bit slave address devices and 10-bit
slave address devices.
7-bit Slave Addressing
When Addressing 7-bit slave devices, the internal address bytes are used to perform random address (read or
write) accesses to reach one or more data bytes, within a memory page location in a serial memory, for example.
When performing read operations with an internal address, the TWI performs a write operation to set the internal
address into the slave device, and then switch to Master Receiver mode. Note that the second start condition (after
sending the IADR) is sometimes called “repeated start” (Sr) in I2C fully-compatible devices. See Figure 29-12. See
Figure 29-11 and Figure 29-13 for Master Write operation with internal address.
The three internal address bytes are configurable through the Master Mode register (TWI_MMR).
If the slave device supports only a 7-bit address, i.e. no internal address, IADRSZ must be set to 0.
In the figures below the following abbreviations are used:
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
P
Stop
W
Write
R
Read
A
Acknowledge
N
Not Acknowledge
DADR
Device Address
IADR
Internal Address
Figure 29-11. Master Write with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
Figure 29-12. Master Read with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
R
A
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
DADR
DATA
N
P
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
409
10-bit Slave Addressing
For a slave address higher than 7 bits, the user must configure the address size (IADRSZ) and set the other slave
address bits in the internal address register (TWI_IADR). The two remaining Internal address bytes, IADR[15:8]
and IADR[23:16] can be used the same as in 7-bit Slave Addressing.
Example: Address a 10-bit device (10-bit device address is b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10)
1.
Program IADRSZ = 1,
2.
Program DADR with 1 1 1 1 0 b1 b2 (b1 is the MSB of the 10-bit address, b2, etc.)
3.
Program TWI_IADR with b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 (b10 is the LSB of the 10-bit address)
Figure 29-13 below shows a byte write to an Atmel AT24LC512 EEPROM. This demonstrates the use of internal
addresses to access the device.
Figure 29-13.
Internal Address Usage
S
T
A
R
T
Device
Address
W
R
I
T
E
FIRST
WORD ADDRESS
SECOND
WORD ADDRESS
S
T
O
P
DATA
0
M
S
B
410
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
LR A
S / C
BW K
M
S
B
A
C
K
LA
SC
BK
A
C
K
29.7.3.7 Read/Write Flowcharts
The flowcharts shown in the following figures provide examples for read and write operations. A polling or interrupt
method can be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that the Interrupt Enable Register
(TWI_IER) be configured first.
Figure 29-14. TWI Write Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Load Transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
Transfer finished
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
411
Figure 29-15. TWI Write Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Load transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
TXCOMP = 1?
No
Yes
Transfer finished
412
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 29-16. TWI Write Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Load Transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
TWI_THR = data to send
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Data to send?
Yes
Read Status register
Yes
No
TXCOMP = 1?
END
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
413
Figure 29-17. TWI Read Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START | STOP
Read status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding Register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
414
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 29-18. TWI Read Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START | STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
415
Figure 29-19. TWI Read Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START
Read Status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWI_RHR)
No
Last data to read
but one?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWI_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWI_RHR)
Read status register
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
416
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
No
29.7.4 Multi-master Mode
29.7.4.1 Definition
More than one master may handle the bus at the same time without data corruption by using arbitration.
Arbitration starts as soon as two or more masters place information on the bus at the same time, and stops
(arbitration is lost) for the master that intends to send a logical one while the other master sends a logical zero.
As soon as arbitration is lost by a master, it stops sending data and listens to the bus in order to detect a stop.
When the stop is detected, the master who has lost arbitration may put its data on the bus by respecting
arbitration.
Arbitration is illustrated in Figure 29-21 on page 418.
29.7.4.2 Different Multi-master Modes
Two multi-master modes may be distinguished:
1.
TWI is considered as a Master only and will never be addressed.
2.
TWI may be either a Master or a Slave and may be addressed.
Note:
In both Multi-master modes arbitration is supported.
TWI as Master Only
In this mode, TWI is considered as a Master only (MSEN is always at one) and must be driven like a Master with
the ARBLST (ARBitration Lost) flag in addition.
If arbitration is lost (ARBLST = 1), the programmer must reinitiate the data transfer.
If the user starts a transfer (ex.: DADR + START + W + Write in THR) and if the bus is busy, the TWI automatically
waits for a STOP condition on the bus to initiate the transfer (see Figure 29-20 on page 418).
Note:
The state of the bus (busy or free) is not indicated in the user interface.
TWI as Master or Slave
The automatic reversal from Master to Slave is not supported in case of a lost arbitration.
Then, in the case where TWI may be either a Master or a Slave, the programmer must manage the pseudo Multimaster mode described in the steps below.
1.
Program TWI in Slave mode (SADR + MSDIS + SVEN) and perform Slave Access (if TWI is addressed).
2.
If TWI has to be set in Master mode, wait until TXCOMP flag is at 1.
3.
Program Master mode (DADR + SVDIS + MSEN) and start the transfer (ex: START + Write in THR).
4.
As soon as the Master mode is enabled, TWI scans the bus in order to detect if it is busy or free. When the
bus is considered as free, TWI initiates the transfer.
5.
As soon as the transfer is initiated and until a STOP condition is sent, the arbitration becomes relevant and
the user must monitor the ARBLST flag.
6.
If the arbitration is lost (ARBLST is set to 1), the user must program the TWI in Slave mode in the case
where the Master that won the arbitration wanted to access the TWI.
7.
If TWI has to be set in Slave mode, wait until TXCOMP flag is at 1 and then program the Slave mode.
Note:
In the case where the arbitration is lost and TWI is addressed, TWI will not acknowledge even if it is programmed in
Slave mode as soon as ARBLST is set to 1. Then, the Master must repeat SADR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
417
Figure 29-20. Programmer Sends Data While the Bus is Busy
TWCK
START sent by the TWI
STOP sent by the master
DATA sent by a master
TWD
DATA sent by the TWI
Bus is busy
Bus is free
Transfer is kept
TWI DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
Figure 29-21. Arbitration Cases
TWCK
TWD
TWCK
Data from a Master
S
1
0 0 1 1
Data from TWI
S
1
0
TWD
S
1
0 0
1
P
Arbitration is lost
TWI stops sending data
1 1
Data from the master
P
Arbitration is lost
S
1
0
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
The master stops sending data
Data from the TWI
ARBLST
Bus is busy
Transfer is kept
TWI DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is free
Transfer is stopped
Transfer is programmed again
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
The flowchart shown in Figure 29-22 on page 419 gives an example of read and write operations in Multi-master
mode.
418
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 29-22. Multi-master Flowchart
START
Programm the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
Yes
GACC = 1 ?
SVREAD = 0 ?
EOSACC = 1 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Write in TWI_THR
TXCOMP = 1 ?
RXRDY= 0 ?
Yes
Yes
Read TWI_RHR
Need to perform
a master access ?
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Yes
Decoding of the
programming sequence
Prog seq
OK ?
Change SADR
Program the Master mode
DADR + SVDIS + MSEN + CLK + R / W
Read Status Register
Yes
ARBLST = 1 ?
Yes
Yes
Read TWI_RHR
Yes
MREAD = 1 ?
RXRDY= 0 ?
TXRDY= 0 ?
Data to read?
Data to send ?
Yes
Yes
Write in TWI_THR
Stop transfer
Read Status Register
Yes
TXCOMP = 0 ?
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
419
29.7.5 Slave Mode
29.7.5.1 Definition
The Slave Mode is defined as a mode where the device receives the clock and the address from another device
called the master.
In this mode, the device never initiates and never completes the transmission (START, REPEATED_START and
STOP conditions are always provided by the master).
29.7.5.2 Application Block Diagram
Figure 29-23. Slave Mode Typical Application Block Diagram
VDD
R
Master
Host with
TWI
Interface
R
TWD
TWCK
Host with TWI
Interface
Host with TWI
Interface
LCD Controller
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
29.7.5.3 Programming Slave Mode
The following fields must be programmed before entering Slave mode:
1.
SADR (TWI_SMR): The slave device address is used in order to be accessed by master devices in read or
write mode.
2.
MSDIS (TWI_CR): Disable the master mode.
3.
SVEN (TWI_CR): Enable the slave mode.
As the device receives the clock, values written in TWI_CWGR are not taken into account.
29.7.5.4 Receiving Data
After a Start or Repeated Start condition is detected and if the address sent by the Master matches with the Slave
address programmed in the SADR (Slave ADdress) field, SVACC (Slave ACCess) flag is set and SVREAD (Slave
READ) indicates the direction of the transfer.
SVACC remains high until a STOP condition or a repeated START is detected. When such a condition is detected,
EOSACC (End Of Slave ACCess) flag is set.
Read Sequence
In the case of a Read sequence (SVREAD is high), TWI transfers data written in the TWI_THR (TWI Transmit
Holding Register) until a STOP condition or a REPEATED_START + an address different from SADR is detected.
Note that at the end of the read sequence TXCOMP (Transmission Complete) flag is set and SVACC reset.
As soon as data is written in the TWI_THR, TXRDY (Transmit Holding Register Ready) flag is reset, and it is set
when the shift register is empty and the sent data acknowledged or not. If the data is not acknowledged, the NACK
flag is set.
Note that a STOP or a repeated START always follows a NACK.
See Figure 29-24 on page 421.
420
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Write Sequence
In the case of a Write sequence (SVREAD is low), the RXRDY (Receive Holding Register Ready) flag is set as
soon as a character has been received in the TWI_RHR (TWI Receive Holding Register). RXRDY is reset when
reading the TWI_RHR.
TWI continues receiving data until a STOP condition or a REPEATED_START + an address different from SADR
is detected. Note that at the end of the write sequence TXCOMP flag is set and SVACC reset.
See Figure 29-25 on page 422.
Clock Synchronization Sequence
In the case where TWI_THR or TWI_RHR is not written/read in time, TWI performs a clock synchronization.
Clock stretching information is given by the SCLWS (Clock Wait state) bit.
See Figure 29-27 on page 423 and Figure 29-28 on page 424.
General Call
In the case where a GENERAL CALL is performed, GACC (General Call ACCess) flag is set.
After GACC is set, it is up to the programmer to interpret the meaning of the GENERAL CALL and to decode the
new address programming sequence.
See Figure 29-26 on page 422.
29.7.6 Data Transfer
Read Operation
The read mode is defined as a data requirement from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START condition is detected, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave
address (SADR) is decoded, SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer.
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, TWI continues sending data loaded in the TWI_THR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 29-24 describes the write operation.
Figure 29-24. Read Access Ordered by a MASTER
SADR matches,
TWI answers with an ACK
SADR does not match,
TWI answers with a NACK
TWD
S
ADR
R
NA
DATA
NA
P/S/Sr
SADR R
A
DATA
A
ACK/NACK from the Master
A
DATA
NA
S/Sr
TXRDY
NACK
Write THR
Read RHR
SVACC
SVREAD
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
EOSVACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. TXRDY is reset when data has been transmitted from TWI_THR to the shift register and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
421
Write Operation
The write mode is defined as a data transmission from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave address is decoded,
SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer (SVREAD is low in this case).
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, TWI stores the received data in the TWI_RHR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 29-25 describes the Write operation.
Figure 29-25. Write Access Ordered by a Master
SADR does not match,
TWI answers with a NACK
S
TWD
ADR
W
NA
DATA
NA
SADR matches,
TWI answers with an ACK
P/S/Sr
SADR W
A
DATA
Read RHR
A
A
DATA
NA
S/Sr
RXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
SVREAD
EOSVACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. RXRDY is set when data has been transmitted from the shift register to the TWI_RHR and reset when this data is read.
General Call
The general call is performed in order to change the address of the slave.
If a GENERAL CALL is detected, GACC is set.
After the detection of General Call, it is up to the programmer to decode the commands which come afterwards.
In case of a WRITE command, the programmer has to decode the programming sequence and program a new
SADR if the programming sequence matches.
Figure 29-26 describes the General Call access.
Figure 29-26. Master Performs a General Call
0000000 + W
TXD
S
GENERAL CALL
RESET command = 00000110X
WRITE command = 00000100X
A
Reset or write DADD
A
DATA1
A
DATA2
A
New SADR
A
P
New SADR
Programming sequence
GCACC
Reset after read
SVACC
Note:
This method allows the user to create an own programming sequence by choosing the programming bytes and the
number of them. The programming sequence has to be provided to the master.
Clock Synchronization
In both read and write modes, it may happen that TWI_THR/TWI_RHR buffer is not filled /emptied before the
emission/reception of a new character. In this case, to avoid sending/receiving undesired data, a clock stretching
mechanism is implemented.
422
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Clock Synchronization in Read Mode
The clock is tied low if the shift register is empty and if a STOP or REPEATED START condition was not detected.
It is tied low until the shift register is loaded.
Figure 29-27 describes the clock synchronization in Read mode.
Figure 29-27. Clock Synchronization in Read Mode
TWI_THR
S
SADR
R
DATA1
1
DATA0
A
DATA0
A
DATA1
DATA2
A
XXXXXXX
DATA2
NA
S
2
TWCK
Write THR
CLOCK is tied low by the TWI
as long as THR is empty
SCLWS
TXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
TWI_THR is transmitted to the shift register
Notes:
Ack or Nack from the master
1
The data is memorized in TWI_THR until a new value is written
2
The clock is stretched after the ACK, the state of TWD is undefined during clock stretching
1. TXRDY is reset when data has been written in the TWI_TH to the shift register and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
2. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
3. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock synchronization mechanism is started.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
423
Clock Synchronization in Write Mode
The clock is tied low if the shift register and the TWI_RHR is full. If a STOP or REPEATED_START condition was
not detected, it is tied low until TWI_RHR is read.
Figure 29-28 describes the clock synchronization in Write mode.
Figure 29-28. Clock Synchronization in Write Mode
TWCK
CLOCK is tied low by the TWI as long as RHR is full
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
TWI_RHR
A
DATA1
A
DATA0 is not read in the RHR
DATA2
DATA1
NA
S
ADR
DATA2
SCLWS
SCL is stretched on the last bit of DATA1
RXRDY
Rd DATA0
Rd DATA1
Rd DATA2
SVACC
SVREAD
TXCOMP
Notes:
424
As soon as a START is detected
1. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
2. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock synchronization mechanism is started and automatically reset when the
mechanism is finished.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Reversal after a Repeated Start
Reversal of Read to Write
The master initiates the communication by a read command and finishes it by a write command.
Figure 29-29 describes the repeated start + reversal from Read to Write mode.
Figure 29-29. Repeated Start + Reversal from Read to Write Mode
TWI_THR
TWD
DATA0
S
SADR
R
A
DATA0
DATA1
A
DATA1
NA
Sr
SADR
W
A
DATA2
TWI_RHR
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
P
DATA3
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
Note:
1. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission because after the repeated start, SADR is detected again.
Reversal of Write to Read
The master initiates the communication by a write command and finishes it by a read command. Figure 29-30
describes the repeated start + reversal from Write to Read mode.
Figure 29-30. Repeated Start + Reversal from Write to Read Mode
DATA2
TWI_THR
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
TWI_RHR
A
DATA1
DATA0
A
Sr
SADR
R
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
DATA3
NA
P
DATA1
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
TXCOMP
Notes:
Read TWI_RHR
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
1. In this case, if TWI_THR has not been written at the end of the read command, the clock is automatically stretched before
the ACK.
2. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission because after the repeated start, SADR is detected again.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
425
29.7.6.1 Read Write Flowcharts
The flowchart shown in Figure 29-31 gives an example of read and write operations in Slave mode. A polling or
interrupt method can be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that the interrupt enable
register (TWI_IER) be configured first.
Figure 29-31. Read Write Flowchart in Slave Mode
Set the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
GACC = 1 ?
SVREAD = 0 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
EOSACC = 1 ?
Write in TWI_THR
TXCOMP = 1 ?
RXRDY= 0 ?
END
Read TWI_RHR
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Decoding of the
programming sequence
Prog seq
OK ?
Change SADR
426
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8
Two-wire Interface (TWI) User Interface
Table 29-4.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
TWI_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Master Mode Register
TWI_MMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Slave Mode Register
TWI_SMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0C
Internal Address Register
TWI_IADR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x10
Clock Waveform Generator Register
TWI_CWGR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x20
Status Register
TWI_SR
Read-only
0x0000F009
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
TWI_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
TWI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
TWI_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30
Receive Holding Register
TWI_RHR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x34
Transmit Holding Register
TWI_THR
Write-only
–
0x38–0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
427
29.8.1 TWI Control Register
Name:
TWI_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
SWRST
6
–
5
SVDIS
4
SVEN
3
MSDIS
2
MSEN
1
STOP
0
START
• START: Send a START Condition
0: No effect.
1: A frame beginning with a START bit is transmitted according to the features defined in the mode register.
This action is necessary when the TWI peripheral wants to read data from a slave. When configured in Master Mode with a
write operation, a frame is sent as soon as the user writes a character in the Transmit Holding Register (TWI_THR).
• STOP: Send a STOP Condition
0: No effect.
1: STOP Condition is sent just after completing the current byte transmission in master read mode.
– In single data byte master read, the START and STOP must both be set.
– In multiple data bytes master read, the STOP must be set after the last data received but one.
– In master read mode, if a NACK bit is received, the STOP is automatically performed.
– In multiple data write operation, when both THR and shift register are empty, a STOP condition is automatically
sent.
• MSEN: TWI Master Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: If MSDIS = 0, the master mode is enabled.
Note: Switching from Slave to Master mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
• MSDIS: TWI Master Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The master mode is disabled, all pending data is transmitted. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are
transmitted in case of write operation. In read operation, the character being transferred must be completely received
before disabling.
• SVEN: TWI Slave Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: If SVDIS = 0, the slave mode is enabled.
Note: Switching from Master to Slave mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
428
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• SVDIS: TWI Slave Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The slave mode is disabled. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are transmitted in case of read operation. In write operation, the character being transferred must be completely received before disabling.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Equivalent to a system reset.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
429
29.8.2 TWI Master Mode Register
Name:
TWI_MMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
DADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
MREAD
11
–
10
–
9
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
8
IADRSZ
0
–
• IADRSZ: Internal Device Address Size
Value
Description
0
0
No internal device address
0
1
One-byte internal device address
1
0
Two-byte internal device address
1
1
Three-byte internal device address
• MREAD: Master Read Direction
0: Master write direction.
1: Master read direction.
• DADR: Device Address
The device address is used to access slave devices in read or write mode. Those bits are only used in Master mode.
430
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8.3 TWI Slave Mode Register
Name:
TWI_SMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
SADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• SADR: Slave Address
The slave device address is used in Slave mode in order to be accessed by master devices in read or write mode.
SADR must be programmed before enabling the Slave mode or after a general call. Writes at other times have no effect.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
431
29.8.4 TWI Internal Address Register
Name:
TWI_IADR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IADR
15
14
13
12
IADR
7
6
5
4
IADR
• IADR: Internal Address
0, 1, 2 or 3 bytes depending on IADRSZ.
432
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8.5 TWI Clock Waveform Generator Register
Name:
TWI_CWGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
CKDIV
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CHDIV
7
6
5
4
CLDIV
TWI_CWGR is only used in Master mode.
• CLDIV: Clock Low Divider
The SCL low period is defined as follows:
tlow = ((CLDIV × 2CKDIV) + 4 × tMCK
• CHDIV: Clock High Divider
The SCL high period is defined as follows:
thigh = ((CHDIV × 2CKDIV) + 4 × tMCK
• CKDIV: Clock Divider
The CKDIV is used to increase both SCL high and low periods.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
433
29.8.6 TWI Status Register
Name:
TWI_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
EOSACC
10
SCLWS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
SVREAD
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed (automatically set / reset)
TXCOMP used in Master mode:
0: During the length of the current frame.
1: When both holding and shifter registers are empty and STOP condition has been sent.
TXCOMP behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-8 on page 407 and in Figure 29-10 on page 408.
TXCOMP used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as a Start is detected.
1: After a Stop or a Repeated Start + an address different from SADR is detected.
TXCOMP behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-27 on page 423, Figure 29-28 on page 424, Figure 29-29 on
page 425 and Figure 29-30 on page 425.
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready (automatically set / reset)
0: No character has been received since the last TWI_RHR read operation.
1: A byte has been received in the TWI_RHR since the last read.
RXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-10 on page 408.
RXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-25 on page 422, Figure 29-28 on page 424, Figure 29-29 on
page 425 and Figure 29-30 on page 425.
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready (automatically set / reset)
TXRDY used in Master mode:
0: The transmit holding register has not been transferred into shift register. Set to 0 when writing into TWI_THR.
1: As soon as a data byte is transferred from TWI_THR to internal shifter or if a NACK error is detected, TXRDY is set at
the same time as TXCOMP and NACK. TXRDY is also set when MSEN is set (enable TWI).
TXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-8 on page 407.
TXRDY used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as data is written in the TWI_THR, until this data has been transmitted and acknowledged (ACK or NACK).
1: It indicates that the TWI_THR is empty and that data has been transmitted and acknowledged.
434
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
If TXRDY is high and if a NACK has been detected, the transmission will be stopped. Thus when TRDY = NACK = 1, the
programmer must not fill TWI_THR to avoid losing it.
TXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-24 on page 421, Figure 29-27 on page 423, Figure 29-29 on
page 425 and Figure 29-30 on page 425.
• SVREAD: Slave Read (automatically set / reset)
This bit is only used in Slave mode. When SVACC is low (no Slave access has been detected) SVREAD is irrelevant.
0: Indicates that a write access is performed by a Master.
1: Indicates that a read access is performed by a Master.
SVREAD behavior can be seen in Figure 29-24 on page 421, Figure 29-25 on page 422, Figure 29-29 on page 425 and
Figure 29-30 on page 425.
• SVACC: Slave Access (automatically set / reset)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: TWI is not addressed. SVACC is automatically cleared after a NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
1: Indicates that the address decoding sequence has matched (A Master has sent SADR). SVACC remains high until a
NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
SVACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-24 on page 421, Figure 29-25 on page 422, Figure 29-29 on page 425 and Figure 29-30 on page 425.
• GACC: General Call Access (clear on read)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: No General Call has been detected.
1: A General Call has been detected. After the detection of General Call, the programmer decoded the commands that follow and the programming sequence.
GACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-26 on page 422.
• OVRE: Overrun Error (clear on read)
This bit is only used in Master mode.
0: TWI_RHR has not been loaded while RXRDY was set
1: TWI_RHR has been loaded while RXRDY was set. Reset by read in TWI_SR when TXCOMP is set.
• NACK: Not Acknowledged (clear on read)
NACK used in Master mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the far-end side TWI slave component.
1: A data byte has not been acknowledged by the slave component. Set at the same time as TXCOMP.
NACK used in Slave Read mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the Master.
1: In read mode, a data byte has not been acknowledged by the Master. When NACK is set the programmer must not fill
TWI_THR even if TXRDY is set, because it means that the Master will stop the data transfer or re initiate it.
Note that in Slave Write mode all data are acknowledged by the TWI.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
435
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost (clear on read)
This bit is only used in Master mode.
0: Arbitration won.
1: Arbitration lost. Another master of the TWI bus has won the multi-master arbitration. TXCOMP is set at the same time.
• SCLWS: Clock Wait State (automatically set / reset)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: The clock is not stretched.
1: The clock is stretched. TWI_THR / TWI_RHR buffer is not filled / emptied before the emission / reception of a new
character.
SCLWS behavior can be seen in Figure 29-27 on page 423 and Figure 29-28 on page 424.
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access (clear on read)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: A slave access is being performing.
1: The Slave Access is finished. End Of Slave Access is automatically set as soon as SVACC is reset.
EOSACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-29 on page 425 and Figure 29-30 on page 425.
436
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8.7 TWI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
TWI_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Enable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Enable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Enable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
437
29.8.8 TWI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
TWI_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Disable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Disable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Disable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Disable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Disable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
438
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8.9 TWI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
TWI_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Mask
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Mask
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Mask
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Mask
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Mask
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
439
29.8.10 TWI Receive Holding Register
Name:
TWI_RHR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDATA
• RXDATA: Master or Slave Receive Holding Data
440
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
29.8.11 TWI Transmit Holding Register
Name:
TWI_THR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDATA
• TXDATA: Master or Slave Transmit Holding Data
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
441
30.
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART)
30.1
Description
The Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART) provides one full duplex universal
synchronous asynchronous serial link. Data frame format is widely programmable (data length, parity, number of
stop bits) to support a maximum of standards. The receiver implements parity error, framing error and overrun
error detection. The receiver time-out enables handling variable-length frames and the transmitter timeguard
facilitates communications with slow remote devices. Multidrop communications are also supported through
address bit handling in reception and transmission.
The USART features three test modes: remote loopback, local loopback and automatic echo.
The USART supports specific operating modes providing interfaces on RS485 buses, with ISO7816 T = 0 or T = 1
smart card slots, infrared transceivers and connection to modem ports. The hardware handshaking feature
enables an out-of-band flow control by automatic management of the pins RTS and CTS.
The USART supports the connection to the Peripheral DMA Controller, which enables data transfers to the
transmitter and from the receiver. The PDC provides chained buffer management without any intervention of the
processor.
30.2
Embedded Characteristics
Programmable Baud Rate Generator
5- to 9-bit full-duplex synchronous or asynchronous serial communications
̶
1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits in Asynchronous Mode or 1 or 2 stop bits in Synchronous Mode
̶
Parity generation and error detection
̶
Framing error detection, overrun error detection
̶
MSB- or LSB-first
̶
Optional break generation and detection
̶
By 8 or by-16 over-sampling receiver frequency
̶
Hardware handshaking RTS-CTS
̶
Optional modem signal management DTR-DSR-DCD-RI
̶
Receiver time-out and transmitter timeguard
̶
Optional Multi-drop Mode with address generation and detection
RS485 with driver control signal
ISO7816, T = 0 or T = 1 Protocols for interfacing with smart cards
IrDA modulation and demodulation
̶
̶
NACK handling, error counter with repetition and iteration limit
Communication at up to 115.2 Kbps
Test Modes
̶
Remote Loopback, Local Loopback, Automatic Echo
The USART contains features allowing management of the Modem Signals DTR, DSR, DCD and RI. In the
SAM9260, only the USART0 implements these signals, named DTR0, DSR0, DCD0 and RI0.
The USART1 and USART2 do not implement all the modem signals. Only RTS and CTS (RTS1 and CTS1, RTS2
and CTS2, respectively) are implemented in these USARTs for other features.
Thus, programming the USART1, USART2 or the USART3 in Modem Mode may lead to unpredictable results. In
these USARTs, the commands relating to the Modem Mode have no effect and the status bits relating the status of
the modem signals are never activated.
442
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.3
Block Diagram
Figure 30-1.
USART Block Diagram
Peripheral DMA
Controller
Channel
Channel
PIO
Controller
USART
RXD
Receiver
RTS
AIC
TXD
USART
Interrupt
Transmitter
CTS
DTR
PMC
Modem
Signals
Control
MCK
DIV
DSR
DCD
MCK/DIV
RI
SLCK
Baud Rate
Generator
SCK
User Interface
APB
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
443
30.4
Application Block Diagram
Figure 30-2.
Application Block Diagram
IrLAP
PPP
Modem
Driver
Serial
Driver
Field Bus
Driver
EMV
Driver
IrDA
Driver
USART
RS232
Drivers
RS232
Drivers
RS485
Drivers
Serial
Port
Differential
Bus
Smart
Card
Slot
IrDA
Transceivers
Modem
PSTN
30.5
I/O Lines Description
Table 30-1.
444
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
Type
Active Level
SCK
Serial Clock
I/O
–
TXD
Transmit Serial Data
I/O
–
RXD
Receive Serial Data
Input
–
RI
Ring Indicator
Input
Low
DSR
Data Set Ready
Input
Low
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
Input
Low
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
Output
Low
CTS
Clear to Send
Input
Low
RTS
Request to Send
Output
Low
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.6
Product Dependencies
30.6.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the USART may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer must first
program the PIO controller to assign the desired USART pins to their peripheral function. If I/O lines of the USART
are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the PIO Controller.
To prevent the TXD line from falling when the USART is disabled, the use of an internal pull up is mandatory. If the
hardware handshaking feature or Modem mode is used, the internal pull up on TXD must also be enabled.
All the pins of the modems may or may not be implemented on the USART. Only USART0 is fully equipped with all
the modem signals. On USARTs not equipped with the corresponding pin, the associated control bits and statuses
have no effect on the behavior of the USART.
30.6.2 Power Management
The USART is not continuously clocked. The programmer must first enable the USART Clock in the Power
Management Controller (PMC) before using the USART. However, if the application does not require USART
operations, the USART clock can be stopped when not needed and be restarted later. In this case, the USART will
resume its operations where it left off.
Configuring the USART does not require the USART clock to be enabled.
30.6.3 Interrupt
The USART interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Advanced Interrupt Controller. Using
the USART interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first. Note that it is not recommended to use the USART
interrupt line in edge sensitive mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
445
30.7
Functional Description
The USART is capable of managing several types of serial synchronous or asynchronous communications.
It supports the following communication modes:
5- to 9-bit full-duplex asynchronous serial communication
̶
MSB- or LSB-first
̶
1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits
̶
Parity even, odd, marked, space or none
̶
By 8 or by 16 over-sampling receiver frequency
̶
Optional hardware handshaking
̶
Optional modem signals management
̶
Optional break management
̶
Optional multidrop serial communication
High-speed 5- to 9-bit full-duplex synchronous serial communication
̶
MSB- or LSB-first
̶
1 or 2 stop bits
̶
Parity even, odd, marked, space or none
̶
By 8 or by 16 over-sampling frequency
̶
Optional hardware handshaking
̶
Optional modem signals management
̶
Optional break management
̶
Optional multidrop serial communication
RS485 with driver control signal
ISO7816, T0 or T1 protocols for interfacing with smart cards
̶
NACK handling, error counter with repetition and iteration limit
InfraRed IrDA Modulation and Demodulation
Test modes
̶
446
Remote loopback, local loopback, automatic echo
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.7.1 Baud Rate Generator
The Baud Rate Generator provides the bit period clock named the Baud Rate Clock to both the receiver and the
transmitter.
The Baud Rate Generator clock source can be selected by setting the USCLKS field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) between:
the Master Clock MCK
a division of the Master Clock, the divider being product dependent, but generally set to 8
the external clock, available on the SCK pin
The Baud Rate Generator is based upon a 16-bit divider, which is programmed with the CD field of the Baud Rate
Generator Register (US_BRGR). If CD is programmed at 0, the Baud Rate Generator does not generate any
clock. If CD is programmed at 1, the divider is bypassed and becomes inactive.
If the external SCK clock is selected, the duration of the low and high levels of the signal provided on the SCK pin
must be longer than a Master Clock (MCK) period. The frequency of the signal provided on SCK must be at least
4.5 times lower than MCK.
Figure 30-3.
Baud Rate Generator
USCLKS
MCK
MCK/DIV
SCK
Reserved
CD
CD
SCK
0
1
2
16-bit Counter
FIDI
>1
3
1
0
0
0
SYNC
OVER
Sampling
Divider
0
Baud Rate
Clock
1
1
SYNC
USCLKS = 3
Sampling
Clock
30.7.1.1 Baud Rate in Asynchronous Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in asynchronous mode, the selected clock is first divided by CD, which is
field programmed in the Baud Rate Generator Register (US_BRGR). The resulting clock is provided to the receiver
as a sampling clock and then divided by 16 or 8, depending on the programming of the OVER bit in US_MR.
If OVER is set to 1, the receiver sampling is 8 times higher than the baud rate clock. If OVER is cleared, the
sampling is performed at 16 times the baud rate clock.
The following formula performs the calculation of the baud rate:
SelectedClock
Baudrate = -------------------------------------------( 8 ( 2 – Over )CD )
This gives a maximum baud rate of MCK divided by 8, assuming that MCK is the highest possible clock and that
OVER is programmed at 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
447
Baud Rate Calculation Example
Table 30-2 shows calculations of CD to obtain a baud rate at 38400 baud for different source clock frequencies.
This table also shows the actual resulting baud rate and the error.
Table 30-2.
Baud Rate Example (OVER = 0)
Source Clock
(MHz)
Expected Baud Rate
(bit/s)
Calculation Result
CD
Actual Baud Rate
(bit/s)
Error
3 686 400
38 400
6.00
6
38 400.00
0.00%
4 915 200
38 400
8.00
8
38 400.00
0.00%
5 000 000
38 400
8.14
8
39 062.50
1.70%
7 372 800
38 400
12.00
12
38 400.00
0.00%
8 000 000
38 400
13.02
13
38 461.54
0.16%
12 000 000
38 400
19.53
20
37 500.00
2.40%
12 288 000
38 400
20.00
20
38 400.00
0.00%
14 318 180
38 400
23.30
23
38 908.10
1.31%
14 745 600
38 400
24.00
24
38 400.00
0.00%
18 432 000
38 400
30.00
30
38 400.00
0.00%
24 000 000
38 400
39.06
39
38 461.54
0.16%
24 576 000
38 400
40.00
40
38 400.00
0.00%
25 000 000
38 400
40.69
40
38 109.76
0.76%
32 000 000
38 400
52.08
52
38 461.54
0.16%
32 768 000
38 400
53.33
53
38 641.51
0.63%
33 000 000
38 400
53.71
54
38 194.44
0.54%
40 000 000
38 400
65.10
65
38 461.54
0.16%
50 000 000
38 400
81.38
81
38 580.25
0.47%
The baud rate is calculated with the following formula:
BaudRate = MCK ⁄ CD × 16
The baud rate error is calculated with the following formula. It is not recommended to work with an error higher
than 5%.
ExpectedBaudRate
Error = 1 – ---------------------------------------------------
ActualBaudRate
448
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.7.1.2 Fractional Baud Rate in Asynchronous Mode
The Baud Rate Generator previously defined is subject to the following limitation: the output frequency changes by
only integer multiples of the reference frequency. An approach to this problem is to integrate a fractional N clock
generator that has a high resolution. The generator architecture is modified to obtain baud rate changes by a
fraction of the reference source clock. This fractional part is programmed with the FP field in the Baud Rate
Generator Register (US_BRGR). If FP is not 0, the fractional part is activated. The resolution is one eighth of the
clock divider. This feature is only available when using USART normal mode. The fractional baud rate is calculated
using the following formula:
SelectedClock
Baudrate = --------------------------------------------------------------- 8 ( 2 – Over ) CD + FP
-------
8
The modified architecture is presented below.
Figure 30-4.
Fractional Baud Rate Generator
FP
USCLKS
CD
Modulus
Control
FP
MCK
MCK/DIV
SCK
Reserved
CD
SCK
0
1
2
16-bit Counter
3
glitch-free
logic
1
0
FIDI
>1
0
0
SYNC
OVER
Sampling
Divider
0
Baud Rate
Clock
1
1
SYNC
Sampling
Clock
USCLKS = 3
30.7.1.3 Baud Rate in Synchronous Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in synchronous mode, the selected clock is simply divided by the field CD
in US_BRGR.
SelectedClock
BaudRate = -------------------------------------CD
In synchronous mode, if the external clock is selected (USCLKS = 3), the clock is provided directly by the signal on
the USART SCK pin. No division is active. The value written in US_BRGR has no effect. The external clock
frequency must be at least 4.5 times lower than the system clock.
When either the external clock SCK or the internal clock divided (MCK/DIV) is selected, the value programmed in
CD must be even if the user has to ensure a 50:50 mark/space ratio on the SCK pin. If the internal clock MCK is
selected, the Baud Rate Generator ensures a 50:50 duty cycle on the SCK pin, even if the value programmed in
CD is odd.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
449
30.7.1.4 Baud Rate in ISO 7816 Mode
The ISO7816 specification defines the bit rate with the following formula:
Di
B = ------ × f
Fi
where:
B is the bit rate
Di is the bit-rate adjustment factor
Fi is the clock frequency division factor
f is the ISO7816 clock frequency (Hz)
Di is a binary value encoded on a 4-bit field, named DI, as represented in Table 30-3.
Table 30-3.
Binary and Decimal Values for Di
DI field
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1000
1001
1
2
4
8
16
32
12
20
Di (decimal)
Fi is a binary value encoded on a 4-bit field, named FI, as represented in Table 30-4.
Table 30-4.
Binary and Decimal Values for Fi
FI field
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
Fi (decimal
372
372
558
744
1116
1488
1860
512
768
1024
1536
2048
Table 30-5 shows the resulting Fi/Di Ratio, which is the ratio between the ISO7816 clock and the baud rate clock.
Table 30-5.
Possible Values for the Fi/Di Ratio
Fi/Di
372
558
744
1116
1488
1806
512
768
1024
1536
2048
1
372
558
744
1116
1488
1860
512
768
1024
1536
2048
2
186
279
372
558
744
930
256
384
512
768
1024
4
93
139.5
186
279
372
465
128
192
256
384
512
8
46.5
69.75
93
139.5
186
232.5
64
96
128
192
256
16
23.25
34.87
46.5
69.75
93
116.2
32
48
64
96
128
32
11.62
17.43
23.25
34.87
46.5
58.13
16
24
32
48
64
12
31
46.5
62
93
124
155
42.66
64
85.33
128
170.6
20
18.6
27.9
37.2
55.8
74.4
93
25.6
38.4
51.2
76.8
102.4
If the USART is configured in ISO7816 Mode, the clock selected by the USCLKS field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) is first divided by the value programmed in the field CD in the Baud Rate Generator Register
(US_BRGR). The resulting clock can be provided to the SCK pin to feed the smart card clock inputs. This means
that the CLKO bit can be set in US_MR.
This clock is then divided by the value programmed in the FI_DI_RATIO field in the FI_DI_Ratio register
(US_FIDI). This is performed by the Sampling Divider, which performs a division by up to 2047 in ISO7816 Mode.
The non-integer values of the Fi/Di Ratio are not supported and the user must program the FI_DI_RATIO field to a
value as close as possible to the expected value.
The FI_DI_RATIO field resets to the value 0x174 (372 in decimal) and is the most common divider between the
ISO7816 clock and the bit rate (Fi = 372, Di = 1).
450
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 30-5 shows the relation between the Elementary Time Unit, corresponding to a bit time, and the ISO 7816
clock.
Figure 30-5.
Elementary Time Unit (ETU)
FI_DI_RATIO
ISO7816 Clock Cycles
ISO7816 Clock
on SCK
ISO7816 I/O Line
on TXD
1 ETU
30.7.2 Receiver and Transmitter Control
After reset, the receiver is disabled. The user must enable the receiver by setting the RXEN bit in the Control
Register (US_CR). However, the receiver registers can be programmed before the receiver clock is enabled.
After reset, the transmitter is disabled. The user must enable it by setting the TXEN bit in the Control Register
(US_CR). However, the transmitter registers can be programmed before being enabled.
The Receiver and the Transmitter can be enabled together or independently.
At any time, the software can perform a reset on the receiver or the transmitter of the USART by setting the
corresponding bit, RSTRX and RSTTX respectively, in the Control Register (US_CR). The software resets clear
the status flag and reset internal state machines but the user interface configuration registers hold the value
configured prior to software reset. Regardless of what the receiver or the transmitter is performing, the
communication is immediately stopped.
The user can also independently disable the receiver or the transmitter by setting RXDIS and TXDIS respectively
in US_CR. If the receiver is disabled during a character reception, the USART waits until the end of reception of
the current character, then the reception is stopped. If the transmitter is disabled while it is operating, the USART
waits the end of transmission of both the current character and character being stored in the Transmit Holding
Register (US_THR). If a timeguard is programmed, it is handled normally.
30.7.3 Synchronous and Asynchronous Modes
30.7.3.1 Transmitter Operations
The transmitter performs the same in both synchronous and asynchronous operating modes (SYNC = 0 or
SYNC = 1). One start bit, up to 9 data bits, one optional parity bit and up to two stop bits are successively shifted
out on the TXD pin at each falling edge of the programmed serial clock.
The number of data bits is selected by the CHRL field and the MODE 9 bit in the Mode Register (US_MR). Nine
bits are selected by setting the MODE 9 bit regardless of the CHRL field. The parity bit is set according to the PAR
field in US_MR. The even, odd, space, marked or none parity bit can be configured. The MSBF field in US_MR
configures which data bit is sent first. If written at 1, the most significant bit is sent first. At 0, the less significant bit
is sent first. The number of stop bits is selected by the NBSTOP field in US_MR. The 1.5 stop bit is supported in
asynchronous mode only.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
451
Figure 30-6.
Character Transmit
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled One Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
D0
Start
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
The characters are sent by writing in the Transmit Holding Register (US_THR). The transmitter reports two status
bits in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR): TXRDY (Transmitter Ready), which indicates that US_THR is
empty and TXEMPTY, which indicates that all the characters written in US_THR have been processed. When the
current character processing is completed, the last character written in US_THR is transferred into the Shift
Register of the transmitter and US_THR becomes empty, thus TXRDY rises.
Both TXRDY and TXEMPTY bits are low when the transmitter is disabled. Writing a character in US_THR while
TXRDY is low has no effect and the written character is lost.
Figure 30-7.
Transmitter Status
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
452
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
30.7.3.2 Asynchronous Receiver
If the USART is programmed in asynchronous operating mode (SYNC = 0), the receiver oversamples the RXD
input line. The oversampling is either 16 or 8 times the Baud Rate Clock, depending on the OVER bit in the Mode
Register (US_MR).
The receiver samples the RXD line. If the line is sampled during one half of a bit time at 0, a start bit is detected
and data, parity and stop bits are successively sampled on the bit rate clock.
If the oversampling is 16, (OVER at 0), a start is detected at the eighth sample at 0. Then, data bits, parity bit and
stop bit are sampled on each 16 sampling clock cycle. If the oversampling is 8 (OVER at 1), a start bit is detected
at the fourth sample at 0. Then, data bits, parity bit and stop bit are sampled on each 8 sampling clock cycle.
The number of data bits, first bit sent and parity mode are selected by the same fields and bits as the transmitter,
i.e. respectively CHRL, MODE9, MSBF and PAR. For the synchronization mechanism only, the number of stop
bits has no effect on the receiver as it considers only one stop bit, regardless of the field NBSTOP, so that
resynchronization between the receiver and the transmitter can occur. Moreover, as soon as the stop bit is
sampled, the receiver starts looking for a new start bit so that resynchronization can also be accomplished when
the transmitter is operating with one stop bit.
Figure 30-8 and Figure 30-9 illustrate start detection and character reception when USART operates in
asynchronous mode.
Figure 30-8.
Asynchronous Start Detection
Baud Rate
Clock
Sampling
Clock (x16)
RXD
Sampling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D0
Sampling
Start
Detection
RXD
Sampling
1
Figure 30-9.
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 1
Start
Rejection
Asynchronous Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
Detection
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
453
30.7.3.3 Synchronous Receiver
In synchronous mode (SYNC = 1), the receiver samples the RXD signal on each rising edge of the Baud Rate
Clock. If a low level is detected, it is considered as a start. All data bits, the parity bit and the stop bits are sampled
and the receiver waits for the next start bit. Synchronous mode operations provide a high speed transfer capability.
Configuration fields and bits are the same as in asynchronous mode.
Figure 30-10 illustrates a character reception in synchronous mode.
Figure 30-10. Synchronous Mode Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled 1 Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Sampling
Start
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop Bit
Parity Bit
30.7.3.4 Receiver Operations
When a character reception is completed, it is transferred to the Receive Holding Register (US_RHR) and the
RXRDY bit in the Status Register (US_CSR) rises. If a character is completed while the RXRDY is set, the OVRE
(Overrun Error) bit is set. The last character is transferred into US_RHR and overwrites the previous one. The
OVRE bit is cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the RSTSTA (Reset Status) bit at 1.
Figure 30-11. Receiver Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
Write
US_CR
Read
US_RHR
RXRDY
OVRE
454
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
30.7.3.5 Parity
The USART supports five parity modes selected by programming the PAR field in the Mode Register (US_MR).
The PAR field also enables the Multidrop mode, see “Multidrop Mode” on page 456. Even and odd parity bit
generation and error detection are supported.
If even parity is selected, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 0 if a number of 1s in the
character data bit is even, and at 1 if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly, the receiver parity checker counts the
number of received 1s and reports a parity error if the sampled parity bit does not correspond. If odd parity is
selected, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 1 if a number of 1s in the character data bit
is even, and at 0 if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly, the receiver parity checker counts the number of received
1s and reports a parity error if the sampled parity bit does not correspond. If the mark parity is used, the parity
generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 1 for all characters. The receiver parity checker reports an error
if the parity bit is sampled at 0. If the space parity is used, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit
at 0 for all characters. The receiver parity checker reports an error if the parity bit is sampled at 1. If parity is
disabled, the transmitter does not generate any parity bit and the receiver does not report any parity error.
Table 30-6 shows an example of the parity bit for the character 0x41 (character ASCII “A”) depending on the
configuration of the USART. Because there are two bits at 1, 1 bit is added when a parity is odd, or 0 is added
when a parity is even.
Table 30-6.
Parity Bit Examples
Character
Hexadecimal
Binary
Parity Bit
Parity Mode
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Odd
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Even
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Mark
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Space
A
0x41
0100 0001
None
None
When the receiver detects a parity error, it sets the PARE (Parity Error) bit in the Channel Status Register
(US_CSR). The PARE bit can be cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the RSTSTA bit at 1. Figure
30-12 illustrates the parity bit status setting and clearing.
Figure 30-12. Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Bad Stop
Parity Bit
Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
PARE
RXRDY
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
455
30.7.3.6 Multidrop Mode
If the PAR field in the Mode Register (US_MR) is programmed to the value 0x6 or 0x07, the USART runs in
Multidrop Mode. This mode differentiates the data characters and the address characters. Data is transmitted with
the parity bit at 0 and addresses are transmitted with the parity bit at 1.
If the USART is configured in multidrop mode, the receiver sets the PARE parity error bit when the parity bit is high
and the transmitter is able to send a character with the parity bit high when the Control Register is written with the
SENDA bit at 1.
To handle parity error, the PARE bit is cleared when the Control Register is written with the bit RSTSTA at 1.
The transmitter sends an address byte (parity bit set) when SENDA is written to US_CR. In this case, the next byte
written to US_THR is transmitted as an address. Any character written in US_THR without having written the
command SENDA is transmitted normally with the parity at 0.
30.7.3.7 Transmitter Timeguard
The timeguard feature enables the USART interface with slow remote devices.
The timeguard function enables the transmitter to insert an idle state on the TXD line between two characters. This
idle state actually acts as a long stop bit.
The duration of the idle state is programmed in the TG field of the Transmitter Timeguard Register (US_TTGR).
When this field is programmed at zero no timeguard is generated. Otherwise, the transmitter holds a high level on
TXD after each transmitted byte during the number of bit periods programmed in TG in addition to the number of
stop bits.
As illustrated in Figure 30-13, the behavior of TXRDY and TXEMPTY status bits is modified by the programming of
a timeguard. TXRDY rises only when the start bit of the next character is sent, and thus remains at 0 during the
timeguard transmission if a character has been written in US_THR. TXEMPTY remains low until the timeguard
transmission is completed as the timeguard is part of the current character being transmitted.
Figure 30-13. Timeguard Operations
TG = 4
TG = 4
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
456
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Table 30-7 indicates the maximum length of a timeguard period that the transmitter can handle according to the
baud rate.
Table 30-7.
Maximum Timeguard Length Depending on Baud Rate
Baud Rate (bit/s)
Bit time (µs)
Timeguard (ms)
1200
833
212.50
9600
104
26.56
14400
69.4
17.71
19200
52.1
13.28
28800
34.7
8.85
33400
29.9
7.63
56000
17.9
4.55
57600
17.4
4.43
115200
8.7
2.21
30.7.3.8 Receiver Time-out
The Receiver Time-out provides support in handling variable-length frames. This feature detects an idle condition
on the RXD line. When a time-out is detected, the bit TIMEOUT in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR) rises
and can generate an interrupt, thus indicating to the driver an end of frame.
The time-out delay period (during which the receiver waits for a new character) is programmed in the TO field of
the Receiver Time-out Register (US_RTOR). If the TO field is programmed at 0, the Receiver Time-out is disabled
and no time-out is detected. The TIMEOUT bit in US_CSR remains at 0. Otherwise, the receiver loads a 16-bit
counter with the value programmed in TO. This counter is decremented at each bit period and reloaded each time
a new character is received. If the counter reaches 0, the TIMEOUT bit in the Status Register rises. Then, the user
can either:
Stop the counter clock until a new character is received. This is performed by writing the Control Register
(US_CR) with the STTTO (Start Time-out) bit at 1. In this case, the idle state on RXD before a new character
is received will not provide a time-out. This prevents having to handle an interrupt before a character is
received and allows waiting for the next idle state on RXD after a frame is received.
Obtain an interrupt while no character is received. This is performed by writing US_CR with the RETTO
(Reload and Start Time-out) bit at 1. If RETTO is performed, the counter starts counting down immediately
from the value TO. This enables generation of a periodic interrupt so that a user time-out can be handled, for
example when no key is pressed on a keyboard.
If STTTO is performed, the counter clock is stopped until a first character is received. The idle state on RXD before
the start of the frame does not provide a time-out. This prevents having to obtain a periodic interrupt and enables a
wait of the end of frame when the idle state on RXD is detected.
If RETTO is performed, the counter starts counting down immediately from the value TO. This enables generation
of a periodic interrupt so that a user time-out can be handled, for example when no key is pressed on a keyboard.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
457
Figure 30-14 shows the block diagram of the Receiver Time-out feature.
Figure 30-14. Receiver Time-out Block Diagram
TO
Baud Rate
Clock
1
D
Q
Clock
16-bit Time-out
Counter
16-bit
Value
=
STTTO
Character
Received
Load
Clear
TIMEOUT
0
RETTO
Table 30-8 gives the maximum time-out period for some standard baud rates.
Table 30-8.
458
Maximum Time-out Period
Baud Rate (bit/s)
Bit Time (µs)
Time-out (ms)
600
1667
109225
1200
833
54613
2400
417
27306
4800
208
13653
9600
104
6827
14400
69
4551
19200
52
3413
28800
35
2276
33400
30
1962
56000
18
1170
57600
17
1138
200000
5
328
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.7.3.9 Framing Error
The receiver is capable of detecting framing errors. A framing error happens when the stop bit of a received
character is detected at level 0. This can occur if the receiver and the transmitter are fully desynchronized.
A framing error is reported on the FRAME bit of the Channel Status Register (US_CSR). The FRAME bit is
asserted in the middle of the stop bit as soon as the framing error is detected. It is cleared by writing the Control
Register (US_CR) with the RSTSTA bit at 1.
Figure 30-15. Framing Error Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
FRAME
RXRDY
30.7.3.10 Transmit Break
The user can request the transmitter to generate a break condition on the TXD line. A break condition drives the
TXD line low during at least one complete character. It appears the same as a 0x00 character sent with the parity
and the stop bits at 0. However, the transmitter holds the TXD line at least during one character until the user
requests the break condition to be removed.
A break is transmitted by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the STTBRK bit at 1. This can be performed at
any time, either while the transmitter is empty (no character in either the Shift Register or in US_THR) or when a
character is being transmitted. If a break is requested while a character is being shifted out, the character is first
completed before the TXD line is held low.
Once STTBRK command is requested further STTBRK commands are ignored until the end of the break is
completed.
The break condition is removed by writing US_CR with the STPBRK bit at 1. If the STPBRK is requested before
the end of the minimum break duration (one character, including start, data, parity and stop bits), the transmitter
ensures that the break condition completes.
The transmitter considers the break as though it is a character, i.e. the STTBRK and STPBRK commands are
taken into account only if the TXRDY bit in US_CSR is at 1 and the start of the break condition clears the TXRDY
and TXEMPTY bits as if a character is processed.
Writing US_CR with the both STTBRK and STPBRK bits at 1 can lead to an unpredictable result. All STPBRK
commands requested without a previous STTBRK command are ignored. A byte written into the Transmit Holding
Register while a break is pending, but not started, is ignored.
After the break condition, the transmitter returns the TXD line to 1 for a minimum of 12 bit times. Thus, the
transmitter ensures that the remote receiver detects correctly the end of break and the start of the next character.
If the timeguard is programmed with a value higher than 12, the TXD line is held high for the timeguard period.
After holding the TXD line for this period, the transmitter resumes normal operations.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
459
Figure 30-16 illustrates the effect of both the Start Break (STTBRK) and Stop Break (STPBRK) commands on the
TXD line.
Figure 30-16. Break Transmission
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
STTBRK = 1
Break Transmission
End of Break
STPBRK = 1
Write
US_CR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
30.7.3.11 Receive Break
The receiver detects a break condition when all data, parity and stop bits are low. This corresponds to detecting a
framing error with data at 0x00, but FRAME remains low.
When the low stop bit is detected, the receiver asserts the RXBRK bit in US_CSR. This bit may be cleared by
writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the bit RSTSTA at 1.
An end of receive break is detected by a high level for at least 2/16 of a bit period in asynchronous operating mode
or one sample at high level in synchronous operating mode. The end of break detection also asserts the RXBRK
bit.
30.7.3.12 Hardware Handshaking
The USART features a hardware handshaking out-of-band flow control. The RTS and CTS pins are used to
connect with the remote device, as shown in Figure 30-17.
Figure 30-17. Connection with a Remote Device for Hardware Handshaking
USART
Remote
Device
TXD
RXD
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
RTS
CTS
Setting the USART to operate with hardware handshaking is performed by writing the USART_MODE field in the
Mode Register (US_MR) to the value 0x2.
The USART behavior when hardware handshaking is enabled is the same as the behavior in standard
synchronous or asynchronous mode, except that the receiver drives the RTS pin as described below and the level
on the CTS pin modifies the behavior of the transmitter as described below. Using this mode requires using the
PDC channel for reception. The transmitter can handle hardware handshaking in any case.
460
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 30-18 shows how the receiver operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The RTS pin is driven high if
the receiver is disabled and if the status RXBUFF (Receive Buffer Full) coming from the PDC channel is high.
Normally, the remote device does not start transmitting while its CTS pin (driven by RTS) is high. As soon as the
Receiver is enabled, the RTS falls, indicating to the remote device that it can start transmitting. Defining a new
buffer to the PDC clears the status bit RXBUFF and, as a result, asserts the pin RTS low.
Figure 30-18. Receiver Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
RXD
RXEN = 1
RXDIS = 1
Write
US_CR
RTS
RXBUFF
Figure 30-19 shows how the transmitter operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The CTS pin disables the
transmitter. If a character is being processing, the transmitter is disabled only after the completion of the current
character and transmission of the next character happens as soon as the pin CTS falls.
Figure 30-19. Transmitter Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
CTS
TXD
30.7.4 ISO7816 Mode
The USART features an ISO7816-compatible operating mode. This mode permits interfacing with smart cards and
Security Access Modules (SAM) communicating through an ISO7816 link. Both T = 0 and T = 1 protocols defined
by the ISO7816 specification are supported.
Setting the USART in ISO7816 mode is performed by writing the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) to the value 0x4 for protocol T = 0 and to the value 0x5 for protocol T = 1.
30.7.4.1 ISO7816 Mode Overview
The ISO7816 is a half duplex communication on only one bidirectional line. The baud rate is determined by a
division of the clock provided to the remote device (see “Baud Rate Generator” on page 447).
The USART connects to a smart card as shown in Figure 30-20. The TXD line becomes bidirectional and the Baud
Rate Generator feeds the ISO7816 clock on the SCK pin. As the TXD pin becomes bidirectional, its output remains
driven by the output of the transmitter but only when the transmitter is active while its input is directed to the input
of the receiver. The USART is considered as the master of the communication as it generates the clock.
Figure 30-20. Connection of a Smart Card to the USART
USART
SCK
TXD
CLK
I/O
Smart
Card
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
461
When operating in ISO7816, either in T = 0 or T = 1 modes, the character format is fixed. The configuration is 8
data bits, even parity and 1 or 2 stop bits, regardless of the values programmed in the CHRL, MODE9, PAR and
CHMODE fields. MSBF can be used to transmit LSB or MSB first. Parity Bit (PAR) can be used to transmit in
normal or inverse mode. Refer to “USART Mode Register” on page 474 and “PAR: Parity Type” on page 475.
The USART cannot operate concurrently in both receiver and transmitter modes as the communication is
unidirectional at a time. It has to be configured according to the required mode by enabling or disabling either the
receiver or the transmitter as desired. Enabling both the receiver and the transmitter at the same time in ISO7816
mode may lead to unpredictable results.
The ISO7816 specification defines an inverse transmission format. Data bits of the character must be transmitted
on the I/O line at their negative value. The USART does not support this format and the user has to perform an
exclusive OR on the data before writing it in the Transmit Holding Register (US_THR) or after reading it in the
Receive Holding Register (US_RHR).
30.7.4.2 Protocol T = 0
In T = 0 protocol, a character is made up of one start bit, eight data bits, one parity bit and one guard time, which
lasts two bit times. The transmitter shifts out the bits and does not drive the I/O line during the guard time.
If no parity error is detected, the I/O line remains at 1 during the guard time and the transmitter can continue with
the transmission of the next character, as shown in Figure 30-21.
If a parity error is detected by the receiver, it drives the I/O line at 0 during the guard time, as shown in Figure 3022. This error bit is also named NACK, for Non Acknowledge. In this case, the character lasts 1 bit time more, as
the guard time length is the same and is added to the error bit time which lasts 1 bit time.
When the USART is the receiver and it detects an error, it does not load the erroneous character in the Receive
Holding Register (US_RHR). It appropriately sets the PARE bit in the Status Register (US_SR) so that the
software can handle the error.
Figure 30-21. T = 0 Protocol without Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Guard Guard Next
Bit Time 1 Time 2 Start
Bit
Figure 30-22. T = 0 Protocol with Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
Error
I/O
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Guard
Bit Time 1
Guard Start
Time 2 Bit
D0
D1
Repetition
Receive Error Counter
The USART receiver also records the total number of errors. This can be read in the Number of Error (US_NER)
register. The NB_ERRORS field can record up to 255 errors. Reading US_NER automatically clears the
NB_ERRORS field.
462
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Receive NACK Inhibit
The USART can also be configured to inhibit an error. This can be achieved by setting the INACK bit in the Mode
Register (US_MR). If INACK is at 1, no error signal is driven on the I/O line even if a parity bit is detected, but the
INACK bit is set in the Status Register (US_SR). The INACK bit can be cleared by writing the Control Register
(US_CR) with the RSTNACK bit at 1.
Moreover, if INACK is set, the erroneous received character is stored in the Receive Holding Register, as if no
error occurred. However, the RXRDY bit does not raise.
Transmit Character Repetition
When the USART is transmitting a character and gets a NACK, it can automatically repeat the character before
moving on to the next one. Repetition is enabled by writing the MAX_ITERATION field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) at a value higher than 0. Each character can be transmitted up to eight times; the first transmission plus
seven repetitions.
If MAX_ITERATION does not equal zero, the USART repeats the character as many times as the value loaded in
MAX_ITERATION.
When the USART repetition number reaches MAX_ITERATION, the ITERATION bit is set in the Channel Status
Register (US_CSR). If the repetition of the character is acknowledged by the receiver, the repetitions are stopped
and the iteration counter is cleared.
The ITERATION bit in US_CSR can be cleared by writing the Control Register with the RSIT bit at 1.
Disable Successive Receive NACK
The receiver can limit the number of successive NACKs sent back to the remote transmitter. This is programmed
by setting the bit DSNACK in the Mode Register (US_MR). The maximum number of NACK transmitted is
programmed in the MAX_ITERATION field. As soon as MAX_ITERATION is reached, the character is considered
as correct, an acknowledge is sent on the line and the ITERATION bit in the Channel Status Register is set.
30.7.4.3 Protocol T = 1
When operating in ISO7816 protocol T = 1, the transmission is similar to an asynchronous format with only one
stop bit. The parity is generated when transmitting and checked when receiving. Parity error detection sets the
PARE bit in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
463
30.7.5 IrDA Mode
The USART features an IrDA mode supplying half-duplex point-to-point wireless communication. It embeds the
modulator and demodulator which allows a glueless connection to the infrared transceivers, as shown in Figure
30-23. The modulator and demodulator are compliant with the IrDA specification version 1.1 and support data
transfer speeds ranging from 2.4 kbit/s to 115.2 kbit/s.
The USART IrDA mode is enabled by setting the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register (US_MR) to the value
0x8. The IrDA Filter Register (US_IF) allows configuring the demodulator filter. The USART transmitter and
receiver operate in a normal asynchronous mode and all parameters are accessible. Note that the modulator and
the demodulator are activated.
Figure 30-23. Connection to IrDA Transceivers
USART
IrDA
Transceivers
Receiver
Demodulator
Transmitter
Modulator
RXD
RX
TX
TXD
The receiver and the transmitter must be enabled or disabled according to the direction of the transmission to be
managed.
464
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.7.5.1 IrDA Modulation
For baud rates up to and including 115.2 kbit/s, the RZI modulation scheme is used. “0” is represented by a light
pulse of 3/16th of a bit time. Some examples of signal pulse duration are shown in Table 30-9.
Table 30-9.
IrDA Pulse Duration
Baud Rate
Pulse Duration (3/16)
2.4 kbit/s
78.13 µs
9.6 kbit/s
19.53 µs
19.2 kbit/s
9.77 µs
38.4 kbit/s
4.88 µs
57.6 kbit/s
3.26 µs
115.2 kbit/s
1.63 µs
Figure 30-24 shows an example of character transmission.
Figure 30-24. IrDA Modulation
Start
Bit
Transmitter
Output
0
Stop
Bit
Data Bits
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
TXD
Bit Period
3
16 Bit Period
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
465
30.7.5.2 IrDA Baud Rate
Table 30-10 gives some examples of CD values, baud rate error and pulse duration. Note that the requirement on
the maximum acceptable error of ±1.87% must be met.
Table 30-10.
466
IrDA Baud Rate Error
Peripheral Clock
Baud Rate (bit/s)
CD
Baud Rate Error
Pulse Time (µs)
3 686 400
115 200
2
0.00%
1.63
20 000 000
115 200
11
1.38%
1.63
32 768 000
115 200
18
1.25%
1.63
40 000 000
115 200
22
1.38%
1.63
3 686 400
57 600
4
0.00%
3.26
20 000 000
57 600
22
1.38%
3.26
32 768 000
57 600
36
1.25%
3.26
40 000 000
57 600
43
0.93%
3.26
3 686 400
38 400
6
0.00%
4.88
20 000 000
38 400
33
1.38%
4.88
32 768 000
38 400
53
0.63%
4.88
40 000 000
38 400
65
0.16%
4.88
3 686 400
19 200
12
0.00%
9.77
20 000 000
19 200
65
0.16%
9.77
32 768 000
19 200
107
0.31%
9.77
40 000 000
19 200
130
0.16%
9.77
3 686 400
9 600
24
0.00%
19.53
20 000 000
9 600
130
0.16%
19.53
32 768 000
9 600
213
0.16%
19.53
40 000 000
9 600
260
0.16%
19.53
3 686 400
2 400
96
0.00%
78.13
20 000 000
2 400
521
0.03%
78.13
32 768 000
2 400
853
0.04%
78.13
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.7.5.3 IrDA Demodulator
The demodulator is based on the IrDA Receive filter comprised of an 8-bit down counter which is loaded with the
value programmed in US_IF. When a falling edge is detected on the RXD pin, the Filter Counter starts counting
down at the Master Clock (MCK) speed. If a rising edge is detected on the RXD pin, the counter stops and is
reloaded with US_IF. If no rising edge is detected when the counter reaches 0, the input of the receiver is driven
low during one bit time.
Figure 30-25 illustrates the operations of the IrDA demodulator.
Figure 30-25. IrDA Demodulator Operations
MCK
RXD
Counter
Value
Receiver
Input
6
5
4 3
Pulse
Rejected
2
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pulse
Accepted
As the IrDA mode uses the same logic as the ISO7816, note that the FI_DI_RATIO field in US_FIDI must be set to
a value higher than 0 in order to assure IrDA communications operate correctly.
30.7.6 RS485 Mode
The USART features the RS485 mode to enable line driver control. While operating in RS485 mode, the USART
behaves as though in asynchronous or synchronous mode and configuration of all the parameters is possible. The
difference is that the RTS pin is driven high when the transmitter is operating. The behavior of the RTS pin is
controlled by the TXEMPTY bit. A typical connection of the USART to a RS485 bus is shown in Figure 30-26.
Figure 30-26. Typical Connection to a RS485 Bus
USART
RXD
TXD
Differential
Bus
RTS
The USART is set in RS485 mode by programming the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register (US_MR) to the
value 0x1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
467
The RTS pin is at a level inverse to the TXEMPTY bit. Significantly, the RTS pin remains high when a timeguard is
programmed so that the line can remain driven after the last character completion. Figure 30-27 gives an example
of the RTS waveform during a character transmission when the timeguard is enabled.
Figure 30-27. Example of RTS Drive with Timeguard
TG = 4
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
RTS
30.7.7 Modem Mode
The USART features modem mode, which enables control of the signals: DTR (Data Terminal Ready), DSR (Data
Set Ready), RTS (Request to Send), CTS (Clear to Send), DCD (Data Carrier Detect) and RI (Ring Indicator).
While operating in modem mode, the USART behaves as a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) as it drives DTR and
RTS and can detect level change on DSR, DCD, CTS and RI.
Setting the USART in modem mode is performed by writing the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) to the value 0x3. While operating in modem mode the USART behaves as though in asynchronous
mode and all the parameter configurations are available.
Table 30-11 gives the correspondence of the USART signals with modem connection standards.
Table 30-11.
Circuit References
USART Pin
V24
CCITT
Direction
TXD
2
103
From terminal to modem
RTS
4
105
From terminal to modem
DTR
20
108.2
From terminal to modem
RXD
3
104
From modem to terminal
CTS
5
106
From terminal to modem
DSR
6
107
From terminal to modem
DCD
8
109
From terminal to modem
RI
22
125
From terminal to modem
The control of the DTR output pin is performed by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the DTRDIS and
DTREN bits respectively at 1. The disable command forces the corresponding pin to its inactive level, i.e. high.
The enable command forces the corresponding pin to its active level, i.e. low. RTS output pin is automatically
controlled in this mode.
468
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
The level changes are detected on the RI, DSR, DCD and CTS pins. If an input change is detected, the RIIC,
DSRIC, DCDIC and CTSIC bits in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR) are set respectively and can trigger an
interrupt. The status is automatically cleared when US_CSR is read. Furthermore, the CTS automatically disables
the transmitter when it is detected at its inactive state. If a character is being transmitted when the CTS rises, the
character transmission is completed before the transmitter is actually disabled.
30.7.8 Test Modes
The USART can be programmed to operate in three different test modes. The internal loopback capability allows
on-board diagnostics. In the loopback mode the USART interface pins are disconnected or not and reconfigured
for loopback internally or externally.
30.7.8.1 Normal Mode
Normal mode connects the RXD pin on the receiver input and the transmitter output on the TXD pin.
Figure 30-28. Normal Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
TXD
Transmitter
30.7.8.2 Automatic Echo Mode
Automatic echo mode allows bit-by-bit retransmission. When a bit is received on the RXD pin, it is sent to the TXD
pin, as shown in Figure 30-29. Programming the transmitter has no effect on the TXD pin. The RXD pin is still
connected to the receiver input, thus the receiver remains active.
Figure 30-29. Automatic Echo Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
TXD
Transmitter
30.7.8.3 Local Loopback Mode
Local loopback mode connects the output of the transmitter directly to the input of the receiver, as shown in Figure
30-30. The TXD and RXD pins are not used. The RXD pin has no effect on the receiver and the TXD pin is
continuously driven high, as in idle state.
Figure 30-30. Local Loopback Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
Transmitter
1
TXD
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
469
30.7.8.4 Remote Loopback Mode
Remote loopback mode directly connects the RXD pin to the TXD pin, as shown in Figure 30-31. The transmitter
and the receiver are disabled and have no effect. This mode allows bit-by-bit retransmission.
Figure 30-31. Remote Loopback Mode Configuration
Receiver
1
RXD
TXD
Transmitter
470
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART) User Interface
Table 30-12.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
Control Register
US_CR
Write-only
–
0x0004
Mode Register
US_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0008
Interrupt Enable Register
US_IER
Write-only
–
0x000C
Interrupt Disable Register
US_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0010
Interrupt Mask Register
US_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x0014
Channel Status Register
US_CSR
Read-only
0x0
0x0018
Receiver Holding Register
US_RHR
Read-only
0x0
0x001C
Transmitter Holding Register
US_THR
Write-only
–
0x0020
Baud Rate Generator Register
US_BRGR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0024
Receiver Time-out Register
US_RTOR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0028
Transmitter Timeguard Register
US_TTGR
Read/Write
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
FI DI Ratio Register
US_FIDI
Read/Write
0x174
0x0044
Number of Errors Register
US_NER
Read-only
0x0
0x0048
Reserved
–
–
–
0x004C
IrDA Filter Register
US_IF
Read/Write
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for PDC Registers
–
–
–
0x2C–0x3C
0x5C–0xFC
0x100–0x128
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
471
30.8.1 USART Control Register
Name:
US_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RTSDIS
18
RTSEN
17
DTRDIS
16
DTREN
15
RETTO
14
RSTNACK
13
RSTIT
12
SENDA
11
STTTO
10
STPBRK
9
STTBRK
8
RSTSTA
7
TXDIS
6
TXEN
5
RXDIS
4
RXEN
3
RSTTX
2
RSTRX
1
–
0
–
• RSTRX: Reset Receiver
0: No effect.
1: Resets the receiver.
• RSTTX: Reset Transmitter
0: No effect.
1: Resets the transmitter.
• RXEN: Receiver Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the receiver, if RXDIS is 0.
• RXDIS: Receiver Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the receiver.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the transmitter if TXDIS is 0.
• TXDIS: Transmitter Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the transmitter.
• RSTSTA: Reset Status Bits
0: No effect.
1: Resets the status bits PARE, FRAME, OVRE and RXBRK in US_CSR.
472
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• STTBRK: Start Break
0: No effect.
1: Starts transmission of a break after the characters present in US_THR and the Transmit Shift Register have been transmitted. No effect if a break is already being transmitted.
• STPBRK: Stop Break
0: No effect.
1: Stops transmission of the break after a minimum of one character length and transmits a high level during 12-bit periods.
No effect if no break is being transmitted.
• STTTO: Start Time-out
0: No effect.
1: Starts waiting for a character before clocking the time-out counter. Resets the status bit TIMEOUT in US_CSR.
• SENDA: Send Address
0: No effect.
1: In Multidrop Mode only, the next character written to the US_THR is sent with the address bit set.
• RSTIT: Reset Iterations
0: No effect.
1: Resets ITERATION in US_CSR. No effect if the ISO7816 is not enabled.
• RSTNACK: Reset Non Acknowledge
0: No effect
1: Resets NACK in US_CSR.
• RETTO: Rearm Time-out
0: No effect
1: Restart Time-out
• DTREN: Data Terminal Ready Enable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin DTR at 0.
• DTRDIS: Data Terminal Ready Disable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin DTR to 1.
• RTSEN: Request to Send Enable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin RTS to 0.
• RTSDIS: Request to Send Disable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin RTS to 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
473
30.8.2 USART Mode Register
Name:
US_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
FILTER
27
–
26
25
MAX_ITERATION
24
23
–
22
–
21
DSNACK
20
INACK
19
OVER
18
CLKO
17
MODE9
16
MSBF
14
13
12
11
10
PAR
9
8
SYNC
4
3
2
1
0
15
CHMODE
NBSTOP
7
6
5
CHRL
USCLKS
• USART_MODE
Value
Mode of the USART
0
0
0
0
Normal
0
0
0
1
RS485
0
0
1
0
Hardware Handshaking
0
0
1
1
Modem
0
1
0
0
IS07816 Protocol: T = 0
0
1
1
0
IS07816 Protocol: T = 1
1
0
0
0
IrDA
Others
Reserved
• USCLKS: Clock Selection
Value
Selected Clock
0
0
MCK
0
1
MCK/DIV (DIV = 8)
1
0
Reserved
1
1
SCK
• CHRL: Character Length.
Value
Character Length
0
0
5 bits
0
1
6 bits
1
0
7 bits
1
1
8 bits
• SYNC: Synchronous Mode Select
0: USART operates in Asynchronous Mode.
1: USART operates in Synchronous Mode.
474
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
USART_MODE
• PAR: Parity Type
Value
Parity Type
0
0
0
Even parity
0
0
1
Odd parity
0
1
0
Parity forced to 0 (Space)
0
1
1
Parity forced to 1 (Mark)
1
0
x
No parity
1
1
x
Multidrop mode
• NBSTOP: Number of Stop Bits
Value
Asynchronous (SYNC = 0)
Synchronous (SYNC = 1)
0
0
1 stop bit
1 stop bit
0
1
1.5 stop bits
Reserved
1
0
2 stop bits
2 stop bits
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
• CHMODE: Channel Mode
Value
Mode Description
0
0
Normal Mode
0
1
Automatic Echo. Receiver input is connected to the TXD pin.
1
0
Local Loopback. Transmitter output is connected to the Receiver Input..
1
1
Remote Loopback. RXD pin is internally connected to the TXD pin.
• MSBF: Bit Order
0: Least Significant Bit is sent/received first.
1: Most Significant Bit is sent/received first.
• MODE9: 9-bit Character Length
0: CHRL defines character length.
1: 9-bit character length.
• CLKO: Clock Output Select
0: The USART does not drive the SCK pin.
1: The USART drives the SCK pin if USCLKS does not select the external clock SCK.
• OVER: Oversampling Mode
0: 16x Oversampling.
1: 8x Oversampling.
• INACK: Inhibit Non Acknowledge
0: The NACK is generated.
1: The NACK is not generated.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
475
• DSNACK: Disable Successive NACK
0: NACK is sent on the ISO line as soon as a parity error occurs in the received character (unless INACK is set).
1: Successive parity errors are counted up to the value specified in the MAX_ITERATION field. These parity errors generate a NACK on the ISO line. As soon as this value is reached, no additional NACK is sent on the ISO line. The flag
ITERATION is asserted.
• MAX_ITERATION
Defines the maximum number of iterations in mode ISO7816, protocol T = 0.
• FILTER: Infrared Receive Line Filter
0: The USART does not filter the receive line.
1: The USART filters the receive line using a three-sample filter (1/16-bit clock) (2 over 3 majority).
476
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.3 USART Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
US_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
DCDIC
17
DSRIC
16
RIIC
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITER
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Enable
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Enable
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Enable
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Enable
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Enable
• ITER: Iteration Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
• RIIC: Ring Indicator Input Change Enable
• DSRIC: Data Set Ready Input Change Enable
• DCDIC: Data Carrier Detect Input Change Interrupt Enable
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Enable
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
477
30.8.4 USART Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
US_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
DCDIC
17
DSRIC
16
RIIC
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITER
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Disable
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Disable
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Disable
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Disable
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Disable
• ITER: Iteration Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Disable
• RIIC: Ring Indicator Input Change Disable
• DSRIC: Data Set Ready Input Change Disable
• DCDIC: Data Carrier Detect Input Change Interrupt Disable
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Disable
478
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.5 USART Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
US_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
DCDIC
17
DSRIC
16
RIIC
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITER
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Mask
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Mask
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Mask
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Mask
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Mask
• ITER: Iteration Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Mask
• RIIC: Ring Indicator Input Change Mask
• DSRIC: Data Set Ready Input Change Mask
• DCDIC: Data Carrier Detect Input Change Interrupt Mask
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Mask
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
479
30.8.6 USART Channel Status Register
Name:
US_CSR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
CTS
22
DCD
21
DSR
20
RI
19
CTSIC
18
DCDIC
17
DSRIC
16
RIIC
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITER
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready
0: No complete character has been received since the last read of US_RHR or the receiver is disabled. If characters were
being received when the receiver was disabled, RXRDY changes to 1 when the receiver is enabled.
1: At least one complete character has been received and US_RHR has not yet been read.
• TXRDY: Transmitter Ready
0: A character is in the US_THR waiting to be transferred to the Transmit Shift Register, or an STTBRK command has
been requested, or the transmitter is disabled. As soon as the transmitter is enabled, TXRDY becomes 1.
1: There is no character in the US_THR.
• RXBRK: Break Received/End of Break
0: No Break received or End of Break detected since the last RSTSTA.
1: Break Received or End of Break detected since the last RSTSTA.
• ENDRX: End of Receiver Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the Receive PDC channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the Receive PDC channel is active.
• ENDTX: End of Transmitter Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the Transmit PDC channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the Transmit PDC channel is active.
• OVRE: Overrun Error
0: No overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• FRAME: Framing Error
0: No stop bit has been detected low since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one stop bit has been detected low since the last RSTSTA.
480
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PARE: Parity Error
0: No parity error has been detected since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one parity error has been detected since the last RSTSTA.
• TIMEOUT: Receiver Time-out
0: There has not been a time-out since the last Start Time-out command (STTTO in US_CR) or the Time-out Register is 0.
1: There has been a time-out since the last Start Time-out command (STTTO in US_CR).
• TXEMPTY: Transmitter Empty
0: There are characters in either US_THR or the Transmit Shift Register, or the transmitter is disabled.
1: There are no characters in US_THR, nor in the Transmit Shift Register.
• ITER: Max number of Repetitions Reached
0: Maximum number of repetitions has not been reached since the last RSTSTA.
1: Maximum number of repetitions has been reached since the last RSTSTA.
• TXBUFE: Transmission Buffer Empty
0: The signal Buffer Empty from the Transmit PDC channel is inactive.
1: The signal Buffer Empty from the Transmit PDC channel is active.
• RXBUFF: Reception Buffer Full
0: The signal Buffer Full from the Receive PDC channel is inactive.
1: The signal Buffer Full from the Receive PDC channel is active.
• NACK: Non Acknowledge
0: No Non Acknowledge has not been detected since the last RSTNACK.
1: At least one Non Acknowledge has been detected since the last RSTNACK.
• RIIC: Ring Indicator Input Change Flag
0: No input change has been detected on the RI pin since the last read of US_CSR.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the RI pin since the last read of US_CSR.
• DSRIC: Data Set Ready Input Change Flag
0: No input change has been detected on the DSR pin since the last read of US_CSR.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the DSR pin since the last read of US_CSR.
• DCDIC: Data Carrier Detect Input Change Flag
0: No input change has been detected on the DCD pin since the last read of US_CSR.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the DCD pin since the last read of US_CSR.
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Flag
0: No input change has been detected on the CTS pin since the last read of US_CSR.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the CTS pin since the last read of US_CSR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
481
• RI: Image of RI Input
0: RI is at 0.
1: RI is at 1.
• DSR: Image of DSR Input
0: DSR is at 0
1: DSR is at 1.
• DCD: Image of DCD Input
0: DCD is at 0.
1: DCD is at 1.
• CTS: Image of CTS Input
0: CTS is at 0.
1: CTS is at 1.
482
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.7 USART Receive Holding Register
Name:
US_RHR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
RXSYNH
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
RXCHR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXCHR
• RXCHR: Received Character
Last character received if RXRDY is set.
• RXSYNH: Received Sync
0: Last Character received is a Data.
1: Last Character received is a Command.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
483
30.8.8 USART Transmit Holding Register
Name:
US_THR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXSYNH
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
TXCHR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXCHR
• TXCHR: Character to be Transmitted
Next character to be transmitted after the current character if TXRDY is not set.
• TXSYNH: Sync Field to be transmitted
0: The next character sent is encoded as a data. Start Frame Delimiter is DATA SYNC.
1: The next character sent is encoded as a command. Start Frame Delimiter is COMMAND SYNC.
484
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.9 USART Baud Rate Generator Register
Name:
US_BRGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
17
FP–
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CD
7
6
5
4
CD
• CD: Clock Divider
USART_MODE ≠ ISO7816
SYNC = 0
Value
OVER = 0
OVER = 1
0
1–65535
SYNC = 1
USART_MODE = ISO7816
Baud Rate Clock Disabled
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock/16/CD
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock/8/CD
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock /CD
Baud Rate = Selected
Clock/CD/FI_DI_RATIO
• FP: Fractional Part
0: Fractional divider is disabled.
1–7: Baudrate resolution, defined by FP × 1/8.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
485
30.8.10 USART Receiver Time-out Register
Name:
US_RTOR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TO
7
6
5
4
TO
• TO: Time-out Value
0: The Receiver Time-out is disabled.
1–65535: The Receiver Time-out is enabled and the Time-out delay is TO × Bit Period.
486
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.11 USART Transmitter Timeguard Register
Name:
US_TTGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TG
• TG: Timeguard Value
0: The Transmitter Timeguard is disabled.
1–255: The Transmitter timeguard is enabled and the timeguard delay is TG × Bit Period.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
487
30.8.12 USART FI DI RATIO Register
Name:
US_FIDI
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
FI_DI_RATIO
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FI_DI_RATIO
• FI_DI_RATIO: FI Over DI Ratio Value
0: If ISO7816 mode is selected, the Baud Rate Generator generates no signal.
1–2047: If ISO7816 mode is selected, the baud rate is the clock provided on SCK divided by FI_DI_RATIO.
488
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
30.8.13 USART Number of Errors Register
Name:
US_NER
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NB_ERRORS
• NB_ERRORS: Number of Errors
Total number of errors that occurred during an ISO7816 transfer. This register automatically clears when read.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
489
30.8.14 USART IrDA FILTER Register
Name:
US_IF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRDA_FILTER
• IRDA_FILTER: IrDA Filter
Sets the filter of the IrDA demodulator.
490
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.
Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC)
31.1
Description
The Atmel Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) provides a synchronous communication link with external devices.
It supports many serial synchronous communication protocols generally used in audio and telecom applications
such as I2S, Short Frame Sync, Long Frame Sync, etc.
The SSC contains an independent receiver and transmitter and a common clock divider. The receiver and the
transmitter each interface with three signals: the TD/RD signal for data, the TK/RK signal for the clock and the
TF/RF signal for the Frame Sync. The transfers can be programmed to start automatically or on different events
detected on the Frame Sync signal.
The SSC’s high-level of programmability and its two dedicated PDC channels of up to 32 bits permit a continuous
high bit rate data transfer without processor intervention.
Featuring connection to two PDC channels, the SSC permits interfacing with low processor overhead to the
following:
31.2
Codecs in master or slave mode
DAC through dedicated serial interface, particularly I2S
Magnetic card reader
Embedded Characteristics
Provides serial synchronous communication links used in audio and telecom applications (with Codecs in
Master or Slave Modes, I2S, TDM Buses, Magnetic Card Reader, etc.)
Contains an independent receiver and transmitter and a common clock divider
Offers a configurable frame sync and data length
Receiver and transmitter can be programmed to start automatically or on detection of different event on the
frame sync signal
Receiver and transmitter include a data signal, a clock signal and a frame synchronization signal
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
491
31.3
Block Diagram
Figure 31-1.
Block Diagram
System
Bus
APB Bridge
PDC
Peripheral
Bus
TF
TK
PMC
TD
MCK
PIO
SSC Interface
RF
RK
Interrupt Control
RD
SSC Interrupt
31.4
Application Block Diagram
Figure 31-2.
Application Block Diagram
OS or RTOS Driver
Power
Management
Interrupt
Management
Test
Management
SSC
Serial AUDIO
492
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Codec
Time Slot
Management
Frame
Management
Line Interface
31.5
Pin Name List
Table 31-1.
I/O Lines Description
Pin Name
31.6
Pin Description
Type
RF
Receiver Frame Synchro
Input/Output
RK
Receiver Clock
Input/Output
RD
Receiver Data
Input
TF
Transmitter Frame Synchro
Input/Output
TK
Transmitter Clock
Input/Output
TD
Transmitter Data
Output
Product Dependencies
31.6.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines.
Before using the SSC receiver, the PIO controller must be configured to dedicate the SSC receiver I/O lines to the
SSC peripheral mode.
Before using the SSC transmitter, the PIO controller must be configured to dedicate the SSC transmitter I/O lines
to the SSC peripheral mode.
31.6.2 Power Management
The SSC is not continuously clocked. The SSC interface may be clocked through the Power Management
Controller (PMC), therefore the programmer must first configure the PMC to enable the SSC clock.
31.6.3 Interrupt
The SSC interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). Handling interrupts
requires programming the AIC before configuring the SSC.
All SSC interrupts can be enabled/disabled configuring the SSC Interrupt mask register. Each pending and
unmasked SSC interrupt will assert the SSC interrupt line. The SSC interrupt service routine can get the interrupt
origin by reading the SSC interrupt status register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
493
31.7
Functional Description
This chapter contains the functional description of the following: SSC Functional Block, Clock Management, Data
format, Start, Transmitter, Receiver and Frame Sync.
The receiver and transmitter operate separately. However, they can work synchronously by programming the
receiver to use the transmit clock and/or to start a data transfer when transmission starts. Alternatively, this can be
done by programming the transmitter to use the receive clock and/or to start a data transfer when reception starts.
The transmitter and the receiver can be programmed to operate with the clock signals provided on either the TK or
RK pins. This allows the SSC to support many slave-mode data transfers. The maximum clock speed allowed on
the TK and RK pins is the master clock divided by 2.
Figure 31-3.
SSC Functional Block Diagram
Transmitter
MCK
TK Input
Clock
Divider
Transmit Clock
Controller
RX clock
TF
RF
Start
Selector
TX clock
Clock Output
Controller
TK
Frame Sync
Controller
TF
Transmit Shift Register
TX PDC
APB
Transmit Holding
Register
TD
Transmit Sync
Holding Register
Load Shift
User
Interface
Receiver
RK Input
Receive Clock RX Clock
Controller
TX Clock
RF
TF
Start
Selector
Interrupt Control
AIC
494
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
RK
Frame Sync
Controller
RF
Receive Shift Register
RX PDC
PDC
Clock Output
Controller
Receive Holding
Register
Load Shift
Receive Sync
Holding Register
RD
31.7.1 Clock Management
The transmitter clock can be generated by:
an external clock received on the TK I/O pad
the receiver clock
the internal clock divider
The receiver clock can be generated by:
an external clock received on the RK I/O pad
the transmitter clock
the internal clock divider
Furthermore, the transmitter block can generate an external clock on the TK I/O pad, and the receiver block can
generate an external clock on the RK I/O pad.
This allows the SSC to support many Master and Slave Mode data transfers.
31.7.1.1 Clock Divider
Figure 31-4.
Divided Clock Block Diagram
Clock Divider
SSC_CMR
MCK
/2
12-bit Counter
Divided Clock
The Master Clock divider is determined by the 12-bit field DIV counter and comparator (so its maximal value is
4095) in the Clock Mode Register SSC_CMR, allowing a Master Clock division by up to 8190. The Divided Clock is
provided to both the Receiver and Transmitter. When this field is programmed to 0, the Clock Divider is not used
and remains inactive.
When DIV is set to a value equal to or greater than 1, the Divided Clock has a frequency of Master Clock divided
by 2 times DIV. Each level of the Divided Clock has a duration of the Master Clock multiplied by DIV. This ensures
a 50% duty cycle for the Divided Clock regardless of whether the DIV value is even or odd.
Figure 31-5.
Divided Clock Generation
Master Clock
Divided Clock
DIV = 1
Divided Clock Frequency = MCK/2
Master Clock
Divided Clock
DIV = 3
Divided Clock Frequency = MCK/6
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
495
31.7.1.2 Transmitter Clock Management
The transmitter clock is generated from the receiver clock or the divider clock or an external clock scanned on the
TK I/O pad. The transmitter clock is selected by the CKS field in SSC_TCMR (Transmit Clock Mode Register).
Transmit Clock can be inverted independently by the CKI bits in SSC_TCMR.
The transmitter can also drive the TK I/O pad continuously or be limited to the actual data transfer. The clock
output is configured by the SSC_TCMR. The Transmit Clock Inversion (CKI) bits have no effect on the clock
outputs. Programming the TCMR to select TK pin (CKS field) and at the same time Continuous Transmit Clock
(CKO field) might lead to unpredictable results.
Figure 31-6.
Transmitter Clock Management
TK (pin)
Clock
Output
Tri_state
Controller
MUX
Receiver
Clock
Divider
Clock
Data Transfer
CKO
CKS
496
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
INV
MUX
Tri-state
Controller
CKI
CKG
Transmitter
Clock
31.7.1.3 Receiver Clock Management
The receiver clock is generated from the transmitter clock or the divider clock or an external clock scanned on the
RK I/O pad. The Receive Clock is selected by the CKS field in SSC_RCMR (Receive Clock Mode Register).
Receive Clocks can be inverted independently by the CKI bits in SSC_RCMR.
The receiver can also drive the RK I/O pad continuously or be limited to the actual data transfer. The clock output
is configured by the SSC_RCMR. The Receive Clock Inversion (CKI) bits have no effect on the clock outputs.
Programming the RCMR register to select RK pin (CKS field) and at the same time Continuous Receive Clock
(CKO field) can lead to unpredictable results.
Figure 31-7.
Receiver Clock Management
RK (pin)
Tri-state
Controller
MUX
Clock
Output
Transmitter
Clock
Divider
Clock
Data Transfer
CKO
CKS
INV
MUX
Tri-state
Controller
CKI
CKG
Receiver
Clock
31.7.1.4 Serial Clock Ratio Considerations
The Transmitter and the Receiver can be programmed to operate with the clock signals provided on either the TK
or RK pins. This allows the SSC to support many slave-mode data transfers. In this case, the maximum clock
speed allowed on the RK pin is:
̶
Master Clock divided by 2 if Receiver Frame Synchro is input
̶
Master Clock divided by 3 if Receiver Frame Synchro is output
In addition, the maximum clock speed allowed on the TK pin is:
̶
̶
Master Clock divided by 6 if Transmit Frame Synchro is input
Master Clock divided by 2 if Transmit Frame Synchro is output
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
497
31.7.2 Transmitter Operations
A transmitted frame is triggered by a start event and can be followed by synchronization data before data
transmission.
The start event is configured by setting the Transmit Clock Mode Register (SSC_TCMR). See “Start” on page 499.
The frame synchronization is configured setting the Transmit Frame Mode Register (SSC_TFMR). See “Frame
Sync” on page 501.
To transmit data, the transmitter uses a shift register clocked by the transmitter clock signal and the start mode
selected in the SSC_TCMR. Data is written by the application to the SSC_THR then transferred to the shift register
according to the data format selected.
When both the SSC_THR and the transmit shift register are empty, the status flag TXEMPTY is set in SSC_SR.
When the Transmit Holding register is transferred in the Transmit shift register, the status flag TXRDY is set in
SSC_SR and additional data can be loaded in the holding register.
Figure 31-8.
Transmitter Block Diagram
SSC_CR.TXEN
SSC_SR.TXEN
SSC_CR.TXDIS
SSC_TFMR.DATDEF
1
RF
Transmitter Clock
TF
Transmit Shift Register
0
SSC_TFMR.FSDEN
SSC_TCMR.STTDLY
SSC_TFMR.DATLEN
498
TD
0
SSC_TFMR.MSBF
Start
Selector
SSC_TCMR.STTDLY
SSC_TFMR.FSDEN
SSC_TFMR.DATNB
SSC_THR
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
1
SSC_TSHR
SSC_TFMR.FSLEN
31.7.3 Receiver Operations
A received frame is triggered by a start event and can be followed by synchronization data before data
transmission.
The start event is configured setting the Receive Clock Mode Register (SSC_RCMR). See Section 31.7.4 “Start”.
The frame synchronization is configured setting the Receive Frame Mode Register (SSC_RFMR). See “Frame
Sync” on page 501.
The receiver uses a shift register clocked by the receiver clock signal and the start mode selected in the
SSC_RCMR. The data is transferred from the shift register depending on the data format selected.
When the receiver shift register is full, the SSC transfers this data in the holding register, the status flag RXRDY is
set in SSC_SR and the data can be read in the receiver holding register. If another transfer occurs before read of
the RHR register, the status flag OVERUN is set in SSC_SR and the receiver shift register is transferred in the
RHR register.
Figure 31-9.
Receiver Block Diagram
SSC_CR.RXEN
SSC_SR.RXEN
SSC_CR.RXDIS
RF
Receiver Clock
TF
Start
Selector
SSC_RFMR.MSBF
SSC_RFMR.DATNB
Receive Shift Register
SSC_RSHR
SSC_RHR
SSC_RFMR.FSLEN
SSC_RFMR.DATLEN
RD
SSC_RCMR.STTDLY
31.7.4 Start
The transmitter and receiver can both be programmed to start their operations when an event occurs, respectively
in the Transmit Start Selection (START) field of SSC_TCMR and in the Receive Start Selection (START) field of
SSC_RCMR.
Under the following conditions the start event is independently programmable:
Continuous. In this case, the transmission starts as soon as a word is written in SSC_THR and the reception
starts as soon as the Receiver is enabled.
Synchronously with the transmitter/receiver
On detection of a falling/rising edge on TF/RF
On detection of a low level/high level on TF/RF
On detection of a level change or an edge on TF/RF
A start can be programmed in the same manner on either side of the Transmit/Receive Clock Register
(RCMR/TCMR). Thus, the start could be on TF (Transmit) or RF (Receive).
Moreover, the Receiver can start when data is detected in the bit stream with the Compare Functions.
Detection on TF/RF input/output is done by the field FSOS of the Transmit/Receive Frame Mode Register
(TFMR/RFMR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
499
Figure 31-10. Transmit Start Mode
TK
TF
(Input)
Start = Low Level on TF
Start = Falling Edge on TF
Start = High Level on TF
Start = Rising Edge on TF
Start = Level Change on TF
Start = Any Edge on TF
TD
(Output)
TD
(Output)
X
BO
STTDLY
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
BO
X
TD
(Output)
B1
STTDLY
TD
(Output)
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
TD
(Output)
TD
(Output)
B1
BO
X
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
X
B1
BO
BO
B1
STTDLY
Figure 31-11. Receive Pulse/Edge Start Modes
RK
RF
(Input)
Start = Low Level on RF
Start = Falling Edge on RF
Start = High Level on RF
Start = Rising Edge on RF
Start = Level Change on RF
Start = Any Edge on RF
RD
(Input)
RD
(Input)
X
BO
STTDLY
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
BO
X
RD
(Input)
B1
STTDLY
RD
(Input)
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
RD
(Input)
RD
(Input)
B1
BO
X
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
X
BO
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
500
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.7.5 Frame Sync
The Transmitter and Receiver Frame Sync pins, TF and RF, can be programmed to generate different kinds of
frame synchronization signals. The Frame Sync Output Selection (FSOS) field in the Receive Frame Mode
Register (SSC_RFMR) and in the Transmit Frame Mode Register (SSC_TFMR) are used to select the required
waveform.
Programmable low or high levels during data transfer are supported.
Programmable high levels before the start of data transfers or toggling are also supported.
If a pulse waveform is selected, the Frame Sync Length (FSLEN) field in SSC_RFMR and SSC_TFMR programs
the length of the pulse, from 1 bit time up to 16 bit time.
The periodicity of the Receive and Transmit Frame Sync pulse output can be programmed through the Period
Divider Selection (PERIOD) field in SSC_RCMR and SSC_TCMR.
31.7.5.1 Frame Sync Data
Frame Sync Data transmits or receives a specific tag during the Frame Sync signal.
During the Frame Sync signal, the Receiver can sample the RD line and store the data in the Receive Sync
Holding Register and the transmitter can transfer Transmit Sync Holding Register in the Shifter Register. The data
length to be sampled/shifted out during the Frame Sync signal is programmed by the FSLEN field in
SSC_RFMR/SSC_TFMR and has a maximum value of 16.
Concerning the Receive Frame Sync Data operation, if the Frame Sync Length is equal to or lower than the delay
between the start event and the actual data reception, the data sampling operation is performed in the Receive
Sync Holding Register through the Receive Shift Register.
The Transmit Frame Sync Operation is performed by the transmitter only if the bit Frame Sync Data Enable
(FSDEN) in SSC_TFMR is set. If the Frame Sync length is equal to or lower than the delay between the start event
and the actual data transmission, the normal transmission has priority and the data contained in the Transmit Sync
Holding Register is transferred in the Transmit Register, then shifted out.
31.7.5.2 Frame Sync Edge Detection
The Frame Sync Edge detection is programmed by the FSEDGE field in SSC_RFMR/SSC_TFMR. This sets the
corresponding flags RXSYN/TXSYN in the SSC Status Register (SSC_SR) on frame synchro edge detection
(signals RF/TF).
31.7.6 Receive Compare Modes
Figure 31-12. Receive Compare Modes
RK
RD
(Input)
CMP0
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
Ignored
B0
B1
B2
Start
FSLEN
Up to 16 Bits
(4 in This Example)
STDLY
DATLEN
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
501
31.7.6.1 Compare Functions
Length of the comparison patterns (Compare 0, Compare 1) and thus the number of bits they are compared to is
defined by FSLEN, but with a maximum value of 16 bits. Comparison is always done by comparing the last bits
received with the comparison pattern. Compare 0 can be one start event of the Receiver. In this case, the receiver
compares at each new sample the last bits received at the Compare 0 pattern contained in the Compare 0
Register (SSC_RC0R). When this start event is selected, the user can program the Receiver to start a new data
transfer either by writing a new Compare 0, or by receiving continuously until Compare 1 occurs. This selection is
done with the bit (STOP) in SSC_RCMR.
31.7.7 Data Format
The data framing format of both the transmitter and the receiver are programmable through the Transmitter Frame
Mode Register (SSC_TFMR) and the Receiver Frame Mode Register (SSC_RFMR). In either case, the user can
independently select:
the event that starts the data transfer (START)
the delay in number of bit periods between the start event and the first data bit (STTDLY)
the length of the data (DATLEN)
the number of data to be transferred for each start event (DATNB).
the length of synchronization transferred for each start event (FSLEN)
the bit sense: most or lowest significant bit first (MSBF)
Additionally, the transmitter can be used to transfer synchronization and select the level driven on the TD pin while
not in data transfer operation. This is done respectively by the Frame Sync Data Enable (FSDEN) and by the Data
Default Value (DATDEF) bits in SSC_TFMR.
Table 31-2.
Data Frame Registers
Transmitter
Receiver
Field
Length
Comment
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
DATLEN
Up to 32
Size of word
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
DATNB
Up to 16
Number of words transmitted in frame
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
MSBF
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
FSLEN
Up to 16
Size of Synchro data register
SSC_TFMR
DATDEF
0 or 1
Data default value ended
SSC_TFMR
FSDEN
Most significant bit first
Enable send SSC_TSHR
SSC_TCMR
SSC_RCMR
PERIOD
Up to 512
Frame size
SSC_TCMR
SSC_RCMR
STTDLY
Up to 255
Size of transmit start delay
502
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 31-13. Transmit and Receive Frame Format in Edge/Pulse Start Modes
Start
Start
PERIOD
TF/RF
(1)
FSLEN
TD
(If FSDEN = 1)
Sync Data
Data
Data
From SSC_THR
From SSC_THR
Default
TD
(If FSDEN = 0)
RD
Default
From SSC_TSHR FromDATDEF
Sync Data
Data
Data
From SSC_THR
From DATDEF
Ignored
From DATDEF
Ignored
Data
To SSC_RHR
To SSC_RHR
DATLEN
DATLEN
STTDLY
Sync Data
Default
From SSC_THR
Data
To SSC_RSHR
Default
FromDATDEF
Sync Data
DATNB
Note:
1.
Example of input on falling edge of TF/RF.
Figure 31-14. Transmit Frame Format in Continuous Mode
Start
Data
TD
Default
Data
From SSC_THR
From SSC_THR
DATLEN
DATLEN
Start: 1. TXEMPTY set to 1
2. Write into the SSC_THR
Note:
1.
STTDLY is set to 0. In this example, SSC_THR is loaded twice. FSDEN value has no effect on the transmission.
SyncData cannot be output in continuous mode.
Figure 31-15. Receive Frame Format in Continuous Mode
Start = Enable Receiver
RD
Note:
1.
Data
Data
To SSC_RHR
To SSC_RHR
DATLEN
DATLEN
STTDLY is set to 0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
503
31.7.8 Loop Mode
The receiver can be programmed to receive transmissions from the transmitter. This is done by setting the Loop
Mode (LOOP) bit in SSC_RFMR. In this case, RD is connected to TD, RF is connected to TF and RK is connected
to TK.
31.7.9 Interrupt
Most bits in SSC_SR have a corresponding bit in interrupt management registers.
The SSC can be programmed to generate an interrupt when it detects an event. The interrupt is controlled by
writing SSC_IER (Interrupt Enable Register) and SSC_IDR (Interrupt Disable Register) These registers enable
and disable, respectively, the corresponding interrupt by setting and clearing the corresponding bit in SSC_IMR
(Interrupt Mask Register), which controls the generation of interrupts by asserting the SSC interrupt line connected
to the AIC.
Figure 31-16. Interrupt Block Diagram
SSC_IMR
SSC_IER
PDC
SSC_IDR
Set
Clear
TXBUFE
ENDTX
Transmitter
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
TXSYNC
Interrupt
Control
RXBUFF
ENDRX
Receiver
RXRDY
OVRUN
RXSYNC
504
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
SSC Interrupt
31.8
SSC Application Examples
The SSC can support several serial communication modes used in audio or high speed serial links. Some
standard applications are shown in the following figures. All serial link applications supported by the SSC are not
listed here.
Figure 31-17. Audio Application Block Diagram
Clock SCK
TK
Word Select WS
I2S
RECEIVER
TF
Data SD
SSC
TD
RD
Clock SCK
RF
Word Select WS
RK
MSB
Data SD
LSB
MSB
Right Channel
Left Channel
Figure 31-18. Codec Application Block Diagram
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
TK
Frame sync (FSYNC)
TF
Serial Data Out
SSC
CODEC
TD
Serial Data In
RD
RF
RK
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
Frame sync (FSYNC)
First Time Slot
Dstart
Dend
Serial Data Out
Serial Data In
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
505
Figure 31-19. Time Slot Application Block Diagram
SCLK
TK
FSYNC
TF
CODEC
First
Time Slot
Data Out
TD
SSC
RD
Data in
RF
RK
CODEC
Second
Time Slot
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
Frame sync (FSYNC)
First Time Slot
Dstart
Serial Data Out
Serial Data in
506
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Second Time Slot
Dend
31.9
Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) User Interface
Table 31-3.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0
Control Register
SSC_CR
Write-only
–
0x4
Clock Mode Register
SSC_CMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Receive Clock Mode Register
SSC_RCMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x14
Receive Frame Mode Register
SSC_RFMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x18
Transmit Clock Mode Register
SSC_TCMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x1C
Transmit Frame Mode Register
SSC_TFMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x20
Receive Holding Register
SSC_RHR
Read-only
0x0
0x24
Transmit Holding Register
SSC_THR
Write-only
–
0x28
Reserved
–
–
–
0x2C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x30
Receive Sync. Holding Register
SSC_RSHR
Read-only
0x0
0x34
Transmit Sync. Holding Register
SSC_TSHR
Read/Write
0x0
0x38
Receive Compare 0 Register
SSC_RC0R
Read/Write
0x0
0x3C
Receive Compare 1 Register
SSC_RC1R
Read/Write
0x0
0x40
Status Register
SSC_SR
Read-only
0x000000CC
0x44
Interrupt Enable Register
SSC_IER
Write-only
–
0x48
Interrupt Disable Register
SSC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x4C
Interrupt Mask Register
SSC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for Peripheral Data Controller (PDC)
–
–
–
0x50–0xFC
0x100–0x124
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
507
31.9.1 SSC Control Register
Name:
SSC_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
SWRST
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
TXDIS
8
TXEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXDIS
0
RXEN
• RXEN: Receive Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables Receive if RXDIS is not set.
• RXDIS: Receive Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables Receive. If a character is currently being received, disables at end of current character reception.
• TXEN: Transmit Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables Transmit if TXDIS is not set.
• TXDIS: Transmit Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables Transmit. If a character is currently being transmitted, disables at end of current character transmission.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Performs a software reset. Has priority on any other bit in SSC_CR.
508
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.9.2 SSC Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_CMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
0
DIV
3
2
DIV
• DIV: Clock Divider
0: The Clock Divider is not active.
Any Other Value: The Divided Clock equals the Master Clock divided by 2 times DIV. The maximum bit rate is MCK/2. The
minimum bit rate is MCK/2 × 4095 = MCK/8190.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
509
31.9.3 SSC Receive Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_RCMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
PERIOD
23
22
21
20
STTDLY
15
–
7
14
–
13
–
12
STOP
11
6
5
CKI
4
3
CKO
CKG
START
2
1
0
CKS
• CKS: Receive Clock Selection
Value
Selected Receive Clock
0x0
Divided Clock
0x1
TK Clock signal
0x2
RK pin
0x3
Reserved
• CKO: Receive Clock Output Mode Selection
Value
Receive Clock Output Mode
RK Pin
0x0
None
0x1
Continuous Receive Clock
Output
0x2
Receive Clock only during data transfers
Output
0x3–0x7
Input-only
Reserved
• CKI: Receive Clock Inversion
0: The data inputs (Data and Frame Sync signals) are sampled on Receive Clock falling edge. The Frame Sync signal output is shifted out on Receive Clock rising edge.
1: The data inputs (Data and Frame Sync signals) are sampled on Receive Clock rising edge. The Frame Sync signal output is shifted out on Receive Clock falling edge.
CKI affects only the Receive Clock and not the output clock signal.
• CKG: Receive Clock Gating Selection
510
Value
Receive Clock Gating
0x0
None, continuous clock
0x1
Receive Clock enabled only if RF Low
0x2
Receive Clock enabled only if RF High
0x3
Reserved
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• START: Receive Start Selection
Value
Receive Start
0x0
Continuous, as soon as the receiver is enabled, and immediately after the end of transfer of the previous data.
0x1
Transmit start
0x2
Detection of a low level on RF signal
0x3
Detection of a high level on RF signal
0x4
Detection of a falling edge on RF signal
0x5
Detection of a rising edge on RF signal
0x6
Detection of any level change on RF signal
0x7
Detection of any edge on RF signal
0x8
Compare 0
0x9–0xF
Reserved
• STOP: Receive Stop Selection
0: After completion of a data transfer when starting with a Compare 0, the receiver stops the data transfer and waits for a
new compare 0.
1: After starting a receive with a Compare 0, the receiver operates in a continuous mode until a Compare 1 is detected.
• STTDLY: Receive Start Delay
If STTDLY is not 0, a delay of STTDLY clock cycles is inserted between the start event and the actual start of reception.
When the Receiver is programmed to start synchronously with the Transmitter, the delay is also applied.
Note: It is very important that STTDLY be set carefully. If STTDLY must be set, it should be done in relation to TAG
(Receive Sync Data) reception.
• PERIOD: Receive Period Divider Selection
This field selects the divider to apply to the selected Receive Clock in order to generate a new Frame Sync Signal. If 0, no
PERIOD signal is generated. If not 0, a PERIOD signal is generated each 2 × (PERIOD + 1) Receive Clock.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
511
31.9.4 SSC Receive Frame Mode Register
Name:
SSC_RFMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
23
–
22
21
FSOS
20
19
18
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
7
MSBF
6
–
5
LOOP
4
3
25
–
24
FSEDGE
17
16
9
8
1
0
FSLEN
10
DATNB
2
DATLEN
• DATLEN: Data Length
0: Forbidden value (1-bit data length not supported).
Any other value: The bit stream contains DATLEN + 1 data bits. Moreover, it defines the transfer size performed by the
PDC2 assigned to the Receiver. If DATLEN is lower or equal to 7, data transfers are in bytes. If DATLEN is between 8 and
15 (included), half-words are transferred, and for any other value, 32-bit words are transferred.
• LOOP: Loop Mode
0: Normal operating mode.
1: RD is driven by TD, RF is driven by TF and TK drives RK.
• MSBF: Most Significant Bit First
0: The lowest significant bit of the data register is sampled first in the bit stream.
1: The most significant bit of the data register is sampled first in the bit stream.
• DATNB: Data Number per Frame
This field defines the number of data words to be received after each transfer start, which is equal to (DATNB + 1).
• FSLEN: Receive Frame Sync Length
This field defines the number of bits sampled and stored in the Receive Sync Data Register. When this mode is selected by
the START field in the Receive Clock Mode Register, it also determines the length of the sampled data to be compared to
the Compare 0 or Compare 1 register.
This field is used with FSLEN_EXT to determine the pulse length of the Receive Frame Sync signal.
Pulse length is equal to FSLEN + 1 Receive Clock periods.
512
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• FSOS: Receive Frame Sync Output Selection
Value
Selected Receive Frame Sync Signal
RF Pin
0x0
None
0x1
Negative Pulse
Output
0x2
Positive Pulse
Output
0x3
Driven Low during data transfer
Output
0x4
Driven High during data transfer
Output
0x5
Toggling at each start of data transfer
Output
0x6–0x7
Input-only
Reserved
Undefined
• FSEDGE: Frame Sync Edge Detection
Determines which edge on Frame Sync will generate the interrupt RXSYN in the SSC Status Register.
Value
Frame Sync Edge Detection
0x0
Positive Edge Detection
0x1
Negative Edge Detection
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
513
31.9.5 SSC Transmit Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_TCMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
PERIOD
23
22
21
20
STTDLY
15
–
7
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
6
5
CKI
4
3
CKO
CKG
START
2
1
0
CKS
• CKS: Transmit Clock Selection
Value
Selected Transmit Clock
0x0
Divided Clock
0x1
RK Clock signal
0x2
TK Pin
0x3
Reserved
• CKO: Transmit Clock Output Mode Selection
Value
Transmit Clock Output Mode
TK pin
0x0
None
0x1
Continuous Transmit Clock
Output
0x2
Transmit Clock only during data transfers
Output
0x3–0x7
Input-only
Reserved
• CKI: Transmit Clock Inversion
0: The data outputs (Data and Frame Sync signals) are shifted out on Transmit Clock falling edge. The Frame sync signal
input is sampled on Transmit clock rising edge.
1: The data outputs (Data and Frame Sync signals) are shifted out on Transmit Clock rising edge. The Frame sync signal
input is sampled on Transmit clock falling edge.
CKI affects only the Transmit Clock and not the output clock signal.
• CKG: Transmit Clock Gating Selection
Value
514
Transmit Clock Gating
0x0
None, continuous clock
0x1
Transmit Clock enabled only if TF Low
0x2
Transmit Clock enabled only if TF High
0x3
Reserved
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• START: Transmit Start Selection
Value
Transmit Start
0x0
Continuous, as soon as a word is written in the SSC_THR Register (if Transmit is enabled), and
immediately after the end of transfer of the previous data.
0x1
Receive start
0x2
Detection of a low level on TF signal
0x3
Detection of a high level on TF signal
0x4
Detection of a falling edge on TF signal
0x5
Detection of a rising edge on TF signal
0x6
Detection of any level change on TF signal
0x7
Detection of any edge on TF signal
0x8–0xF
Reserved
• STTDLY: Transmit Start Delay
If STTDLY is not 0, a delay of STTDLY clock cycles is inserted between the start event and the actual start of transmission
of data. When the Transmitter is programmed to start synchronously with the Receiver, the delay is also applied.
Note: STTDLY must be set carefully. If STTDLY is too short in respect to TAG (Transmit Sync Data) emission, data is emitted instead of the end of TAG.
• PERIOD: Transmit Period Divider Selection
This field selects the divider to apply to the selected Transmit Clock to generate a new Frame Sync Signal. If 0, no period
signal is generated. If not 0, a period signal is generated at each 2 × (PERIOD + 1) Transmit Clock.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
515
31.9.6 SSC Transmit Frame Mode Register
Name:
SSC_TFMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
23
FSDEN
22
21
FSOS
20
19
18
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
7
MSBF
6
–
5
DATDEF
4
3
25
–
24
FSEDGE
17
16
9
8
1
0
FSLEN
10
DATNB
2
DATLEN
• DATLEN: Data Length
0: Forbidden value (1-bit data length not supported).
Any other value: The bit stream contains DATLEN + 1 data bits. Moreover, it defines the transfer size performed by the
PDC2 assigned to the Transmit. If DATLEN is lower or equal to 7, data transfers are bytes, if DATLEN is between 8 and 15
(included), half-words are transferred, and for any other value, 32-bit words are transferred.
• DATDEF: Data Default Value
This bit defines the level driven on the TD pin while out of transmission. Note that if the pin is defined as multi-drive by the
PIO Controller, the pin is enabled only if the SCC TD output is 1.
• MSBF: Most Significant Bit First
0: The lowest significant bit of the data register is shifted out first in the bit stream.
1: The most significant bit of the data register is shifted out first in the bit stream.
• DATNB: Data Number per frame
This field defines the number of data words to be transferred after each transfer start, which is equal to (DATNB + 1).
• FSLEN: Transmit Frame Sync Length
This field defines the length of the Transmit Frame Sync signal and the number of bits shifted out from the Transmit Sync
Data Register if FSDEN is 1.
This field is used with FSLEN_EXT to determine the pulse length of the Transmit Frame Sync signal.
Pulse length is equal to FSLEN + 1 Transmit Clock periods.
516
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• FSOS: Transmit Frame Sync Output Selection
Value
Selected Transmit Frame Sync Signal
TF Pin
0x0
None
0x1
Negative Pulse
Output
0x2
Positive Pulse
Output
0x3
Driven Low during data transfer
Output
0x4
Driven High during data transfer
Output
0x5
Toggling at each start of data transfer
Output
0x6–0x7
Input-only
Reserved
Undefined
• FSDEN: Frame Sync Data Enable
0: The TD line is driven with the default value during the Transmit Frame Sync signal.
1: SSC_TSHR value is shifted out during the transmission of the Transmit Frame Sync signal.
• FSEDGE: Frame Sync Edge Detection
Determines which edge on frame sync will generate the interrupt TXSYN (Status Register).
Value
Frame Sync Edge Detection
0x0
Positive Edge Detection
0x1
Negative Edge Detection
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
517
31.9.7 SSC Receive Holding Register
Name:
SSC_RHR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RDAT
23
22
21
20
RDAT
15
14
13
12
RDAT
7
6
5
4
RDAT
• RDAT: Receive Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by DATLEN in SSC_RFMR.
518
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.9.8 SSC Transmit Holding Register
Name:
SSC_THR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TDAT
23
22
21
20
TDAT
15
14
13
12
TDAT
7
6
5
4
TDAT
• TDAT: Transmit Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by DATLEN in SSC_TFMR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
519
31.9.9 SSC Receive Synchronization Holding Register
Name:
SSC_RSHR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RSDAT
7
6
5
4
RSDAT
• RSDAT: Receive Synchronization Data
520
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.9.10 SSC Transmit Synchronization Holding Register
Name:
SSC_TSHR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TSDAT
7
6
5
4
TSDAT
• TSDAT: Transmit Synchronization Data
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
521
31.9.11 SSC Receive Compare 0 Register
Name:
SSC_RC0R
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CP0
7
6
5
4
CP0
• CP0: Receive Compare Data 0
522
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
31.9.12 SSC Receive Compare 1 Register
Name:
SSC_RC1R
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CP1
7
6
5
4
CP1
• CP1: Receive Compare Data 1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
523
31.9.13 SSC Status Register
Name:
SSC_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
RXEN
16
TXEN
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
RXSYN
10
TXSYN
9
CP1
8
CP0
7
RXBUFF
6
ENDRX
5
OVRUN
4
RXRDY
3
TXBUFE
2
ENDTX
1
TXEMPTY
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
0: Data has been loaded in SSC_THR and is waiting to be loaded in the Transmit Shift Register (TSR).
1: SSC_THR is empty.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty
0: Data remains in SSC_THR or is currently transmitted from TSR.
1: Last data written in SSC_THR has been loaded in TSR and last data loaded in TSR has been transmitted.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission
0: The register SSC_TCR has not reached 0 since the last write in SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR.
1: The register SSC_TCR has reached 0 since the last write in SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR.
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
0: SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both SSC_TCR and SSC_TNCR have a value of 0.
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
0: SSC_RHR is empty.
1: Data has been received and loaded in SSC_RHR.
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun
0: No data has been loaded in SSC_RHR while previous data has not been read since the last read of the Status Register.
1: Data has been loaded in SSC_RHR while previous data has not yet been read since the last read of the Status Register.
• ENDRX: End of Reception
0: Data is written on the Receive Counter Register or Receive Next Counter Register.
1: End of PDC transfer when Receive Counter Register has arrived at zero.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
0: SSC_RCR or SSC_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both SSC_RCR and SSC_RNCR have a value of 0.
524
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• CP0: Compare 0
0: A compare 0 has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A compare 0 has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• CP1: Compare 1
0: A compare 1 has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A compare 1 has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• TXSYN: Transmit Sync
0: A Tx Sync has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A Tx Sync has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• RXSYN: Receive Sync
0: An Rx Sync has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: An Rx Sync has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• TXEN: Transmit Enable
0: Transmit is disabled.
1: Transmit is enabled.
• RXEN: Receive Enable
0: Receive is disabled.
1: Receive is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
525
31.9.14 SSC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
SSC_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
RXSYN
10
TXSYN
9
CP1
8
CP0
7
RXBUFF
6
ENDRX
5
OVRUN
4
RXRDY
3
TXBUFE
2
ENDTX
1
TXEMPTY
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Transmit Ready Interrupt.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Transmit Empty Interrupt.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the End of Transmission Interrupt.
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt
• RXRDY: Receive Ready Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Receive Ready Interrupt.
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Receive Overrun Interrupt.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the End of Reception Interrupt.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Receive Buffer Full Interrupt.
526
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• CP0: Compare 0 Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Compare 0 Interrupt.
• CP1: Compare 1 Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Compare 1 Interrupt.
• TXSYN: Tx Sync Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Tx Sync Interrupt.
• RXSYN: Rx Sync Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Rx Sync Interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
527
31.9.15 SSC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
SSC_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
RXSYN
10
TXSYN
9
CP1
8
CP0
7
RXBUFF
6
ENDRX
5
OVRUN
4
RXRDY
3
TXBUFE
2
ENDTX
1
TXEMPTY
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Transmit Ready Interrupt.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Transmit Empty Interrupt.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the End of Transmission Interrupt.
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt.
• RXRDY: Receive Ready Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Receive Ready Interrupt.
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Receive Overrun Interrupt.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the End of Reception Interrupt.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Receive Buffer Full Interrupt.
528
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• CP0: Compare 0 Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Compare 0 Interrupt.
• CP1: Compare 1 Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Compare 1 Interrupt.
• TXSYN: Tx Sync Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Tx Sync Interrupt.
• RXSYN: Rx Sync Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Rx Sync Interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
529
31.9.16 SSC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
SSC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
RXSYN
10
TXSYN
9
CP1
8
CP0
7
RXBUF
6
ENDRX
5
OVRUN
4
RXRDY
3
TXBUFE
2
ENDTX
1
TXEMPTY
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Mask
0: The Transmit Ready Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Transmit Ready Interrupt is enabled.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty Interrupt Mask
0: The Transmit Empty Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Transmit Empty Interrupt is enabled.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Mask
0: The End of Transmission Interrupt is disabled.
1: The End of Transmission Interrupt is enabled.
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
0: The Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt is enabled.
• RXRDY: Receive Ready Interrupt Mask
0: The Receive Ready Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Receive Ready Interrupt is enabled.
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun Interrupt Mask
0: The Receive Overrun Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Receive Overrun Interrupt is enabled.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Mask
0: The End of Reception Interrupt is disabled.
1: The End of Reception Interrupt is enabled.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
0: The Receive Buffer Full Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Receive Buffer Full Interrupt is enabled.
530
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• CP0: Compare 0 Interrupt Mask
0: The Compare 0 Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Compare 0 Interrupt is enabled.
• CP1: Compare 1 Interrupt Mask
0: The Compare 1 Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Compare 1 Interrupt is enabled.
• TXSYN: Tx Sync Interrupt Mask
0: The Tx Sync Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Tx Sync Interrupt is enabled.
• RXSYN: Rx Sync Interrupt Mask
0: The Rx Sync Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Rx Sync Interrupt is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
531
32.
Timer Counter (TC)
32.1
Description
The Timer Counter (TC) includes three identical 16-bit Timer Counter channels.
Each channel can be independently programmed to perform a wide range of functions including frequency
measurement, event counting, interval measurement, pulse generation, delay timing and pulse width modulation.
Each channel has three external clock inputs, five internal clock inputs and two multi-purpose input/output signals
which can be configured by the user. Each channel drives an internal interrupt signal which can be programmed to
generate processor interrupts.
The Timer Counter block has two global registers which act upon all three TC channels.
The Block Control Register allows the three channels to be started simultaneously with the same instruction.
The Block Mode Register defines the external clock inputs for each channel, allowing them to be chained.
Table 32-1 gives the assignment of the device Timer Counter clock inputs common to Timer Counter 0 to 2
Table 32-1.
32.2
Name
Definition
TIMER_CLOCK1
MCK/2
TIMER_CLOCK2
MCK/8
TIMER_CLOCK3
MCK/32
TIMER_CLOCK4
MCK/128
TIMER_CLOCK5
SLCK
Embedded Characteristics
Two blocks of three 16-bit Timer Counter channels
Each channel can be individually programmed to perform a wide range of functions including:
Note:
532
Timer Counter Clock Assignment
̶
Frequency Measurement
̶
Event Counting
̶
Interval Measurement
̶
Pulse Generation
̶
Delay Timing
̶
Pulse Width Modulation
̶
Up/down Capabilities
Each channel is user-configurable and contains:
̶
Three external clock inputs
̶
Five internal clock inputs
̶
Two multi-purpose input/output signals
Each block contains two global registers that act on all three TC Channels
TC Block 0 (TC0, TC1, TC2) and TC Block 1 (TC3, TC4, TC5) have identical user interfaces. See Figure 6-1,
“SAM9260 Memory Mapping,” on page 19 for TC Block 0 and TC Block 1 base addresses.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
32.3
Block Diagram
Figure 32-1.
Timer Counter Block Diagram
Parallel I/O
Controller
TIMER_CLOCK1
TCLK0
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIOA1
TIOA2
TIMER_CLOCK3
XC0
TCLK1
XC1
TCLK2
XC2
Timer/Counter
Channel 0
TIOA
TIOA0
TIOB0
TIOA0
TIOB
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK5
TIOB0
TC0XC0S
SYNC
TCLK0
TCLK1
TCLK2
INT0
TCLK0
TCLK1
XC0
TIOA0
XC1
Timer/Counter
Channel 1
TIOA
TIOA1
TIOB1
TIOA1
TIOB
TIOA2
TIOB1
XC2
TCLK2
SYNC
TC1XC1S
TCLK0
XC0
TCLK1
XC1
Timer/Counter
Channel 2
INT1
TIOA
TIOA2
TIOB2
TIOA2
TIOB
TCLK2
XC2
TIOA0
TC2XC2S
TIOA1
TIOB2
SYNC
INT2
Timer Counter
Advanced
Interrupt
Controller
Table 32-2.
Channel Signal Description
Signal Name
XC0, XC1, XC2
External Clock Inputs
TIOA
Capture Mode: Timer Counter Input
Waveform Mode: Timer Counter Output
TIOB
Capture Mode: Timer Counter Input
Waveform Mode: Timer Counter Input/Output
INT
SYNC
32.4
Description
Interrupt Signal Output
Synchronization Input Signal
Pin Name List
Table 32-3.
TC Pin List
Pin Name
Description
Type
TCLK0–TCLK2
External Clock Input
Input
TIOA0–TIOA2
I/O Line A
I/O
TIOB0–TIOB2
I/O Line B
I/O
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
533
32.5
Product Dependencies
32.5.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines. The programmer
must first program the PIO controllers to assign the TC pins to their peripheral functions.
32.5.2 Power Management
The TC is clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must first configure the
PMC to enable the Timer Counter clock.
32.5.3 Interrupt
The TC has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). Handling the TC interrupt
requires programming the AIC before configuring the TC.
32.6
Functional Description
32.6.1 TC Description
The three channels of the Timer Counter are independent and identical in operation. The registers for channel
programming are listed in Table 32-4 on page 546.
32.6.2 16-bit Counter
Each channel is organized around a 16-bit counter. The value of the counter is incremented at each positive edge
of the selected clock. When the counter has reached the value 0xFFFF and passes to 0x0000, an overflow occurs
and the COVFS bit in TC_SR (Status Register) is set.
The current value of the counter is accessible in real time by reading the Counter Value Register (TC_CV). The
counter can be reset by a trigger. In this case, the counter value passes to 0x0000 on the next valid edge of the
selected clock.
32.6.3 Clock Selection
At block level, input clock signals of each channel can either be connected to the external inputs TCLK0, TCLK1 or
TCLK2, or be connected to the internal I/O signals TIOA0, TIOA1 or TIOA2 for chaining by programming the
TC_BMR (Block Mode). See Figure 32-2 on page 535.
Each channel can independently select an internal or external clock source for its counter:
Internal clock signals: TIMER_CLOCK1, TIMER_CLOCK2, TIMER_CLOCK3, TIMER_CLOCK4,
TIMER_CLOCK5
External clock signals: XC0, XC1 or XC2
This selection is made by the TCCLKS bits in the TC Channel Mode Register.
The selected clock can be inverted with the CLKI bit in TC_CMR. This allows counting on the opposite edges of
the clock.
The burst function allows the clock to be validated when an external signal is high. The BURST parameter in the
Mode Register defines this signal (none, XC0, XC1, XC2). See Figure 32-3 on page 535.
Note:
534
In all cases, if an external clock is used, the duration of each of its levels must be longer than the master clock period.
The external clock frequency must be at least 2.5 times lower than the master clock.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 32-2.
Clock Chaining Selection
TC0XC0S
Timer/Counter
Channel 0
TCLK0
TIOA1
XC0
TIOA2
TIOA0
XC1 = TCLK1
XC2 = TCLK2
TIOB0
SYNC
TC1XC1S
Timer/Counter
Channel 1
TCLK1
XC0 = TCLK2
TIOA0
TIOA1
XC1
TIOA2
XC2 = TCLK2
TIOB1
SYNC
Timer/Counter
Channel 2
TC2XC2S
XC0 = TCLK0
TCLK2
TIOA2
XC1 = TCLK1
TIOA0
XC2
TIOB2
TIOA1
SYNC
Figure 32-3.
Clock Selection
TCCLKS
TIMER_CLOCK1
TIMER_CLOCK2
CLKI
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK5
Selected
Clock
XC0
XC1
XC2
BURST
1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
535
32.6.4 Clock Control
The clock of each counter can be controlled in two different ways: it can be enabled/disabled and started/stopped.
See Figure 32-4.
The clock can be enabled or disabled by the user with the CLKEN and the CLKDIS commands in the Control
Register. In Capture Mode it can be disabled by an RB load event if LDBDIS is set to 1 in TC_CMR. In
Waveform Mode, it can be disabled by an RC Compare event if CPCDIS is set to 1 in TC_CMR. When
disabled, the start or the stop actions have no effect: only a CLKEN command in the Control Register can reenable the clock. When the clock is enabled, the CLKSTA bit is set in the Status Register.
The clock can also be started or stopped: a trigger (software, synchro, external or compare) always starts
the clock. The clock can be stopped by an RB load event in Capture Mode (LDBSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) or a
RC compare event in Waveform Mode (CPCSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR). The start and the stop commands have
effect only if the clock is enabled.
Figure 32-4.
Clock Control
Selected
Clock
Trigger
CLKSTA
Q
Q
S
CLKEN
CLKDIS
S
R
R
Counter
Clock
Stop
Event
Disable
Event
32.6.5 TC Operating Modes
Each channel can independently operate in two different modes:
Capture Mode provides measurement on signals.
Waveform Mode provides wave generation.
The TC Operating Mode is programmed with the WAVE bit in the TC Channel Mode Register.
In Capture Mode, TIOA and TIOB are configured as inputs.
In Waveform Mode, TIOA is always configured to be an output and TIOB is an output if it is not selected to be the
external trigger.
536
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
32.6.6 Trigger
A trigger resets the counter and starts the counter clock. Three types of triggers are common to both modes, and a
fourth external trigger is available to each mode.
The following triggers are common to both modes:
Software Trigger: Each channel has a software trigger, available by setting SWTRG in TC_CCR.
SYNC: Each channel has a synchronization signal SYNC. When asserted, this signal has the same effect as
a software trigger. The SYNC signals of all channels are asserted simultaneously by writing TC_BCR (Block
Control) with SYNC set.
Compare RC Trigger: RC is implemented in each channel and can provide a trigger when the counter value
matches the RC value if CPCTRG is set in TC_CMR.
The channel can also be configured to have an external trigger. In Capture Mode, the external trigger signal can be
selected between TIOA and TIOB. In Waveform Mode, an external event can be programmed on one of the
following signals: TIOB, XC0, XC1 or XC2. This external event can then be programmed to perform a trigger by
setting ENETRG in TC_CMR.
If an external trigger is used, the duration of the pulses must be longer than the master clock period in order to be
detected.
Regardless of the trigger used, it will be taken into account at the following active edge of the selected clock. This
means that the counter value can be read differently from zero just after a trigger, especially when a low frequency
signal is selected as the clock.
32.6.7 Capture Operating Mode
This mode is entered by clearing the WAVE parameter in TC_CMR (Channel Mode Register).
Capture Mode allows the TC channel to perform measurements such as pulse timing, frequency, period, duty
cycle and phase on TIOA and TIOB signals which are considered as inputs.
Figure 32-5 shows the configuration of the TC channel when programmed in Capture Mode.
32.6.8 Capture Registers A and B
Registers A and B (RA and RB) are used as capture registers. This means that they can be loaded with the
counter value when a programmable event occurs on the signal TIOA.
The LDRA parameter in TC_CMR defines the TIOA edge for the loading of register A, and the LDRB parameter
defines the TIOA edge for the loading of Register B.
RA is loaded only if it has not been loaded since the last trigger or if RB has been loaded since the last loading of
RA.
RB is loaded only if RA has been loaded since the last trigger or the last loading of RB.
Loading RA or RB before the read of the last value loaded sets the Overrun Error Flag (LOVRS) in TC_SR (Status
Register). In this case, the old value is overwritten.
32.6.9 Trigger Conditions
In addition to the SYNC signal, the software trigger and the RC compare trigger, an external trigger can be defined.
The ABETRG bit in TC_CMR selects TIOA or TIOB input signal as an external trigger. The ETRGEDG parameter
defines the edge (rising, falling or both) detected to generate an external trigger. If ETRGEDG = 0 (none), the
external trigger is disabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
537
538
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
MTIOA
MTIOB
1
If RA is not loaded
or RB is Loaded
Edge
Detector
ETRGEDG
SWTRG
Timer/Counter Channel
ABETRG
BURST
CLKI
R
S
OVF
LDRB
Edge
Detector
Edge
Detector
Capture
Register A
LDBSTOP
R
S
CLKEN
LDRA
If RA is Loaded
CPCTRG
16-bit Counter
RESET
Trig
CLK
Q
Q
CLKSTA
LDBDIS
Capture
Register B
CLKDIS
TC1_SR
TIOA
TIOB
SYNC
XC2
XC1
XC0
TIMER_CLOCK5
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIMER_CLOCK1
TCCLKS
Compare RC =
Register C
COVFS
INT
Figure 32-5.
Capture Mode
CPCS
LOVRS
LDRBS
ETRGS
LDRAS
TC1_IMR
32.6.10 Waveform Operating Mode
Waveform operating mode is entered by setting the WAVE parameter in TC_CMR (Channel Mode Register).
In Waveform Operating Mode the TC channel generates 1 or 2 PWM signals with the same frequency and
independently programmable duty cycles, or generates different types of one-shot or repetitive pulses.
In this mode, TIOA is configured as an output and TIOB is defined as an output if it is not used as an external event
(EEVT parameter in TC_CMR).
Figure 32-6 on page 540 shows the configuration of the TC channel when programmed in Waveform Operating
Mode.
32.6.11 Waveform Selection
Depending on the WAVSEL parameter in TC_CMR (Channel Mode Register), the behavior of TC_CV varies.
With any selection, RA, RB and RC can all be used as compare registers.
RA Compare is used to control the TIOA output, RB Compare is used to control the TIOB output (if correctly
configured) and RC Compare is used to control TIOA and/or TIOB outputs.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
539
540
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
TIOB
SYNC
XC2
XC1
XC0
TIMER_CLOCK5
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIMER_CLOCK1
1
EEVT
BURST
TCCLKS
Timer/Counter Channel
Edge
Detector
EEVTEDG
SWTRG
ENETRG
CLKI
Trig
CLK
R
S
OVF
WAVSEL
RESET
16-bit Counter
WAVSEL
Q
Compare RA =
Register A
Q
CLKSTA
Compare RC =
Compare RB =
CPCSTOP
CPCDIS
Register C
CLKDIS
Register B
R
S
CLKEN
CPAS
INT
BSWTRG
BEEVT
BCPB
BCPC
ASWTRG
AEEVT
ACPA
ACPC
Output Controller
Output Controller
TIOB
MTIOB
TIOA
MTIOA
Figure 32-6.
Waveform Mode
CPCS
CPBS
COVFS
TC1_SR
ETRGS
TC1_IMR
32.6.11.1 WAVSEL = 00
When WAVSEL = 00, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to 0xFFFF. Once 0xFFFF has been reached, the
value of TC_CV is reset. Incrementation of TC_CV starts again and the cycle continues. See Figure 32-7.
An external event trigger or a software trigger can reset the value of TC_CV. It is important to note that the trigger
may occur at any time. See Figure 32-8.
RC Compare cannot be programmed to generate a trigger in this configuration. At the same time, RC Compare
can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) and/or disable the counter clock (CPCDIS = 1 in
TC_CMR).
Figure 32-7.
WAVSEL = 00 Without Trigger
Counter Value
Counter cleared by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
RC
RB
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 32-8.
WAVSEL = 00 With Trigger
Counter Value
Counter cleared by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
RC
Counter cleared by trigger
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
541
32.6.11.2 WAVSEL = 10
When WAVSEL = 10, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to the value of RC, then automatically reset on a
RC Compare. Once the value of TC_CV has been reset, it is then incremented and so on. See Figure 32-9.
It is important to note that TC_CV can be reset at any time by an external event or a software trigger if both are
programmed correctly. See Figure 32-10.
In addition, RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) and/or disable the counter clock
(CPCDIS = 1 in TC_CMR).
Figure 32-9.
WAVSEL = 10 Without Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter cleared by compare match with RC
RC
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 32-10. WAVSEL = 10 With Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter cleared by compare match with RC
Counter cleared by trigger
RC
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
542
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Time
32.6.11.3 WAVSEL = 01
When WAVSEL = 01, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to 0xFFFF. Once 0xFFFF is reached, the value of
TC_CV is decremented to 0, then re-incremented to 0xFFFF and so on. See Figure 32-11.
A trigger such as an external event or a software trigger can modify TC_CV at any time. If a trigger occurs while
TC_CV is incrementing, TC_CV then decrements. If a trigger is received while TC_CV is decrementing, TC_CV
then increments. See Figure 32-12.
RC Compare cannot be programmed to generate a trigger in this configuration.
At the same time, RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1) and/or disable the counter clock
(CPCDIS = 1).
Figure 32-11. WAVSEL = 01 Without Trigger
Counter Value
Counter decremented by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
RC
RB
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 32-12. WAVSEL = 01 With Trigger
Counter Value
Counter decremented by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
Counter decremented
by trigger
RC
RB
Counter incremented
by trigger
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
543
32.6.11.4 WAVSEL = 11
When WAVSEL = 11, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to RC. Once RC is reached, the value of TC_CV
is decremented to 0, then re-incremented to RC and so on. See Figure 32-13.
A trigger such as an external event or a software trigger can modify TC_CV at any time. If a trigger occurs while
TC_CV is incrementing, TC_CV then decrements. If a trigger is received while TC_CV is decrementing, TC_CV
then increments. See Figure 32-14.
RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1) and/or disable the counter clock (CPCDIS = 1).
Figure 32-13. WAVSEL = 11 Without Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter decremented by compare match with RC
RC
RB
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 32-14. WAVSEL = 11 With Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter decremented by compare match with RC
RC
RB
Counter decremented
by trigger
Counter incremented
by trigger
RA
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
544
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Time
32.6.12 External Event/Trigger Conditions
An external event can be programmed to be detected on one of the clock sources (XC0, XC1, XC2) or TIOB. The
external event selected can then be used as a trigger.
The EEVT parameter in TC_CMR selects the external trigger. The EEVTEDG parameter defines the trigger edge
for each of the possible external triggers (rising, falling or both). If EEVTEDG is cleared (none), no external event
is defined.
If TIOB is defined as an external event signal (EEVT = 0), TIOB is no longer used as an output and the compare
register B is not used to generate waveforms and subsequently no IRQs. In this case the TC channel can only
generate a waveform on TIOA.
When an external event is defined, it can be used as a trigger by setting bit ENETRG in TC_CMR.
As in Capture Mode, the SYNC signal and the software trigger are also available as triggers. RC Compare can
also be used as a trigger depending on the parameter WAVSEL.
32.6.13 Output Controller
The output controller defines the output level changes on TIOA and TIOB following an event. TIOB control is used
only if TIOB is defined as output (not as an external event).
The following events control TIOA and TIOB: software trigger, external event and RC compare. RA compare
controls TIOA and RB compare controls TIOB. Each of these events can be programmed to set, clear or toggle the
output as defined in the corresponding parameter in TC_CMR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
545
32.7
Timer Counter (TC) User Interface
Table 32-4.
Register Mapping
Offset(1)
Register
Name
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x00
Channel Control Register
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x04
Channel Mode Register
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x08
Reserved
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x0C
Reserved
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x10
Counter Value
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x14
Register A
Access
Reset
TC_CCR
Write-only
–
TC_CMR
Read/Write
0
TC_CV
Read-only
0
TC_RA
(2)
0
(2)
0
Read/Write
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x18
Register B
TC_RB
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x1C
Register C
TC_RC
Read/Write
0
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x20
Status Register
TC_SR
Read-only
0
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
TC_IER
Write-only
–
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
TC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x00 + channel * 0x40 + 0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
TC_IMR
Read-only
0
0xC0
Block Control Register
TC_BCR
Write-only
–
0xC4
Block Mode Register
TC_BMR
Read/Write
0
0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
Notes:
546
1. Channel index ranges from 0 to 2.
2. Read-only if WAVE = 0
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Read/Write
32.7.1 TC Block Control Register
Name:
TC_BCR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SYNC
• SYNC: Synchro Command
0: No effect.
1: Asserts the SYNC signal which generates a software trigger simultaneously for each of the channels.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
547
32.7.2 TC Block Mode Register
Name:
TC_BMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
–
–
TC2XC2S
• TC0XC0S: External Clock Signal 0 Selection
Value
Signal Connected to XC0
0
0
TCLK0
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA1
1
1
TIOA2
• TC1XC1S: External Clock Signal 1 Selection
Value
Signal Connected to XC1
0
0
TCLK1
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA0
1
1
TIOA2
• TC2XC2S: External Clock Signal 2 Selection
Value
Signal Connected to XC2
0
0
TCLK2
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA0
1
1
TIOA1
548
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
TC1XC1S
0
TC0XC0S
32.7.3 TC Channel Control Register
Name:
TC_CCRx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
SWTRG
CLKDIS
CLKEN
• CLKEN: Counter Clock Enable Command
0: No effect.
1: Enables the clock if CLKDIS is not 1.
• CLKDIS: Counter Clock Disable Command
0: No effect.
1: Disables the clock.
• SWTRG: Software Trigger Command
0: No effect.
1: A software trigger is performed: the counter is reset and the clock is started.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
549
32.7.4 TC Channel Mode Register: Capture Mode
Name:
TC_CMRx [x = 0..2] (WAVE = 0)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
WAVE
CPCTRG
–
–
–
ABETRG
7
6
5
3
2
LDBDIS
LDBSTOP
4
BURST
• TCCLKS: Clock Selection
Value
Clock Selected
0
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK1
0
0
1
TIMER_CLOCK2
0
1
0
TIMER_CLOCK3
0
1
1
TIMER_CLOCK4
1
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK5
1
0
1
XC0
1
1
0
XC1
1
1
1
XC2
• CLKI: Clock Invert
0: Counter is incremented on rising edge of the clock.
1: Counter is incremented on falling edge of the clock.
• BURST: Burst Signal Selection
Value
0
0
The clock is not gated by an external signal.
0
1
XC0 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
0
XC1 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
1
XC2 is ANDed with the selected clock.
• LDBSTOP: Counter Clock Stopped with RB Loading
0: Counter clock is not stopped when RB loading occurs.
1: Counter clock is stopped when RB loading occurs.
• LDBDIS: Counter Clock Disable with RB Loading
0: Counter clock is not disabled when RB loading occurs.
1: Counter clock is disabled when RB loading occurs.
550
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
16
LDRB
CLKI
LDRA
9
8
ETRGEDG
1
TCCLKS
0
• ETRGEDG: External Trigger Edge Selection
Value
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge
1
0
falling edge
1
1
each edge
• ABETRG: TIOA or TIOB External Trigger Selection
0: TIOB is used as an external trigger.
1: TIOA is used as an external trigger.
• CPCTRG: RC Compare Trigger Enable
0: RC Compare has no effect on the counter and its clock.
1: RC Compare resets the counter and starts the counter clock.
• WAVE
0: Capture Mode is enabled.
1: Capture Mode is disabled (Waveform Mode is enabled).
• LDRA: RA Loading Selection
Value
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge of TIOA
1
0
falling edge of TIOA
1
1
each edge of TIOA
• LDRB: RB Loading Selection
Value
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge of TIOA
1
0
falling edge of TIOA
1
1
each edge of TIOA
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
551
32.7.5 TC Channel Mode Register: Waveform Mode
Name:
TC_CMRx [x = 0..2] (WAVE = 1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
BSWTRG
23
22
20
14
7
6
CPCDIS
CPCSTOP
12
5
4
BURST
Clock Selected
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK1
0
0
1
TIMER_CLOCK2
0
1
0
TIMER_CLOCK3
0
1
1
TIMER_CLOCK4
1
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK5
1
0
1
XC0
1
1
0
XC1
1
1
1
XC2
• CLKI: Clock Invert
0: Counter is incremented on rising edge of the clock.
1: Counter is incremented on falling edge of the clock.
• BURST: Burst Signal Selection
Value
0
0
The clock is not gated by an external signal.
0
1
XC0 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
0
XC1 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
1
XC2 is ANDed with the selected clock.
• CPCSTOP: Counter Clock Stopped with RC Compare
0: Counter clock is not stopped when counter reaches RC.
1: Counter clock is stopped when counter reaches RC.
• CPCDIS: Counter Clock Disable with RC Compare
0: Counter clock is not disabled when counter reaches RC.
1: Counter clock is disabled when counter reaches RC.
552
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
24
BCPB
18
11
ENETRG
• TCCLKS: Clock Selection
0
25
17
16
ACPC
13
WAVSEL
26
19
AEEVT
WAVE
Value
27
BCPC
21
ASWTRG
15
28
BEEVT
ACPA
10
9
EEVT
3
CLKI
8
EEVTEDG
2
1
TCCLKS
0
• EEVTEDG: External Event Edge Selection
Value
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge
1
0
falling edge
1
1
each edge
• EEVT: External Event Selection
Value
Signal selected as external event
TIOB Direction
0
0
TIOB
input (1)
0
1
XC0
output
1
0
XC1
output
1
1
XC2
output
Note:
1. If TIOB is chosen as the external event signal, it is configured as an input and no longer generates waveforms and
subsequently no IRQs.
• ENETRG: External Event Trigger Enable
0: The external event has no effect on the counter and its clock. In this case, the selected external event only controls the
TIOA output.
1: The external event resets the counter and starts the counter clock.
• WAVSEL: Waveform Selection
Value
Effect
0
0
UP mode without automatic trigger on RC Compare
1
0
UP mode with automatic trigger on RC Compare
0
1
UPDOWN mode without automatic trigger on RC Compare
1
1
UPDOWN mode with automatic trigger on RC Compare
• WAVE
0: Waveform Mode is disabled (Capture Mode is enabled).
1: Waveform Mode is enabled.
• ACPA: RA Compare Effect on TIOA
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
553
• ACPC: RC Compare Effect on TIOA
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• AEEVT: External Event Effect on TIOA
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• ASWTRG: Software Trigger Effect on TIOA
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BCPB: RB Compare Effect on TIOB
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BCPC: RC Compare Effect on TIOB
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BEEVT: External Event Effect on TIOB
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
554
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• BSWTRG: Software Trigger Effect on TIOB
Value
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
555
32.7.6 TC Counter Value Register
Name:
TC_CVx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CV
7
6
5
4
CV
• CV: Counter Value
CV contains the counter value in real time.
556
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
32.7.7 TC Register A
Name:
TC_RAx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read-only if WAVE = 0, Read/Write if WAVE = 1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RA
7
6
5
4
RA
• RA: Register A
RA contains the Register A value in real time.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
557
32.7.8 TC Register B
Name:
TC_RBx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read-only if WAVE = 0, Read/Write if WAVE = 1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RB
7
6
5
4
RB
• RB: Register B
RB contains the Register B value in real time.
558
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
32.7.9 TC Register C
Name:
TC_RCx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RC
7
6
5
4
RC
• RC: Register C
RC contains the Register C value in real time.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
559
32.7.10 TC Status Register
Name:
TC_SRx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
MTIOB
MTIOA
CLKSTA
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow Status
0: No counter overflow has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A counter overflow has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun Status
0: Load overrun has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1: RA or RB have been loaded at least twice without any read of the corresponding register since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• CPAS: RA Compare Status
0: RA Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 0.
1: RA Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 1.
• CPBS: RB Compare Status
0: RB Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 0.
1: RB Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 1.
• CPCS: RC Compare Status
0: RC Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: RC Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• LDRAS: RA Loading Status
0: RA Load has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1: RA Load has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• LDRBS: RB Loading Status
0: RB Load has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1: RB Load has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• ETRGS: External Trigger Status
0: External trigger has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: External trigger has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
560
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• CLKSTA: Clock Enabling Status
0: Clock is disabled.
1: Clock is enabled.
• MTIOA: TIOA Mirror
0: TIOA is low. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOA pin is low. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOA is driven low.
1: TIOA is high. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOA pin is high. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOA is driven high.
• MTIOB: TIOB Mirror
0: TIOB is low. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOB pin is low. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOB is driven low.
1: TIOB is high. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOB pin is high. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOB is driven high.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
561
32.7.11 TC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
TC_IERx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Counter Overflow Interrupt.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Load Overrun Interrupt.
• CPAS: RA Compare
0: No effect.
1: Enables the RA Compare Interrupt.
• CPBS: RB Compare
0: No effect.
1: Enables the RB Compare Interrupt.
• CPCS: RC Compare
0: No effect.
1: Enables the RC Compare Interrupt.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0: No effect.
1: Enables the RA Load Interrupt.
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0: No effect.
1: Enables the RB Load Interrupt.
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0: No effect.
1: Enables the External Trigger Interrupt.
562
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
32.7.12 TC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
TC_IDRx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Counter Overflow Interrupt.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Load Overrun Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• CPAS: RA Compare
0: No effect.
1: Disables the RA Compare Interrupt (if WAVE = 1).
• CPBS: RB Compare
0: No effect.
1: Disables the RB Compare Interrupt (if WAVE = 1).
• CPCS: RC Compare
0: No effect.
1: Disables the RC Compare Interrupt.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0: No effect.
1: Disables the RA Load Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0: No effect.
1: Disables the RB Load Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0: No effect.
1: Disables the External Trigger Interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
563
32.7.13 TC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
TC_IMRx [x = 0..2]
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0: The Counter Overflow Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Counter Overflow Interrupt is enabled.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0: The Load Overrun Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Load Overrun Interrupt is enabled.
• CPAS: RA Compare
0: The RA Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1: The RA Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• CPBS: RB Compare
0: The RB Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1: The RB Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• CPCS: RC Compare
0: The RC Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1: The RC Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0: The Load RA Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Load RA Interrupt is enabled.
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0: The Load RB Interrupt is disabled.
1: The Load RB Interrupt is enabled.
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0: The External Trigger Interrupt is disabled.
1: The External Trigger Interrupt is enabled.
564
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.
MultiMedia Card Interface (MCI)
33.1
Description
The MultiMedia Card Interface (MCI) supports the MultiMedia Card (MMC) Specification V3.31, the SDIO
Specification V1.1 and the SD Memory Card Specification V1.0.
The MCI includes a command register, response registers, data registers, timeout counters and error detection
logic that automatically handle the transmission of commands and, when required, the reception of the associated
responses and data with a limited processor overhead.
The MCI supports stream, block and multi-block data read and write, and is compatible with the Peripheral DMA
Controller (PDC) channels, minimizing processor intervention for large buffer transfers.
The MCI operates at a rate of up to Master Clock divided by 2 and supports the interfacing of 2 slots. Each slot
may be used to interface with a MultiMedia Card bus (up to 30 cards) or with a SD Memory Card. Only one slot can
be selected at a time (slots are multiplexed). A bit field in the SD Card Register performs this selection.
The SD Memory Card communication is based on a 9-pin interface (clock, command, four data and three power
lines) and the MultiMedia Card on a 7-pin interface (clock, command, one data, three power lines and one
reserved for future use).
The SD Memory Card interface also supports MultiMedia Card operations. The main differences between SD and
MultiMedia Cards are the initialization process and the bus topology.
33.2
Embedded Characteristics
Compatible with SD Memory Card Specification Version 1.0
Compatible with MultiMedia Card Specification Version 3.31
Compatible with SDIO Specification Version 1.1
Card clock rate up to Master Clock divided by 2
Embedded power management to slow down clock rate when not used
Supports 2 Multiplexed Slots
̶
Each Slot for either a MultiMediaCard Bus (Up to 30 Cards) or an SD Memory Card
Support for stream, block and multi-block data read and write
Supports Connection to Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
̶
Minimizes Processor Intervention for Large Buffer Transfers
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
565
33.3
Block Diagram
Figure 33-1.
Block Diagram
APB Bridge
PDC
APB
MCCK(1)
MCCDA(1)
MCDA0(1)
PMC
MCK
MCDA1(1)
MCDA2(1)
MCDA3(1)
MCI Interface
PIO
MCCDB(1)
MCDB0(1)
MCDB1(1)
MCDB2(1)
Interrupt Control
MCDB3(1)
MCI Interrupt
Note:
566
1.
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA,
MCCDB to MCIx_CDB,MCDAy to MCIx_DAy, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.4
Application Block Diagram
Figure 33-2.
Application Block Diagram
Application Layer
ex: File System, Audio, Security, etc.
Physical Layer
MCI Interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
1234567
9
SDCard
MMC
33.5
Pin Name List
Table 33-1.
I/O Lines Description
(1)
Pin Name
Pin Description
Type(2)
Comments
MCCDA/MCCDB
Command/response
I/O/PP/OD
CMD of an MMC or SDCard/SDIO
MCCK
Clock
I/O
CLK of an MMC or SD Card/SDIO
MCDA0–MCDA3
Data 0..3 of Slot A
I/O/PP
DAT0 of an MMC
DAT[0..3] of an SD Card/SDIO
MCDB0–MCDB3
Data 0..3 of Slot B
I/O/PP
DAT0 of an MMC
DAT[0..3] of an SD Card/SDIO
Notes:
1.
2.
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA,
MCCDB to MCIx_CDB, MCDAy to MCIx_DAy, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
I: Input, O: Output, PP: Push/Pull, OD: Open Drain
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
567
33.6
Product Dependencies
33.6.1
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the MultiMedia Cards or SD Cards may be multiplexed with PIO lines. The
programmer must first program the PIO controllers to assign the peripheral functions to MCI pins.
33.6.2
Power Management
The MCI may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), so the programmer must first
configure the PMC to enable the MCI clock.
33.6.3
Interrupt
The MCI interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC).
Handling the MCI interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the MCI.
33.7
Bus Topology
Figure 33-3.
MultiMedia Memory Card Bus Topology
1234567
MMC
The MultiMedia Card communication is based on a 7-pin serial bus interface. It has three communication lines and
four supply lines.
Table 33-2.
Bus Topology
Description
MCI Pin Name(2)
(Slot z)
NC
Not connected
–
CMD
I/O/PP/OD
Command/response
MCCDz
3
VSS1
S
Supply voltage ground
VSS
4
VDD
S
Supply voltage
VDD
5
CLK
I/O
Clock
MCCK
6
VSS2
S
Supply voltage ground
VSS
7
DAT[0]
I/O/PP
Data 0
MCDz0
Pin Number
Notes:
568
Name
Type
1
RSV
2
1.
2.
(1)
I: Input, O: Output, PP: Push/Pull, OD: Open Drain.
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA,
MCCDB to MCIx_CDB, MCDAy to MCIx_DAy, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 33-4.
MMC Bus Connections (One Slot)
MCI
MCDA0
MCCDA
MCCK
Note:
1234567
1234567
1234567
MMC1
MMC2
MMC3
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA MCDAy to
MCIx_DAy.
Figure 33-5.
SD Memory Card Bus Topology
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
9
SD CARD
The SD Memory Card bus includes the signals listed in Table 33-3.
Table 33-3.
SD Memory Card Bus Signals
Description
MCI Pin Name(2)
(Slot z)
I/O/PP
Card detect/ Data line Bit 3
MCDz3
CMD
PP
Command/response
MCCDz
3
VSS1
S
Supply voltage ground
VSS
4
VDD
S
Supply voltage
VDD
5
CLK
I/O
Clock
MCCK
6
VSS2
S
Supply voltage ground
VSS
7
DAT[0]
I/O/PP
Data line Bit 0
MCDz0
8
DAT[1]
I/O/PP
Data line Bit 1 or Interrupt
MCDz1
9
DAT[2]
I/O/PP
Data line Bit 2
MCDz2
Pin Number
Type
1
CD/DAT[3]
2
1.
2.
Figure 33-6.
I: input, O: output, PP: Push Pull, OD: Open Drain.
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA,
MCCDB to MCIx_CDB, MCDAy to MCIx_DAy, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
SD Card Bus Connections with One Slot
MCDA0 - MCDA3
MCCK
SD CARD
9
MCCDA
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
Notes:
Name
(1)
Note:
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA MCDAy to
MCIx_DAy.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
569
SD Card Bus Connections with Two Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
Figure 33-7.
MCDA0 - MCDA3
MCCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
9
MCCDA
SD CARD 1
MCDB0 - MCDB3
9
MCCDB
SD CARD 2
Note:
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK,MCCDA to MCIx_CDA, MCDAy to
MCIx_DAy, MCCDB to MCIx_CDB, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
Figure 33-8.
Mixing MultiMedia and SD Memory Cards with Two Slots
MCDA0
MCCDA
MCCK
1234567
MMC1
MMC2
MMC3
SD CARD
9
MCCDB
1234567
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
MCDB0 - MCDB3
1234567
Note:
When several MCI (x MCI) are embedded in a product, MCCK refers to MCIx_CK, MCCDA to MCIx_CDA, MCDAy to
MCIx_DAy, MCCDB to MCIx_CDB, MCDBy to MCIx_DBy.
When the MCI is configured to operate with SD memory cards, the width of the data bus can be selected in the
MCI_SDCR. Clearing the SDCBUS bit in this register means that the width is one bit; setting it means that the
width is four bits. In the case of multimedia cards, only the data line 0 is used. The other data lines can be used as
independent PIOs.
570
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.8
MultiMedia Card Operations
After a power-on reset, the cards are initialized by a special message-based MultiMedia Card bus protocol. Each
message is represented by one of the following tokens:
Command: A command is a token that starts an operation. A command is sent from the host either to a
single card (addressed command) or to all connected cards (broadcast command). A command is
transferred serially on the CMD line.
Response: A response is a token which is sent from an addressed card or (synchronously) from all
connected cards to the host as an answer to a previously received command. A response is transferred
serially on the CMD line.
Data: Data can be transferred from the card to the host or vice versa. Data is transferred via the data line.
Card addressing is implemented using a session address assigned during the initialization phase by the bus
controller to all currently connected cards. Their unique CID number identifies individual cards.
The structure of commands, responses and data blocks is described in the MultiMedia-Card System Specification.
See also Table 33-4 on page 572.
MultiMedia Card bus data transfers are composed of these tokens.
There are different types of operations. Addressed operations always contain a command and a response token.
In addition, some operations have a data token; the others transfer their information directly within the command or
response structure. In this case, no data token is present in an operation. The bits on the DAT and the CMD lines
are transferred synchronous to the clock MCI Clock.
Two types of data transfer commands are defined:
Sequential commands: These commands initiate a continuous data stream. They are terminated only when
a stop command follows on the CMD line. This mode reduces the command overhead to an absolute
minimum.
Block-oriented commands: These commands send a data block succeeded by CRC bits.
Both read and write operations allow either single or multiple block transmission. A multiple block transmission is
terminated when a stop command follows on the CMD line similarly to the sequential read or when a multiple block
transmission has a pre-defined block count (See “Data Transfer Operation” on page 574.).
The MCI provides a set of registers to perform the entire range of MultiMedia Card operations.
33.8.1
Command - Response Operation
After reset, the MCI is disabled and becomes valid after setting the MCIEN bit in the MCI_CR Control Register.
The PWSEN bit saves power by dividing the MCI clock by 2PWSDIV + 1 when the bus is inactive.
The two bits, RDPROOF and WRPROOF in the MCI Mode Register (MCI_MR) allow stopping the MCI Clock
during read or write access if the internal FIFO is full. This will guarantee data integrity, not bandwidth.
The command and the response of the card are clocked out with the rising edge of the MCI Clock.
All the timings for MultiMedia Card are defined in the MultiMedia Card System Specification.
The two bus modes (open drain and push/pull) needed to process all the operations are defined in the MCI
command register. The MCI_CMDR allows a command to be carried out.
For example, to perform an ALL_SEND_CID command:
Host Command
CMD
S
T
Content
CRC
NID Cycles
E
Z
******
Response
Z
S
T
CID Content
High Impedance State
Z
Z
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Z
571
The command ALL_SEND_CID and the fields and values for the MCI_CMDR are described in Table 33-4 and
Table 33-5.
Table 33-4.
ALL_SEND_CID Command Description
CMD Index
Type
Argument
Resp
Abbreviation
Command Description
CMD2
bcr
[31:0] stuff bits
R2
ALL_SEND_CID
Asks all cards to send their CID numbers on the CMD line
Note: bcr means broadcast command with response.
Table 33-5.
Fields and Values for MCI_CMDR Command Register
Field
Value
CMDNB (command number)
2 (CMD2)
RSPTYP (response type)
2 (R2: 136 bits response)
SPCMD (special command)
0 (not a special command)
OPCMD (open drain command)
1
MAXLAT (max latency for command to response)
0 (NID cycles ==> 5 cycles)
TRCMD (transfer command)
0 (No transfer)
TRDIR (transfer direction)
X (available only in transfer command)
TRTYP (transfer type)
X (available only in transfer command)
IOSPCMD (SDIO special command)
0 (not a special command)
The MCI_ARGR contains the argument field of the command.
To send a command, the user must perform the following steps:
Fill the argument register (MCI_ARGR) with the command argument.
Set the command register (MCI_CMDR) (see Table 33-5).
The command is sent immediately after writing the command register. The status bit CMDRDY in the status
register (MCI_SR) is asserted when the command is completed. While the card maintains a busy indication (at the
end of a STOP_TRANSMISSION command CMD12, for example), a new command shall not be sent. The
NOTBUSY flag in the status register (MCI_SR) is asserted when the card releases the busy indication. If the
command requires a response, it can be read in the MCI response register (MCI_RSPR). The response size can
be from 48 bits up to 136 bits depending on the command. The MCI embeds an error detection to prevent any
corrupted data during the transfer.
The following flowchart shows how to send a command to the card and read the response if needed. In this
example, the status register bits are polled but setting the appropriate bits in the interrupt enable register
(MCI_IER) allows using an interrupt method.
572
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 33-9.
Command/Response Functional Flow Diagram
Set the command argument
MCI_ARGR = Argument(1)
Set the command
MCI_CMDR = Command
Read MCI_SR
Wait for command
ready status flag
0
CMDRDY
1
Check error bits in the
status register (1)
Yes
Status error flags?
RETURN ERROR(1)
Read response if required
Does the command involve
a busy indication?
No
RETURN OK
Read MCI_SR
0
NOTBUSY
1
RETURN OK
Note:
1.
If the command is SEND_OP_COND, the CRC error flag is always present (refer to R3 response in the
MultiMedia Card specification).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
573
33.8.2
Data Transfer Operation
The MultiMedia Card allows several read/write operations (single block, multiple blocks, stream, etc.). These kind
of transfers can be selected setting the Transfer Type (TRTYP) field in the MCI Command Register (MCI_CMDR).
These operations can be done using the features of the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC). If the PDCMODE bit is
set in MCI_MR, then all reads and writes use the PDC facilities.
In all cases, the block length (BLKLEN field) must be defined either in the mode register MCI_MR, or in the Block
Register MCI_BLKR. This field determines the size of the data block.
Enabling PDC Force Byte Transfer (PDCFBYTE bit in the MCI_MR) allows the PDC to manage with internal byte
transfers, so that transfer of blocks with a size different from modulo 4 can be supported. When PDC Force Byte
Transfer is disabled, the PDC type of transfers are in words, otherwise the type of transfers are in bytes.
Consequent to MMC Specification 3.1, two types of multiple block read (or write) transactions are defined (the host
can use either one at any time):
Open-ended/Infinite Multiple block read (or write):
The number of blocks for the read (or write) multiple block operation is not defined. The card will
continuously transfer (or program) data blocks until a stop transmission command is received.
Multiple block read (or write) with pre-defined block count (since version 3.1 and higher):
The card will transfer (or program) the requested number of data blocks and terminate the transaction. The
stop command is not required at the end of this type of multiple block read (or write), unless terminated with
an error. In order to start a multiple block read (or write) with pre-defined block count, the host must correctly
program the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR). Otherwise the card will start an open-ended multiple block
read. The BCNT field of the Block Register defines the number of blocks to transfer (from 1 to 65535 blocks).
Programming the value 0 in the BCNT field corresponds to an infinite block transfer.
33.8.3
Read Operation
The following flowchart shows how to read a single block with or without use of PDC facilities. In this example (see
Figure 33-10 on page 575), a polling method is used to wait for the end of read. Similarly, the user can configure
the interrupt enable register (MCI_IER) to trigger an interrupt at the end of read.
574
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 33-10. Read Functional Flow Diagram
Send SELECT/DESELECT_CARD
(1)
command
to select the card
Send SET_BLOCKLEN command(1)
No
Yes
Read with PDC
Reset the PDCMODE bit
MCI_MR &= ~PDCMODE
Set the block length (in bytes)
MCI_MR |= (BlockLenght <<16)(2)
Set the PDCMODE bit
MCI_MR |= PDCMODE
Set the block length (in bytes)
(2)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockLength << 16)
Set the block count (if necessary)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockCount << 0)
Configure the PDC channel
MCI_RPR = Data Buffer Address
MCI_RCR = BlockLength/4
MCI_PTCR = RXTEN
Send READ_SINGLE_BLOCK
command(1)
Number of words to read = BlockLength/4
Send READ_SINGLE_BLOCK
command(1)
Yes
Number of words to read = 0 ?
Read status register MCI_SR
No
Read status register MCI_SR
Poll the bit
ENDRX = 0?
Poll the bit
RXRDY = 0?
Yes
Yes
No
No
RETURN
Read data = MCI_RDR
Number of words to read =
Number of words to read -1
RETURN
Notes:
1.
2.
It is assumed that this command has been correctly sent (see Figure 33-9 on page 573).
This field is also accessible in the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
575
33.8.4
Write Operation
In write operation, the MCI Mode Register (MCI_MR) is used to define the padding value when writing non-multiple
block size. If the bit PDCPADV is 0, then 0x00 value is used when padding data, otherwise 0xFF is used.
If set, the bit PDCMODE enables PDC transfer.
The following flowchart shows how to write a single block with or without use of PDC facilities (see Figure 33-11 on
page 577). Polling or interrupt method can be used to wait for the end of write according to the contents of the
Interrupt Mask Register (MCI_IMR).
576
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 33-11. Write Functional Flow Diagram
Send SELECT/DESELECT_CARD
command(1) to select the card
Send SET_BLOCKLEN command(1)
Yes
No
Write using PDC
Reset the PDCMODE bit
MCI_MR &= ~PDCMODE
Set the block length (in bytes)
MCI_MR |= (BlockLenght <<16)(2)
Set the block count (if necessary)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockCount << 0)
Set the PDCMODE bit
MCI_MR |= PDCMODE
Set the block length (in bytes)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockLength << 16)(2)
Configure the PDC channel
MCI_TPR = Data Buffer Address to write
MCI_TCR = BlockLength/4
Send WRITE_SINGLE_BLOCK
(1)
command
Send WRITE_SINGLE_BLOCK
(1)
command
Number of words to write = BlockLength/4
MCI_PTCR = TXTEN
Yes
Number of words to write = 0 ?
Read status register MCI_SR
No
Read status register MCI_SR
Poll the bit
NOTBUSY= 0?
Poll the bit
TXRDY = 0?
Yes
Yes
No
No
RETURN
MCI_TDR = Data to write
Number of words to write =
Number of words to write -1
RETURN
Notes:
1.
2.
It is assumed that this command has been correctly sent (see Figure 33-9 on page 573).
This field is also accessible in the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
577
The following flowchart shows how to manage a multiple write block transfer with the PDC. Polling or interrupt
method can be used to wait for the end of write according to the contents of the Interrupt Mask Register
(MCI_IMR).
Figure 33-12. Multiple Write Functional Flow Diagram
Send SELECT/DESELECT_CARD
command(1) to select the card
(1)
Send SET_BLOCKLEN command
Set the PDCMODE bit
MCI_MR |= PDCMODE
Set the block length (in bytes)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockLength << 16)(2)
Set the block count (if necessary)
MCI_BLKR |= (BlockCount << 0)
Configure the PDC channel
MCI_TPR = Data Buffer Address to write
MCI_TCR = BlockLength/4
Send WRITE_MULTIPLE_BLOCK
command(1)
MCI_PTCR = TXTEN
Read status register MCI_SR
Poll the bit
BLKE = 0?
Yes
No
Send STOP_TRANSMISSION
(1)
command
Poll the bit
NOTBUSY = 0?
Yes
No
RETURN
Note:
578
1.
2.
It is assumed that this command has been correctly sent (see Figure 33-9 on page 573).
This field is also accessible in the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.9
SD/SDIO Card Operations
The MultiMedia Card Interface allows processing of SD Memory (Secure Digital Memory Card) and SDIO (SD
Input Output) Card commands.
SD/SDIO cards are based on the MultiMedia Card (MMC) format, but are physically slightly thicker and feature
higher data transfer rates, a lock switch on the side to prevent accidental overwriting and security features. The
physical form factor, pin assignment and data transfer protocol are forward-compatible with the MultiMedia Card
with some additions. SD slots can actually be used for more than flash memory cards. Devices that support SDIO
can use small devices designed for the SD form factor, such as GPS receivers, Wi-Fi or Bluetooth adapters,
modems, barcode readers, IrDA adapters, FM radio tuners, RFID readers, digital cameras and more.
SD/SDIO is covered by numerous patents and trademarks, and licensing is only available through the Secure
Digital Card Association.
The SD/SDIO Card communication is based on a 9-pin interface (Clock, Command, 4 x Data and 3 x Power lines).
The communication protocol is defined as a part of this specification. The main difference between the SD/SDIO
Card and the MultiMedia Card is the initialization process.
The SD/SDIO Card Register (MCI_SDCR) allows selection of the Card Slot and the data bus width.
The SD/SDIO Card bus allows dynamic configuration of the number of data lines. After power up, by default, the
SD/SDIO Card uses only DAT0 for data transfer. After initialization, the host can change the bus width (number of
active data lines).
33.9.1
SDIO Data Transfer Type
SDIO cards may transfer data in either a multi-byte (1 to 512 bytes) or an optional block format (1 to 511 blocks),
while the SD memory cards are fixed in the block transfer mode. The TRTYP field in the MCI Command Register
(MCI_CMDR) allows to choose between SDIO Byte or SDIO Block transfer.
The number of bytes/blocks to transfer is set through the BCNT field in the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR). In
SDIO Block mode, the field BLKLEN must be set to the data block size while this field is not used in SDIO Byte
mode.
An SDIO Card can have multiple I/O or combined I/O and memory (called Combo Card). Within a multi-function
SDIO or a Combo card, there are multiple devices (I/O and memory) that share access to the SD bus. In order to
allow the sharing of access to the host among multiple devices, SDIO and combo cards can implement the
optional concept of suspend/resume (Refer to the SDIO Specification for more details). To send a suspend or a
resume command, the host must set the SDIO Special Command field (IOSPCMD) in the MCI Command
Register.
33.9.2
SDIO Interrupts
Each function within an SDIO or Combo card may implement interrupts (Refer to the SDIO Specification for more
details). In order to allow the SDIO card to interrupt the host, an interrupt function is added to a pin on the DAT[1]
line to signal the card’s interrupt to the host. An SDIO interrupt on each slot can be enabled through the MCI
Interrupt Enable Register. The SDIO interrupt is sampled regardless of the currently selected slot.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
579
33.10 MultiMedia Card Interface (MCI) User Interface
Table 33-6.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Register Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
MCI_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
MCI_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x08
Data Timeout Register
MCI_DTOR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0C
SD/SDIO Card Register
MCI_SDCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x10
Argument Register
MCI_ARGR
Read/Write
0x0
0x14
Command Register
MCI_CMDR
Write-only
–
0x18
Block Register
MCI_BLKR
Read/Write
0x0
0x1C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x20
Response Register(1)
MCI_RSPR
Read-only
0x0
0x24
Response Register
(1)
MCI_RSPR
Read-only
0x0
Response Register
(1)
MCI_RSPR
Read-only
0x0
0x2C
Response Register
(1)
MCI_RSPR
Read-only
0x0
0x30
Receive Data Register
MCI_RDR
Read-only
0x0
0x34
Transmit Data Register
MCI_TDR
Write-only
–
Reserved
–
–
–
0x40
Status Register
MCI_SR
Read-only
0xC0E5
0x44
Interrupt Enable Register
MCI_IER
Write-only
–
0x48
Interrupt Disable Register
MCI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x4C
Interrupt Mask Register
MCI_IMR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for the PDC
–
–
–
0x28
0x38–0x3C
0x50–0xFC
0x100–0x124
Note:
580
1. The response register can be read by N accesses at the same MCI_RSPR or at consecutive addresses (0x20 to 0x2C).
N depends on the size of the response.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.1 MCI Control Register
Name:
MCI_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
–
–
–
PWSDIS
PWSEN
MCIDIS
MCIEN
• MCIEN: MultiMedia Interface Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the MultiMedia Interface if MCDIS is 0.
• MCIDIS: MultiMedia Interface Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the MultiMedia Interface.
• PWSEN: Power Save Mode Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Power Saving Mode if PWSDIS is 0.
Warning: Before enabling this mode, the user must set a value different from 0 in the PWSDIV field (Mode Register
MCI_MR).
• PWSDIS: Power Save Mode Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Power Saving Mode.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Resets the MCI. A software triggered hardware reset of the MCI interface is performed.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
581
33.10.2 MCI Mode Register
Name:
MCI_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
BLKLEN
23
22
21
20
BLKLEN
15
14
13
12
11
PDCMODE
PDCPADV
PDCFBYTE
WRPROOF
RDPROOF
7
6
5
4
3
PWSDIV
2
1
0
CLKDIV
• CLKDIV: Clock Divider
MultiMedia Card Interface clock (MCCK or MCI_CK) is Master Clock (MCK) divided by (2 * (CLKDIV + 1)).
• PWSDIV: Power Saving Divider
MultiMedia Card Interface clock is divided by 2(PWSDIV) + 1 when entering Power Saving Mode.
Warning: This value must be different from 0 before enabling the Power Save Mode in the MCI_CR (MCI_PWSEN bit).
• RDPROOF Read Proof Enable
Enabling Read Proof allows to stop the MCI Clock during read access if the internal FIFO is full. This will guarantee data
integrity, not bandwidth.
0: Disables Read Proof.
1: Enables Read Proof.
• WRPROOF Write Proof Enable
Enabling Write Proof allows to stop the MCI Clock during write access if the internal FIFO is full. This will guarantee data
integrity, not bandwidth.
0: Disables Write Proof.
1: Enables Write Proof.
• PDCFBYTE: PDC Force Byte Transfer
Enabling PDC Force Byte Transfer allows the PDC to manage with internal byte transfers, so that transfer of blocks with a
size different from modulo 4 can be supported.
Warning: BLKLEN value depends on PDCFBYTE.
0: Disables PDC Force Byte Transfer. PDC type of transfer are in words.
1: Enables PDC Force Byte Transfer. PDC type of transfer are in bytes.
• PDCPADV: PDC Padding Value
0: 0x00 value is used when padding data in write transfer (not only PDC transfer).
1: 0xFF value is used when padding data in write transfer (not only PDC transfer).
582
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PDCMODE: PDC-oriented Mode
0: Disables PDC transfer
1: Enables PDC transfer. In this case, UNRE and OVRE flags in the MCI Mode Register (MCI_SR) are deactivated after
the PDC transfer has been completed.
• BLKLEN: Data Block Length
This field determines the size of the data block.
This field is also accessible in the MCI Block Register (MCI_BLKR).
Bits 16 and 17 must be set to 0 if PDCFBYTE is disabled.
Note: In SDIO Byte mode, BLKLEN field is not used.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
583
33.10.3 MCI Data Timeout Register
Name:
MCI_DTOR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
DTOMUL
DTOCYC
• DTOCYC: Data Timeout Cycle Number
Defines a number of Master Clock cycles with DTOMUL.
• DTOMUL: Data Timeout Multiplier
These fields determine the maximum number of Master Clock cycles that the MCI waits between two data block transfers.
It equals (DTOCYC x Multiplier).
Multiplier is defined by DTOMUL as shown in the following table:
Value
Multiplier
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
16
0
1
0
128
0
1
1
256
1
0
0
1024
1
0
1
4096
1
1
0
65536
1
1
1
1048576
If the data time-out set by DTOCYC and DTOMUL has been exceeded, the Data Time-out Error flag (DTOE) in the MCI
Status Register (MCI_SR) raises.
584
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.4 MCI SDCard/SDIO Register
Name:
MCI_SDCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
SDCBUS
–
–
–
–
–
0
SDCSEL
• SDCSEL: SDCard/SDIO Slot
Value
SDCard/SDIO Slot
0
0
Slot A is selected.
0
1
Slot B is selected
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Reserved
• SDCBUS: SDCard/SDIO Bus Width
0: 1-bit data bus
1: 4-bit data bus
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
585
33.10.5 MCI Argument Register
Name:
MCI_ARGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ARG
23
22
21
20
ARG
15
14
13
12
ARG
7
6
5
4
ARG
• ARG: Command Argument
586
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.6 MCI Command Register
Name:
MCI_CMDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
–
–
–
MAXLAT
OPDCMD
6
5
4
3
7
TRTYP
RSPTYP
25
24
IOSPCMD
17
TRDIR
10
16
TRCMD
9
8
SPCMD
2
1
0
CMDNB
This register is write-protected while CMDRDY is 0 in MCI_SR. If an Interrupt command is sent, this register is only writeable by an interrupt response (field SPCMD). This means that the current command execution cannot be interrupted or
modified.
• CMDNB: Command Number
MultiMedia Card bus command numbers are defined in the MultiMedia Card specification.
• RSPTYP: Response Type
Value
Response Type
0
0
No response.
0
1
48-bit response.
1
0
136-bit response.
1
1
Reserved.
• SPCMD: Special Command
Value
Command
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Not a special CMD.
Initialization CMD:
74 clock cycles for initialization sequence.
Synchronized CMD:
Wait for the end of the current data block transfer before sending the pending command.
Reserved.
Interrupt command:
Corresponds to the Interrupt Mode (CMD40).
Interrupt response:
Corresponds to the Interrupt Mode (CMD40).
• OPDCMD: Open Drain Command
0: Push pull command
1: Open drain command
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
587
• MAXLAT: Max Latency for Command to Response
0: 5-cycle max latency
1: 64-cycle max latency
• TRCMD: Transfer Command
Value
Transfer Type
0
0
No data transfer
0
1
Start data transfer
1
0
Stop data transfer
1
1
Reserved
• TRDIR: Transfer Direction
0: Write
1: Read
• TRTYP: Transfer Type
Value
Transfer Type
0
0
0
MMC/SDCard Single Block
0
0
1
MMC/SDCard Multiple Block
0
1
0
MMC Stream
0
1
1
Reserved
1
0
0
SDIO Byte
1
0
1
SDIO Block
1
1
0
Reserved
1
1
1
Reserved
• IOSPCMD: SDIO Special Command
Value
SDIO Special Command Type
0
0
Not a SDIO Special Command
0
1
SDIO Suspend Command
1
0
SDIO Resume Command
1
1
Reserved
588
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.7 MCI Block Register
Name:
MCI_BLKR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
BLKLEN
23
22
21
20
BLKLEN
15
14
13
12
BCNT
7
6
5
4
BCNT
• BCNT: MMC/SDIO Block Count - SDIO Byte Count
This field determines the number of data byte(s) or block(s) to transfer.
The transfer data type and the authorized values for BCNT field are determined by the TRTYP field in the MCI Command
Register (MCI_CMDR):
Value
Type of Transfer
BCNT Authorized Values
From 1 to 65535: Value 0 corresponds to an infinite block transfer.
0
0
1
MMC/SDCard Multiple Block
1
0
0
SDIO Byte
1
0
1
SDIO Block
Other values
–
From 1 to 512 bytes: Value 0 corresponds to a 512-byte transfer.
Values from 0x200 to 0xFFFF are forbidden.
From 1 to 511 blocks: Value 0 corresponds to an infinite block transfer.
Values from 0x200 to 0xFFFF are forbidden.
Reserved
Warning: In SDIO Byte and Block modes, writing to the 7 last bits of BCNT field, is forbidden and may lead to unpredictable results.
• BLKLEN: Data Block Length
This field determines the size of the data block.
This field is also accessible in the MCI Mode Register (MCI_MR).
Bits 16 and 17 must be set to 0 if PDCFBYTE is disabled.
Note: In SDIO Byte mode, BLKLEN field is not used.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
589
33.10.8 MCI Response Register
Name:
MCI_RSPR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RSP
23
22
21
20
RSP
15
14
13
12
RSP
7
6
5
4
RSP
• RSP: Response
Note:
590
1. The response register can be read by N accesses at the same MCI_RSPR or at consecutive addresses (0x20 to 0x2C).
N depends on the size of the response.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.9 MCI Receive Data Register
Name:
MCI_RDR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
DATA
23
22
21
20
DATA
15
14
13
12
DATA
7
6
5
4
DATA
• DATA: Data to Read
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
591
33.10.10 MCI Transmit Data Register
Name:
MCI_TDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
DATA
23
22
21
20
DATA
15
14
13
12
DATA
7
6
5
4
DATA
• DATA: Data to Write
592
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
33.10.11 MCI Status Register
Name:
MCI_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
UNRE
OVRE
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
DTOE
DCRCE
RTOE
RENDE
RCRCE
RDIRE
RINDE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
–
–
-
-
SDIOIRQB
SDIOIRQA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ENDTX
ENDRX
NOTBUSY
DTIP
BLKE
TXRDY
RXRDY
CMDRDY
• CMDRDY: Command Ready
0: A command is in progress.
1: The last command has been sent. Cleared when writing in the MCI_CMDR.
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready
0: Data has not yet been received since the last read of MCI_RDR.
1: Data has been received since the last read of MCI_RDR.
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
0: The last data written in MCI_TDR has not yet been transferred in the Shift Register.
1: The last data written in MCI_TDR has been transferred in the Shift Register.
• BLKE: Data Block Ended
This flag must be used only for Write Operations.
0: A data block transfer is not yet finished. Cleared when reading the MCI_SR.
1: A data block transfer has ended, including the CRC16 Status transmission.
In PDC mode (PDCMODE = 1), the flag is set when the CRC Status of the last block has been transmitted (TXBUFE
already set).
Otherwise (PDCMODE = 0), the flag is set for each transmitted CRC Status.
Refer to the MMC or SD Specification for more details concerning the CRC Status.
• DTIP: Data Transfer in Progress
0: No data transfer in progress.
1: The current data transfer is still in progress, including CRC16 calculation. Cleared at the end of the CRC16 calculation.
• NOTBUSY: MCI Not Busy
This flag must be used only for Write Operations.
A block write operation uses a simple busy signalling of the write operation duration on the data (DAT0) line: during a data
transfer block, if the card does not have a free data receive buffer, the card indicates this condition by pulling down the data
line (DAT0) to LOW. The card stops pulling down the data line as soon as at least one receive buffer for the defined data
transfer block length becomes free.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
593
The NOTBUSY flag allows to deal with these different states.
0: The MCI is not ready for new data transfer. Cleared at the end of the card response.
1: The MCI is ready for new data transfer. Set when the busy state on the data line has ended. This corresponds to a free
internal data receive buffer of the card.
Refer to the MMC or SD Specification for more details concerning the busy behavior.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer
0: The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in MCI_RCR or MCI_RNCR.
1: The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in MCI_RCR or MCI_RNCR.
• ENDTX: End of TX Buffer
0: The Transmit Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in MCI_TCR or MCI_TNCR.
1: The Transmit Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in MCI_TCR or MCI_TNCR.
Note: BLKE and NOTBUSY flags can be used to check that the data has been successfully transmitted on the data lines and not only
transferred from the PDC to the MCI Controller.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0: MCI_RCR or MCI_RNCR has a value other than 0.
1: Both MCI_RCR and MCI_RNCR have a value of 0.
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty
0: MCI_TCR or MCI_TNCR has a value other than 0.
1: Both MCI_TCR and MCI_TNCR have a value of 0.
Note: BLKE and NOTBUSY flags can be used to check that the data has been successfully transmitted on the data lines and not only
transferred from the PDC to the MCI Controller.
• RINDE: Response Index Error
0: No error.
1: A mismatch is detected between the command index sent and the response index received. Cleared when writing in the
MCI_CMDR.
• RDIRE: Response Direction Error
0: No error.
1: The direction bit from card to host in the response has not been detected.
• RCRCE: Response CRC Error
0: No error.
1: A CRC7 error has been detected in the response. Cleared when writing in the MCI_CMDR.
• RENDE: Response End Bit Error
0: No error.
1: The end bit of the response has not been detected. Cleared when writing in the MCI_CMDR.
• RTOE: Response Time-out Error
0: No error.
1: The response time-out set by MAXLAT in the MCI_CMDR has been exceeded. Cleared when writing in the MCI_CMDR.
594
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• DCRCE: Data CRC Error
0: No error.
1: A CRC16 error has been detected in the last data block. Cleared by reading in the MCI_SR.
• DTOE: Data Time-out Error
0: No error.
1: The data time-out set by DTOCYC and DTOMUL in MCI_DTOR has been exceeded. Cleared by reading in the
MCI_SR.
• OVRE: Overrun
0: No error.
1: At least one 8-bit received data has been lost (not read). Cleared when sending a new data transfer command.
• UNRE: Underrun
0: No error.
1: At least one 8-bit data has been sent without valid information (not written). Cleared when sending a new data transfer
command.
• SDIOIRQA: SDIO Interrupt for Slot A
0: No interrupt detected on SDIO Slot A.
1: A SDIO Interrupt on Slot A has reached. Cleared when reading the MCI_SR.
• SDIOIRQB: SDIO Interrupt for Slot B
0: No interrupt detected on SDIO Slot B.
1: A SDIO Interrupt on Slot B has reached. Cleared when reading the MCI_SR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0: MCI_RCR or MCI_RNCR has a value other than 0.
1: Both MCI_RCR and MCI_RNCR have a value of 0.
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty
0: MCI_TCR or MCI_TNCR has a value other than 0.
1: Both MCI_TCR and MCI_TNCR have a value of 0.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
595
33.10.12 MCI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
MCI_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
UNRE
OVRE
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
DTOE
DCRCE
RTOE
RENDE
RCRCE
RDIRE
RINDE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
–
–
-
-
SDIOIRQB
SDIOIRQA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ENDTX
ENDRX
NOTBUSY
DTIP
BLKE
TXRDY
RXRDY
CMDRDY
• CMDRDY: Command Ready Interrupt Enable
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Enable
• BLKE: Data Block Ended Interrupt Enable
• DTIP: Data Transfer in Progress Interrupt Enable
• NOTBUSY: Data Not Busy Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• SDIOIRQA: SDIO Interrupt for Slot A Interrupt Enable
• SDIOIRQB: SDIO Interrupt for Slot B Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• RINDE: Response Index Error Interrupt Enable
• RDIRE: Response Direction Error Interrupt Enable
• RCRCE: Response CRC Error Interrupt Enable
• RENDE: Response End Bit Error Interrupt Enable
• RTOE: Response Time-out Error Interrupt Enable
• DCRCE: Data CRC Error Interrupt Enable
• DTOE: Data Time-out Error Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Interrupt Enable
596
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• UNRE: UnderRun Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
597
33.10.13 MCI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
MCI_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
UNRE
OVRE
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
DTOE
DCRCE
RTOE
RENDE
RCRCE
RDIRE
RINDE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
–
–
-
-
SDIOIRQB
SDIOIRQA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ENDTX
ENDRX
NOTBUSY
DTIP
BLKE
TXRDY
RXRDY
CMDRDY
• CMDRDY: Command Ready Interrupt Disable
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Disable
• BLKE: Data Block Ended Interrupt Disable
• DTIP: Data Transfer in Progress Interrupt Disable
• NOTBUSY: Data Not Busy Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• SDIOIRQA: SDIO Interrupt for Slot A Interrupt Disable
• SDIOIRQB: SDIO Interrupt for Slot B Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• RINDE: Response Index Error Interrupt Disable
• RDIRE: Response Direction Error Interrupt Disable
• RCRCE: Response CRC Error Interrupt Disable
• RENDE: Response End Bit Error Interrupt Disable
• RTOE: Response Time-out Error Interrupt Disable
• DCRCE: Data CRC Error Interrupt Disable
• DTOE: Data Time-out Error Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Interrupt Disable
598
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• UNRE: UnderRun Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
599
33.10.14 MCI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
MCI_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
UNRE
OVRE
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
DTOE
DCRCE
RTOE
RENDE
RCRCE
RDIRE
RINDE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
–
–
-
-
SDIOIRQB
SDIOIRQA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ENDTX
ENDRX
NOTBUSY
DTIP
BLKE
TXRDY
RXRDY
CMDRDY
• CMDRDY: Command Ready Interrupt Mask
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Mask
• BLKE: Data Block Ended Interrupt Mask
• DTIP: Data Transfer in Progress Interrupt Mask
• NOTBUSY: Data Not Busy Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• SDIOIRQA: SDIO Interrupt for Slot A Interrupt Mask
• SDIOIRQB: SDIO Interrupt for Slot B Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• RINDE: Response Index Error Interrupt Mask
• RDIRE: Response Direction Error Interrupt Mask
• RCRCE: Response CRC Error Interrupt Mask
• RENDE: Response End Bit Error Interrupt Mask
• RTOE: Response Time-out Error Interrupt Mask
• DCRCE: Data CRC Error Interrupt Mask
• DTOE: Data Time-out Error Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Interrupt Mask
600
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• UNRE: UnderRun Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
601
34.
Ethernet MAC 10/100 (EMAC)
34.1
Description
The EMAC module implements a 10/100 Ethernet MAC compatible with the IEEE 802.3 standard using an
address checker, statistics and control registers, receive and transmit blocks, and a DMA interface.
The address checker recognizes four specific 48-bit addresses and contains a 64-bit hash register for matching
multicast and unicast addresses. It can recognize the broadcast address of all ones, copy all frames, and act on an
external address match signal.
The statistics register block contains registers for counting various types of event associated with transmit and
receive operations. These registers, along with the status words stored in the receive buffer list, enable software to
generate network management statistics compatible with IEEE 802.3.
34.2
602
Embedded Characteristics
Compatibility with IEEE Standard 802.3
10 and 100 Mbits per second data throughput capability
Full- and half-duplex operations
MII or RMII interface to the physical layer
Register Interface to address, data, status and control registers
DMA Interface, operating as a master on the Memory Controller
Interrupt generation to signal receive and transmit completion
28-byte transmit and 28-byte receive FIFOs
Automatic pad and CRC generation on transmitted frames
Address checking logic to recognize four 48-bit addresses
Support promiscuous mode where all valid frames are copied to memory
Support physical layer management through MDIO interface
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.3
Block Diagram
Figure 34-1.
EMAC Block Diagram
Address Checker
APB
Slave
Register Interface
Statistics Registers
MDIO
Control Registers
DMA Interface
RX FIFO
TX FIFO
Ethernet Receive
MII/RMII
AHB
Master
Ethernet Transmit
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
603
34.4
Functional Description
The MACB has several clock domains:
System bus clock (AHB and APB): DMA and register blocks
Transmit clock: transmit block
Receive clock: receive and address checker blocks
The only system constraint is 160 MHz for the system bus clock, above which MDC would toggle at above
2.5 MHz.
The system bus clock must run at least as fast as the receive clock and transmit clock (25 MHz at 100 Mbps, and
2.5 MHz at 10 Mbps).
Figure 34-1 illustrates the different blocks of the EMAC module.
The control registers drive the MDIO interface, setup up DMA activity, start frame transmission and select modes
of operation such as full- or half-duplex.
The receive block checks for valid preamble, FCS, alignment and length, and presents received frames to the
address checking block and DMA interface.
The transmit block takes data from the DMA interface, adds preamble and, if necessary, pad and FCS, and
transmits data according to the CSMA/CD (carrier sense multiple access with collision detect) protocol. The start
of transmission is deferred if CRS (carrier sense) is active.
If COL (collision) becomes active during transmission, a jam sequence is asserted and the transmission is retried
after a random back off. CRS and COL have no effect in full duplex mode.
The DMA block connects to external memory through its AHB bus interface. It contains receive and transmit FIFOs
for buffering frame data. It loads the transmit FIFO and empties the receive FIFO using AHB bus master
operations. Receive data is not sent to memory until the address checking logic has determined that the frame
should be copied. Receive or transmit frames are stored in one or more buffers. Receive buffers have a fixed
length of 128 bytes. Transmit buffers range in length between 0 and 2047 bytes, and up to 128 buffers are
permitted per frame. The DMA block manages the transmit and receive framebuffer queues. These queues can
hold multiple frames.
34.4.1 Memory Interface
Frame data is transferred to and from the EMAC through the DMA interface. All transfers are 32-bit words and may
be single accesses or bursts of 2, 3 or 4 words. Burst accesses do not cross sixteen-byte boundaries. Bursts of 4
words are the default data transfer; single accesses or bursts of less than four words may be used to transfer data
at the beginning or the end of a buffer.
The DMA controller performs six types of operation on the bus. In order of priority, these are:
1.
Receive buffer manager write
2.
Receive buffer manager read
3.
Transmit data DMA read
4.
Receive data DMA write
5.
Transmit buffer manager read
6.
Transmit buffer manager write
34.4.1.1 FIFO
The FIFO depths are 28 bytes for receive and 28 bytes for transmit and area function of the system clock speed,
memory latency and network speed.
Data is typically transferred into and out of the FIFOs in bursts of four words. For receive, a bus request is asserted
when the FIFO contains four words and has space for three more. For transmit, a bus request is generated when
604
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
there is space for four words, or when there is space for two words if the next transfer is to be only one or two
words.
Thus the bus latency must be less than the time it takes to load the FIFO and transmit or receive three words (12
bytes) of data.
At 100 Mbit/s, it takes 960 ns to transmit or receive 12 bytes of data. In addition, six master clock cycles should be
allowed for data to be loaded from the bus and to propagate through the FIFOs. For a 60 MHz master clock this
takes 100 ns, making the bus latency requirement 860 ns.
34.4.1.2 Receive Buffers
Received frames, including CRC/FCS optionally, are written to receive buffers stored in memory. Each receive
buffer is 128 bytes long. The start location for each receive buffer is stored in memory in a list of receive buffer
descriptors at a location pointed to by the receive buffer queue pointer register. The receive buffer start location is
a word address. For the first buffer of a frame, the start location can be offset by up to three bytes depending on
the value written to bits 14 and 15 of the network configuration register. If the start location of the buffer is offset the
available length of the first buffer of a frame is reduced by the corresponding number of bytes.
Each list entry consists of two words, the first being the address of the receive buffer and the second being the
receive status. If the length of a receive frame exceeds the buffer length, the status word for the used buffer is
written with zeroes except for the “start of frame” bit and the offset bits, if appropriate. Bit zero of the address field
is written to one to show the buffer has been used. The receive buffer manager then reads the location of the next
receive buffer and fills that with receive frame data. The final buffer descriptor status word contains the complete
frame status. Refer to Table 34-1 for details of the receive buffer descriptor list.
Table 34-1.
Bit
Receive Buffer Descriptor Entry
Function
Word 0
31:2
Address of beginning of buffer
1
Wrap - marks last descriptor in receive buffer descriptor list.
0
Ownership - needs to be zero for the EMAC to write data to the receive buffer. The EMAC sets this to one once it has
successfully written a frame to memory.
Software has to clear this bit before the buffer can be used again.
Word 1
31
Global all ones broadcast address detected
30
Multicast hash match
29
Unicast hash match
28
External address match
27
Reserved for future use
26
Specific address register 1 match
25
Specific address register 2 match
24
Specific address register 3 match
23
Specific address register 4 match
22
Type ID match
21
VLAN tag detected (i.e., type id of 0x8100)
20
Priority tag detected (i.e., type id of 0x8100 and null VLAN identifier)
19:17
VLAN priority (only valid if bit 21 is set)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
605
Table 34-1.
Receive Buffer Descriptor Entry (Continued)
Bit
Function
16
Concatenation format indicator (CFI) bit (only valid if bit 21 is set)
15
End of frame - when set the buffer contains the end of a frame. If end of frame is not set, then the only other valid status are
bits 12, 13 and 14.
14
Start of frame - when set the buffer contains the start of a frame. If both bits 15 and 14 are set, then the buffer contains a
whole frame.
13:12
Receive buffer offset - indicates the number of bytes by which the data in the first buffer is offset from the word address.
Updated with the current values of the network configuration register. If jumbo frame mode is enabled through bit 3 of the
network configuration register, then bits 13:12 of the receive buffer descriptor entry are used to indicate bits 13:12 of the
frame length.
11:0
Length of frame including FCS (if selected). Bits 13:12 are also used if jumbo frame mode is selected.
To receive frames, the buffer descriptors must be initialized by writing an appropriate address to bits 31 to 2 in the
first word of each list entry. Bit zero must be written with zero. Bit one is the wrap bit and indicates the last entry in
the list.
The start location of the receive buffer descriptor list must be written to the receive buffer queue pointer register
before setting the receive enable bit in the network control register to enable receive. As soon as the receive block
starts writing received frame data to the receive FIFO, the receive buffer manager reads the first receive buffer
location pointed to by the receive buffer queue pointer register.
If the filter block then indicates that the frame should be copied to memory, the receive data DMA operation starts
writing data into the receive buffer. If an error occurs, the buffer is recovered. If the current buffer pointer has its
wrap bit set or is the 1024th descriptor, the next receive buffer location is read from the beginning of the receive
descriptor list. Otherwise, the next receive buffer location is read from the next word in memory.
There is an 11-bit counter to count out the 2048 word locations of a maximum length, receive buffer descriptor list.
This is added with the value originally written to the receive buffer queue pointer register to produce a pointer into
the list. A read of the receive buffer queue pointer register returns the pointer value, which is the queue entry
currently being accessed. The counter is reset after receive status is written to a descriptor that has its wrap bit set
or rolls over to zero after 1024 descriptors have been accessed. The value written to the receive buffer pointer
register may be any word-aligned address, provided that there are at least 2048 word locations available between
the pointer and the top of the memory.
Section 3.6 of the AMBA 2.0 specification states that bursts should not cross 1K boundaries. As receive buffer
manager writes are bursts of two words, to ensure that this does not occur, it is best to write the pointer register
with the least three significant bits set to zero. As receive buffers are used, the receive buffer manager sets bit zero
of the first word of the descriptor to indicate used. If a receive error is detected the receive buffer currently being
written is recovered. Previous buffers are not recovered. Software should search through the used bits in the buffer
descriptors to find out how many frames have been received. It should be checking the start-of-frame and end-offrame bits, and not rely on the value returned by the receive buffer queue pointer register which changes
continuously as more buffers are used.
For CRC errored frames, excessive length frames or length field mismatched frames, all of which are counted in
the statistics registers, it is possible that a frame fragment might be stored in a sequence of receive buffers.
Software can detect this by looking for start of frame bit set in a buffer following a buffer with no end of frame bit
set.
For a properly working Ethernet system, there should be no excessively long frames or frames greater than 128
bytes with CRC/FCS errors. Collision fragments are less than 128 bytes long. Therefore, it is a rare occurrence to
find a frame fragment in a receive buffer.
606
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
If bit zero is set when the receive buffer manager reads the location of the receive buffer, then the buffer has
already been used and cannot be used again until software has processed the frame and cleared bit zero. In this
case, the DMA block sets the buffer not available bit in the receive status register and triggers an interrupt.
If bit zero is set when the receive buffer manager reads the location of the receive buffer and a frame is being
received, the frame is discarded and the receive resource error statistics register is incremented.
A receive overrun condition occurs when bus was not granted in time or because HRESP was not OK (bus error).
In a receive overrun condition, the receive overrun interrupt is asserted and the buffer currently being written is
recovered. The next frame received with an address that is recognized reuses the buffer.
If bit 17 of the network configuration register is set, the FCS of received frames shall not be copied to memory. The
frame length indicated in the receive status field shall be reduced by four bytes in this case.
34.4.1.3 Transmit Buffer
Frames to be transmitted are stored in one or more transmit buffers. Transmit buffers can be between 0 and 2047
bytes long, so it is possible to transmit frames longer than the maximum length specified in IEEE Standard 802.3.
Zero length buffers are allowed. The maximum number of buffers permitted for each transmit frame is 128.
The start location for each transmit buffer is stored in memory in a list of transmit buffer descriptors at a location
pointed to by the transmit buffer queue pointer register. Each list entry consists of two words, the first being the
byte address of the transmit buffer and the second containing the transmit control and status. Frames can be
transmitted with or without automatic CRC generation. If CRC is automatically generated, pad is also automatically
generated to take frames to a minimum length of 64 bytes. Table 34-2 on page 608 defines an entry in the transmit
buffer descriptor list. To transmit frames, the buffer descriptors must be initialized by writing an appropriate byte
address to bits 31 to 0 in the first word of each list entry. The second transmit buffer descriptor is initialized with
control information that indicates the length of the buffer, whether or not it is to be transmitted with CRC and
whether the buffer is the last buffer in the frame.
After transmission, the control bits are written back to the second word of the first buffer along with the “used” bit
and other status information. Bit 31 is the “used” bit which must be zero when the control word is read if
transmission is to happen. It is written to one when a frame has been transmitted. Bits 27, 28 and 29 indicate
various transmit error conditions. Bit 30 is the “wrap” bit which can be set for any buffer within a frame. If no wrap
bit is encountered after 1024 descriptors, the queue pointer rolls over to the start in a similar fashion to the receive
queue.
The transmit buffer queue pointer register must not be written while transmit is active. If a new value is written to
the transmit buffer queue pointer register, the queue pointer resets itself to point to the beginning of the new
queue. If transmit is disabled by writing to bit 3 of the network control, the transmit buffer queue pointer register
resets to point to the beginning of the transmit queue. Note that disabling receive does not have the same effect on
the receive queue pointer.
Once the transmit queue is initialized, transmit is activated by writing to bit 9, the Transmit Start bit of the network
control register. Transmit is halted when a buffer descriptor with its used bit set is read, or if a transmit error occurs,
or by writing to the transmit halt bit of the network control register. (Transmission is suspended if a pause frame is
received while the pause enable bit is set in the network configuration register.) Rewriting the start bit while
transmission is active is allowed.
Transmission control is implemented with a Tx_go variable which is readable in the transmit status register at bit
location 3. The Tx_go variable is reset when:
̶
transmit is disabled
̶
a buffer descriptor with its ownership bit set is read
̶
a new value is written to the transmit buffer queue pointer register
̶
bit 10, tx_halt, of the network control register is written
̶
there is a transmit error such as too many retries or a transmit underrun.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
607
To set tx_go, write to bit 9, tx_start, of the network control register. Transmit halt does not take effect until any
ongoing transmit finishes. If a collision occurs during transmission of a multi-buffer frame, transmission
automatically restarts from the first buffer of the frame. If a “used” bit is read midway through transmission of a
multi-buffer frame, this is treated as a transmit error. Transmission stops, tx_er is asserted and the FCS is bad.
If transmission stops due to a transmit error, the transmit queue pointer resets to point to the beginning of the
transmit queue. Software needs to re-initialize the transmit queue after a transmit error.
If transmission stops due to a “used” bit being read at the start of the frame, the transmission queue pointer is not
reset and transmit starts from the same transmit buffer descriptor when the transmit start bit is written
Table 34-2.
Bit
Transmit Buffer Descriptor Entry
Function
Word 0
31:0
Byte Address of buffer
Word 1
Used. Needs to be zero for the EMAC to read data from the transmit buffer. The EMAC sets this to one for the first buffer of
a frame once it has been successfully transmitted.
31
Software has to clear this bit before the buffer can be used again.
Note:
This bit is only set for the first buffer in a frame unlike receive where all buffers have the Used bit set once used.
30
Wrap. Marks last descriptor in transmit buffer descriptor list.
29
Retry limit exceeded, transmit error detected
28
Transmit underrun, occurs either when hresp is not OK (bus error) or the transmit data could not be fetched in time or when
buffers are exhausted in mid frame.
27
Buffers exhausted in mid frame
26:17
Reserved
16
No CRC. When set, no CRC is appended to the current frame. This bit only needs to be set for the last buffer of a frame.
15
Last buffer. When set, this bit indicates the last buffer in the current frame has been reached.
14:11
Reserved
10:0
Length of buffer
34.4.2 Transmit Block
This block transmits frames in accordance with the Ethernet IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD protocol. Frame assembly
starts by adding preamble and the start frame delimiter. Data is taken from the transmit FIFO a word at a time.
Data is transmitted least significant nibble first. If necessary, padding is added to increase the frame length to 60
bytes. CRC is calculated as a 32-bit polynomial. This is inverted and appended to the end of the frame, taking the
frame length to a minimum of 64 bytes. If the No CRC bit is set in the second word of the last buffer descriptor of a
transmit frame, neither pad nor CRC are appended.
In full-duplex mode, frames are transmitted immediately. Back-to-back frames are transmitted at least 96 bit times
apart to guarantee the interframe gap.
In half-duplex mode, the transmitter checks carrier sense. If asserted, it waits for it to de-assert and then starts
transmission after the interframe gap of 96 bit times. If the collision signal is asserted during transmission, the
transmitter transmits a jam sequence of 32 bits taken from the data register and then retry transmission after the
back off time has elapsed.
The back-off time is based on an XOR of the 10 least significant bits of the data coming from the transmit FIFO and
a 10-bit pseudo random number generator. The number of bits used depends on the number of collisions seen.
608
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
After the first collision, 1 bit is used, after the second 2, and so on up to 10. Above 10, all 10 bits are used. An error
is indicated and no further attempts are made if 16 attempts cause collisions.
If transmit DMA underruns, bad CRC is automatically appended using the same mechanism as jam insertion and
the tx_er signal is asserted. For a properly configured system, this should never happen.
If the back pressure bit is set in the network control register in half duplex mode, the transmit block transmits 64
bits of data, which can consist of 16 nibbles of 1011 or in bit-rate mode 64 1s, whenever it sees an incoming frame
to force a collision. This provides a way of implementing flow control in half-duplex mode.
34.4.3 Pause Frame Support
The start of an 802.3 pause frame is as follows:
Table 34-3.
Start of an 802.3 Pause Frame
Destination Address
Source Address
Type
(Mac Control Frame)
Pause Opcode
Pause Time
0x0180C2000001
6 bytes
0x8808
0x0001
2 bytes
The network configuration register contains a receive pause enable bit (13). If a valid pause frame is received, the
pause time register is updated with the frame’s pause time, regardless of its current contents and regardless of the
state of the configuration register bit 13. An interrupt (12) is triggered when a pause frame is received, assuming it
is enabled in the interrupt mask register. If bit 13 is set in the network configuration register and the value of the
pause time register is non-zero, no new frame is transmitted until the pause time register has decremented to zero.
The loading of a new pause time, and hence the pausing of transmission, only occurs when the EMAC is
configured for full-duplex operation. If the EMAC is configured for half-duplex, there is no transmission pause, but
the pause frame received interrupt is still triggered.
A valid pause frame is defined as having a destination address that matches either the address stored in specific
address register 1 or matches 0x0180C2000001 and has the MAC control frame type ID of 0x8808 and the pause
opcode of 0x0001. Pause frames that have FCS or other errors are treated as invalid and are discarded. Valid
pause frames received increment the Pause Frame Received statistic register.
The pause time register decrements every 512 bit times (i.e., 128 rx_clks in nibble mode) once transmission
has stopped. For test purposes, the register decrements every rx_clk cycle once transmission has stopped if bit
12 (retry test) is set in the network configuration register. If the pause enable bit (13) is not set in the network
configuration register, then the decrementing occurs regardless of whether transmission has stopped or not.
An interrupt (13) is asserted whenever the pause time register decrements to zero (assuming it is enabled in the
interrupt mask register).
34.4.4 Receive Block
The receive block checks for valid preamble, FCS, alignment and length, presents received frames to the DMA
block and stores the frames destination address for use by the address checking block. If, during frame reception,
the frame is found to be too long or rx_er is asserted, a bad frame indication is sent to the DMA block. The DMA
block then ceases sending data to memory. At the end of frame reception, the receive block indicates to the DMA
block whether the frame is good or bad. The DMA block recovers the current receive buffer if the frame was bad.
The receive block signals the register block to increment the alignment error, the CRC (FCS) error, the short
frame, long frame, jabber error, the receive symbol error statistics and the length field mismatch statistics.
The enable bit for jumbo frames in the network configuration register allows the EMAC to receive jumbo frames of
up to 10240 bytes in size. This operation does not form part of the IEEE802.3 specification and is disabled by
default. When jumbo frames are enabled, frames received with a frame size greater than 10240 bytes are
discarded.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
609
34.4.5 Address Checking Block
The address checking (or filter) block indicates to the DMA block which receive frames should be copied to
memory. Whether a frame is copied depends on what is enabled in the network configuration register, the state of
the external match pin, the contents of the specific address and hash registers and the frame’s destination
address. In this implementation of the EMAC, the frame’s source address is not checked. Provided that bit 18 of
the Network Configuration register is not set, a frame is not copied to memory if the EMAC is transmitting in half
duplex mode at the time a destination address is received. If bit 18 of the Network Configuration register is set,
frames can be received while transmitting in half-duplex mode.
Ethernet frames are transmitted a byte at a time, least significant bit first. The first six bytes (48 bits) of an Ethernet
frame make up the destination address. The first bit of the destination address, the LSB of the first byte of the
frame, is the group/individual bit: this is One for multicast addresses and Zero for unicast. The All Ones address is
the broadcast address, and a special case of multicast.
The EMAC supports recognition of four specific addresses. Each specific address requires two registers, specific
address register bottom and specific address register top. Specific address register bottom stores the first four
bytes of the destination address and specific address register top contains the last two bytes. The addresses
stored can be specific, group, local or universal.
The destination address of received frames is compared against the data stored in the specific address registers
once they have been activated. The addresses are deactivated at reset or when their corresponding specific
address register bottom is written. They are activated when specific address register top is written. If a receive
frame address matches an active address, the frame is copied to memory.
The following example illustrates the use of the address match registers for a MAC address of 21:43:65:87:A9:CB.
Preamble 55
SFD D5
DA (Octet0 - LSB) 21
DA(Octet 1) 43
DA(Octet 2) 65
DA(Octet 3) 87
DA(Octet 4) A9
DA (Octet5 - MSB) CB
SA (LSB) 00
SA 00
SA 00
SA 00
SA 00
SA (MSB) 43
SA (LSB) 21
The sequence above shows the beginning of an Ethernet frame. Byte order of transmission is from top to bottom
as shown. For a successful match to specific address 1, the following address matching registers must be set up:
Base address + 0x98 0x87654321 (Bottom)
Base address + 0x9C 0x0000CBA9 (Top)
And for a successful match to the Type ID register, the following should be set up:
610
Base address + 0xB8 0x00004321
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.4.6 Broadcast Address
The broadcast address of 0xFFFFFFFFFFFF is recognized if the ‘no broadcast’ bit in the network configuration
register is zero.
34.4.7 Hash Addressing
The hash address register is 64 bits long and takes up two locations in the memory map. The least significant bits
are stored in hash register bottom and the most significant bits in hash register top.
The unicast hash enable and the multicast hash enable bits in the network configuration register enable the
reception of hash matched frames. The destination address is reduced to a 6-bit index into the 64-bit hash register
using the following hash function. The hash function is an exclusive or of every sixth bit of the destination address.
hash_index[5] = da[5] ^ da[11] ^ da[17] ^ da[23] ^ da[29] ^ da[35] ^ da[41] ^ da[47]
hash_index[4] = da[4] ^ da[10] ^ da[16] ^ da[22] ^ da[28] ^ da[34] ^ da[40] ^ da[46]
hash_index[3] = da[3] ^ da[09] ^ da[15] ^ da[21] ^ da[27] ^ da[33] ^ da[39] ^ da[45]
hash_index[2] = da[2] ^ da[08] ^ da[14] ^ da[20] ^ da[26] ^ da[32] ^ da[38] ^ da[44]
hash_index[1] = da[1] ^ da[07] ^ da[13] ^ da[19] ^ da[25] ^ da[31] ^ da[37] ^ da[43]
hash_index[0] = da[0] ^ da[06] ^ da[12] ^ da[18] ^ da[24] ^ da[30] ^ da[36] ^ da[42]
da[0] represents the least significant bit of the first byte received, that is, the multicast/unicast indicator, and
da[47] represents the most significant bit of the last byte received.
If the hash index points to a bit that is set in the hash register, then the frame is matched according to whether the
frame is multicast or unicast.
A multicast match is signalled if the multicast hash enable bit is set. da[0] is 1 and the hash index points to a bit set
in the hash register.
A unicast match is signalled if the unicast hash enable bit is set. da[0] is 0 and the hash index points to a bit set in
the hash register.
To receive all multicast frames, the hash register should be set with all ones and the multicast hash enable bit
should be set in the network configuration register.
34.4.8 Copy All Frames (or Promiscuous Mode)
If the copy all frames bit is set in the network configuration register, then all non-errored frames are copied to
memory. For example, frames that are too long, too short, or have FCS errors or rx_er asserted during reception
are discarded and all others are received. Frames with FCS errors are copied to memory if bit 19 in the network
configuration register is set.
34.4.9 Type ID Checking
The contents of the type_id register are compared against the length/type ID of received frames (i.e., bytes 13 and
14). Bit 22 in the receive buffer descriptor status is set if there is a match. The reset state of this register is zero
which is unlikely to match the length/type ID of any valid Ethernet frame.
Note:
A type ID match does not affect whether a frame is copied to memory.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
611
34.4.10 VLAN Support
An Ethernet encoded 802.1Q VLAN tag looks like this:
Table 34-4.
802.1Q VLAN Tag
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) 16 bits
TCI (Tag Control Information) 16 bits
0x8100
First 3 bits priority, then CFI bit, last 12 bits VID
The VLAN tag is inserted at the 13th byte of the frame, adding an extra four bytes to the frame. If the VID (VLAN
identifier) is null (0x000), this indicates a priority-tagged frame. The MAC can support frame lengths up to 1536
bytes, 18 bytes more than the original Ethernet maximum frame length of 1518 bytes. This is achieved by setting
bit 8 in the network configuration register.
The following bits in the receive buffer descriptor status word give information about VLAN tagged frames:
Bit 21 set if receive frame is VLAN tagged (i.e. type id of 0x8100)
Bit 20 set if receive frame is priority tagged (i.e. type id of 0x8100 and null VID). (If bit 20 is set bit 21 is set
also.)
Bit 19, 18 and 17 set to priority if bit 21 is set
Bit 16 set to CFI if bit 21 is set
34.4.11 PHY Maintenance
The register EMAC_MAN enables the EMAC to communicate with a PHY by means of the MDIO interface. It is
used during auto-negotiation to ensure that the EMAC and the PHY are configured for the same speed and duplex
configuration.
The PHY maintenance register is implemented as a shift register. Writing to the register starts a shift operation
which is signalled as complete when bit two is set in the network status register (about 2000 MCK cycles later
when bit ten is set to zero, and bit eleven is set to one in the network configuration register). An interrupt is
generated as this bit is set. During this time, the MSB of the register is output on the MDIO pin and the LSB
updated from the MDIO pin with each MDC cycle. This causes transmission of a PHY management frame on
MDIO.
Reading during the shift operation returns the current contents of the shift register. At the end of management
operation, the bits have shifted back to their original locations. For a read operation, the data bits are updated with
data read from the PHY. It is important to write the correct values to the register to ensure a valid PHY
management frame is produced.
The MDIO interface can read IEEE 802.3 clause 45 PHYs as well as clause 22 PHYs. To read clause 45 PHYs,
bits[31:28] should be written as 0x0011. For a description of MDC generation, see the “Network Configuration
Register” on page 621.
34.4.12 Media Independent Interface
The Ethernet MAC is capable of interfacing to both RMII and MII Interfaces. The RMII bit in the EMAC_USRIO
register controls the interface that is selected. When this bit is set, the RMII interface is selected, else the MII
interface is selected.
The MII and RMII interface are capable of both 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s data rates as described in the IEEE 802.3u
standard. The signals used by the MII and RMII interfaces are described in Table 34-5.
612
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 34-5.
Pin Configuration
Pin Name
MII
RMII
ETXCK_EREFCK
ETXCK: Transmit Clock
EREFCK: Reference Clock
ECRS
ECRS: Carrier Sense
ECOL
ECOL: Collision Detect
ERXDV
ERXDV: Data Valid
ECRSDV: Carrier Sense/Data Valid
ERX0–ERX3
ERX0–ERX3: 4-bit Receive Data
ERX0–ERX1: 2-bit Receive Data
ERXER
ERXER: Receive Error
ERXER: Receive Error
ERXCK
ERXCK: Receive Clock
ETXEN
ETXEN: Transmit Enable
ETXEN: Transmit Enable
ETX0–ETX3
ETX0–ETX3: 4-bit Transmit Data
ETX0–ETX1: 2-bit Transmit Data
ETXER
ETXER: Transmit Error
The intent of the RMII is to provide a reduced pin count alternative to the IEEE 802.3u MII. It uses two bits for
transmit (ETX0 and ETX1) and two bits for receive (ERX0 and ERX1). There is a Transmit Enable (ETXEN), a
Receive Error (ERXER), a Carrier Sense (ECRS_DV), and a 50 MHz Reference Clock (ETXCK_EREFCK) for
100Mb/s data rate.
34.4.12.1 RMII Transmit and Receive Operation
The same signals are used internally for both the RMII and the MII operations. The RMII maps these signals in a
more pin-efficient manner. The transmit and receive bits are converted from a 4-bit parallel format to a 2-bit parallel
scheme that is clocked at twice the rate. The carrier sense and data valid signals are combined into the ECRSDV
signal. This signal contains information on carrier sense, FIFO status, and validity of the data. Transmit error bit
(ETXER) and collision detect (ECOL) are not used in RMII mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
613
34.5
Programming Interface
34.5.1 Initialization
34.5.1.1 Configuration
Initialization of the EMAC configuration (e.g., loop-back mode, frequency ratios) must be done while the transmit
and receive circuits are disabled. See the description of the network control register and network configuration
register earlier in this document.
To change loop-back mode, the following sequence of operations must be followed:
1.
Write to network control register to disable transmit and receive circuits.
2.
Write to network control register to change loop-back mode.
3.
Write to network control register to re-enable transmit or receive circuits.
Note:
These writes to network control register cannot be combined in any way.
34.5.1.2 Receive Buffer List
Receive data is written to areas of data (i.e., buffers) in system memory. These buffers are listed in another data
structure that also resides in main memory. This data structure (receive buffer queue) is a sequence of descriptor
entries as defined in “Receive Buffer Descriptor Entry” on page 605. It points to this data structure.
Figure 34-2.
Receive Buffer List
Receive Buffer 0
Receive Buffer Queue Pointer
(MAC Register)
Receive Buffer 1
Receive Buffer N
Receive Buffer Descriptor List
(In memory)
(In memory)
To create the list of buffers:
614
1.
Allocate a number (n) of buffers of 128 bytes in system memory.
2.
Allocate an area 2n words for the receive buffer descriptor entry in system memory and create n entries in
this list. Mark all entries in this list as owned by EMAC, i.e., bit 0 of word 0 set to 0.
3.
If less than 1024 buffers are defined, the last descriptor must be marked with the wrap bit (bit 1 in word 0 set
to 1).
4.
Write address of receive buffer descriptor entry to EMAC register receive_buffer queue pointer.
5.
The receive circuits can then be enabled by writing to the address recognition registers and then to the
network control register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.5.1.3 Transmit Buffer List
Transmit data is read from areas of data (the buffers) in system memory These buffers are listed in another data
structure that also resides in main memory. This data structure (Transmit Buffer Queue) is a sequence of
descriptor entries (as defined in Table 34-2 on page 608) that points to this data structure.
To create this list of buffers:
1.
Allocate a number (n) of buffers of between 1 and 2047 bytes of data to be transmitted in system memory.
Up to 128 buffers per frame are allowed.
2.
Allocate an area 2n words for the transmit buffer descriptor entry in system memory and create N entries in
this list. Mark all entries in this list as owned by EMAC, i.e. bit 31 of word 1 set to 0.
3.
If fewer than 1024 buffers are defined, the last descriptor must be marked with the wrap bit — bit 30 in word
1 set to 1.
4.
Write address of transmit buffer descriptor entry to EMAC register transmit_buffer queue pointer.
5.
The transmit circuits can then be enabled by writing to the network control register.
34.5.1.4 Address Matching
The EMAC register-pair hash address and the four specific address register-pairs must be written with the required
values. Each register-pair comprises a bottom register and top register, with the bottom register being written first.
The address matching is disabled for a particular register-pair after the bottom-register has been written and reenabled when the top register is written. See “Address Checking Block” on page 610. for details of address
matching. Each register-pair may be written at any time, regardless of whether the receive circuits are enabled or
disabled.
34.5.1.5 Interrupts
There are 14 interrupt conditions that are detected within the EMAC. These are ORed to make a single interrupt.
Depending on the overall system design, this may be passed through a further level of interrupt collection (interrupt
controller). On receipt of the interrupt signal, the CPU enters the interrupt handler (Refer to Section 25. “Advanced
Interrupt Controller (AIC)”). To ascertain which interrupt has been generated, read the interrupt status register.
Note that this register clears itself when read. At reset, all interrupts are disabled. To enable an interrupt, write to
interrupt enable register with the pertinent interrupt bit set to 1. To disable an interrupt, write to interrupt disable
register with the pertinent interrupt bit set to 1. To check whether an interrupt is enabled or disabled, read interrupt
mask register: if the bit is set to 1, the interrupt is disabled.
34.5.1.6 Transmitting Frames
To set up a frame for transmission:
1.
Enable transmit in the network control register.
2.
Allocate an area of system memory for transmit data. This does not have to be contiguous, varying byte
lengths can be used as long as they conclude on byte borders.
3.
Set-up the transmit buffer list.
4.
Set the network control register to enable transmission and enable interrupts.
5.
Write data for transmission into these buffers.
6.
Write the address to transmit buffer descriptor queue pointer.
7.
Write control and length to word one of the transmit buffer descriptor entry.
8.
Write to the transmit start bit in the network control register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
615
34.5.1.7 Receiving Frames
When a frame is received and the receive circuits are enabled, the EMAC checks the address and, in the following
cases, the frame is written to system memory:
if it matches one of the four specific address registers.
if it matches the hash address function.
if it is a broadcast address (0xFFFFFFFFFFFF) and broadcasts are allowed.
if the EMAC is configured to copy all frames.
The register receive buffer queue pointer points to the next entry (see Table 34-1 on page 605) and the EMAC
uses this as the address in system memory to write the frame to. Once the frame has been completely and
successfully received and written to system memory, the EMAC then updates the receive buffer descriptor entry
with the reason for the address match and marks the area as being owned by software. Once this is complete an
interrupt receive complete is set. Software is then responsible for handling the data in the buffer and then releasing
the buffer by writing the ownership bit back to 0.
If the EMAC is unable to write the data at a rate to match the incoming frame, then an interrupt receive overrun is
set. If there is no receive buffer available, i.e., the next buffer is still owned by software, the interrupt receive buffer
not available is set. If the frame is not successfully received, a statistic register is incremented and the frame is
discarded without informing software.
616
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6
Ethernet MAC 10/100 (EMAC) User Interface
Table 34-6.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Network Control Register
EMAC_NCR
Read/Write
0
0x04
Network Configuration Register
EMAC_NCFG
Read/Write
0x800
0x08
Network Status Register
EMAC_NSR
Read-only
–
0x0C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Reserved
–
–
–
0x14
Transmit Status Register
EMAC_TSR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x18
Receive Buffer Queue Pointer Register
EMAC_RBQP
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x1C
Transmit Buffer Queue Pointer Register
EMAC_TBQP
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x20
Receive Status Register
EMAC_RSR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x24
Interrupt Status Register
EMAC_ISR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x28
Interrupt Enable Register
EMAC_IER
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Disable Register
EMAC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x30
Interrupt Mask Register
EMAC_IMR
Read-only
0x0000_3FFF
0x34
Phy Maintenance Register
EMAC_MAN
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x38
Pause Time Register
EMAC_PTR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x3C
Pause Frames Received Register
EMAC_PFR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x40
Frames Transmitted Ok Register
EMAC_FTO
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x44
Single Collision Frames Register
EMAC_SCF
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x48
Multiple Collision Frames Register
EMAC_MCF
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x4C
Frames Received Ok Register
EMAC_FRO
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x50
Frame Check Sequence Errors Register
EMAC_FCSE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x54
Alignment Errors Register
EMAC_ALE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x58
Deferred Transmission Frames Register
EMAC_DTF
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x5C
Late Collisions Register
EMAC_LCOL
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x60
Excessive Collisions Register
EMAC_ECOL
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x64
Transmit Underrun Errors Register
EMAC_TUND
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x68
Carrier Sense Errors Register
EMAC_CSE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x6C
Receive Resource Errors Register
EMAC_RRE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x70
Receive Overrun Errors Register
EMAC_ROV
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x74
Receive Symbol Errors Register
EMAC_RSE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x78
Excessive Length Errors Register
EMAC_ELE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x7C
Receive Jabbers Register
EMAC_RJA
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x80
Undersize Frames Register
EMAC_USF
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x84
SQE Test Errors Register
EMAC_STE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x88
Received Length Field Mismatch Register
EMAC_RLE
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
617
Table 34-6.
Register Mapping (Continued)
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x90
Hash Register Bottom [31:0] Register
EMAC_HRB
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x94
Hash Register Top [63:32] Register
EMAC_HRT
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x98
Specific Address 1 Bottom Register
EMAC_SA1B
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x9C
Specific Address 1 Top Register
EMAC_SA1T
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xA0
Specific Address 2 Bottom Register
EMAC_SA2B
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xA4
Specific Address 2 Top Register
EMAC_SA2T
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xA8
Specific Address 3 Bottom Register
EMAC_SA3B
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xAC
Specific Address 3 Top Register
EMAC_SA3T
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xB0
Specific Address 4 Bottom Register
EMAC_SA4B
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xB4
Specific Address 4 Top Register
EMAC_SA4T
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xB8
Type ID Checking Register
EMAC_TID
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xC0
User Input/Output Register
EMAC_USRIO
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0xC8–0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
618
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.1 Network Control Register
Name:
EMAC_NCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
THALT
9
TSTART
8
BP
7
WESTAT
6
INCSTAT
5
CLRSTAT
4
MPE
3
TE
2
RE
1
LLB
0
LB
• LB: LoopBack
Asserts the loopback signal to the PHY.
• LLB: Loopback local
Connects txd to rxd, tx_en to rx_dv, forces full duplex and drives rx_clk and tx_clk with pclk divided by 4.
rx_clk and tx_clk may glitch as the EMAC is switched into and out of internal loop back. It is important that receive
and transmit circuits have already been disabled when making the switch into and out of internal loop back.
• RE: Receive enable
When set, enables the EMAC to receive data. When reset, frame reception stops immediately and the receive FIFO is
cleared. The receive queue pointer register is unaffected.
• TE: Transmit enable
When set, enables the Ethernet transmitter to send data. When reset transmission, stops immediately, the transmit FIFO
and control registers are cleared and the transmit queue pointer register resets to point to the start of the transmit descriptor list.
• MPE: Management port enable
Set to one to enable the management port. When zero, forces MDIO to high impedance state and MDC low.
• CLRSTAT: Clear statistics registers
This bit is write only. Writing a one clears the statistics registers.
• INCSTAT: Increment statistics registers
This bit is write only. Writing a one increments all the statistics registers by one for test purposes.
• WESTAT: Write enable for statistics registers
Setting this bit to one makes the statistics registers writable for functional test purposes.
• BP: Back pressure
If set in half duplex mode, forces collisions on all received frames.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
619
• TSTART: Start transmission
Writing one to this bit starts transmission.
• THALT: Transmit halt
Writing one to this bit halts transmission as soon as any ongoing frame transmission ends.
620
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.2 Network Configuration Register
Name:
EMAC_NCFGR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
IRXFCS
18
EFRHD
17
DRFCS
16
RLCE
14
13
PAE
12
RTY
11
10
9
–
8
BIG
5
NBC
4
CAF
3
JFRAME
2
–
1
FD
0
SPD
15
RBOF
7
UNI
6
MTI
CLK
• SPD: Speed
Set to 1 to indicate 100 Mbit/s operation, 0 for 10 Mbit/s. The value of this pin is reflected on the speed pin.
• FD: Full Duplex
If set to 1, the transmit block ignores the state of collision and carrier sense and allows receive while transmitting. Also controls the half_duplex pin.
• CAF: Copy All Frames
When set to 1, all valid frames are received.
• JFRAME: Jumbo Frames
Set to one to enable jumbo frames of up to 10240 bytes to be accepted.
• NBC: No Broadcast
When set to 1, frames addressed to the broadcast address of all ones are not received.
• MTI: Multicast Hash Enable
When set, multicast frames are received when the 6-bit hash function of the destination address points to a bit that is set in
the hash register.
• UNI: Unicast Hash Enable
When set, unicast frames are received when the 6-bit hash function of the destination address points to a bit that is set in
the hash register.
• BIG: Receive 1536 bytes frames
Setting this bit means the EMAC receives frames up to 1536 bytes in length. Normally, the EMAC would reject any frame
above 1518 bytes.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
621
• CLK: MDC clock divider
Set according to system clock speed. This determines by what number system clock is divided to generate MDC. For conformance with 802.3, MDC must not exceed 2.5 MHz (MDC is only active during MDIO read and write operations).
Value
MDC
00
MCK divided by 8 (MCK up to 20 MHz)
01
MCK divided by 16 (MCK up to 40 MHz)
10
MCK divided by 32 (MCK up to 80 MHz)
11
MCK divided by 64 (MCK up to 160 MHz)
• RTY: Retry test
Must be set to zero for normal operation. If set to one, the back off between collisions is always one slot time. Setting this
bit to one helps testing the too many retries condition. Also used in the pause frame tests to reduce the pause counters
decrement time from 512 bit times, to every rx_clk cycle.
• PAE: Pause Enable
When set, transmission pauses when a valid pause frame is received.
• RBOF: Receive Buffer Offset
Indicates the number of bytes by which the received data is offset from the start of the first receive buffer.
Value
Offset
00
No offset from start of receive buffer
01
One-byte offset from start of receive buffer
10
Two-byte offset from start of receive buffer
11
Three-byte offset from start of receive buffer
• RLCE: Receive Length field Checking Enable
When set, frames with measured lengths shorter than their length fields are discarded. Frames containing a type ID in
bytes 13 and 14 — length/type ID = 0600 — are not be counted as length errors.
• DRFCS: Discard Receive FCS
When set, the FCS field of received frames are not be copied to memory.
• EFRHD: Enable Frames Received in Half Duplex
Enable Frames to be received in half-duplex mode while transmitting.
• IRXFCS: Ignore RX FCS
When set, frames with FCS/CRC errors are not rejected and no FCS error statistics are counted. For normal operation, this
bit must be set to 0.
622
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.3 Network Status Register
Name:
EMAC_NSR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
IDLE
1
MDIO
0
–
• MDIO
Returns status of the mdio_in pin. Use the PHY maintenance register for reading managed frames rather than this bit.
• IDLE
0: The PHY logic is running.
1: The PHY management logic is idle (i.e., has completed).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
623
34.6.4 Transmit Status Register
Name:
EMAC_TSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
UND
5
COMP
4
BEX
3
TGO
2
RLE
1
COL
0
UBR
This register, when read, provides details of the status of a transmit. Once read, individual bits may be cleared by writing 1
to them. It is not possible to set a bit to 1 by writing to the register.
• UBR: Used Bit Read
Set when a transmit buffer descriptor is read with its used bit set. Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• COL: Collision Occurred
Set by the assertion of collision. Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• RLE: Retry Limit exceeded
Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• TGO: Transmit Go
If high transmit is active.
• BEX: Buffers exhausted mid frame
If the buffers run out during transmission of a frame, then transmission stops, FCS shall be bad and tx_er asserted.
Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• COMP: Transmit Complete
Set when a frame has been transmitted. Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• UND: Transmit Underrun
Set when transmit DMA was not able to read data from memory, either because the bus was not granted in time, because
a not OK hresp(bus error) was returned or because a used bit was read midway through frame transmission. If this
occurs, the transmitter forces bad CRC. Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
624
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.5 Receive Buffer Queue Pointer Register
Name:
EMAC_RBQP
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
–
0
–
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
This register points to the entry in the receive buffer queue (descriptor list) currently being used. It is written with the start
location of the receive buffer descriptor list. The lower order bits increment as buffers are used up and wrap to their original
values after either 1024 buffers or when the wrap bit of the entry is set.
Reading this register returns the location of the descriptor currently being accessed. This value increments as buffers are
used. Software should not use this register for determining where to remove received frames from the queue as it constantly changes as new frames are received. Software should instead work its way through the buffer descriptor queue
checking the used bits.
Receive buffer writes also comprise bursts of two words and, as with transmit buffer reads, it is recommended that bit 2 is
always written with zero to prevent a burst crossing a 1K boundary, in violation of section 3.6 of the AMBA specification.
• ADDR: Receive buffer queue pointer address
Written with the address of the start of the receive queue, reads as a pointer to the current buffer being used.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
625
34.6.6 Transmit Buffer Queue Pointer Register
Name:
EMAC_TBQP
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
–
0
–
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
This register points to the entry in the transmit buffer queue (descriptor list) currently being used. It is written with the start
location of the transmit buffer descriptor list. The lower order bits increment as buffers are used up and wrap to their original values after either 1024 buffers or when the wrap bit of the entry is set. This register can only be written when bit 3 in
the transmit status register is low.
As transmit buffer reads consist of bursts of two words, it is recommended that bit 2 is always written with zero to prevent a
burst crossing a 1K boundary, in violation of section 3.6 of the AMBA specification.
• ADDR: Transmit buffer queue pointer address
Written with the address of the start of the transmit queue, reads as a pointer to the first buffer of the frame being transmitted or about to be transmitted.
626
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.7 Receive Status Register
Name:
EMAC_RSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
OVR
1
REC
0
BNA
This register, when read, provides details of the status of a receive. Once read, individual bits may be cleared by writing 1
to them. It is not possible to set a bit to 1 by writing to the register.
• BNA: Buffer Not Available
An attempt was made to get a new buffer and the pointer indicated that it was owned by the processor. The DMA rereads
the pointer each time a new frame starts until a valid pointer is found. This bit is set at each attempt that fails even if it has
not had a successful pointer read since it has been cleared.
Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• REC: Frame Received
One or more frames have been received and placed in memory. Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
• OVR: Receive Overrun
The DMA block was unable to store the receive frame to memory, either because the bus was not granted in time or
because a not OK hresp(bus error) was returned. The buffer is recovered if this happens.
Cleared by writing a one to this bit.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
627
34.6.8 Interrupt Status Register
Name:
EMAC_ISR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
PTZ
12
PFR
11
HRESP
10
ROVR
9
–
8
–
7
TCOMP
6
TXERR
5
RLE
4
TUND
3
TXUBR
2
RXUBR
1
RCOMP
0
MFD
• MFD: Management Frame Done
The PHY maintenance register has completed its operation. Cleared on read.
• RCOMP: Receive Complete
A frame has been stored in memory. Cleared on read.
• RXUBR: Receive Used Bit Read
Set when a receive buffer descriptor is read with its used bit set. Cleared on read.
• TXUBR: Transmit Used Bit Read
Set when a transmit buffer descriptor is read with its used bit set. Cleared on read.
• TUND: Ethernet Transmit Buffer Underrun
The transmit DMA did not fetch frame data in time for it to be transmitted or hresp returned not OK. Also set if a used bit
is read mid-frame or when a new transmit queue pointer is written. Cleared on read.
• RLE: Retry Limit Exceeded
Cleared on read.
• TXERR: Transmit Error
Transmit buffers exhausted in mid-frame - transmit error. Cleared on read.
• TCOMP: Transmit Complete
Set when a frame has been transmitted. Cleared on read.
• ROVR: Receive Overrun
Set when the receive overrun status bit gets set. Cleared on read.
• HRESP: Hresp not OK
Set when the DMA block sees a bus error. Cleared on read.
• PFR: Pause Frame Received
Indicates a valid pause has been received. Cleared on a read.
628
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PTZ: Pause Time Zero
Set when the pause time register, 0x38 decrements to zero. Cleared on a read.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
629
34.6.9 Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
EMAC_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
PTZ
12
PFR
11
HRESP
10
ROVR
9
–
8
–
7
TCOMP
6
TXERR
5
RLE
4
TUND
3
TXUBR
2
RXUBR
1
RCOMP
0
MFD
• MFD: Management Frame sent
Enable management done interrupt.
• RCOMP: Receive Complete
Enable receive complete interrupt.
• RXUBR: Receive Used Bit Read
Enable receive used bit read interrupt.
• TXUBR: Transmit Used Bit Read
Enable transmit used bit read interrupt.
• TUND: Ethernet Transmit Buffer Underrun
Enable transmit underrun interrupt.
• RLE: Retry Limit Exceeded
Enable retry limit exceeded interrupt.
• TXERR
Enable transmit buffers exhausted in mid-frame interrupt.
• TCOMP: Transmit Complete
Enable transmit complete interrupt.
• ROVR: Receive Overrun
Enable receive overrun interrupt.
• HRESP: Hresp not OK
Enable Hresp not OK interrupt.
• PFR: Pause Frame Received
Enable pause frame received interrupt.
630
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PTZ: Pause Time Zero
Enable pause time zero interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
631
34.6.10 Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
EMAC_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
PTZ
12
PFR
11
HRESP
10
ROVR
9
–
8
–
7
TCOMP
6
TXERR
5
RLE
4
TUND
3
TXUBR
2
RXUBR
1
RCOMP
0
MFD
• MFD: Management Frame sent
Disable management done interrupt.
• RCOMP: Receive Complete
Disable receive complete interrupt.
• RXUBR: Receive Used Bit Read
Disable receive used bit read interrupt.
• TXUBR: Transmit Used Bit Read
Disable transmit used bit read interrupt.
• TUND: Ethernet Transmit Buffer Underrun
Disable transmit underrun interrupt.
• RLE: Retry Limit Exceeded
Disable retry limit exceeded interrupt.
• TXERR
Disable transmit buffers exhausted in mid-frame interrupt.
• TCOMP: Transmit Complete
Disable transmit complete interrupt.
• ROVR: Receive Overrun
Disable receive overrun interrupt.
• HRESP: Hresp not OK
Disable Hresp not OK interrupt.
• PFR: Pause Frame Received
Disable pause frame received interrupt.
632
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PTZ: Pause Time Zero
Disable pause time zero interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
633
34.6.11 Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
EMAC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
PTZ
12
PFR
11
HRESP
10
ROVR
9
–
8
–
7
TCOMP
6
TXERR
5
RLE
4
TUND
3
TXUBR
2
RXUBR
1
RCOMP
0
MFD
• MFD: Management Frame sent
Management done interrupt masked.
• RCOMP: Receive Complete
Receive complete interrupt masked.
• RXUBR: Receive Used Bit Read
Receive used bit read interrupt masked.
• TXUBR: Transmit Used Bit Read
Transmit used bit read interrupt masked.
• TUND: Ethernet Transmit Buffer Underrun
Transmit underrun interrupt masked.
• RLE: Retry Limit Exceeded
Retry limit exceeded interrupt masked.
• TXERR
Transmit buffers exhausted in mid-frame interrupt masked.
• TCOMP: Transmit Complete
Transmit complete interrupt masked.
• ROVR: Receive Overrun
Receive overrun interrupt masked.
• HRESP: Hresp not OK
Hresp not OK interrupt masked.
• PFR: Pause Frame Received
Pause frame received interrupt masked.
634
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
• PTZ: Pause Time Zero
Pause time zero interrupt masked.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
635
34.6.12 PHY Maintenance Register
Name:
EMAC_MAN
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
SOF
28
27
26
RW
23
PHYA
22
15
14
21
13
25
24
PHYA
20
REGA
19
18
17
16
CODE
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
DATA
7
6
5
4
DATA
• DATA
For a write operation this is written with the data to be written to the PHY.
After a read operation this contains the data read from the PHY.
• CODE:
Must be written to 10. Reads as written.
• REGA: Register Address
Specifies the register in the PHY to access.
• PHYA: PHY Address
• RW: Read/Write
10 is read; 01 is write. Any other value is an invalid PHY management frame
• SOF: Start of frame
Must be written 01 for a valid frame.
636
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.13 Pause Time Register
Name:
EMAC_PTR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PTIME
7
6
5
4
PTIME
• PTIME: Pause Time
Stores the current value of the pause time register which is decremented every 512 bit times.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
637
34.6.14 Hash Register Bottom
Name:
EMAC_HRB
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR:
Bits 31:0 of the hash address register. See “Hash Addressing” on page 611.
638
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.15 Hash Register Top
Name:
EMAC_HRT
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR:
Bits 63:32 of the hash address register. See “Hash Addressing” on page 611.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
639
34.6.16 Specific Address 1 Bottom Register
Name:
EMAC_SA1B
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
Least significant bits of the destination address. Bit zero indicates whether the address is multicast or unicast and corresponds to the least significant bit of the first byte received.
640
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.17 Specific Address 1 Top Register
Name:
EMAC_SA1T
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
The most significant bits of the destination address, that is bits 47 to 32.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
641
34.6.18 Specific Address 2 Bottom Register
Name:
EMAC_SA2B
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
Least significant bits of the destination address. Bit zero indicates whether the address is multicast or unicast and corresponds to the least significant bit of the first byte received.
642
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.19 Specific Address 2 Top Register
Name:
EMAC_SA2T
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
The most significant bits of the destination address, that is bits 47 to 32.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
643
34.6.20 Specific Address 3 Bottom Register
Name:
EMAC_SA3B
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
Least significant bits of the destination address. Bit zero indicates whether the address is multicast or unicast and corresponds to the least significant bit of the first byte received.
644
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.21 Specific Address 3 Top Register
Name:
EMAC_SA3T
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
The most significant bits of the destination address, that is bits 47 to 32.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
645
34.6.22 Specific Address 4 Bottom Register
Name:
EMAC_SA4B
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
Least significant bits of the destination address. Bit zero indicates whether the address is multicast or unicast and corresponds to the least significant bit of the first byte received.
646
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.23 Specific Address 4 Top Register
Name:
EMAC_SA4T
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
7
6
5
4
ADDR
• ADDR
The most significant bits of the destination address, that is bits 47 to 32.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
647
34.6.24 Type ID Checking Register
Name:
EMAC_TID
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TID
7
6
5
4
TID
• TID: Type ID checking
For use in comparisons with received frames TypeID/Length field.
648
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.25 User Input/Output Register
Name:
EMAC_USRIO
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
CLKEN
0
RMII
• RMII
When set, this bit enables the RMII operation mode. When reset, it selects the MII mode.
• CLKEN
When set, this bit enables the transceiver input clock.
Setting this bit to 0 reduces power consumption when the treasurer is not used.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
649
34.6.26 EMAC Statistic Registers
These registers reset to zero on a read and stick at all ones when they count to their maximum value. They should be read
frequently enough to prevent loss of data. The receive statistics registers are only incremented when the receive enable bit
is set in the network control register. To write to these registers, bit 7 must be set in the network control register. The statistics register block contains the following registers.
650
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.1 Pause Frames Received Register
Name:
EMAC_PFR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FROK
7
6
5
4
FROK
• FROK: Pause Frames received OK
A 16-bit register counting the number of good pause frames received. A good frame has a length of 64 to 1518 (1536 if bit
8 set in network configuration register) and has no FCS, alignment or receive symbol errors.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
651
34.6.26.2 Frames Transmitted OK Register
Name:
EMAC_FTO
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FTOK
15
14
13
12
FTOK
7
6
5
4
FTOK
• FTOK: Frames Transmitted OK
A 24-bit register counting the number of frames successfully transmitted, i.e., no underrun and not too many retries.
652
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.3 Single Collision Frames Register
Name:
EMAC_SCF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
SCF
7
6
5
4
SCF
• SCF: Single Collision Frames
A 16-bit register counting the number of frames experiencing a single collision before being successfully transmitted, i.e.,
no underrun.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
653
34.6.26.4 Multicollision Frames Register
Name:
EMAC_MCF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
MCF
7
6
5
4
MCF
• MCF: Multicollision Frames
A 16-bit register counting the number of frames experiencing between two and fifteen collisions prior to being successfully
transmitted, i.e., no underrun and not too many retries.
654
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.5 Frames Received OK Register
Name:
EMAC_FRO
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FROK
15
14
13
12
FROK
7
6
5
4
FROK
• FROK: Frames Received OK
A 24-bit register counting the number of good frames received, i.e., address recognized and successfully copied to memory. A good frame is of length 64 to 1518 bytes (1536 if bit 8 set in network configuration register) and has no FCS,
alignment or receive symbol errors.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
655
34.6.26.6 Frames Check Sequence Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_FCSE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FCSE
• FCSE: Frame Check Sequence Errors
An 8-bit register counting frames that are an integral number of bytes, have bad CRC and are between 64 and 1518 bytes
in length (1536 if bit 8 set in network configuration register). This register is also incremented if a symbol error is detected
and the frame is of valid length and has an integral number of bytes.
656
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.7 Alignment Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_ALE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALE
• ALE: Alignment Errors
An 8-bit register counting frames that are not an integral number of bytes long and have bad CRC when their length is truncated to an integral number of bytes and are between 64 and 1518 bytes in length (1536 if bit 8 set in network configuration
register). This register is also incremented if a symbol error is detected and the frame is of valid length and does not have
an integral number of bytes.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
657
34.6.26.8 Deferred Transmission Frames Register
Name:
EMAC_DTF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
DTF
7
6
5
4
DTF
• DTF: Deferred Transmission Frames
A 16-bit register counting the number of frames experiencing deferral due to carrier sense being active on their first attempt
at transmission. Frames involved in any collision are not counted nor are frames that experienced a transmit underrun.
658
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.9 Late Collisions Register
Name:
EMAC_LCOL
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LCOL
• LCOL: Late Collisions
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames that experience a collision after the slot time (512 bits) has expired. A late
collision is counted twice; i.e., both as a collision and a late collision.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
659
34.6.26.10 Excessive Collisions Register
Name:
EMAC_EXCOL
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EXCOL
• EXCOL: Excessive Collisions
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames that failed to be transmitted because they experienced 16 collisions.
660
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.11 Transmit Underrun Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_TUND
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TUND
• TUND: Transmit Underruns
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames not transmitted due to a transmit DMA underrun. If this register is incremented, then no other statistics register is incremented.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
661
34.6.26.12 Carrier Sense Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_CSE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSE
• CSE: Carrier Sense Errors
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames transmitted where carrier sense was not seen during transmission or
where carrier sense was deasserted after being asserted in a transmit frame without collision (no underrun). Only incremented in half-duplex mode. The only effect of a carrier sense error is to increment this register. The behavior of the other
statistics registers is unaffected by the detection of a carrier sense error.
662
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.13 Receive Resource Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_RRE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RRE
7
6
5
4
RRE
• RRE: Receive Resource Errors
A 16-bit register counting the number of frames that were address matched but could not be copied to memory because no
receive buffer was available.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
663
34.6.26.14 Receive Overrun Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_ROVR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ROVR
• ROVR: Receive Overrun
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames that are address recognized but were not copied to memory due to a
receive DMA overrun.
664
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.15 Receive Symbol Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_RSE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RSE
• RSE: Receive Symbol Errors
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames that had rx_er asserted during reception. Receive symbol errors are also
counted as an FCS or alignment error if the frame is between 64 and 1518 bytes in length (1536 if bit 8 is set in the network
configuration register). If the frame is larger, it is recorded as a jabber error.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
665
34.6.26.16 Excessive Length Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_ELE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EXL
• EXL: Excessive Length Errors
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames received exceeding 1518 bytes (1536 if bit 8 set in network configuration
register) in length but do not have either a CRC error, an alignment error nor a receive symbol error.
666
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.17 Receive Jabbers Register
Name:
EMAC_RJA
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RJB
• RJB: Receive Jabbers
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames received exceeding 1518 bytes (1536 if bit 8 set in network configuration
register) in length and have either a CRC error, an alignment error or a receive symbol error.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
667
34.6.26.18 Undersize Frames Register
Name:
EMAC_USF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
USF
• USF: Undersize frames
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames received less than 64 bytes in length but do not have either a CRC error,
an alignment error or a receive symbol error.
668
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
34.6.26.19 SQE Test Errors Register
Name:
EMAC_STE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SQER
• SQER: SQE test errors
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames where col was not asserted within 96 bit times (an interframe gap) of
tx_en being deasserted in half duplex mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
669
34.6.26.20 Received Length Field Mismatch Register
Name:
EMAC_RLE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RLFM
• RLFM: Receive Length Field Mismatch
An 8-bit register counting the number of frames received that have a measured length shorter than that extracted from its
length field. Checking is enabled through bit 16 of the network configuration register. Frames containing a type ID in bytes
13 and 14 (i.e., length/type ID ≥ 0x0600) are not counted as length field errors, neither are excessive length frames.
670
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.
USB Device Port (UDP)
35.1
Description
The USB Device Port (UDP) is compliant with the Universal Serial Bus (USB) V2.0 full-speed device specification.
Each endpoint can be configured in one of several USB transfer types. It can be associated with one or two banks
of a dual-port RAM used to store the current data payload. If two banks are used, one DPR bank is read or written
by the processor, while the other is read or written by the USB device peripheral. This feature is mandatory for
isochronous endpoints. Thus the device maintains the maximum bandwidth (1 Mbytes/s) by working with
endpoints with two banks of DPR.
Table 35-1.
USB Endpoint Description
Endpoint Number
Mnemonic
Dual-Bank
Max. Endpoint Size
Endpoint Type
0
EP0
No
64
Control/Bulk/Interrupt
1
EP1
Yes
64
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
2
EP2
Yes
64
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
3
EP3
No
64
Control/Bulk/Interrupt
4
EP4
Yes
512
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
5
EP5
Yes
512
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
Suspend and resume are automatically detected by the USB device, which notifies the processor by raising an
interrupt. Depending on the product, an external signal can be used to send a wake up to the USB host controller.
35.2
Embedded Characteristics
USB V2.0 full-speed compliant, 12 Mbits per second
Embedded USB V2.0 full-speed transceiver
Embedded 2,432-byte dual-port RAM for endpoints
Suspend/Resume logic
Ping-pong mode (two memory banks) for isochronous and bulk endpoints
Six general-purpose endpoints
̶
Endpoint 0 and 3: 64 bytes, no ping-pong mode
̶
Endpoint 1 and 2: 64 bytes, ping-pong mode
̶
Endpoint 4 and 5: 512 bytes, ping-pong mode
Embedded pad pull-up
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
671
35.3
Block Diagram
Figure 35-1.
Block Diagram
Atmel Bridge
MCK
APB
to
MCU
Bus
UDPCK
USB Device
txoen
U
s
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
udp_int
external_resume
W
r
a
p
p
e
r
Dual
Port
RAM
FIFO
W
r
a
p
p
e
r
eopn
Serial
Interface
Engine
12 MHz
SIE
txd
rxdm
Embedded
USB
Transceiver
DP
DM
rxd
rxdp
Suspend/Resume Logic
Master Clock
Domain
Recovered 12 MHz
Domain
Access to the UDP is via the APB bus interface. Read and write to the data FIFO are done by reading and writing
8-bit values to APB registers.
The UDP peripheral requires two clocks: one peripheral clock used by the Master Clock domain (MCK) and a 48
MHz clock (UDPCK) used by the 12 MHz domain.
A USB 2.0 full-speed pad is embedded and controlled by the Serial Interface Engine (SIE).
The signal external_resume is optional. It allows the UDP peripheral to wake up once in system mode. The host is
then notified that the device asks for a resume. This optional feature must be also negotiated with the host during
the enumeration.
672
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.4
Product Dependencies
For further details on the USB Device hardware implementation, see the specific Product Properties document.
The USB physical transceiver is integrated into the product. The bidirectional differential signals DP and DM are
available from the product boundary.
One I/O line may be used by the application to check that VBUS is still available from the host. Self-powered
devices may use this entry to be notified that the host has been powered off. In this case, the pullup on DP must be
disabled in order to prevent feeding current to the host. The application should disconnect the transceiver, then
remove the pullup.
35.4.1 I/O Lines
DP and DM are not controlled by any PIO controllers. The embedded USB physical transceiver is controlled by the
USB device peripheral.
To reserve an I/O line to check VBUS, the programmer must first program the PIO controller to assign this I/O in
input PIO mode.
35.4.2 Power Management
The USB device peripheral requires a 48 MHz clock. This clock must be generated by a PLL with an accuracy of
± 0.25%.
Thus, the USB device receives two clocks from the Power Management Controller (PMC): the master clock, MCK,
used to drive the peripheral user interface, and the UDPCK, used to interface with the bus USB signals (recovered
12 MHz domain).
WARNING: The UDP peripheral clock in the Power Management Controller (PMC) must be enabled before any
read/write operations to the UDP registers including the UDP_TXCV register.
35.4.3 Interrupt
The USB device interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC).
Handling the USB device interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the UDP.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
673
35.5
Typical Connection
Figure 35-2.
Board Schematic to Interface Device Peripheral
PIO
5V Bus Monitoring
27 K
47 K
REXT
DDM
2
1
3
Type B 4
Connector
DDP
REXT
35.5.1 USB Device Transceiver
The USB device transceiver is embedded in the product. A few discrete components are required as follows:
the application detects all device states as defined in chapter 9 of the USB specification;
to reduce power consumption the host is disconnected
for line termination.
̶
VBUS monitoring
35.5.2 VBUS Monitoring
VBUS monitoring is required to detect host connection. VBUS monitoring is done using a standard PIO with
internal pullup disabled. When the host is switched off, it should be considered as a disconnect, the pullup must be
disabled in order to prevent powering the host through the pull-up resistor.
When the host is disconnected and the transceiver is enabled, then DDP and DDM are floating. This may lead to
over consumption. A solution is to enable the integrated pulldown by disabling the transceiver (TXVDIS = 1) and
then remove the pullup (PUON = 0).
A termination serial resistor must be connected to DP and DM. The resistor value is defined in the electrical
specification of the product (REXT).
674
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.6
Functional Description
35.6.1 USB V2.0 Full-speed Introduction
The USB V2.0 full-speed provides communication services between host and attached USB devices. Each device
is offered with a collection of communication flows (pipes) associated with each endpoint. Software on the host
communicates with a USB device through a set of communication flows.
Figure 35-3.
Example of USB V2.0 Full-speed Communication Control
USB Host V2.0
Software Client 1
Software Client 2
Data Flow: Control Transfer
EP0
Data Flow: Isochronous In Transfer
USB Device 2.0
EP1 Block 1
Data Flow: Isochronous Out Transfer
EP2
Data Flow: Control Transfer
EP0
Data Flow: Bulk In Transfer
USB Device 2.0
EP4 Block 2
Data Flow: Bulk Out Transfer
EP5
USB Device endpoint configuration requires that
in the first instance Control Transfer must be EP0.
The Control Transfer endpoint EP0 is always used when a USB device is first configured (USB v. 2.0 specifications).
35.6.1.1 USB V2.0 Full-speed Transfer Types
A communication flow is carried over one of four transfer types defined by the USB device.
Table 35-2.
USB Communication Flow
Transfer
Direction
Bandwidth
Supported Endpoint Size
Error Detection
Retrying
Bidirectional
Not guaranteed
8, 16, 32, 64
Yes
Automatic
Isochronous
Unidirectional
Guaranteed
512
Yes
No
Interrupt
Unidirectional
Not guaranteed
≤ 64
Yes
Yes
Bulk
Unidirectional
Not guaranteed
8, 16, 32, 64
Yes
Yes
Control
35.6.1.2 USB Bus Transactions
Each transfer results in one or more transactions over the USB bus. There are three kinds of transactions flowing
across the bus in packets:
1.
Setup Transaction
2.
Data IN Transaction
3.
Data OUT Transaction
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
675
35.6.1.3 USB Transfer Event Definitions
As indicated below, transfers are sequential events carried out on the USB bus.
Table 35-3.
USB Transfer Events
Transfer
Direction
Type
Transaction
Setup transaction → Data IN transactions → Status OUT transaction
CONTROL (bidirectional)
Setup transaction → Data OUT transactions → Status IN transaction
Control(1)(3)
Setup transaction → Status IN transaction
Bulk IN
IN (device toward host)
Data IN transaction → Data IN transaction
Interrupt IN
Isochronous IN
(2)
Bulk OUT
OUT (host toward device)
Data OUT transaction → Data OUT transaction
Interrupt OUT
Isochronous OUT(2)
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
Control transfer must use endpoints with no ping-pong attributes.
Isochronous transfers must use endpoints with ping-pong attributes.
Control transfers can be aborted using a stall handshake.
A status transaction is a special type of host-to-device transaction used only in a control transfer. The control
transfer must be performed using endpoints with no ping-pong attributes. According to the control sequence (read
or write), the USB device sends or receives a status transaction.
Figure 35-4.
Control Read and Write Sequences
Setup Stage
Control Read
Setup TX
Setup Stage
Control Write
No Data
Control
Notes:
1.
2.
676
Setup TX
Status Stage
Data Stage
Data OUT TX
Data OUT TX
Data Stage
Data IN TX
Setup Stage
Status Stage
Setup TX
Status IN TX
Data IN TX
Status IN TX
Status Stage
Status OUT TX
During the Status IN stage, the host waits for a zero length packet (Data IN transaction with no data) from the
device using DATA1 PID. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0, for more
information on the protocol layer.
During the Status OUT stage, the host emits a zero length packet to the device (Data OUT transaction with no
data).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.6.2 Handling Transactions with USB 2.0 Device Peripheral
35.6.2.1 Setup Transaction
Setup is a special type of host-to-device transaction used during control transfers. Control transfers must be
performed using endpoints with no ping-pong attributes. A setup transaction needs to be handled as soon as
possible by the firmware. It is used to transmit requests from the host to the device. These requests are then
handled by the USB device and may require more arguments. The arguments are sent to the device by a Data
OUT transaction which follows the setup transaction. These requests may also return data. The data is carried out
to the host by the next Data IN transaction which follows the setup transaction. A status transaction ends the
control transfer.
When a setup transfer is received by the USB endpoint:
The USB device automatically acknowledges the setup packet
RXSETUP is set in the UDP_CSRx
An endpoint interrupt is generated while the RXSETUP is not cleared. This interrupt is carried out to the
microcontroller if interrupts are enabled for this endpoint.
Thus, firmware must detect the RXSETUP polling the UDP_CSRx or catching an interrupt, read the setup packet
in the FIFO, then clear the RXSETUP. RXSETUP cannot be cleared before the setup packet has been read in the
FIFO. Otherwise, the USB device would accept the next Data OUT transfer and overwrite the setup packet in the
FIFO.
Figure 35-5.
Setup Transaction Followed by a Data OUT Transaction
Setup Received
USB
Bus Packets
Setup
PID
Data Setup
RXSETUP Flag
Setup Handled by Firmware
ACK
PID
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT
NAK
PID
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT
ACK
PID
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB Device
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB
Device Peripheral
RX_Data_BKO
(UDP_CSRx)
FIFO (DPR)
Content
Data Out Received
XX
Data Setup
XX
Data OUT
35.6.2.2 Data IN Transaction
Data IN transactions are used in control, isochronous, bulk and interrupt transfers and conduct the transfer of data
from the device to the host. Data IN transactions in isochronous transfer must be done using endpoints with pingpong attributes.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
677
35.6.2.3 Using Endpoints Without Ping-pong Attributes
To perform a Data IN transaction using a non ping-pong endpoint:
1.
The application checks if it is possible to write in the FIFO by polling TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s
UDP_CSRx (TXPKTRDY must be cleared).
2.
The application writes the first packet of data to be sent in the endpoint’s FIFO, writing zero or more byte
values in the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
3.
The application notifies the USB peripheral it has finished by setting the TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s
UDP_CSRx.
4.
The application is notified that the endpoint’s FIFO has been released by the USB device when TXCOMP in
the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx has been set. Then an interrupt for the corresponding endpoint is pending while
TXCOMP is set.
5.
The microcontroller writes the second packet of data to be sent in the endpoint’s FIFO, writing zero or more
byte values in the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
6.
The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral it has finished by setting the TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s
UDP_CSRx.
7.
The application clears the TXCOMP in the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
After the last packet has been sent, the application must clear TXCOMP once this has been set.
TXCOMP is set by the USB device when it has received an ACK PID signal for the Data IN packet. An interrupt is
pending while TXCOMP is set.
Warning: TX_COMP must be cleared after TX_PKTRDY has been set.
Note:
Figure 35-6.
Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0, for more information on the Data IN protocol
layer.
Data IN Transfer for Non Ping-pong Endpoint
Prevous Data IN TX
USB Bus Packets
Data IN
PID
Microcontroller Load Data in FIFO
Data IN 1
ACK
PID
Data IN
PID
NAK
PID
Data is Sent on USB Bus
Data IN
PID
Data IN 2
ACK
PID
TXPKTRDY Flag
(UDP_CSRx)
Set by the firmware
Cleared by Hw
Cleared by Hw
Set by the firmware
Interrupt
Pending
Interrupt Pending
TXCOMP Flag
(UDP_CSRx)
Payload in FIFO
Cleared by Firmware
DPR access by the firmware
FIFO (DPR)
Content
Data IN 1
Load In Progress
DPR access by the hardware
Cleared by
Firmware
Data IN 2
35.6.2.4 Using Endpoints With Ping-pong Attribute
The use of an endpoint with ping-pong attributes is necessary during isochronous transfer. This also allows
handling the maximum bandwidth defined in the USB specification during bulk transfer. To be able to guarantee a
constant or the maximum bandwidth, the microcontroller must prepare the next data payload to be sent while the
current one is being sent by the USB device. Thus two banks of memory are used. While one is available for the
microcontroller, the other one is locked by the USB device.
678
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 35-7.
Bank Swapping Data IN Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoints
Microcontroller
1st Data Payload
USB Device
Write
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
USB Bus
Read
Read and Write at the Same Time
2nd Data Payload
Data IN Packet
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
2nd Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
3rd Data Payload
3rd Data Payload
1st Data Payload
Data IN Packet
Data IN Packet
When using a ping-pong endpoint, the following procedures are required to perform Data IN transactions:
1.
The microcontroller checks if it is possible to write in the FIFO by polling TXPKTRDY to be cleared in the
endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
2.
The microcontroller writes the first data payload to be sent in the FIFO (Bank 0), writing zero or more byte
values in the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
3.
The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral it has finished writing in Bank 0 of the FIFO by setting the
TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
4.
Without waiting for TXPKTRDY to be cleared, the microcontroller writes the second data payload to be sent
in the FIFO (Bank 1), writing zero or more byte values in the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
5.
The microcontroller is notified that the first Bank has been released by the USB device when TXCOMP in the
endpoint’s UDP_CSRx is set. An interrupt is pending while TXCOMP is being set.
6.
Once the microcontroller has received TXCOMP for the first Bank, it notifies the USB device that it has
prepared the second Bank to be sent, raising TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
7.
At this step, Bank 0 is available and the microcontroller can prepare a third data payload to be sent.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
679
Figure 35-8.
Data IN Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoint
Microcontroller
Load Data IN Bank 0
USB Bus
Packets
Data IN
PID
TXPKTRDY Flag
(UDP_MCSRx)
Microcontroller Load Data IN Bank 1
USB Device Send Bank 0
Microcontroller Load Data IN Bank 0
USB Device Send Bank 1
Data IN
PID
ACK
PID
Data IN
Cleared by USB Device,
Data Payload Fully Transmitted
Set by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO Bank 0
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 1
ACK
PID
Set by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO Bank 1
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB
Device
TXCOMP Flag
(UDP_CSRx)
FIFO (DPR) Written by
Microcontroller
Bank 0
Data IN
Set by USB Device
Interrupt Cleared by Firmware
Read by USB Device
Written by
Microcontroller
Written by
Microcontroller
Read by USB Device
Warning: There is software critical path due to the fact that once the second bank is filled, the driver has to wait for
TX_COMP to set TX_PKTRDY. If the delay between receiving TX_COMP is set and TX_PKTRDY is set too long,
some Data IN packets may be NACKed, reducing the bandwidth.
Warning: TX_COMP must be cleared after TX_PKTRDY has been set.
35.6.2.5 Data OUT Transaction
Data OUT transactions are used in control, isochronous, bulk and interrupt transfers and conduct the transfer of
data from the host to the device. Data OUT transactions in isochronous transfers must be done using endpoints
with ping-pong attributes.
35.6.2.6 Data OUT Transaction Without Ping-pong Attributes
To perform a Data OUT transaction, using a non ping-pong endpoint:
680
1.
The host generates a Data OUT packet.
2.
This packet is received by the USB device endpoint. While the FIFO associated to this endpoint is being
used by the microcontroller, a NAK PID is returned to the host. Once the FIFO is available, data are written
to the FIFO by the USB device and an ACK is automatically carried out to the host.
3.
The microcontroller is notified that the USB device has received a data payload polling RX_DATA_BK0 in the
endpoint’s UDP_CSRx. An interrupt is pending for this endpoint while RX_DATA_BK0 is set.
4.
The number of bytes available in the FIFO is made available by reading RXBYTECNT in the endpoint’s
UDP_CSRx.
5.
The microcontroller carries out data received from the endpoint’s memory to its memory. Data received is
available by reading the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
6.
The microcontroller notifies the USB device that it has finished the transfer by clearing RX_DATA_BK0 in the
endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
7.
A new Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB device.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 35-9.
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT Transfer for Non Ping-pong Endpoints
Host Sends Data Payload
Microcontroller Transfers Data
Host Sends the Next Data Payload
Data OUT
PID
ACK
PID
Data OUT 1
RX_DATA_BK0
(UDP_CSRx)
Data OUT2
PID
Data OUT2
Host Resends the Next Data Payload
NAK
PID
Data OUT2
ACK
PID
Interrupt Pending
Cleared by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO
Set by USB Device
FIFO (DPR)
Content
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT 1
Written by USB Device
Data OUT 1
Data OUT 2
Microcontroller Read
Written by USB Device
An interrupt is pending while the flag RX_DATA_BK0 is set. Memory transfer between the USB device, the FIFO
and microcontroller memory can not be done after RX_DATA_BK0 has been cleared. Otherwise, the USB device
would accept the next Data OUT transfer and overwrite the current Data OUT packet in the FIFO.
35.6.2.7 Using Endpoints With Ping-pong Attributes
During isochronous transfer, using an endpoint with ping-pong attributes is obligatory. To be able to guarantee a
constant bandwidth, the microcontroller must read the previous data payload sent by the host, while the current
data payload is received by the USB device. Thus two banks of memory are used. While one is available for the
microcontroller, the other one is locked by the USB device.
Figure 35-10. Bank Swapping in Data OUT Transfers for Ping-pong Endpoints
Microcontroller
USB Device
Write
USB Bus
Read
Data IN Packet
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
1st Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Data IN Packet
nd
2 Data Payload
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
3rd Data Payload
Write and Read at the Same Time
1st Data Payload
2nd Data Payload
Data IN Packet
3rd Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
681
When using a ping-pong endpoint, the following procedures are required to perform Data OUT transactions:
1.
The host generates a Data OUT packet.
2.
This packet is received by the USB device endpoint. It is written in the endpoint’s FIFO Bank 0.
3.
The USB device sends an ACK PID packet to the host. The host can immediately send a second Data OUT
packet. It is accepted by the device and copied to FIFO Bank 1.
4.
The microcontroller is notified that the USB device has received a data payload, polling RX_DATA_BK0 in
the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx. An interrupt is pending for this endpoint while RX_DATA_BK0 is set.
5.
The number of bytes available in the FIFO is made available by reading RXBYTECNT in the endpoint’s
UDP_CSRx.
6.
The microcontroller transfers out data received from the endpoint’s memory to the microcontroller’s memory.
Data received is made available by reading the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
7.
The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral device that it has finished the transfer by clearing
RX_DATA_BK0 in the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
8.
A third Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB peripheral device and copied in the FIFO Bank 0.
9.
If a second Data OUT packet has been received, the microcontroller is notified by the flag RX_DATA_BK1
set in the endpoint’s UDP_CSRx. An interrupt is pending for this endpoint while RX_DATA_BK1 is set.
10. The microcontroller transfers out data received from the endpoint’s memory to the microcontroller’s memory.
Data received is available by reading the endpoint’s UDP_FDRx.
11. The microcontroller notifies the USB device it has finished the transfer by clearing RX_DATA_BK1 in the
endpoint’s UDP_CSRx.
12. A fourth Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB device and copied in the FIFO Bank 0.
Figure 35-11. Data OUT Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoint
Microcontroller Reads Data 1 in Bank 0,
Host Sends Second Data Payload
Host Sends First Data Payload
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT
PID
RX_DATA_BK0 Flag
(UDP_CSRx)
Data OUT 1
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT 2
Set by USB Device,
Data Payload Written
in FIFO Endpoint Bank 0
ACK
PID
Data OUT 3
A
P
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB Device,
Data Payload Written
in FIFO Endpoint Bank 1
Interrupt Pending
Data OUT1
Data OUT 1
Data OUT 3
Write by USB Device
Read By Microcontroller
Write In Progress
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 1
Data OUT 2
Write by USB Device
Note: An interrupt is pending while the RX_DATA_BK0 or RX_DATA_BK1 flag is set.
682
Data OUT
PID
Cleared by Firmware
Interrupt Pending
RX_DATA_BK1 Flag
(UDP_CSRx)
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 0
ACK
PID
Microcontroller Reads Data2 in Bank 1,
Host Sends Third Data Payload
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Data OUT 2
Read By Microcontroller
Warning: When RX_DATA_BK0 and RX_DATA_BK1 are both set, there is no way to determine which one to
clear first. Thus the software must keep an internal counter to be sure to clear alternatively RX_DATA_BK0 then
RX_DATA_BK1. This situation may occur when the software application is busy elsewhere and the two banks are
filled by the USB host. Once the application comes back to the USB driver, the two flags are set.
35.6.2.8 Stall Handshake
A stall handshake can be used in one of two distinct occasions. (For more information on the stall handshake, refer
to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0.)
A functional stall is used when the halt feature associated with the endpoint is set. (Refer to Chapter 9 of the
Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0, for more information on the halt feature.)
To abort the current request, a protocol stall is used, but uniquely with control transfer.
The following procedure generates a stall packet:
1.
The microcontroller sets the FORCESTALL flag in the UDP_CSRx endpoint’s register.
2.
The host receives the stall packet.
3.
The microcontroller is notified that the device has sent the stall by polling the STALLSENT to be set. An
endpoint interrupt is pending while STALLSENT is set. The microcontroller must clear STALLSENT to clear
the interrupt.
When a setup transaction is received after a stall handshake, STALLSENT must be cleared in order to prevent
interrupts due to STALLSENT being set.
Figure 35-12. Stall Handshake (Data IN Transfer)
USB Bus
Packets
Data IN PID
Stall PID
Cleared by Firmware
FORCESTALL
Set by Firmware
Interrupt Pending
Cleared by Firmware
STALLSENT
Set by
USB Device
Figure 35-13. Stall Handshake (Data OUT Transfer)
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT PID
Data OUT
Stall PID
Set by Firmware
FORCESTALL
Interrupt Pending
STALLSENT
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB Device
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
683
35.6.3 Controlling Device States
A USB device has several possible states. Refer to Chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0.
Figure 35-14. USB Device State Diagram
Attached
Hub Reset
or
Deconfigured
Hub
Configured
Bus Inactive
Suspended
Powered
Bus Activity
Power
Interruption
Reset
Bus Inactive
Suspended
Default
Bus Activity
Reset
Address
Assigned
Bus Inactive
Suspended
Address
Bus Activity
Device
Deconfigured
Device
Configured
Bus Inactive
Configured
Suspended
Bus Activity
Movement from one state to another depends on the USB bus state or on standard requests sent through control
transactions via the default endpoint (endpoint 0).
After a period of bus inactivity, the USB device enters Suspend Mode. Accepting Suspend/Resume requests from
the USB host is mandatory. Constraints in Suspend Mode are very strict for bus-powered applications; devices
may not consume more than 500 µA on the USB bus.
While in Suspend Mode, the host may wake up a device by sending a resume signal (bus activity) or a USB device
may send a wake up request to the host, e.g., waking up a PC by moving a USB mouse.
The wake up feature is not mandatory for all devices and must be negotiated with the host.
35.6.3.1 Not Powered State
Self powered devices can detect 5V VBUS using a PIO as described in the typical connection section. When the
device is not connected to a host, device power consumption can be reduced by disabling MCK for the UDP,
disabling UDPCK and disabling the transceiver. DDP and DDM lines are pulled down by 330 KΩ resistors.
684
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.6.3.2 Entering Attached State
When no device is connected, the USB DP and DM signals are tied to GND by 15 KΩ pull-down resistors
integrated in the hub downstream ports. When a device is attached to a hub downstream port, the device connects
a 1.5 KΩ pull-up resistor on DP. The USB bus line goes into IDLE state, DP is pulled up by the device 1.5 KΩ
resistor to 3.3V and DM is pulled down by the 15 KΩ resistor of the host. To enable integrated pullup, the PUON bit
in the UDP_TXVC register must be set.
Warning: To write to the UDP_TXVC register, MCK clock must be enabled on the UDP. This is done in the Power
Management Controller.
After pullup connection, the device enters the powered state. In this state, the UDPCK and MCK must be enabled
in the Power Management Controller. The transceiver can remain disabled.
35.6.3.3 From Powered State to Default State
After its connection to a USB host, the USB device waits for an end-of-bus reset. The unmaskable flag
ENDBUSRES is set in the UDP_ISR and an interrupt is triggered.
Once the ENDBUSRES interrupt has been triggered, the device enters Default State. In this state, the UDP
software must:
Enable the default endpoint, setting the EPEDS flag in the UDP_CSR[0] and, optionally, enabling the
interrupt for endpoint 0 by writing 1 to the UDP_IER. The enumeration then begins by a control transfer.
Configure the interrupt mask register which has been reset by the USB reset detection
Enable the transceiver clearing the TXVDIS flag in the UDP_TXVC register.
In this state UDPCK and MCK must be enabled.
Warning: Each time an ENDBUSRES interrupt is triggered, the Interrupt Mask Register and UDP_CSR registers
have been reset.
35.6.3.4 From Default State to Address State
After a set address standard device request, the USB host peripheral enters the address state.
Warning: Before the device enters in address state, it must achieve the Status IN transaction of the control
transfer, i.e., the UDP device sets its new address once the TXCOMP flag in the UDP_CSR[0] has been received
and cleared.
To move to address state, the driver software sets the FADDEN flag in the UDP_GLB_STAT register, sets its new
address, and sets the FEN bit in the UDP_FADDR.
35.6.3.5 From Address State to Configured State
Once a valid Set Configuration standard request has been received and acknowledged, the device enables
endpoints corresponding to the current configuration. This is done by setting the EPEDS and EPTYPE fields in the
UDP_CSRx registers and, optionally, enabling corresponding interrupts in the UDP_IER.
35.6.3.6 Entering in Suspend State
When a Suspend (no bus activity on the USB bus) is detected, the RXSUSP signal in the UDP_ISR is set. This
triggers an interrupt if the corresponding bit is set in the UDP_IMR. This flag is cleared by writing to the UDP_ICR.
Then the device enters Suspend Mode.
In this state bus powered devices must drain less than 500 µA from the 5V VBUS. As an example, the
microcontroller switches to slow clock, disables the PLL and main oscillator, and goes into Idle Mode. It may also
switch off other devices on the board.
The USB device peripheral clocks can be switched off. Resume event is asynchronously detected. MCK and
UDPCK can be switched off in the Power Management controller and the USB transceiver can be disabled by
setting the TXVDIS field in the UDP_TXVC register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
685
Warning: Read, write operations to the UDP registers are allowed only if MCK is enabled for the UDP peripheral.
Switching off MCK for the UDP peripheral must be one of the last operations after writing to the UDP_TXVC and
acknowledging the RXSUSP.
35.6.3.7 Receiving a Host Resume
In suspend mode, a resume event on the USB bus line is detected asynchronously, transceiver and clocks are
disabled (however the pullup shall not be removed).
Once the resume is detected on the bus, the WAKEUP signal in the UDP_ISR is set. It may generate an interrupt
if the corresponding bit in the UDP_IMR is set. This interrupt may be used to wake up the core, enable PLL and
main oscillators and configure clocks.
Warning: Read, write operations to the UDP registers are allowed only if MCK is enabled for the UDP peripheral.
MCK for the UDP must be enabled before clearing the WAKEUP bit in the UDP_ICR and clearing TXVDIS in the
UDP_TXVC register.
35.6.3.8 Sending a Device Remote Wakeup
In Suspend state it is possible to wake up the host sending an external resume.
The device must wait at least 5 ms after being entered in suspend before sending an external resume.
The device has 10 ms from the moment it starts to drain current and it forces a K state to resume the host.
The device must force a K state from 1 to 15 ms to resume the host
To force a K state to the bus (DM at 3.3V and DP tied to GND), it is possible to use a transistor to connect a pullup
on DM. The K state is obtained by disabling the pullup on DP and enabling the pullup on DM. This should be under
the control of the application.
Figure 35-15. Board Schematic to Drive a K State
3V3
PIO
0: Force Wake UP (K State)
1: Normal Mode
1.5 K
DM
686
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7
USB Device Port (UDP) User Interface
WARNING: The UDP peripheral clock in the Power Management Controller (PMC) must be enabled before any read/write
operations to the UDP registers, including the UDP_TXVC register.
Table 35-4.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x000
Frame Number Register
UDP_FRM_NUM
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x004
Global State Register
UDP_GLB_STAT
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x008
Function Address Register
UDP_FADDR
Read/Write
0x0000_0100
0x00C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x010
Interrupt Enable Register
UDP_IER
Write-only
–
0x014
Interrupt Disable Register
UDP_IDR
Write-only
–
0x018
Interrupt Mask Register
UDP_IMR
Read-only
0x0000_1200
0x01C
Interrupt Status Register
UDP_ISR
Read-only
–(1)
0x020
Interrupt Clear Register
UDP_ICR
Write-only
–
0x024
Reserved
–
–
–
0x028
Reset Endpoint Register
UDP_RST_EP
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x02C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x030 + 0x4 * (ept_num - 1)
Endpoint Control and Status Register
UDP_CSR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x050 + 0x4 * (ept_num - 1)
Endpoint FIFO Data Register
UDP_FDR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x070
Reserved
–
–
–
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
–
–
0x074
Transceiver Control Register
UDP_TXVC
0x078–0xFC
Reserved
–
Notes:
(2)
1. Reset values are not defined for UDP_ISR.
2. See Warning above the ”Register Mapping” on this page.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
687
35.7.1 UDP Frame Number Register
Name:
UDP_FRM_NUM
Access:
Read-only
31
---
30
---
29
---
28
---
27
---
26
---
25
---
24
---
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
FRM_OK
16
FRM_ERR
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
FRM_NUM
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FRM_NUM
• FRM_NUM[10:0]: Frame Number as Defined in the Packet Field Formats
This 11-bit value is incremented by the host on a per frame basis. This value is updated at each start of frame.
Value Updated at the SOF_EOP (Start of Frame End of Packet).
• FRM_ERR: Frame Error
This bit is set at SOF_EOP when the SOF packet is received containing an error.
This bit is reset upon receipt of SOF_PID.
• FRM_OK: Frame OK
This bit is set at SOF_EOP when the SOF packet is received without any error.
This bit is reset upon receipt of SOF_PID (Packet Identification).
In the Interrupt Status Register, the SOF interrupt is updated upon receiving SOF_PID. This bit is set without waiting for
EOP.
Note: In the 8-bit Register Interface, FRM_OK is bit 4 of FRM_NUM_H and FRM_ERR is bit 3 of FRM_NUM_L.
688
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.2 UDP Global State Register
Name:
UDP_GLB_STAT
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
RSMINPR
2
–
1
CONFG
0
FADDEN
This register is used to get and set the device state as specified in Chapter 9 of the USB Serial Bus Specification, Rev.2.0.
• FADDEN: Function Address Enable
Read:
0: Device is not in address state.
1: Device is in address state.
Write:
0: No effect, only a reset can bring back a device to the default state.
1: Sets device in address state. This occurs after a successful Set Address request. Beforehand, the UDP_FADDR must
have been initialized with Set Address parameters. Set Address must complete the Status Stage before setting FADDEN.
Refer to chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more details.
• CONFG: Configured
Read:
0: Device is not in configured state.
1: Device is in configured state.
Write:
0: Sets device in a non configured state
1: Sets device in configured state.
The device is set in configured state when it is in address state and receives a successful Set Configuration request. Refer
to Chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more details.
• RSMINPR: Resume Interrupt Request
Read:
0: No effect.
1: The pin “send_resume” is set to one. A Send Resume request has been detected and the device can send a Remote
Wake Up.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
689
35.7.3 UDP Function Address Register
Name:
UDP_FADDR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
FEN
7
–
6
5
4
3
FADD
2
1
0
• FADD[6:0]: Function Address Value
The Function Address Value must be programmed by firmware once the device receives a set address request from the
host, and has achieved the status stage of the no-data control sequence. Refer to the Universal Serial Bus Specification,
Rev. 2.0 for more information. After power up or reset, the function address value is set to 0.
• FEN: Function Enable
Read:
0: Function endpoint disabled.
1: Function endpoint enabled.
Write:
0: Disables function endpoint.
1: Default value.
The Function Enable bit (FEN) allows the microcontroller to enable or disable the function endpoints. The microcontroller
sets this bit after receipt of a reset from the host. Once this bit is set, the USB device is able to accept and transfer data
packets from and to the host.
690
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.4 UDP Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
UDP_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
–
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
6
5
EP5INT
4
EP4INT
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Enable Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Enable Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Enable Endpoint 2Interrupt
• EP3INT: Enable Endpoint 3 Interrupt
• EP4INT: Enable Endpoint 4 Interrupt
• EP5INT: Enable Endpoint 5 Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables corresponding Endpoint Interrupt.
• RXSUSP: Enable UDP Suspend Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables UDP Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Enable UDP Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables UDP Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Enable External Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Enable Start Of Frame Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables Start Of Frame Interrupt.
• WAKEUP: Enable UDP bus Wakeup Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Enables USB bus Interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
691
35.7.5 UDP Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
UDP_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
–
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
6
5
EP5INT
4
EP4INT
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Disable Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Disable Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Disable Endpoint 2 Interrupt
• EP3INT: Disable Endpoint 3 Interrupt
• EP4INT: Disable Endpoint 4 Interrupt
• EP5INT: Disable Endpoint 5 Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables corresponding Endpoint Interrupt.
• RXSUSP: Disable UDP Suspend Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables UDP Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Disable UDP Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables UDP Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Disable External Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Disable Start Of Frame Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables Start Of Frame Interrupt
• WAKEUP: Disable USB Bus Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Disables USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt.
692
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.6 UDP Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
UDP_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
BIT12
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
6
5
EP5INT
4
EP4INT
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Mask Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Mask Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Mask Endpoint 2 Interrupt
• EP3INT: Mask Endpoint 3 Interrupt
• EP4INT: Mask Endpoint 4 Interrupt
• EP5INT: Mask Endpoint 5 Interrupt
0: Corresponding Endpoint Interrupt is disabled.
1: Corresponding Endpoint Interrupt is enabled.
• RXSUSP: Mask UDP Suspend Interrupt
0: UDP Suspend Interrupt is disabled.
1: UDP Suspend Interrupt is enabled.
• RXRSM: Mask UDP Resume Interrupt.
0: UDP Resume Interrupt is disabled.
1: UDP Resume Interrupt is enabled.
• EXTRSM: Mask External Resume Interrupt
0: UDP External Resume Interrupt is disabled.
1: UDP External Resume Interrupt is enabled.
• SOFINT: Mask Start Of Frame Interrupt
0: Start of Frame Interrupt is disabled.
1: Start of Frame Interrupt is enabled.
• BIT12: UDP_IMR Bit 12
Bit 12 of UDP_IMR cannot be masked and is always read at 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
693
• WAKEUP: USB Bus WAKEUP Interrupt
0: USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt is disabled.
1: USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt is enabled.
Note: When the USB block is in suspend mode, the application may power down the USB logic. In this case, any USB HOST resume
request that is made must be taken into account and, thus, the reset value of the RXRSM bit of the register UDP_IMR is enabled.
694
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.7 UDP Interrupt Status Register
Name:
UDP_ISR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
ENDBUSRES
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
6
5
EP5INT
4
EP4INT
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Endpoint 0 Interrupt Status
• EP1INT: Endpoint 1 Interrupt Status
• EP2INT: Endpoint 2 Interrupt Status
• EP3INT: Endpoint 3 Interrupt Status
• EP4INT: Endpoint 4 Interrupt Status
• EP5INT: Endpoint 5 Interrupt Status
0: No Endpoint0 Interrupt pending.
1: Endpoint0 Interrupt has been raised.
Several signals can generate this interrupt. The reason can be found by reading UDP_CSR0:
RXSETUP set to 1
RX_DATA_BK0 set to 1
RX_DATA_BK1 set to 1
TXCOMP set to 1
STALLSENT set to 1
EP0INT is a sticky bit. Interrupt remains valid until EP0INT is cleared by writing in the corresponding UDP_CSR0 bit.
• RXSUSP: UDP Suspend Interrupt Status
0: No UDP Suspend Interrupt pending.
1: UDP Suspend Interrupt has been raised.
The USB device sets this bit when it detects no activity for 3ms. The USB device enters Suspend mode.
• RXRSM: UDP Resume Interrupt Status
0: No UDP Resume Interrupt pending.
1: UDP Resume Interrupt has been raised.
The USB device sets this bit when a UDP resume signal is detected at its port.
After reset, the state of this bit is undefined, the application must clear this bit by setting the RXRSM flag in the UDP_ICR.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
695
• EXTRSM: UDP External Resume Interrupt Status
0: No UDP External Resume Interrupt pending.
1: UDP External Resume Interrupt has been raised.
• SOFINT: Start of Frame Interrupt Status
0: No Start of Frame Interrupt pending.
1: Start of Frame Interrupt has been raised.
This interrupt is raised each time a SOF token has been detected. It can be used as a synchronization signal by using isochronous endpoints.
• ENDBUSRES: End of BUS Reset Interrupt Status
0: No End of Bus Reset Interrupt pending.
1: End of Bus Reset Interrupt has been raised.
This interrupt is raised at the end of a UDP reset sequence. The USB device must prepare to receive requests on the endpoint 0. The host starts the enumeration, then performs the configuration.
• WAKEUP: UDP Resume Interrupt Status
0: No Wakeup Interrupt pending.
1: A Wakeup Interrupt (USB Host Sent a RESUME or RESET) occurred since the last clear.
After reset the state of this bit is undefined, the application must clear this bit by setting the WAKEUP flag in the UDP_ICR.
696
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.8 UDP Interrupt Clear Register
Name:
UDP_ICR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
ENDBUSRES
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
RXRSM
8
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• RXSUSP: Clear UDP Suspend Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears UDP Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Clear UDP Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears UDP Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Clear UDP External Resume Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears UDP External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Clear Start Of Frame Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears Start Of Frame Interrupt.
• ENDBUSRES: Clear End of Bus Reset Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears End of Bus Reset Interrupt.
• WAKEUP: Clear Wakeup Interrupt
0: No effect.
1: Clears Wakeup Interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
697
35.7.9 UDP Reset Endpoint Register
Name:
UDP_RST_EP
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
6
5
EP5
4
EP4
3
EP3
2
EP2
1
EP1
0
EP0
• EP0: Reset Endpoint 0
• EP1: Reset Endpoint 1
• EP2: Reset Endpoint 2
• EP3: Reset Endpoint 3
• EP4: Reset Endpoint 4
• EP5: Reset Endpoint 5
This flag is used to reset the FIFO associated with the endpoint and the bit RXBYTECOUNT in the register UDP_CSRx.It
also resets the data toggle to DATA0. It is useful after removing a HALT condition on a BULK endpoint. Refer to Chapter
5.8.5 in the USB Serial Bus Specification, Rev.2.0.
Warning: This flag must be cleared at the end of the reset. It does not clear UDP_CSRx flags.
0: No reset.
1: Forces the corresponding endpoint FIF0 pointers to 0, therefore RXBYTECNT field is read at 0 in UDP_CSRx.
698
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.10 UDP Endpoint Control and Status Register
Name:
UDP_CSRx [x = 0..5]
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
25
RXBYTECNT
24
19
18
17
16
RXBYTECNT
15
EPEDS
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
DTGLE
10
9
EPTYPE
8
7
6
5
4
3
STALLSENT
ISOERROR
2
1
0
RXSETUP
RX_DATA_BK0
TXCOMP
DIR
RX_DATA_BK1 FORCESTALL
TXPKTRDY
WARNING: Due to synchronization between MCK and UDPCK, the software application must wait for the end of the write
operation before executing another write by polling the bits which must be set/cleared.
//! Clear flags of UDP UDP_CSR register and waits for synchronization
#define Udp_ep_clr_flag(pInterface, endpoint, flags) { \
pInterface->UDP_CSR[endpoint] &= ~(flags); \
while ( (pInterface->UDP_CSR[endpoint] & (flags)) == (flags) ); \
}
//! Set flags of UDP UDP_CSR register and waits for synchronization
#define Udp_ep_set_flag(pInterface, endpoint, flags) { \
pInterface->UDP_CSR[endpoint] |= (flags); \
while ( (pInterface->UDP_CSR[endpoint] & (flags)) != (flags) ); \
}
Note: In a preemptive environment, set or clear the flag and wait for a time of 1 UDPCK clock cycle and 1peripheral clock cycle.
However, RX_DATA_BLK0, TXPKTRDY, RX_DATA_BK1 require wait times of 3 UDPCK clock cycles and 3 peripheral clock
cycles before accessing DPR.
• TXCOMP: Generates an IN Packet with Data Previously Written in the DPR
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0: Clear the flag, clear the interrupt.
1: No effect.
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0: Data IN transaction has not been acknowledged by the Host.
1: Data IN transaction is achieved, acknowledged by the Host.
After having issued a Data IN transaction setting TXPKTRDY, the device firmware waits for TXCOMP to be sure that the
host has acknowledged the transaction.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
699
• RX_DATA_BK0: Receive Data Bank 0
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0: Notify USB peripheral device that data have been read in the FIFO's Bank 0.
1: To leave the read value unchanged.
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0: No data packet has been received in the FIFO's Bank 0.
1: A data packet has been received, it has been stored in the FIFO's Bank 0.
When the device firmware has polled this bit or has been interrupted by this signal, it must transfer data from the FIFO to
the microcontroller memory. The number of bytes received is available in RXBYTCENT field. Bank 0 FIFO values are read
through the UDP_FDRx. Once a transfer is done, the device firmware must release Bank 0 to the USB peripheral device
by clearing RX_DATA_BK0.
After setting or clearing this bit, a wait time of 3 UDPCK clock cycles and 3 peripheral clock cycles is required before
accessing DPR.
• RXSETUP: Received Setup
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Read:
0: No setup packet available.
1: A setup data packet has been sent by the host and is available in the FIFO.
Write:
0: Device firmware notifies the USB peripheral device that it has read the setup data in the FIFO.
1: No effect.
This flag is used to notify the USB device firmware that a valid Setup data packet has been sent by the host and successfully received by the USB device. The USB device firmware may transfer Setup data from the FIFO by reading the
UDP_FDRx to the microcontroller memory. Once a transfer has been done, RXSETUP must be cleared by the device
firmware.
Ensuing Data OUT transaction is not accepted while RXSETUP is set.
• STALLSENT: Stall Sent (Control, Bulk Interrupt Endpoints)/ISOERROR (Isochronous Endpoints)
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
STALLSENT: This ends a STALL handshake.
Read:
0: The host has not acknowledged a STALL.
1: Host has acknowledged the stall.
Write:
0: Resets the STALLSENT flag, clears the interrupt.
1: No effect.
This is mandatory for the device firmware to clear this flag. Otherwise the interrupt remains.
Refer to chapters 8.4.5 and 9.4.5 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the STALL
handshake.
ISOERROR: A CRC error has been detected in an isochronous transfer.
700
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Read:
0: No error in the previous isochronous transfer.
1: CRC error has been detected, data available in the FIFO are corrupted.
Write:
0: Resets the ISOERROR flag, clears the interrupt.
1: No effect.
• TXPKTRDY: Transmit Packet Ready
This flag is cleared by the USB device.
This flag is set by the USB device firmware.
Read:
0: Can be set to one to send the FIFO data.
1: The data is waiting to be sent upon reception of token IN.
Write:
0: Can be written if old value is zero.
1: A new data payload is has been written in the FIFO by the firmware and is ready to be sent.
This flag is used to generate a Data IN transaction (device to host). Device firmware checks that it can write a data payload
in the FIFO, checking that TXPKTRDY is cleared. Transfer to the FIFO is done by writing in the UDP_FDRx. Once the data
payload has been transferred to the FIFO, the firmware notifies the USB device setting TXPKTRDY to one. USB bus transactions can start. TXCOMP is set once the data payload has been received by the host.
After setting or clearing this bit, a wait time of 3 UDPCK clock cycles and 3 peripheral clock cycles is required before
accessing DPR.
• FORCESTALL: Force Stall (used by Control, Bulk and Isochronous Endpoints)
Read:
0: Normal state.
1: Stall state.
Write:
0: Return to normal state.
1: Send STALL to the host.
Refer to chapters 8.4.5 and 9.4.5 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the STALL
handshake.
Control endpoints: During the data stage and status stage, this bit indicates that the microcontroller cannot complete the
request.
Bulk and interrupt endpoints: This bit notifies the host that the endpoint is halted.
The host acknowledges the STALL, device firmware is notified by the STALLSENT flag.
• RX_DATA_BK1: Receive Data Bank 1 (only used by endpoints with ping-pong attributes)
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0: Notifies USB device that data have been read in the FIFO’s Bank 1.
1: To leave the read value unchanged.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
701
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0: No data packet has been received in the FIFO's Bank 1.
1: A data packet has been received, it has been stored in FIFO's Bank 1.
When the device firmware has polled this bit or has been interrupted by this signal, it must transfer data from the FIFO to
microcontroller memory. The number of bytes received is available in RXBYTECNT field. Bank 1 FIFO values are read
through UDP_FDRx. Once a transfer is done, the device firmware must release Bank 1 to the USB device by clearing
RX_DATA_BK1.
After setting or clearing this bit, a wait time of 3 UDPCK clock cycles and 3 peripheral clock cycles is required before
accessing DPR.
• DIR: Transfer Direction (only available for control endpoints)
Read/Write
0: Allows Data OUT transactions in the control data stage.
1: Enables Data IN transactions in the control data stage.
Refer to Chapter 8.5.3 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the control data stage.
This bit must be set before UDP_CSRx/RXSETUP is cleared at the end of the setup stage. According to the request sent
in the setup data packet, the data stage is either a device to host (DIR = 1) or host to device (DIR = 0) data transfer. It is not
necessary to check this bit to reverse direction for the status stage.
• EPTYPE[2:0]: Endpoint Type
Read/Write
Value
Description
000
Control
001
Isochronous OUT
101
Isochronous IN
010
Bulk OUT
110
Bulk IN
011
Interrupt OUT
111
Interrupt IN
• DTGLE: Data Toggle
Read-only
0: Identifies DATA0 packet.
1: Identifies DATA1 packet.
Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on DATA0, DATA1 packet
definitions.
• EPEDS: Endpoint Enable Disable
Read:
0: Endpoint disabled.
1: Endpoint enabled.
702
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Write:
0: Disables endpoint.
1: Enables endpoint.
Control endpoints are always enabled. Reading or writing this field has no effect on control endpoints.
Note: After reset, all endpoints are configured as control endpoints (zero).
• RXBYTECNT[10:0]: Number of Bytes Available in the FIFO
Read-only
When the host sends a data packet to the device, the USB device stores the data in the FIFO and notifies the microcontroller. The microcontroller can load the data from the FIFO by reading RXBYTECENT bytes in the UDP_FDRx.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
703
35.7.11 UDP FIFO Data Register
Name:
UDP_FDRx [x = 0..5]
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FIFO_DATA
• FIFO_DATA[7:0]: FIFO Data Value
The microcontroller can push or pop values in the FIFO through this register.
RXBYTECNT in the corresponding UDP_CSRx is the number of bytes to be read from the FIFO (sent by the host).
The maximum number of bytes to write is fixed by the Max Packet Size in the Standard Endpoint Descriptor. It can not be
more than the physical memory size associated to the endpoint. Refer to the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0
for more information.
704
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
35.7.12 UDP Transceiver Control Register
Name:
UDP_TXVC
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
PUON
TXVDIS
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
–
–
WARNING: The UDP peripheral clock in the Power Management Controller (PMC) must be enabled before any read/write
operations to the UDP registers including the UDP_TXCV register.
• TXVDIS: Transceiver Disable
When UDP is disabled, power consumption can be reduced significantly by disabling the embedded transceiver. This can
be done by setting TXVDIS field.
To enable the transceiver, TXVDIS must be cleared.
• PUON: Pullup On
0: The 1.5KΩ integrated pullup on DP is disconnected.
1: The 1.5 KΩ integrated pullup on DP is connected.
NOTE: If the USB pullup is not connected on DP, the user should not write in any UDP register other than the UDP_TXVC
register. This is because if DP and DM are floating at 0, or pulled down, then SE0 is received by the device with the consequence of a USB Reset.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
705
36.
USB Host Port (UHP)
36.1
Description
The USB Host Port (UHP) interfaces the USB with the host application. It handles Open HCI protocol (Open Host
Controller Interface) as well as USB v2.0 Full-speed and Low-speed protocols.
The USB Host Port integrates a root hub and transceivers on downstream ports. It provides several high-speed
half-duplex serial communication ports at a baud rate of 12 Mbit/s. Up to 127 USB devices (printer, camera,
mouse, keyboard, disk, etc.) and the USB hub can be connected to the USB host in the USB “tiered star” topology.
The USB Host Port controller is fully compliant with the OpenHCI specification. The USB Host Port User Interface
(registers description) can be found in the Open HCI Rev 1.0 Specification available on www.hp.com. The
standard OHCI USB stack driver can be easily ported to Atmel’s architecture in the same way all existing class
drivers run without hardware specialization.
This means that all standard class devices are automatically detected and available to the user application. As an
example, integrating an HID (Human Interface Device) class driver provides a plug & play feature for all USB
keyboards and mouses.
36.2
36.3
Embedded Characteristics
Compliance with Open HCI Rev 1.0 Specification
Compliance with USB V2.0 Full-speed and Low-speed Specification
Supports both Low-Speed 1.5 Mbps and Full-speed 12 Mbps devices
Root hub integrated with two downstream USB ports in the 217-LFBGA package
Two embedded USB transceivers
Supports power management
Operates as a master on the Matrix
Block Diagram
Figure 36-1.
Block Diagram
HCI
Slave Block
AHB
Slave
OHCI
Registers
Control
ED & TD
Regsisters
AHB
HCI
Master Block
Data FIFO 64 x 8
Master
uhp_int
MCK
UHPCK
706
OHCI Root
Hub Registers
List Processor
Block
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Root Hub
and
Host SIE
Embedded USB
v2.0 Full-speed Transceiver
PORT S/M
USB transceiver
DP
DM
PORT S/M
USB transceiver
DP
DM
Access to the USB host operational registers is achieved through the AHB bus slave interface. The OpenHCI host
controller initializes master DMA transfers through the ASB bus master interface as follows:
Fetches endpoint descriptors and transfer descriptors
Access to endpoint data from system memory
Access to the HC communication area
Write status and retire transfer Descriptor
Memory access errors (abort, misalignment) lead to an “Unrecoverable Error” indicated by the corresponding flag
in the host controller operational registers.
The USB root hub is integrated in the USB host. Several USB downstream ports are available. The number of
downstream ports can be determined by the software driver reading the root hub’s operational registers. Device
connection is automatically detected by the USB host port logic.
USB physical transceivers are integrated in the product and driven by the root hub’s ports.
Over current protection on ports can be activated by the USB host controller. Atmel’s standard product does not
dedicate pads to external over current protection.
36.4
Product Dependencies
36.4.1 I/O Lines
DPs and DMs are not controlled by any PIO controllers. The embedded USB physical transceivers are controlled
by the USB host controller.
36.4.2 Power Management
The USB host controller requires a 48 MHz clock. This clock must be generated by a PLL with a correct accuracy
of ± 0.25%.
Thus the USB device peripheral receives two clocks from the Power Management Controller (PMC): the master
clock MCK used to drive the peripheral user interface (MCK domain) and the UHPCLK 48 MHz clock used to
interface with the bus USB signals (Recovered 12 MHz domain).
36.4.3 Interrupt
The USB host interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC).
Handling USB host interrupts requires programming the AIC before configuring the UHP.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
707
36.5
Functional Description
Please refer to the Open Host Controller Interface Specification for USB Release 1.0.a.
36.5.1 Host Controller Interface
There are two communication channels between the Host Controller and the Host Controller Driver. The first
channel uses a set of operational registers located on the USB Host Controller. The Host Controller is the target for
all communications on this channel. The operational registers contain control, status and list pointer registers.
They are mapped in the memory mapped area. Within the operational register set there is a pointer to a location in
the processor address space named the Host Controller Communication Area (HCCA). The HCCA is the second
communication channel. The host controller is the master for all communication on this channel. The HCCA
contains the head pointers to the interrupt Endpoint Descriptor lists, the head pointer to the done queue and status
information associated with start-of-frame processing.
The basic building blocks for communication across the interface are Endpoint Descriptors (ED, 4 double words)
and Transfer Descriptors (TD, 4 or 8 double words). The host controller assigns an Endpoint Descriptor to each
endpoint in the system. A queue of Transfer Descriptors is linked to the Endpoint Descriptor for the specific
endpoint.
Figure 36-2.
USB Host Communication Channels
Device Enumeration
Open HCI
Operational
Registers
Host Controller
Communications Area
Mode
Interrupt 0
HCCA
Interrupt 1
Status
Interrupt 2
...
Event
Interrupt 31
Frame Int
...
Ratio
Control
Bulk
...
Done
Device Register
in Memory Space
= Transfer Descriptor
708
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Shared RAM
= Endpoint Descriptor
36.5.2 Host Controller Driver
Figure 36-3.
USB Host Drivers
User Application
User Space
Kernel Drivers
Mini Driver
Class Driver
Class Driver
HUB Driver
USB Driver
Host Controller Driver
Hardware
Host Controller Hardware
USB Handling is done through several layers as follows:
36.6
Host controller hardware and serial engine: Transmits and receives USB data on the bus.
Host controller driver: Drives the Host controller hardware and handles the USB protocol.
USB Bus driver and hub driver: Handles USB commands and enumeration. Offers a hardware independent
interface.
Mini driver: Handles device specific commands.
Class driver: Handles standard devices. This acts as a generic driver for a class of devices, for example the
HID driver.
Typical Connection
Figure 36-4.
Board Schematic to Interface UHP Device Controller
5V
0.20A
Type A Connector
10μF
HDMA
or
HDMB
HDPA
or
HDPB
100nF
10nF
REXT
REXT
A termination serial resistor must be connected to HDP and HDM. The resistor value is defined in the electrical
specification of the product (REXT).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
709
37.
Image Sensor Interface (ISI)
37.1
Description
The Image Sensor Interface (ISI) connects a CMOS-type image sensor to the processor and provides image
capture in various formats. It does data conversion, if necessary, before the storage in memory through DMA.
The ISI supports color CMOS image sensor and grayscale image sensors with a reduced set of functionalities.
In grayscale mode, the data stream is stored in memory without any processing and so is not compatible with the
LCD controller.
Internal FIFOs on the preview and codec paths are used to store the incoming data. The RGB output on the
preview path is compatible with the LCD controller. This module outputs the data in RGB format (LCD compatible)
and has scaling capabilities to make it compliant to the LCD display resolution (See Table 37-3 on page 713).
Several input formats such as preprocessed RGB or YCbCr are supported through the data bus interface.
It supports two modes of synchronization:
1.
The hardware with ISI_VSYNC and ISI_HSYNC signals
2.
The International Telecommunication Union Recommendation ITU-R BT.656-4 Start-of-Active-Video (SAV)
and End-of-Active-Video (EAV) synchronization sequence.
Using EAV/SAV for synchronization reduces the pin count (ISI_VSYNC, ISI_HSYNC not used). The polarity of the
synchronization pulse is programmable to comply with the sensor signals.
Table 37-1.
I/O Description
Signal
Direction
ISI_VSYNC
IN
Vertical Synchronization
ISI_HSYNC
IN
Horizontal Synchronization
ISI_DATA[11..0]
IN
Sensor Pixel Data
ISI_MCK
OUT
ISI_PCK
IN
Figure 37-1.
Master Clock Provided to the Image Sensor
Pixel Clock Provided by the Image Sensor
ISI Connection Example
Image Sensor
Image Sensor Interface
data[11..0]
710
Description
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
ISI_DATA[11..0]
CLK
ISI_MCK
PCLK
ISI_PCK
VSYNC
ISI_VSYNC
HSYNC
ISI_HSYNC
ITU-R BT. 601/656 8-bit mode external interface support
Support for ITU-R BT.656-4 SAV and EAV synchronization
Vertical and horizontal resolutions up to 2048 x 2048
Preview Path up to 640*480
Support for packed data formatting for YCbCr 4:2:2 formats
Preview scaler to generate smaller size image
Programmable frame capture rate
Block Diagram
Figure 37-2.
Hsync/Len
Vsync/Fen
Image Sensor Interface Block Diagram
Timing Signals
Interface
CCIR-656
Embedded Timing
Decoder(SAV/EAV)
CMOS
sensor
Pixel input
up to 12 bit
YCbCr 4:2:2
8:8:8
RGB 5:6:5
CMOS
sensor
pixel clock
input
Config
Registers
Camera
Interrupt
Controller
Camera
Interrupt Request Line
From
Rx buffers
Pixel
Clock Domain
APB
Interface
APB bus
37.3
Embedded Characteristics
APB
Clock Domain
AHB
Clock Domain
Frame Rate
Pixel Sampling
Module
Clipping + Color
Conversion
YCC to RGB
Clipping + Color
Conversion
RGB to YCC
2-D Image
Scaler
Pixel
Formatter
Packed
Formatter
Rx Direct
Display
FIFO
Rx Direct
Capture
FIFO
Core
Video
Arbiter
Camera
AHB
Master
Interface
Scatter
Mode
Support
AHB bus
37.2
codec_on
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
711
37.4
Functional Description
The Image Sensor Interface (ISI) supports direct connection to the ITU-R BT. 601/656 8-bit mode compliant
sensors and up to 12-bit grayscale sensors. It receives the image data stream from the image sensor on the 12-bit
data bus.
This module receives up to 12 bits for data, the horizontal and vertical synchronizations and the pixel clock. The
reduced pin count alternative for synchronization is supported for sensors that embed SAV (start of active video)
and EAV (end of active video) delimiters in the data stream.
The Image Sensor Interface interrupt line is generally connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller and can
trigger an interrupt at the beginning of each frame and at the end of a DMA frame transfer. If the SAV/EAV
synchronization is used, an interrupt can be triggered on each delimiter event.
For 8-bit color sensors, the data stream received can be in several possible formats: YCbCr 4:2:2, RGB 8:8:8,
RGB 5:6:5 and may be processed before the storage in memory. The data stream may be sent on both preview
path and codec path if the bit CODEC_ON in the ISI_CR1 is one. To optimize the bandwidth, the codec path
should be enabled only when a capture is required.
In grayscale mode, the input data stream is stored in memory without any processing. The 12-bit data, which
represent the grayscale level for the pixel, is stored in memory one or two pixels per word, depending on the
GS_MODE bit in the ISI_CR2 register. The codec datapath is not available when grayscale image is selected.
A frame rate counter allows users to capture all frames or 1 out of every 2 to 8 frames.
37.4.1 Data Timing
The two data timings using horizontal and vertical synchronization and EAV/SAV sequence synchronization are
shown in Figure 37-3 and Figure 37-4.
In the VSYNC/HSYNC synchronization, the valid data is captured with the active edge of the pixel clock (ISI_PCK),
after SFD lines of vertical blanking and SLD pixel clock periods delay programmed in the control register.
The ITU-RBT.656-4 defines the functional timing for an 8-bit wide interface.
There are two timing reference signals, one at the beginning of each video data block SAV (0xFF000080) and one
at the end of each video data block EAV(0xFF00009D). Only data sent between EAV and SAV is captured.
Horizontal blanking and vertical blanking are ignored. Use of the SAV and EAV synchronization eliminates the
ISI_VSYNC and ISI_HSYNC signals from the interface, thereby reducing the pin count. In order to retrieve both
frame and line synchronization properly, at least one line of vertical blanking is mandatory.
Figure 37-3.
HSYNC and VSYNC Synchronization
Frame
ISI_VSYNC
1 line
ISI_HSYNC
ISI_PCK
DATA[7..0]
712
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Y
Cb
Y
Cr
Y
Cb
Y
Cr
Y
Cb
Y
Cr
Figure 37-4.
SAV and EAV Sequence Synchronization
ISII_PCK
DATA[7..0]
FF
00 00
SAV
80
Y
Cb
Y
Cr
Y
Cb Y
Cr
Active Video
Y
Y
Cr
Y
Cb FF
00 00
EAV
9D
37.4.2 Data Ordering
The RGB color space format is required for viewing images on a display screen preview, and the YCbCr color
space format is required for encoding.
All the sensors do not output the YCbCr or RGB components in the same order. The ISI allows the user to program
the same component order as the sensor, reducing software treatments to restore the right format.
Table 37-2.
Data Ordering in YCbCr Mode
Mode
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Default
Cb(i)
Y(i)
Cr(i)
Y(i+1)
Mode1
Cr(i)
Y(i)
Cb(i)
Y(i+1)
Mode2
Y(i)
Cb(i)
Y(i+1)
Cr(i)
Mode3
Y(i)
Cr(i)
Y(i+1)
Cb(i)
Table 37-3.
Mode
RGB Format in Default Mode, RGB_CFG = 00, No Swap
Byte
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Byte 0
R7(i)
R6(i)
R5(i)
R4(i)
R3(i)
R2(i)
R1(i)
R0(i)
Byte 1
G7(i)
G6(i)
G5(i)
G4(i)
G3(i)
G2(i)
G1(i)
G0(i)
Byte 2
B7(i)
B6(i)
B5(i)
B4(i)
B3(i)
B2(i)
B1(i)
B0(i)
Byte 3
R7(i+1)
R6(i+1)
R5(i+1)
R4(i+1)
R3(i+1)
R2(i+1)
R1(i+1)
R0(i+1)
Byte 0
R4(i)
R3(i)
R2(i)
R1(i)
R0(i)
G5(i)
G4(i)
G3(i)
Byte 1
G2(i)
G1(i)
G0(i)
B4(i)
B3(i)
B2(i)
B1(i)
B0(i)
Byte 2
R4(i+1)
R3(i+1)
R2(i+1)
R1(i+1)
R0(i+1)
G5(i+1)
G4(i+1)
G3(i+1)
Byte 3
G2(i+1)
G1(i+1)
G0(i+1)
B4(i+1)
B3(i+1)
B2(i+1)
B1(i+1)
B0(i+1)
RGB 8:8:8
RGB 5:6:5
Table 37-4.
Mode
RGB Format, RGB_CFG = 10 (Mode 2), No Swap
Byte
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Byte 0
G2(i)
G1(i)
G0(i)
R4(i)
R3(i)
R2(i)
R1(i)
R0(i)
Byte 1
B4(i)
B3(i)
B2(i)
B1(i)
B0(i)
G5(i)
G4(i)
G3(i)
Byte 2
G2(i+1)
G1(i+1)
G0(i+1)
R4(i+1)
R3(i+1)
R2(i+1)
R1(i+1)
R0(i+1)
Byte 3
B4(i+1)
B3(i+1)
B2(i+1)
B1(i+1)
B0(i+1)
G5(i+1)
G4(i+1)
G3(i+1)
RGB 5:6:5
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
713
Table 37-5.
RGB Format in Default Mode, RGB_CFG = 00, Swap Activated
Mode
Byte
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Byte 0
R0(i)
R1(i)
R2(i)
R3(i)
R4(i)
R5(i)
R6(i)
R7(i)
Byte 1
G0(i)
G1(i)
G2(i)
G3(i)
G4(i)
G5(i)
G6(i)
G7(i)
Byte 2
B0(i)
B1(i)
B2(i)
B3(i)
B4(i)
B5(i)
B6(i)
B7(i)
Byte 3
R0(i+1)
R1(i+1)
R2(i+1)
R3(i+1)
R4(i+1)
R5(i+1)
R6(i+1)
R7(i+1)
Byte 0
G3(i)
G4(i)
G5(i)
R0(i)
R1(i)
R2(i)
R3(i)
R4(i)
Byte 1
B0(i)
B1(i)
B2(i)
B3(i)
B4(i)
G0(i)
G1(i)
G2(i)
Byte 2
G3(i+1)
G4(i+1)
G5(i+1)
R0(i+1)
R1(i+1)
R2(i+1)
R3(i+1)
R4(i+1)
Byte 3
B0(i+1)
B1(i+1)
B2(i+1)
B3(i+1)
B4(i+1)
G0(i+1)
G1(i+1)
G2(i+1)
RGB 8:8:8
RGB 5:6:5
The RGB 5:6:5 input format is processed to be displayed as RGB 5:5:5 format, compliant with the 16-bit mode of
the LCD controller.
37.4.3 Clocks
The sensor master clock (ISI_MCK) can be generated either by the Advanced Power Management Controller
(APMC) through a Programmable Clock output or by an external oscillator connected to the sensor.
None of the sensors embeds a power management controller, so providing the clock by the APMC is a simple and
efficient way to control power consumption of the system.
Care must be taken when programming the system clock. The ISI has two clock domains, the system bus clock
and the pixel clock provided by sensor. The two clock domains are not synchronized, but the system clock must be
faster than pixel clock.
714
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.4.4 Preview Path
37.4.4.1 Scaling, Decimation (Subsampling)
This module resizes captured 8-bit color sensor images to fit the LCD display format. The resize module performs
only downscaling. The same ratio is applied for both horizontal and vertical resize, then a fractional decimation
algorithm is applied.
The decimation factor is a multiple of 1/16 and values 0 to 15 are forbidden.
Table 37-6.
Decimation Factor
Dec value
0–15
16
17
18
19
...
124
125
126
127
Dec Factor
X
1
1.063
1.125
1.188
...
7.750
7.813
7.875
7.938
Table 37-7.
Decimation and Scaler Offset Values
INPUT
352*288
640*480
800*600
1280*1024
1600*1200
2048*1536
F
NA
16
20
32
40
51
F
16
32
40
64
80
102
F
16
26
33
56
66
85
F
16
53
66
113
133
170
OUTPUT
VGA
640*480
QVGA
320*240
CIF
352*288
QCIF
176*144
Example:
Input 1280*1024 Output = 640*480
Hratio = 1280/640 = 2
Vratio = 1024/480 = 2.1333
The decimation factor is 2 so 32/16.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
715
Figure 37-5.
Resize Examples
1280
32/16 decimation
640
1024
480
1280
56/16 decimation
352
1024
288
37.4.4.2 Color Space Conversion
This module converts YCrCb or YUV pixels to RGB color space. Clipping is performed to ensure that the samples
value do not exceed the allowable range. The conversion matrix is defined below and is fully programmable:
C0 0 C1
Y – Y off
R
G = C 0 – C 2 – C 3 × C b – C boff
B
C0 C4 0
C r – C roff
Example of programmable value to convert YCrCb to RGB:
R = 1.164 ⋅ ( Y – 16 ) + 1.596 ⋅ ( C r – 128 )
G = 1.164 ⋅ ( Y – 16 ) – 0.813 ⋅ ( C r – 128 ) – 0.392 ⋅ ( C b – 128 )
B = 1.164 ⋅ ( Y – 16 ) + 2.107 ⋅ ( C b – 128 )
An example of programmable value to convert from YUV to RGB:
R = Y + 1.596 ⋅ V
G = Y – 0.394 ⋅ U – 0.436 ⋅ V
B = Y + 2.032 ⋅ U
716
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.4.4.3 Memory Interface
Preview datapath contains a data formatter that converts 8:8:8 pixel to RGB 5:5:5 format compliant with 16-bit
format of the LCD controller. In general, when converting from a color channel with more bits to one with fewer
bits, formatter module discards the lower-order bits. Example: Converting from RGB 8:8:8 to RGB 5:6:5, it discards
the three LSBs from the red and blue channels, and two LSBs from the green channel. When grayscale mode is
enabled, two memory format are supported. One mode supports 2 pixels per word, and the other mode supports 1
pixel per word.
Table 37-8.
GS_MODE
Grayscale Memory Mapping Configuration for 12-bit Data
DATA[31:24]
DATA[23:16]
DATA[15:8]
DATA[7:0]
0
P_0[11:4]
P_0[3:0], 0000
P_1[11:4]
P_1[3:0], 0000
1
P_0[11:4]
P_0[3:0], 0000
0
0
37.4.4.4 FIFO and DMA Features
Both preview and Codec datapaths contain FIFOs, asynchronous buffers that are used to safely transfer formatted
pixels from Pixel clock domain to AHB clock domain. A video arbiter is used to manage FIFO thresholds and
triggers a relevant DMA request through the AHB master interface. Thus, depending on FIFO state, a specified
length burst is asserted. Regarding AHB master interface, it supports Scatter DMA mode through linked list
operation. This mode of operation improves flexibility of image buffer location and allows the user to allocate two or
more frame buffers. The destination frame buffers are defined by a series of Frame Buffer Descriptors (FBD). Each
FBD controls the transfer of one entire frame and then optionally loads a further FBD to switch the DMA operation
at another frame buffer address. The FBD is defined by a series of two words. The first one defines the current
frame buffer address, and the second defines the next FBD memory location. This DMA transfer mode is only
available for preview datapath and is configured in the ISI_PPFBD register that indicates the memory location of
the first FBD.
The primary FBD is programmed into the camera interface controller. The data to be transferred described by an
FBD requires several burst access. In the example below, the use of 2 ping-pong frame buffers is described.
Example
The first FBD, stored at address 0x30000, defines the location of the first frame buffer.
Destination Address: frame buffer ID0 0x02A000
Next FBD address: 0x30010
Second FBD, stored at address 0x30010, defines the location of the second frame buffer.
Destination Address: frame buffer ID1 0x3A000
Transfer width: 32 bit
Next FBD address: 0x30000, wrapping to first FBD.
Using this technique, several frame buffers can be configured through the linked list. Figure 37-6 illustrates a
typical three frame buffer application. Frame n is mapped to frame buffer 0, frame n+1 is mapped to frame buffer 1,
frame n+2 is mapped to Frame buffer 2, further frames wrap. A codec request occurs, and the full-size 4:2:2
encoded frame is stored in a dedicated memory space.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
717
Figure 37-6.
Three Frame Buffers Application and Memory Mapping
Codec Done
Codec Request
frame n-1
frame n
frame n+1
frame n+2
frame n+3
frame n+4
Memory Space
Frame Buffer 3
Frame Buffer 0
LCD
Frame Buffer 1
ISI config Space
4:2:2 Image
Full ROI
37.4.5 Codec Path
37.4.5.1 Color Space Conversion
Depending on user selection, this module can be bypassed so that input YCrCb stream is directly connected to the
format converter module. If the RGB input stream is selected, this module converts RGB to YCrCb color space
with the formulas given below:
Y
Cr =
C0 C1 C2
Cb
–C6 –C7 C8
C3 –C4 –C5
Y off
R
× G + Cr off
B
Cb off
An example of coefficients is given below:
Y = 0.257 ⋅ R + 0.504 ⋅ G + 0.098 ⋅ B + 16
C = 0.439 ⋅ R – 0.368 ⋅ G – 0.071 ⋅ B + 128
r
C b = – 0.148 ⋅ R – 0.291 ⋅ G + 0.439 ⋅ B + 128
718
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.4.5.2 Memory Interface
Dedicated FIFO are used to support packed memory mapping. YCrCb pixel components are sent in a single 32-bit
word in a contiguous space (packed). Data is stored in the order of natural scan lines. Planar mode is not
supported.
37.4.5.3 DMA Features
Unlike preview datapath, codec datapath DMA mode does not support linked list operation. Only the
CODEC_DMA_ADDR is used to configure the frame buffer base address.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
719
37.5
Image Sensor Interface (ISI) User Interface
Table 37-9.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register Name
Register
Access
Reset Value
0x00
ISI Control 1 Register
ISI_CR1
Read/Write
0x00000002
0x04
ISI Control 2 Register
ISI_CR2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
ISI Status Register
ISI_SR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x0C
ISI Interrupt Enable Register
ISI_IER
Write-only
–
0x10
ISI Interrupt Disable Register
ISI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x14
ISI Interrupt Mask Register
ISI_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x18
Reserved
–
–
–
0x1C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x20
ISI Preview Size Register
ISI_PSIZE
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x24
ISI Preview Decimation Factor Register
ISI_PDECF
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x28
ISI Preview Primary FBD Register
ISI_PPFBD
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x2C
ISI Codec DMA Base Address Register
ISI_CDBA
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x30
ISI CSC YCrCb To RGB Set 0 Register
ISI_Y2R_SET0
Read/Write
0x6832cc95
0x34
ISI CSC YCrCb To RGB Set 1 Register
ISI_Y2R_SET1
Read/Write
0x00007102
0x38
ISI CSC RGB To YCrCb Set 0 Register
ISI_R2Y_SET0
Read/Write
0x01324145
0x3C
ISI CSC RGB To YCrCb Set 1 Register
ISI_R2Y_SET1
Read/Write
0x01245e38
0x40
ISI CSC RGB To YCrCb Set 2 Register
ISI_R2Y_SET2
Read/Write
0x01384a4b
0x44–0xF8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
Note: Several parts of the ISI controller use the pixel clock provided by the image sensor (ISI_PCK). Thus the user must first program
the image sensor to provide this clock (ISI_PCK) before programming the Image Sensor Controller.
720
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.1 ISI Control 1 Register
Name:
ISI_CR1
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
SFD
23
22
21
20
SLD
15
CODEC_ON
14
7
CRC_SYNC
6
EMB_SYNC
13
12
FULL
11
-
10
9
FRATE
8
5
-
4
PIXCLK_POL
3
VSYNC_POL
2
HSYNC_POL
1
ISI_DIS
0
ISI_RST
THMASK
• ISI_RST: Image sensor interface reset
Write-only. Refer to bit SOFTRST in Section 37.5.3 “ISI Status Register” on page 725 for soft reset status.
0: No action.
1: Resets the image sensor interface.
• ISI_DIS: Image sensor disable:
0: Enable the image sensor interface.
1: Finish capturing the current frame and then shut down the module.
• HSYNC_POL: Horizontal synchronization polarity
0: HSYNC active high.
1: HSYNC active low.
• VSYNC_POL: Vertical synchronization polarity
0: VSYNC active high.
1: VSYNC active low.
• PIXCLK_POL: Pixel clock polarity
0: Data is sampled on rising edge of pixel clock.
1: Data is sampled on falling edge of pixel clock.
• EMB_SYNC: Embedded synchronization
0: Synchronization by HSYNC, VSYNC.
1: Synchronization by embedded synchronization sequence SAV/EAV.
• CRC_SYNC: Embedded synchronization
0: No CRC correction is performed on embedded synchronization.
1: CRC correction is performed. if the correction is not possible, the current frame is discarded and the CRC_ERR is set in
the status register.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
721
• FRATE: Frame rate [0..7]
0: All the frames are captured, else one frame every FRATE + 1 is captured.
• FULL: Full mode is allowed
1: Both codec and preview datapaths are working simultaneously.
• THMASK: Threshold mask
0: 4, 8 and 16 AHB bursts are allowed.
1: 8 and 16 AHB bursts are allowed.
2: Only 16 AHB bursts are allowed.
• CODEC_ON: Enable the codec path enable bit
Write-only.
0: The codec path is disabled.
1: The codec path is enabled and the next frame is captured. Refer to bit CDC_PND in “ISI Status Register” on page 725.
• SLD: Start of Line Delay
SLD pixel clock periods to wait before the beginning of a line.
• SFD: Start of Frame Delay
SFD lines are skipped at the beginning of the frame.
722
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.2 ISI Control 2 Register
Name:
ISI_CR2
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
RGB_CFG
23
28
YCC_SWAP
22
21
20
27
-
26
25
IM_HSIZE
24
19
18
17
16
IM_HSIZE
15
COL_SPACE
14
RGB_SWAP
13
GRAYSCALE
12
RGB_MODE
11
GS_MODE
10
9
IM_VSIZE
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IM_VSIZE
• IM_VSIZE: Vertical size of the Image sensor [0..2047]
Vertical size = IM_VSIZE + 1.
• GS_MODE
0: 2 pixels per word.
1: 1 pixel per word.
• RGB_MODE: RGB input mode
0: RGB 8:8:8 24 bits
1: RGB 5:6:5 16 bits
• GRAYSCALE
0: Grayscale mode is disabled.
1: Input image is assumed to be grayscale coded.
• RGB_SWAP
0: D7 -> R7
1: D0 -> R7
The RGB_SWAP has no effect when the grayscale mode is enabled.
• COL_SPACE: Color space for the image data
0: YCbCr
1: RGB
• IM_HSIZE: Horizontal size of the Image sensor [0..2047]
Horizontal size = IM_HSIZE + 1.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
723
• YCC_SWAP: Defines the YCC image data
Value
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
00: Default
Cb(i)
Y(i)
Cr(i)
Y(i+1)
01: Mode1
Cr(i)
Y(i)
Cb(i)
Y(i+1)
10: Mode2
Y(i)
Cb(i)
Y(i+1)
Cr(i)
11: Mode3
Y(i)
Cr(i)
Y(i+1)
Cb(i)
• RGB_CFG: Defines RGB pattern when RGB_MODE is set to 1
Value
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
00: Default
R/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/B
R/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/B
01: Mode1
B/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/R
B/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/R
10: Mode2
G(LSB)/R
B/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/R
B/G(MSB)
11: Mode3
G(LSB)/B
R/G(MSB)
G(LSB)/B
R/G(MSB)
If RGB_MODE is set to RGB 8:8:8, then RGB_CFG = 0 implies RGB color sequence, else it implies BGR color sequence.
724
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.3 ISI Status Register
Name:
ISI_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
FR_OVR
8
FO_C_EMP
7
FO_P_EMP
6
FO_P_OVF
5
FO_C_OVF
4
CRC_ERR
3
CDC_PND
2
SOFTRST
1
DIS
0
SOF
• SOF: Start of Frame
0: No start of frame has been detected.
1: A start of frame has been detected.
• DIS: Image Sensor Interface Disable
0: The image sensor interface is enabled.
1: The image sensor interface is disabled and stops capturing data. The DMA controller and the core can still read the
FIFOs.
• SOFTRST: Software Reset
0: Software reset not asserted or not completed.
1: Software reset has completed successfully.
• CDC_PND: Codec Request Pending
0: No request asserted.
1: A codec request is pending. If a codec request is asserted during a frame, the CDC_PND bit rises until the start of a new
frame. The capture is completed when the flag FO_C_EMP = 1.
• CRC_ERR: CRC Synchronization Error
0: No CRC error in the embedded synchronization frame (SAV/EAV)
1: The CRC_SYNC is enabled in the control register and an error has been detected and not corrected. The frame is discarded and the ISI waits for a new one.
• FO_C_OVF: FIFO Codec Overflow
0: No overflow
1: An overrun condition has occurred in input FIFO on the codec path. The overrun happens when the FIFO is full and an
attempt is made to write a new sample to the FIFO.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
725
• FO_P_OVF: FIFO Preview Overflow
0: No overflow
1: An overrun condition has occurred in input FIFO on the preview path. The overrun happens when the FIFO is full and an
attempt is made to write a new sample to the FIFO.
• FO_P_EMP
0:The DMA has not finished transferring all the contents of the preview FIFO.
1:The DMA has finished transferring all the contents of the preview FIFO.
• FO_C_EMP
0: The DMA has not finished transferring all the contents of the codec FIFO.
1: The DMA has finished transferring all the contents of the codec FIFO.
• FR_OVR: Frame rate overrun
0: No frame overrun.
1: Frame overrun, the current frame is being skipped because a vsync signal has been detected while flushing FIFOs.
726
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.4 Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
ISI_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
FR_OVR
8
FO_C_EMP
7
FO_P_EMP
6
FO_P_OVF
5
FO_C_OVF
4
CRC_ERR
3
–
2
SOFTRST
1
DIS
0
SOF
• SOF: Start of Frame
1: Enables the Start of Frame interrupt.
• DIS: Image Sensor Interface Disable
1: Enables the DIS interrupt.
• SOFTRST: Soft Reset
1: Enables the Soft Reset Completion interrupt.
• CRC_ERR: CRC Synchronization Error
1: Enables the CRC_SYNC interrupt.
• FO_C_OVF: FIFO Codec Overflow
1: Enables the codec FIFO overflow interrupt.
• FO_P_OVF: FIFO Preview Overflow
1: Enables the preview FIFO overflow interrupt.
• FO_P_EMP
1: Enables the preview FIFO empty interrupt.
• FO_C_EMP
1: Enables the codec FIFO empty interrupt.
• FR_OVR: Frame Overrun
1: Enables the Frame overrun interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
727
37.5.5 ISI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
ISI_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
FR_OVR
8
FO_C_EMP
7
FO_P_EMP
6
FO_P_OVF
5
FO_C_OVF
4
CRC_ERR
3
–
2
SOFTRST
1
DIS
0
SOF
• SOF: Start of Frame
1: Disables the Start of Frame interrupt.
• DIS: Image Sensor Interface Disable
1: Disables the DIS interrupt.
• SOFTRST
1: Disables the soft reset completion interrupt.
• CRC_ERR: CRC Synchronization Error
1: Disables the CRC_SYNC interrupt.
• FO_C_OVF: FIFO Codec Overflow
1: Disables the codec FIFO overflow interrupt.
• FO_P_OVF: FIFO Preview Overflow
1: Disables the preview FIFO overflow interrupt.
• FO_P_EMP
1: Disables the preview FIFO empty interrupt.
• FO_C_EMP
1: Disables the codec FIFO empty interrupt.
• FR_OVR
1: Disables frame overrun interrupt.
728
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.6 ISI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
ISI_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
FR_OVR
8
FO_C_EMP
7
FO_P_EMP
6
FO_P_OVF
5
FO_C_OVF
4
CRC_ERR
3
–
2
SOFTRST
1
DIS
0
SOF
• SOF: Start of Frame
0: The Start of Frame interrupt is disabled.
1: The Start of Frame interrupt is enabled.
• DIS: Image Sensor Interface Disable
0: The DIS interrupt is disabled.
1: The DIS interrupt is enabled.
• SOFTRST
0: The soft reset completion interrupt is enabled.
1: The soft reset completion interrupt is disabled.
• CRC_ERR: CRC Synchronization Error
0: The CRC_SYNC interrupt is disabled.
1: The CRC_SYNC interrupt is enabled.
• FO_C_OVF: FIFO Codec Overflow
0: The codec FIFO overflow interrupt is disabled.
1: The codec FIFO overflow interrupt is enabled.
• FO_P_OVF: FIFO Preview Overflow
0: The preview FIFO overflow interrupt is disabled.
1: The preview FIFO overflow interrupt is enabled.
• FO_P_EMP
0: The preview FIFO empty interrupt is disabled.
1: The preview FIFO empty interrupt is enabled.
• FO_C_EMP
0: The codec FIFO empty interrupt is disabled.
1: The codec FIFO empty interrupt is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
729
• FR_OVR: Frame Rate Overrun
0: The frame overrun interrupt is disabled.
1: The frame overrun interrupt is enabled.
730
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.7 ISI Preview Register
Name:
ISI_PSIZE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
19
18
17
11
–
10
–
9
3
2
1
24
PREV_HSIZE
16
PREV_HSIZE
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
7
6
5
4
8
PREV_VSIZE
0
PREV_VSIZE
• PREV_VSIZE: Vertical size for the preview path
Vertical Preview size = PREV_VSIZE + 1 (480 max).
• PREV_HSIZE: Horizontal size for the preview path
Horizontal Preview size = PREV_HSIZE + 1 (640 max).
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
731
37.5.8 ISI Preview Decimation Factor Register
Name:
ISI_PDECF
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DEC_FACTOR
• DEC_FACTOR: Decimation factor
DEC_FACTOR is 8-bit width, range is from 16 to 255. Values from 0 to 16 do not perform any decimation.
732
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.9 ISI Preview Primary FBD Register
Name:
ISI_PPFBD
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
PREV_FBD_ADDR
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
PREV_FBD_ADDR
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
PREV_FBD_ADDR
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
PREV_FBD_ADDR
2
1
0
• PREV_FBD_ADDR: Base address for preview frame buffer descriptor
Written with the address of the start of the preview frame buffer queue, reads as a pointer to the current buffer being used.
The frame buffer is forced to word alignment.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
733
37.5.10 ISI Codec DMA Base Address Register
Name:
ISI_CDBA
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
CODEC_DMA_ADDR
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
CODEC_DMA_ADDR
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
CODEC_DMA_ADDR
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CODEC_DMA_ADDR
2
1
0
• CODEC_DMA_ADDR: Base address for codec DMA
This register contains codec datapath start address of buffer location.
734
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.11 ISI Color Space Conversion YCrCb to RGB Set 0 Register
Name:
ISI_Y2R_SET0
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
C3
23
22
21
20
C2
15
14
13
12
C1
7
6
5
4
C0
• C0: Color Space Conversion Matrix Coefficient C0
C0 element, default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 1.9921875.
• C1: Color Space Conversion Matrix Coefficient C1
C1 element, default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 1.9921875.
• C2: Color Space Conversion Matrix Coefficient C2
C2 element, default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 1.9921875.
• C3: Color Space Conversion Matrix Coefficient C3
C3 element default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 1.9921875.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
735
37.5.12 ISI Color Space Conversion YCrCb to RGB Set 1 Register
Name:
ISI_Y2R_SET1
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
Cboff
13
Croff
12
Yoff
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
C4
C4
• C4: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C4
C4 element default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 3.9921875.
• Yoff: Color Space Conversion Luminance default offset
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 128.
• Croff: Color Space Conversion Red Chrominance default offset
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 16.
• Cboff: Color Space Conversion Blue Chrominance default offset
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 16.
736
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.13 ISI Color Space Conversion RGB to YCrCb Set 0 Register
Name:
ISI_R2Y_SET0
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
Roff
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
C2
15
14
13
12
C1
7
6
5
4
C0
• C0: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C0
C0 element default step is 1/256, from 0 to 0.49609375.
• C1: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C1
C1 element default step is 1/128, from 0 to 0.9921875.
• C2: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C2
C2 element default step is 1/512, from 0 to 0.2480468875.
• Roff: Color Space Conversion Red component offset
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 16.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
737
37.5.14 ISI Color Space Conversion RGB to YCrCb Set 1 Register
Name:
ISI_R2Y_SET1
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
Goff
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
C5
15
14
13
12
C4
7
6
5
4
C3
• C3: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C3
C0 element default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 0.9921875.
• C4: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C4
C1 element default step is 1/256, ranges from 0 to 0.49609375.
• C5: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C5
C1 element default step is 1/512, ranges from 0 to 0.2480468875.
• Goff: Color Space Conversion Green component offset.
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 128.
738
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
37.5.15 ISI Color Space Conversion RGB to YCrCb Set 2 Register
Name:
ISI_R2Y_SET2
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
Boff
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
C8
15
14
13
12
C7
7
6
5
4
C6
• C6: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C6
C6 element default step is 1/512, ranges from 0 to 0.2480468875.
• C7: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C7
C7 element default step is 1/256, ranges from 0 to 0.49609375.
• C8: Color Space Conversion Matrix coefficient C8
C8 element default step is 1/128, ranges from 0 to 0.9921875.
• Boff: Color Space Conversion Blue component offset
0: No offset.
1: Offset = 128.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
739
38.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
38.1
Description
The ADC is based on a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC). It
also integrates an 4-to-1 analog multiplexer, making possible the analog-to-digital conversions of 4 analog lines.
The conversions extend from 0V to ADVREF.
The ADC supports an 8-bit or 10-bit resolution mode, and conversion results are reported in a common register for
all channels, as well as in a channel-dedicated register. Software trigger, external trigger on rising edge of the
ADTRG pin or internal triggers from Timer Counter output(s) are configurable.
The ADC also integrates a Sleep Mode and a conversion sequencer and connects with a PDC channel. These
features reduce both power consumption and processor intervention.
Finally, the user can configure ADC timings, such as Startup Time and Sample & Hold Time.
38.2
740
Embedded Characteristics
4-channel ADC
10-bit 312K samples/sec. Successive Approximation Register ADC
-2/+2 LSB Integral Non Linearity, -1/+1 LSB Differential Non Linearity
Individual enable and disable of each channel
External voltage reference for better accuracy on low voltage inputs
Multiple trigger source – Hardware or software trigger – External trigger pin – Timer Counter 0 to 2 outputs
TIOA0 to TIOA2 trigger
Sleep Mode and conversion sequencer – Automatic wakeup on trigger and back to sleep mode after
conversions of all enabled channels
Four analog inputs shared with digital signals
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.3
Block Diagram
Figure 38-1.
Analog-to-Digital Converter Block Diagram
Timer
Counter
Channels
ADC
Trigger
Selection
ADTRG
Control
Logic
ADC Interrupt
AIC
VDDANA
ADVREF
ASB
AD-
Dedicated
Analog
Inputs
PDC
ADUser
Interface
AD-
AD-
Analog Inputs
Multiplexed
with I/O lines
PIO
Peripheral Bridge
Successive
Approximation
Register
Analog-to-Digital
Converter
APB
AD-
AD-
GND
38.4
Signal Description
Table 38-1.
ADC Pin Description
Pin Name
Description
VDDANA
Analog power supply
ADVREF
Reference voltage
AD0–AD3
Analog input channels
ADTRG
External trigger
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
741
38.5
Product Dependencies
38.5.1 Power Management
The ADC is automatically clocked after the first conversion in Normal Mode. In Sleep Mode, the ADC clock is
automatically stopped after each conversion. As the logic is small and the ADC cell can be put into Sleep Mode,
the Power Management Controller has no effect on the ADC behavior.
38.5.2 Interrupt Sources
The ADC interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Advanced Interrupt Controller. Using the
ADC interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first.
38.5.3 Analog Inputs
The analog input pins can be multiplexed with PIO lines. In this case, the assignment of the ADC input is
automatically done as soon as the corresponding channel is enabled by writing the register ADC_CHER. By
default, after reset, the PIO line is configured as input with its pull-up enabled and the ADC input is connected to
the GND.
38.5.4 I/O Lines
The pin ADTRG may be shared with other peripheral functions through the PIO Controller. In this case, the PIO
Controller should be set accordingly to assign the pin ADTRG to the ADC function.
38.5.5 Timer Triggers
Timer Counters may or may not be used as hardware triggers depending on user requirements. Thus, some or all
of the timer counters may be non-connected.
38.5.6 Conversion Performances
For performance and electrical characteristics of the ADC, see the DC Characteristics section.
742
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.6
Functional Description
38.6.1 Analog-to-digital Conversion
The ADC uses the ADC Clock to perform conversions. Converting a single analog value to a 10-bit digital data
requires Sample and Hold Clock cycles as defined in the field SHTIM of the “ADC Mode Register” on page 749
and 10 ADC Clock cycles. The ADC Clock frequency is selected in the PRESCAL field of the Mode Register
(ADC_MR).
The ADC clock range is between MCK/2, if PRESCAL is 0, and MCK/128, if PRESCAL is set to 63 (0x3F).
PRESCAL must be programmed in order to provide an ADC clock frequency according to the parameters given in
the Product definition section.
38.6.2 Conversion Reference
The conversion is performed on a full range between 0V and the reference voltage pin ADVREF. Analog inputs
between these voltages convert to values based on a linear conversion.
38.6.3 Conversion Resolution
The ADC supports 8-bit or 10-bit resolutions. The 8-bit selection is performed by setting the bit LOWRES in the
ADC Mode Register (ADC_MR). By default, after a reset, the resolution is the highest and the DATA field in the
data registers is fully used. By setting the bit LOWRES, the ADC switches in the lowest resolution and the
conversion results can be read in the eight lowest significant bits of the data registers. The two highest bits of the
DATA field in the corresponding ADC_CDR and of the LDATA field in the ADC_LCDR read 0.
Moreover, when a PDC channel is connected to the ADC, 10-bit resolution sets the transfer request sizes to 16-bit.
Setting the bit LOWRES automatically switches to 8-bit data transfers. In this case, the destination buffers are
optimized.
38.6.4 Conversion Results
When a conversion is completed, the resulting 10-bit digital value is stored in the Channel Data Register
(ADC_CDR) of the current channel and in the ADC Last Converted Data Register (ADC_LCDR).
The channel EOC bit in the Status Register (ADC_SR) is set and the DRDY is set. In the case of a connected PDC
channel, DRDY rising triggers a data transfer request. In any case, either EOC and DRDY can trigger an interrupt.
Reading one of the ADC_CDR registers clears the corresponding EOC bit. Reading ADC_LCDR clears the DRDY
bit and the EOC bit corresponding to the last converted channel.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
743
Figure 38-2.
EOCx and DRDY Flag Behavior
Write the ADC_CR
with START = 1
Read the ADC_CDRx
Write the ADC_CR
with START = 1
Read the ADC_LCDR
CHx
(ADC_CHSR)
EOCx
(ADC_SR)
Conversion Time
Conversion Time
DRDY
(ADC_SR)
If the ADC_CDR is not read before further incoming data is converted, the corresponding Overrun Error (OVRE)
flag is set in the Status Register (ADC_SR).
In the same way, new data converted when DRDY is high sets the bit GOVRE (General Overrun Error) in
ADC_SR.
The OVRE and GOVRE flags are automatically cleared when ADC_SR is read.
744
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 38-3.
GOVRE and OVREx Flag Behavior
Read ADC_SR
ADTRG
CH0
(ADC_CHSR)
CH1
(ADC_CHSR)
ADC_LCDR
Undefined Data
ADC_CDR0
Undefined Data
ADC_CDR1
EOC0
(ADC_SR)
EOC1
(ADC_SR)
Data B
Data A
Data C
Data A
Data C
Undefined Data
Data B
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Read ADC_CDR0
Read ADC_CDR1
GOVRE
(ADC_SR)
DRDY
(ADC_SR)
OVRE0
(ADC_SR)
Warning: If the corresponding channel is disabled during a conversion or if it is disabled and then reenabled
during a conversion, its associated data and its corresponding EOC and OVRE flags in ADC_SR are
unpredictable.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
745
38.6.5 Conversion Triggers
Conversions of the active analog channels are started with a software or a hardware trigger. The software trigger
is provided by writing the Control Register (ADC_CR) with the bit START at 1.
The hardware trigger can be one of the TIOA outputs of the Timer Counter channels, or the external trigger input of
the ADC (ADTRG). The hardware trigger is selected with the field TRGSEL in the Mode Register (ADC_MR). The
selected hardware trigger is enabled with the bit TRGEN in the Mode Register (ADC_MR).
If a hardware trigger is selected, the start of a conversion is detected at each rising edge of the selected signal. If
one of the TIOA outputs is selected, the corresponding Timer Counter channel must be programmed in Waveform
Mode.
Only one start command is necessary to initiate a conversion sequence on all the channels. The ADC hardware
logic automatically performs the conversions on the active channels, then waits for a new request. The Channel
Enable (ADC_CHER) and Channel Disable (ADC_CHDR) Registers enable the analog channels to be enabled or
disabled independently.
If the ADC is used with a PDC, only the transfers of converted data from enabled channels are performed and the
resulting data buffers should be interpreted accordingly.
Warning: Enabling hardware triggers does not disable the software trigger functionality. Thus, if a hardware
trigger is selected, the start of a conversion can be initiated either by the hardware or the software trigger.
38.6.6 Sleep Mode and Conversion Sequencer
The ADC Sleep Mode maximizes power saving by automatically deactivating the ADC when it is not being used for
conversions. Sleep Mode is selected by setting the bit SLEEP in the Mode Register ADC_MR.
The SLEEP mode is automatically managed by a conversion sequencer, which can automatically process the
conversions of all channels at lowest power consumption.
When a start conversion request occurs, the ADC is automatically activated. As the analog cell requires a start-up
time, the logic waits during this time and starts the conversion on the enabled channels. When all conversions are
complete, the ADC is deactivated until the next trigger. Triggers occurring during the sequence are not taken into
account.
The conversion sequencer allows automatic processing with minimum processor intervention and optimized power
consumption. Conversion sequences can be performed periodically using a Timer/Counter output. The periodic
acquisition of several samples can be processed automatically without any intervention of the processor thanks to
the PDC.
Note:
The reference voltage pins always remain connected in normal mode as in sleep mode.
38.6.7 ADC Timings
Each ADC has its own minimal Startup Time that is programmed through the field STARTUP in the Mode Register
ADC_MR.
In the same way, a minimal Sample and Hold Time is necessary for the ADC to guarantee the best converted final
value between two channels selection. This time has to be programmed through the bitfield SHTIM in the Mode
Register ADC_MR.
Warning: No input buffer amplifier to isolate the source is included in the ADC. This must be taken into
consideration to program a precise value in the SHTIM field. See Section 39.10 “ADC Characteristics”.
746
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) User Interface
Table 38-2.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
ADC_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
ADC_MR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Channel Enable Register
ADC_CHER
Write-only
–
0x14
Channel Disable Register
ADC_CHDR
Write-only
–
0x18
Channel Status Register
ADC_CHSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x1C
Status Register
ADC_SR
Read-only
0x000C0000
0x20
Last Converted Data Register
ADC_LCDR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
ADC_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
ADC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
ADC_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30
Channel Data Register 0
ADC_CDR0
Read-only
0x00000000
0x34
Channel Data Register 1
ADC_CDR1
Read-only
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
Channel Data Register 3
ADC_CDR3
Read-only
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
...
0x40
0x44–0xFC
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
747
38.7.1 ADC Control Register
Name:
ADC_CR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
START
0
SWRST
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Resets the ADC simulating a hardware reset.
• START: Start Conversion
0: No effect.
1: Begins analog-to-digital conversion.
748
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.2 ADC Mode Register
Name:
ADC_MR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
23
–
22
21
20
19
STARTUP
15
14
13
12
26
25
24
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
TRGSEL
1
0
TRGEN
SHTIM
PRESCAL
7
–
6
–
5
SLEEP
4
LOWRES
• TRGEN: Trigger Enable
Value
Selected TRGEN
0
Hardware triggers are disabled. Starting a conversion is only possible by software.
1
Hardware trigger selected by TRGSEL field is enabled.
• TRGSEL: Trigger Selection
Value
Selected TRGSEL
0
0
0
TIO Output of the Timer Counter Channel 0
0
0
1
TIO Output of the Timer Counter Channel 1
0
1
0
TIO Output of the Timer Counter Channel 2
0
1
1
Reserved
1
0
0
Reserved
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
0
External trigger
1
1
1
Reserved
• LOWRES: Resolution
Value
Selected Resolution
0
10-bit resolution
1
8-bit resolution
• SLEEP: Sleep Mode
Value
Selected Mode
0
Normal Mode
1
Sleep Mode
• PRESCAL: Prescaler Rate Selection
ADCClock = MCK / ( (PRESCAL + 1) * 2 )
• STARTUP: Start Up Time
Startup Time = (STARTUP + 1) * 8 / ADCClock
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
749
• SHTIM: Sample & Hold Time
Sample & Hold Time = (SHTIM + 1) / ADCClock
750
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.3 ADC Channel Enable Register
Name:
ADC_CHER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
CH3
2
CH2
1
CH1
0
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding channel.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
751
38.7.4 ADC Channel Disable Register
Name:
ADC_CHDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
CH3
2
CH2
1
CH1
0
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding channel.
Warning: If the corresponding channel is disabled during a conversion or if it is disabled then reenabled during a conversion, its associated data and its corresponding EOC and OVRE flags in ADC_SR are unpredictable.
752
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.5 ADC Channel Status Register
Name:
ADC_CHSR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
CH3
2
CH2
1
CH1
0
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Status
0: Corresponding channel is disabled.
1: Corresponding channel is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
753
38.7.6 ADC Status Register
Name:
ADC_SR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXBUFF
18
ENDRX
17
GOVRE
16
DRDY
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
OVRE3
10
OVRE2
9
OVRE1
8
OVRE0
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
EOC3
2
EOC2
1
EOC1
0
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion x
0: Corresponding analog channel is disabled, or the conversion is not finished.
1: Corresponding analog channel is enabled and conversion is complete.
• OVREx: Overrun Error x
0: No overrun error on the corresponding channel since the last read of ADC_SR.
1: There has been an overrun error on the corresponding channel since the last read of ADC_SR.
• DRDY: Data Ready
0: No data has been converted since the last read of ADC_LCDR.
1: At least one data has been converted and is available in ADC_LCDR.
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error
0: No General Overrun Error occurred since the last read of ADC_SR.
1: At least one General Overrun Error has occurred since the last read of ADC_SR.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer
0: The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR.
1: The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0: ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both ADC_RCR and ADC_RNCR have a value of 0.
754
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.7 ADC Last Converted Data Register
Name:
ADC_LCDR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LDATA
0
LDATA
• LDATA: Last Data Converted
The analog-to-digital conversion data is placed into this register at the end of a conversion and remains until a new conversion is completed.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
755
38.7.8 ADC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
ADC_IER
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXBUFF
18
ENDRX
17
GOVRE
16
DRDY
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
OVRE3
10
OVRE2
9
OVRE1
8
OVRE0
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
EOC3
2
EOC2
1
EOC1
0
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Enable x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Enable
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
756
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.9 ADC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
ADC_IDR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXBUFF
18
ENDRX
17
GOVRE
16
DRDY
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
OVRE3
10
OVRE2
9
OVRE1
8
OVRE0
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
EOC3
2
EOC2
1
EOC1
0
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Disable x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Disable
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
757
38.7.10 ADC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
ADC_IMR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXBUFF
18
ENDRX
17
GOVRE
16
DRDY
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
OVRE3
10
OVRE2
9
OVRE1
8
OVRE0
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
EOC3
2
EOC2
1
EOC1
0
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Mask x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Mask
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
758
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
38.7.11 ADC Channel Data Register
Name:
ADC_CDRx
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DATA
0
DATA
• DATA: Converted Data
The analog-to-digital conversion data is placed into this register at the end of a conversion and remains until a new conversion is completed. The Convert Data Register (CDR) is only loaded if the corresponding analog channel is enabled.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
759
39.
SAM9260 Electrical Characteristics
39.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 39-1.
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Junction Temperature............................................................125°C
*NOTICE:
Storage Temperature...............................................-60°C to 150°C
Voltage on Input Pins
with Respect to Ground.............-0.3V to VDDIO + 0.3V (+4V max)
Maximum Operating Voltage
(VDDCORE, VDDPLL and VDDBU)........................................2.0V
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only
and functional operation of the device at these
or other conditions beyond those indicated in
the operational sections of this specification is
not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Maximum Operating Voltage
(VDDIOM and VDDIOP)...........................................................4.0V
Total DC Output Current on all I/O lines..............................350 mA
39.2
DC Characteristics
The following characteristics are applicable to the operating temperature range: TA = -40°C to 85°C, unless otherwise
specified.
Table 39-2.
DC Characteristics
Symbol Parameter
Conditions
VDDCORE DC Supply Core
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1.65
1.8
1.95
V
VDDBU
DC Supply Backup
1.65
1.8
1.95
V
VDDPLL
DC Supply PLL
1.65
1.8
1.95
V
VDDIOM
DC Supply Memory I/Os
1.65/3.0
1.8/3.3
1.95/3.6
V
VDDIOP0
DC Supply Peripheral I/Os
3.0
3.3
3.6
V
VDDIOP1
DC Supply Peripheral I/Os
1.65
1.8/2.5/3.3
3.6
V
VDDANA
DC Supply Analog
3.0
3.3
3.6
V
VIL
Input Low-level Voltage
VIH
Input High-level Voltage
VOL
VOH
760
VDDIO 3.0–3.6 V
-0.3
0.8
V
VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
-0.3
0.3 × VDDIO
V
VDDIO 3.0–3.6 V
2.0
VDDIO + 0.3V
V
0.7 × VDDIO
VDDIO + 0.3V
V
IO Max, VDDIO 3.0–3.6 V
0.4
V
CMOS (IO < 0.3 mA), VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
0.1
V
TTL (IO Max), VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
0.4
V
VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
Output Low-level Voltage
Output High-level Voltage
IO Max, VDDIO 3.0–3.6 V
VDDIO - 0.4
V
CMOS (IO < 0.3 mA), VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
VDDIO - 0.1
V
TTL (IO Max), VDDIO 1.65–1.95 V
VDDIO - 0.4
V
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 39-2.
DC Characteristics (Continued)
Symbol Parameter
RPULLUP
IO
Conditions
Pull-up Resistance
Output Current
Min
Typ
Max
PA0–PA31 PB0–PB31 PC0–PC3
NTRST and NRST
67
100
180
PC4–PC31, VDDIOM in 1.8V range
240
1000
PC4–PC31, VDDIOM in 3.3V range
120
350
PA0–PA31 PB0–PB31 PC0–PC3
16
PC4–PC31, VDDIOM in 3.3V range
2
PC4–PC31, VDDIOM in 1.8V range
4
On VDDCORE = 1.8V,
MCK = 0 Hz, excluding POR
All inputs driven TMS, TDI,
TCK, NRST = 1
ISC
39.3
TA = 25°C
Unit
kΩ
mA
500
µA
TA = 85°C
5000
Static Current
On VDDBU = 1.8V,
Logic cells consumption,
excluding POR
TA = 25°C
All inputs driven WKUP = 0
TA = 85°C
2
µA
20
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption of PLLs, Slow Clock and Main Oscillator
Power consumption of power supply in four different modes: Active, Idle, Ultra Low-power and Backup
Power consumption by peripheral: calculated as the difference in current measurement after having enabled
then disabled the corresponding clock
39.3.1 Power Consumption versus Modes
The values in Table 39-3 and Table 39-4 are estimated values of the power consumption with operating conditions
as follows:
VDDIOM = VDDIOP = 3.3V
VDDPLL = 1.8V
VDDCORE = VDDBU = 1.8V
TA = 25°C
There is no consumption on the I/Os of the device.
Figure 39-1.
Measures Schematics
VDDBU
AMP1
VDDCORE
AMP2
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
761
Table 39-3.
Power Consumption for Different Modes
Mode
Conditions
Consumption
Unit
130
mA
17
mA
600
µA
5
µA
ARM Core clock is 180 MHz.
MCK is 90 MHz.
Active
All peripheral clocks deactivated.
onto AMP2
Idle state, waiting an interrupt.
Idle
All peripheral clocks deactivated.
onto AMP2
ARM Core clock is 500 Hz.
Ultra low power
All peripheral clocks deactivated.
onto AMP2
Device only VDDBU powered
Backup
Table 39-4.
onto AMP1
Power Consumption by Peripheral in Active Mode
Peripheral
Consumption
ADC
17
EMAC
88
ISI
8
MCI
30
PIO Controller
10
SPI
10
SSC
20
Timer Counter Blocks
6
TWI
21
UDP
20
UHP
14
USART
30
Unit
µA/MHz
39.4
Core Power Supply POR Characteristics
Table 39-5.
Symbol
Power-On Reset Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VT+
Threshold Voltage Rising
Minimum Slope of +2.0V/200ms
1.35
1.50
1.59
V
VT-
Threshold Voltage Falling
1.25
1.30
1.40
V
tRST
Reset Time
100
200
350
µs
762
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
39.5
Clock Characteristics
39.5.1 Processor Clock Characteristics
Table 39-6.
Processor Clock Waveform Parameters
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
1/(tCPPCK)
Processor Clock Frequency
1/(tCPPCK)
Processor Clock Frequency
Min
Max
Unit
VDDCORE = 1.65V
TA = 85°C
189
MHz
VDDCORE = 1.8V
TA = 85°C
210
MHz
Max
Unit
39.5.2 Master Clock Characteristics
Table 39-7.
Symbol
Master Clock Waveform Parameters
Parameter
Conditions
1/(tCPMCK)
Master Clock Frequency
VDDCORE = 1.65V
TA = 85°C
94.5
MHz
1/(tCPMCK)
Master Clock Frequency
VDDCORE = 1.8V
TA = 85°C
105
MHz
39.6
Min
Crystal Oscillator Characteristics
The following characteristics are applicable to the operating temperature range: TA = -40°C to 85°C and worst case of
power supply, unless otherwise specified.
39.6.1 32 kHz Oscillator Characteristics
Table 39-8.
Symbol
32 kHz Oscillator Characteristics
Parameter
1/(tCP32KHz)
Crystal Oscillator Frequency
CCRYSTAL32
Load Capacitance
CLEXT32(2)
External Load Capacitance
Conditions
Min
Crystal @ 32.768 kHz
6
Unit
kHz
12.5
pF
CCRYSTAL32 = 6 pF
4
pF
CCRYSTAL32 = 12.5 pF
17
pF
40
RS = 50 kΩ(1)
Startup Time
RS = 100 kΩ(1)
Notes:
Max
32.768
Duty Cycle
tSTART
Typ
60
%
CCRYSTAL32 = 6 pF
300
ms
CCRYSTAL32 = 12.5 pF
900
ms
CCRYSTAL32 = 6 pF
600
ms
CCRYSTAL32 = 12.5 pF
1200
ms
1. RS is the equivalent series resistance.
2. CLEXT32 is determined by taking into account internal, parasitic and package load capacitance.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
763
Figure 39-2.
32 kHz Oscillator Schematic
SAM9260
XIN32
XOUT32
GNDBU
CCRYSTAL32
CLEXT32
Table 39-9.
Symbol
ESR
Cm
CSHUNT
CLEXT32
Crystal Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Equivalent Series Resistor Rs
Crystal @ 32.768 kHz
Motional Capacitance
Crystal @ 32.768 kHz
Shunt Capacitance
Crystal @ 32.768 kHz
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
50
100
kΩ
1
3
fF
0.8
1.7
pF
Max
Unit
39.6.2 RC Oscillator Characteristics
Table 39-10.
RC Oscillator Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
1/(tCPRCz)
Crystal Oscillator Frequency
22
42
kHz
Duty Cycle
45
55
%
75
µs
tSTART
764
Startup Time
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Conditions
Min
Typ
39.6.3 Main Oscillator Characteristics
Table 39-11.
Symbol
1/(tCPMAIN)
Main Oscillator Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Crystal Oscillator Frequency
CCRYSTAL
Crystal Load Capacitance
CLEXT(6)
External Load Capacitance
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
3
16
20
MHz
17.5
pF
12.5
CCRYSTAL = 12.5 pF(5)
CCRYSTAL = 17.5 pF
(5)
Duty Cycle
30
3
pF
13
pF
50
70
%
VDDPLL = 1.65 to 1.95 V
tSTART
IDDST
Standby Current Consumption
14.5
CSHUNT = 7 pF, 1/(tCPMAIN) = 8 MHz
4
CSHUNT = 7 pF, 1/(tCPMAIN) = 16 MHz
1.4
CSHUNT = 7 pF, 1/(tCPMAIN) = 20 MHz
1
Standby mode
1
@ 3 MHz
15
@ 8 MHz
30
@ 16 MHz
50
@ 20 MHz
50
Drive Level
PON
IDD ON
Notes:
Startup Time
CSHUNT = 3 pF, 1/(tCPMAIN) = 3 MHz
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ms
µA
µW
@ 3 MHz
(1)
150
250
@ 8 MHz
(2)
150
250
(3)
300
450
@ 20 MHz(4)
400
550
Current Dissipation
@ 16 MHz
µA
RS = 100 to 200 Ω; CSHUNT = 2.0 to 2.5 pF; Cm = 2 to 1.5 fF (typ, worst case) using 1 kΩ serial resistor on XOUT.
RS = 50 to 100 Ω; CSHUNT = 2.0 to 2.5 pF; Cm = 4 to 3 fF (typ, worst case).
RS = 25 to 50 Ω; CSHUNT = 2.5 to 3.0 pF; Cm = 7 to 5 fF (typ, worst case).
RS = 20 to 50 Ω; CSHUNT = 3.2 to 4.0 pF; Cm = 10 to 8 fF (typ, worst case).
Additional user load capacitance should be subtracted from CLEXT.
CLEXT is determined by taking into account internal, parasitic and package load capacitance.
Figure 39-3.
Main Oscillator Schematic
XIN
XOUT
GNDPLL
1K
CCRYSTAL
CLEXT
CLEXT
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
765
39.6.4 Crystal Characteristics
Table 39-12.
Symbol
ESR
Crystal Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Fundamental @ 3 MHz
200
Fundamental @ 8 MHz
100
Fundamental @ 16 MHz
80
Fundamental @ 20 MHz
50
Equivalent Series Resistor Rs
Cm
CSHUNT
Unit
Ω
Motional Capacitance
8
fF
Shunt Capacitance
7
pF
39.6.5 XIN Clock Characteristics
Table 39-13.
XIN Clock Electrical Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
1/(tCPXIN)
XIN Clock Frequency
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
50
MHz
tCPXIN
XIN Clock Period
tCHXIN
XIN Clock High Half-period
0.4 × tCPXIN
0.6 × tCPXIN
ns
tCLXIN
XIN Clock Low Half-period
0.4 × tCPXIN
0.6 × tCPXIN
ns
25
pF
1000
kΩ
1.8
V
CIN
XIN Input Capacitance
RIN
XIN Pulldown Resistor
VIN
XIN Voltage
20
Main oscillator in Bypass mode (i.e., when
MOSCEN = 0 and OSCBYPASS = 1 in
CKGR_MOR). See Section 24.9.7 “PMC Clock
Generator Main Oscillator Register”.
ns
39.6.6 I/Os
Criteria used to define the maximum frequency of the I/Os:
Output duty cycle (40%–60%)
Minimum output swing: 100 mV to VDDIO - 100 mV
Addition of rising and falling time inferior to 75% of the period
Table 39-14.
Symbol
I/O Characteristics
Parameter
VDDIOP0-powered Pins Frequency
fmax
VDDIOP1-powered Pins Frequency
Conditions
Max
Unit
3.3V domain
(1)
Min
83.3
MHz
3.3V domain
(1)
83.3
MHz
2.5V domain
(2)
71.4
MHz
50
MHz
1.8V domain(3)
Notes:
766
1. 3.3V domain: VDDIOP 3.0–3.6 V, maximum external capacitor = 40 pF
2. 2.5V domain: VDDIOP 2.3–2.7 V, maximum external capacitor = 30 pF
3. 1.8V domain: VDDIOP 1.65–1.95 V, maximum external capacitor = 20 pF
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
39.6.7 PLL Characteristics
Table 39-15.
Symbol
fOUT
PLLA Characteristics(1)
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Input Frequency
IPLL
Current Consumption
80
160
MHz
Field CKGR_PLLAR.OUTA = 10
150
240
MHz
1
32
MHz
4.5
mA
1
µA
Max
Unit
130
MHz
(1)
5
MHz
1.2
mA
1
µA
Symbol
fOUT
1
ms
Startup time depends on PLL RC filter. A calculation tool is provided by Atmel.
PLLB Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Output Frequency
Field CKGR_PLLBR.OUTB = 01
fIN
Input Frequency
IPLL
Current Consumption
Standby mode
tSTART
1.
Startup Time
Min
70
1
Active mode @130 MHz
Note:
3.6
Standby mode
Table 39-16.
Unit
Field CKGR_PLLAR.OUTA = 00
Active mode @240 MHz
1.
Max
Output Frequency
fIN
Note:
Typ
Typ
The embedded filter is optimized for a 2 MHz input frequency. DIVB must be selected to meet this requirement.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
767
39.7
USB Transceiver Characteristics
Table 39-17.
Symbol
USB Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
0.8
V
Input Levels
VIL
Low Level
VIH
High Level
VDI
Differential Input Sensitivity
VCM
Differential Input Common Mode Range
CIN
Transceiver capacitance
Capacitance to ground on each line
Ilkg
Hi-Z State Data Line Leakage
0V < VIN < 3.3V
Recommended External USB Series
Resistor
In series with each USB pin with ±5%
REXT
|(D+) - (D-)|
2.0
V
0.2
V
0.8
- 10
2.5
V
9.18
pF
+ 10
µA
Ω
27
Output Levels
VOL
Low Level Output
Measured with RL of 1.425 kΩ tied to 3.6V
0.0
0.3
V
VOH
High Level Output
Measured with RL of 14.25 kΩ tied to GND
2.8
3.6
V
VCRS
Output Signal Crossover Voltage
Measurement conditions described in
Figure 39-4
1.3
2.0
V
Pull-up and Pull-down Resistor
RPUI
Bus Pull-up Resistor on Upstream Port
(idle bus)
0.900
1.575
kΩ
RPUA
Bus Pull-up Resistor on Upstream Port
(upstream port receiving)
1.425
3.090
kΩ
RPD
Bus Pull-down resistor
14.25
24.8
kΩ
39.8
EBI Timings
39.8.1 EBI Timings Conditions
Timings are given assuming a capacitance load on data, control and address pads as defined in Table 39-18.
Table 39-18.
768
Capacitance Load
VDDIOM Supply
Corner Max
1.8 V (1.65–1.95 V)
30 pF
3.3 V (3.0–3.6 V)
50 pF
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
39.8.2 SMC Timings
Table 39-19.
SMC Read Signals with Hold Settings
Min
Symbol
Parameter
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
Unit
10
8.4
ns
0
0
ns
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
ns
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.1
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.2
ns
nrd hold length * tCPMCK - 0.3
nrd hold length * tCPMCK - 0.3
ns
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
ns
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 3.4
nrd hold length * tCPMCK + 3.4
ns
(nrd hold length - ncs rd hold length)
* tCPMCK + 3.6
(nrd hold length - ncs rd hold length)
* tCPMCK + 3.6
ns
nrd pulse length * tCPMCK + 10.2
nrd pulse length * tCPMCK + 10.1
ns
13.6
12
ns
0
0
ns
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.6
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.6
ns
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
ns
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
ns
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.5
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 0.5
ns
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 3.6
ncs rd hold length * tCPMCK + 3.6
ns
(ncs rd hold length - nrd hold length)
* tCPMCK + 3.6
(ncs rd hold length - nrd hold length)
* tCPMCK + 3.6
ns
ncs rd pulse length * tCPMCK + 8.5
ncs rd pulse length * tCPMCK + 8
ns
NRD Controlled (READ_MODE = 1)
SMC1
Data Setup before NRD High
SMC2
Data Hold after NRD High
SMC3
NRD High to NBS0/A0 Change
(1)
(1)
SMC4
NRD High to NBS1 Change
SMC5
NRD High to NBS2/A1 Change (1)
NRD High to NBS3 Change
SMC6
(1)
SMC7
NRD High to A2–A25 Change
SMC8
NRD High to NCS Inactive (1)
SMC9
NRD Pulse Width
(1)
NCS Controlled (READ_MODE = 0)
SMC10
Data Setup before NCS High
SMC11
Data Hold after NCS High
SMC12
NCS High to NBS0/A0 Change
SMC13
NCS High to NBS1 Change (1)
NCS High to NBS2/A1 Change
SMC14
SMC15
NCS High to NBS3 Change
NCS High to A2–A25 Change
SMC17
NCS High to NRD Inactive (1)
NCS Pulse Width
SMC18
(1)
(1)
SMC16
Notes:
(1)
(1)
1. hold length = total cycle duration - setup duration - pulse duration. “hold length” is for “ncs rd hold length” or “nrd hold
length”.
Table 39-20.
SMC Read Signals with No Hold Settings
Min
Symbol
Parameter
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
Unit
13.3
11.3
ns
0
0
ns
5.5
4.4
ns
0
0
ns
NRD Controlled (READ_MODE = 1)
SMC19
Data Setup before NRD High
SMC20
Data Hold after NRD High
NCS Controlled (READ_MODE = 0)
SMC21
Data Setup before NCS High
SMC22
Data Hold after NCS High
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
769
Table 39-21.
SMC Write Signals with Hold Settings
Min
Symbol
Parameter
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
Unit
(nwe pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK + 2.8
(nwe pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK + 3.6
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 8
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 8
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.5
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.6
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.3
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.2
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.2
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 0.4
ns
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 3.5
nwe hold length * tCPMCK + 3.5
ns
NWE Controlled (WRITE_MODE = 1)
Data Out Valid before NWE High
SMC23
SMC24
Data Out Valid after NWE High
(1)
NWE High to NBS0/A0 Change
SMC25
(1)
(1)
SMC26
NWE High to NBS1 Change
SMC29
NWE High to NBS2/A1 Change (1)
NWE High to NBS3 Change
SMC30
(1)
(1)
SMC31
NWE High to A2–A25 Change
SMC32
NWE High to NCS Inactive(1)
(nwe hold length - ncs wr hold
length) * tCPMCK + 3.7
(nwe hold length - ncs wr hold
length) * tCPMCK + 3.7
ns
SMC33
NWE Pulse Width
nwe pulse length * tCPMCK + 8.9
nwe pulse length * tCPMCK + 8.9
ns
NCS Controlled (WRITE_MODE = 0)
SMC34
Data Out Valid before NCS High
(ncs wr pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK +
2.8
(ncs wr pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK +
3.6
ns
SMC35
Data Out Valid after NCS High (1)
ncs wr hold length * tCPMCK + 5.7
ncs wr hold length * tCPMCK + 5.8
ns
SMC36
NCS High to NWE Inactive (1)
(ncs wr hold length - nwe hold
length) * tCPMCK + 3.7
(ncs wr hold length - nwe hold
length) * tCPMCK + 3.7
ns
Note:
1. hold length = total cycle duration - setup duration - pulse duration. “hold length” is for “ncs wr hold length” or “nwe hold
length”.
Table 39-22.
SMC Write Signals with No Hold Settings (NWE Controlled Only)
Min
Symbol
Parameter
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
Unit
SMC37
NWE Rising to A2–A25 Valid
3.7
3.5
ns
SMC38
NWE Rising to NBS0/A0 Valid
0.5
0.6
ns
SMC39
NWE Rising to NBS1 Change
0.3
0.3
ns
SMC40
NWE Rising to A1/NBS2 Change
0.2
0.2
ns
SMC41
NWE Rising to NBS3 Change
0.4
0.4
ns
SMC42
NWE Rising to NCS Rising
1.5
1.5
ns
SMC43
Data Out Valid before NWE Rising
(nwe pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK + 2.8
(nwe pulse length - 1) * tCPMCK + 3.6
ns
SMC44
Data Out Valid after NWE Rising
8
8
ns
SMC45
NWE Pulse Width
nwe pulse length * tCPMCK + 8.9
nwe pulse length * tCPMCK + 8.9
ns
770
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 39-4.
SMC Signals for NCS Controlled Accesses
SMC16
SMC16
SMC16
A2–A25
SMC12
SMC13
SMC14
SMC15
SMC12
SMC13
SMC14
SMC15
SMC12
SMC13
SMC14
SMC15
A0/A1/NBS[3:0]
NRD
SMC17
SMC17
SMC18
NCS
SMC21
SMC18
SMC22
SMC10
SMC18
SMC11
SMC34
SMC35
D0–D15
SMC36
NWE
Figure 39-5.
SMC Signals for NRD and NWR Controlled Accesses
SMC37
SMC7
SMC7
SMC31
A2–A25
SMC38
SMC39
SMC40
SMC41
SMC3
SMC4
SMC5
SMC6
SMC3
SMC4
SMC5
SMC6
SMC25
SMC26
SMC29
SMC30
A0/A1/NBS[3:0]
SMC42
SMC8
SMC32
NCS
SMC8
NRD
SMC9
SMC19
SMC9
SMC20
SMC43
SMC44
SMC1
SMC2
SMC23
SMC24
D0–D31
SMC45
SMC33
NWE
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
771
39.8.3 SDRAMC Signals
These timings are given for a 10 pF load on SDCK.
Table 39-23.
SDRAMC Clock Signal
Max
Symbol
1/(tCPSDCK)
Table 39-24.
Parameter
SDRAM Controller Clock Frequency
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
MCK Maximum Clock Frequency
See Table 39-7 ”Master Clock Waveform Parameters”.
Unit
MHz
SDRAMC Signals
Min
Symbol
772
Parameter
1.8V Supply
3.3V Supply
Unit
SDRAMC1
SDCKE High before SDCK Rising Edge
5.7
4.7
ns
SDRAMC2
SDCKE Low after SDCK Rising Edge
4.9
5.9
ns
SDRAMC3
SDCKE Low before SDCK Rising Edge
6.2
5.2
ns
SDRAMC4
SDCKE High after SDCK Rising Edge
5.4
6.4
ns
SDRAMC5
SDCS Low before SDCK Rising Edge
6
5
ns
SDRAMC6
SDCS High after SDCK Rising Edge
5.4
6.4
ns
SDRAMC7
RAS Low before SDCK Rising Edge
5.8
4.8
ns
SDRAMC8
RAS High after SDCK Rising Edge
5.5
6.5
ns
SDRAMC9
SDA10 Change before SDCK Rising Edge
5.7
4.8
ns
SDRAMC10
SDA10 Change after SDCK Rising Edge
4.9
5.9
ns
SDRAMC11
Address Change before SDCK Rising Edge
5
4
ns
SDRAMC12
Address Change after SDCK Rising Edge
4.9
6
ns
SDRAMC13
Bank Change before SDCK Rising Edge
5.3
4.3
ns
SDRAMC14
Bank Change after SDCK Rising Edge
5.4
6.4
ns
SDRAMC15
CAS Low before SDCK Rising Edge
5.9
4.9
ns
SDRAMC16
CAS High after SDCK Rising Edge
5.4
6.4
ns
SDRAMC17
DQM Change before SDCK Rising Edge
5.6
4.7
ns
SDRAMC18
DQM Change after SDCK Rising Edge
4.7
5.8
ns
SDRAMC19
D0–D15 in Setup before SDCK Rising Edge
0.9
0.2
ns
SDRAMC20
D0–D15 in Hold after SDCK Rising Edge
0.6
1.1
ns
SDRAMC21
D16–D31 in Setup before SDCK Rising Edge
0.8
0
ns
SDRAMC22
D16–D31 in Hold after SDCK Rising Edge
0.7
1.2
ns
SDRAMC23
SDWE Low before SDCK Rising Edge
6.1
5.1
ns
SDRAMC24
SDWE High after SDCK Rising Edge
5.6
6.6
ns
SDRAMC25
D0–D15 Out Valid before SDCK Rising Edge
5.2
4.2
ns
SDRAMC26
D0–D15 Out Valid after SDCK Rising Edge
4.9
5.9
ns
SDRAMC27
D16–D31 Out Valid before SDCK Rising Edge
3.8
3.1
ns
SDRAMC28
D16–D31 Out Valid after SDCK Rising Edge
5.7
6.4
ns
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 39-6.
SDRAMC Signals Relative to SDCK
SDCK
SDRAMC1
SDRAMC2
SDRAMC3
SDRAMC4
SDCKE
SDRAMC5
SDRAMC6
SDRAMC7
SDRAMC8
SDRAMC5
SDRAMC6
SDRAMC5
SDRAMC6
SDCS
RAS
SDRAMC15 SDRAMC16
SDRAMC15 SDRAMC16
CAS
SDRAMC23 SDRAMC24
SDWE
SDRAMC9 SDRAMC10
SDRAMC9 SDRAMC10
SDRAMC9 SDRAMC10
SDRAMC11 SDRAMC12
SDRAMC11 SDRAMC12
SDRAMC11 SDRAMC12
SDRAMC13 SDRAMC14
SDRAMC13 SDRAMC14
SDRAMC13 SDRAMC14
SDRAMC17 SDRAMC18
SDRAMC17 SDRAMC18
SDA10
A0–A9,
A11–A13
BA0/BA1
DQM0 DQM3
SDRAMC19 SDRAMC20
D0–D15
Read
SDRAMC21 SDRAMC22
D16–D31
Read
SDRAMC25 SDRAMC26
D0–D15
to Write
SDRAMC27 SDRAMC28
D16–D31
to Write
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
773
39.9
EMAC Timings
Table 39-25.
EMAC Signals Relative to EMDC
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
EMAC1
Setup for EMDIO from EMDC rising
29.4
ns
EMAC2
Hold for EMDIO from EMDC rising
0
ns
EMAC3
EMDIO toggling from EMDC falling
0
4.3
ns
Min
Max
Unit
39.9.1 MII Mode
Table 39-26.
774
EMAC MII Specific Signals
Symbol
Parameter
EMAC4
Setup for ECOL from ETXCK rising
0
ns
EMAC5
Hold for ECOL from ETXCK rising
1.2
ns
EMAC6
Setup for ECRS from ETXCK rising
0.9
ns
EMAC7
Hold for ECRS from ETXCK rising
0
ns
EMAC8
ETXER toggling from ETXCK rising
15.6
ns
EMAC9
ETXEN toggling from ETXCK rising
14.8
ns
EMAC10
ETX toggling from ETXCK rising
15.5
ns
EMAC11
Setup for ERX from ERXCK
0
ns
EMAC12
Hold for ERX from ERXCK
4.3
ns
EMAC13
Setup for ERXER from ERXCK
0
ns
EMAC14
Hold for ERXER from ERXCK
4.1
ns
EMAC15
Setup for ERXDV from ERXCK
0
ns
EMAC16
Hold for ERXDV from ERXCK
3.7
ns
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 39-7.
EMAC MII Mode
EMDC
EMAC1
EMAC3
EMAC2
EMDIO
EMAC4
EMAC5
EMAC6
EMAC7
ECOL
ECRS
ETXCK
EMAC8
ETXER
EMAC9
ETXEN
EMAC10
ETX[3:0]
ERXCK
EMAC11
EMAC12
ERX[3:0]
EMAC13
EMAC14
EMAC15
EMAC16
ERXER
ERXDV
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
775
39.9.2 RMII Mode
Table 39-27.
EMAC RMII Specific Signals
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
EMAC21
ETXEN toggling from EREFCK rising
13.5
16
ns
EMAC22
ETX toggling from EREFCK rising
12.3
15.5
ns
EMAC23
Setup for ERX from EREFCK
0
ns
EMAC24
Hold for ERX from EREFCK
1.3
ns
EMAC25
Setup for ERXER from EREFCK
0
ns
EMAC26
Hold for ERXER from EREFCK
1.2
ns
EMAC27
Setup for ECRSDV from EREFCK
0.9
ns
EMAC28
Hold for ECRSDV from EREFCK
0
ns
Figure 39-8.
EMAC RMII Mode
EREFCK
EMAC21
ETXEN
EMAC22
ETX[1:0]
EMAC23
EMAC24
ERX[1:0]
EMAC25
EMAC26
EMAC27
EMAC28
ERXER
ECRSDV
776
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
39.10 ADC Characteristics
Table 39-28.
Channel Conversion Time and ADC Clock
Parameter
Conditions
ADC Clock Frequency
10-bit resolution mode
Startup Time
Return from Idle Mode
Track and Hold Acquisition Time (TTH)
ADC Clock = 5 MHz
Conversion Time
ADC Clock = 5 MHz
Throughput Rate
ADC Clock = 5 MHz
Note:
Min
1.2
Typ
Max
Unit
5
MHz
15
µs
(1)
µs
2
µs
312
ksps
1. In worst case, the Track-and-Hold Acquisition Time is given by:
TTH(µs) = 1.2 + (0.09 × ZIN)(kΩ)
In case of very high input impedance, this value must be respected in order to guarantee the correct converted value. An
internal input current buffer supplies the current required for the low input impedance (1 mA max).
To achieve optimal performance of the ADC, the analog power supply VDDANA and the ADVREF input voltage
must be decoupled with a 4.7 µF capacitor in parallel with a 100 nF capacitor.
Table 39-29.
External Voltage Reference Input
Parameter
Conditions
ADVREF Input Voltage Range
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VDDANA
V
220
µA
300
620
µA
Typ
Max
Unit
ADVREF
V
1
µA
2.4
ADVREF Average Current
Current Consumption on VDDANA
Table 39-30.
Analog Inputs
Parameter
Conditions
Input Voltage Range
Min
0
Input Leakage Current
Input Capacitance
Table 39-31.
Symbol
8
pF
Transfer Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Resolution
INL
Integral Non-linearity
DNL
Differential Non-linearity
Typ
Max
10
-0.9
Unit
bit
±2
LSB
+1
LSB
EG
Offset Error
±2
LSB
EO
Gain Error
±2
LSB
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
777
39.11 Peripheral Timings
39.11.1 SPI
39.11.1.1 Maximum SPI Frequency
The following formulas give maximum SPI frequency in Master read and write modes and in Slave read and write
modes.
Master Write Mode
The SPI is only sending data to a slave device such as an LCD, for example. The limit is given by SPI2 (or SPI5)
timing. Since it gives a maximum frequency above the maximum pad speed (see Section 39.6.6 “I/Os”), the
maximum SPI frequency is the one from the pad.
Master Read Mode
1
f SPCK Max = -----------------------------------------------------SPI 0 ( orSPI 3 ) + t valid
tvalid is the slave time response to output data after deleting an SPCK edge. For a non-volatile memory with tvalid
(or tv) = 12 ns, fSPCKmax = 35.4 MHz at VDDIO = 3.3V.
Slave Read Mode
In slave mode, SPCK is the input clock for the SPI. The maximum SPCK frequency is given by setup and hold
timings SPI7/SPI8 (or SPI10/SPI11). Since this gives a frequency well above the pad limit, the limit in slave read
mode is given by the SPCK pad.
Slave Write Mode
1
f SPCK Max = ------------------------------------------------------SPI 6 ( orSPI 9 ) + t setup
For 3.3V I/O domain and SPI6, fSPCKMax = 33 MHz. tsetup is the setup time from the master before sampling data.
39.11.1.2 Timing Conditions
Timings are given assuming a capacitance load on MISO, SPCK and MOSI as defined in Table 39-32.
Table 39-32.
Capacitance Load for MISO, SPCK and MOSI (product dependent)
Corner
Supply
Max
Min
3.3V
40 pF
5 pF
1.8V
20 pF
5 pF
39.11.1.3 Timing Extraction
In Figure 39-10 ”SPI Master Mode 1 and 2” and Figure 39-11 ”SPI Master Mode 0 and 3” the MOSI line shifting
edge is represented with a hold time = 0. However, it is important to note that for this device, the MISO line is
sampled prior to the MOSI line shifting edge. As shown in Figure 39-9 ”MISO Capture in Master Mode”, the device
sampling point extends the propagation delay (tp) for slave and routing delays to more than half the SPI clock
period, whereas the common sampling point allows only less than half the SPI clock period.
As an example, an SPI Slave working in Mode 0 is safely driven if the SPI Master is configured in Mode 0.
778
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Figure 39-9.
MISO Capture in Master Mode
0 < delay < SPI0 or SPI3
SPCK
(generated
by the master)
MISO
Bit N
(slave answer)
Bit N+1
MISO cannot be provided
before the edge
tp
Common sampling point
Device sampling point
Safe margin,
always > 0
Extended tp
Internal
shift register
Bit N
Figure 39-10. SPI Master Mode 1 and 2
SPCK
SPI0
SPI1
MISO
SPI2
MOSI
Figure 39-11. SPI Master Mode 0 and 3
SPCK
SPI3
SPI4
MISO
SPI5
MOSI
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
779
Figure 39-12. SPI Slave Mode 0 and 3
SPCK
SPI6
MISO
SPI7
SPI8
SPI10
SPI11
MOSI
Figure 39-13. SPI Slave Mode 1 and 2
SPCK
SPI9
MISO
MOSI
Table 39-33.
Symbol
780
SPI Timings
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
16
ns
SPI0
MISO Setup time before SPCK rises (master)
SPI1
MISO Hold time after SPCK rises (master)
SPI2
SPCK rising to MOSI Delay (master)
0.5
ns
SPI3
MISO Setup time before SPCK falls (master)
16.5
ns
SPI4
MISO Hold time after SPCK falls (master)
SPI5
SPCK falling to MOSI Delay (master)
SPI6
SPCK falling to MISO Delay (slave)
SPI7
MOSI Setup time before SPCK rises (slave)
SPI8
MOSI Hold time after SPCK rises (slave)
SPI9
SPCK rising to MISO Delay (slave)
SPI10
MOSI Setup time before SPCK falls (slave)
SPI11
MOSI Hold time after SPCK falls (slave)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
0
ns
0
ns
0
ns
28.5
ns
0
ns
0.5
ns
32
ns
11.1
ns
0
ns
39.11.2 ISI
Figure 39-14. ISI Timing Diagram
PIXCLK
ISI3
DATA[7:0]
VSYNC
HSYNC
Table 39-34.
Symbol
Valid Data
ISI1
Valid Data
Valid Data
ISI2
ISI Timings with Peripheral Supply 1.8V
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
ISI1
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC setup time
0
ns
ISI2
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC hold time
4.56
ns
ISI3
PIXCLK frequency
Table 39-35.
Symbol
64.4
MHz
Max
Unit
ISI Timings with Peripheral Supply 2.5V
Parameter
Min
ISI1
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC setup time
0
ns
ISI2
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC hold time
4.14
ns
ISI3
PIXCLK frequency
Table 39-36.
Symbol
69.8
MHz
Max
Unit
ISI Timings with Peripheral Supply 3.3V
Parameter
Min
ISI1
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC setup time
0
ns
ISI2
DATA/VSYNC/HSYNC hold time
3.96
ns
ISI3
PIXCLK frequency
74.8
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
MHz
781
39.11.3 MCI
The PDC interface block controls all data routing between the external data bus, internal MMC/SD module data
bus, and internal system FIFO access through a dedicated state machine that monitors the status of FIFO content
(empty or full), FIFO address, and byte/block counters for the MMC/SD module (inner system) and the application
(user programming).
These timings are given for a 25 pF load, corresponding to one MMC/SD Card.
Figure 39-15. MCI Timing Diagram
1
3a
2
4b
3b
Bus Clock
4a
5a
CMD_DAT Input
5b
Valid Data
Valid Data
7
CMD_DAT Output
Valid Data
6a
Table 39-37.
Symbol
782
Valid Data
6b
MCI Timings
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
1
CLK frequency at Data transfer Mode (PP)
58
MHz
2
CLK frequency at Identification Mode
400
kHz
3a
Clock high time
9
ns
3b
Clock low time
9
ns
4a
Clock fall time
5
ns
4b
Clock rise time
7
ns
5a
Input hold time
1.5
ns
5b
Input setup time
0
ns
6a
Output hold time
0.3
ns
6b
Output setup time
0
ns
7
Output delay time
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
9
ns
39.11.4 UDP
Figure 39-16. USB Data Signal Timing Diagram
Rise Time
Fall Time
90%
VCRS
10%
Differential
Data Lines
10%
tr
tf
REXT = 27 ohms
fosc = 6 MHz/750 kHz
Buffer
Table 39-38.
Symbol
USB Data Signal Rise and Fall Time Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
tr
Transition Rise Time
CLOAD = 50 pF
tf
Transition Fall Time
CLOAD = 50 pF
trfm
CLOAD
Rise/Fall time Matching
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
4
20
ns
4
20
ns
90
111.11
%
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
783
40.
SAM9260 Mechanical Characteristics
40.1
Package Drawings
Figure 40-1.
217-ball LFBGA: Ball A1 Position
One or two ink (or laser) dots may be present on top of the package.
Optional. Atmel internal use Only.
Figure 40-2.
217-ball LFBGA Package Drawing
CONTROL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
784
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 40-1.
Soldering Information
Ball Land
0.43 mm +/- 0.05
Soldering Mask (Substrate Level) Opening
0.30 mm +/- 0.05
Table 40-2.
Device and 217-ball LFBGA Package Maximum Weight
450
Table 40-3.
mg
217-ball LFBGA Package Characteristics
Moisture Sensitivity Level
Table 40-4.
3
Package Reference
JEDEC Drawing Reference
MO-205
JESD97 Classification
e1
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
785
Figure 40-3.
208-lead PQFP: Pin 1 Position
One or two ink (or laser) dots may be present on top of the package.
Optional. Atmel internal use Only.
Figure 40-4.
208-lead PQFP Package Drawing
CONTROL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
786
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 40-5.
Device and 208-lead PQFP Package Maximum Weight
5.5
g
Table 40-6.
208-lead PQFP Package Characteristics
Moisture Sensitivity Level
Table 40-7.
40.2
3
Package Reference
JEDEC Drawing Reference
MS-022
JESD97 Classification
e3
Soldering Profile
Table 40-8 gives the recommended soldering profile from J-STD-20.
Table 40-8.
Soldering Profile
Profile Feature
PQFP208 Green Package
LGBGA217 Green Package
Average Ramp-up Rate (217°C to Peak)
3°C/sec. max.
3°C/sec. max.
Preheat Temperature 175°C ±25°C
180 sec. max.
180 sec. max.
Temperature Maintained Above 217°C
60 sec. to 150 sec.
60 sec. to 150 sec.
Time within 5°C of Actual Peak Temperature
20 sec. to 40 sec.
20 sec. to 40 sec.
Peak Temperature Range
260 +0 °C
260 +0 °C
Ramp-down Rate
6°C/sec. max.
6°C/sec. max.
Time 25°C to Peak Temperature
8 min. max.
8 min. max.
Note:
It is recommended to apply a soldering temperature higher than 250°C.
A maximum of three reflow passes is allowed per component.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
787
41.
Marking
All devices are marked with the Atmel logo and the ordering code.
Additional marking has the following format:
YYWW
V
XXXXXXXXX
ARM
where
788
“YY”: manufactory year
“WW”: manufactory week
“V”: revision
“XXXXXXXXX”: lot number
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
42.
SAM9260 Ordering Information
Table 42-1.
SAM9260 Ordering Information
Ordering Code
Operating Temperature
Range
MRL
Package
Carrier Type
AT91SAM9260B-QU
B
PQFP208
Tray
Industrial
-40°C to 85°C
AT91SAM9260B-CU
B
LFBGA217
Tray
Industrial
-40°C to 85°C
AT91SAM9260B-CU-999
B
LFBGA217
Tape & Reel
Industrial
-40°C to 85°C
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
789
43.
SAM9260 Errata
43.1
SAM9260 Errata - Revision “A” Parts
43.1.1 Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC)
43.1.1.1 ADC: DRDY Bit Cleared
The DRDY Flag should be clear only after a read of ADC_LCDR (Last Converted Data Register). A read of any
ADC_CDRx (Channel Data Register) automatically clears the DRDY flag.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.1.2 ADC: DRDY not Cleared on Disable
When reading LCDR at the same instant as an end of conversion, with DRDY already active, DRDY is kept active
regardless of the enable status of the current channel. This sets DRDY, whereas new data is not stored.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.1.3 ADC: DRDY Possibly Skipped due to CDR Read
Reading CDR for channel “y” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x” with EOC[x] already
active, leads to skipping to set the DRDY flag if channel “x” is enabled.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Use of DRDY functionality with access to CDR registers should be avoided.
43.1.1.4 ADC: Possible Skip on DRDY when Disabling a Channel
DRDY does not rise when disabling channel “y” at the same time as an end of “x” channel conversion, although
data is stored into CDRx and LCDR.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.1.5 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Updated
Read of the Status Register at the same instant as an end of conversion leads to skipping the update of the
GOVRE (general overrun) flag. GOVRE is neither reset nor set.
For example, if reading the status while an end of conversion is occurring and:
1.
GOVRE is active but DRDY is inactive, does not correspond to a new general overrun condition but the
GOVRE flag is not reset.
2.
GOVRE is inactive but DRDY is active, does correspond to a new general overrun condition but the GOVRE
flag is not set.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
790
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.1.1.6 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Set when Reading CDR
When reading CDRy (Channel Data Register y) at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x” with
the following conditions:
EOC[x] already active,
DRDY already active,
GOVRE inactive,
previous data stored in LCDR being neither data from channel “y”, nor data from channel “x”.
GOVRE should be set but is not.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.1.7 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Set when Disabling a Channel
When disabling channel “y” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x”, EOC[x] and DRDY being
already active, GOVRE does not rise.
Note:
OVRE[x] rises as expected.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.1.8 ADC: OVRE Flag Behavior
When the OVRE flag (on channel i) has been set but the related EOC status (of channel i) has been cleared (by a
read of CDRi or LCDR), reading the Status register at the same instant as an end of conversion (causing the set of
EOC status on channel i), does not lead to a reset of the OVRE flag (on channel i) as expected.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.1.9 ADC: EOC Set Although Channel Disabled
If a channel is disabled while a conversion is running and if a read of CDR is performed at the same time as an end
of conversion of any channel occurs, the EOC of the channel with the conversion running may rise (whereas it has
been disabled).
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not take into account the EOC of a disabled channel
43.1.1.10 ADC: Spurious Clear of EOC Flag
If “x” and “y” are two successively converted channels and “z” is yet another enabled channel (“z” being neither “x”
nor “y”), reading CDR on channel “z” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “y” automatically
clears EOC[x] instead of EOC[z].
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.1.11 ADC: Sleep Mode
If Sleep mode is activated while there is no activity (no conversion is being performed), it will take effect only after
a conversion occurs.
Problem Fix/Workaround
To activate sleep mode as soon as possible, it is recommended to write successively, ADC Mode Register
(SLEEP) then ADC Control Register (START bit field); to start an analog-to-digital conversion, in order put ADC
into sleep mode at the end of this conversion.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
791
43.1.2 Boot ROM
43.1.2.1 NAND Flash Boot Does Not Work Correctly
The SMC_SETUP register for the NAND Flash Chip Select (NCS3) is not initialized correctly in the ROM code.
NRD_SETUP is initialized to “0” which leads to a violation of parameters tAR and tCLR.
The following commands are concerned; READ ID (0x90), READ STATUS (0x70), PAGE READ (0x00, 0x30) and
RANDOM DATA READ (0x05, 0xE0).
Problem Fix/Workaround
Use DataFlash Boot or external memory on EBI_NCS0.
43.1.2.2 Problem with RTT
The Real-time Timer is reset by the BootROM after each power up. This prevents using the RTT as a backed up
real-time clock.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Boot on an external memory connected on CS0 (BMS = 0).
43.1.2.3 User Reset trigger is enabled by default
The boot ROM program configures the NRST pin as an input, and programs the User Reset length. As RSTC
registers are powered by VDDBU, the settings are saved and overwrite the user configuration.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Writing the URSTEN bit to 0 in RSTC_MR disables the User Reset trigger.
43.1.3 Bus Matrix
43.1.3.1 Bus Matrix Master Configuration Register 5
MATRIX_MCFG5 is write-only. The value written is effective but not readable.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.4 EMAC
43.1.4.1 EMAC: TX Underrun May Occur in Some Cases
EMACB FIFO internal arbitration scheme is:
1.
Receive buffer manager write
2.
Receive buffer manager read
3.
Transmit data DMA read
4.
Receive data DMA write
5.
Transmit buffer manager read
6.
Transmit buffer manager write
EMACB master interface releases the AHB bus between two transfers.
EMACB has the highest priority.
If EMACB RX and TX FIFOs both have pending requests, the following sequence occurs:
792
1.
EMACB RX FIFO write (burst 4)
2.
EMACB releases the AHB bus
3.
The AHB matrix can grant an another master (ARM I or D for example)
4.
AHB matrix re-arbitration (finishes at least the current word/halfword/byte)
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
5.
The AHB matrix grants the EMACB
6.
The EMACB TX FIFO read (burst 4)
In case of a slow memory and/or a special operation like SDRAM refresh or SDRAM bank opening, a TX underrun
may occur. (latency min 960 ns).
Problem Fix/Workaround
Reduce re-arbitration time between RX & TX EMACB transfers by using internal SRAM (or another memory slave
with a short access time) to transmit buffers and descriptors.
43.1.5 I/O Considerations
43.1.5.1 I/O High Drive Strength
The I/O output buffer drive is too high to guarantee the timings. This is applicable to the External Bus Interface
signals and to the peripheral I/Os.
This leads to fast rise and fall time when the signals change, causing high currents to be drawn on the power
supply pins and leads to emission of high frequencies. This may affect the operation of the device and may result
in the emission of radio-frequency signals, making EMC certification difficult.
Problem Fix/Workaround
It is strongly recommended:
to place the memories connected to the EBI as close as possible to the SAM9260 on the PCB
to route all the EBI signals with a series resistor, typical value 33 ohms
to adjust the series resistor value with tools taking into account the IBIS model of the pads and the
characteristics of the wires of the PCB, in order to guarantee rise and fall times as long as timings permit.
43.1.6 MCI
43.1.6.1 MCI: Busy Signal of R1b Responses is Not Taken in Account
The busy status of the card during the response (R1b) is ignored for the commands CMD7, CMD28, CMD29,
CMD38, CMD42, CMD56. Additionally, for commands CMD42 and CMD56 a conflict can occur on data line0 if the
MCI sends data to the card while the card is still busy. The behavior is correct for CMD12 command
(STOP_TRANSFER).
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.6.2 MCI: SDIO Interrupt Does Not Work With Slots Other Than A
If there is 1-bit data bus width on slots other than slot A, the SDIO interrupt cannot be captured. The sample is
made on the wrong data line.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.6.3 MCI: Data Timeout Error Flag
As the data Timeout error flag checking the Naac timing cannot rise, the MCI can be stalled waiting indefinitely the
Data start bit.
Problem Fix/Workaround
A STOP command must be sent with a software timeout.
43.1.6.4 MCI: Data Write Operation and Number of Bytes
The Data Write operation with a number of bytes less than 12 is impossible.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
793
Problem Fix/Workaround
The PDC counters must always be equal to 12 bytes for data transfers lower than 12 bytes. The BLKLEN or BCNT
field are used to specify the real count number.
43.1.6.5 MCI: Flag Reset is Not Correct in Half Duplex Mode
In half duplex mode, the reset of the flags ENDRX, RXBUFF, ENDTX and TXBUFE can be incorrect.
These flags are reset correctly after a PDC channel enable.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Enable the interrupts related to ENDRX, ENDTX, RXBUFF and TXBUFE only after enabling the PDC channel by
writing PDC_TXTEN or PDC_RXTEN.
43.1.7 Reset Controller (RSTC)
43.1.7.1 RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses
When a user reset, watchdog reset, or software reset occurs during SDRAM read access, the SDRAM clock is
turned off while data is ready to be read on the data bus. The SDRAM maintains the data until the clock restarts.
If the user reset, watchdog reset, or software reset is programmed to assert a general reset, the data maintained
by the SDRAM leads to a data bus conflict and adversely affects the boot memories connected on the EBI:
NAND Flash boot functionality, if the system boots out of internal ROM.
NOR Flash boot, if the system boots on an external memory connected on the EBI CS0.
Problem Fix/Workaround
1.
Avoid user reset, watchdog reset, software reset to generate a system reset.
2.
Trap the user reset, watchdog reset, software reset with an interrupt.
In the interrupt routine, power down the SDRAM properly and perform Peripheral and Processor Reset with
software in assembler.
Example with libV3.
The main code:
//user reset interrupt setting
// Configure AIC controller to handle System peripheral interrupts
AT91F_AIC_ConfigureIt (
AT91C_BASE_AIC,
// AIC base address
AT91C_ID_SYS,
// System peripheral ID
AT91C_AIC_PRIOR_HIGHEST,
// Max priority
AT91C_AIC_SRCTYPE_INT_EDGE_TRIGGERED, // Level sensitive
sysc_handler );
// Enable SYSC interrupt in AIC
AT91F_AIC_EnableIt(AT91C_BASE_AIC, AT91C_ID_SYS);
*AT91C_RSTC_RMR = (0xA5<<24) | (0x4<<8) | AT91C_RSTC_URSTIEN;
The C SYS handler:
extern void soft_user_reset(void);
void sysc_handler(void){
//check if interrupt comes from RSTC
if( (*AT91C_RSTC_RSR & AT91C_RSTC_URSTS ) == AT91C_RSTC_URSTS){
soft_user_reset();
//never reached
794
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
while(1);
}
}
Assembly code is mandatory for the following sequence as ARM instructions need to be pipelined. The
assembler routine:
AREA
TEST, CODE
INCLUDE
AT91SAM9xxx.inc
EXPORT soft_user_reset
soft_user_reset
;disable IRQs
MRS r0, CPSR
ORR r0, r0, #0x80
MSR CPSR_c, r0
;change refresh rate to block all data accesses
LDR r0, =AT91C_SDRAMC_TR
LDR r1, =1
STR r1, [r0]
;prepare power down command
LDR r0, =AT91C_SDRAMC_LPR
LDR r1, =2
;prepare proc_reset and periph_reset
LDR r2, =AT91C_RSTC_RCR
LDR r3, =0xA5000005
;perform power down command
STR r1, [r0]
;perform proc_reset and periph_reset (in the ARM pipeline)
STR r3, [r2]
END
43.1.8 Oscillators
43.1.8.1 On-chip RC Startup Time
When booting from the on-chip RC, the startup time is fixed at 1200 ms and not 240 µs as specified in Table 5-1 on
page 18.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.1.8.2 Bad Sampling of OSCSEL
When VDDBU only is powered, either internal RC oscillator or external 32K osc may start regardless of the setting
of the OSCSEL pin. The OSCSEL pin sampling is correct after applying VDDCORE power supply and remains
correct if VDDCORE is removed.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The first power-up sequence requires both VDDBU and VDDCORE to correctly sample the OSCSEL signal.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
795
43.1.9 SDRAM Controller
43.1.9.1 SDCLK Clock Active After Reset
After a reset, the SDRAM clock is always active leading to over consumption in the pad.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The following sequence stops the SDRAM clock.
1.
Set the bit LPCB in the SDRAMC Low Power Register.
2.
Write 0 in the SDRAMC Mode Register and perform a dummy write in SDRAM to complete.
43.1.9.2 Mobile SDRAM Device Initialization Constraint
Using Mobile SDRAM devices that need to have their DQMx level HIGH during Mobile SDRAM device initialization
may lead to data bus contention and thus external memories on the same EBI must not be accessed.
This does not apply to Mobile SDRAM devices whose DQMx level is “Don’t care” during this phase.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Mobile SDRAM initialization must be performed in internal SRAM.
43.1.9.3 JEDEC Standard Compatibility
In the current revision, SDCKE rises at the same time as SDCK while exiting self-refresh mode. To be fully
compliant with the JEDEC standard, SDCK must be STABLE before the rising edge of SDCKE.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.10 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
43.1.10.1 SPI: Bad Serial Clock Generation on Second chip_select when SCBR = 1, CPOL = 1 and NCPHA = 0
If the SPI is used in the following configuration:
Master mode
CPOL = 1 and NCPHA = 0
multiple chip selects used with one transfer with Baud rate (SCBR) equal to 1 (i.e., when serial clock
frequency equals the system clock frequency) and the other transfers set with SCBR not equal to 1
transmit with the slowest chip select and then with the fastest one
then an additional pulse will be generated on output PSCK during the second transfer.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use a multiple Chip Select configuration where at least one SPI_CSRx register is configured with SCBR = 1
and the others differ from 1 if CPHA = 0 and CPOL = 1.
If all chip selects are configured with SCBR = 1, the issue does not appear.
43.1.10.2 SPI: Baud Rate Set to 1
When baud rate is set to 1 (i.e., when serial clock frequency equals the system clock frequency), and when the
fields BITS (number of bits to be transmitted) equals an ODD value (in this case 9, 11, 13 or 15), an additional
pulse is generated on output SPCK. No error occurs if BITS field equals 8, 10, 12, 14 or 16 and SCBR = 1.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
796
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.1.10.3 SPI: PDC Data Loss
One byte data can be lost when PDC transmits. This occurs when write accesses are performed on the base
address of any peripheral, during the PDC transfer.
Problem Fix/Workaround:
Add a timeout for the PDC transfer and check the value of the PDC transmit counter when the timeout has
elapsed.
Check the data integrity by a checksum.
Avoid write access on the base address of peripherals during a PDC transfer.
43.1.10.4 SPI: Software Reset Needs to be Written Twice
If a software reset (SWRST in the SPI Control Register) is performed, the SPI may not work properly (the clock is
enabled before the chip select).
Problem Fix/Workaround
The SPI Control Register field SWRST needs to be written twice to be correctly set.
43.1.11 Serial Synchronous Controller (SSC)
43.1.11.1 SSC: Unexpected RK Clock Cycle when RK Outputs a Clock During Data Transfer
When the SSC receiver is used in the following configuration:
the internal clock divider is used (CKS = 0 and DIV different from 0),
RK pin set as output and provides the clock during data transfer (CKO = 2)
data sampled on RK falling edge (CKI = 0)
then, at the end of the data, the RK pin is set in high impedance which may be interpreted as an unexpected clock
cycle.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Enable the pull-up on RK pin.
43.1.11.2 SSC: Incorrect first RK Clock Cycle when RK Outputs a Clock During Data Transfer
When the SSC receiver is used in the following configuration:
RX clock is divided clock (CKS = 0 and DIV different from 0)
RK pin set as output and provides the clock during data transfer (CKO = 2)
data sampled on RK falling edge (CKI = 0)
then the first clock cycle time generated by the RK pin is equal to MCK/(2 × (DIV + 1)) instead of MCK/(2 × DIV).
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.11.3 SSC: Transmitter Limitations in Slave Mode
If TK is programmed as output and TF is programmed as input, it is impossible to emit data when start of edge
(rising or falling) of synchro has a Start Delay equal to zero.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.11.4 SSC: Periodic Transmission Limitations in Master Mode
If Least Significant Bit is sent first (MSBF = 0) the first TAG during the frame synchro is not sent.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
797
43.1.12 Static Memory Controller (SMC)
43.1.12.1 SMC: Chip Select Parameters Modification
The user must not change the configuration parameters of an SMC Chip Select (Setup, Pulse, Cycle, Mode) if
accesses are performed on this CS during the modification.
For example, the modification of the Chip Select 0 (CS0) parameters, while fetching the code from a memory
connected on this CS0, may lead to unpredictable behavior.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The code used to modify the parameters of an SMC Chip Select can be executed from the internal RAM or from a
memory connected to another Chip Select.
43.1.13 Shutdown Controller (SHDWC)
43.1.13.1 SHDWC: SHDN Signal may be Driven to Low Level Voltage During Device Power-on
If only VDDBU is powered during boot sequence (No VDDCORE), the SHDN signal may be driven to low level
voltage after a delay. This delay is linked to the startup time of the slow clock selected by OSCSEL signal.
If SHDN pin is connected to the Enable pin (EN) of the VDDCORE regulator, VDDCORE establishment does not
occur and the system does not start.
Problem Fix/Workaround
1.
VDDCORE must be established within the delay corresponding to the startup time of the slow clock selected
by OSCSEL.
2.
Add a glue logic to latch the rising edge of the SHDN signal. The reset of the latch output (EN_REG) can be
connected to a PIO and used to enter the shutdown mode.
43.1.14 System Controller
43.1.14.1 Possible Event Loss when Reading RTT_SR
If an event (RTTINC or ALMS) occurs within the same slow clock cycle as when the RTT_SR is read, the
corresponding bit might be cleared. This can lead to the loss of this event.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The software must handle an RTT event as an interrupt and should not poll RTT_SR.
43.1.15 Two-wire Interface (TWI)
43.1.15.1 TWI: Switch from Slave to Master Mode
At the end of transfer in slave mode, the slave mode is disabled, the master mode is enabled and thus a transfer in
master mode can be performed. In the current device, the start event is correctly generated but the SCL line is
stuck at 1, so no transfer is possible.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Two workarounds are possible:
1.
Perform a software reset before going to master mode (TWI must be reconfigured).
or
2.
798
Perform a slave read access before switching to master mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.1.16 UHP
43.1.16.1 UHP: Non-ISO IN Transfers
Conditions:
Consider the following sequence:
1.
The Host controller issues an IN token.
2.
The Device provides the IN data in a short packet.
3.
The Host controller writes the received data to the system memory.
4.
The Host controller is now supposed to carry out two Write transactions (TD status write and TD retirement
write) to the system memory in order to complete the status update.
5.
The Host controller raises the request for the first write transaction. By the time the transaction is completed,
a frame boundary is crossed.
6.
After completing the first write transaction, the Host controller skips the second write transaction.
Consequence: When this error occurs, the Host controller tries the same IN token again.
Problem Fix/Workaround
This problem can be avoided if the system guarantees that the status update can be completed within the same
frame.
43.1.16.2 UHP: ISO OUT Transfers
Conditions:
Consider the following sequence:
1.
The Host controller sends an ISO OUT token after fetching 16 bytes of data from the system memory.
2.
When the Host controller is sending the ISO OUT data, because of system latencies, remaining bytes of the
packet are not available. This results in a buffer underrun condition.
3.
While there is an underrun condition, if the Host controller is in the process of bit-stuffing, it causes the Host
controller to hang.
Consequence: After the failure condition, the Host controller stops sending the SOF. This causes the connected
device to go into suspend state.
Problem Fix/Workaround
This problem can be avoided if the system can guarantee that no buffer underrun occurs during the transfer.
43.1.16.3 UHP: Remote Wakeup Event
Conditions:
When a Remote Wakeup event occurs on a downstream port, the OHCI Host controller begins sending resume
signaling to the device. The Host controller is supposed to send this resume signaling for 20 ms. However, if the
driver sets the HcControl.HCFS into USBOPERATIONAL state during the resume event, then the Host controller
terminates sending the resume signal with an EOP to the device.
Consequence: If the Device does not recognize the resume (< 20 ms) event, then the Device remains in suspend
state.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Host stack can do a port resume after it sets the HcControl.HCFS to USBOPERATIONAL.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
799
43.1.17 USART
43.1.17.1 USART: TXD Signal is Floating in Modem and Hardware Handshaking Mode.
TXD signal should be pulled up in Modem and Hardware Handshaking mode.
Problem Fix/Workaround
TXD is multiplexed with PIO which integrates a pull up resistor. This internal pull-up must be enabled.
43.1.17.2 USART: DCD is Active High Instead of Low
The DCD signal is active at High level in the USART Modem Mode.
DCD should be active at Low level.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Add an inverter.
43.1.17.3 USART: RXBRK Flag Error in Asynchronous Mode
In receiver mode, when two characters are consecutive (without timeguard in between) the RXBRK is not taken
into account. As a result the RXBRK flag is not enabled correctly and the frame error flag is set.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Constraints on the transmitter device connected to the SAM9260 USART receiver side.
The transmitter may use the timeguard feature or send 2 STOP conditions. Only one STOP condition is taken into
account by the receiver state machine. After this STOP condition, as there is no valid data the receiver state
machine will go into idle mode and enable the RXBRK condition.
43.1.17.4 USART: CTS Signal in Hardware Handshake
When Hardware Handshaking is used and if CTS goes low near the end of the starting bit of the transmitter, a
character is lost.
Problem Fix/Workaround
CTS must not go low during a time slot comprised between 2 Master Clock periods before the rising edge of the
starting bit and 16 Master Clock periods after the rising edge of the starting bit.
43.1.17.5 USART: RTS Not Expected Behavior
1.
Setting the receiver to hardware handshaking mode drops RTS line to low level even if the receiver is still
turned off. USART needs to be completely configured and started before setting the receiver to hardware
handshaking mode.
2.
Disabling the receiver during a PDC transfer while RXBUFF flag is '0' has no effect on RTS. The only way to
get the RTS line to rise to high level is to reset both PDMA buffers by writing the value '0' in both counter
registers.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.1.17.6 USART: Two Characters Sent if CTS Rises During Emission
If CTS rises to 1 during a character transmit, the Transmit Holding Register is also transmitted if not empty.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
800
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.1.18 Power Management Controller (PMC)
43.1.18.1 PMC: PMC bad frequency after MDIV switching
If MDIV and another field (CSS or PRES) are changed at the same, clock frequency may not be correct.
Problem Fix/Workaround
For each clock switching user must take care to:
change fields CSS, MDIV, PRES one by one
wait MCKRDY bit setting in PMC_SR before changing PMC_MCKR
ensure each transitory frequency value is in operational range for PCK and MCK
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
801
43.2
SAM9260 Errata - Revision “B” Parts
Refer to Section 43.1 “SAM9260 Errata - Revision “A” Parts” on page 790.
43.2.1 Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC)
43.2.1.1 ADC: DRDY Bit Cleared
The DRDY Flag should be clear only after a read of ADC_LCDR (Last Converted Data Register). A read of any
ADC_CDRx (Channel Data Register) automatically clears the DRDY flag.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.1.2 ADC: DRDY not Cleared on Disable
When reading LCDR at the same instant as an end of conversion, with DRDY already active, DRDY is kept active
regardless of the enable status of the current channel. This sets DRDY, whereas new data is not stored.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.1.3 ADC: DRDY Possibly Skipped due to CDR Read
Reading CDR for channel “y” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x” with EOC[x] already
active, leads to skipping to set the DRDY flag if channel “x” is enabled.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Use of DRDY functionality with access to CDR registers should be avoided.
43.2.1.4 ADC: Possible Skip on DRDY when Disabling a Channel
DRDY does not rise when disabling channel “y” at the same time as an end of “x” channel conversion, although
data is stored into CDRx and LCDR.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.2.1.5 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Updated
Read of the Status Register at the same instant as an end of conversion leads to skipping the update of the
GOVRE (general overrun) flag. GOVRE is neither reset nor set.
For example, if reading the status while an end of conversion is occurring and:
1.
GOVRE is active but DRDY is inactive, does not correspond to a new general overrun condition but the
GOVRE flag is not reset.
2.
GOVRE is inactive but DRDY is active, does correspond to a new general overrun condition but the GOVRE
flag is not set.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.1.6 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Set when Reading CDR
When reading CDRy (Channel Data Register y) at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x” with
the following conditions:
802
EOC[x] already active,
DRDY already active,
GOVRE inactive,
previous data stored in LCDR being neither data from channel “y”, nor data from channel “x”.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
GOVRE should be set but is not.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.1.7 ADC: GOVRE Bit is Not Set when Disabling a Channel
When disabling channel “y” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “x”, EOC[x] and DRDY being
already active, GOVRE does not rise.
Note:
OVRE[x] rises as expected.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.1.8 ADC: OVRE Flag Behavior
When the OVRE flag (on channel i) has been set but the related EOC status (of channel i) has been cleared (by a
read of CDRi or LCDR), reading the Status register at the same instant as an end of conversion (causing the set of
EOC status on channel i), does not lead to a reset of the OVRE flag (on channel i) as expected.
Problem Fix/Workaround:
None
43.2.1.9 ADC: EOC Set Although Channel Disabled
If a channel is disabled while a conversion is running and if a read of CDR is performed at the same time as an end
of conversion of any channel occurs, the EOC of the channel with the conversion running may rise (whereas it has
been disabled).
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not take into account the EOC of a disabled channel
43.2.1.10 ADC: Spurious Clear of EOC Flag
If “x” and “y” are two successively converted channels and “z” is yet another enabled channel (“z” being neither “x”
nor “y”), reading CDR on channel “z” at the same instant as an end of conversion on channel “y” automatically
clears EOC[x] instead of EOC[z].
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.2.1.11 ADC: Sleep Mode
If Sleep mode is activated while there is no activity (no conversion is being performed), it will take effect only after
a conversion occurs.
Problem Fix/Workaround
To activate sleep mode as soon as possible, it is recommended to write successively, ADC Mode Register
(SLEEP) then ADC Control Register (START bit field); to start an analog-to-digital conversion, in order put ADC
into sleep mode at the end of this conversion.
43.2.2 Bus Matrix
43.2.2.1 Bus Matrix Master Configuration Register 5
MATRIX_MCFG5 is write-only. The value written is effective but not readable.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
803
43.2.3 EMAC
43.2.3.1 EMAC: TX Underrun May Occur in Some Cases
EMACB FIFO internal arbitration scheme is:
1.
Receive buffer manager write
2.
Receive buffer manager read
3.
Transmit data DMA read
4.
Receive data DMA write
5.
Transmit buffer manager read
6.
Transmit buffer manager write
EMACB master interface releases the AHB bus between two transfers.
EMACB has the highest priority.
If EMACB RX and TX FIFOs both have pending requests, the following sequence occurs:
1.
EMACB RX FIFO write (burst 4)
2.
EMACB releases the AHB bus
3.
The AHB matrix can grant an another master (ARM I or D for example)
4.
AHB matrix re-arbitration (finishes at least the current word/halfword/byte)
5.
The AHB matrix grants the EMACB
6.
The EMACB TX FIFO read (burst 4)
In case of a slow memory and/or a special operation like SDRAM refresh or SDRAM bank opening, a TX underrun
may occur. (latency min 960 ns).
Problem Fix/Workaround
Reduce re-arbitration time between RX & TX EMACB transfers by using internal SRAM (or another memory slave
with a short access time) to transmit buffers and descriptors.
43.2.4 I/O Considerations
43.2.4.1 I/O High Drive Strength
The I/O output buffer drive is too high to guarantee the timings. This is applicable to the External Bus Interface
signals and to the peripheral I/Os.
This leads to fast rise and fall time when the signals change, causing high currents to be drawn on the power
supply pins and leads to emission of high frequencies. This may affect the operation of the device and may result
in the emission of radio-frequency signals, making EMC certification difficult.
Problem Fix/Workaround
It is strongly recommended:
804
to place the memories connected to the EBI as close as possible to the SAM9260 on the PCB
to route all the EBI signals with a series resistor, typical value 33 ohms
to adjust the series resistor value with tools taking into account the IBIS model of the pads and the
characteristics of the wires of the PCB, in order to guarantee rise and fall times as long as timings permit.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.2.5 MCI
43.2.5.1 MCI: Busy Signal of R1b Responses is Not Taken in Account
The busy status of the card during the response (R1b) is ignored for the commands CMD7, CMD28, CMD29,
CMD38, CMD42, CMD56. Additionally, for commands CMD42 and CMD56 a conflict can occur on data line0 if the
MCI sends data to the card while the card is still busy. The behavior is correct for CMD12 command
(STOP_TRANSFER).
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.5.2 MCI: SDIO Interrupt Does Not Work for Slot Different from A
If the data bus width is 1 bit and slots other than slot A chosen, the SDIO interrupt can not be captured. The
sample is made on the bad data line.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None
43.2.5.3 MCI: Data Timeout Error Flag
As the data Timeout error flag checking the Naac timing cannot rise, the MCI can be stalled waiting indefinitely the
Data start bit.
Problem Fix/Workaround
A STOP command must be sent with a software timeout.
43.2.5.4 MCI: Data Write Operation and Number of Bytes
The Data Write operation with a number of bytes less than 12 is impossible.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The PDC counters must always be equal to 12 bytes for data transfers lower than 12 bytes. The BLKLEN or BCNT
field are used to specify the real count number.
43.2.5.5 MCI: Flag Reset is Not Correct in Half Duplex Mode
In half duplex mode, the reset of the flags ENDRX, RXBUFF, ENDTX and TXBUFE can be incorrect.
These flags are reset correctly after a PDC channel enable.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Enable the interrupts related to ENDRX, ENDTX, RXBUFF and TXBUFE only after enabling the PDC channel by
writing PDC_TXTEN or PDC_RXTEN.
43.2.6 SDRAM Controller
43.2.6.1 SDCLK Clock Active After Reset
After a reset, the SDRAM clock is always active leading to over consumption in the pad.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The following sequence stops the SDRAM clock.
1.
Set the bit LPCB in the SDRAMC Low Power Register.
2.
Write 0 in the SDRAMC Mode Register and perform a dummy write in SDRAM to complete.
43.2.6.2 Mobile SDRAM Device Initialization Constraint
Using Mobile SDRAM devices that need to have their DQMx level HIGH during Mobile SDRAM device initialization
may lead to data bus contention and thus external memories on the same EBI must not be accessed.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
805
This does not apply to Mobile SDRAM devices whose DQMx level is “Don’t care” during this phase.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Mobile SDRAM initialization must be performed in internal SRAM.
43.2.7 Reset Controller (RSTC)
43.2.7.1 RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses
When a user reset, watchdog reset, or software reset occurs during SDRAM read access, the SDRAM clock is
turned off while data is ready to be read on the data bus. The SDRAM maintains the data until the clock restarts.
If the user reset, watchdog reset, or software reset is programmed to assert a general reset, the data maintained
by the SDRAM leads to a data bus conflict and adversely affects the boot memories connected on the EBI:
NAND Flash boot functionality, if the system boots out of internal ROM.
NOR Flash boot, if the system boots on an external memory connected on the EBI CS0.
Problem Fix/Workaround
1.
Avoid user reset, watchdog reset, software reset to generate a system reset.
2.
Trap the user reset, watchdog reset, software reset with an interrupt.
In the interrupt routine, power down the SDRAM properly and perform Peripheral and Processor Reset with
software in assembler.
Example with libV3.
The main code:
//user reset interrupt setting
// Configure AIC controller to handle System peripheral interrupts
AT91F_AIC_ConfigureIt (
AT91C_BASE_AIC,
// AIC base address
AT91C_ID_SYS,
// System peripheral ID
AT91C_AIC_PRIOR_HIGHEST,
// Max priority
AT91C_AIC_SRCTYPE_INT_EDGE_TRIGGERED, // Level sensitive
sysc_handler );
// Enable SYSC interrupt in AIC
AT91F_AIC_EnableIt(AT91C_BASE_AIC, AT91C_ID_SYS);
*AT91C_RSTC_RMR = (0xA5<<24) | (0x4<<8) | AT91C_RSTC_URSTIEN;
The C SYS handler:
extern void soft_user_reset(void);
void sysc_handler(void){
//check if interrupt comes from RSTC
if( (*AT91C_RSTC_RSR & AT91C_RSTC_URSTS ) == AT91C_RSTC_URSTS){
soft_user_reset();
//never reached
while(1);
}
}
806
Assembly code is mandatory for the following sequence as ARM instructions need to be pipelined.
The assembler routine:
AREA
TEST, CODE
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
INCLUDE
AT91SAM9xxx.inc
EXPORT soft_user_reset
soft_user_reset
;disable IRQs
MRS r0, CPSR
ORR r0, r0, #0x80
MSR CPSR_c, r0
;change refresh rate to block all data accesses
LDR r0, =AT91C_SDRAMC_TR
LDR r1, =1
STR r1, [r0]
;prepare power down command
LDR r0, =AT91C_SDRAMC_LPR
LDR r1, =2
;prepare proc_reset and periph_reset
LDR r2, =AT91C_RSTC_RCR
LDR r3, =0xA5000005
;perform power down command
STR r1, [r0]
;perform proc_reset and periph_reset (in the ARM pipeline)
STR r3, [r2]
END
43.2.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
43.2.8.1 SPI: Bad Serial Clock Generation on Second chip_select when SCBR = 1, CPOL = 1 and NCPHA = 0
If the SPI is used in the following configuration:
Master mode
CPOL = 1 and NCPHA = 0
multiple chip selects used with one transfer with baud rate (SCBR) equal to 1 (i.e., when serial clock
frequency equals the system clock frequency) and the other transfers set with SCBR not equal to 1
transmit with the slowest chip select and then with the fastest one
then an additional pulse will be generated on output PSCK during the second transfer.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use a multiple Chip Select configuration where at least one SPI_CSRx register is configured with SCBR = 1
and the others differ from 1 if CPHA = 0 and CPOL = 1.
If all chip selects are configured with SCBR = 1, the issue does not appear.
43.2.8.2 SPI: Baud Rate Set to 1
When baud rate is set to 1 (i.e., when serial clock frequency equals the system clock frequency), and when the
fields BITS (number of bits to be transmitted) equals an ODD value (in this case 9, 11, 13 or 15), an additional
pulse is generated on output SPCK. No error occurs if BITS field equals 8, 10, 12, 14 or 16 and SCBR = 1.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
807
43.2.9 Serial Synchronous Controller (SSC)
43.2.9.1 SSC: Unexpected RK Clock Cycle when RK Outputs a Clock During Data Transfer
When the SSC receiver is used in the following configuration:
the internal clock divider is used (CKS = 0 and DIV different from 0),
RK pin set as output and provides the clock during data transfer (CKO = 2)
data sampled on RK falling edge (CKI = 0)
then, at the end of the data, the RK pin is set in high impedance which may be interpreted as an unexpected clock
cycle.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Enable the pull-up on RK pin.
43.2.9.2 SSC: Incorrect First RK Clock Cycle when RK Outputs a Clock During Data Transfer
When the SSC receiver is used in the following configuration:
RX clock is divided clock (CKS = 0 and DIV different from 0)
RK pin set as output and provides the clock during data transfer (CKO = 2)
data sampled on RK falling edge (CKI = 0)
then the first clock cycle time generated by the RK pin is equal to MCK/(2 × (DIV + 1)) instead of MCK/(2 × DIV).
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.2.9.3 SSC: Transmitter Limitations in Slave Mode
If TK is programmed as output and TF is programmed as input, it is impossible to emit data when start of edge
(rising or falling) of synchro has a Start Delay equal to zero.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.2.9.4 SSC: Periodic Transmission Limitations in Master Mode
If Least Significant Bit is sent first (MSBF = 0) the first TAG during the frame synchro is not sent.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
43.2.10 Shutdown Controller (SHDWC)
43.2.10.1 SHDWC: SHDN Signal may be Driven to Low Level Voltage During Device Power-on
If only VDDBU is powered during boot sequence (No VDDCORE), the SHDN signal may be driven to low level
voltage after a delay. This delay is linked to the startup time of the slow clock selected by OSCSEL signal.
If SHDN pin is connected to the Enable pin (EN) of the VDDCORE regulator, VDDCORE establishment does not
occur and the system does not start.
Problem Fix/Workaround
808
1.
VDDCORE must be established within the delay corresponding to the startup time of the slow clock selected
by OSCSEL.
2.
Add a glue logic to latch the rising edge of the SHDN signal. The reset of the latch output (EN_REG) can be
connected to a PIO and used to enter the shutdown mode.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.2.11 System Controller
43.2.11.1 Possible Event Loss when Reading RTT_SR
If an event (RTTINC or ALMS) occurs within the same slow clock cycle as when the RTT_SR is read, the
corresponding bit might be cleared. This can lead to the loss of this event.
Problem Fix/Workaround
The software must handle an RTT event as an interrupt and should not poll RTT_SR.
43.2.12 Two-wire Interface (TWI)
43.2.12.1 TWI: Switch from Slave to Master Mode
At the end of transfer in slave mode, the slave mode is disabled, the master mode is enabled and thus a transfer in
master mode can be performed. In the current device, the start event is correctly generated but the SCL line is
stuck at 1, so no transfer is possible.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Two workarounds are possible:
1.
Perform a software reset before going to master mode (TWI must be reconfigured).
or
2.
Perform a slave read access before switching to master mode.
43.2.13 UHP
43.2.13.1 UHP: Non-ISO IN Transfers
Conditions:
Consider the following sequence:
1.
The Host controller issues an IN token.
2.
The Device provides the IN data in a short packet.
3.
The Host controller writes the received data to the system memory.
4.
The Host controller is now supposed to carry out two Write transactions (TD status write and TD retirement
write) to the system memory in order to complete the status update.
5.
The Host controller raises the request for the first write transaction. By the time the transaction is completed,
a frame boundary is crossed.
6.
After completing the first write transaction, the Host controller skips the second write transaction.
Consequence: When this error occurs, the Host controller tries the same IN token again.
Problem Fix/Workaround
This problem can be avoided if the system guarantees that the status update can be completed within the same
frame.
43.2.13.2 UHP: ISO OUT Transfers
Conditions:
Consider the following sequence:
1. The Host controller sends an ISO OUT token after fetching 16 bytes of data from the system memory.
2. When the Host controller is sending the ISO OUT data, because of system latencies, remaining bytes of the
packet are not available. This results in a buffer underrun condition.
3.
While there is an underrun condition, if the Host controller is in the process of bit-stuffing, it causes the Host
controller to hang.
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
809
Consequence: After the failure condition, the Host controller stops sending the SOF. This causes the connected
device to go into suspend state.
Problem Fix/Workaround
This problem can be avoided if the system can guarantee that no buffer underrun occurs during the transfer.
43.2.13.3 UHP: Remote Wakeup Event
Conditions:
When a Remote Wakeup event occurs on a downstream port, the OHCI Host controller begins sending resume
signaling to the device. The Host controller is supposed to send this resume signaling for 20 ms. However, if the
driver sets the HcControl.HCFS into USBOPERATIONAL state during the resume event, then the Host controller
terminates sending the resume signal with an EOP to the device.
Consequence: If the Device does not recognize the resume (< 20 ms) event, then the Device remains in suspend
state.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Host stack can do a port resume after it sets the HcControl.HCFS to USBOPERATIONAL.
43.2.14 USART
43.2.14.1 USART: TXD Signal is floating in Modem and Hardware Handshaking Mode.
TXD signal should be pulled up in Modem and Hardware Handshaking mode.
Problem Fix/Workaround
TXD is multiplexed with PIO which integrates a pull up resistor. This internal pull-up must be enabled.
43.2.14.2 USART: DCD is Active High instead of Low
The DCD signal is active at High level in the USART Modem Mode.
DCD should be active at Low level.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Add an inverter.
43.2.14.3 USART: RXBRK Flag Error in Asynchronous Mode
In receiver mode, when two characters are consecutive (without timeguard in between) the RXBRK is not taken
into account. As a result the RXBRK flag is not enabled correctly and the frame error flag is set.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Constraints on the transmitter device connected to the SAM9260 USART receiver side.
The transmitter may use the timeguard feature or send 2 STOP conditions. Only one STOP condition is taken into
account by the receiver state machine. After this STOP condition, as there is no valid data the receiver state
machine will go into idle mode and enable the RXBRK condition.
43.2.14.4 USART: RTS not Expected Behavior
1.
Setting the receiver to hardware handshaking mode drops RTS line to low level even if the receiver is still
turned off. USART needs to be completely configured and started before setting the receiver to hardware
handshaking mode.
2.
Disabling the receiver during a PDC transfer while RXBUFF flag is '0' has no effect on RTS. The only way to
get the RTS line to rise to high level is to reset both PDMA buffers by writing the value '0' in both counter
registers.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
810
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
43.2.15 Power Management Controller (PMC)
43.2.15.1 PMC: PMC bad frequency after MDIV switching
If MDIV and another field (CSS or PRES) are changed at the same, clock frequency may not be correct.
Problem Fix/Workaround
For each clock switching user must take care to:
change fields CSS, MDIV, PRES one by one
wait MCKRDY bit setting in PMC_SR before changing PMC_MCKR
ensure each transitory frequency value is in operational range for PCK and MCK
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
811
44.
Revision History
The most recent version appears first in the tables that follow.
Table 44-1.
Date
Revision History - SAM9620 Datasheet Revision 6221M
Comments
General formatting and editorial changes throughout
“Features”
Updated package descriptions
Section 1. “SAM9260 Block Diagram”
Figure 1-1 ”SAM9260 Block Diagram”: labeled “Backup Section”; updated oscillator naming
Section 4. “Power Considerations”
Added Section 4.2 “Power Sequence Requirements” (transferred from Section 39.4 “Core Power Supply POR
Characteristics”)
Section 6. “Memories”
Figure 6-1 ”SAM9260 Memory Mapping”: two blocks “MATRIX” and “CCFG” replaced with single “MATRIX” block
Section 6.1.1 “Boot Strategies”: in second paragraph, added “After reset, the ROM is mapped at both addresses
0x0000_0000 and 0x0010_0000.”
Section 7. “System Controller”
Section 7.5 “Backup Section”: deleted bullet “SCKR register”
Section 9. “ARM926EJ-S Processor Overview”
Table 9-1 “ARM9TDMI™ Modes and Registers Layout” renamed to ”ARM9EJ-S Modes and Registers Layout”
Section 11. “SAM9260 Boot Program”
Updated Section 11.4 “DataFlash Boot”
13-Jan-16
Section 17. “SAM9260 Bus Matrix”
Removed reset value from Section 17.6.4 “Bus Matrix Master Remap Control Register” (reset value is provided in
Table 17-4 “Register Mapping”)
Removed reset value from Section 17.7.1 “EBI Chip Select Assignment Register” (reset value is provided in Table 175 “Register Mapping (Chip Configuration User Interface)”)
Section 18. “SAM9260 External Bus Interface”
Table 18-3 EBI Pins and External Static Devices Connections: merged two rows ‘A2–A22’ and ‘A23–A25’ into single
row ‘A2–A25’
Section 18.6.6.2 “CFCE1 and CFCE2 Signals”: “The Chip Select Register (DBW field in the corresponding Chip
Select Register) of the NCS4” corrected to “The DBW field in the SMC Mode Register corresponding to the NCS4”
Section 19. “Static Memory Controller (SMC)”
Updated Section 19.8.1.3 “Read Cycle” and Section 19.8.3.3 “Write Cycle”
Section 19.13.2 “Byte Access Type in Page Mode”: “SMC_REGISTER” corrected to “SMC Mode Register”
Section 20. “SDRAM Controller (SDRAMC)”
Table 20-8 “Register Mapping”: access “Read” corrected to “Read/Write” for SDRAMC_MDR
Removed reset value from Section 20.6.1 “SDRAMC Mode Register”, Section 20.6.2 “SDRAMC Refresh Timer
Register”, Section 20.6.3 “SDRAMC Configuration Register”, and Section 20.6.4 “SDRAMC Low Power Register”
(reset values are provided in Table 20-8 “Register Mapping”)
Section 21. “Error Correction Code Controller (ECC)”
Table 21-1 “Register Mapping”: removed reset value from ECC_CR (register is write-only)
812
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Table 44-1.
Date
Revision History - SAM9620 Datasheet Revision 6221M (Continued)
Comments
Section 22. “Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)”
Table 22-1 “Register Mapping”: removed reset value from PERIPH_PTCR (register is write-only)
Section 24. “Power Management Controller (PMC)”
Table 24-3 “Register Mapping”: access for PMC_PLLICPR changed from “Write-only” to “Read/Write”
Section 24.9.17 “PLL Charge Pump Current Register”: access changed from “Write-only” to “Read/Write”
Section 25. “Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)”
Removed reset value from register description sections (reset values are provided in Table 25-2 “Register Mapping”)
Section 29. “Two-wire Interface (TWI)”
Table 29-4 “Register Mapping”: removed reset value from TW_THR (register is write-only)
Removed reset value from register description sections (reset values are provided in Table 29-4 “Register Mapping”)
Section 29.8.11 “TWI Transmit Holding Register”: access “Read-write” corrected to “Write-only”
Section 30. “Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART)”
Table 30-5 “Possible Values for the Fi/Di Ratio”: in top row, replaced “774” with “744”
Table 30-10 “IrDA Baud Rate Error”: in header row, added “bit/s” to Baud Rate and added “µs” to Pulse Time
Table 30-12 “Register Mapping”: added reset value 0x0 to US_MR, US_CSR, US_NER
Removed reset value from Section 30.8.12 “USART FI DI RATIO Register” (reset values are provided in Table 30-12
“Register Mapping”)
Section 31. “Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC)”
Section 31.7.1.1 “Clock Divider”: deleted irrelevant and untitled Table 31-2 from end of section
13-Jan-16
Section 32. “Timer Counter (TC)”
Updated Table 32-2 “Channel Signal Description”
Section 33. “MultiMedia Card Interface (MCI)”
Section 33.1 “Description”: “MultiMedia Card (MMC) Specification V3.11” updated to “MultiMedia Card (MMC)
Specification V3.31”
Updated Section 33.2 “Embedded Characteristics”
Section 33.8.1 “Command - Response Operation”: updated text and Figure 33-9 ”Command/Response Functional
Flow Diagram” with “busy indication” and “NOTBUSY” flag
Section 34. “Ethernet MAC 10/100 (EMAC)”
Section 34.6.2 “Network Configuration Register”: updated EFRHD bit description
Section 37. “Image Sensor Interface (ISI)”
Table 37-9 “Register Mapping”:
- ISI_SR: access “Read” corrected to “Read-only”
- ISI_IER and ISI_IDR: access “Read/Write” corrected to “Write-only”; removed reset value
- ISI_IMR: access “Read/Write” corrected to “Read-only”
Removed reset value from register description sections (reset values are provided in Table 37-9 “Register Mapping”)
Section 37.5.3 “ISI Status Register”: access “Read” corrected to “Read-only”
Section 37.5.4 “Interrupt Enable Register” and Section 37.5.5 “ISI Interrupt Disable Register”: access “Read/Write”
corrected to “Write-only”
Section 37.5.6 “ISI Interrupt Mask Register”: access “Read/Write” corrected to “Read-only”
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
813
Table 44-1.
Date
Revision History - SAM9620 Datasheet Revision 6221M (Continued)
Comments
Section 39. “SAM9260 Electrical Characteristics”
Table 39-1 “Absolute Maximum Ratings*”: removed “Operating Temperature” line
Table 39-2 “DC Characteristics”: updated Output current conditions to specify “VDDIOM in 3.3V range” and “VDDIOM in
1.8V range”
Section 39.4 “Core Power Supply POR Characteristics”: transferred power-up and power-down sequence content to
Section 4.2 “Power Sequence Requirements”
Table 39-15 “PLLA Characteristics(1)” and Table 39-16 “PLLB Characteristics”: updated conditions for parameter
“Output Frequency”
Section 39.11.1.3 “Timing Extraction”: added content relative to MISO and MOSI sampling; inserted Figure 39-9
”MISO Capture in Master Mode”
13-Jan-16
Table 39-33 “SPI Timings”: deleted CLOAD specifications from “Conditions” column
Section 42. “SAM9260 Ordering Information”
Updated Table 42-1 “SAM9260 Ordering Information”
Section 43. “SAM9260 Errata”
Section 43.1.10 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”: two instances of “Baudrate = 1” changed to “SCBR = 1”
Section 43.1.10.1 “SPI: Bad Serial Clock Generation on Second chip_select when SCBR = 1, CPOL = 1 and NCPHA
= 0”: instance of “SCRx” corrected to “SPI_CSRx”
Section 43.2.8 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”: two instances of “Baudrate = 1” changed to “SCBR = 1”
Section 43.2.8.1 “SPI: Bad Serial Clock Generation on Second chip_select when SCBR = 1, CPOL = 1 and NCPHA =
0”: instance of “SCRx” corrected to “SPI_CSRx”
Revision
6221L
Comments
Formatting and minor editorial changes throughout
Section 4. “Power Considerations”
Removed section “Power Consumption” (redundant with Section 39.3 “Power Consumption”)
Updated Section 4.3 “Programmable I/O Lines Power Supplies”
Section 11. “SAM9260 Boot Program”
Updated Section 11.4.3 “DataFlash Boot Sequence”
Section 39. “SAM9260 Electrical Characteristics”
27-Aug-15
Section 39.8 “EBI Timings”:
- inserted heading “EBI Timings Conditions” and updated content
- in first sentence of Section 39.8.3 “SDRAMC Signals”, deleted “and 50 pF on the data bus”
Section 39.11.1.1 “Maximum SPI Frequency”: updated content under heading “Master Read Mode”
Section 42. “SAM9260 Ordering Information”
Table 42-1 “SAM9260 Ordering Information”: “Package Type” column replaced by “Carrier Type”
Section 43. “SAM9260 Errata”
Section 43.1 “SAM9260 Errata - Revision “A” Parts”: added Section 43.1.18 “Power Management Controller (PMC)”
Section 43.2 “SAM9260 Errata - Revision “B” Parts”: added Section 43.2.15 “Power Management Controller (PMC)”
814
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
Revision
6221K
Change
Request
Ref
Comments
”SAM9260 Errata”, removed device marking -- moved to Section 41. “Marking”
Removed 208-pin package and 217-ball package outlines: Formerly, Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2.
Added: Figure 40-1 ”217-ball LFBGA: Ball A1 Position” and Figure 40-3 ”208-lead PQFP: Pin 1 Position”.
8450
Changed document format: pagination has changed.
”SAM9260 Errata”, changes to Section 43.1.7 “Reset Controller (RSTC)”, Section 43.2.7 “Reset
Controller (RSTC)” involves user reset, watchdog reset, user reset.
Revision
6221J
8305
Change
Reques
Ref
Comments
Introduction:
Documument title and name of product updated to conform to AT91SAM Marketing standards:
AT91SAM ARM-based MPU. AT91SAM9260 now referenced in text as SAM9260.
“Features” , removed SDCard from System list, boot possibilities.
7142
BOOT ROM:
Section 11.5 “NAND Flash Boot”, opening paragraph updated.
7643
EMAC:
Section 34.4.1.1 “FIFO”, restored “receive” and “transmit” to first line of text.
6980
“The FIFO depths are 28 bytes for receive and 28 bytes for transmit and...”
SHDWC:
Section 16.7.3 “Shutdown Status Register”, RTTWK occupies bitfield 16.
6583
SMC:
Section 19.8.6 “Reset Values of Timing Parameters”, former Table 20-5. “Reset Values of Timing Parameters” 6742
removed and added cross reference to Table 19-8, “Register Mapping”.
Electrical Characteristics:
Section 39.4.2 “Power-up Sequence”, This section updated, detailing startup with VDDBU powered by battery 7731
and startup sequence without.
Section 39.4.2.1 “VDDBU is Continuously Powered (used with a battery)”
Section 39.4.2.2 “VDDBU is not Continuously Powered (no backup features used)”
Section 39.6.7 “PLL Characteristics”, added T, Startup Time to Table 39-16, “PLLB Characteristics”
6675
Section 39.11.1 “SPI”, added sections giving maximum SPI frequency in master and slave modes as follows:
7173
Section 39.11.1.1 “Maximum SPI Frequency”,
Section “Master Write Mode”,
Section “Master Read Mode”,
Section “Slave Read Mode”,
Section “Slave Write Mode”.
Section 39.11.1 “SPI”, simplified figure titles. The new titles are as follows:
Figure 39-10 ”SPI Master Mode 1 and 2”,
Figure 39-11 ”SPI Master Mode 0 and 3”,
Figure 39-12 ”SPI Slave Mode 0 and 3”,
Figure 39-13 ”SPI Slave Mode 1 and 2”.
6872
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
815
Revision
6221J
Comments (Continued)
Change
Reques
Ref
Errata:
Section 43.1.7.1 “RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses”, updated.
6728
Section 43.2.7.1 “RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses”, updated.
Section 43.1.17.3 “USART: RXBRK Flag Error in Asynchronous Mode”, updated.
6630
Section 43.2.14.3 “USART: RXBRK Flag Error in Asynchronous Mode”, updated.
Revision
6221I
Comments
Change
Request
Ref
Erratum added to rev A as Section 43.1.12 “Static Memory Controller (SMC)” on page 798
5642
Table 40-1, “Soldering Information” on page 785 edited
5744
‘activated’ changed into ‘deactivated’ for Active mode in Table 39-3 on page 762
5801
Erratum added to rev A as Section 44.2.2.3 “User Reset trigger is enabled by default” on page 752
5825
Line added to • “Debug Unit (DBGU)” on page 2, and to 26.1 “Description” on page 312
5846
Note edited after Table 8-1, “SAM9260 Peripheral Identifiers” on page 27
5854
‘Manchester Encoding/Decoding’ removed from Section • “Four Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitters (USART)” on page 2
5933
Rev B Erratum 44.3.7.3 ”SPI: Software Reset Needs to be Written Twice” edited, then moved to Rev A
Section 43.1.10.4 on page 797
5955
Section 5.6 “Shutdown Logic Pins” on page 17 edited
6030
2 FOUT values changed in Table 39-15 on page 767
6049
Erratum added to rev A as Section 43.1.13 “Shutdown Controller (SHDWC)” on page 798, and to rev B as
Section 43.2.10 “Shutdown Controller (SHDWC)” on page 808
6069
Erratum added to rev A as Section 43.1.7.1 “RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses” on page 794, and to
rev B as Section 43.2.7.1 “RSTC: Reset during SDRAM Accesses” on page 806
6083
Vin row added to Table 39-13 on page 766
6162
Text of Section 43.1.6.2 “MCI: SDIO Interrupt Does Not Work With Slots Other Than A” on page 793 slightly
edited
6169
See issue 6030
6185
Section 39.4 “Core Power Supply POR Characteristics” on page 762 added
6188
Various edits to Section 11. “SAM9260 Boot Program”:
- 2 rows added to Table 11-8 on page 78
- Bullet 9 removed from Section 11.3 “Device Initialization” on page 68
- 1 row removed from Table 11-11 on page 79
- Second line and table removed from Section 11.5 “NAND Flash Boot” on page 74
6314
- Timeout removed from Figure 11-1 on page 67
- SAM-BA Boot replaced by SAM-BA Monitor
- Section 11.8 “ROM Code Change Log” on page 79 added
See issue 5801
816
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
6343
Revision
6221I
Comments (Continued)
Change
Request
Ref
‘selectable by software’ removed from Table 39-2 on page 760
6402
VDDPLL value range for tst changed in Table 39-11 on page 765
6425
- Features shortened and reorganized, from new structure in Datasheet AT91SAM9G45
- Section 7.5 “Backup Section” on page 26 added
- Information from sections 7.1 to 7.4 moved to sections 11.2, 19.2, 24.2 and 12.2, with ‘Embedded
Characteristics’ header
RFO
- Information from sections 9.2 to 9.4, 9.6 to 9.8 and 9.10 to 9.11to 7.4 moved to sections 13.2, 18.2, 25.2,
17.2, 16.2, 15.2, 27.2 and 28.2, with ‘Embedded Characteristics’ header
- Information from sections 10.4.1 to 10.4.11 moved to sections 30.2 to 35.2, 38.2, 37.2, 36.2, 39.2 and 4.2,
with ‘Embedded Characteristics’ header
- Sections 41.5.3 and 41.5.4 moved after Section 39.6.4 “Crystal Characteristics” on page 766
Revision
6221H
6221H
Comments
Change
Request
Ref
Section 42. “SAM9260 Ordering Information”, Ordering codes updated for revision B of the device.
5686
Table 8-3, “Multiplexing on PIO Controller B”, PB31 line, removed ISI_MCK.
5330
Table 2-1, “Signal Description List”, Reset/Test, BMS line, added comments.
5422
AT91SAM9260 Boot Program
Figure 11-2 ”Clocks and DBGU Configurations”, flow chart replaced.
5441
Section 17.6 “Bus Matrix User Interface”
5489
Table 17-4, “Register Mapping”; MATRIX_MCFG0 reset is 0x2, MATRIX_MCFG5 is Read-only.
Section 17.6.1 “Bus Matrix Master Configuration Registers”, added note, “MATRIX_MCFG5 is write only....”
Table 16.7, “Shutdown Controller (SHDWC) User Interface” SHDW_MR address is 0x0000_0303
5703
Section 39. “SAM9260 Electrical Characteristics”
Table 39-11, “Main Oscillator Characteristics”, CLEXT typ values updated and typo fixed in Unit column.
5331
Figure 39-10 ”SPI Master Mode 1 and 2”, title fixed.
5261
Figure 39-11 ”SPI Master Mode 0 and 3”, title fixed.
Figure 39-16 ”USB Data Signal Timing Diagram”, REXT = 27 ohms.
Section 43.1 “SAM9260 Errata - Revision “A” Parts”
Section 43.1.3 “Bus Matrix”, added to errata.
rfo
Section 43.1.10.3 “SPI: PDC Data Loss”, added to errata.
5328
Section 43.1.5 “I/O Considerations”, was formerly SMC errata
5548
Section 43.1.5.1 “I/O High Drive Strength”, was formerly listed under SMC errata
Section 43.2 “SAM9260 Errata - Revision “B” Parts”
Section 43.2.2 “Bus Matrix”,
rfo
SAM9260 [DATASHEET]
Atmel-6221M-ATARM-SAM9260-Datasheet_13-Jan-16
817
Revision
6221H
Comments
Change
Request
Ref
Section 43.2.4 “I/O Considerations” was formerly SMC errata.
5548
Section 43.2.4.1 “I/O High Drive Strength”, was formerly listed under SMC errata.
Section 43.2.9 “Serial Synchronous Controller (SSC)”, added to errata
Revision
6221G
5598
Comments
Change
Request
Ref
”SAM9260 Errata”, added ”SAM9260 Errata - Revision “B” Parts”
5084
”Power Considerations”, in Section 4.1 “Power Supplies”, VDDCORE and VDDBU startup voltage
restraints removed.
5229
Section 39.2 “DC Characteristics”, VOL and VOH conditions updated in Table 39-2
5285
UHP, Section 36.3 “Block Diagram”, removed warning on pull-down connection Section 36.6 “Typical
Connection”, figure and text updated to correspond to on-chip connection.
Review
Revision
Comments
Change
Request
Ref.
6221F
Updated all references to 217-ball LFBGA to Green package.
Review
In Section 4.1 “Power Supplies